iR-ADV C3500 III Series Service+Manual en 14.0

Revision 14.
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C3500III Series
Service Manual
Important Notices
Important Notices
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does
not apply to your locality.
Following "Trademarks" and "Copyright" are not applicable if they are not supported by laws and regulations in the country or
region that this document and products are used in.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the
need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
edition of this manual.
Trademarks
• The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Canon is under license.
• Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria Alliance,
Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, Excel and PowerPoint are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
• iHQC™ compression technology by I.R.I.S., copyright 2007-2015, All Rights Reserved.
• PDF-iHQC™, XPS-iHQC™ technology by I.R.I.S., copyright 2007-2015, All rights Reserved.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
• Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Command WorkStation, EFI, Fiery, FreeForm, Spot-On, and WebTools are trademarks of Electronics For Imaging, Inc. and/
or its wholly owned subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or certain other countries.
• TORX® is a registered trademark of Acument Intellectual Properties, LLC in the United States.
• Matrox is a registered trademark of Matrox Corporation in the Canada.
• Other product names and other names in this document are generally registered trademarks or trademarks of the companies.
Copyright
The copyright of this document belongs to Canon Inc. This document may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another
language, in whole or in part, without the prior consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2018
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Important Notices
Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check. Remove the claw.
1x
Check visually. Insert the claw.
1x
Check a sound. Push the part.
Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.
1x
Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.
1x
Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

cable guide or wire saddle.
1x
Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

guide or wire saddle.
1x
Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.
1x 1x
Install the screw. Tighten the screw.
1x 1x
Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
Important Notices
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
Contents
Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser................................................................................................................................................... 2
Laser Safety......................................................................................................................................... 2
Handling of Laser System......................................................................................................................2
Power Supply / Lithium Battery........................................................................................................... 3
Turn power switch ON........................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply Guidelines.......................................................................................................................3
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery..................................................................................................3
Toner Safety........................................................................................................................................4
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................4
Handling Adhered Toner........................................................................................................................4
Notes on works....................................................................................................................................4
Points to Note Before Servicing..............................................................................................................4
Points to Note at Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 4
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................................................... 5
1. Product Overview.............................................................................................6
Product Lineup.................................................................................................................................... 7
Host machine........................................................................................................................................7
Option.................................................................................................................................................. 8
Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 11
Product Specification...........................................................................................................................11
Fax Specifications............................................................................................................................... 12
Weight and Size .................................................................................................................................12
Productivity.........................................................................................................................................13
Pickup Specifications...........................................................................................................................23
Parts Name....................................................................................................................................... 34
Cross Section View............................................................................................................................. 34
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................34
2. Technology..................................................................................................... 36
Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 37
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 37
Original Exposure System.................................................................................................................38
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 38
Magnification Ratio..............................................................................................................................40
Original Size Detection........................................................................................................................ 40
Dust Detection Control.........................................................................................................................41
Image Processing............................................................................................................................... 42
Color Displacement Correction Processing in Vertical Scanning Direction...............................................43
Outline of Electric Circuits....................................................................................................................43
Main Controller.................................................................................................................................. 45
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 45
Startup Sequence............................................................................................................................... 47
i
Contents
Shutdown Sequence........................................................................................................................... 48
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 49
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 49
Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 50
Laser ON/OFF control......................................................................................................................... 50
Horizontal scanning synchronous control.............................................................................................. 50
Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control............................................................................................51
Image Mask Control............................................................................................................................ 52
Scanner Motor Control.........................................................................................................................52
APC(Auto Power Control) control......................................................................................................... 53
BD Correction Control......................................................................................................................... 54
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 56
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 56
Drum Unit / Developing Unit.................................................................................................................58
Transfer/Separation.............................................................................................................................63
Toner Supply Area.............................................................................................................................. 70
Waste Toner Feed Unit........................................................................................................................80
Image Stabilization Control.................................................................................................................. 83
Other Controls.................................................................................................................................... 88
Fixing System....................................................................................................................................91
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 91
Overview of Fixing Temperature Control............................................................................................... 93
Standby Temperature Control.............................................................................................................. 93
Print Temperature Control....................................................................................................................94
Down Sequence Control...................................................................................................................... 96
Film Unit Engagement/Disengagement Control..................................................................................... 97
Fixing Slight Rotation Function.............................................................................................................98
Fixing Arch Control..............................................................................................................................98
Fixing Unit Detection........................................................................................................................... 99
Detection of Whether the Fixing Unit is New........................................................................................100
Protection function.............................................................................................................................100
Pickup Feed System....................................................................................................................... 102
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 102
Cassette Pickup Assembly.................................................................................................................108
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly.................................................................................................. 116
Fixing/Registration Assembly............................................................................................................. 117
Reverse / Delivery Assembly..............................................................................................................119
Jam Detection...................................................................................................................................122
External Auxiliary System................................................................................................................123
Software Counter Control ..................................................................................................................123
Fan Control.......................................................................................................................................125
Heater Control...................................................................................................................................126
Power-saving Function...................................................................................................................... 126
Quick Startup.................................................................................................................................... 128
3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 131

Consumable Parts List.................................................................................................................... 132
Host machine....................................................................................................................................132
Single Pass DADF-B1 .................................................................................................................... 133
Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1.......................................................................................................... 134
ii
Contents
DADF-AV1 .........................................................................................................................................134
Inner Finisher-K1......................................................................................................................... 135
Booklet/Staple Finisher-AA1.......................................................................................................135
Cleaning Parts.................................................................................................................................136
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 138

Preface............................................................................................................................................ 139
Outline..............................................................................................................................................139
Points to Note when Tightening a Screw............................................................................................. 139
Parts Replacement Procedures List................................................................................................140
Parts List......................................................................................................................................... 142
External Cover.................................................................................................................................. 142
Motor................................................................................................................................................146
Fan.................................................................................................................................................. 147
Clutch/Solenoid.................................................................................................................................148
Heater.............................................................................................................................................. 149
Sensor..............................................................................................................................................150
Switch.............................................................................................................................................. 152
PCB................................................................................................................................................. 153
External Cover/Interior System....................................................................................................... 155
Fully open the Right Door.................................................................................................................. 155
Removing the Front Door...................................................................................................................155
Removing the Front Fan.................................................................................................................... 156
Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan........................................................................................... 158
Removing the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB.............................................................................. 159
Removing the Motor Fan....................................................................................................................161
Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.................................................................................... 162
Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB..........................................................................163
Removing the Control Panel...............................................................................................................166
Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB...............................................................................................173
Removing the Touch Panel/LCD Unit and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB....................................... 174
Original Exposure System...............................................................................................................177
Removing the Reader Scanner Unit....................................................................................................177
Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror.............................................................................. 180
Removing the Reader Flat Cable........................................................................................................184
Controller System............................................................................................................................190
Removing the Controller Cover.......................................................................................................... 190
Removing the HDD........................................................................................................................... 190
Removing the Main Controller PCB.................................................................................................... 193
Removing the DC Controller PCB.......................................................................................................197
Removing the Fax Unit...................................................................................................................... 199
Removing the Controller Fan..............................................................................................................201
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................. 203
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 203
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass.............................................................................................................204
Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 206
Removing the Drum Unit....................................................................................................................206
Removing the Developing Unit........................................................................................................... 207
Installing the Developing Unit............................................................................................................. 208
Removing the Waste Toner Container................................................................................................ 212
iii
Contents
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller...................................................................................213

Removing the ITB Unit.......................................................................................................................214
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade...................................................................................................... 217
Removing the ITB..............................................................................................................................218
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/BK).............................................................................. 222
Removing the Patch Sensor Unit........................................................................................................223
Removing the Waste Toner Drive Unit................................................................................................ 225
Removing the Registration Drive Unit / Duplex Merging Motor / Registration Motor................................226
Removing the Main Drive Unit............................................................................................................ 227
Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly................................................................................................... 232
Removing the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED Unit......................................................................... 235
Remove the Bottle Drive Unit (YM)/(CBk)............................................................................................236
Removing the Waste Toner Gear Holder.............................................................................................240
Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit................................................................................................ 242
Removing the Intermediate Guide...................................................................................................... 246
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................249
Removing the Fixing Unit................................................................................................................... 249
Removing the Fixing Film Unit............................................................................................................249
Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller / Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support......................................... 253
Removing the Fixing Drive Unit.......................................................................................................... 255
Removing the Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller (Cassette 1/2,Cassette 3/4(Option))................................ 256
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray / Feed / Separation Roller................................................................ 257
Removing the Right Door Unit............................................................................................................ 259
Removing the First Delivery Unit........................................................................................................ 262
Removing the Second Delivery Unit....................................................................................................264
Removing the Third Delivery Unit....................................................................................................... 265
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit................................................................................................. 265
Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit................................................................................................. 267
Removing the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Unit (Option)................................................................................. 268
Removing the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller..................................................................................... 270
Removing the Registration Roller....................................................................................................... 273
Removing the Registration Guide Unit................................................................................................ 276
5. Adjustment................................................................................................... 278
Image Position Adjustment.................................................................................................................279
Original Exposure System...............................................................................................................282
Service Mode Backup........................................................................................................................282
When Clearing the Reader Related RAM Data.................................................................................... 282
Actions at Parts Replacement......................................................................................................... 284
Main Controller PCB..........................................................................................................................284
Hard Disk..........................................................................................................................................285
DC Controller PCB............................................................................................................................ 287
Flash PCB........................................................................................................................................ 288
Developing Unit.................................................................................................................................288
Patch Sensor Unit............................................................................................................................. 288
Pre-Exposure LED Unit......................................................................................................................288
Laser Scanner Unit............................................................................................................................289
Single Pass DADF-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Front side).......................................................................... 290
iv
Contents
Single Pass DADF-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Back side)...........................................................................291

DADF-AV1: Scanner Unit...................................................................................................................291
Copyboard Glass.............................................................................................................................. 292
6. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................293
Initial Check.....................................................................................................................................294
Initial check items list.........................................................................................................................294
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 295
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 295
Steps to select the test print TYPE..................................................................................................... 295
How to use the test print.................................................................................................................... 296
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................300
List of Troubleshooting Items............................................................................................................. 300
Startup System Failure Diagnosis................................................................................................... 313
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 313
Basic Flow........................................................................................................................................ 314
Controller Self Diagnosis.................................................................................................................322
Boot Method..................................................................................................................................... 322
Diagnosis Result............................................................................................................................... 323
Limitations........................................................................................................................................ 325
Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................326
Function Overview.............................................................................................................................326
Saving and Collecting Debug Logs..................................................................................................... 329
Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs................................................................................................ 342
7. Error/Jam/Alarm........................................................................................... 344
Outline............................................................................................................................................. 345
Error code notation............................................................................................................................345
Location Code...................................................................................................................................345
Pickup Position Code.........................................................................................................................346
Pickup size....................................................................................................................................... 346
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON .............................................................................................348
Points to Note When Clearing HDD.................................................................................................... 348
Error Code.......................................................................................................................................349
Error Code Details.............................................................................................................................349
Error Code (FAX)............................................................................................................................ 491
How to View Fax Error Codes............................................................................................................ 491
User error codes............................................................................................................................... 491
Service Error Code............................................................................................................................491
Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 494
Alarm Code Details........................................................................................................................... 494
Jam Code........................................................................................................................................ 541
Jam Type..........................................................................................................................................541
Jam screen display specification........................................................................................................ 542
Host Machine....................................................................................................................................542
Single Pass DADF-B1....................................................................................................................... 544
DADF-AV1..........................................................................................................................................545
Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1................................................................................................................546
Inner Finisher-K1...............................................................................................................................547
v
Contents
Booklet/Staple Finisher-AA1...............................................................................................................548
Buffer Pass Unit................................................................................................................................ 549
2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1.................................................................................................................. 550
8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 551

Overview......................................................................................................................................... 552
Basic Operations...............................................................................................................................552
SITUATION Mode............................................................................................................................. 555
Security Support................................................................................................................................560
Position to Affix the Service Label.......................................................................................................564
Output of Service Print Data...............................................................................................................564
COPIER (Service mode for printer).................................................................................................569
DISPLAY (State display mode)...........................................................................................................569
I/O....................................................................................................................................................606
ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 607
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 739
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................. 766
TEST (Print test mode)...................................................................................................................... 910
COUNTER (Counter mode)............................................................................................................... 917
FEEDER (ADF service mode).........................................................................................................952
DISPLAY (State display mode)...........................................................................................................952
SORTER (Service mode for delivery options).................................................................................958
BOARD (Option board setting mode)..............................................................................................980
FAX (Serivce Mode for FAX)...........................................................................................................981
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 981
Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW)..............................................................................................................984
Setting of Menu Switch (MENU)......................................................................................................... 995
Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.).............................................................................. 996
Setting of Destination (TYPE).............................................................................................................998
Setting of Printer Functions (PRINTER).............................................................................................. 999
IPFAX Setting................................................................................................................................. 1001
Initialization of Set Value (CLEAR)....................................................................................................1002
Test Mode (TEST)........................................................................................................................... 1002
Service Report (REPORT)............................................................................................................... 1006
9. Installation.................................................................................................. 1010
How to Check this Installation Procedure......................................................................................1012
Symbols..........................................................................................................................................1012
Checking before Installation.......................................................................................................... 1013
Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................1013
Checking Power Supply................................................................................................................... 1013
Checking the Installation Environment.............................................................................................. 1013
vi
Contents
Points to Note before Installation...................................................................................................... 1014

Points to Note When Moving This Host Machine................................................................................1014
Checking the Installation Space........................................................................................................1015
Combination Table of Accessory...................................................................................................... 1015
Host Machine Installation Procedure ................................................................................................1016
Installation of the Host machine.................................................................................................... 1017
Unpacking.......................................................................................................................................1017
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................1020
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 1021
When Relocating the Machine...................................................................................................... 1048
Platen Cover Type W.................................................................................................................... 1050
Checking the Contents ....................................................................................................................1050
Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1050
Points to Note when turning ON/OFF the main power........................................................................ 1050
Installation Outline Drawing ......................................................................................................... 1050
Inner 2-Way Tray-J1......................................................................................................................1054
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................1054
Installation procedure...................................................................................................................... 1055
Checking after Installation................................................................................................................ 1057
Copy Tray-J2.................................................................................................................................1058
Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit-B5...................................................... 1061
Stamp Unit-B1............................................................................................................................... 1072
Points to Note at Installation ............................................................................................................ 1072
Operation Check ............................................................................................................................ 1078
Voice Operation Kit-D1..................................................................................................................1079
vii
Contents

Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1080
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1086
IC Card Reader Box-C1/C2...........................................................................................................1087
Points to Note when Installing.......................................................................................................... 1087
Voice Guidance Kit-G1..................................................................................................................1094
Checking the Settings...................................................................................................................... 1100
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1100
Serial Intreface KIT-K3/ Copy Control Interface KIT-A1................................................................1101
Document Scan Lock Kit-B2......................................................................................................... 1107
Utility Tray-B1................................................................................................................................1111
When Installing the USB Keyboard................................................................................................... 1114
Removable HDD Kit-AK2.............................................................................................................. 1115
viii
Contents
2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1.....................................................................................................................1124
HDD Initialization Procedure............................................................................................................ 1130
Executing auto gradation adjustment ............................................................................................... 1130
Execution of the minimum installation work....................................................................................... 1131
Media Adjustment kit-A1............................................................................................................... 1132
Points to Note when Installing.......................................................................................................... 1132
Settings after installation.................................................................................................................. 1134
Auto Adjust Gradation......................................................................................................................1135
Select Paper Settings...................................................................................................................... 1135
Connection Kit-A1/A2 for Bluetooth LE......................................................................................... 1137
Setting after Installation....................................................................................................................1140
NFC Kit-C1.................................................................................................................................... 1142
Setting after Installation....................................................................................................................1150
Reader Heater Unit-L2/L3............................................................................................................. 1151
Super G3 FAX Board-AZ1.............................................................................................................1173
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1179
ix
Contents
Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AU1 ............................................................................................. 1180

Preparation..................................................................................................................................... 1181
Installing the 2nd Line Fax Board......................................................................................................1183
Subsequent Work ........................................................................................................................... 1186
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 1191
Cassette Heater Unit-41................................................................................................................1192
Checking the Parts to be Installed.....................................................................................................1192
APPENDICES..................................................................................................1206
Service Tools.................................................................................................................................1207
List of Special Tools.........................................................................................................................1207
Solvent/Oil List................................................................................................................................ 1207
General Circuit Diagram................................................................................................................1208
Host machine.................................................................................................................................. 1208
ADF................................................................................................................................................1220
Control Panel.................................................................................................................................. 1222
Reader........................................................................................................................................... 1224
Software Counter Specifications................................................................................................... 1226
Removal........................................................................................................................................ 1232
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1232
Work Procedure.............................................................................................................................. 1232
Target PCBs of Automatic Update................................................................................................ 1235
List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored............................................................................... 1236
x
Safety Precautions
Laser..................................................... 2
Power Supply / Lithium Battery............. 3
Toner Safety..........................................4
Notes on works..................................... 4
Safety Precautions
Laser
Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside this machine is completely confined with protective housings, external covers and interlock
switches, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of normal use by users.
Therefore, this machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the international standard IEC60825-1 that is regarded as
safe during normal use.
Handling of Laser System

This machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and exposure to the beam may cause eye injuries. Therefore, when
servicing on and around the Laser Assembly, be sure to turn OFF the power of the machine before starting the work.
If you must service while the power is turned ON, be sure to keep the following in mind.
• Do not use a screwdriver or any tools that reflect laser light.
• Remove watches, rings and any other objects that act as reflectors before starting the work to prevent eye injuries.
The mark or the warning label is affixed to the machine's covers that confine laser beam as shown in the figure.
If you must open the cover and disable the interlock switches for servicing, be sure to prevent the eye from exposure.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Innerhalb des Geräts wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt, der Augenschäden verursachen kann, wenn man
in diesen Strahl blickt.
Deshalb sollte bei Servicearbeiten an oder in der Nähe der Laserbaugruppe zuerst die Stromversorgung des Geräts
ausgeschaltet werden.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
• Keine Schraubendreher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge verwenden, die Laserlicht reflektieren können.
• Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen, die als Reflektoren fungieren können, um
Augenschäden zu verhindern.
An den Abdeckungen des Geräts, die das Austreten des Laserstrahls verhindern, ist das Kennzeichen bzw. der Warnaufkleber
angebracht (siehe Abbildung).
Müssen für Servicezwecke die Abdeckung geöffnet und die Verriegelungsschalter deaktiviert werden, besondere Vorsicht walten
lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.
2
Safety Precautions
Power Supply / Lithium Battery
Turn power switch ON

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver key.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode).
CAUTION:
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which access is made to the Storage. If
deprived of power, the Storage can suffer a fault (E602).
Power Supply Guidelines

• As a general rule, do not use extension cords.
If an extension cord must be used, one that meets the rated voltage and current of the product must be used.
When using, untie the bundle and plug the power cord into the root to ensure the connection between the power cord and
extension cord.
CAUTION:
Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord. It may cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Use the power plug in an easily accessible location near the host machine.
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
CAUTION:
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.
3
Safety Precautions
Toner Safety
About Toner
Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments.
CAUTION:
Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion.
Handling Adhered Toner

• Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water.
• Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gelated to soak into fibers permanently.
• Toner particles are reactive with vinyl polymers. Avoid contacting these materials.
Notes on works
Points to Note Before Servicing

• At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a regular basis and remove dust and dirt accumulated around the outlet with dry
cloth.
CAUTION:
Leaving the power plug connected for a long time in an environment having a lot of dust, moisture, or oily smoke will
cause a fire. (Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure)
• Be careful not to be injured by burrs of edges, sharp corners or protrusions.
CAUTION:
Hazardous area such as corners, edges, springs and other sharp sections may be remaining on products. Always be
aware of the presence of hazardous area to avoid injury caused by contacting and/or striking those area, by not over-
concentrating on service work.
Points to Note at Cleaning

When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized
completely before assembling.
4
Safety Precautions
Notes on Assembly/Disassembly
Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
4. To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
use the right screw type when assembling.
5. Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
6. Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.
CAUTION:
English
CAUTION
The fuse may be in the neutral, and that the mains shall be disconnected to de-energize the phase conductors.
German
VORSICHT
Die Sicherung kann sich im Nullleiter befinden und das Hauptnetz muss abgetrennt werden, um die Phasenleiter
stromlos zu machen.
■ Points to Note when Tightening a Screw

When a thin plates is used in some parts for the light weighting purpose, warn the following.
In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark near it as shown in the figure below, strongly tightening the screw may damage
or deform the screw hole.
In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark, take care not to apply too much force when tightening the screw.
The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value.
Type of Screws
RS tight W Sems Binding TP
Fastened member Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin
Tightening torque M4 Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
(N*m) 1.6 1.6 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8
M3 Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
* For PCB, refer to the tightening torque value of resin (fastened member).
Type of Screws
RS tight W Sams Binding TP
5
1 Product Overview
Product Lineup...................................... 7
Specifications...................................... 11
Parts Name......................................... 34
1. Product Overview
Product Lineup
Host machine
Product name
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3530i III/C3530 III / C3525i III / C3525 III / C3520i III / C3520 III
The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: page per minute).
"i" indicates --.
C3530i III C3530 III C3525i III C3525 III C3520i III C3520 III
Print speed (BW/Color) 30/30 ppm 25/25 ppm 20/20 ppm
Reader Equipped as standard
ADF Equipped as standard
Copyboard -
Finished Stamp Equipped as standard
Expansion Delivery Kit Equipped as standard
Cassette 1/2 equipped as standard, 3/4 optional
Cassette Heater Equipped as standard
HDD Equipped as standard
1-line Fax Equipped as standard
7
1. Product Overview
Option
■ Image Reading System Options
[6] [3]
[4]
[5]
[17] [1]
[10]
[11]
[2] [16]
[12]
[13]
[20]
[8]
[14]
[9]
[19] [18]
[15]
[7]
No. Product name

[1] DADF - AV1
[2] Single Pass DADF-B1
[3] Platen Cover Type W
[4] Stamp Ink Cartridge-C1
[5] Stamp Unit-B1
[6] ADF Access Handle-A1
[7] Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1
[8] FL Cassette-BE1
[9] FL Cassette-BF1
[10] Copy Tray-J2
[11] Inner 2way Tray-J1
[12] Staple Finisher-AA1
[13] Inner Finisher-K1
[14] Booklet Finisher-AA1
[15] 2/3 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
[16] 2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
[17] 4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
[18] 3 Way Unit-D1
[19] Reader Heater Unit-L2
8
1. Product Overview
No. Product name

[20] Cassette Heater Unit-41
[21] Main Body Heater Unit-A1
■ Function Expansion System Options

[7]
[2]
[8]
[14]
[1]
[3] [13]
[15]
[11]
[12]
[4]
[9]
[10]
[5]
[6]
[16]
No. Product name

[1] NFC Kit-C1
[2] Utility Tray-B1
[3] Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5
[4] Power Supply Cable-W1
[5] Super G3 FAX Board-AU1
[6] Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AU1
[7] Voice Guidance Kit-G1
[8] Voice Operation Kit-D1
[9] Serial Interface Kit-K3
[10] Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
[11] 2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1
[12] Removable HDD Kit-AK2
[13] IC Card Reader Box-C1
[14] Copy Card Reader-F1
[15] Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE
[16] Remote Fax Kit-A1
IP FAX Expansion Kit-B1E
9
1. Product Overview
No. Product name

[16] LIPSV PRT KIT-BF1
PS Printer Kit-BF1
PCL PRT KIT-AS1
Barcode Printing Kit-D1E
SEARCHABLE PDF-F1
Reader Extensions-F1
SCAN ENHANCE-F1
Canon DGTL SIGNATURE-A1
iR-ADV Security Kit-T1 for IEEE 2600 Common Criteria Certification
10
1. Product Overview
Specifications
Product Specification
Item Specification/Function
Machine installation Desktop
method
Photosensitive medi- 30mm OPC
um
Exposure method 1 beam Laser
Charging method DC Roller Charging
Developing method Dry, 2-component development
Transfer method Intermidiate Transfer Belt
Separation method Curvature separation + Static Eliminator
Pickup method Simple retard roller method
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Delivery method Face-down
Drum cleaning meth- Cleaning Blade
od
Toner type 2-components
Toner supplying Insulated & Air Pressure Toner Cartridge
method
Toner level detection Yes
function
Leading edge image 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm
margin
Left edge image mar- 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm
gin
Image gradations 256 Gradation Levels
Resolution Laser resolution : 600dpi×600dpi, 1200dpi×1200dpi (Half speed)
Data processing resolution : 600dpi×600dpi(Default), 1200dpi×1200dpi
Smoothing resolution :
• Copy resolution : 2400dpi equivalent ×600dpi
• Print resolution : 1200dpi×1200dpi (at 1200dpi mode), 9600dpi equivalent ×600dpi (at 600dpi mode)
Max. guaranteed im- 300 x 450.5 mm
age size Long size paper print : 300 x 1193.5 mm
Long size paper copy : 300 x 623.5 mm
Max. printable size 305 × 450.5 mm
CoatedPaper:221-300gsm : 300 × 450.5 mm
Long size paper print : 300 ×1193.5 mm
Long size paper copy : 300 x 623.5 mm
Warm-up time From Start up * :
• Quick start mode : OFF
Time between power-on and appearance of the copy icon on the main menu : 24 sec or less
Time between device power-on and when the start key is enabled(print reservation) : 30 sec or less
• Quick start mode : ON
Time until key operations can be performed on the touch panel display : 4sec or less
Time between device power-on and when the start key is enabled (print reservation) : 10 sec or less
Time between device power-on and when the start key is enabled (print reservation)
From Deep Sleep mode :
• Eeco recovery mode OFF : 10 sec or less
• Eco recovery mode ON : 15 sec or less
First copy time Color : 8.2 sec
B/W : 5.9 sec
Paper type / Paper Refer to “Pickup Specifications” on page 23
size
Output Capacity Cassette :
640 sheets (64 g/m2)
11
1. Product Overview
Output Capacity Stack bypass:
1 sheet (Coated paper(106-300gsm), Heavy (257-300gsm and Fed Length<=158.5mm))
Duplex method Through-pass duplex
HDD capacity More than 250 GB (Avairable dixk space 250 GB)
Power supply AC 100V 8.5A 50/60 Hz
AC 120-127V 7.5A 60 Hz
AC 110-120V 7.5A 60 Hz
AC 220-240V 4.0A 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Max. power consumption : 1500W (JP/USA/EUR/Asia/Oce/China/Taiwan/Korea)
At sleep mode : 0.8W
At plug-in off mode
Power OFF(quick start mode:ON) : 0.45W
Power OFF(quick start mode:OFF) : 0.1W
Dimensions / Weight Refer to “Weight and Size ” on page 12
* : The numeric value may differ depending on the usage conditions and environment.
Fax Specifications
Item Contents
Telephone Line Used *1 Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Scan Line Density Normal G3: 8 pels*2 / mm x 3.85 line / mm
Fine G3: 8 pels*2 / mm x 7.7 line / mm
Super-Fine G3: 8 pels*2 / mm x 15.4 line / mm
Ultra-Fine G3: 16 pels*2 / mm x 15.4 line / mm
Transmission Speed Super G3 : 33.6 kbps, G3 : 14.4 kbps
Compression Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission Type SuperG3, G3
Sending Original Sizes • AB configuration: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5*2, B5R*3, A5*3, A5R*3
• Inch configuration: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR
Receiving Paper Sizes • AB configuration: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R
• Inch configuration: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR
• Other: K8, K16
No. of Memory RX Jobs Up to 320 jobs
Transmission Times Approximately 2.6 seconds (When sending LTR Canon original paper, Normal 8 pels x 3.85 line/mm
ECM (JBIG))
*1 When using an IP telephone service, facsimile communication may not be performed normally via an IP telephone line. It is
recommended to use facsimile communication via a general telephone (Public Switched Telephone Network) line.
*2 Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).
*3 Sent as A4.
Weight and Size

Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight: Approx.
(kg)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3530F III /C3520F III 565 742 * 900 * 77
DADF-AV1 565 556 159 14.0
Single Pass DADF-A1 565 525 139 9.0
Booklet Finisher-AA1 537 623 969 53
Staple Finisher-AA1 537 623 969 30
Inner Finisher-K1 565 743 182 8.0
Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1 565 615 248 16.0
12
1. Product Overview
*: When 1 Path DADF-A1 is installed
Productivity
■ iAC3530 III
2/3-way unit model
Unit : images / min
Media Size 1-side 2-side

Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray
output output output output output output output output output output
tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3
Plain A4/LTR 30 15 23 15 30 23 15 23 18 15
Recycled A3/LDR 15 7 11 7 15 10 7 11 9 7
Thin 1
SRA3 - - 5 - - - - - - -
Thin 2
Color 12×18 7 - 5 - 4 4 - 4 3 -
Pre-Punched A5R/ 30 - 4 15 - 4 23 - 4 15 - 4 30 - 4 23 - 4 15 - 4 23 - 4 18 - 4 15 - 4
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
A5/A6R 30 - 4 - 23 - 4 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 23 - 4 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 20 - 4 10 - 4 15 - 4 10 - 4 20 - 4 15 - 4 10 - 4 15 - 4 4 - 13 10 - 4
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 15 - 4 7-4 11 - 4 7-4 15 - 4 11 - 4 7-4 11 - 4 8-4 7-4
Heavy 1(106 - 128 A4/LTR 15 7 11 7 15 11 7 11 9 7
g/m2) A3/LDR 7 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 4 3
Heavy 2(129 - 150 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - - - -
g/m2)
12×18 7 - 5 - 4 4 - 4 3 -
Heavy 3(151 - 163
A5R/ 15 - 2 7-2 11 - 2 7-2 15 - 2 11 - 2 7-2 11 - 2 9-2 7-2
g/m2)
STMTR/B5/EXE/
Bond
K16
A5/A6R 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 5-2 7-2 5-2 10 - 2 7-2 5-2 7-2 6-2 5-2
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 3-2 5-2 3-2 7-2 5-2 3-2 5-2 4-2 3-2
Heavy 4(164 - 180 A4/LTR 15 7 11 7 15 11 7 11 9 7
g/m2) A3/LDR 7 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 4 3
Heavy 5(181 - 220 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - - - -
g/m2)
12×18 3 - 3 - 3 3 - 3 3 -
A5R/ 15 - 2 7-2 11 - 2 7-2 15 - 2 11 - 2 7-2 11 - 2 9-2 7-2
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
A5/A6R 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 5-2 7-2 5-2 10 - 2 7-2 5-2 7-2 6-2 5-2
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 3-2 5-2 3-2 7-2 5-2 3-2 5-2 4-2 3-2
Heavy 6(221 - 256 A4/LTR - - 11 - - - - - - -
g/m2) A3/LDR - - 5 - - - - - - -
Heavy 7(257 - 300 SRA3 * Not sup- - - 3 - - - - - - -
g/m2) port heavy7
12×18 - - 3 - - - - - - -
A5R/ - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
STMT/A5/A6R - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
13
1. Product Overview

Heavy 6(221 - 256 A4R/LTRR/B5R/ - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
g/m2) K16R
Heavy 7(257 - 300 B4/LGL/K8 - - 5-2 - - - - - - -
g/m2)
Label A4/LTR - - 11 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
B4 - - 5-2 - - - - - - -
Transparency A4/LTR 12 - 10 - - - - - - -
Post Card Post Card 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Reply Post Card 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
4-Side Post Card 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Envelope Nagagata 3 (Long 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Nagagata 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
Kakugata 2 (Short 7-2 - 5-2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
ISO-C5 (Long 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
ISO-C5 (Short - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
DL (Long Edge - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Short Edge 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
Feed)
Monarch (Long - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Monarch (Short 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
2/3-way unit model

Unit : images / min

output output output output output output output output
tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2/3 tray1 tray2/3
Plain A4/LTR 30 - 23 - 30 - 23 -
Recycled A3/LDR 15 - 11 - 10 - 9 -
Thin 1
SRA3 - - 5 - - - - -
Thin 2
Color 12×18 7 - 5 - 4 - 4 -
Pre-Punched A5R/ 30 - 4 - 23 - 4 - 30 - 4 - 23 - 4 -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
14
1. Product Overview

Plain A5/A6R 30 - 4 - 23 - 4 - - - - -
Recycled STMT - - 23 - 4 - - - - -
Thin 1
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 20 - 4 - 15 - 4 - 12 - 4 - 10 - 4 -
Thin 2
K16R
Color
Pre-Punched B4/LGL/K8 15 - 4 - 11 - 4 - 10 - 4 - 9-4 -
Heavy 1(106 - 128 A4/LTR 15 - 11 - 15 - 11 -
g/m2) A3/LDR 7 - 5 - 5 - 4 -
Heavy 2(129 - 150 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
g/m2)
12×18 7 - 5 - 4 - 4 -
Heavy 3(151 - 163
A5R/ 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 -
g/m2)
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
Bond
6
A5/A6R 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
STMT - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 - 7-2 - 6-2 - 5-2 -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 - 5-2 - 5-2 - 4-2 -
Heavy 4(164 - 180 A4/LTR 15 - 11 - 15 - 11 -
g/m2) A3/LDR 7 - 5 - 5 - 4 -
Heavy 5(181 - 220 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
g/m2)
12×18 3 - 3 - 3 - 3 -
A5R/ 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
A5/A6R 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
STMT - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 - 7-2 - 6-2 - 5-2 -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 - 5-2 - 5-2 - 4-2 -
Heavy 6(221 - 256 A4/LTR - - 11 - - - - -
g/m2) A3/LDR - - 5 - - - - -
Heavy 7(257 - 300 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
g/m2) * Not support
heavy7
12×18 - - 3 - - - - -
A5R/ - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
STMT/A5/A6R - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ - - 7-2 - - - - -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 - - 5-2 - - - - -
Label A4/LTR - - 11 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR - - 7-2 - - - - -
B4 - - 5-2 - - - - -
Transparency A4/LTR 12 - 10 - - - - -
Post Card Post Card 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Reply Post Card 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
4-Side Post Card 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Envelope Nagagata 3 (Long 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Nagagata 3 (Short 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
15
1. Product Overview

Envelope Yougatanaga 3 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
(Short Edge Feed)
Kakugata 2 (Short 7-2 - 5-2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
(Short Edge Feed)
ISO-C5 (Long Edge 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Feed)
ISO-C5 (Short Edge - - 7-2 - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Long Edge - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Short Edge 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
Feed)
Monarch (Long - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Monarch (Short 15 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
■ iAC3525 III
2/3-way unit model
Unit : images / min

Plain A4/LTR 25 15 23 15 25 19 15 23 18 15
Recycled A3/LDR 15 7 11 7 15 10 7 11 9 7
Thin 1
SRA3 - - 5 - - - - - - -
Thin 2
Color 12×18 7 - 5 - 4 4 - 4 3 -
Pre-Punched A5R/ 25 - 4 15 - 4 23 - 4 15 - 4 25 - 4 19 - 4 15 - 4 23 - 4 18 - 4 15 - 4
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
A5/A6 25 - 4 - 23 - 4 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 23 - 4 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 20 - 4 10 - 4 15 - 4 10 - 4 20 - 4 15 - 4 10 - 4 15 - 4 13 - 4 10 - 4
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 15 - 4 7-4 11 - 4 7-4 15 - 4 11 - 4 7-4 11 - 4 8-4 7-4
Heavy 1(106 - 128 A4/LTR 12 7 11 7 12 9 7 11 9 7
g/m2) A3/LDR 7 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 4 3
Heavy 2(129 - 150 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - - - -
g/m2)
12×18 7 - 5 - 4 4 - 4 3 -
Heavy 3(151 - 163
A5R/ 12 - 2 7-2 11 - 2 7-2 12 - 2 9-2 7-2 11 - 2 9-2 7-2
g/m2)
STMTR/B5/EXE/
Bond
K16
A5/A6R 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 5-2 7-2 5-2 10 - 2 7-2 5-2 7-2 6-2 5-2
K16R
16
1. Product Overview

Heavy 1(106 - 128 B4/LGL/K8 7-2 3-2 5-2 3-2 7-2 5-2 3-2 5-2 4-2 3-2
g/m2)
Heavy 2(129 - 150
g/m2)
Heavy 3(151 - 163
g/m2)
Bond
Heavy 4(164 - 180 A4/LTR 12 7 11 7 12 9 7 11 9 7
g/m2) A3/LDR 7 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 4 3
Heavy 5(181 - 220 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - - - -
g/m2)
12×18 3 - 3 - 3 3 - 3 3 -
A5R/ 12 - 2 7-2 11 - 2 7-2 12 - 2 9-2 7-2 11 - 2 9-2 7-2
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
A5/A6R 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 5-2 7-2 5-2 10 - 2 7-2 5-2 7-2 6-2 5-2
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 3-2 5-2 3-2 7-2 5-2 3-2 5-2 4-2 3-2
Heavy 6(221 - 256 A4/LTR - - 11 - - - - - - -
g/m2) A3/LDR - - 5 - - - - - - -
Heavy 7(257 - 300 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - - - -
g/m2) * Not support
heavy7
12×18 - - 3 - - - - - - -
A5R/ - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
STMT/A5/A6R - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 - - 5-2 - - - - - - -
Label A4/LTR - - 11 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
B4 - - 5-2 - - - - - - -
Reply Post Card 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
4-Side Post Card 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Envelope Nagagata 3 (Long 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Nagagata 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
Kakugata 2 (Short 7-2 - 5-2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
17
1. Product Overview

Envelope No.10(COM10) 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
ISO-C5 (Long 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
ISO-C5 (Short - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
DL (Long Edge - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Short Edge 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
Feed)
Monarch (Long - - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Monarch (Short 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
2/3-way unit model

Unit : images / min

Plain A4/LTR 25 - 23 - 25 - 23 -
Recycled A3/LDR 15 - 11 - 10 - 9 -
Thin 1
SRA3 - - 5 - - - - -
Thin 2
Color 12×18 7 - 5 - 4 - 4 -
Pre-Punched A5R/ 25 - 4 - 23 - 4 - 25 - 4 - 23 - 4 -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
A5/A6R 25 - 4 - 23 - 4 - - - - -
STMT - - 23 - 4 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 20 - 4 - 15 - 4 - 12 - 4 - 10 - 4 -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 15 - 4 - 11 - 4 - 10 - 4 - 9-4 -
Heavy 1(106 - 128 A4/LTR 12 - 11 - 12 - 11 -
g/m2) A3/LDR 7 - 5 - 5 - 4 -
Heavy 2(129 - 150 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
g/m2)
12×18 7 - 5 - 4 - 4 -
Heavy 3(151 - 163
A5R/ 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 -
g/m2)
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
Bond
6
A5/A6R 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
STMT - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 - 7-2 - 6-2 - 5-2 -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 - 5-2 - 5-2 - 4-2 -
Heavy 4(164 - 180 A4/LTR 12 - 11 - 12 - 11 -
g/m2) A3/LDR 7 - 5 - 5 - 4 -
Heavy 5(181 - 220 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
g/m2)
12×18 3 - 3 - 3 - 3 -
A5R/ 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
18
1. Product Overview

Heavy 4(164 - 180 A5/A6R 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
g/m2) STMT - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Heavy 5(181 - 220
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 - 7-2 - 6-2 - 5-2 -
g/m2) K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 - 5-2 - 5-2 - 4-2 -
Heavy 6(221 - 256 A4/LTR - - 11 - - - - -
g/m2) A3/LDR - - 5 - - - - -
Heavy 7(257 - 300 SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
g/m2) * Not support
heavy7
12×18 - - 3 - - - - -
A5R/ - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
STMT/A5/A6R - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ - - 7-2 - - - - -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 - - 5-2 - - - - -
Label A4/LTR - - 11 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR - - 7-2 - - - - -
B4 - - 5-2 - - - - -
Reply Post Card 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
4-Side Post Card 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Nagagata 3 (Short 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
(Short Edge Feed)
Kakugata 2 (Short 7-2 - 5-2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
(Short Edge Feed)
ISO-C5 (Long Edge 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Feed)
ISO-C5 (Short Edge - - 7-2 - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Long Edge - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Short Edge 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
Feed)
Monarch (Long - - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Monarch (Short 12 - 2 - 11 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
19
1. Product Overview
■ iAC3520 III
2/3-way unit model
Unit : images / min

Plain A4/LTR 20 15 20 15 20 15 15 20 15 15
Recycled A3/LDR 15 7 11 7 15 10 7 11 9 7
Thin 1
SRA3 - - 5 - - - - - - -
Thin 2
Color 12×18 7 - 5 - 4 4 - 4 3 -
Pre-Punched A5R/ 20 - 4 15 - 4 20 - 4 15 - 4 20 - 4 15 - 4 15 - 4 20 - 4 15 - 4 15 - 4
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
A5/A6R 20 - 4 - 20 - 4 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 20 - 4 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 20 - 4 10 - 4 15 - 4 10 - 4 20 - 4 15 - 4 10 - 4 15 - 4 13 - 4 10 - 4
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 15 - 4 7-4 11 - 4 7-4 15 - 4 11 - 4 7-4 11 - 4 8-4 7-4
Heavy 1(106 - A4/LTR 10 7 10 7 10 7 7 10 7 7
128g/㎡) A3/LDR 7 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 4 3
Heavy 2(129 -
SRA3 - - 3 - - - - - - -
150g/㎡)
Heavy 3(151 - 12×18 7 - 5 - 4 4 - 4 3 -
163g/㎡) A5R/ 10 - 2 7-2 10 - 2 7-2 10 - 2 7-2 7-2 10 - 2 7-2 7-2
Bond STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
A5/A6R 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 5-2 7-2 5-2 10 - 2 7-2 5-2 7-2 6-2 5-2
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 3-2 5-2 3-2 7-2 5-2 3-2 5-2 4-2 3-2
Heavy 4(164 - A4/LTR 10 7 10 7 10 7 7 10 7 7
180g/㎡) A3/LDR 7 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 4 3
Heavy 5(181 -
SRA3 - - 3 - - - - - - -
220g/㎡)
12×18 3 - 3 - 3 3 - 3 3 -
A5R/ 10 - 2 7-2 10 - 2 7-2 10 - 2 7-2 7-2 10 - 2 7-2 7-2
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
A5/A6R 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMT - - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 5-2 7-2 5-2 10 - 2 7-2 5-2 7-2 6-2 5-2
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 3-2 5-2 3-2 7-2 5-2 3-2 5-2 4-2 3-2
Heavy 6(221 - A4/LTR - - 10 - - - - - - -
256g/㎡) A3/LDR - - 5 - - - - - - -
Heavy 7(257 -
SRA3 - - 3 - - - - - - -
300g/㎡)
* Not support
heavy7
12×18 - - 3 - - - - - - -
A5R/ - - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
STMTR/B5/EXE/
K16
STMT/A5/A6R - - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 - - 5-2 - - - - - - -
20
1. Product Overview

Label A4/LTR - - 10 - - - - - - -
A4R/LTRR - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
B4 - - 5-2 - - - - - - -
Reply Post Card 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
4-Side Post Card 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
Envelope Nagagata 3 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
(Long Edge
Feed)
Nagagata 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
(Long Edge
Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
Kakugata 2 7-2 - 5-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
No.10(COM10) - - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
(Long Edge
Feed)
No.10(COM10) 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
(Short Edge
Feed)
ISO-C5 (Long 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
ISO-C5 (Short - - 7-2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
DL (Long Edge - - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Short Edge 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - - - -
Feed)
Monarch (Long - - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Monarch (Short 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - - - -
Edge Feed)
2/3-way unit model

Unit : images / min

Plain A4/LTR 20 - 20 - 20 - 20 -
Recycled A3/LDR 15 - 11 - 10 - 9 -
Thin 1
SRA3 - - 5 - - - - -
Thin 2
Color 12×18 7 - 5 - 4 - 4 -
Pre-Punched A5R/ 20 - 4 - 20 - 4 - 20 - 4 - 20 - 4 -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
A5/A6R 20 - 4 - 20 - 4 - - - - -
21
1. Product Overview

Plain STMT - - 20 - 4 - - - - -
Recycled A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 20 - 4 - 15 - 4 - 10 - 4 - 10 - 4 -
Thin 1 K16R
Thin 2
B4/LGL/K8 15 - 4 - 11 - 4 - 10 - 4 - 9-4 -
Color
Pre-Punched
Heavy 1(106 - 128g/ A4/LTR 10 - 10 - 10 - 10 -
㎡) A3/LDR 7 - 5 - 5 - 4 -
Heavy 2(129 - 150g/
SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
㎡)
Heavy 3(151 - 163g/ 12×18 7 - 5 - 4 - 4 -
㎡) A5R/ 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 -
Bond STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
A5/A6R 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - -
STMT - - 10 - 2 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 - 7-2 - 6-2 - 5-2 -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 - 5-2 - 5-2 - 4-2 -
Heavy 4(164 - 180g/ A4/LTR 10 - 10 - 10 - 10 -
㎡) A3/LDR 7 - 5 - 5 - 4 -
Heavy 5(181 - 220g/
SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
㎡)
12×18 3 - 3 - 3 - 3 -
A5R/ 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
A5/A6R 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - -
STMT - - 10 - 2 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2 - 7-2 - 6-2 - 5-2 -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 7-2 - 5-2 - 5-2 - 4-2 -
Heavy 6(221 - 256g/ A4/LTR - - 10 - - - - -
㎡) A3/LDR - - 5 - - - - -
Heavy 7(257 - 300g/
SRA3 - - 3 - - - - -
㎡)
* Not support
heavy7
12×18 - - 3 - - - - -
A5R/ - - 10 - 2 - - - - -
STMTR/B5/EXE/K1
6
STMT/A5/A6R - - 10 - 2 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR/B5R/ - - 7-2 - - - - -
K16R
B4/LGL/K8 - - 5-2 - - - - -
Label A4/LTR - - 10 - - - - -
A4R/LTRR - - 7-2 - - - - -
B4 - - 5-2 - - - - -
Reply Post Card 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - -
4-Side Post Card 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Nagagata 3 (Short 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
22
1. Product Overview

Envelope Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
(Short Edge Feed)
Kakugata 2 (Short 7-2 - 5-2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) - - 10 - 2 - - - - -
(Long Edge Feed)
No.10(COM10) 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
(Short Edge Feed)
ISO-C5 (Long Edge 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - -
Feed)
ISO-C5 (Short Edge - - 7-2 - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Long Edge - - 10 - 2 - - - - -
Feed)
DL (Short Edge 10 - 2 - 7-2 - - - - -
Feed)
Monarch (Long - - 10 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Monarch (Short 10 - 2 - 10 - 2 - - - - -
Edge Feed)
Pickup Specifications
Type (paper weight Size Pickup position
Size:g/m2) Multi-pur- Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4
pose Tray
Thin2 (52 to 59) A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Thin1 (60 to 63) B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Plain 1 (64 to 75)
A4R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Plain 2 (76 to 90)
Plain 3 (91 to 105) A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color 1 (64 to 82) B5R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Recycled 1 (64 to 75) B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled 2 (76 to 90) A5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled 3 (91 to 105)
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
11x17 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
LGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes
LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LTRR Yes No Yes Yes Yes
STMTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
STMT Yes No No No No
SRA3 Yes No No No No
EXEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
OFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes
E-OFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes
B-OFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes
M-OFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes
A-OFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes
A-LTR Yes No Yes Yes Yes
23
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
Thin2 (52 to 59) A-LTRR Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Thin1 (60 to 63) GLTR-R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Plain 1 (64 to 75)
GLTR Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Plain 2 (76 to 90)
Plain 3 (91 to 105) GLGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Color 1 (64 to 82) AFLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Recycled 1 (64 to 75) FLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes
K8 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
K16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
K16R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
F4A Yes No Yes Yes Yes
I-LGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Free Yes No No No No
Free (Long length) *1 Yes No No No No
Custom size 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 3-1, 3-7, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5-1, 5-2, 5-7, 5-8, 6-1
Custom size 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, Yes No Yes Yes Yes
3-8, 3-9, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-9, 6-2,
6-3, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-7
Custom size 0-2, 0-4, 2-1, 7-2, 7-6, Yes No No No No
7-8, 8-1
Custom size 9 (long length) *1 Yes No No No No
Heavy 1 (106 to 128) A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Heavy 2 (129 to 150) B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Heavy 3 (151 to 163)
Heavy 4 (164 to 180)
Heavy 5 (181 to 220) A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes ○
A5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-LTRR Yes No Yes Yes Yes
GLTR-R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
GLGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes
AFLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes
FLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes
24
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
Heavy 1 (106 to 128) K16R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Heavy 2 (129 to 150) F4A Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Heavy 3 (151 to 163)
Heavy 4 (164 to 180)
Heavy 5 (181 to 220) Free Yes No No No No
Custom size 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 3-1, 3-7, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5-1, 5-2, 5-7, 5-8, 6-1
3-8, 3-9, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-9, 6-2,
6-3, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-7
7-8, 8-1
Heavy 6 (221 to 256) A3 Yes No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No
A4 Yes No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No
A5 Yes No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No
A6R Yes No No No No
11x17 Yes No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No
LTRR Yes No No No No
STMTR Yes No No No No
EXEC Yes No No No No
OFICIO Yes No No No No
E-OFICIO Yes No No No No
B-OFICIO Yes No No No No
M-OFICIO Yes No No No No
A-OFICIO Yes No No No No
A-LTR Yes No No No No
A-LTRR Yes No No No No
GLTR-R Yes No No No No
GLTR Yes No No No No
GLGL Yes No No No No
AFLS Yes No No No No
FLS Yes No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No
K16R Yes No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No
I-LGL Yes No No No No
25
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
Heavy 6 (221 to 256) Custom size 0-2, 0-4, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, Yes No No No No
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, Custom size 3-4,
3-5, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 5-1Custom
size 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8,
5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5,
7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 8-1
Heavy 7 (257 to 300) A3 Yes No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No
A4 Yes No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No
A5 Yes No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No
A6R Yes No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No
FLS Yes No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7,
3-8, 3-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6,
5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3,
7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 8-1
1-Sided Coated 1 (106 to A3 Yes No No No No
128) B4 Yes No No No No
1-Sided Coated 2 (129 to
A4R Yes No No No No
163)
A4 Yes No No No No
26
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
1-Sided Coated 3 (164 to B5R Yes No No No No
A5 Yes No No No No
128)
2-Sided Coated 2 (129 to A5R Yes No No No No
163) A6R Yes No No No No
2-Sided Coated 3 (164 to 11x17 Yes No No No No
220)
LGL Yes No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No
FLS Yes No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7,
3-8, 3-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6,
5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3,
7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 8-1
A4R Yes No No No No
256)
A4 Yes No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No
A5 Yes No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No
A6R Yes No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No
27
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
1-Sided Coated 4 (221 to 12x18 Yes No No No No
256) EXEC Yes No No No No
256)
FLS Yes No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7,
3-8, 3-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6,
5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3,
7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 8-1
300) *4 B4 Yes No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No
300) *4
A4 Yes No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No
A5 Yes No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No
A6R Yes No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No
28
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
1-Sided Coated 5 (257 to AFLS Yes No No No No
300) *4 FLS Yes No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No
300) *4
K16 Yes No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7,
3-8, 3-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6,
5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3,
7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 8-1
Tracing paper (64 to 99) A3 Yes No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No
A4 Yes No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No
A5 Yes No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No
A6R Yes No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7,
3-8, 3-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6,
5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3,
7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 8-1
Clear Film (121 to 220) *2 A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
29
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
Clear Film (121 to 220) *2 A-OFICIO Yes No Yes Yes Yes
5-8, 5-9, 6-2, 6-3, 7-5, 7-7
Custom size 6-1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Custom size 8-1 Yes No No No No
Transparency 4 (121 to A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
220) LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Label 1 (118 to 185) A3 Yes No No No No
B4 Yes No No No No
A4R Yes No No No No
A4 Yes No No No No
B5R Yes No No No No
B5 Yes No No No No
A5 Yes No No No No
A5R Yes No No No No
A6R Yes No No No No
LGL Yes No No No No
LTR Yes No No No No
FLS Yes No No No No
K8 Yes No No No No
K16 Yes No No No No
F4A Yes No No No No
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7,
3-8, 3-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6,
5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3,
7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 8-1
30
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
Bond 1 (83 to 99) LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Postcard, 4-Side Postcard Postcard Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(164 to 220) Reply Postcard Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4-Side Postcard Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punched 1 (64 to 81) A3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
B4 Yes No Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
GLTR-R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
GLGL Yes No Yes Yes Yes
AFLS Yes No Yes Yes Yes
K16R Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Custom size 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, Custom Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
size 3-1, 3-7, 5-1, Custom size 5-2,
Custom size 5-7, Custom size 5-8,
6-1
3-8, 3-9, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-9, 6-2,
6-3, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-7
7-8, 8-1
Envelope (75 to 105) COM10_R Yes No Yes*5 No No
31
1. Product Overview

pose Tray
Envelope (75 to 105) Monarch_R Yes No Yes*5 No No
ISO-C5_R Yes No No No No
DL_R Yes No Yes*5 No No
Nagagata 3_R Yes No Yes*5 No No
Yougatanaga 3_R Yes No Yes*5 No No
Kakugata 2_R Yes No Yes No No
COM10 Yes Yes*3 *6 No No No
Monarch Yes No No No No
ISO-C5 Yes Yes No No No
DL Yes Yes*3 *6 No No No
Nagagata 3 Yes Yes*6 No No No
Yougatanaga 3 Yes Yes*6 No No No
2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7,
3-8, 3-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6,
5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3,
7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 8-1
*1: The following service mode (Lv.2) needs to be set to "1".

COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
COPIER > OPTION > USER > FLM-DSPL
COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW>COM10-DL
*4:
• Media Adjustment Kit-A1 (assigned as a separate option) is required.
• Media Adjustment Kit-A1 is only for China/Asia/EUR/Latin Only.
• The following service mode needs to be set to "1".
COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW>EXTH-SW
*5: with Envelope attachment Kit A.
*6: with Envelope attachment Kit B. Envelope attachment Kit B is only for Japan.
■ Paper type
Available paper types are shown below.
See the table below for the custom paper size.
Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Free 139.7 to 457.2 98.4 to 320
Custom size 0-2 139.7 to 215.9 98.4 to 104.9
Custom size 0-4 216 to 457.2 98.4 to 104.9
Custom size 2-1 139.7 to 147.9 105 to 297
Custom paper size 2-2 148 to 181.9 105 to 209.9
Custom paper size 2-3 148 to 181.9 210 to 220
Custom paper size 2-4 148 to 181.9 220.1 to 297
Custom size 3-1 182 to 215.9 139.7 to 209.9
Custom size 3-2 216 to 431.8 139.7 to 194.9
Custom size 3-3 431.9 to 457.2 139.7 to 194.9
Custom size 3-4 216 to 269.9 195 to 209.9
Custom size 3-5 431.9 to 457.2 195 to 209.9
Custom size 3-6 270 to 431.8 195 to 209.9
Custom size 3-7 182 to 215.9 105 to 139.6
Custom size 3-8 216 to 431.8 105 to 139.6
Custom size 3-9 431.9 to 457.2 105 to 139.6
Custom size 5-1 182 to 209.9 220.1 to 297
32
1. Product Overview
Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Custom size 5-2 210 to 215.9 220.1 to 279.3
Custom size 5-3 216 to 269.9 220.1 to 279.3
Custom size 5-4 270 to 431.8 220.1 to 279.3
Custom size 5-5 270 to 431.8 210 to 220
Custom size 5-6 431.9 to 457.2 210 to 297
Custom size 5-7 182 to 209.9 210 to 220
Custom size 5-8 210 to 215.9 210 to 220
Custom size 5-9 216 to 269.9 210 to 220
Custom size 6-1 210 to 215.9 279.4 to 297
Custom size 6-2 216 to 269.9 279.4 to 297
Custom size 6-3 270 to 431.8 279.4 to 297
Custom size 7-2 139.7 to 147.9 297.1 to 320
Custom size 7-3 148 to 181.9 297.1 to 304.8
Custom size 7-4 182 to 215.9 297.1 to 304.8
Custom size 7-5 270 to 457.2 297.1 to 304.8
Custom size 7-6 182 to 215.9 304.9 to 320
Custom size 7-7 216 to 269.9 297.1 to 304.8
Custom size 7-8 148 to 181.9 304.9 to 320
Custom size 8-1 216 to 457.2 304.9 to 320
33
1. Product Overview
Parts Name
Cross Section View
Toner Container
Fixing Assembly
ITB Unit
Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller
Drum Unit
Laser Scanner
Unit
Multi-purpose Tray
Waste Toner
Container Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Control Panel
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
No. Name
[1] [Settings/Registration] key
[2] Numeric keys
[3] [Energy Saver] key
34
1. Product Overview
No. Name
[4] [Counter/Device Information] key
[5] Brightness Adjustment key
[6] Settings key
[7] [Clear] key
[8] [Stop] key
[9] [Start] key
[10] Main Power indicator
[11] Error indicator
[12] Processing/Data indicator
[13] [Reset] key
[14] ID (Log In/Out) key
[15] NFC (If equipped with NFC Kit-B1)
[16] Touch panel display
35
2 Technology
Basic Configuration............................. 37
Original Exposure System...................38
Main Controller....................................45
Laser Exposure System...................... 49
Image Formation System.................... 56
Fixing System......................................91
Pickup Feed System......................... 102
External Auxiliary System................. 123
2. Technology
Basic Configuration
Functional Configuration
This machine consists of 6 major blocks: Original Exposure and Feed System, Controller System, Laser Exposure System, Image
Formation System, Fixing System, and Pickup Feed System.
Original Exposure and Feed System
ADF
Reader
Delivery
Fixing
System Fixing
Controller System
Image Formation System Deplexing

Feed
Main Controller PCB ITB Transfer
Drum Drum Drum Drum

DC Controller PCB
Laser Scanner
Laser Exposure System Pickup

Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup
Laser Beam
Cassette
Paper Flow
Pickup/Feed System
Signal Flow
37
2. Technology
Original Exposure System
Overview
■ Reader Specifications
Photo conductor LED
Scanning of original At copyboard reading:
Scanning by moving Scanner Unit
Reading resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of gradations 256 gradations
Maximum document size At copyboard reading:
297 mm x 431.8 mm
Magnification ratio 25% - 400%
B&W : Scan magnification (skipping of 2 vertical scanning lines: 25% to 50%)
Color : Digital magnification
Horizontal scanning direction:
Image processing by the Main Controller PCB
Vertical scanning direction:
Image processing by the Main Controller PCB
Reading Sensor 4 lines (R, G, B, B/W)
Original size detection Horizontal scanning direction:
Detection by the Reading Sensor (Scanner Unit)
Vertical scanning direction:
Detection by the reflection sensor (Original Size Sensor (AB) or Original Size Sensor (Inch))
■ Basic Configuration
● Reader Parts Configuration
[7] [8]
[6] [9]
[10]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Key No. Name Symbol Function/Specification

[1] Scanner Unit - Image reading, analog image processing
[2] Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS_A1 Scanner Unit home position detection
[3] Copyboard Cover Open/Closed PS_N1 ADF open/close detection (closing of the ADF is detected at 5 de-
Sensor (Front) grees)
[4] Copyboard Cover Open/Closed PS_N2 ADF open/close detection (detection of timing for size detection at 15
Sensor (Rear) degrees of ADF opening/closing)
38
2. Technology
Key No. Name Symbol Function/Specification

[5] Sensor Lightproof Sheet - -
[6] Original Size Sensor (AB) PS_R1 Overall reader control, digital image processing
[7] Original Size Sensor (Inch) PS_R2 Size detection in the vertical scanning direction (AB configuration)
[8] Scanner Motor STM1 Size detection in the vertical scanning direction (Inch configuration)
[9] Carriage Drive Belt - 2-phase Pulse Motor: Pulse control
[10] Guide Shaft - -
● Scanner Unit
The Scanner Unit consisting of an LED, mirror, lens, and Reading Sensor is used to perform original exposure and reading.
Light emitted from LED is reflected by the original and reaches the Reading Sensor through the Reflection Mirror and the Lens
Unit.
Lens
LED (light source)
mirror
No.4
mirror No.3
mirror
No.2
mirror No.1
mirror
No.5
Lens CCD
Red (R) line

Green (G) line
Blue (B) line
Black & White (B/W) line
LED Lamp Unit

The LED Lamp Unit emits light from the 2 LED Lamp PCBs (with 36 LED chips for each PCB).
The emitted light exposes the original via the Reflection Plate.
Newly Developed Lens Unit

By using the Lens Unit with 4 lenses combined, downsizing of the Scanner Unit has been achieved.
Reading Sensor
The Reading Sensor reads the image for1 image line.
39
2. Technology
The Reading Sensor has 4 lines (R, G, B, and B/W). At 600 dpi B&W reading, 1 line (B/W) is used. At color reading, 3 lines (R,
G, and B) are used.
Related error codes

Light intensity error:
• E301 - 0001: Light intensity is below the reference level at paper front shading.
Shading error:
• E302 - 0001: Error in paper front white shading
• E302 - 0002: Error in paper front black shading
Magnification Ratio
■ Changing the Magnification Ratio in Horizontal Scanning Direction
When using the reading mode of the reader / When using the ADF
Reading in the horizontal scanning direction is performed at 100% size. Changes to the magnification ratio are processed by the
Main Controller PCB.
■ Changing the Magnification Ratio in Vertical Scanning Direction

As the magnification change in vertical scanning direction, the following operation is performed according to the original reading
method and difference in magnification.
Magnification change when using the reading mode of the reader

Data processing in the Main Controller PCB is performed according to the magnification.
Example: In the case of reducing the magnification to 25%, the original is read at 260 mm/sec, and is reduced to 25% in the Main
Controller PCB (1/4 decimation).
Example: In the case of magnification 100 %, the original is read at 260 mm/sec.
Operation description Magnification

25 % to 50 % 50.1 % to 199.9 % 200 % to 400 %
Original reading speed (mm/sec) 260 260 260
Digital magnification processing 25 to 50 50.1 to 199.9 100 to 200
in the Main Controller PCB (%)
Original Size Detection

■ Overview
This machine determines the size of an original by the combination of the measurement results of the reflected light at particular
points of the Reflection Sensor and Reading Sensor. Measurement is performed for each size to perform accurate detection even
if an original is moved when the ADF is closed.
• Horizontal scanning direction: Reading Sensor
• Vertical scanning direction: Reflection Photosensor
The following procedure is used to determine the size of the original.
1. Search of external light (horizontal scanning direction only)

The sensor level at each detection position in the horizontal scanning direction is measured while the LED is OFF.
2. Detection of output level of each sensor

The LED of the Reading Sensor Unit is turned ON, and the sensor level at each detection position in the horizontal scanning
direction is measured.
Then, the Reflection Photosensor LED for the vertical scanning direction is turned ON, and the sensor output is measured.
The size of the original is determined by the combination of these outputs.
40
2. Technology
■ Control Description
In horizontal scanning direction, sensor level of each original detection position is measured by moving the Scanner Unit to the
detection position shown in the figure in relation to the original setting position. The size in the vertical scanning direction is
determined by using the Original Size Sensor (AB) and Original Size Sensor (Inch).
A type , AB type INCH type AB type / INCH type

PS105
Original Size Sensor 2
PS104 PS104 PS104

Original Size Sensor 1 Original Size Sensor 1 Original Size Sensor 1
STMTR STMTR
A5R
A5R
B5R B5R
A5 A4R A5 A4R
STMT LTRR LGL STMT LTRR LGL
B5 B4 B5 B4
(11"×17")
A4 A3 LTR (11"×17") LTR A4 A3
CCD original detection position CCD original detection position CCD original detection position
Dust Detection Control

■ Overview
When reading an original, original reading position is changed according to the presence/absence of dust on the Stream Reading
Glass or the Guide Plate of the ADF (on the Platen Roller in case of the reverse model), or image correction is performed to
prevent the dust to be printed on an image. This control is performed only when the ADF is being used and has been closed.
Control timing
Dust evasion control
• At job completion
• At the start of a job (only when one of the following conditions is met)
• At the start of the first job after power ON or recovery from sleep mode
• At the start of the first job after a message prompting cleaning of dust is displayed and then the ADF is opened and then
closed
• At the start of a job when dust evasion control performed at the end of the previous job failed to finish normally
Image correction control

• At paper interval (after each sheet is read)
Main power Start key

switch ON ON
WMUP STBY
1st 2nd
SCAN SCAN
Dust detection Dust detection Dust detection

control control control
Control description
Dust evasion control
• At job completion
The Reading Sensor detects presence/absence of dust at the reading position A, B, and C in that order, and the position
where dust is least present becomes the reading position for the next job.
• When a job starts
Like the time of completion of a job, presence/absence of dust is detected at all positions (A, B, and C in that order).
The position where dust is least present is used as the reading position and reading starts.
41
2. Technology
C B A
Image correction control

• At paper interval
The Scanner Unit does not move.
Reading is performed at the position determined by the control performed at job completion or at the start of a job, and
image correction is performed if dust is detected at that position.
0.5 mm 0.5 mm
C B A
Scanning Glass
Related service mode

• Adjustment of the image correction level at stream reading
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L1
• Adjustment of the dust detection level at stream reading
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L2
Image Processing
This machine performs all image processing by the Main Controller PCB.
Main Controller PCB

• Shading correction
• Color displacement correction in vertical scanning direction
Scanner Unit PCB (in the Scanner Unit)

• Scanner Unit Drive
• Gain correction of the Reading Sensor output, Offset correction
42
2. Technology
Scanner Unit PCB (Reader)
LED (4lines)
Main Controller PCB
Analog image ASIC

signal EEP-ROM
SRAM
Gain
Scanner unit Shading correction
drive control correction data
Analog image CPU
process A/D Color offset
Digital
- gain correction correction
conversion image
- offset correction in sub scanning
signal
CCD/AP PCB
Scanner Unit PCB (ADF)
LED (4lines)
Analog image
signal
Scanner unit
drive control
Analog image
process A/D
- gain correction
conversion
- offset correction
CCD/AP PCB
Color Displacement Correction Processing in Vertical Scanning

Direction
Color displacement correction control in the vertical scanning direction is used to correct displacement of R, G, and B by shifting
the pixels in the vertical scanning direction (by less than 1 pixel) to align the red (R) and blue (B) images with green (G) when
the scanned R, G, and B images are not accurately overlapped at color scanning.
Example: A scanned image of a black line where red (R) is displaced upward and blue (B) is displaced downward with respect
to green (G)
&RORUGLVSODFHPHQW
FRUUHFWLRQLQYHUWLFDO
VFDQQLQJGLUHFWLRQ5*
1 line
&RORUGLVSODFHPHQW %HIRUH $IWHU

FRUUHFWLRQLQYHUWLFDO FRUUHFWLRQ FRUUHFWLRQ
VFDQQLQJGLUHFWLRQ*%
As for the color displacement correction value in the vertical scanning direction, there are two types of reader scans as shown
below. These correction values have been adjusted at the time of shipment, and stored as service mode values. (In COPIER >
ADJUST > CCD)
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
When a job is started, color displacement correction processing is performed based on the saved color displacement correction
values.
Outline of Electric Circuits

The Reader Assembly of this machine performs all image processing by the Main Controller PCB.
43
2. Technology
The relations of the electrical components are shown below.
Sensor
Motor
ADF Driver
Scanner Unit
PCB
Solenoid
Fan
Main Controller PCB
Related error codes

Communication error between the Main Controller PCB and Scanner Unit
• E280 - 0001: Communication between the Main Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not completed within
the specified period of time.
• E280 - 0002: Disconnection of FFC between the Main Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was detected.
• E280 - 0101: Communication between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not completed within
the specified period of time.
• E280 - 0102: Disconnection of FFC between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was detected
Communication error between the Main Controller PCB and DADF
• E400 - 0001: A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
• E400 - 0002: A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
• E400 - 0003: Disconnection of the harness between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
ADF Fan error
• E412 - 0005: Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
• E412 - 0006: Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
Different DADF model error
• E490 - 0001: An improper Scanner Unit is installed.
• E490 - 0101: An improper DADF is installed.
44
2. Technology
Main Controller
Overview
■ Configuration/Function
HDD Main Controller PCB
USB I/F
TPM PCB Flash PCB
Main Controller PCB
Item Function
Main Controller PCB System Control/Memory Control/Printer Output Image Processing Control, Reader Image Input Processing,
Card Reader Connection I/F, Fax Image Processing, USB Extension HUB Connection I/F
RAM (for temporarily storage of image data)

For controller control + image processing
USB port
USB2.0 Device I/F, USB3.0 Host I/F, USB2.0 Host I/F
Hard disk 2.5 inch SATA I/F Standard: 250 GB (250 GB usable area), address book, security information (password,
certificate), image data, preferences
Flash PCB Storing System Software
TPM PCB Generation and storage of the encryption key.
(Only when Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings is "On". Default: OFF)
45
2. Technology
■ Main Controller PCB

J4503 J15 J7071 J7178 J7018
J4514
J4502 J6010
J4501 J7203
J13 J6004
J7600
J18 J6001 J7628
J6003
J7229
J4504
J5
J3 J9500
J7
J6005
J11 J4515 J4511

J1 J4508 J4506
J21 J20 J4510 J4513 J4512 J4509 J4505
■ Motion Sensor
Function
Features of the Motion Sensor functions are shown below.
• When the machine detects a person staying in front of it (in the area where the sensor works) for more than a certain period
of time, it automatically recovers from sleep mode.
• It judges whether the person is a user or a passerby and controls not to perform recovery triggered by passersby in order to
reduce unnecessary power consumption.
• Criteria for judging whether a person is a user or passerby are shown below.
• If a person approaches the machine from the front, the sensor judges the person as a user and starts recovery from
sleep mode quickly.
• If a person approaches the machine from the side, the sensor judges the person walking fast as a passerby and the
person walking slowly as a user.
• The machine may recover from sleep mode in response to the detection of the passerby walking slowly, but the machine
shifts to sleep mode again if it is not operated within a specified period of time.
CAUTION:
Do not block the opening because the sensor generates ultrasonic waves and detects reflected waves.
Settings/Registration
This function can be set from the following menu.
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Timer/Energy Settings] > [Use Motion Sensor]
ON/OFF of this function and the sensor sensitivity can be configured.
46
2. Technology
Startup Sequence
Power Supply Switch ON Power Supply
Switch ON
Initializing process of hardware
Starting system software

[Flash PCB]
Starting application
[Hard disk]
Standby
screen display
Standby screen display
Screen sequence and internal processing sequence
NOTE:
To achieve faster startup, the progress bar and the active PCB are not synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
For information about troubleshooting, refer to "Related error codes (major error codes)" shown below.
NOTE:
When system verification* at startup is ON, startup of system software takes more time than when OFF.
*: Settings/Registration (login as an administrator) > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [System verification at startup]
Note that when the machine is recovering from sleep mode or at Quick Startup, system verification is not performed even it is set
to ON.
Related error codes (major error codes):

• E602-0001: HDD detection error
• E614-0001: Flash PCB detection error
• E614-0002: Error in file system on the Flash PCB
47
2. Technology

• E748-2010: Flash PCB error / HDD error
NOTE:
When the following errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not
recorded in the log.
E602-XX01, E614-XX01, E748-2010
Shutdown Sequence
Before shutting down the power supply, it is necessary to perform the HDD completion process (Purpose: to prevent damage on
the HDD) and execute the fixing disengagement operation. This series of process is called "shutdown sequence".
With this machine, the Main Controller PCB detects turning OFF the Main Power Supply Switch, and the shutdown sequence is
started and executed automatically.
Note that the maximum shutdown time with this machine is 90 seconds. (If the maximum of 70 seconds has elapsed, the power
supply is turned OFF by the hardware timer circuit on the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB.)
NOTE:
If the power supply is stopped without shutting down the machine, or if the processing to completely delete the hard disk (deletion
of the primary file) fails to be completed within the shutdown time (max. 70 sec.), data consistency is checked at startup. In such
a case, startup takes up to 80 seconds. The progress bar is displayed during the data checking.
48
2. Technology
Laser Exposure System
Overview
The laser exposure system forms a static latent image on the Photosensitive Drum by laser exposure.
The Laser Scanner Unit consists of the Laser Assembly and the Scanner Motor, and is controlled by the signal input from the DC
Controller.
This machine adopts the 1-polygon, 4-laser method to realize a compact size.
This method performs laser scanning using one Scanner Motor and four laser diodes. The multifaceted mirror on one Scanner
Motor can scan lasers equivalent to four stations, thereby realizing space-saving.
The following shows an outline drawing of the Laser Scanner Unit.
[3]
UN09
UN08
[4]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
M01
No. Name
[1] Reflection Mirror
[2] Imaging Lens
[3] Photosensitive Drum
[4] BD signal light-receiving section
UN08 Y/M Laser Driver PCB
UN09 C/Bk Laser Driver PCB
M01 Scanner Motor
49
2. Technology
Specifications
Item Description
Number of Laser Scanner Units 1
Number of laser beams 1 beam per color
Resolution 1200 dpi
Number of Polygon Mirror facets 4 facets
Laser ON/OFF control

Purpose
Turns the laser beam ON and OFF according to the combination of laser control signals.
Execution timing
After Power-On
Control description
The DC Controller switches between four modes (Forced OFF mode, APC mode, Print mode, and Standby mode) by laser control
signals.
DC Controller
PCB (UN04) Y/M/C/Bk
Laser Driver
CPU PCB (UN08)
ASIC
Laser ON
/OFF signal Laser Scanner
Motor
Video signal
ASIC APC signal
Laser
Beam
Main Controller C/Bk
PCB(UN05) Laser Driver
PCB (UN09)
Mode Laser Status Remarks

Forced OFF mode OFF Clears the light intensity setting determined by the APC.
APC mode ON Adjusts the laser light intensity.
Print mode ON/OFF Emits the laser according to the video signal.
Standby mode OFF The machine is in standby mode.
Print Image formation

instruction ready timing
Printer
status PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
At 1st line (APC)
LaserA
Mode Standby Forcible Standby

APC mode APC mode / Print mode
name mode OFF mode mode
Horizontal scanning synchronous control

Purpose
Aligns the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction.
Execution Timing
When printing is started (for each line)
50
2. Technology
Control description
1. The Y/M Laser Driver PCB forcibly emits the Bk laser diode of the C/Bk Laser Driver PCB by setting the Bk laser control
signal to APC mode.
2. The laser beam of the Bk laser has a BD circuit in the scanning light path, and is incident on the BD Circuit.
3. The BD Circuit detects the laser beam and generates a BD signal, and sends it to the Main Controller.
4. The Main Controller synchronizes with this signal, and sends video signals (Y_VDO, M_VDO, C_VDO and Bk_VDO) to the
Y/M and C/Bk Laser Driver PCBs while regarding the reference BD signal as the vertical scanning synchronous signal (BD)
for each line. This enables each Laser Driver PCB to emit a laser beam from a fixed position for each line.
NOTE:
• As the BD signal is the horizontal scanning synchronous signal of the Bk color, the Bk color serves as each color's
reference for horizontal scanning.
• With this machine, the reference in the horizontal scanning direction for Y and M colors is the right edge (right-to-left)
while that for C and Bk colors is the left edge (left-to-right).
<Y, M color> <C, Bk color>
Feeding
direction
Right standard Left standard
C/K Laser Driver PCB

(UN09)
BD Signal
BD Sensor
Bk_VDO APC Signal

Bk Laser
Main Controller C_VDO
PCB(UN05)
C Laser
M_VDO
ASIC M Laser
Y_VDO
Y/M Laser Driver
PCB(UN08) Y Laser
Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control

Purpose
Aligns the write start position in the vertical scanning direction.
Execution timing
At each print
Control description
1. When the DC Controller receives a print order, it detects an internal reference signal. Based on this signal, a vertical scanning
synchronous signal (ITOP) is generated and sent to the Main Controller.
2. The Main Controller synchronizes with ITOP signal and generates video signals (Y_VDO, M_VDO, C_VDO and Bk_VDO),
and sends them to the Laser Scanner Unit.
51
2. Technology
3. The Laser Scanner Unit generates the laser drive signals based on the video signals. At this timing, the Laser Scanner Unit
emits laser beams to match the leading edge of image with that of paper.
NOTE:
If the process speed is slowed by the print mode, the cycle of the TOP signal in continuous printing is lengthened according
to the degree of slowing.
Laser Laser Laser Laser
Y/M Laser C/BkLaser

Driver ASIC APC signal Driver
PCB(UN08) PCB(UN09)
Main Controller
PCB(UN05)
DC Controller Video signal
PCB(UN04)
ASIC
CPU LAser ON/OFF signal
ITOP
Image Mask Control

Purpose
Prevents soiling of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
The image mask control is executed in both the horizontal and vertical scanning directions to control the laser beam not to be
emitted in non-image area.
Execution timing
At power-on, and at each print
Control description
Type Control description Mask Width

Horizontal scan- The image mask in the horizontal scanning direction is executed based on the paper size 2 mm
ning selected by the user. (Each color's BD signal is the reference)
Vertical scanning The image mask in the vertical scanning direction is executed based on the paper size 2 mm
selected by the user. (TOP signal is the reference)
Scanner Motor Control

Purpose
Rotates the Scanner Motor at a specific speed.
Execution timing
Control description
Scanner Motor rotation speed is controlled by the Y/M Laser Driver PCB.
1. The Y/M Laser Driver PCB outputs Scanner Motor control signals (acceleration signal: ACC, deceleration signal: DEC) to
the Scanner Motor to rotate the Polygon Mirror.
2. The Y/M Laser Driver PCB controls the Scanner Motor rotation speed to be constant by referring to the Scanner Motor rotation
speed signal (FG signal).
(From when the Scanner Motor starts rotation until it reaches the target revolutions and the machine starts image formation
process)
52
2. Technology
3. When the laser beams are emitted at image formation, the BD Sensor of the C/Bk Laser Driver PCB detects the BD signal
and inputs it to the Y/M Laser Driver PCB.
4. The Y/M Laser Driver PCB controls the Scanner Motor control signals (acceleration signal: ACC, deceleration signal: DEC)
based on the input timing of the BD signal to control the Scanner Motor rotation speed.
BD Scanner
BD Sensor Monitor
Bk Laser
C/Bk Laser
Driver PCB
(UN09) C Laser
M Laser
ASIC Y/Mk Laser
Driver PCB
(UN08) Y Laser
FG
DEC
ACC
Related error code

• E100-0001: BD error
• E110-0001: Scanner Motor error (FG lock error at startup)
• E110-0002: Scanner Motor error (BD speed lock error at startup)
• E110-0003: Scanner Motor error (BD phase lock error at startup)
APC(Auto Power Control) control

Purpose
Ensures constant laser beam light intensity for each line.
Execution Timing
For each line (before writing the image)
Control description
1. The Y/M Laser Driver PCB outputs the APC signal to the Laser Driver IC on each Laser Driver PCB.
53
2. Technology
2. The APC mode is set for the Y/M and C/Bk Laser Driver PCB ICs, and the laser diode of each color is forcibly emitted. The
photo diode (PD) monitors the laser diode (LD), and each Laser Driver IC adjusts the output of laser diode until the laser
light intensity reaches a specified level.
Laser Scanner Unit

Y Laser
LD
LD
Y/M Laser Driver PD
PCB(UN08)
M Laser
APC Signal
ASIC LD
LD
PD
C Laser
LD
LD
PD
C/Bk Laser Driver

PCB(UN09) Bk Laser
LD
LD
PD
BD Correction Control
Purpose
Corrects the displacement of each color's laser write start position due to variation in angle of the Polygon Mirror facets.
Execution timing
Control description
1. The Main Controller PCB measures the BD interval after the completion of constant speed rotation control of the Scanner
Motor.
2. The Main Controller PCB calculates the correction value from the displacement of the BD interval.
3. The write start position is corrected by correcting the write start timing based on the calculated correction value.
START
Scanner motor control finish

(Constant-speed BD interval
rotation detection) Specified
value
BD1 BD2
BD interval measurement
Gap Gap
Before
Write start position correction
BD1 BD2
correction value calculation
Gap Gap
Write start position After

correction value correction
BD1 BD2
END
54
2. Technology
Related error code

• E100-0001: BD error
• E110-0001: Scanner Motor error (FG lock error at startup)
• E110-0002: Scanner Motor error (BD speed lock error at startup)
• E110-0003: Scanner Motor error (BD phase lock error at startup)
55
2. Technology
Image Formation System
Overview
■ Specifications
Item Function/Method
Photosensitive Drum Material OPC
Drum diameter Φ30
Cleaning Cleaning Blade
Process speed 1/1 speed: 119.4 mm/s
1/2 speed: 59.7 mm/s
Drum Heater N/A
Developing Unit Developing method Dry, 2-component development
Toner level detection Yes
Primary charging Charging method Roller charging
Toner Container Toner Container detection Yes
Toner Container replacement (during continuous printing) No
Transfer method Intermediate transfer (ITB)
ITB Unit Cleaning Cleaning Blade
Belt displacement correction Correction by the rib guide mechanism
Primary transfer Transfer method Transfer Roller
Disengagement mechanism Yes
Secondary transfer Transfer method Transfer Roller
Disengagement mechanism No
Cleaning Static cleaning
Separation method Curvature separation + Static Eliminator
Waste Toner Contain- Full-level detection Yes
er Presence/absence detection Yes
■ Parts Configuration
[2]
Y M C BK
[3]
Y M C BK
[1]
[4]
[5]
No. Name
[1] ITB Unit
[2] Driving the Toner Bottles
[3] Toner Bottle
[4] Drum Unit
56
2. Technology
No. Name
[5] Laser Scanner Unit
■ Print Process
Flow of print paper Delivery
Rotating direction of ITB,

Fixing block
photosensitive drum
7.Fixing
ITB cleaning block Transfer block
8.ITB cleaning 6.Separation

ITB
5.Secondary transfer
4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary
transfer transfer transfer transfer
Y 9.Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure

3.Development
Photosensitive
Developing block Drum M C Bk
Photosensitive Photosensitive Photosensitive
Drum Drum Drum
2.Laser exposure
10.Drum cleaning
1.Primary charging
Registration
Static latent image Drum cleaning block
formation block
Pickup
No. Block Process Details of processing

1 Static latent image for- Primary charging The surface of the Photosensitive Drum is charged to make a uniform neg-
mation block ative potential.
2 Laser exposure Emission of the laser light forms a static latent image on the surface of the
Photosensitive Drum. (Image exposure: laser exposed area becomes image
area)
3 Developing block Development With the dry, 2-component AC developing method, toner that has been neg-
atively charged by the Developing Cylinder is attached to the Photosensitive
Drum.
4 Transfer block Primary transfer Toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to the ITB by
applying positive charge from the back side of the ITB.
5 Secondary transfer Toner on the ITB is transferred to the paper by applying positive potential to
the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
6 Separation With the curvature separation method, the paper is separated from the ITB.
In the case of thin paper which has low elastic force, the Static Eliminator
reduces potential on the back side of paper to make the thin paper to be
separated easily.
7 Fixing block Fixing The toner on the paper is fixed on the paper by heat and pressure.
8 ITB Cleaning Block ITB cleaning The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the ITB.
9 Drum cleaning block Drum cleaning pre-expo- Pre-exposure LED Unit removes the residual charge.
sure
10 Drum cleaning The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the Photosen-
sitive Drum.
57
2. Technology
Drum Unit / Developing Unit

■ Parts / Drive Configuration
[1] [6]
CL01 M02
M CL02 M0
CL03
CL04
[7]
[3] [2] [5] [4]
No. Parts name Role

[1] Developing Cylinder The toner and carrier inside the Developer Container are coated on the surface,
and the toner is developed on the Photosensitive Drum.
[2] Developer Feed Screw A Toner and carrier in the Developer Container are supplied to the Developing Cyl-
inder.
[3] Developer Feed Screw B Toner and carrier in the Developer Container are stirred and supplied to the De-
veloper Feed Screw A.
[4] Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum is removed.
[5] Primary Charging Roller The surface of the Photosensitive Drum is charged to make a uniform potential.
[6] Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED Residual charge remaining on surface of the Photosensitive Drum (Bk/M/C) is
removed.
[7] Cleaning Screw Residual toner is fed.
M02 Bk Drum_ITB Motor Rotation of the Photosensitive Drum (Bk)
M03 CL Drum Motor Rotation of the Photosensitive Drum (Y/M/C)
M10 Developing Motor To rotate the Y/M/C/Bk Developing Cylinder and the Developer Feed Screw.
CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch (Y) Switching of the drive path to the Developing Unit (Y)
CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch (M) Switching of the drive path to the Developing Unit (M)
CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch (C) Switching of the drive path to the Developing Unit (C)
CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch (Bk) Switching of the drive path to the Developing Unit (Bk)
Related error codes

Bk Drum_ITB Motor error
• E010-0001: Bk Drum Motor startup error
• E010-0002: Bk Drum Motor speed error
• E010-0003: Bk Drum Motor lock detection
CL Drum Motor error
• E012-0001: CL Drum Motor startup error
• E012-0002: CL Drum Motor speed error
• E012-0003: CL Drum Motor lock detection
58
2. Technology
■ Drum Cleaning/Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Control

[6]
[5]
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
No. Parts name Role

[1] Photosensitive Drum After a static latent image has been formed on the Photosensitive Drum, a toner image
is formed with the toner from the Developing Cylinder.
[2] Cleaning Screw Residual toner that has been removed by the Cleaning Blade is fed.
[3] Cleaning blade Residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum is removed.
[4] Primary Charging Roller The surface of the Photosensitive Drum is charged to make a uniform potential.
[5] Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure Residual charge remaining on surface of the Photosensitive Drum (Bk/M/C) is removed.
LED
[6] Residual charge Residual charge remaining on the Photosensitive Drum surface
Drum cleaning
Purpose:
Residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum is removed.
Control description:
1. When the Photosensitive Drum rotates, the Cleaning Blade engaged with the drum scrapes off residual toner on the
drum.
2. The Cleaning Screw is rotated to feed the toner that has been scraped off to the Waste Toner Container.
Drum cleaning pre-exposure control

Purpose:
The residual charge on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum (Bk/M/C) is removed to reduce ghost images, etc.
Control description:
The Pre-exposure LED is activated and light is emitted to the Photosensitive Drum (Bk/M/C).

• Activation of the Pre-exposure LED:
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > PRE-EXP
• Setting of the activation conditions of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED:
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PREXP-SW
• Adjustment of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) light intensity (1/1 speed):
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > PR-EXP-M
• Adjustment of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) light intensity (1/1 speed):
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > PR-EXP-C
• Adjustment of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk) light intensity (1/1 speed):
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > PR-EXP-K
• Adjustment of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) light intensity (1/2 speed):
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > PR-EXPM2
• Adjustment of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) light intensity (1/2 speed):
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > PR-EXPC2
• Adjustment of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk) light intensity (1/2 speed):
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > PR-EXPK2
Related alarm codes

• 29-0201: Drum (M) pre-exposure alarm
59
2. Technology
• 29-0301: Drum (C) pre-exposure alarm

• 29-0401: Drum (K) pre-exposure alarm
■ Drum Unit Detection

Whether the Drum Unit is installed or not is detected.
Detection timing:
• At power-on
• When recovering from sleep (after 8 hours or more have elapsed)
Detection description:
The following is determined from the AC current monitor value when discharge current control is executed to detect the
presence or absence of the Drum Unit.
• When the current monitor value is less than the specified value: Drum Unit absent
• When the current monitor value is the specified value or higher: Drum Unit present
NOTE:
When Drum unit is in detection and Drum unit memory cannot be detection, notifies alarm code 09-0010/0011/0012/0013 and
displays "Cannot recognize the drum." in UI.
Operation of the host machine:

If the Drum Unit is detected as absent, "Message" is displayed on the status line of the Control Panel.
NOTE:
Detection of presence/absence of a Drum Unit may not be executed at times such as at recovery from sleep mode (of less than
8 hours).
■ Drum Unit Life Detection

Purpose
To display the LIFE and Remaining Days of the Drum Unit to notify the replacement timing.
The LIFE and the Remaining Days can be checked in the service modes below.
COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > PT-DR-Y
COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > PT-DR-M
COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > PT-DR-C
COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > PT-DRM
Control description
1. The drum LIFE value is calculated from the drum rotation time and the application time of primary charging DC bias.
2. The calculated drum LIFE value is added to the count value that has been stored in the Drum Unit Memory.
60
2. Technology
3. The Remaining Days is calculated based on the calculated LIFE value considering the usage conditions.
DC Controller PCB
(UN04)
Drum Unit Life Information

Memory PCB
(UN35∼38)
Drum Unit Memory
Item Advance notice alarm Display of preparation Display that prompts re- Completion of replace-
warning placement ment
Alarm Code Drum Unit advance notice - - Drum Unit replacement
Name alarm *1 completion alarm
Alarm code • 40-0070 : Y - - • 43-0070 : Y
• 40-0071 : M • 43-0071 : M
• 40-0072 : C • 43-0072 : C
• 40-0073 : K • 43-0073 : Bk
Message - Prepare Drum 1/2/3/4. (Call Replace Drum 1/2/3/4.*5 -
(Operation of service representative.)*3
the host ma-
chine)
Machine oper- Replacement not yet needed -
ation after dis-
play of mes-
sage
Detection tim- When the Remaining Days of When the Remaining Days When the Life Value of the When a new Drum Unit is
ing the Drum Unit has reached the of the Drum Unit has Drum Unit has reached the detected.
set value*1 reached the set value*4 Replacement Life Value
Detected to (lo- Drum Unit New/Old Sensor
cation)
Alarm log dis- ALARM-3 *2 - - ALARM-3
play location
*1 : Display timing and/or display/hide of the advance notice alarm can be changed in the following service modes.
COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-M > PT-DR-Y
COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-M > PT-DR-M
COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-M > PT-DR-C
COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-M > PT-DRM
*2 : After an advance notice alarm is sent, the next advance notice alarm will not be sent until the replacement completion alarm
is sent.
*3 : Display/hide settings of preparation warning can be changed in the following service modes.
COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > PT-DR-Y
COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > PT-DR-M
COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > PT-DR-C
COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > PT-DRM
*4 : Display timing of preparation warning can be changed in the following service modes.
COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > PT-DR-Y
COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > PT-DR-M
COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > PT-DR-C
COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > PT-DRM
*5 : Display/hide settings of messages to prompt replacement can be changed in the following service modes.
COPIER > OPTION > PM-EXC-M > PT-DR-Y
COPIER > OPTION > PM-EXC-M > PT-DR-M
COPIER > OPTION > PM-EXC-M > PT-DR-C
61
2. Technology
COPIER > OPTION > PM-EXC-M > PT-DRM
Alarm code
• Drum Unit (each color) advance notice alarm
40-0070 : Y
40-0071 : M
40-0072 : C
40-0073 : K
• Drum Unit (each color) replacement completion alarm
43-0070 : Y
43-0071 : M
43-0072 : C
43-0073 : K
■ Primary Charging
Primary charging bias control
Purpose
To apply voltage to the Primary Charging Roller in order to charge the Photosensitive Drum Surface to a negative potential
Charging method
Roller charging (DC charging (no AC charging))
The primary charging bias (DC negative), which has been generated by the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN03),
is applied to the Primary Charging Roller.
The primary charging bias value is determined by the DC Controller PCB (UN04) based on the following conditions:
• Environment (humidity detected by the Environment Sensor (UN27))
• Life of the Photosensitive Drum
UN04 DC Controller PCB
UN03 Secondary Transfer High-voltage PCB
[1]
[2]
No. Parts name

[1] Photosensitive Drum
[2] Primary Charging Roller
62
2. Technology
Developing bias control

Purpose
To apply voltage to the Developing Cylinder in order to generate a potential difference from the Photosensitive Drum
Control description
The developing bias (AC, DC negative), which has been generated on the Secondary Charging PCB (UN03), is applied to
the Developing Cylinder.
• Developing DC bias: The bias to generate potential difference with the Photosensitive Drum. The bias value is
determined based on the Environment Sensor (UN27).
• Developing AC bias: The bias to improve image quality.
UN04 DC Controller PCB
UN03 Secondary Transfer High-voltage PCB
[1]
No. Parts name

[1] Developing Cylinder
Transfer/Separation
M02
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[1]
No. Parts name Role

[1] Primary Transfer Roller Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is attracted to the ITB.
[2] ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner inside the ITB Cleaning Unit is fed.
[3] ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to a paper.
[4] Secondary Transfer Inner Roller The ITB is driven.
[5] Secondary Transfer Outer Roller As well as attracting toner on the ITB to the paper, paper is fed.
M02 Bk Drum_ITB Motor The Secondary Transfer Roller/ITB Cleaning Screw/Bk Drum Unit is driven.
63
2. Technology
Related error code

E010: Bk Drum_ITB Motor error
• E010-0001: BK Drum Motor startup error
• E010-0002: BK Drum Motor speed error
• E010-0003: BK Drum Motor lock detection
■ Primary Transfer Control

Primary Transfer ATVC
Purpose
The transfer voltage required to obtain the target transfer current value is set in order to prevent transfer failure due to
environmental changes.
Control description
1. The current value of the primary transfer DC bias is detected.
2. Optimal target current value is determined based on the temperature/humidity data of the Environment Sensor (UN27).
3. The primary transfer DC bias to be applied to the Primary Transfer Roller is determined.
Execution timing
The execution timing for this control depends on the control timing, adjustment timing, and the combination of conditions.
Control timing Adjustment timing Condition

Automatic adjust- When a job starts Every 100 accumulated images
ment by the output When sudden environmental changes are detected by the Environment Sensor
of a specific number
At paper interval Every 100 accumulated images
of prints
Control at job comple- Every 500 accumulated images (only in high temperature and high humidity envi-
tion ronments)
Every 1000 accumulated images
At startup At power-on At normal startup
If 8 hours or more have elapsed in high-speed startup mode
At recovery from sleep If 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode
mode
Automatic adjust- When switching to a col- 100 or more accumulated images of color jobs
ment by switching or job from a B&W job When sudden environmental changes are detected by the Environment Sensor
modes from when the previous ATVC was executed
Automatic adjust- When replacing the When a new Drum Unit is inserted
ment by replace- Drum Unit
ment Replace the Developing When INISET-Y/M/C/K/4C is executed in service mode
Unit.
At initial installation At power-on At initial installation

• Execution of the primary transfer ATVC control:
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX
Related alarm codes

• 30-0025: A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control for yellow
• 30-0026: A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control for magenta
• 30-0027: A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control for cyan
• 30-0028: A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control for black
Primary Transfer Bias Control

Purpose
To apply current to the Primary Transfer Roller
Control description
The primary transfer bias for each color (Y/M/C/Bk) is generated by the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN02) and
applied to the Primary Transfer Roller.
The primary transfer bias value is determined by the primary transfer ATVC control.
64
2. Technology
ON and OFF of the primary transfer bias can be switched by color, and it is possible to turn OFF the bias of the color which
will not be used.
NOTE:
The ATVC control secures transfer performance that is not affected by change in resistance caused by the environment as well
as deterioration of the Primary Transfer Roller and is executed respectively to the primary transfer bias of each color.
■ Secondary Transfer Control

Secondary Transfer ATVC
Purpose
To set the transfer voltage required to obtain the target transfer current value in order to prevent transfer failure due to
environmental changes and paper type
Execution timing
At the start of a job: Executed at each initial rotation
At paper interval: Every 100 accumulated images
Control description
1. The monitor current value of the secondary transfer DC bias is detected.
2. The optimal target current value is determined based on the temperature/humidity data of the Environment Sensor
(UN27) and the paper type.
3. The secondary transfer DC bias to be applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is determined.
Secondary Transfer Bias Control

Purpose
DC positive: Toner on the ITB is transferred to the paper when printing.
DC negative: Toner on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is attracted onto the ITB when cleaning.
Control description
The secondary transfer bias, which has been generated on the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN03), is applied to
the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
The secondary transfer bias value is determined by the DC Controller through ATVC control, which maintains a constant
current value running though the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.

• Display of the environment during secondary transfer ATVC control:
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > ENV-TR
• Environment in secondary transfer individual settings (setting 1 to 16):
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-ENV1 to 16
• Color mode/feed side in secondary transfer individual settings (setting 1 to 16):
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-DUP1 to 16:
• Adjustment of paper allotted voltage in secondary transfer individual settings (setting 1 to 16):
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-VL1 to 16
• Paper type in secondary transfer individual settings (setting 1 to 16):
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-PPR1 to 16
• Collective adjustment of the secondary transfer ATVC paper allotted voltage:
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > 2TR-OFF
Related alarm code

• 30-0032: Error in secondary transfer ATVC (below the lower limit)
■ Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Control

Purpose
The color Primary Transfer Rollers are disengaged in the single color Bk mode in order to increase the life of image formation
parts (Photosensitive Drum, ITB).
The cam mechanism provides 3 phases, which correspond to the 3 states of Bk mode, CL mode, and full disengagement
mode.
65
2. Technology
[1]
Bk
Color
Primary transfer disengagement initialization operation

Initialization is performed so that the coupling is securely engaged at power-on and when the door is closed because the state
of the primary transfer disengagement is not determined.
Operation description
The Primary Transfer Disengagement Cam [1] is rotated so that the mode shifts in the following order: Bk mode, Color mode,
and Full disengagement mode.
After initialization, the mode transitions to Bk mode of the HP state.
Related error code

• E074-0001: ITB HP time-out error
• E074-0002: ITB HP time-out error
Status of each mode/timing to enter each mode
Mode Status Operation status

Bk mode Only the Bk Primary Transfer Roller is engaged At standby
Detected by the Primary Transfer Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33) During deep sleep
At B&W printing*1
M08
CL mode All Primary Transfer Rollers are engaged When performing color printing*1
At adjustment operation
M08
Full disengage- All Primary Transfer Rollers are disengaged When the Front Cover is open
ment mode When the Right Door is open*2
When the power is OFF*2
66
2. Technology
Mode Status Operation status

Full disengage-
ment mode M08
*1: When image formation is executed

*2: Disengagement is not performed during the operation for entering the deep sleep mode.
■ ITB Displacement Correction

Purpose
To prevent problems caused by ITB displacement.
Control description
With this machine, belt displacement is prevented by ITB displacement correction using a rib guide mechanism.
[2]
[3]
[4] [5] [1]
No. Parts name Role

[1] ITB Tension Roller It drives the ITB.
[2] Reinforcing tape It is used to reinforce the ITB edges (to increase the strength).
[3] Rib It controls displacement of the ITB.
[4] ITB Belt for performing primary transfer
[5] Flange The shape is sloped to prevent the rib from being placed over it.
■ ITB Cleaning
Purpose
To remove residual toner on the ITB to prevent it from affecting the next image.
Control description
1. The ITB Cleaning Blade scrapes toner on the ITB.
2. The ITB Cleaning Screw feeds the toner that has been scraped off to the Waste Toner Container.
67
2. Technology
M02
[1] [2]
[3]
No. Parts name Role

[1] ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner in the ITB Cleaning Unit is fed.
[2] ITB Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the ITB is collected.
[3] Waste Toner Ejection Mouth Ejection Mouth for toner collected on the ITB
M02 Bk Drum _ ITB Motor The ITB Cleaning Screw is driven.

• Setting of the number of transparency to execute ITB cleaning
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > OHP-PTH
■ Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Cleaning Control

Purpose
To prevent transfer failure and soiling on the back of the paper caused by soiling of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Control description
The secondary transfer cleaning bias, which has been generated on the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN03), is applied
to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller [2] through the Separation Static Eliminator [1].
Residual toner on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is attached to the ITB, and then collected by the ITB Cleaning Unit.
[1]
[2]

Automatic adjustment by the output When a job starts Each time
of a specific number of prints At paper interval For each 100 accumulated images
When transparency is fed
At job completion Each time
Automatic adjustment by the accu- At paper interval For each accumulated video count value of 3000%
mulation of video count values After 30 images from the start of a job and the video count value
of less than 2.0% (equivalent to accumulated video count value of
100%)
At job completion Each time
Jam removal At recovery from jam Jam occurrence
68
2. Technology

At startup When turning ON the main 8 hours or more have elapsed in high-speed startup mode
power At normal startup
At recovery from sleep mode 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode
Automatic adjustment by replace- When replacing the Drum When a new Drum Unit is inserted
ment Unit
Replace the Developing When FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y/ INISET-M/ INISET-C/
Unit. INISET-K/ INISET-4C is executed
At initial installation At power-on At initial installation
When Settings/Registration is execu- Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
ted Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct Shading
Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Clean Inside Main Unit
When service mode is executed When FUNCTION > CLEANING > 2TR-CLN is executed

• Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller:
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > 2TR-CLN
■ Separation
Purpose
This control separates paper from the ITB by elastic force of the paper. (Curvature separation method)
Description of Control (in case of thin paper)

Since the elastic force of thin paper is weak, paper cannot be separated only by the elastic force of the paper.
In order to solve this problem, positive charge on the back side of paper is removed by the Static Eliminator to weaken the
electrostatic absorption force of the paper.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
No. Parts name

[1] Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
[2] Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
[3] Separation Static Eliminator
[4] Paper
69
2. Technology
Toner Supply Area

PS26,27,28,29
UN39,40,41,42
M04
M05
M10
[2]
[1]
UN21,22,23,24
No. Parts name Role

[1] Toner Feed Screw A Toner is supplied to the Developing Unit.
[2] Toner Feed Screw B Toner is supplied to the Developing Unit.
UN39 to 42 New/Old Bottle Detection Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) The state of the Toner Container is detected.
PS26 to 29 Toner Supply Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) Presence/absence of the Toner Container is detected.
Rotation of the Toner Container is detected.
UN21 to 24 Toner Density Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) Toner/carrier ratio in the Developing Unit is detected.
M04/M05 Bottle Motor (YM)/(CK) Toner Bottle is rotated.
M10 Developing Motor The screw inside the Developing Unit is driven.
Related error code

• E021-0001: Developing Motor error
• E021-0002: Developing Motor error
• E021-0120: Developing Screw rotation detection error (Y)
• E021-0220: Developing Screw rotation detection error (M)
• E021-0320: Developing Screw rotation detection error (C)
• E021-0420: Developing Screw rotation detection error (Bk)
■ Bottle State Detection

Purpose
Check whether there is a problem with the inserted Toner Container.
70
2. Technology
Detection timing
• At power-on
• When the Front Cover is closed
• When recovering from sleep mode (not displayed after Use is pressed)
The Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN39/UN40/UN41/UN42) detects the state from the memory [1] of the Toner Container.
UN39,40,41,42
[1]
Screen Display
A message shown below is displayed according to the condition detected from the memory.
Message State
Cartridge with wrong item no. may be in- A Toner Container with a wrong item number is inserted.
serted.
Toner cartridge may be malfunctioning. A Toner Container that may be malfunctioning is inserted.
Wrong cartridge color may be inserted. A Toner Container of a wrong color is set.
---- The correct Toner Container is set.
Related Alarm Codes

Toner memory detection alarm (Y):
• 10-0091
Toner memory detection alarm (M):
• 10-0092
Toner memory detection alarm (C):
• 10-0093
Toner memory detection alarm (Bk):
• 10-0094
71
2. Technology
■ Toner Container Detection

Purpose
Presence/absence of the Toner Container is detected.
Control description
The Toner Supply Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (PS26/PS27/PS28/PS29) is arranged as shown in the figure below; when the Toner
Container is inserted, the sensor reacts and the Toner Container is detected.
< ON > Flag
Toner Container
Toner Supply Sensor
Cut-off
■ ATR (Auto Toner Replenishment) Control

Purpose
To supply toner to the Developing Unit to achieve an ideal ratio of the developer (toner + carrier) in the Developing Unit.
Execution timing

Automatic adjustment by the accu- At job completion For each accumulated video count value of
mulation of video count values 1500%
At paper interval For each accumulated video count value of
3000%
At initial installation Power ON At initial installation
Control description
The toner density of each color is corrected to the target value at the abovementioned control timing and is controlled to achieve
an appropriate toner supply to the Developing Unit. The DC Controller PCB determines toner supply amount by the following 2
data:
• Toner Density Sensor output value (DC Controller)
• Video count value (Main Controller)
The DC Controller PCB turns ON the Bottle Motors (YM)/(CK) (M04/M05) when it determines that toner supply is necessary.
This supplies the specified amount of toner to the Developing Unit.
72
2. Technology
Toner Log Connector Toner Supply Sensor

UN39,40,41,42 PS26,27,28,29
M04
M05
Bottle Motor(YM)
Bottle Motor(CK)
[1]
Hopper Unit
Developing Motor
M10
ATR Sensor
UN21,22,23,24
UN04
DC Controller PCB
Developing Assembly supply count UN05
Main Controller PCB
ATR Sensor result Video Count Value
Related error code

• E020-01A8: Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error
• E020-01B8: Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error
• E020-02A8: Toner Density Sensor (M) output error
• E020-02B8: Toner Density Sensor (M) output error
• E020-03A8: Toner Density Sensor (C) output error
• E020-03B8: Toner Density Sensor (C) output error
• E020-04A8: Toner Density Sensor (Bk) output error
• E020-04B8: Toner Density Sensor (Bk) output error
• E020-01C8: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Y)
• E020-02C8: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (M)
• E020-02C8: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (C)
• E020-04C8: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Bk)
■ Toner Supply Control

Purpose
Toner is supplied from the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly.
Control description
This machine uses a Toner Container that has an accordion mechanism at the end. The drive of the Bottle Motor rotates the
Toner Bottle and operates the accordion section. At that time, air pressure is used to supply toner to the Developing Unit.
Control timing
When toner supply is determined necessary by the result of ATR control, toner is supplied.
This machine has 2 Toner Bottle Motors, and toner is supplied by driving Toner Bottles of two colors alternately by one motor.
Expansion Contraction
Small toner supply mouth
73
2. Technology
UN05
Main Controller PCB Toner Supply Sensor
PS26,27,28,29 M04 Bottle Motor (YM)
Video Count Value Flag [1] M05 Bottle Motor (CK)
Shrunk
UN04 Press
DC Controller PCB
Developing Assembly
supply count
ATR Sensor result
Developing Motor
M10
Toner Feed Screw [2] UN21,22,23,24

Toner Density Sensor
The following shows the image of the Drive Unit viewed from the back side.
M Y
REAR VIEW M04

M05
The operation is going to be explained taking Y and M as an example.
1. The motor rotates.
2. The driving force is transmitted to the gears, and the Toner Bottle rotates.
M Y
REAR VIEW M04

M05
3. When the motor rotates in the reverse direction, the Swing Gear moves to the opposite direction.
74
2. Technology
4. The driving force is transmitted only to the gears on the side toward which the gear moved, and the Toner Bottle
rotates and toner is supplied.
M Y
REAR VIEW M04

M05
5. Toner supply starts after the Toner Supply Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (PS26/PS27/PS28/PS29) is turned ON. Driving the
Bottle Motor (YM/CK) (M04/M05) rotates the Toner Bottle, causing the flag of the Toner Supply Sensor to drop to the
75
2. Technology
cut-off part of the Toner Bottle as shown in the figure below, which in turn switches OFF the sensor. After that, when
the flag of the Toner Supply Sensor moves out of the cut-off part, the sensor is turned ON.
When the Toner Supply Sensor is OFF, 1 block's worth of toner is supplied to the Developing Unit.
[1]
< OFF > < ON >
[2]
PS26,27,28,29 [3]
[3]
No. Parts name

[1] Flag
[2] Toner Container
[3] Cut-off
CAUTION:
The following warning screen appears when the rotation of toner cartridge has been detected while the front cover is open.
Related error codes

• E025-0110: Bottle Motor error (Y)
• E025-0120: Bottle Motor error (Y)
• E025-0210: Bottle Motor error (M)
• E025-0220: Bottle Motor error (M)
• E025-0310: Bottle Motor error (C)
• E025-0320: Bottle Motor error (C)
• E025-0410: Bottle Motor error (Bk)
• E025-0420: Bottle Motor error (Bk)
• E025-0168: No toner detection error (Y)
• E025-0268: No toner detection error (M)
• E025-0368: No toner detection error (C)
• E025-0468: No toner detection error (Bk)
76
2. Technology
■ Toner Level Detection

Purpose
To display the life/remaining days to notify the Toner Container replacement timing.
The life and remaining days can be seen in the following menu or service mode.
Consumption confirmation
Control Panel : Status Monitor > Consumables / Others > Check Consumables
Control Panel display example
Remote UI : Status Monitor / Cancel > Consumables
Remote UI display example
Service Mode :
COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > TONER-Y
COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > TONER-M
COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > TONER-C
COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE > TONER-K
Status name Low remaining toner in container Toner Container Empty
Toner Status
Toner Container: Low toner remaining Toner Container: 0%

Alarm code name Toner prior notification alarm *1 Toner low alarm *5 Toner Bottle empty alarm
*4
Alarm codes 10-0017 10-0001 10-0401
10-0018 10-0002 10-0402
10-0019 10-0003 10-0403
10-0020 10-0004 10-0404
77
2. Technology
Status name Low remaining toner in container Toner Container Empty

Message - (Yellow, Cyan, Magenta, Black) Replace the toner cartridge (yellow,
toner is low. (Replacement not cyan, magenta, black).
yet needed.) *2
Host machine operation after Replacement not yet needed. Host machine is stopped.
the message is displayed
Detection timing Depends on the service mode Depends on the service mode When the output signal from the To-
setting *1 setting *3 ner Density Sensor does not fall be-
low the designated value even after
performing a toner supply operation
Detected to (location) Toner supply count Toner Density Sensor
Alarm log storage location ALARM-2 - ALARM-2
*1 : The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the Toner advance notice alarm notification
timing). The alarm can also be set to be disabled.
• COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > TONER-Y
• COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > TONER-M
• COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > TONER-C
• COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > TONER-K
*2 : Whether to display this message can be changed in the following service mode (setting of the ON/OFF of toner preparation
message).
• COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > TONER-Y
• COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > TONER-M
• COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > TONER-C
• COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > TONER-K
*3 : The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the days left before the Toner Preparation
Warning).
• COPIER > OPTION >PM-MSG-D > TONER-Y
• COPIER > OPTION >PM-MSG-D > TONER-M
• COPIER > OPTION >PM-MSG-D > TONER-C
• COPIER > OPTION >PM-MSG-D > TONER-K
*4 : After an advance notice alarm is sent, the next advance notice alarm will not be sent until the replacement completion alarm
is sent.
*5 : The message is generated by UGW and displayed on the UGW portal screen. This is not displayed on this machine.
Alarm codes
• Toner (each color) advance notice alarm
10-0017: (Y)
10-0018: (M)
10-0019: (C)
10-0020: (Bk)
• Toner Bottle empty alarm (each color)
10-0401: (Y)
10-0402: (M)
10-0403: (C)
10-0404: (K)
• Toner low (each color) alarm (UGW-generated alarm)
10-0001: (Bk)
10-0002: (C)
10-0003: (M)
10-0004: (Y)
■ Detection of Toner Container Premature Replacement / Toner Replacement

Completion
Purpose
To detect the completion of replacement of Toner Container. Also, to prevent the replacement of a Toner Container that can still
be used.
78
2. Technology
NOTE:
The toner container premature replacement detection function does not work for unidentified Toner Containers.
Control description
Message displayed when the Toner Operation suspended when the Toner Toner replace-
Container is removed *1 Container is prematurely replaced*2 ment complete
Detection timing When the Toner Container is removed be- When the Toner Container is replaced be- When the proper re-
fore the message "Replace the toner car- fore the message "Replace the toner car- placement of Toner
tridge." (see "Toner Level Detection") is dis- tridge." (see "Toner Level Detection") is dis- Container is detected
played. played.
Alert/message dis- The following message is displayed with an “The following toner cartridges ware inserted None
played alert tone.*3 befor it was necessary to replace them:”
“Toner still remains in the following cartridge
that have beenpull out:”
Operation while mes- Allowed Operation suspended -

sage displayed
How to clear Install the removed container again, and Install the Toner Container that had been in- -
close the Front Cover of the host machine. stalled before the container was replaced,
and close the Front Cover of the host ma-
chine.*4
Alarm Codes *5 10-0100-007x: New Toner Container replacement detection (each color)
10-0100-008x: Toner Container premature replacement detection (each color)
10-0100-018x: Unidentified Toner Container replacement detection (each color)
NOTE:
With B&W machines, screen display/alarm code is displayed only for black.
*1: The display/hide setting of the message is available in the following service mode (Lv. 2).
COPIER > OPTION > USER > TNRBRMVR
*2: The enable/disable setting of the operation suspension is available in the following service mode (Lv. 2).
COPIER > OPTION > USER > TNRBEXGR
*3: The alert tone generated when a message is displayed can be switched ON or OFF in the following menu.
Volume Control > Audible Tones > Non-Empty Toner Rplcd. Tone
*4: If the initially installed Toner Container cannot be installed back, clear from the following service mode (Lv. 2) the operation
suspension caused by the replacement of premature Toner Container.
*5: A toner replacement completion alarm is not generated under the following conditions:
• The DC Controller PCB was replaced, and then a new Toner Container is installed before the power is turned ON.
• The DC Controller PCB was replaced, and then a new Toner Container is installed after the power was turned ON with the
Toner Container removed or the Front Door open.
Control Panel menu

Volume Control > Audible Tones > Non-Empty Toner Rplcd. Tone
Service mode
• ON/OFF of suspension of operation triggered by premature replacement of the Toner Container (Lv. 2)
COPIER > OPTION > USER > TNRBRMVR
• ON/OFF of display of the message at removal of the Toner Container (Lv. 2)
79
2. Technology
Alarm Codes
• Toner Container replacement notice alarm
• New Toner Container replacement detection
10-0100-0071 (Bk)
10-0100-0072 (Y)
10-0100-0073 (M)
10-0100-0074 (C)
• Toner Container premature replacement detection
10-0100-0081 (Bk)
10-0100-0082 (Y)
10-0100-0083 (M)
10-0100-0084 (C)
• Unidentified Toner Container replacement detection
10-0100-0181 (Bk)
10-0100-0182 (Y)
10-0100-0183 (M)
10-0100-0184 (C)
Waste Toner Feed Unit

The Waste Toner Feed Unit is comprised of the following parts/drive operations.
Waste toner in the Drum Unit and ITB Cleaning Unit is fed to the Waste Toner Container.
M02 M03 [2]
[1]
SW01
UN30
[3]
[4]
M17
No. Parts name Role

[1] ITB Cleaning Screw Collected toner is fed to the ITB Cleaning Unit.
[2] Drum Unit Cleaning Screw Residual toner in the Drum Unit is fed.
[3] Waste Toner Feed Screw Toner collected from the ITB Unit/Drum Unit is fed to the Waste Toner Container.
[4] Waste Toner Screw The waste toner inside the Waste Toner Container is made uniformly even.
M02 Bk Drum_ITB Motor The Bk Drum Unit Cleaning Screw is driven.
The ITB Cleaning Screw is driven.
80
2. Technology
No. Parts name Role

M03 CL Drum Motor The Y/M/C Drum Unit Cleaning Screw is driven.
M17 Waste Toner Feed Motor The Waste Toner Screw is driven.
To make the waste toner inside the Waste Toner Container uniformly even.
UN30 Waste Toner Sensor PCB Waste Toner Container full level detection
SW01 Waste Toner Container Detection Waste Toner Container detection
Switch
■ Waste Toner Container Full Level Detection

Purpose
To detect the LIFE and Remaining Days of the Waste Toner Container to notify the replacement timing.
Waste Toner Waste Toner Container
Registration Motor
M17
UN30
Waste Toner Sensor
[ Waste Toner Container
[ Toner low : SensorON ] preparation warning
: Sensor OFF ]
UN04
DC Controller PCB
Video count
Number of sheets
The LIFE and Remaining Days of the Waste Toner Container can be checked in the following menus and the service modes.
Checking the consumption level

(Control panel): [Status Monitor/Cancel] > [Consumables/Others] > [Consumables] > [Check Consumables]
(Remote UI): [Status Monitor/Cancel] > [Check Consumables]
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE
Waste Toner Container status notification
Detection de- Waste Toner Container Waste Toner Container Waste Toner Container Waste Toner Container
scription advance notice alarm *1 preparation warning full replacement completion
display*2 alarm
Detection timing When Remaining Days until When Remaining Days until When toner has supplied to When the Waste Toner
the Waste Toner Container the Waste Toner Container the Developing Unit certain Sensor PCB (UN75) detec-
becomes full has reached becomes full has reached times after the prior delivery ted "no Waste Toner" while
the setting value.*1 the setting value. *3 alarm/Waste Toner Con- "preparation warning" or
tainer preparation warning "full" is detected *5
(Conversion to printed
page: Approx. 4700 sheets
*4)
Detected to (loca- Waste Toner Sensor PCB Waste Toner Sensor PCB Waste Toner Sensor PCB Waste Toner Sensor PCB
tion) (UN30) (UN30) (UN30) + video count value, (UN30)
or the number of sheets fed
Message - The waste toner is nearly Replace the waste toner -
full. (Replacement not yet container.
needed.)
Machine operation Replacement not yet needed. Host machine stops Replacement not yet nee-
after display of ded.
message
Alarm code 11-0010 - 11-0001 11-0100
*1: Notification timing and display/hide of the Waste Toner Container advance notice alarm can be set in the following service
mode. (-1 to 365 day(s). The alarm not issued when the setting value is "-1".The default value varies according to the location.)
81
2. Technology
COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > WST-TNR

*2: Display / hide of the Waste Toner Container preparation warning message can be set in the following service mode. (0: Hide,
1: Display. The default value varies according to the location.)
COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > WST-TNR
*3: Remaining Days to display The Waste Toner Container preparation warning message can be set in the following service
mode.
COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > WST-TNR
*4: The number of printed sheets differs according to the usage environment/usage conditions.
*5:
The parts counter is automatically cleared, but it is not cleared if the Waste Toner Container is replaced while "preparation warning"
or "full" is not detected or while the power is off. In this case, the parts counter can be manually cleared by executing the following
service mode.
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WST-TNR
Note that all the following conditions must be met to clear the parts counter manually.
• Waste Toner Container is installed
• The sensor is not detected "Waste Toner Container full"
Error code
• E013-0001: Waste Toner Feed Motor error
Alarm code
• 11-0001: Waste Toner Container full
• 11-0010: Waste Toner Container preparation warning display
• 11-01000: Waste Toner Container replacement completion alarm
• 11-F010: Waste Toner Container high consumption alarm
Service mode
• Display / hide Waste Toner Container preparation warning display
COPIER > OPTION > PM-PRE-M > WST-TNR
• Settings of Remaining Days to display Waste Toner Container preparation warnings
COPIER > OPTION > PM-MSG-D > WST-TNR
• Settings of Waste Toner Container advance notice alarm notice timing
COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > WST-TNR
• Checking the generation status of high consumption alarm
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > STC-REC
■ Waste Toner Container Detection

Purpose
To detect the presence/absence of the Waste Toner Container
Control description
The Waste Toner Container Detection Switch (SW01) is used to detect the presence/absence of the Waste Toner Container.
SW01
82
2. Technology
Image Stabilization Control

■ Overview
Purpose
To control to prevent image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of parts to ensure stabilized print image
Control description
Various controls are performed to form patch pattern [1] on the ITB and read the patch pattern using the Registration Patch Sensor
Unit (Front/Rear) (UN46/47).
[1]
UN47
UN46
Related Alarm Codes

• 10-0006: Patch Sensor error 1
• 10-0007: Patch Sensor error 2
■ Control Timing List

Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment and condition of image formation parts.
Following shows the control items at each sequence.
Control tim- Conditions for execution Type of control

ing Laser power D-half con- ARCDAT Color dis- Patch Sen- PASCAL
correction trol control placement sor adjust- control
control correction ment
control
At power-on Normal temperature environ- - - Yes - - -
ment
High temperature and high Yes Yes Yes - Yes -
humidity environment
8 hours or more have elapsed - - Yes - - -
in high-speed startup mode
At initial installation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
At recovery 8 hours or more have elapsed Yes - Yes - - -
from sleep in sleep mode
mode 8 hours or more have elapsed Yes Yes Yes - Yes -
in sleep mode (high temper-
ature and high humidity envi-
ronment).
When a job At initial rotation when a sud- Yes - - Yes - -
starts den environmental change is
detected
At paper inter- Every 100 accumulated im- - - Yes - - -
val ages
83
2. Technology
Control tim- Conditions for execution Type of control

ing Laser power D-half con- ARCDAT Color dis- Patch Sen- PASCAL
correction trol control placement sor adjust- control
control correction ment
control
At job comple- At last rotation performed ev- - - Yes - - -
tion ery 50 accumulated images
At last rotation performed ev- Yes Yes Yes - Yes -
ery 500 accumulated images
(high temperature and high
humidity environment)
At last rotation performed ev- Yes Yes Yes - Yes -
ery 1000 accumulated im-
ages
At parts re- When replacing the Drum Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
placement Unit
When replacing the Develop- Yes Yes Yes - Yes -
ing Unit (when INISET-
Y/M/C/K/4C is executed in
service mode)
When the Set- When Auto Gradation Adjust- Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes
tings/Registra- ment > Full Adjust is execu-
tion menu is ted
executed When Auto Gradation Adjust- Yes Yes Yes - Yes -
ment > Quick Adjust is exe-
cuted
When Correct Shading is Yes Yes Yes - - -
executed
When Auto Correct Color - - - Yes - -
Mismatch is executed
■ Laser Power Correction (D-max) Control

Purpose
Determines the optimal laser output.
Control description
1. The Main Controller PCB forms the patch pattern of the target color on the ITB.
2. The DC Controller measures the patch density using the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front/Rear) (UN46/47) and
corrects the laser output for each color to get the target density.
■ D-half Control
Purpose
Optimal image gradation is determined.
Control description
1. The Main Controller PCB outputs patch data in each color (Y, M, C, and Bk) to the DC Controller PCB.
2. The DC Controller PCB forms a patch pattern of each color (Y/M/C/Bk) on the ITB from this data.
3. The DC Controller measures the patch pattern using the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front/Rear) (UN46/47) and
the result is sent to the Main Controller PCB.
4. Based on the data above, the Main Controller PCB executes gradation correction to obtain the ideal halftone image.
■ ARCDAT Control (Automatic and Reciprocal Color Density Adjustment

Technology)
Purpose
While reducing downtime, the ideal gradation characteristics are realized.
84
2. Technology
Control description
1. The Main Controller PCB outputs patch data in each color (Y, M, C, and Bk) to the DC Controller PCB.
2. The DC Controller PCB forms a patch pattern of each color (Y/M/C/Bk) on the ITB.
3. The DC Controller PCB measures the patch pattern using the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front/Rear) (UN46/47)
and the result is returned to the Main Controller PCB.
4. The Main Controller PCB compares this measured data with the reference data for ARCDAT control that has been
backed up. The difference by comparison is reflected to the D-half result as the offset value.
■ Color Displacement Correction Control

Purpose
To correct color displacement caused by uneven exposure (skew/bent) from the Laser Scanner Unit or uneven rotation of
the drum/ITB
Control description
Color displacement is corrected by forming a patch for color displacement on the ITB and reading the amount of color
displacement by the Patch Sensor.
1. A patch pattern (short/long) for each color is formed on the ITB.
2. This patch pattern is read by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front/Rear) (UN46/47) to detect the amount of color
displacement compared to the reference color (Y).
85
2. Technology
3. Based on the above-mentioned detection result, correction is performed according to the amount of color
displacement.
Long patch pattern
Y M C Bk Y M C Bk
8 Set 2 Set
Short patch pattern
Y M C Bk Y M C Bk
2 set 1 Set
Type Patch pattern

Patch for correction in horizon- Y M C Bk
tal scanning direction
Patch for correction in vertical Y M C Bk

scanning direction
NOTE:
Short pattern is normally used as the patch pattern used when performing color displacement correction.
Long pattern is used only for the following cases:
• When executing Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Correction description
Type of control Correction description

Correction in Write start correc- Write-start timing in horizontal scanning direction is changed.
horizontal tion
scanning di- Entire-area mag- Pixels in horizontal scanning direction is increased or decreased (at the both edges of the
rection nification ratio image)
correction
Correction in Write start correc- Write-start timing in vertical scanning direction is changed.
vertical scan- tion
ning direction Image skew cor- Image data is corrected.
rection
Related Alarm Codes

There is no color displacement alarm for Y because Y is the reference for the laser light.
• 34-0003: Auto registration adjustment
• 34-0024: The correction value (M) of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction exceeded the upper
limit during fine adjustment of color displacement
• 34-0026: The correction value (M) of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction exceeded the upper
86
2. Technology
• 34-0034: The correction value (C) of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction exceeded the upper
• 34-0036: The correction value (C) of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction exceeded the upper
• 34-0044: The correction value (Bk) of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction exceeded the upper
• 34-0046: The correction value (Bk) of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction exceeded the
upper limit during fine adjustment of color displacement
• 34-2201: As a result of wrong detection processing, data that can be used for correction in the vertical scanning
direction was not found (M)
• 34-2211: As a result of wrong detection processing, data that can be used for correction in the horizontal scanning
direction was not found (M)
direction was not found (C)
direction was not found (C)
direction was not found (Bk)
direction was not found (Bk)
• 34-5001: The value of the color displacement patch exceeded the upper limit (front side)
• 34-5003: The value of the color displacement patch exceeded the upper limit (rear side)
■ Patch Sensor Adjustment

Purpose
The correction of the Patch Sensor light intensity and sampling of the ITB background are performed.
Configuration of the Patch Sensor

The light produced by the LED is reflected from the patch image and detected by the light-receiving element.
There are two types of waves that are P wave and S wave, and the light intensity is detected by the light-receiving element.
Patch Sensor
P-wave S-wave
Light-receiving Light-emitting Light-receiving
element element element
Patch image
P-wave :
S-wave :
Light intensity adjustment

The light intensity of the Patch Sensor is changed sequentially and adjusted such that the P wave output becomes the control
value.
Sampling of the ITB background

To prevent uneven reflection in the inner circumference of the ITB, the background of the whole circumference of the ITB is
sampled by the Patch Sensor without forming patches.
The patch image that is read is compared with the sampling results of the ITB background to read the density.
87
2. Technology

• Display of the ITB rear side background light intensity (P-wave):
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-Y
• Display of the ITB front side background light intensity (P-wave):
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-C
• Display of the ITB rear side background light intensity (S-wave):
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-S-Y
• Display of the ITB front side background light intensity (S-wave):
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-S-C
■ Auto Gradation Adjustment (PASCAL) Control

Purpose
Gradation density characteristics on the image are stabilized.
This control is executed when "Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust" is selected in the Settings/Registration menu. Gradation
density of the patch pattern on the test print is scanned by the Reader to create an image density correction table.
The foregoing table corrects image gradation density characteristics which change according to the environment change and
deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum.
Control timing
When Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust is being
executed
Control description
1. When the specified conditions are satisfied, the Main Controller PCB prints 3 types of memorized test prints (patch pattern).
2. Place the test prints in the Reader.
3. The reader scans the gradation density of the patch pattern from the test prints.
4. The Main Controller PCB creates an image gradation density correction table from the gradation density data of patch pattern
scanned by the Reader.
Reader
Patch image data
Printer
PASCAL control

• Setting of auto gradation adjustment target selection screen:
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > HPFL-DSP
Other Controls
■ Special Controls
This machine has the following sequences as the special sequence.
Developing Discharge
Black Band Sequence Sequence
Solid black band Solid color band (Y/M/C/BK)
88
2. Technology
● Black Band Sequence

Execution condition/timing
hen the travel distance of the drum or the ITB has exceeded the designated value
Control description
In order to prevent the Cleaning Blades flip, toner is supplied to the Drum Cleaning Blade and the ITB Cleaning Blade.
Transparency Black Band Sequence
When a predetermined number of transparency films have been fed
Control description
When a large number of transparency films are fed, surfactant adheres to the ITB, which causes image failures due to degradation
of transfer efficiency. Therefore, a solid Bk patch is formed on the ITB to remove the surfactant together with toner.
● Developing Discharge Sequence

When the average image ratio per sheet reaches the default value or less
Control description
Supply a toner in ITB, then maintain ability for developing.
■ Warm-up Rotation Control

* The Developing Unit idle rotation time: Short: Approx. 15 seconds, Long: Approx. 30 seconds
Purpose
To check the status of sensor/motor at power-on or recovery from sleep mode.
Control description
According to the conditions, one of the following 3 patterns of warm-up rotation is performed: none, short, or long.
Condition Pattern
Power-on Short
When the power is turned ON (at quick startup) (High temperature and high humid- None
ity environment
Not a high temperature and high hu- None
midity environment
When recovering from sleep mode (8 hours or more (High temperature and high humid- Long
have elapsed in sleep mode) ity environment
Not a high temperature and high hu- Short
midity environment
When the door is closed (High temperature and high humid- None
ity environment
Not a high temperature and high hu- None
midity environment
Warm-up rotation control is not executed when "Insert the waste toner container.", "Replace the waste toner container.", or
"Replace toner cartridge. (Black)" is displayed.
Warm-up rotation control Long Short None

Primary Transfer ATVC Yes Yes No
Developing Unit idle rotation Yes Yes No
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller cleaning Yes Yes No
Patch Sensor adjustment Yes No No
Laser light intensity correction (D-max) control Yes No No
D-half control Yes No No
89
2. Technology
Warm-up rotation control Long Short None

ARCDAT Yes Yes No
■ Behavior when color printing is limited or there is no color toner

Purpose
To enable B&W printing and copying without stopping the entire printing function when an error attributed to the Y/M/C Developing
Unit or when there is no Y/M/C toner.
When color printing is limited or there is no color toner, the following Settings/Registration menu cannot be executed:
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct Shading
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color Mismatch
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Clean Inside Main Unit
Related error code

• E012-0001: CL Drum Motor error
• E020-01A8: Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error
• E020-02A8: Toner Density Sensor (M) output error
• E020-03A8: Toner Density Sensor (C) output error
• E020-01B8: Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error
• E020-02B8: Toner Density Sensor (M) output error
• E020-03B8: Toner Density Sensor (C) output error
• E020-01C8: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Y)
• E020-02C8: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (M)
• E020-02C8: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (C)
90
2. Technology
Fixing System
Overview
In the fixing system, toner that has been transferred to the paper by process in the image formation system is fixed.
This machine uses the on-demand fixing method for fixing.
[3]
[2] PS10
H01 [1]
No. Name
[1] Fixing Pressure Roller
[2] Fixing Film
[3] Sensor Flag
H01 Fixing Heater
PS10 Fixing Delivery Sensor
• Improved replaceability of the Fixing Unit

Easy replacement without screws or tools
• Setting of Fixing Unit sub parts and improved replaceability
Fixing Unit sub parts (Fixing Film Unit, Fixing Pressure Roller and Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support) are set as service
parts, enabling easy replacement.
• Detection of whether the Fixing Unit is new
Whether the Fixing Unit is new can be detected.
■ Specifications
Item Function/Method
Fixing method On-demand fixing
Heater Ceramic Heater
Protection function Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor, and Temperature Fuse
When an error is detected, power supply to the Fixing Heater is shut down.
91
2. Technology
■ Major Components
[1]
[2]
UN31
H01
PS10
TH01_01
TH01_02
TP01
TH01_03
No. Parts name Function/Method

[1] Fixing Pressure Roller A toner image on paper is fixed by applying heat and pressure.
[2] Fixing Film Unit
H01 Fixing heater For heating the center/edges of the Fixing Film (Ceramic Heater)
TH01_02 Main Thermistor This is engaged with Heater.
Temperature is controlled and abnormal temperature increase is detected.
TH01_01 Sub Thermistor 2 This is engaged with Heater. (Non paper feed area. Installed at the rear side of the host
machine.)
Temperature is controlled, and temperature at the edge and abnormal temperature increase
are detected.
TH01_03 Sub Thermistor 1 This is engaged with Heater. (Non paper feed area. Installed at the front side of the host
machine.)
Temperature is controlled, and temperature at the edge and abnormal temperature increase
are detected.
TP01 Fixing Temperature Fuse Heater non contact type
AC power supply is shut down at detection of a failure.
PS10 Fixing Delivery Sensor Jam Detection
UN31 Fixing Fuse PCB Detection of whether the Fixing Unit is new
92
2. Technology
Overview of Fixing Temperature Control

Fixing
temperature STBY INTR PRNT
Startup Sheet-t
(warm-up During-print o-sheet
Flying start control
rotation) control
control temperature
control temperature
temperature
temperature
Time
Command for Command for
flying start print start
■ Standby Temperature Control

This is a control to pre-heat the Fixing Assembly to reduce time to start printing.
• Flying Start
■ Print Temperature Control

This control is executed to increase a fixing temperature to the target level and keep it during printing.
• Startup (initial rotation) temperature control
• Initial rotation extension temperature control (only for media which size in width is wider than 300 mm)
• Print temperature control
• Paper interval temperature control
■ Down Sequence Control

This control is executed to prevent a fixing failure due to temperature increase at the edge or temperature decrease. When this
control is executed, throughput decreases.
• Down sequence when small-size paper is fed
• Down sequence when using paper of mixed sizes and types
Standby Temperature Control

Fixing
temperature
STBY INTR PRNT
Flaying start
control
temperature
Command for Time

Command for
flying start print start
93
2. Technology
■ Flying start temperature control

Purpose
To reduce time to print the first sheet (FCOT).
Startup conditions
• When pressing the Numeric Keypad on the Control Panel/Touch Panel
• When the Main Power Switch is ON*1
• When recovering from sleep mode to standby mode*1
• At completion of jam removal*1
• When opening and closing the Front/Right Door*1
*1: This control is performed regardless of setting whether to execute Service Mode COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FLYING.
Control description
When the target temperature of the temperature control is reached, the Fixing Motor is controlled at 1/2 speed to start operation.
The control continues for 15 seconds at most until the machine receives a command to start printing.

• ON/OFF of flying start temperature control (Lv.2):
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FLYING
Print Temperature Control
Fixing
temperature
STBY INTR PRNT
Startup (warm-up During print

Sheet-to-sheet
rotation)control control
control temperature
temperature temperature
Time
Command for Command for
Flying start print start
■ Startup (initial rotation) Temperature Control

A fixing temperature is increased to a printable temperature after receiving a command to start printing.
■ Temperature Control by Extended Initial Rotation

The control to extend the initial rotation time is executed for media wider than 300 mm because heat at the edges of the heater
may be insufficient.
■ Print Temperature Control

An appropriate target temperature is set according to the number of sheets, paper type, and environment at continuous printing.
The temperature of the Fixing Heater is controlled according to the result of detection by the Main Thermistor (TH01_02).
■ Paper Interval Temperature Control

The paper interval temperature is decreased to prevent temperature increase when the paper interval becomes wider than a
normal condition*1.
Paper Interval Temperature = Target temperature during printing - (25 to 50 deg C)*2
94
2. Technology
*1: At down sequence

• During auto 2-sided mode
• During small-size mode
• At execution of controls (ATR control, registration control, ATVC control)
*2: Determined according to the time which elapsed from when fixing temperature control (including standby control) finished last
time and the fixing temperature when startup control started.

Display the detected temperature of the thermistor
• Display of the temperature at the center of the Fixing Heater:
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E
• Display of the temperature at the front edge of the Fixing Heater:
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E2
• Display of the temperature at the rear edge of the Fixing Heater:
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E3
Set the fixing control temperature

• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Plain 1, Color):
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > TEMP-TBL
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Heavy 1):
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TBL2
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Thin 1)
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Envelope):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Plain 2, tracing paper, pre-punched paper):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Transparency):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Coated 1):
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB10
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Recycled 1):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Plain 3):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Extra-long Plain):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Extra-long Heavy 1):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Extra-long Heavy 2):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Plain 1, 1/2 speed):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Thin 2):
• Setting of the fixing control temperature (Heavy 5/Label/Postcard):
95
2. Technology

Down Sequence Control

■ Down sequence when small-size paper is fed
DC Controller PCB
TH01_01 (UN04)
TH01_02
TP01
H01
Small size
paper TH01_03 Low-voltage
Power Supply Unit
(UN01)
Non-feed area
Small size
paper
Fixing Film
Non-feed area
Purpose
To prevent fixing offset and deterioration of the Fixing Film by controlling temperature increase at a non paper feed area at
continuous printing of small-size paper (paper with the width-direction length of LTR landscape or less)
Startup conditions
When the temperature detected by the Sub Thermistor 1 (TH01_03) or Sub Thermistor 2 (TH01_01) has reached a specified
temperature or higher during printing.
Operation
The paper interval is increased to lower the temperature and adjust it slightly below the target printing temperature.
Extend the paper spacing until the Detection temperature drops to the specified value.For the print speed during this control,
refer to “iAC3530 III” on page 13.

• Set temperature to start down sequence when feeding small-size paper
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > FX-D-TMP
■ Down Sequence When Using Paper of Mixed Sizes and Types

Purpose
When feeding a sheet with a wider width than a preceding sheet during continuous printing, temperature at the non paper-feed
area of the Fixing Film increases, causing fixing offset and wrinkles upon feeding succeeding sheets. This down sequence controls
temperature increase at the non paper feed area of the Fixing Film.
96
2. Technology
Non-feeding area
Fixing Film
A4R A4
Non-feeding area
Startup conditions
When the difference between the higher temperature detected by either the Sub Thermistor 1 (TH01_03) or the Sub Thermistor
2 (TH01_01) and the temperature of the Main Thermistor (TH01_02) is the specified temperature or higher at the time a sheet
with a width wider than the preceding one is fed during printing.
Operation
The paper interval is increased to decrease temperature, and feeding the succeeding sheet and power supply to the Heater are
stopped.
Termination condition
This down sequence is terminated at the point when any of the following conditions is satisfied.
• The difference between the higher temperature detected by either Sub Thermistor 1 (TH01_03) or Sub Thermistor 2 (TH01_
01) and the temperature of the Main Thermistor 1 (TH01_02) has become the specified temperature or less.
• A maximum of 30 seconds has elapsed since the preceding sheet passed the fixing nip.
Film Unit Engagement/Disengagement Control

Control description
The Fixing Film Unit is disengaged from the Fixing Pressure Roller under a specific condition in order to prevent deformation of
the Fixing Film/Fixing Pressure Roller due to heat and pressure that arise when the drive of the Fixing Pressure Roller stops, and
to improve jam removability.
Engaged state Disengaged state
PS13 [1] PS13 [1]

Sensor flag is ON Sensor flag is OFF
[2] [2]
[3] [4] [3] [4]
No. Name
[1] Pressure Release Gear
[2] Cam Gear
[3] Fixing Film
97
2. Technology
No. Name
PS13 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
Engagement operation
• At power-on (*)
• At recovery from sleep mode (*)
• At warm-up rotation
• When the Fixing Pressure Roller is in a disengaged position at the start of a job
* Cannot be executed when the 24V interlock is disconnected due to reasons such as door being open.
Disengagement operation
Since this machine enters sleep mode without disengaging the Fixing Pressure Roller, the fixing pressure operation of the
roller can be skipped when the machine recovers, which shortens the startup time. Therefore, if the Power Switch is turned
OFF during sleep mode or the machine is left in sleep mode for a specified period of time, it is necessary to disengage the
Fixing Pressure Roller.
• When the Power Switch is OFF
• When the Power Switch is OFF during sleep mode
• When the machine is left in sleep mode for 4 hours
• When a power-on jam occurs
• At occurrence of a jam
• When the Right Door is opened and closed while the fixing disengagement operation cannot be executed because of
disconnection of the 24V interlock due to a door open jam
• When the machine is left in standby for 4 hours
Related error code

• E009-0000: Fixing engagement timeout error
• E009-0001: Fixing disengagement timeout error
Fixing Slight Rotation Function

Purpose
When the Fixing Pressure Roller and Fixing Film are continually engaged in the same position for a long time because the machine
has been left inactive for an extended period, the Fixing Film may become deformed. In order to prevent this problem, the Fixing
Pressure Roller and Fixing Film are rotated for a specified period of time when the machine has been left inactive.
Operation description
When the machine operates again after the specified period of time has elapsed since the last fixing operation, flying start control
is performed to drive the Fixing Pressure Roller and Fixing Film for the specified period of time.
Disengagement of the Fixing Film Unit is performed after drive is complete.
However, this control is only executed when the machine is in standby or in sleep mode. It is not executed when the power switch
is OFF, when an error has occurred, or when a jam has occurred.

• ON/OFF of horizontal line prevention for heavy paper/coated paper/transparency (Lv.2)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > FIX-RTTH
Fixing Arch Control

Purpose
To prevent image failure/feed failure
Control description
The slack of the paper is kept at a specified level when the paper is fed from the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller to the Fixing
Pressure Roller.
Since the feeding speed of the Fixing Pressure Roller and that of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller are not the same when
paper is fed to the Fixing Unit, image failure, paper wrinkle, image stretching, etc. occur.
98
2. Technology
To prevent these symptoms, one Arch Sensor (PS11) located at the inlet of the Fixing Unit detects the slack of paper and adjusts
the rotation speed of the Fixing Motor. This keeps an appropriate level of paper slack.
The Arch Sensor (PS11) detects the paper arch and changes the drive speed of the Fixing Motor as follows:
1. When the paper leading edge passes in front of the fixing nip area, drive speed of the Fixing Motor is reduced against the
process speed. The speed is maintained until the paper leading edge passes the fixing nip area.
2. Drive speed of the Fixing Motor is switched according to the status of the Arch Sensor (PS11).
• If the sensor remains ON for more than the specified period of time: Accelerated
• If the sensor remains OFF for more than the specified period of time: Decelerated
3. When the paper trailing edge passes the secondary transfer nip area, drive speed of the Fixing Motor drive returns to constant
speed.
Sensor : OFF Sensor : ON

Slack of paper is small Slack of paper is large
[1] [2]
PS11
* Values for A4/LTR plain paper. The change ratio varies according to the paper size.
No. Name
[1] Fixing Film
PS11 Arch Sensor
Fixing Unit Detection

The presence or absence of the Fixing Assembly is determined by an detection connection Fixing Assembly signal (FSR-CNCT-
THX).
Fixing Assembly connection Detection signal (FSR-CNCT-THX) is inputted to J121-13pin of DC Controller through J121-6pin(5V)
of DC Controller at the time of "power-on/recovery from sleep mode/closing of the cover/Jam restoration/power saving transition".
If the Fixing Unit is not detected, "Set the fixing assembly." is displayed on the Control Panel, and operation stops.
99
2. Technology
Detection of Whether the Fixing Unit is New

Purpose
The machine detects whether the Fixing Unit is new in order to clear the parts counter.
Control description
With this machine, the Fixing Fuse PCB (UN31) detects whether the Fixing Unit is new.
Installing a new Fixing Unit in the machine blows the fuse.
When a new unit is detected, the part counter (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UNIT) is cleared.
When a new Fixing Unit is installed after an error occurs and it is recognized as new, the error is automatically cleared.
When the part counter of the Fixing Unit (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UNIT) is cleared, the Fixing Film Unit replacement
completion alarm (alarm code: 43-0076) is generated.
Fixing Assembly
UN04 24V
Fuse detection signal
Fuse cut signal
UN31
Related error code

• E811-0000: Fuse in the Fixing Fuse PCB blowout error
Protection function
This machine has the following error codes to protect the Fixing Unit.
Error Codes Detail Code Description Clearing of error

E001 Detection of abnormal high temperature
0001 Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Necessary
0002 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 high temperature detection error Necessary
0004 Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Necessary
E002 Detection of abnormal temperature increase
0001 Main Thermistor temperature increase detection error Necessary
0002 Main Thermistor open circuit detection error Necessary
0003 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 open circuit detection error Necessary
0004 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 open circuit detection error Necessary
E003 Detection of low temperature
0004 Main Thermistor low temperature detection error Necessary
0005 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 low temperature detection error Necessary
0006 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 low temperature detection error Necessary
E004 Detection of a failure in fixing heater drive circuit
0001 Fixing Relay welding detection error Not necessary
0002 Fixing current detection error Not necessary
100
2. Technology
Error Codes Detail Code Description Clearing of error

E009 Fixing Film Unit engagement/disengagement error
0000 Fixing engagement timeout error Not necessary
0001 Fixing disengagement timeout error Not necessary
E808 Detection of a failure in zero cross circuit Not necessary
0001 Zero cross signal detection error Not necessary
0002 Zero cross signal detection error Not necessary
■ Actions to Take When the Fixing Unit Error (E001/E002/E003) Occurs

When a Fixing Unit-related error (E001, E002, or E003) occurred to previous models, a service visit was necessary to clear the
error in service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR).
This machine handles E001, E002 and E003 errors in the following manner to avoid service visits just to clear these errors:
Error Error Detection

First time Second time or later
E001 Displayed as E001 error (same as before)
E002 Displayed as 0CF Displayed as E002 error
E003 Displayed as E003 error
If the above errors occur, turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine.
When the specified number of sheets or more is printed after the first and subsequent error detections, the cause is determined
as incidental. In such cases, second and subsequent error detections are handled as a first error detections.
If the error is not cleared by turning OFF and then ON the power, it can be judged that a problem has occurred in the Fixing Unit.
In either case, the error does not need to be cleared in service mode as replacing the Fixing Unit with a new one blows the fuse
of the Fixing Fuse PCB and at the same time clears the error.
101
2. Technology
Pickup Feed System
Overview
■ Characteristics
Support for envelopes
Envelope can be fed from the cassette of the machine.
Improved Multi-purpose Tray usability

The usability has been improved by automatic paper size recognition for Multi-purpose Tray pickup.
■ Specifications
Stack Bypass
Item Description
Paper Feeding Retard separation method
Method
Paper Size A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, A5, A6R, 11"×17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXE, STMT, STMTS, 12”×18”, SRA3, K8,
K16, K16R, postcard (postal card, replay postcard, 4-side) , Envelope (Custom size:Crosstrack 98.0 - 320.0mm,
Intrack 98.0 - 457.2mm)
Custom size (98.4mm×139.7mm - 320mm×457.2mm)
Free size (98.4×139.7mm - 320.0mm×457.2mm)
(1200mm BW/CL printing is possible by service mode setting)
*Asia and Latin America only :
FLSP, OFI, G-LTR, G-LTRR, A-LTR, A-LTRR, G-LGL, I-LGL, A-FLSP, B-OFI, M-OFI, E-OFI, A-OFI, F4A
Envelope specification :
Long-edge feed : Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3, COM10 No.10, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL
Short-edge feed : Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3, Kakugata 2, COM10 No.10, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL
Paper Material Thin(52-63gsm), Plain (64-105gsm), Heavy (106-300gsm), Recycled (64-105gsm), Coated (106-256gsm), Color,
Tracing paper, OHP, Envelope, Pre-punched, Bond, Postcard, Labels
Coated (257-300gsm) is possible by media adjust kit and service mode setting
Coated (257-300gsm) and Heavy (257-300gsm) : SRA3 is not suported.
Custom size (98.4mm×139.7mm - 304.8mm×457.2mm)
Free size (98.4mm×139.7mm - 304.8mm×457.2mm)
Output Capacity 100 sheets (80gsm)
120 sheets (64gsm)
1 sheet (Coated paper(106-300gsm), Heavy (257-300gsm and Fed Length<=158.5mm))
Size Sensor Yes
Paper Sensor No
Cassette 1
Item Description
Method
Paper Size A4, B5, A5R, A5, A6R, LTR, EXE, K16, STMTR, postcard (postal card, replay postcard, 4-side)
Envelope(Nagagata3, Youkeinaga3, ISO-C5)
Custom sizes (139.7 x 182mm - 297 x 215.9mm)
Paper Material Thin (52 - 63gsm), Plain (64 - 105gsm), Color, Recycled (64 - 105gsm), OHP, Heavy (106 - 220gsm), Pre-punched,
Bond, Envelope
640 sheets (64gsm)
Size Sensor Yes
Paper Sensor Yes
102
2. Technology
Cassette 2
Item Description
Method
Paper Size A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, A5, A6R, 11"×17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXE, K8, K16, K16R, STMT, 12"×18", postcard
(postal card, replay postcard, 4-side), Envelope (Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3, Kakugata 2, Monarch, COM10 No.
10, DL)
Custom sizes (139.7 × 182 mm - 304.8 × 457.2 mm)
*Asia and Latin America only :
FLSP, OFI, G-LTR, G-LTRR, A-LTR, A-LTRR, G-LGL, I-LGL, A-FLSP, B-OFI, M-OFI, E-OFI, A-OFI, F4A
Paper Material Thin (52 - 63gsm), Plain (64 - 105gsm), Color, Recycled (64 - 105gsm), OHP, Heavy (106 - 220gsm), Pre-punched,
Bond, Envelope
640 sheets (64gsm)
Size Sensor Yes
Paper Sensor Yes
● Layout Drawing of Rollers
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[21] [5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[12]
[11]
[22]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[20] [16]
[17]
[19]
[18]
No. Name
[1] * Second Delivery/Reverse Roller
[2] * Third Delivery Roller
[3] * Reverse Vertical Path Roller 1
[4] * Duplex Roller 1
[5] Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2
[7] Duplex Roller 2
103
2. Technology
No. Name
[8] Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
[9] Registration Roller
[10] Duplex Merging Roller
[11] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
[12] Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
[13] Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller
[14] Cassette 1 Feed Roller
[15] Cassette 1 Separation Roller
[19] Cassette 2 Pickup Roller
[21] First Delivery Roller
[22] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
*: 1, 2, 3, and 4 do not exist if the 3-Way Unit is not installed.
● Layout Drawing of Sensors
[PS53]
[PS52]
[PS51]
[PS12]
[PS14]
[PS10]
[PS22]
[PS08]
[PS24]
No. Name
PS08 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor
PS10 Fixing Outlet Sensor
PS12 Reverse Sensor
PS14 First Delivery Sensor
PS22 Pre-Registration Sensor
PS51 Second delivery / Reverse sensor
104
2. Technology
No. Name
PS52 Third Delivery Sensor
PS53 Second Delivery Paper Full Sensor
* PS51 and PS52 do not exist on models without 3-Way Unit.
● Diagram of load drives

When the 3-Way Unit is connected
M31
SL06
M30
M09
M11
M12
M14
M07 M13
No. Name
M07 Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor
M09 Fixing Motor
M11 Duplex Reverse Motor
M12 Registration Motor
M13 Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup Motor
M14 Duplex Merging Motor
M30 Reverce Motor
M31 Second Delivery Motor
SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid
105
2. Technology
Without 3-Way Unit
SL06
M11
M09
M12
M14
M07 M13
No. Name
SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid
M09 Fixing Motor
M11 Duplex Reverse Motor
M13 Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup Motor
106
2. Technology
■ Paper Path
When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is connected
Acceleration section
Reverse Mouth
Third Delivery
Second Delivery
Reverse Mouth
First Delivery
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup
Cassette 1 Pickup
Cassette 2 Pickup
107
2. Technology
When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is not connected
Acceleration section
Reverse Mouth
First Delivery
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup
Cassette 1 Pickup
Cassette 2 Pickup
Cassette Pickup Assembly

M13 PS04
PS08
M07
PS05
M06 [1]
[2]
PS17
[3]
SW13 [4]
PS06
PS07
PS24 [7] [6] [5] [8]

PS19
SW16
SW15
No. Name
108
2. Technology
No. Name
M06 Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor
M13 Cassette 1,2 Feed/Multi-purpose Pickup Motor
SW13 Cassette 1 Size Switch
SW15 Cassette 2 Size Switch A
SW16 Cassette 2 Size Switch B
PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor
PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor
PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A
■ Drive Configuration
M07 M13
[1] [2]
[3]
M06 [4]
[5]
[6]
[9] [8] [7]
No. Name
[9] Lifting Plate
M06 Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor
■ Lifter Control
Paper inside a cassette is lifted up by the Lifting Plate.
The Lifting Plate is lifted up by rotating the Cassette Lifter Motor (M06).
109
2. Technology
When the paper surface reaches the position of the Pickup Roller, the Cassette1/2 Lifter Sensors (PS04/PS06) are turned ON
to detect that the paper has reached the pickup position.
Lifter Error Detection

At first and second failure of paper surface detection, Trailing Edge Guide Plate error is displayed on the Control Panel to prompt
the user to open and then close the cassette.
If paper surface detection fails for 3 consecutive times; then, no paper is displayed for the paper source and an alarm is issued.
Related alarm codes

• 04-0001: Cassette 1 Lifter Error
• 04-0002: Cassette 2 Lifter Error
• 04-0003: Cassette 3 Lifter error
• 04-0004: Cassette 4 Lifter error
■ Cassette Pickup Control

Rotation of the Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor (M07) feeds paper to the Vertical Path Roller.
The Cassette 1/2 Pickup Roller and the Cassette 1/2 Feed Roller are driven by the Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor (M07) while the
Vertical Path Roller is operated by the rotation of the Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup Motor (M13).
Pickup Retry Error

Pickup retry is executed when a delay jam is detected by the Vertical Path Sensor of the respective paper source.
An alarm code is notified when pickup retry fails the predetermined number of times.
Related Alarm Codes

• 04-0011: Cassette 1 paper feed retry error
■ Cassette Paper Size Detection/Cassette Detection

Result of automatic Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer*1
size detection All sizes A/B size Inch size A/K Size
A3 A3 A3 No corresponding size A3
B4 B4 B4 No corresponding size No corresponding size
A4R A4R A4R No corresponding size A4R
B5R B5R B5R No corresponding size No corresponding size
B5 B5 B5 No corresponding size No corresponding size
A5R Depends on the setting*2 A5R STMTR A5R
A6R A6R A6R No corresponding size A6R
11x17 11x17 No corresponding size 11x17 No corresponding size
LGL LGL No corresponding size LGL No corresponding size
LTR LTR No corresponding size LTR No corresponding size
LTRR LTRR No corresponding size LTRR No corresponding size
STMTR Depends on the setting*2 A5R STMTR A5R
12x18 12x18 No corresponding size 12x18 No corresponding size
EXEC Depends on the setting*3 No corresponding size EXEC K16
K8 K8 No corresponding size No corresponding size K8
K16 Depends on the setting*3 No corresponding size EXEC K16
K16R K16R No corresponding size No corresponding size K16R
Envelope Blank unless "Paper Settings" is performed due to non-standard size
Custom size
*1 : Set Cassette Paper Size Detection by the following menus. The setting of default is different according to region. Refer to
the table below for the combination of the settings.
Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition
110
2. Technology
List of Paper Size by Location
Location Default setting

US Inch size
CN A/K Size
Locations other than above A/B size
*2 : Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Paper Selection

*3 : Configure the setting that supports EXEC/16K (Cassette 1 to 4) in the following service mode (Lv. 2).
Cassette 1: COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-K-SW
Cassette 2: COPIER > OPTION > CST > C2-K-SW
Cassette 1
The Cassette 1 Size Switch detects the size of paper set in the cassette. The switch consists of 3 microswitches, and the width
is detected in accordance with the combination of ON/OFF. When the cassette presence/paper size is changed, the DC Controller
notifies the Main Controller of the status change.
In addition, the distinction between A5-R and STMT-R is determined by the user or service technician while that between EXEC
and K16 is determined by the service technician.
Presence of the cassette is detected when the size switch is pressed. (When none of the switches are pressed, it is judged as
"no cassette".)
NOTE:
When a failure occurred while the cassette of the host machine is being lifted up, the cassette presence/absence and paper size
status are not detected.
[1]
SW13
[2]
No. Name
[1] Trailing Edge Guide Plate
[2] Side Guide Plate
111
2. Technology
No. Name
SW13 Cassette 1 Size Switch
Cassette 2
The paper size in the cassette is automatically detected by the Cassette 2 Size Switch A/B after the position of the Guide Plate
is adjusted. The switch consists of 3 microswitches, and length and width are detected in accordance with the combination of
ON/OFF. When the cassette presence/paper size is changed, the DC Controller notifies the Main Controller of the status change.
In addition, the distinction between A5-R and STMT-R is determined by the user or service technician while that between EXEC
and K16 is determined by the service technician.
Presence of the cassette is detected when the size switch is pressed. (When none of the switches are pressed, it is judged as
"no cassette".)
SW16
[1] [2]
[4] SW15
[3]
No. Name
[1] Trailing Edge Guide Plate
[2] Link Arm
[3] Side Guide Plate
[4] Size Detection Plate
SW15 Cassette 2 Size Switch A
SW16 Cassette 2 Size Switch B
Related Setting/Registration
• Selection between A5-R and STMT-R in a cassette
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Paper Settings] > [A5R/STMTP Paper Selection]
Setting value: A5R, STMTR

• Setting that supports EXEC/16K (Cassette 1) :
COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-K-SW
112
2. Technology

COPIER > OPTION > CST > C2-K-SW
Cassette Heater
External Auxiliary: Refer to “Heater Control” on page 126.
■ Paper Level/Presence Detection

The level and presence of paper in the cassette are detected by following sensors.
Paper Sensor
Presence or absence of paper in the cassette is detected.
Lifter Sensor
This detects if the paper surface in the Cassette had been lifted up by the lifter control to the position that can be picked up.
When the paper surface is detected (and the lift up operation is stopped), the remaining amount is displayed based on the
detection state of Paper Level Sensor.
Paper Level Sensor

This is installed to the Lifter Unit and detects the paper level in the Cassette.
Calculation is performed according to rotating time of Cassette 1, 2 Lifter Motor (M06) to estimate the timing when the paper
level becomes less than 66% (*1).
When the paper level is less than 10%, this is detected by the Paper Level Sensor A.
The paper level is displayed in four levels on the Control Panel.
Level display
Level display Level Paper Level Sensor A Paper Sensor Lifter Sensor
100 to 66 % *1 OFF ON ON
66 to 10% *1 OFF ON ON
10 to 0% ON ON ON
0% - OFF ON
*1: The threshold value of level detection can be adjusted in the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-VLM1
113
2. Technology
[1]
ON PS05
ON
[1]
PS04
OFF
ON PS05
ON
OFF
ON PS05
ON
ON PS17
ON PS05
OFF
No. Name
[1] Paper
Cassette 1
PS04
[1] PS05
[2]
PS17
[3]
114
2. Technology
No. Name
[1] Lifter Gear
[2] Paper Detection Lever
[3] Lifting Plate
Cassette 2
[1] PS06
PS07
[2]
PS19
[3]
No. Name
[1] Lifter Gear
[2] Paper Detection Lever
[3] Lifting Plate
115
2. Technology
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly

PS30 PS31
UN29
[1]
[2]
PS32
M13
[3]
PS03
No. Name
[1] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
[2] Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
[3] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
PS03 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
PS30 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1
PS31 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2
PS32 Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor
UN29 Multi-purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB
■ Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Control

Paper is picked up from the Multi-purpose Tray by the reverse rotation of the Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup Motor
(M13).
Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor error

When an error in the Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup Motor (M13) or the Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor (PS32) is
detected, no paper is displayed for the Multi-purpose Tray pickup, and an alarm code is issued.
Multi-purpose Tray pickup retry error

Pickup retry is executed when a delay jam is detected by the Duplex Merging Sensor.
An alarm code is notified when pickup retry fails the predetermined number of times.
Related alarm codes

• 04-0007: MP Tray Lifter error
• 04-0017: Multi-purpose tray paper feed retry error
116
2. Technology
■ Multi-purpose Tray paper detection

Presence/absence of paper on the Multi-purpose Tray is detected by the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS03).
■ Multi-purpose Tray Automatic Size Detection

The size that is displayed is determined by the settings of automatic paper size detection.
The paper size shown below to which automatic size detection is performed is determined according to the setting of "Settings/
Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer".
List of Paper Size by Location
Location Default setting

US Inch size
CN A/K Size
Locations other than A/B size
above
Automatic size detection is performed by three sensors.

• Multi-purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB (UN29): Detects paper width
• Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 (PS30): Detects paper length
• Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 (PS31): Detects paper length
■ Long Length Paper

This machine supports long length paper.
1. Long length paper with 457.3 to 1200 mm in length can be used in the Multi-purpose Tray pickup by changing the setting of
service mode (MF-LG-ST) to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
2. Configure the long original mode in the following mode after changing the service mode setting.
[Copy] > [Other Functions] > [Long Original]
When setting Long Original, paper cannot be delivered to the Third Delivery Outlet.
Fixing/Registration Assembly
M14
M12 [2]
[1]
[3]
PS22
117
2. Technology
No. Name
1 Registration Roller
2 Duplex Merging Roller
3 Pre-Registration Sensor Flag
■ Registration Control
Purpose
This control corrects paper skew and aligns the leading edge of the paper with that of the image.
Skew Correction Control

The paper leading edge runs into the stopped Registration Roller, thereby generating an arch in order to correct the skew.
Then, non-stop registration control or stop registration control is executed according to the paper feed condition.
M14
M12 [4]
[2]
[1]
PS22
M14
M12 [4]
[2]
[1]
PS22
[3]
No. Name
1 Paper
2 Registration Roller
3 Slack
4 Duplex Merging Roller
The feed control to align the leading edge of paper with the leading edge of image uses the Pre-Registration Sensor as the
reference for detecting the leading edge, and "non-stop registration control" that accelerates or decelerates without stopping the
feed or "stop registration control" that temporarily stops paper feed is applied as appropriate.
118
2. Technology
Non-stop Registration Control

Control to align the leading edge of the paper with the leading edge of the image by accelerating or decelerating the feed speed
Paper is not stopped temporarily at the registration position, which makes it possible to shorten the paper interval between sheets
and improve the productivity.
Stop Registration Control

This control is executed to stop paper using the Registration Roller and resume feeding in accordance with the timing when the
image reaches the secondary transfer processing.
CAUTION:
Basically, "Non-stop Registration Control" is performed. If the Paper is delayed beyond the maximum correction distance
of the "Non-stop Registration Control", the Paper will not be in time for the image, so the result is 0190 jam.When the Paper
arrives earlier than the minimum correction distance of "Non-stop Registration Control", "Stop Registration Control" is
performed.
Reverse / Delivery Assembly

When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is connected
[5]
[1]
M31
[2] [7]
SL06
[3]
M30
[4]
M09
[6]
M11
No. Name No. Name

1 Second Delivery/Reverse Roller M09 Fixing Motor
2 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 1 M11 Duplex Reverse Motor
3 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 M30 Reverse Motor
4 First Delivery Roller M31 Second Delivery Motor
5 Third Delivery Roller SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid
6 Duplex Roller 2
7 Duplex Roller 1
119
2. Technology
When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is not connected
SL06
[2]
M11
[3] M09
[4]
No. Name No. Name

2 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 M09 Fixing Motor
3 First Delivery Roller M11 Duplex Reverse Motor
4 Duplex Roller 1 SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid
■ The Number of Circulating Sheets, Feed Path and Reverse/Standby Control at

1-sided/2-sided Feeding
With this machine, the number of circulating sheets, feed route, reverse position and standby position (1- and 2-sided) differ
according to the set length of fixed size paper and delivery outlet.
Standby timing at standby position (1- and 2-sided)

• When entering down sequence
• When executing auto adjustment
• When controller processing is delayed
Reverse Stop[R2]
/Standby Position[S4]
Reverse Stop[R1]
/Standby Position[S3]
Standby Position[S2]
Standby Position[S1]
Long path
Short path
Reverse position and standby position (1- and 2-sided)
Standby position and stop position
Standby position Reverse stop position

Symbol At 1-sided feeding At 2-sided feeding Symbol At 1-sided feeding At 2-sided feeding
S1 -- Yes R1 -- Yes
S2 -- Yes R2 -- Yes
120
2. Technology
Standby position Reverse stop position

Symbol At 1-sided feeding At 2-sided feeding Symbol At 1-sided feeding At 2-sided feeding
S3 Yes Yes -- -- --
S4 -- Yes -- -- --
When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is not installed

When the 3-Way Unit is not installed, the short path is the only feed route.
Standard size Paper length Delivery Number of Feed path Reverse po- Standby posi-
circulating sition tion
sheets
STMT, A5 92 to 181.9 mm First deliv- Duplex not supported
ery
B5 to LTR or smaller 182 to 216 mm First deliv- 3 sheets Short path R1 S1, S2, S3
ery
Longer than LTR to 12 x 216.1 to 457.2 mm First deliv- 1 sheet Short path R1 S1, S2, S3
18 or smaller ery
When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is installed
Standard size Paper length Delivery Number of Feed path Reverse po- Standby position
circulating sition
sheets
STMT, A5 92 to 181.9 mm First deliv- Duplex not supported
ery
Second de-
livery
Third deliv-
ery
B5 to LTR or smaller 182 to 216 mm First deliv- 3 sheets Short path R1 S1, S2, S3
ery
Second de-
livery
Third deliv-
ery
Longer than LTR to small- 216.1 to 296.9 mm First deliv- 3 sheets Long path R2 S1, S2, S4
er than A4R ery
Second de-
livery
Third deliv-
ery
A4R or larger, smaller 297 to 419.9 mm First deliv- 3 sheets Long path R2 S1, S2, S4
than A3 ery
Second de-
livery
Third deliv- 1 sheet Short path R1 S1, S2, S3
ery
A3 or larger, 11 x 17 or 420 to 432 mm First deliv- 3 sheets Long path R2 S1, S2, S4
smaller ery
Second de- 1 sheet Short path R1 S1, S2, S3
livery
Third deliv-
ery
Longer than 11 x 17 to 12 432.1 to 457.2 mm First deliv- 1 sheet Short path R1 S1, S2, S3
x 18 or smaller ery
Second de-
livery
Third deliv- Delivery not supported
ery
121
2. Technology
Since the same drive is used for the delivery from the third delivery and the duplex path, the productivity is lower than that of the
delivery from the first/second delivery.
Jam Detection
Code No.* Symbol Sensor name Jam type (XX)* IO > DCON
01 02 07 0A 0B 1 = Paper present
xx01 PS08 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sen- Yes No No Yes No P006L > bit7 > 1: Paper
sor present
xx02 PS24 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sen- Yes No No Yes No P006L > bit6 > 1: Paper
sor present
xx03 PS101 Cassette 3 Vertical Path Sen- Yes No No Yes No P008H > bit4 > 1: Paper
sor present
xx04 PS106 Cassette 4 Vertical Path Sen- Yes No No Yes No P008H > bit3 > 1: Paper
sor present
xx06 PS10 Fixing Delivery Sensor Yes Yes Yes Yes No P006L > bit2 > 1: Paper
present
xx07 PS14 First Delivery Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P006L > bit1 > 1: Paper
present
xx08 PS51 Second Delivery/Reverse Yes Yes No Yes No P008H > bit2 > 1: Paper
Sensor present
xx09 PS52 Third Delivery Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P008H > bit1 > 1: Paper
present
xx0A PS12 Reverse Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P003L > bit1 > 1: Paper
present
xx0B PS22 Pre-Registration Sensor Yes Yes No Yes No P006L > bit5 > 1: Paper
present
xx0C PS11 Arch Sensor - - - Yes - P006L > bit4 > 1: Paper
present
Yes: Detected, No: Not detected

* : xx = 01: delay, 02: stationary, 07: wrapped around the Fixing Roller, 0A: power ON, 0B: door open
122
2. Technology
External Auxiliary System
Software Counter Control

This machine has software counters which count the number of prints/copies according to the job type. Various counters are
displayed by pressing the Check Counter key on the Control Panel. The default counters for each region/location (model) are
listed below.
Target Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Target re-
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 gion code
Japan mod- Total 1 To- Copy (Full Total A (Full *1 *1 *1 *1 JP
el type1 tal(Black1) Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
gle Color/1) gle Color1)
101 108 232 149 000 000 000 000
Japan mod- Total 2 Copy (Full Total A (Full Copy Total A *1 *1 *1 JP
el type2 Color + Sin- Color + Sin- (Black2) (Black2)
gle Color/2) gle Color/2)
102 231 148 222 133 000 000 000
Taiwan Total 1 To- Copy + Print Copy + Print Total(Single *1 *1 *1 TW
model tal(Black1) (Full Color / (Full Color / Color1)
Large) Small)
101 108 401 402 118 000 000 000
UL model Total 1 To- Copy (Full Copy (Full Print (Full Print (Full *1 *1 US
type1 tal(Black1) Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
gle Color/ gle Color/ gle Color/ gle Color/
Large) Small) Large) Small)
101 108 229 230 321 322 000 000
UL model Total2 To- Copy (Full Copy (Full Print (Full Print (Full *1 *1 US
type2 tal(Black2) Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
102 109 229 230 321 322 000 000
General Total 1 To- Copy + Print Copy + Print Total(Single Total 1 (2- *1 *1 SG/KO/CN
model tal(Black1) (Full Color / (Full Color / Color1) Sided)
Large) Small)
101 108 401 402 118 114 000 000
UK model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 GB
type1 (Black/ (Black/ Color + Sin- Color + Sin- 1) 1)
Large) Small) gle Color/ gle Color/
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
240V UK Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 GB
model type2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
CA model Total 1 To- Copy (Full Copy (Full Print (Full Print (Full *1 *1 AU
tal(Black1) Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
101 108 229 230 321 322 000 000
FRN model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 FR
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
FRN model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 FR
type2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
GER model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 DE
Large) Small)
123
2. Technology
Target Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Target re-
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 gion code
GER model 112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000 DE
type1
GER model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 DE
type2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
AMS model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/
type1 (Black/ (Black/ Color + Sin- Color + Sin- 1) 1) NO/DK/FI/P
Large) Small) gle Color/ gle Color/ L/HU/CZ/SI/
Large) Small) GR/EE/RU/
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000 NL/SK/RO/
HR/BG/TR
AMS model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/
type2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 NO/DK/FI/P
L/HU/CZ/SI/
GR/EE/RU/
NL/SK/RO/
HR/BG/TR
ITA model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 IT
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
ITA model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 IT
type2 101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
China mod- Total 1 Total Total Total (Full Total (Full *1 *1 *1 CN
el (Black/ (Black/ Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
Large) Small)
101 112 113 122 123 000 000 000
*1 : Hidden by default. Can be changed in service mode.
Description of symbols
• Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction)
• Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction)
• Total: When a sheet of paper is delivered, the counter is advanced by 1
• 2-Sided: The counter is advanced by 1 for paper delivered in 2-sided mode
• Change the country/region code of CONFIG in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CONFIG
• Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service mode items.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER1 to COUNTER8
• COUNTER 2 to COUNTER 8 can be changed in the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > USER
• The type of counter display can be switched between the former and new methods in the following service mode
COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW
Region code
Region Region Region Region Region Region

code code code
JP Japan ES Spain RU Russia
US United States SE Sweden SK Slovakia
GB United Kingdom PT Portugal RO Romania
FR France NO Norway HR Croatia
DE Germany DK Denmark BG Bulgaria
IT Italy FI Finland TR Turkey
AU Australia PL Poland TH Thailand
SG Singapore HU Hungary VN Vietnam
NL Netherlands CZ Czech Republic AR Argentine
KR Korea SI Slovenia IN India
CN China GR Greece TW Taiwan
124
2. Technology
Region Region Region Region Region Region

code code code
EE Estonia
■ Count-up Timing
Count-up timing differs according to the following:
• Print mode (1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print, 1st side of 2-sided print)
• Delivery position (Finisher)
Count-up timing list
No. Delivery position Print mode

1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print 1st side of 2-sided print
1 Host First Delivery When detected by the First Delivery Sensor (PS14) When detected by the Reverse Sensor
ma- Tray (PS12)
chine Second Delivery When detected by the Second Delivery/Reverse Sensor
Tray (PS51)
Third Delivery When detected by the Third Delivery Sensor (PS52)
Tray*
2 When the Finisher is in- Finisher: When detected by the Entrance Sensor (S1)
stalled
*: In the case of installing the 3 Way Unit-D1
Fan Control
■ Location of Fans
FM04
FM01
FM03
FM02
No. Name Function Error codes

FM01 Front Fan Cools paper delivered from the first delivery and second delivery, Drum E806-0100
Unit, and Toner Bottle E806-0101
FM02 Power Supply Cooling Fan Cools the Low-Voltage Power Supply and Main Controller E804-0000
FM03 Motor Fan Cools the Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor, Second Delivery Motor*, and E806-0200
Third Delivery Motor* E806-0201
FM04 Controller Fan Cools the Main Controller E880-0001
* Option
■ Speed Control
Of the fans installed in this machine, the Front Fan (FM01), the Motor Fan (FM03), the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM02) and
the Controller Fan (FM04) are subject to speed control. Each controller switches voltages to switch the fan rotation speed.
125
2. Technology
Fan Drive Sequence
Controlled by DCON MCON

Fan Name Front Fan Power Supply Cool- Motor Fan Controller Fan
( FM01 ) ing Fan ( FM03 ) ( FM04 )
( FM02 )
Standby Stopped Stopped Stopped Stopped
At printing 1-sided Half speed Full speed Half speed Full speed
2-sided Full speed Full speed Half speed Full speed
Reader operation Stopped Half speed Stopped Full speed
Sleep Stopped Stopped Stopped Stopped
Others JAM / ERR Stopped Half speed Stopped Stopped
Detection of rise Full speed Full speed Full speed Stopped
temperature
Heater Control
Name Role
Cassette Heater (host machine) Prevents paper in the Cassettes 1/2 from absorbing moisture
Cassette Heater (Cassette Pedestal) Prevents paper in the Cassettes 3/4 from absorbing moisture
Reader Heater Prevents condensation on the Scanner Unit and the Reading Glass
Inside Heater Prevents condensation inside the machine
Conditions when each heater is turned ON

The heaters work as shown below when the Dehumidification Switch on the rear of the host machine is turned ON.
Inside Heater
State Reader Heater Cassette Heater 22 deg C or higher
Power OFF
*1
Power OFF ON ON ON OFF
During deep sleep ON ON ON OFF
Sleep Standby / Sleep 1 ON ON ON OFF
At standby OFF ON ON OFF
During printing operation OFF ON ON OFF
*1: External temperature can be checked in COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > TEMP.
Power-saving Function
■ Overview
This machine has the following power supply mode: "Standby" and "Sleep".
"Sleep" is further divided into the following 5 modes: "Sleep Standby", "Sleep 1", "Sleep 1 (when [Consider Network Connection]
is enabled)", "Sleep Exit", and "Deep Sleep".
126
2. Technology
Reader Control panel

State of power
supply ON
Standby Energy Saving
State of power
supply OFF
Engine
Main Controler
[Energy Saver] key

or [Energy Saver] key
A specified period
of time has passed
Sleep Mode
Sleep Standby
Energy Use Energy Use

“Low” “High”
Job end Job submission

Job submission Job end
Deep Sleep Sleep 1
*The time specified in Settings/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time
Standby
The state where the machine is operating or can start operation immediately and all power is supplied.
The machine enters Sleep mode when the [Energy Saver] key on the Control Panel is pressed or the specified period of time
has passed.
The machine enters this mode when the [Energy Saver] key on the Control Panel is pressed during Sleep Standby.
Sleep Standby
The state where only the Control Panel is turned OFF and power is supplied to all the other parts.
The machine enters Deep Sleep/Sleep 1 if there is no job after checking whether there is a job.
The machine enters this mode when a job is submitted during Sleep (Deep Sleep/Sleep 1).
Sleep 1
The state where the Control Panel is turned OFF and power is supplied only to the processing circuitry for the printer and scanner.
The All-night Power Supply is supplied to the controller.
The machine enters this mode from Sleep Standby during Sleep if Sleep Mode Energy Use is set "High" in Settings/Registration
> Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use.
The machine enters Sleep Standby when a job is submitted during this mode.
The machine enters Standby when the [Energy Saver] key on the Control Panel is pressed during this mode.
Sleep 1 (when [Consider Network Connection] is enabled)

The state where the Control Panel is turned OFF and only the All-night Power (12 V) is supplied to the printer/scanner/controller.
This mode should be selected in advance in order to allow the machine to respond to requests for exiting Sleep from external
sources such as faxes or the network.
The machine enters Standby when the [Energy Saver] key on the Control Panel is pressed during this mode.
CAUTION:
The machine can enter this mode if Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy
Use > Low > Consider Network Connection has been turned ON.
The machine does not enter this mode if a 2-, 3-, or 4-line Fax or a coin vendor is connected.
The machine does not enter Deep Sleep when this mode is activated.
127
2. Technology
Sleep Exit
The machine first enters this mode when returning to Standby from Sleep. The state where power supply is maintained to return
from Sleep.
Deep Sleep
The state where the Control Panel is turned OFF and only the All-night Power (12 V) is supplied.
The machine enters this mode from Sleep Standby during Sleep.
The machine enters Sleep Exit first, and then Standby when the [Energy Saver] key on the Control Panel is pressed during this
mode.
The machine does not enter this mode when any of the following "Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep" applies.
■ Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep Mode (Check Items)

Settings of Settings/Registration
When the following settings are enabled in the [Settings/Registration] menu, the machine does not enter Deep Sleep mode.
The corresponding items are shown below.
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings

• Sleep Mode Energy Use > High
• Sleep Mode Energy Use > Low > Compensate for Network Comm.
• Within the time specified in Auto Sleep Time
Preferences > Network

• NetWare Settings > Use NetWare > ON
• AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > BMLinkS Settings > Use BMLinkS > ON (*1)
• IEEE 802.1X Settings > Use IEEE 802.1X > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > IP Address Settings > Auto IP > ON
• TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > mDNS Settings > Use mDNS > ON
• Google Cloud Print Settings > Use Google Cloud Print > ON (*2)
• TCP/IP Settings > SIP Settings > NGN Settings > Use NGN > ON (*1)
• Direct Connection Settings > Use Direct Connection > ON
Function Settings > Receive/Forward

• Fax Settings >Select RX Mode > Fax/Tel (Auto Switch) (*1)
• Fax Settings > Remote RX > ON (*1)
• Fax Settings > Set Number Display > ON (*1)
Function Settings > Send

• Fax Settings > Modem Dial-in Settings > ON (*1)
Other Settings
• Volume Settings key > Fax Volume Settings > Incoming Fax Ring > ON (*1)
*1: This may not be displayed depending on the country/region, model, and configuration of the options.
*2: This must be already registered on Google Cloud Print in advance.
Hardware status
• It is connected to the coin vendor.
System Performance Status

• The system is running/communicating.
CAUTION:
The system is in a running/communicating state for approx. 10 minutes after startup in many cases.
Quick Startup
To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to the Main Controller PCB at quick
startup. Consequently, the main menu can be displayed faster than the normal startup.
128
2. Technology
Even when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF, power is supplied to the following PCBs:
Quick startup setting ON Quick startup setting OFF

AC Driver PCB Power is supplied Power is supplied
Low-voltage Power Supply PCB Power is supplied Power is supplied
Main Controller PCB Power is supplied OFF
Areas supplied with AC
Areas all-night power supply

1) Quick Startup ON :
Power Supply SW_OFF
Energize to 1,2,3
2) Quick Startup OFF :
Power Supply SW_OFF
Energize to 1,2
3 Main Controller PCB
2 Low Voltage
Power Supply PCB
1 AC Driver PCB
NOTE:
The quick startup function can be set from "Settings/Registration".
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Quick Startup Settings for Main Power
[On]: Quick startup is executed (default)
[Off]: Quick startup is not executed
Disconnect the power plug when performing work with the possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. If a conductive
material comes in contact with the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause damage on it.
The following label is used at the place where attention is required.
Quick Start
Plug Off
Conditions for not executing quick startup

This machine does not execute quick startup if the following conditions are met at first startup after the power plug is connected
to the outlet.
Connection status of the hardware

• A coin vendor is connected.
Either of the following network settings is set to "ON":

Settings/Registration > Preferences > Network
• AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON
• Slect Wired/Wireless LAN > Wireless LAN
• Slect Wired/Wireless LAN > Wired LAN + Wireless LAN
• Bluetooth Settings > ON
129
2. Technology
When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power in any of the conditions below
• The system is running/communicating.
Others
• More than 110 hours have elapsed after quick startup
• When turning ON the main power of the machine in 20 seconds after turning OFF the main power
• Startup after 8 hours or more have passed since the power of this product was turned OFF
• When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power from the Remote UI
• The next time the power is turned ON after occurrence of the error code
• The next time the power is turned ON after shifting to the service mode screen
130
3 Periodical Service
Consumable Parts List...................... 132
Cleaning Parts...................................136
3. Periodical Service
Consumable Parts List
Host machine
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3] [10]
[7] [6]
[4] [9]
[8] [5]
[12]
No. Name Parts num- Quan- Estimated Work de- Service Alarm Code Remarks
ber *1 tity life *2 scription Mode *3
Parts Replace-
counter ment com-
( COUN- pletion
TER >
DRBL-1/2 )
1 ITB Unit FM1-A605 1 180,000 pa- Replacement TR-UNIT 43-0094 -
ges
2 Secondary Transfer Outer FE3-4783 1 180,000 pa- Replacement 2TR-ROLL 43-0359 -
Roller ges
3 Developing Unit ( Y ) FM1-B264 1 240,000 im- Replacement DV-UNT-Y 43-0120 -
ages
4 Developing Unit ( M ) FM1-B265 1 240,000 im- Replacement DV-UNT-M 43-0121 -
ages
5 Developing Unit ( C ) FM1-B266 1 240,000 im- Replacement DV-UNT-C 43-0122 -
ages
6 Developing Unit ( Bk ) FM1-B267 1 240,000 im- Replacement DV-UNT-K 43-0123 -
ages
7 Drum Unit ( Y ) - 1 - Replacement PT-DR-Y 43-0070 Alarm log
storage loca-
tion: ALARM-
3
8 Drum Unit ( M ) - 1 - Replacement PT-DR-M 43-0071 Alarm log
storage loca-
tion: ALARM-
3
132
No. Name Parts num- Quan- Estimated Work de- Service Alarm Code Remarks
ber *1 tity life *2 scription Mode *3
Parts Replace-
counter ment com-
( COUN- pletion
TER >
DRBL-1/2 )
9 Drum Unit ( C ) - 1 - Replacement PT-DR-C 43-0072 Alarm log
storage loca-
tion: ALARM-
3
10 Drum Unit ( Bk ) - 1 - Replacement PT-DRM 43-0073 Alarm log
storage loca-
tion: ALARM-
3
11 Fixing Unit 100V: FM1- 1 180,000 pa- Replacement FX-UNIT 43-0076 Alarm log
A613 ges storage loca-
120V: FM1- tion: ALARM-
D276 3
230V: FM1-
D277
12 Waste Toner Container FM1-A606 1 100,000 pa- Replacement WST-TNR 11-0100 A4 plain pa-
ges per, Intermit-
tent printing
of 3 sheets
per job, 5%
duty image
for each col-
or, color ratio
at 30%
*1: The parts number may be changed due to engineering change.

*2: All the values described in this column are estimated replacement timing in A4 size. The replacement timing is a reference
value in the case of usage in general offices, and the actual value differs depending on the customer environment, operation
conditions in the field, etc.
*3: The default value of respective service mode varies according to the operation of sales company. Follow the instruction of
the sales company on switching the service modes and/or implementing service parts.
Single Pass DADF-B1

No. Name Parts number *1 Quantity Estimated Work de- Service Mode Alarm Code
life *2 scription Parts counter Replacement
( COUNTER > completion
DRBL-2 )
[1] Pickup Roller FL0-3873 1 80,000 Replace- DF-PU-RL 43-0125
sheets ment
[2] Feed Roller FC0-9450 1 80,000 Replace- DF-FD-RL 43-0091
sheets ment
[3] Separation Roller FC0-9631 1 80,000 Replace- DF-SP-RL 43-0092
sheets ment
[4] Pre-separation Unit FM1-J766 1 80,000 Replace- DF-PR-PD 43-0510
sheets ment
[5] Stamp FC7-5465 1 7,000 times Replace- STAMP -
ment

133
[3] [2] [1]
[4]
[5]
Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1

There is no comsumable parts.
DADF-AV1
No. Name Parts number Quantity Estimated Work de- Service Mode Alarm Code
*1 life scription Parts counter Replacement
*2 ( COUNTER > completion
DRBL-1/2 )
[1] Pickup Roller Unit FM1-D470 1 80,000 pages Replacement DF-PU-RL 43-0091
[2] Separation Roller FM1-D471 1 80,000 pages Replacement DF-SP-RL 43-0092
[3] Left Hinge FE3-5484 1 150,000 times Replacement DF-HNG-L -
134
Inner Finisher-K1
Booklet/Staple Finisher-AA1
135
Cleaning Parts
[16] [15]
[17]
[11] [12]
[9]
[10]
[13] [14]
[8]
[4]
[1] [2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[15]
[16]
136
No. Name Cleaning Method Timing

[1] Patch Sensor Clean with a blower. As needed
Clean with a tightly-wrung cotton swab when soiling or When ITB Unit re-
foreign matter cannot be removed. placement
[2] Pre-transfer Cover Sheet When there is soiling or foreign matter, clean with lint-free As needed
[3] Pre-transfer Guide paper moistened with alcohol.
[4] Secondary Transfer Roller Guide Assembly
[5] Registration Roller
[6] Registration Assembly
[7] Vertical Path Roller
[8] Duplex Roller 1
[9] Duplex Roller 2
[10] First Delivery Roller
[11] Second Delivery Roller
[12] Third Delivery Roller
[13] Rowel Block Assembly
[14] Tray Duct Assembly, Lower
[15] Copy Board Glass (Both side)
[16] Stream Reading Glass(Both side)
[17] Scanner Mirror (1 to 4)
137
4 Parts Replacement
and Cleaning
Preface..............................................139
Parts Replacement Procedures List. 140
Parts List........................................... 142
External Cover/Interior System......... 155
Original Exposure System.................177
Controller System..............................190
Laser Exposure System.................... 203
Image Formation System.................. 206
Fixing System....................................249
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Preface
Outline
This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly procedures of the printer.
The service technician is to identify the cause of printer failures according to follow the disassembly procedures of each part to
replace the defective parts or the consumable parts.
Note the following precautions when working on the printer.
• Before disassembling or reassembling the printer, be sure to disconnect its power cord from the electrical outlet.
• When having removed the Drum Unit from the host machine before disassembling and assembling the machine, be sure to
put the Photosensitive Drum in a protective bag even in a short period of time to prevent the adverse effect of light.
• Reassembling procedures are followed by the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise specified.
• Note the length, diameters, and locations of screws as you remove them. When reassembling the printer, be sure to use
them in their original locations.
• Do not run the printer with any parts removed as a general rule.
• Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused
by static electricity.
• When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be sure to remove the rating plate or
the product code label and put it to the new part.
Points to Note when Tightening a Screw

When a thin plates is used in some parts for the light weighting purpose, warn the following.
In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark near it as shown in the figure below, strongly tightening the screw may damage
or deform the screw hole.
In the case of a screw hole with a triangle mark, take care not to apply too much force when tightening the screw.
The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value.
Type of Screws
RS tight W Sems Binding TP
Fastened member Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin
Tightening torque M4 Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
(N*m) 1.6 1.6 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8
M3 Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
* For PCB, refer to the tightening torque value of resin (fastened member).
Type of Screws
RS tight W Sams Binding TP
139
Parts Replacement Procedures List
Category Description
Parts List “Parts List” on page 142 “External Cover” on page 142
“External Cover/Interior System” on page 155
“Original Exposure System” on page 38
“Controller System” on page 190
“Laser Exposure System” on page 49
“Image Formation System” on page 56
“Fixing System” on page 91
“Pickup Feed System” on page 102
External Cover / Interior “External Cover/Interior “Fully open the Right Door” on page 155
System System” on page 155 “Removing the Front Door” on page 155
“Removing the Front Fan” on page 156
“Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan” on page 158
“Removing the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB” on page 159
“Removing the Motor Fan” on page 161
“Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit” on page 162
“Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB” on page 163
“Removing the Control Panel” on page 166
“Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB” on page 173
“Removing the Touch Panel/LCD Unit and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB”
on page 174
Original Exposure Sys- “Original Exposure System” “Removing the Reader Scanner Unit” on page 177
tem on page 38 “Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror” on page 180
“Removing the Reader Flat Cable” on page 184
Controller System “Controller System” on page “Removing the Controller Cover” on page 190
190 “Removing the HDD” on page 190
“Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 193
“Removing the DC Controller PCB” on page 197
“Removing the Fax Unit” on page 199
“Removing the Controller Fan” on page 201
Laser Exposure System “Laser Exposure System” on “Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 203
page 49 “Cleaning the Dustproof Glass” on page 204
Image Formation System “Image Formation System” “Removing the Drum Unit” on page 206
on page 56 “Removing the Developing Unit” on page 207
“Installing the Developing Unit” on page 208
“Removing the Waste Toner Container” on page 212
“Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller” on page 213
“Removing the ITB Unit” on page 214
“Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade” on page 217
“Removing the ITB” on page 218
“Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/BK)” on page 222
“Removing the Patch Sensor Unit” on page 223
“Removing the Waste Toner Drive Unit” on page 225
“Removing the Registration Drive Unit / Duplex Merging Motor / Registration
Motor” on page 226
“Removing the Main Drive Unit” on page 227
“Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly” on page 232
“Removing the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED Unit” on page 235
“Remove the Bottle Drive Unit (YM)/(CBk)” on page 236
“Removing the Waste Toner Gear Holder” on page 240
“Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit” on page 242
“Removing the Intermediate Guide” on page 246
140
Category Description
Fixing System “Fixing System” on page 91 “Removing the Fixing Unit” on page 249
“Removing the Fixing Film Unit” on page 249
“Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller / Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support”
on page 253
“Removing the Fixing Drive Unit” on page 255
Pickup / Feed System “Pickup Feed System” on “Removing the Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller (Cassette 1/2,Cassette 3/4(Op-
page 102 tion))” on page 256
“Removing the Multi-purpose Tray / Feed / Separation Roller” on page 257
“Removing the Right Door Unit” on page 259
“Removing the First Delivery Unit” on page 262
“Removing the Second Delivery Unit” on page 264
“Removing the Third Delivery Unit” on page 265
“Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit” on page 265
“Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit” on page 267
“Removing the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Unit (Option)” on page 268
“Removing the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller” on page 270
“Removing the Registration Roller” on page 273
“Removing the Registration Guide Unit” on page 276
141
Parts List
External Cover
■ Host Machine (Front View, Left Side)
[7]
[6] [8]
[9]
[5]
[10]
[4]
[11]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[12]
[23]
[13]
[22]
[14]
[18]
[15]
[21]
[16]
[20]
[19] [17]
[18]
No. Parts Name No. Parts Name

[1] Reader Left Cover [2] Reader Left Retaining Cover
[3] Reader Hinge Lower Cover [4] Reader Cable Cover
[5] Reader Glass Support Cover [6] Reader Rear Cover
[7] Reader Hinge Lower Cover (Right) [8] Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box
[9] Reader Front Cover (Small) [10] Reader Right Retaining Cover
[11] Reader Front Cover [12] Right Front Upper Cover
[13] Front Cover (Upper) [14] Front Cover
[15] Cassette1 Front Cover [16] Cassette 2 Front Cover
[17] Waste Toner Assembly Cover [18] Handle Cover
[19] Service Book Holder [20] Left Cover (Lower)
[21] Blind Cover [22] Left Cover (Upper)
[23] Left Cover Assembly (Rear)
142
■ Host Machine (Inside the machine)

[7]
[8]
[6]
[9]
[5]
[10]
[4]
[11]
[12]
[3]
[2] [13]
[1]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]

[1] Push-out Stopper [2] Tray Guide
[3] First Delivery Tray [4] Inner Connector Cover
[5] Second Delivery Tray Support Plate [6] Inner Delivery Cover
[7] Inner Cover (Right Upper) [8] Reverse Trailing Edge Guide
[9] Reverse Guide Cover [10] Inner Right Cover
[11] Inner Blind Cover [12] Fan Holder
[13] Front Inner Upper Cover [14] Drum Unit Retaining Cover (Bk)
[15] Drum Unit Retaining Cover (C) [16] Drum Unit Retaining Cover (M)
[17] Drum Unit Retaining Cover (Y) [18] Front Inner Lower Cover
143
■ Host Machine (Control Panel)
[1]
[2]
[3]

[1] Control Panel Upper Cover [2] Control Panel Cover (Lower)
[3] Control Panel Cover (Rear)
144
■ Host Machine (Rear View, Right Side)

[21] [1]
[20]
[2]
[19]
[3]
[18]
[4]
[17]
[5]
[10] [6]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[13]
[10] [9]
[8] [7]
[12]
[11]

[1] HDD Cover [2] Right Cover (Rear Upper)
[3] Blind Cover (Rear) [4] Cover (Rear Upper)
[5] Right Cover Assembly (Rear Lower) [6] Cover (Rear Lower)
[7] Power Supply Cord Cover [8] Environment Heater Switch Cover
[9] Connector Cover [10] Handle Cover
[11] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate [12] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray
[13] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray Assembly [14] Right Cover (Lower)
[15] Right Door (Lower) [16] Right Cover (Front Lower)
[17] Right Cover (Front Upper) [18] Main Power Supply Switch Cover
[19] Right Door [20] Third Delivery Outlet Cover
[21] Reader Right Cover
145
Motor
M31
M30
M11
M09
M05 M12
M04 M14
M13
M01
M07
M06
M17 M08
M02
M10 M03
No. Parts Name Main Unit

M01 Laser Scanner Motor Laser Scanner Unit
M02 Bk Drum _ ITB Motor Main Drive Unit
M03 CL Drum Motor Main Drive Unit
M04 Bottle Motor (YM) Bottle Drive Unit (YM)
M05 Bottle Drive Unit (YM) Bottle Drive Unit (CBk)
M06 Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor Lifter Drive Unit
M07 Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor -
M08 Primary Transfer Roller Main Drive Unit
Disengagement Motor
M09 Fixing Motor Fixing Drive Unit
M10 Developing Motor Main Drive Unit
M11 Duplex Reverse Motor Reverse Duplexing Drive Unit
M12 Registration Motor -
M13 Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup -
Motor
M14 Duplex Merging Motor -
M17 Waste Toner Feed Motor -
M30 Reverse Motor -
M31 Second Delivery Motor Second Delivery Unit
146
Fan
FM04
FM01
FM03
FM02
No. Name Main Unit

FM01 Front Fan Front Fan Unit
FM02 Power Supply Cooling Fan Power Supply Fan Unit
FM03 Motor Fan -
FM04 Controller Fan Main Controller PCB
147
Clutch/Solenoid
SL06
SL02
CL04
CL03
CL02
CL01
No. Name Main Unit

SL02 Registration Shutter Solenoid Registration Patch Sensor Unit
SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid First Delivery Unit
CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch (Y) Main Drive Unit
CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch (M) Main Drive Unit
CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch (C) Main Drive Unit
CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch (Bk) Main Drive Unit
148
Heater
TH01_01
H03 TH01_02
TP01
H02 H01
TH01_03

H01 Fixing heater Fixing Unit
H02 Cassette Heater Cassette Heater Unit
H03 Inside Heater Inside Heater
TH01_01 Main Thermistors 1 Fixing Unit
TH01_02 Sub Thermistors 2 Fixing Unit
TH01_03 Sub Thermistors 1 Fixing Unit
TP01 Fixing Temperature fuse Fixing Unit
149
Sensor
UN42
UN41
UN40
PS31
UN38 UN39
UN37 PS32
UN36
UN35 PS30
PS29
PS28
PS03 PS27
PS26
UN24
UN23
UN22 UN30
UN21

PS03 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
PS26 Toner supply sensor (Y) Bottle Drive Unit (YM)
PS27 Toner supply sensor (M) Bottle Drive Unit (YM)
PS28 Toner supply sensor (C) Bottle Drive Unit (CBk)
PS29 Toner supply sensor (Bk) Bottle Drive Unit (CBk)
PS30 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
PS31 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
PS32 Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
UN21 Toner Density Sensor (Y) Drum Unit (Y)
UN22 Toner Density Sensor (M) Drum Unit (M)
UN23 Toner Density Sensor (C) Drum Unit (C)
UN24 Toner Density Sensor (Bk) Drum Unit (Bk)
UN30 Waste Toner Sensor PCB Waste Toner Full Detection Unit
UN35 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (Y) New Old Sensing Holder Unit
UN36 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (M) New Old Sensing Holder Unit
UN37 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (C) New Old Sensing Holder Unit
UN38 Drum Unit New/Old Sensor (Bk) New Old Sensing Holder Unit
UN39 Bottle Unit New/Old Sensor (Y) Bottle Drive Unit (YM)
UN40 Bottle Unit New/Old Sensor (M) Bottle Drive Unit (YM)
UN41 Bottle Unit New/Old Sensor (C) Bottle Drive Unit (CBk)
UN42 Bottle Unit New/Old Sensor (Bk) Bottle Drive Unit (CBk)
150
PS53 PS51
PS52
PS14 PS12
PS13
PS11
PS33
PS10
UN26
UN27
PS08
PS04
PS05 PS17
UN25
PS06 PS22
PS19
PS07 PS24
No. Name Main Unit

PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor Cassette 1 Pickup Unit
PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Cassette 1 Pickup Unit
PS06 Cassette 2 Lifter Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Unit
PS07 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Unit
PS08 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor Cassette 1 Pickup Unit
PS10 Fixing Delivery Sensor -
PS11 Arch Sensor -
PS12 Reverse Sensor First Delivery Unit
PS13 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor First Delivery Unit
PS14 First Delivery Sensor First Delivery Unit
PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A -
PS19 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A -
PS22 Pre-Registration Sensor Shutter Registration Unit
PS24 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Unit
PS33 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor Main Drive Unit
PS51 Second Delivery / Reverse Sensor 3 Way Unit
PS52 Third Delivery Sensor Third Delivery Unit
PS53 Second Delivery Paper Full Sensor 3 Way Unit
UN27 Environment Sensor Environment Sensor Unit
UN25 Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front) Registration Patch Sensor Unit
UN26 Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Rear) Registration Patch Sensor Unit
151
Switch
SW04 SW27
SW26
SW11
SW01
SW02
SW16
SW13
SW15 SW10
No. Name Main Unit

SW01 Waste Toner Container Detection Switch -
SW02 Interlock Switch 1 Front Fan Unit
SW04 Main Power Supply Switch -
SW10 Dehumidification Switch -
SW11 Right Door Open/Close Detection Switch -
SW13 Cassette 1 Size Switch -
SW15 Cassette 2 Size Switch A -
SW16 Cassette 2 Size Switch B -
SW26 Front Door Switch Front Upper Inner Cover Unit
SW27 Right Upper Door Open/Close Detection -
Switch
152
PCB
UN16
UN15
UN47
UN14
UN05
UN04
UN02
UN01
UN07
UN03
No. Name Main Unit

UN01 Low Voltage Power Supply PCB Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
UN02 Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB -
UN03 High Voltage Power Supply PCB -
UN04 DC Controller PCB -
UN05 Main Controller PCB -
UN07 AC Driver PCB Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
UN14 Pre-exposure LED PCB (M) Pre-exposure LED Unit
UN15 Pre-exposure LED PCB (C) Pre-exposure LED Unit
UN16 Pre-exposure LED PCB (Bk) Pre-exposure LED Unit
UN47 Wireless LAN PCB -
153
UN10 UN18
UN31 [1]
[2]
[5] [3]
UN29
[4] [6]
SP1
UN67
UN09
UN08
No. Name Main Unit

UN08 Y/M Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner Unit
UN09 C/Bk Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner Unit
UN10 3 Way Unit Driver PCB Second Delivery Unit
UN29 Multi-purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
UN31 Fixing Fuse PCB Fixing Unit
UN67 1st Line Modular PCB FAX Unit
SP1 FAX Speaker FAX Unit
UN18 Control Panel CPU PCB Control Panel
[1] Control Panel Speaker Control Panel
[2] Control Panel KEY PCB Control Panel
[3] NFC PCB Control Panel
[4] Device Port LED PCB -
[5] Motion Sensor -
[6] FAX 1st Line PCB FAX Unit
154
External Cover/Interior System
Fully open the Right Door

1. Open the Right Door.
2. Lift up the Right Door [1], slide the Right Door Guide (Left) [2] and Right Door Guide (Right) [3] in the direction in
the figure below to fully open it.
[3]
[2] [1]
CAUTION:
Moving the Lever Assembly to the following position changes the open/close status of the host machine's Right Door.
[A]: Position that opens the host machine's Right Door
[B]: Position that fully opens the host machine's Right Door
[B]
[A]
[B]
[A]
Removing the Front Door

1. Open the Front Door.
155
2. Remove the Front Door [1] while lifting it up slightly and pushing the claw [2].
• 1 Claw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
[1]
1x
[2]
[3]
Removing the Front Fan

■ Preparation
1. Open the Front Door.“Removing the Front Door” on page 155
2. Fully open the Right Door.“Fully open the Right Door” on page 155
3. Remove the Fixing Unit.“Removing the Fixing Unit” on page 249
4. Remove the Drum Unit (Bk).
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Right Front Upper Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
1x
[1] 1x
2x
[3]
[2]
[2]
156
2. Remove the Inner Right Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1]
[2]
3. Pull out the cassette [1] and open the Right Cover (Front Upper) [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
2x
[3]
[2]
[1]
4. Remove the connector [1] of the Front Fan.
1x
[1]
157
5. Open the Front Fan [1] and remove the connector [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
• 1 Claws [4]
[4]
2x
1x
[1]
1x
[2]
[3]
6. Remove the Front Fan.
[1]
Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan

■ Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and disconnect the connector[2].
• 1 Screw [1]
• 1 Connector [2]
[2]
1x
1x
[1]
158
2. Release the 2 hooks [2] while pushing down the boss [1] with screwdrivers, and remove the Power Supply Cooling
Fan [3].
• 1 Boss [1]
• 2 Hooks [2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to insert the [A] part of the Power Supply Cooling Fan [1] to the guide [2] for installation of the fan.
[1]
[A]
[2]
Removing the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Cover (Rear Upper).
159
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Connector [1].
• 1 Harness Guide [2]
[1]
1x
[2]
2. Remove the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1] from the guide.
• 2 Screws [2]
• 5 Claws [3]
• 4 Bosses [4]
[1] [3]
5x [4]
2x
[4] [3]
[3]
[3] [2]
CAUTION:
A connector is connected in the back of the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB.
160
3. Remove the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
[1]
1x
[2]
NOTE:
When installing the PCB, be sure to fi it with the 4 claws on the bottom side.
NOTE:
Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position.
Removing the Motor Fan

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Cassette Connector Cover.
2. Remove the Cover (Rear Lower).
161
■ Procedure
1. Release the 2 claws [1], and pull the tab [2] to remove the Motor Fan [3].
• 1 Connector [4]
• 3 Claws [1]
[1] [4]
1x
[1]
3x
[2]
[3]
Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Motor Fan.“Removing the Motor Fan” on page 161
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Harnesses around the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.
• 11 Wire Saddles [1]
• 1 Edge Saddle [2]
[2]
12x
[1]
[1]
[1]
162
2. Disconnect the connectors [1] on the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.
• 11 Connectors [1]
11x [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
3. Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
1x 2x
[1]
[2]
[2]
Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit. “Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit” on page 162
163
■ Procedure
1. Remove the 2 Support Plates [1] and the Connector [2].
• 3 Screws [3]
• 1 Wire Saddle [4]
[4] [1]
3x 1x 1x
[2]
[3]
2. Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1] from the guide.
• 3 Screws [4]
• 7 Claws [2]
• 6 Bosses [3]
1x 2x
[4] [4]
[3] [2]
7x
[1] [3]
[3]
[2]
164
3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [2], and remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1].
[1] [2]
2x
NOTE:
Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position.
165
Removing the Control Panel

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF[1], Front Cover[2] and Right Door[3].
[1]
[3]
[2]

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
2x
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
166
3. Close the Front Cover [1].
[1]
4. Raise the Control Panel [1] and remove the Reader Front Cover [2].
• 2 Rubber Caps [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
• 2 Hooks [5]
2x
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1] [4]
[3]
5. Remove the Control Panel Cover (Rear).

• 2 Screws [3]
[2]
2x
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
167
6. Free the Harnesses [1].

• 1 Reuse Band [3]
2x [2]
[1]
[3]
7. Remove the 3 Harnesses [3].

[2] [1]
4x
[2]
8. Place a sheet of paper [1] on the Copy Board Glass to prevent damage from the Control Panel.
[1]
168
9. Remove the 3 Screws[1] on the Control Panel Arm.
[1]
3x
10. Turn over the Control Panel [1] and put it on the Copy Board Glass. Place a sheet of paper on the Copy Board Glass
to prevent damage from the Control Panel.
• 2 Hooks [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
11. Remove the Control Panel Connector Cover [1].

• 8 Hooks [2]
[2]
[2]
[2] [2]
[1]
169
12. Remove the Harness.

• 1 Connector [1]
1x [1]
13. Remove the Cable Holder [1].

• 1 Boss [2]
• 3 Hooks [3]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
14. Disconnect the cables.

2x
[1]
170
15. Remove the 6 screws [1] securing the Control Panel Rear Cover.
[2]
6x [1]
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
16. Turn the Control Panel Rear Cover[1] to remove the Control Panel Left Hinge [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[3]
[1] 2x
[2]
[3]
17. Remove the Control Panel Rear Cover [1].
[1]
171
18. Remove the Ground Wire [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
1x
[1]
[3]
CAUTION:
Check the position of the Boss [3] for slip resistance when attaching the Ground Wire [1].
19. Remove the Control Panel Right Hinge [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
2x
[2]
[1]
20. Remove the Harness.

3x
[1]
3x
[2]
[2]
172
21. Remove the Control Panel Hinge Base [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
[2]
3x
[1]
[2]
Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Control Panel.“Removing the Control Panel” on page 166
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB [1].
• 2 Flat Cables [2]
• 6 Screws [3]
[3]
2x [3]
[2]
6x
[2]
[1]
■ Actions after Replacement

Perform Touch Panel adjustment by "simultaneously pressing the service mode top screen > [Settings/Registration] button > "5"
button three times"
173
Removing the Touch Panel/LCD Unit and the Control Panel Key
Switch PCB
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB.“Removing the Control Panel” on page 166
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface [A] of the Touch Panel and the surface [B] of the LCD Unit when disassembling/assembling.
[A]
[B]
1. Pass the harness [1] through the [A] part, and remove the Control Panel Stay Unit [2].
• 8 Screws [3]
[1] [3]
[3]
8x
[A]
[2]
[3]
174
2. Remove the Numeric Keypad PCB [1].

• Guide [A]
• 1 Screw [3]
[3]
[2]
4x [A]
1x
[2]
[1]
3. Remove the LCD Holder [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
[2]
3x
[1]
4. Remove the Control Panel Keys [1].
[1]
175
5. Remove the Touch Panel [1].

• 3 Claws [2]
[1]
3x
[2]
[2]

Perform the following adjustment when replacing the Touch Panel and the LCD Unit.
Perform Touch Panel adjustment by "simultaneously pressing the service mode top screen > [Settings/Registration] button > "5"
button three times"
176
Removing the Reader Scanner Unit

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF Unit.
2. Remove the Glass Retainer (Right) [1] and then remove the Copy Board Glass [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[3]
2x
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts [1] of the Reader Scanner Unit. If you have touched the grease, be careful not to
put it to other parts.
[1]
3. Move the Belt [1] to move the Reader Scanner Unit [2] to the cut-off part [3] of the Reader Scanner Unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
177
4. Put a sheet of half folded A4 paper[1] under the Reader Scanner Unit.
[1]
5. Loosen the 1 Screw [1]. Remove the Belt [3] from the pulley while releasing the Tensioner [2].
[2]
1x
[1] [3]
6. Pick up the Reader Scanner Unit [1] and remove the Belt [2].
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Do not pull the Reader Scanner Unit or the Flat Cable [1] may be damaged.
[1]
178
7. Put the Reader Scanner Unit [2] on the sheet of half folded A4 paper [1].
[2]
[1]
8. Remove the Flat Cable [2] and the Protection Sheet [3] from the Reader Scanner Unit.
• 1 Connector [1]
• 1 Flat Cable [2]
• 1 Protection Sheet [3]
• 4 Guides [A]
1x 4x
[A]
[3]
[2]
[1] [A]
179
CAUTION:
Insert the 4 Edges [1] of the protection sheet to the Guide Part [A].
[1] [A]
[1]
[1]
[A]
[1]
9. Actions after Replacement:

• Single Pass DADF-A1, B1 : Scanner Unit (Front side) :“Single Pass DADF-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Front side)” on page
290
• DADF-AV1: Scanner Unit :“DADF-AV1: Scanner Unit” on page 291
NOTE:
Actions after replacing the Scanner Unit also can be adjusted on the situation mode below.
• SITUATION > Parts Replacement > Adjustment during Scanner unit replacement
Cleaning the Reader Scanner Unit Scanner Mirror

■ Procedure
1. Open the ADF Unit.
180
2. Remove the Glass Retainer (Right) [1] and then remove the Copy Board Glass [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[3]
2x
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts [1] of the Reader Scanner Unit. If you have touched the grease, be careful not to
put it to other parts.
[1]
3. Pull the Belt [1] to move the Reader Scanner Unit [2] to the cut-off part [3] of the Reader Scanner Unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
181
4. Put a sheet of half folded A4 paper [1] under the Reader Scanner Unit.
[1]
5. Loosen the 1 Screw [1]. Remove the Belt [3] from the pulley while releasing the Tensioner [2].
[2]
1x
[1] [3]
6. Pick up the Reader Scanner Unit [1] and remove the Belt[2].
CAUTION:
Do not pull the Reader Scanner Unit or the Flat Cable [1] may be damaged.
[1]
[1]
[2]
182
7. Put the Reader Scanner Unit [2] on the sheet of half folded A4 paper [1].
[2]
[1]
8. Remove the LED Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 3 Hooks [4]
[2]
2x
[4]
2x
[2]
[1]
[3]
9. Clean 4 mirrors [1] with silbon paper with alcohol. Clean the mirrors from one end to the another in one direction.
NOTE:
The rearmost mirror [2] is dustproof mirror. Cleaning is not needed.
[1]
[1]
[2]
183
Removing the Reader Flat Cable

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Reader Scanner Unit.“Removing the Reader Scanner Unit” on page 177
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Controller Cover.
2. Remove the Reader Cable Cover [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
3x
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the 3 Flat Cables [1] from the Harness Guide [2].
[1]
[2]
3x
9x
[3]
184
4. Remove the Reader Connection Plate [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
5. Put the Reader Flat Cable from the hole [1] on the Reader and Remove it from the Guide Guide [2].
1x
[2]
[1]
6. Remove the Protection Sheet [1].

• 2 Guides[2]
• 2 Claws[3]
[2]
2x
[1]
[3]
185
7. Remove the double sided tape [1] fixing the Reader Flat Cable.
[1]
8. Remove the Reader Flat Cable.

• 1 Guide [1]
[1]
1x
■ Installation Procedure
1. Put the Reader Flat Cable [1] to the reader side and attach it to the guide.
[1]
1x
186
2. Attach the Reader Flat on the Cable through the hole[1] on the reader flame.
1x
[2]
[1]
3. Attach the Reader Connection Plate [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
4. Attach the Reader Flat Cable [1] on the Harness Guide[2]. Connect the Reader Flat Cable [1] to the Main Controller
PCB.
[1]
[2]
9x
3x
[3]
187
5. Attach the Reader Cable Cover [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
3x
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
6. Attach the Controller Cover.
7. Attach the Cover (Rear Upper).
8. Fold the Reader Flat Cable as shown below and connect it to the Reader Scanner Unit.
9. Install the Reader Scanner Unit.
10. Put the Reader Flat Cable along the guide in the figure and attach it to the Reader Scanner Unit with the double
sided tape [1]. The distance of differences between [A] and [B] must be under 1.0mm.
CAUTION:
• When the distance of differences between [A] and [B] is over 1.0mm, adjust the distance under 1.0mm while removing
the double sided tape.
• When fixing the Reader Flat Cable with the distance of differences between [A] and [B] is over 1.0mm, it may occur
disconnection of the Reader Flat Cable.
[B] [A]
[1]
188
11. Attach the protection sheet [1].

• 2 Guides [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
[2]
2x
[1]
[3]
189
Controller System
Removing the Controller Cover

■ Preparation
2. Remove the Right Cover (Rear Upper).
■ Procedure
1. Loosen the 1 screw [2] and remove the Controller Cover [1].
• 10 Claws [3]
[3]
[2]
[3]
1x [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
Removing the HDD

■ Preparation
1. Actions Before Parts Replacement:“Actions Before Parts Replacement” on page 285
4. Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the Controller Cover” on page 190
190
■ Procedure
1. Remove the 4 cables.
[2]
4x
3x
[2]
[1]
[1]
191
2. Remove the HDD Unit[1].

• 3 Hooks [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
[2]
1x
[2]
[3]
192
3. Remove the HDD[1] from the HDD Unit.

• 4 Screws [3]
4x
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
1x
4. Remove the Cable[2] from the HDD[1].
[1]
1x
[2]
5. Actions after Replacement: “Hard Disk” on page 285
Removing the Main Controller PCB

■ Preparation
1. Actions before Replacement:“Main Controller PCB” on page 284
2. Remove the HDD.“Removing the HDD” on page 190
193
■ Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not transfer the following parts to another host machine whose serial number is different. The host machine does not
start up normally and may become unrecoverable in some cases.
• Main Controller PCB (with the Memory PCB unremoved)
• FLASH PCB
• TPM PCB
• Memory PCB
1. Remove the Reader Cable Cover [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
3x
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the 3 Flat Cables [1] from the Harness Guide [2].
[1]
[2]
3x
9x
[3]
194
3. Remove the Reader Connection Plate [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
4. Remove the Cable Holder [1] and disconnect the harnesses from left side of the Main Controller PCB Unit.
• 2 Hooks[2]
• 3 Connectors[3]
[2] 3x
[3]
[1] [2]
5. Remove all Saddles.

• 5 Wire Saddles[2]
• 2 Edge Saales[3]
7x
[1]
[2]
195
6. Remove all Cables.

• 13 Connectors[1]
• 1 Flat Cable[2]
• 1 Wire Saddle[3]
• 2 Reuse Bands[4]
14x [1]
[1]
3x
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[4] [3]
7. Remove the Flat Cable Guide [1].

• 1 Boss[2]
• 1 Hook[3]
[1] [3]
[2]
8. Remove the 2 Screws [2] and remove the Main Controller PCB Unit [1].
• 2 Screws[2]
• 2 Hooks[3]
2x [3]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
196
9. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, transfer the following parts from the old PCB to the new PCB.
• FLASH PCB
• TPM PCB
• Memory PCB
10. Actions after Replacement:“Main Controller PCB” on page 284
Removing the DC Controller PCB

■ Preparation
1. Backup the service mode setting values for DCON. Execute the following service mode (Lv.2).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP
After “ACTIVE” is displayed for approx. 2 minutes, “OK!” is displayed.
*: If necessary, output the service mode setting values to reset the setting values by manual as following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT
2. Remove the Connector Cover.
■ Procedure
1. Remove the DC Controller PCB [1].
• 27 Connectors
• 6 Screws
[1]
27x
6x
197
< When the cables are fixed with 2 tie wraps >
CAUTION:
Fix the cables as shown in the figure or the cables may be damaged.
198
< When the cables are fixed with 1 tie wrap. >
CAUTION:
Do not push the extra length of the cables to the gap. Pull the extra length of the cables to the DC Controller PCB side as
shown in the figure or the cables may be damaged.

1. Restore the Service Mode data on the following service mode (Lv.2).
• COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
"ACTIVE" is displayed at execution and then "OK!" is displayed about 2 minutes later. Restoration is complete.
2. If uploading of backup data fails before replacement due to the damage of the DC Controller PCB, enter the recorded
values of service mode on the service label or P-PRINT.
3. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
Removing the Fax Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Controller Cover. “Removing the Controller Cover” on page 190
199
■ Procedure
1. Disconnect the connector.
3x
[1]
2. Disconnect the cable.

• 1 Edge Saddle [2]
[3] [2]
1x
3x
[1]
200
3. Remove the FAX Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
[3] [3]
[2]
[2]
2x
[1]
Removing the Controller Fan

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Controller Cover. “Removing the Controller Cover” on page 190
■ Procedure
1. Remove the 4 fixing pins 1 [1] from the Controller Fan.
[1]
[1]
201
2. Remove the Controller Fan[1].

• 1 Connector [2]
[2]
1x
[1]
3. Remove the 4 fixing pins 2 [1] from rear side of the Controller Fan.
CAUTION:
Put the Controller Fan in direction of the wind [1] to the heat sink. Install the Controller Fan on the heat sink with keep
inserting position of the fixing pin 2 [2] as shown below.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2] [2]
[1]
[1]
202
Laser Exposure System
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
■ Preparation
1. Pull out the Cassette 1.
2. Open the Waste Toner Assembly Cover.
3. Remove the Left Cover (Upper).
■ Procedure
1. Grasp and lift up the handle [1] to release the protrusion [2], and pull out the Laser Scanner Unit [3] to the position
in the following figure.
• 1 Clamp [4]
• 2 Screws [5]
1x
2x [1]
[2]
[4] [5] [3]
2. Turn over the Protection Sheet [1], and free the harness [2] from the Harness Guide [3].
• 1 Connector [4]
3. Disconnect the Flexible Cable [5].
[1]
2x
1x
[4]
[5] [3]
[2]
203
4. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit [1].
[1]
CAUTION:
When installing, be sure to fit the protrusion [1] of the Laser Scanner Unit with a hole [2] in the plate.
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it requires adjustment.

1. Execute [Auto Correct Color Mismatch].
2. If the degree of color displacement differs between the center and the edge, execute "copy ratio correction" and
"distortion correction" as needed.
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass

1. Open the Front Cover.
204
2. Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool [1].
[1]
3. Insert the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool [1] into the hole [2], and clean the glass by moving it back and forth 2 to
3 times in the [A] part.
[A]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Do not insert the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool upside down.
205
Image Formation System
Removing the Drum Unit

1. Open the Front Door.
2. Open the Drum Unit Retaining Cover [1].
CAUTION:
The illustration is explaining by using the Drum Unit (Y) as a reference. Be sure to check the Drum Unit type to remove
before starting the work.
[1]
206
3. Pinch the light-blue [A] part, and pull out the Drum Unit [1].
CAUTION:
Since there is a risk of damaging the Photosensitive Drum, do not touch the surface.
Be sure to block light to the removed Drum Unit using paper, otherwise it will be exposed to light.
CAUTION:
The illustration is explaining by using the Drum Unit (Y) as a reference. Be sure to check the Drum Unit type to remove
before starting the work.
[A]
[1]
Removing the Developing Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Drum Unit.“Removing the Drum Unit” on page 206
■ Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1].
• 1 Screw [1]
1x
[1]
207
2. Pull out the Developing Unit [1] to the position in the figure below, disconnect the connector [2], and hook it on the
groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover [3].
• 1 Connector [2]
1x 1x
[2]
[3]
[2] [1]
3. Remove the Developing Unit [1] while lifting it up.
[1]
Installing the Developing Unit

1. Unpack the new Developing Unit.
NOTE:
Remove the seal from the supply mouth in step3.
208
2. Before installing the Developing Unit, orient the Front Cover [1] upwards, and shake the unit strongly up and down
approx. 10 times with its angle unchanged [2].
[1]
㹶
[2]
60°
CAUTION:
If the Developing Unit is installed with toner uneven in the container, the screw may be broken and E020/E021 error may
occur.
3. Remove the seal [1] from the supply mouth.
[1]
4. Check that the connector is hooked on the groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover . If it is not hooked, the connector
may get stuck when inserting the Developing Unit.
209
5. Insert the Developing Unit up to the position in the figure below.
CAUTION:
Take care to prevent the connector of the Developing Unit from getting caught.
6. Disconnect the connector [1] from the groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover , and connect it to the Developing Unit.
[1]
210
7. Slowly insert the Developing Unit up to the position where it is to be secured with a screw.
CAUTION:
If you insert it abruptly, toner may scatter on the rear side inside the machine when the shutter opens.
8. Secure the Developing Unit with the screw while holding it down.
• 1 Screw [1]
[1]
9. Install the Drum Unit.
■ Install the Drum Unit

The following procedure can also be performed in [Service Model > SITUATION > Parts Replacement > Adjustment during
Developing Unit replacement ].
1. Clear each initialization operations and the parts counters.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K
211
NOTE:
Check the Service Mode the parts counters are cleared.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-Y
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-M
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-C
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-K
2. Check the Service Mode and write the setting values on the service label of the Front Cover.
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-Y-LVL
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-M-LVL
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-C-LVL
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-K-LVL
3. Check the Service Mode and write the setting values on the service label of the Front Cover.
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-M
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-C
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-K
4. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust.
Removing the Waste Toner Container

1. Open the Cassette 1.
212
3. Removed the Waste Toner Assembly.
NOTE:
Parts counter is cleared automatically when the Waste Toner Assembly is replaced after the preparation alarm is displayed.
NOTE:
Replacing the Waste Toner Container after the preparation warning has been displayed clears the parts counter automatically.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WST-TNR
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
2. Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller [1].
[1]
213
CAUTION:
• Remove the Protection Sheet [1] from the replacing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller after installation.
[1]
• Pull the tape [2] on the Protection Sheet [1] in the direction of the arrow to remove the sheet.
[2]
[1]
NOTE:
When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > 2TR-ROLL
Removing the ITB Unit
■ Preparation
CAUTION:
Set "Sleep" to "Standby" mode to replace the ITB Unit with the main power is ON reluctantly. The Primary Transfer Roller
is not disengaged and the ITB Unit can not be pulled out.
NOTE:
Turn "Sleep" to "Standby" mode even when pressing the Sleep Button with the right door opened.
214
■ Removing the ITB Unit

1. Pull the lever [1] to unlock it, grasp the handle [A] on the left and right, and pull the ITB Unit [2] to the position in
the figure below while shifting it to the left side.
[A]
[1]
[2]
2. Pull the lever [1] to unlock it, grasp the handle [A] on the left and right, and pull the ITB Unit [2] to the position in
the figure below while shifting it to the left side.
[B]
[1]
215
CAUTION:
• Pull the lever [1] to unlock it, grasp the handle [A] on the left and right, and pull the ITB Unit [2] to the position in the
figure below while shifting it to the left side.
Left Side
• Pull the lever [1] to unlock it, grasp the handle [A] on the left and right, and pull the ITB Unit [2] to the position in the
figure below while shifting it to the left side.
Left Side
• Align the triangle mark in the guide on the left with that in the ITB Unit, place the shaft [A] of the ITB Unit [1] on the rail
[B] of the guide, and install the unit while shifting it to the left.
[B]
[A]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TR-UNIT
When TR-UNIT is cleared, T-CLN-BD/ TR-BLT/ TR-ROLK/ TR-ROLC are also cleared at the same time.
216
■ After Removing the ITB Unit

● After Removing the ITB Unit
1. Open the shutter [1], and clean the Patch Sensor [2] using the blower [3]. After cleaning, check that there is no
soiling caused by toner on the surface of the sensor. If the soiling cannot be removed, perform next step.
2. While pressing the shutter [1], clean the Patch Sensor [2] in the single direction with wet and tightly-wrung cotton
swab.
3. Clean the leading edge [4] of the Pre-transfer Cover Sheet with lint-free paper.
CAUTION:
• Do not use alcohol because it causes melting and clouding of the sensor window.
• Do not use alcohol because it causes melting and clouding of the sensor window.
• After cleaning, execute [Auto Adjust Gradation> Full Adjust], [Auto Correct Color Mismatch].
[3] [3]
[2]
[4]
[2] [1]
● Cleaning the Light Guide

Clean the upper surface [1] of the Light Guide of each color Drum Unit using the blower [2].
[1]
[2]
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade
■ Preparation
1. Remove the ITB Unit.“Removing the ITB Unit” on page 214
217
■ Procedure
1. Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Retainer [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Gears [3]
• 1 Clasp [4] (Used when removing the ITB)
[4]
2x
[3]
[1]
[2] [3]
2. Remove the Cleaning Blade [1].

• 2 Bosses [2]
[2]
[1]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > T-CLN-BD
It is also cleared at the same time when TR-UNIT is cleared.
After installation, execute [Auto Adjust Gradation> Full Adjust], [Auto Correct Color Mismatch].
Removing the ITB
■ Preparation
1. Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade.“Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade” on page 217
218
■ Procedure
1. Push the Tension Guide [1] to loosen the tension of the ITB, and secure the guide using the clasp [2].
• 3 Hooks [3]
[1]
[3] [3]
[2]
2. Stand the ITB Unit, and secure it by using the ITB Cleaning Blade [1] as a base.
• 1 Boss [2]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the Left Handle [3] by rotating it while lifting up the boss.
• 1 Screw [1]
• 1 Boss [2]
1x
[3]
[1]
[2]
219
CAUTION:
• When installing/ removing the Left Handle, align the holes [1] and [2] in a straight line.
[2]
[1]
• When installing/ removing the Left Handle, align the holes [1] and [2] in a straight line.
[1]
220
4. Remove the Tension Roller Retainer [1].

• 2 Hooks [2]
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
When installing the Tension Roller Retainer, do so in the order of (1) spring, (2) rib and (3) Shaft Hole.
5. Remove the ITB Tension Roller [1].
[1]
221
6. Remove the ITB [1].
[1]
CAUTION:
Install the ITB by inserting paper between the belt and the frame as shown in the figure below.
• A new ITB comes with dedicated paper.
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TR-BLT
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/BK)
■ Preparation
1. Remove the ITB Unit.“Removing the ITB” on page 218
222
■ Procedure
1. Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade [1], and lay down the ITB Unit such that the Primary Transfer Roller is visible.
[1]
2. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller Retainer Member [1].
[1]
3. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller [1].
[1]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TR-ROLK
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > TR-ROLC
Removing the Patch Sensor Unit
223
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Registration Guide Unit.“Removing the Registration Guide Unit” on page 276
■ Procedure
1. Remove the 2 Harness Guides [1].
• 2 Claws [3]
• 4 Hooks [4]
2x [3]
2x [4]
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the Patch Sensor Unit [1].

• 2 Protrudes [2]
• 2 Bearings [3]
• 2 Bosses [4]
[1]
[2] [4]
[4]
[2] [3] [3]
224
■ Adjustment after Replacement

1. Enter the service mode values written on the label included in the package.
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > PALPHA-F
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > PALPHA-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > POFST-F1
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > POFST-R1
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SOFST-F1
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SOFST-R1
2. Execute auto gradation adjustment.

• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust
3. After executing auto gradation adjustment, see the alarm log to check that 10-0006/10-0007 has not occurred.
When an alarm occurs, perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm.
4. Write the service setting values on the service label in the front cover.
Removing the Waste Toner Drive Unit

■ Preparation
2. Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.“Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit” on page 162
3. Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB.“Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB” on page
163
4. Remove the Waste Toner Container.“Removing the Waste Toner Container” on page 212
6. Remove the Left Cover Assembly (Rear).
7. Remove the Power Supply Cooling Fan.“Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan” on page 158
225
■ Procedure
1. Lift up the [A] part of the lever to release the claw [1], and remove the Waste Toner Drive Assembly [2].
• 1 Claw [1]
• 1 Connector [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
• 2 Hooks [5]
[2]
1x
[5]
2x
[A]
1x [3]
[1]
[4]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WT-DR-U
Removing the Registration Drive Unit / Duplex Merging Motor /

Registration Motor
■ Preparation
2. Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit.“Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit” on page 265
■ Procedure
1. Remove the white member [1] using a flat-blade screwdriver.
• 1 Claw [2]
1x
[1]
[2]
226
2. Remove the Duplex Merging Motor [1] and the Registration Motor [2].
• 4 Screws [4]]
[3] [2]
2x
4x
[4]
[4]
[1]
[3]
3. Remove the Registration Drive Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 3 Claws [3]
[2]
2x
[3]
[1]
2x
1x
[3]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > REG-DR-U
Removing the Main Drive Unit

■ Preparation
2. Pull out the Drum Unit by approx. 30mm.
227
30mm
■ Procedure
1. Remove the DC Controller PCB Unit [1].
• 18 Wire Saddles
• 27 Connectors
• 3 Screws
[1]
25x 12x 3x
228
< When the cables are fixed with 2 tie wraps >
CAUTION:
Fix the cables as shown in the figure or the cables may be damaged.
229
< When the cables are fixed with 1 tie wrap. >
CAUTION:
Do not push the extra length of the cables to the gap. Pull the extra length of the cables to the DC Controller PCB side as
shown in the figure or the cables may be damaged.
2. Remove the Main Drive Unit[1].

• 9 Screws [2]
[2]
9x
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
230
NOTE:
Removing the Main Drive Unit :
Rear Plate
Hook Controller Box
Main Drive
Unit
Low Voltage
Power Suppy
Unit
1. Release the hook of the Main Drive Unit from the Rear Plate.
2. Pull out the Main Drive Unit approx. 10 mm horizontally.
231
3. Remove it from the lower direction so as not to hit the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.
CAUTION:
Use caution to pull out the Main Drive Unit fully and horizontally. Otherwise, the coupling may be caught on the Rear Plate
and be damaged.
Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly

■ Preparation
3. Remove the Drum Unit.
4. Remove the Developing Unit.
7. Remove the Main Controller PCB.“Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 193
8. Remove the Main Drive Unit.“Removing the Main Drive Unit” on page 227
10. Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit.“Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit” on page 162
11. Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB.“Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB” on page
163
232
■ Procedure
1.
CAUTION:
• Although 1 or 2 cables are equipped with the Lifter Drive Unit by specification, the operation is not different.
• 2 cables are equipped with the service part of the Lifter Drive Unit. Connect 1 of them as shown in the figure.
1x
1x 2x
233
2.
3.
1x
234
4.
2x
Removing the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED Unit

■ Preparation
1. Remove the Main Controller PCB.“Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 193
2. Remove the Main Drive Unit.“Removing the Main Drive Unit” on page 227
■ Procedure
1. Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [2].
2 Wire Saddles [3]
[2]
3x
[3]
[1]
235
2. Remove the 3 Pre-exposure LEDs [1].

3 Claws [2]
[1]
3x
[2]
3. Remove the guide [1] of the Pre-exposure LED.
[1]
[1]
■ Adjustment after Replacement

The following procedure can also be performed in [Service Mode > SITUATION > Parts Replacement > Adjustment at replacement
of the Pre-exposure LED Unit ].
1. Light up the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED and check that the LED lights up in the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > PRE-EXP
2. Enter the value shown on the label included in the package in the following service mode.
• COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > INTEXP-M
• COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > INTEXP-C
• COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > INTEXP-K
3. Write the setting values set at step 2. on the service label in the Front Cover .
Remove the Bottle Drive Unit (YM)/(CBk)

■ Preparation
4. Open the Drum Unit Retaining Cover (Y/M/C/Bk).
236
5. Remove the Toner Bottle.
6. Remove the Left Cover Assembly (Rear).
7. Remove the First Delivery Tray.
CAUTION:
Be sure to place a sheet of paper during the work to prevent the drum from being exposed to light and damaged.
■ Procedure
1. Free the harness [1] of the Toner Bottle Mount (Y and C only).
• 1 Connector [2]
1x 2x
[2]
[1] [1]
[3]
237
2. Depending on the model, perform one of the following operation.

• Remove the Toner Bottle Mount (Upper) [1] (Y, M, C).
• 2 Hooks [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
• Remove the Toner Bottle Mount (Upper) [1] (BK).

• 2 Hooks [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
238
3. Remove the Toner Bottle Mount (Lower) [1].

• 2 Claws [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
2x
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2] [2]
4. Depending on the model, perform one of the following operation.

• Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit (YM).
5x 1x
[1]
[1]
[2]
• Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit (CK).

4x [1]
[1]
239
5. Remove the Bottle Drive Unit [1].

• 2 Bosses [2]
• 5 Hooks [3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[3]
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the Anti-vibration Sheet before replacing the Bottle Drive Unit.
Removing the Waste Toner Gear Holder

■ Preparation
NOTE:
If waste toner has overflowed onto the Intermediate Guide, this waste toner can be fed into the Waste Toner Container by operating
the Waste Toner Feed Motor (M17) (COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR = 14).
240
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Waste Toner Gear Holder [1].
• 1 Claw [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
• 3 Bosses [4]
[4]
[3]
1x
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
CAUTION:
Hang the hook [A] on the upper side of the Waste Toner Gear Holder onto the edge [B] of the plate to secure it.
241
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that boss [a] and [C] (three places in total) have not come off.
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that there is no gap between the Waste Toner Gear Holder and the mounting parts.
Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit

■ Preparation
1. Fully open the Right Door of the host machine.
2. Remove the ITB Unit.
4. Remove the Waste Toner Container.
242
5. Remove the Front Door.
8. Remove the Developing Unit.
11. Remove the Toner Bottle Mount.
12. Remove the Intermediate Guide.
13. Remove the Waste Toner Gear Holder.
16. Remove the Main Drive Unit.
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Drum Unit Retaining Cover [1].
• 1 Claw [2] for each
[1]
1x
[2]
243
2. Remove the First Delivery Tray [1].

• 2 Protrusions [2] for each
[2]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the Drum Rail Units [1] and free the harness [2] from the guide only for Bk.
• 1 Screw [3] for each
• 1 Screw [4] for each
[4]
4x 1x
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
4x
244
4. Remove the Developing Stay Units [1].
[1]
5. Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit [1].

• 2 Hooks [2]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
When removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit, be careful not to turn it over.
245
Removing the Intermediate Guide

■ Preparation
NOTE:
If waste toner has overflowed onto the Intermediate Guide, this waste toner can be fed into the Waste Toner Container by operating
the Waste Toner Feed Motor (M17).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR = 14
1. Fully open the Right Door.
3. Remove the Front Cover .
5. Remove the Drum Unit (Y).
6. Remove the Developing Unit (Y).
9. Remove the Toner Bottle Mount.
■ Procedure
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
1x
[1] 1x
2x
[3]
[2]
[2]
246
2. Release the 2 links [1] of the Bottle Motor.
[1]
[1]
CAUTION:
When installing the links of the Bottle Motor, be sure to pinch the Lock Arm [1].
[1]
3. Remove the Front Inner Upper Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Connector [3]
2x 1x 3x
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
247
4. Remove the Front Inner Lower Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
4x
[2]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove the Intermediate Guide [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Hook [3]
1x
[2]
[1]
[3]
248
Fixing System
Removing the Fixing Unit

2. Grasp the Light-Blue Handle [1] and remove the Fixing Unit [2].
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UNIT
When FX-UNIT is cleared, FX-LW-RL/ FX-UP-FR/ FX-LW-BS are also cleared at the same time.
The parts counter of the Fixing Unit is automatically cleared when a new Fixing Unit is detected.
CAUTION:
When fixing errors (E001/E002/E003) occur, close the Right Door and turn ON the main power.
Removing the Fixing Film Unit
■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Fixing Disengagement Gear [1].
• 1 Claw [2]
1x
[2]
[1]
249
2. Remove the Fixing Left Cover[1].

• 2 Claws [2]
[2]
2x
[1]
3. Rotate the Fixing Unit 180 degrees.
4. Remove the Fixing Right Cover [1].

• 2 Claws [2]
CAUTION:
Do not remove the cover abruptly as the harnesses are connected inside the cover.
[2]
2x
[1]
250
5. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

[1]
3x
[1]
6. Rotate the Fixing Unit 90 degrees.
7. Open the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers [1].
[1]
251
8. Remove the 2 springs [1] from the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers.
[1]
9. Return the Fixing Pressure Lever [1].
[1]
10. Open the Fixing Lower Cover [1].
[1]
252
11. Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [2] and remove the Fixing Film Unit [3].
1x
[2]
[3]
[1]
CAUTION:
When installing the Fixing Film Unit [1], be sure to align the grooves on the right and left with the rail [3].
[3] [2]
[3] [1]
[2]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UP-FR
It is also cleared at the same time when FX-UNIT is cleared.
Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller / Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft

Support
■ Preparation
2. Remove the Fixing Film Unit.“Removing the Fixing Film Unit” on page 249
253
■ Procedure
1. Open the guide [1].
[1]
2. Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller [1].
[1]
3. Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support [1].
[1]
254
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-LW-RL
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-LW-BS
It is also cleared at the same time when FX-UNIT is cleared.
Removing the Fixing Drive Unit

■ Preparation
4. Remove the Right Cover (Rear Upper) .
5. Remove the Second Delivery Unit.“Removing the Second Delivery Unit” on page 264
6. Remove the First Delivery Unit.“Removing the First Delivery Unit” on page 262
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Air Flow Duct [1].
• 2 Claws [2]
[2]
2x
[1]
2. Remove the Fixing Drive Assembly [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
• 1 Connector [4]
3x
1x
1x
[2]
[3]
[1]
255
Pickup Feed System
Removing the Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller (Cassette 1/2,Cassette

3/4(Option))
■ Preparation
1. Open the Right Door (Lower) or the Cassette Right Door Assembly .
• Cassette 1/2: Right Door (Lower)
• Cassette 3/4: Cassette Right Door Assembly
2. Pull out the cassette (each paper source).
■ Procedure
1. Move the Pickup Guide Holder [1].
[1]
2. Pull out the Pickup Roller [2], Feed Roller [3] and Separation Roller [4] while holding down the claw [1].
• 3 Claws [1]
1x [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > Cx-PU-RL
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > Cx-FD-RL
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > Cx-SP-RL
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > Cx-PU-RL
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > Cx-FD-RL
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 > Cx-SP-RL
256
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray / Feed / Separation Roller
1. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray.
2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover [1].

• 1 Claw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
1x
[3]
[2]
[1]
3. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [1] and the Feed Roller [2].
[2]
[1]
4. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Guide [1].

• 1 Hook [2]
• 2 Claws [3] (installed on the host machine)
2x
[1]
[2]
[3]
257
5. Raise the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller [1] with the shaft as the center, and pull it out from the shaft.
[1]
[1]
NOTE:
If you have accidentally removed the shaft together with the roller, install it from the front side.
NOTE:
• SERVICE MODE > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-PU-RL
• SERVICE MODE > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-SP-RL
• SERVICE MODE > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-FD-RL
M-PU-RL/ M-SP-RL/ M-FD-RL is also cleared at the same time when R-DOOR is cleared.
258
CAUTION:
• A Paper jam may occur when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller is not inserted properly, be sure to insert it all
the way to the correct position.
• When installing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover, fit part (1) first and then fit part (2) with the 3 bosses and
1 claw.
Removing the Right Door Unit
■ Preparation
1. Pull out the Cassette 1/2.
2. Open the Right Door/Right Door (Lower)/Cassette Right Door Assembly.
4. Remove the screw on the left side of the Cover (Rear Lower).
5. Remove the Right Cover Assembly (Rear Lower).
6. Remove the Right Cover (Front Lower) and Right Door (Lower).
259
7. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray.
3)
6)
4)
5)
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Wire Fixation Member [1].
• 1 Claw [2]
• 3 Hooks [3]
[3] [2] [3]
1x
[1]
2. Free the wire [2] from the Wire Fixation Member [1] and pass it through the hole [A] in the Right Door.
[2] [A]
[2]
[1]
[2] [A]
260
3. Close the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray.
4. Remove the Harness[1] from the Harness Guide[2].

• 1 Connector [3]
• 1 Clamp [4]
1x
[2]
2x
[3]
[1]
[4]
5. Fully open the Right Door .
6. Remove the Link Gear [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
CAUTION:
Support the Right Door with your thigh and taking care to prevent it from falling.
1x [1]
[3]
[2]
7. Pull the Right Door Link (Left) [1] and Right Door Link (Right) [2] towards the outside to remove them while bending
the [A] part at the position in the following figure.
1. Remove the link by pulling the Lever Assembly (Front) [1] toward the outside at the position [A] of the Stopper Rail and
opening the door.
261
2. Remove the link by pulling the Lever Assembly (Rear) [2] toward the outside at the position [A] of the Stopper Rail and
opening the door.
[A]
[A]
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
• Bend the [A] part when removing the Lever Assembly (the figure shows the Stopper Rail on the rear side).
• Pull the Lever Assembly (Front and Rear) toward the outside at the position [B].
[A]
[B]
8. Remove the Right Door [1].

• 2 Bosses [2]
[2]
[2] [1]
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > R-DOOR
REG-RL/ M-PU-RL/ M-SP-RL/ M-FD-RL is also cleared at the same time when R-DOOR is cleared.
Removing the First Delivery Unit

■ Preparation
262
4. Remove the Second Delivery Unit.“Removing the Second Delivery Unit” on page 264
■ Procedure
• 1 Connector [3]
1x
[2]
2x
[3]
[1]
[4]
2. Remove the First Delivery Unit [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
1x
[3]
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
If you overly pull out the right side of the First Delivery Unit, the 2 bosses may be damaged.
263
Removing the Second Delivery Unit

■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Pull out the Second Delivery Unit.
• 4 Screws
• 1 Wire Saddle
4x
1x
2. Pull out the Second Delivery Unit and disconnect the connector.
• 1 Connector [1]
1x 1x
264
3. Remove the Second Delivery Unit.
CAUTION:
If you overly pull out the right side of the Second Delivery Unit, the 2 bosses may be damaged.
Removing the Third Delivery Unit

2. Remove the Third Delivery Unit.

• 3 Bosses
• 3 Protrusions
• 5 Screws
5x
Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit
■ Preparation
1. Remove the Right Door Unit.“Removing the Right Door Unit” on page 259
265
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Right Door Link (Left) [1] and Right Door Link (Right) [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the Connector Cover [1].

• 1 Claw [2]
• 1 Hook [3]
[2]
1x
[1]
[3]

• 1 Connector [3]
1x
[2]
1x
[1]
[3]
266
4. Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
4x
[2]
[2]
[2]
NOTE:
Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit [2] while pulling it out along the [A] part of the Right Door Shaft Support Block [1] on the left
side.
[A]
[1]
[2]
Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit

■ Preparation
1. Pull out the Cassette 1/2.
4. Remove the screw on the left side of the Cover (Rear Lower).
267
6. Remove the Right Cover (Front Lower) and Right Door (Lower)
3)
6)
4)
5)
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
[1] [2]
1x
4x
[3]
Removing the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Unit (Option)

■ Preparation
1. Pull out all of the cassettes.
4. Remove the screw of the Cover (Rear Lower).
6. Remove the Right Cover (Front Lower) and Right Door (Lower).
7. Remove the Cassette Cover (Right Front).
268
8. Remove the Cassette Cover (Right Rear) and remove the Cassette Right Door.
9. Remove the Cassette Right Cover (Lower).
3)
6)
7)
9)
4)
8) 5)
■ Procedure
1. Release the connector [1] of the Harness Guide.
2x
[1]
269
2. Remove the Cassette Right Door Open/Close Detection Switch [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
1x [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
3. Remove the Pickup Unit [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
4x
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
Removing the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller
■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Guide Plate [1].
• 2 Screws [2] (Use a stubby screwdriver)
2x [2]
[1]
270
2. Orient the tabs of the 2 bushings [1] upward.
[1]
3. Lift up the left bushing [1], and remove the Shaft Spacer [2].
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop off the Shaft Spacer[2].
[1]
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to push the Shaft Spacer from above all the way down.
271
4. Remove the Vertical Path Roller [1].
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop off the 2 bushings [2].
[1]
[2]
5. Remove the 2 bushings [1].
[1]
CAUTION:
• Replace the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller simultaneously with the Registration Roller as rolling speed is controlled
by the roller consumable amount.
• Marked part must be located on the right side as shown in the figure when installing the roller.
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > VP-FD-RL
VP-FD-RL is also cleared at the same time when R-DOOR is cleared.
272
Removing the Registration Roller
■ Preparation
■ Procedure
1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide Retainer [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1] [2]
2. Release the protrusion by bending the hook [1] on the Secondary Transfer Guide.
[1]
3. Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit.

• 2 Protrusion [2]
[1]
[2]
273
4. Remove the gear [1].

• 1 Claw [2]
1x
[1]
[2]
5. Remove the E-ring [1].
[1]
6. Remove the Registration Roller [1].
[1]
7. Remove the Spacer (Right) [1] and Spacer (Left) [2].
[1]
[2]
274
CAUTION:
Replace the Registration Roller simultaneously with the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller as rolling speed is controlled by
the roller consumable amount.
NOTE:
• COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > REG-RL
REG-RL is also cleared at the same time when R-DOOR is cleared.
NOTE:
When installing the Secondary Transfer Guide.
1. Align the 4 ribs [1] of the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit with the Registration Roller [2].
2. Fit the 2 protrusions [3] of the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit to the springs [4].
[3]
[1] [4]
[3]
[4]
[2]
3. Install the 2 protrusions [1] on the front side into the holes [2] of the guide. Be sure that the rib [A] is located inside the Secondary
Transfer Guide Unit.
[3]
[1] [4]
[3]
[4]
[2]
4. Install the protrusion [2] while bending the guide [1] on the rear side.
[2]
[1]
275
Removing the Registration Guide Unit
■ Preparation
2. Remove the Front Cover.“Removing the Front Door” on page 155
■ Procedure
1. Remove the right side of the Registration Guide Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
1x [1]
[2]
2. Insert screwdrivers into the hole [1] and then release the claw [3] from the Registration Guide Unit [2].
• 1 Claw [3]
1x
[3]
[2]
[1]
276
3. Release the 2 protrusions and pull out the Registration Guide Unit [2].
CAUTION:
Be careful of the connector on the back.
[1]
[2]
4. Disconnect the connector [1].

• 1 Connector [1]
1x
[1]
1x [2]
277
5 Adjustment
Original Exposure System.................282
Actions at Parts Replacement...........284
5. Adjustment
Pickup Feed System
Image Position Adjustment
CAUTION:
Adjusting the 1st side also changes the margin on the 2nd side. If the difference between the 1st and the 2nd sides is within
+/- 0.5 mm, do not adjust the 2nd side.
Reference: Standard Value

Leading edge: 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm (front side, back side)
Left edge: 2.5+/-1.5mm (front side) / 2.5+/-2.0mm (back side)
1. After setting the service mode as follows, press the Start key and print out a test sheet by 2-sided print from each
paper sources.
• COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE = 5
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-K = 1
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-Y/M/C = 0
• COPIER > TEST > PG > 2-SIDE = 1
• COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK = each paper source
CAUTION:
When image is printed by 2-sided print, 1st side is printed up side of the paper and 2nd side is printed down side of the
paper. When checking the leading edge margin on the 1st side, check the margin in up side of the paper on the rear side
from the feed direction.
CAUTION:
If the margin is not within the standard values, Adjust the image position of each cassette in the following order.
Order Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3/4

1 Software Adjustment Software Adjustment Service Mode Adjustment
2 - Service Mode Adjustment Software Adjustment
*: Image position can not be adjusted by manual with the Cassette1.
■ Manual Adjustment
1. Pull out the Cassettes.
2. Check the value of the scale on the Adjustment Plate.
Scale
279
5. Adjustment
3. Loosen the fixation screw.
1x
4. Move the Adjustment Plate left or right according to the scale value checked in step 2 (as the Adjustment Plate is
moved toward the left on the machine by 1 tooth, the left edge margin is increased by 0.5mm).
Scale
Teeth
5. Tighten the fixation screw.
NOTE:
• A step may occur between the cassette when the adjustment plate is moved.
• Loosen the 2 screws to adjust the step on both side of the cassette front cover.
280
5. Adjustment
6. Pull out the next upper cassette, and check that the Adjustment Plate is correctly pushed against the frame.
CAUTION:
• If the Adjustment Plate is not correctly pushed against the frame, image cannot be correctly adjusted.
• When checking with the Cassette 3, the cassette front cover must be removed.
7. Check that the margin is within the standard values.
■ Adjustment Procedure (service mode)

Adjust the service values on the following service mode.
1. <Leading Edge>
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST : 1/1 speed, front side
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP1 : 1/1 speed, back side
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-THCK : 1/2 speed, front side
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP2 : 1/2 speed, back side
Leading edge margin is increased or decreased 0.1mm by 1 setting value.
2. <Left Edge>
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1/C2/C3/C4/MF : front side
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1RE/C2RE/C3RE/C4RE/MFRE : back side
Left edge margin is increased or decreased 0.1mm by 1 setting value.
3. When the service setting values is adjusted, write the replaced service setting values on the service label .
Reference: Standard value

Leading edge: 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm(front side, back side)
Left edge: 2.5±1.5mm(front side) / 2.5±2.0mm(back side)
Feeding direction
㻯㻻㻼㻵㻱㻾㻪㻭㻰㻶㼁㻿㼀㻪㻲㻱㻱㻰㻙㻭㻰㻶 COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
㻾㻱㻳㻵㻿㼀㻛㻾㻱㻳㻙㻰㼁㻼㻝 ADJ-xx/ADJ-xxRE
㻾㻱㻳㻙㼀㻴㻯㻷㻛㻾㻱㻳㻙㻰㼁㻼㻞 xx = C1/C2/C3/C4/MF
+
- + -
281
5. Adjustment
Service Mode Backup

• The machine is adjusted one by one at the factory shipment and the adjustment values are written on the service label.
• The service label is affixed to the back of the Reader Front Cover.
• When the adjustment is carried out at a field and the service mode values are changed, be sure to write the changed values
on the service label.
• If there is no corresponding items on the service label, write the value to a blank field.
• Backup and restoration in service mode is also possible.
Backup
Execute the backup on the following service mode (LV.2).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP
Restoration
Execute the restoration on the following service mode (LV.2).
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES
NOTE:
When changing the service mode setting values, it is recommended to back up in the above service mode. Performing backup
makes the work easier when replacing the Scanner Unit, etc.
When Clearing the Reader Related RAM Data.
CAUTION:
Before performing the RAM clear, execute the following procedure.
Be sure to output the P-PRINT.
Back up the service mode setting values related to Main Controller PCB (Excluding the case where service mode cannot
be executed due to the Main Controller PCB not operating normally).
• (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP
1. Execute the following service mode to perform the RAM clear.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
When backup is performed normally
3. Restore the backup data.

Work is completed when backup was normally performed.
282
5. Adjustment
4. Enter the values written on the service label inside of the Reader Front Cover.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-PY2
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-PM2
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-PC2
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > OFST-PK2
• FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED
• FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST
5. Print out the P-PRINT on the following service mode and check that the setting value set on the procedure 4 is
inputted.
283
5. Adjustment
Actions at Parts Replacement
Main Controller PCB

1. Upgrade the firmware to make the combination of firmware appropriate so that the machine operates normally.
NOTE:
The use of automatic update function is recommended.
2. Depending on the status of backup, perform one of the following measures.

Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to restore the backup data.
NOTE:
Work is completed when backup was normally performed.
When backup is not performed normally

Enter the service setting values written on the service label inside of the reader front cover from the following service
modes.
• COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY >
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD >
• COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL >
• FEEDER > ADJUST >
List of Service Mode Items to Enter Values
Path for Service Modes Service Mode Items to Enter Values

COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X, ADJ-Y, STRD-POS, ADJ-X-MG, ADJ-Y-DF, ADJY-DF2, ADJ-S
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT, DFTBK-R, DFCH-R2, DFCH2R2, W-PLT-X, DFTBK-G, DFCH-R10,
DFCH2R10, W-PLT-Y, DFTBK-B, DFCH-G2, DFCH2G2, W-PLT-Z, DFTBK-BW, DFCH-
G10, DFCH2G10, DFTAR-R, 100-RG, DFCH-B2, DFCH2B2, DFTAR-G, 100-GB, DFCH-
B10, DFCH2B10, DFTAR-B, 100DF2RG, DFCH-K2, DFCH2K2, DFTAR-BW, 100DF2GB,
DFCH-K10, DFCH2K10, MTF-M1, MTF-S1, MTF2-M1, MTF2-S1, MTF-M2, MTF-S2,
MTF2-M2, MTF2-S2, MTF-M3, MTF-S3, MTF2-M3, MTF2-S3, MTF-M4, MTF-S4, MTF2-
M4, MTF2-S4, MTF-M5, MTF-S5, MTF2-M5, MTF2-S5, MTF-M6, MTF-S6, MTF2-M6,
MTF2-S6, MTF-M7, MTF-S7, MTF2-M7, MTF2-S7, MTF-M8, MTF-S8, MTF2-M8, MTF2-
S8, MTF-M9, MTF-S9, MTF2-M9, MTF2-S9, MTF-M10, MTF-S10, MTF2-M10, MTF2-S10,
MTF-M11, MTF-S11, MTF2-M11, MTF2-S11, MTF-M12, MTF-S12, MTF2-M12, MTF2-S12
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL OFST-PY2, OFST-PM2 , OFST-PC2 , OFST-PK2
>
FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED , LA-SPD2 , DOCST , DOCST2
3. Calculate the MTF filter coefficient on the following service mode.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > MTF-CLC
4. Calculate for matching paper front and back linearity on the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-LNR
284
5. Adjustment
5. Execute either AB or Inch configuration tray width adjustment on the following service mode.
To execute AB configuration adjustment

1. Align the Slide Guide with "A4/A3".
2. Press the OK key, and register the width of A4 on the following service mode.
• FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4
3. Align the Slide Guide with "A5R".
4. Press the OK key, and register the width of A5R on the following service mode.
• FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R
To execute Inch configuration adjustment

1. Align the Slide Guide with "LTR/11x17".
2. Press the OK key, and register the width of LTR on the following service mode.
• FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR
3. Align the Slide Guide with "STMT/LTRR/LGL".
4. Press the OK key, and register the width of LTRR on the following service mode.
• FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR
6. Output P-PRINT on the following service mode.

Keep the output P-PRINT in the service book case.
Hard Disk
■ Actions Before Parts Replacement
1. In case the backup fails, print it out or export it to a USB.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
285
5. Adjustment
2. Back up the necessary data based on the table shown below.
<Backup List>
Backup target data Backup Method

User Service DCM Power OFF
(excluding DCM)
Address List Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Forwarding Settings Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Settings / Registration
Preferences (Except for Paper Type Management Settings) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Adjustment/Maintenance(*) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Function Settings (Except for Printer Custom Settings, For- - - Yes*9 Yes*10
warding Settings)
Set Destination (Except for Address List) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Management Settings (Except for Address List) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
User authentication information used for local device authen- Yes*2 - Yes*9 -
tication of UA (User Authentication)
Printer Settings Yes*1 - - Yes*10
Set Paper Information Yes*1 - Yes*9 -
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)
Favorite Settings Yes*1 Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Default Settings - Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Shortcut settings for “Options” - Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Previous Settings - Yes*8 - -
Setting items for Quick Menu
Button Size information Yes*3 Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Wallpaper Setting Yes*3 Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Button information in Quick Menu Yes*3 Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Restrict Quick Menu Yes*3 Yes*8 Yes*9 -
Setting items for Main Menu
Button settings in Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Button settings on the top of the screen - - Yes*9 -
Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Other settings for Main Menu - - Yes*9 -
Box settings
Mail Box Settings (Box Name, PIN, Time Until File Auto De- Yes*4 - Yes*9 -
lete, Print Files Upon Storing from Printer Driver)
Image data in Mail Box, Fax Inbox, and Memory RX Inbox Yes*4 - - -
Network Place Settings - - Yes*9 Yes*10
Web browser settings
Web Access setting information - - Yes*9 -
MEAP settings
MEAP application - Yes*8 - -
License files for MEAP applications Yes*5 - - -
Data saved using MEAP applications Yes*5 Yes*8 - -
SMS (Service Management Service) password - Yes*8 - -
Universal data settings
Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the - - - -
Delayed Send mode)
Job logs - - - -
Audit Log Yes*6 - - -
Key Pair and Server Certificate in Certificate Settings in TCP/ - - Yes*9 -
IP Settings in Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen)
Auto Adjust Gradation setting values - - - -
PS font - - - -
286
5. Adjustment
Backup target data Backup Method

User Service DCM Power OFF
(excluding DCM)
Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF - - - -
Key and settings information to be used for encryption when Yes*7 - - -
TPM is ON
Service Mode
Service Mode setting values (MN-CON) - - Yes*9 Yes*10
*1: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import or Export
*2: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > User Management > Authentication Management > User
Management
*3: Remote UI > Quick Menu > Export
*4: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up or Restore
*5: Remote UI > Service Management Service
*6: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Device Management > Save Audit Log
Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported.
*7: Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings
*8: Download mode > [5]: Backup/Restore > [3] : MEAP Backup > Meapback.bin
Backup is possible using SST or USB memory
The data saved using a MEAP application can be backed up only when the MEAP application has a backup function.
*9: For detail about the backup method with DCM, refer to " Backup/ Restoration in imageRUNNER ADVANCE Vx.x System
Service Manual".
*10: The setting value that was set when the main power was turned OFF the last time is automatically backed up to the
Flash PCB.
When a HDD is replaced with a new one, the setting value is automatically inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of HDD
formatting. (This function can be used from MN-CON V06.xx)

1. Format the HDD.
Start the machine in safe mode and format all partitions using SST or a USB memory.
• USB memory : [4] : Clear/Format > [1] : Disk Format
• SST : Mode List > Single > Format hard disk > Execute Format
2. Turning OFF and ON the main power switch.
3. Restoring the backup data.
4. Resetting/registering the data. Refer the setting data printed out at the preparation list, reset/register the data.
5. When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate, ask the user to regenerate
them again.
DC Controller PCB
Before Replacing
1. Backup the Service Mode data on the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP
After “ACTIVE” is displayed for approx. 2 minutes, “OK!” is displayed.
*: If necessary, output the service values by P-PRINT before execution.
2. After the above execution is completed, turn OFF the main power supply.
After Replacement
1. Restore of the Service Mode data on the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES
"ACTIVE" is displayed at execution and then "OK!" is displayed about 2 minutes later. Restoration is complete.
2. If uploading of backup data fails before replacement due to the damage to the DC Controller PCB, enter the service setting
values recorded on the service label or P-PRINT.
3. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
287
5. Adjustment
Flash PCB
Contact to the support department in the sales company how to replace the parts.
CAUTION:
• Do not remove the Flash PCB unless a failure is occurred.
• Flash PCB installed in different host machine can not be reused.
Developing Unit
Replacing Method
Proceed the following the procedure according to the replaced colour of the developing unit.
1. Execute the following service setting values according the replaced colour of the developing unit.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C
• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K
2. Write the following service setting values on the service label in the front cover according the replaced colour of the developing
unit.
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-Y-LVL
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-M-LVL
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-C-LVL
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-K-LVL
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-Y
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-M
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-C
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-K
Patch Sensor Unit

• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > PALPHA-F
• COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > PALPHA-R

• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust
3. After executing auto gradation adjustment, see the alarm log to check that 10-0006/10-0007 has not occurred.
When an alarm occurs, perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm.
4. Write the service setting values on the service label in the front cover.
Pre-Exposure LED Unit

1. Light up the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED and check that the LED lights up on the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > PRE-EXP
288
5. Adjustment
• COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > INTEXP-M
• COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > INTEXP-C
• COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > INTEXP-K
3. Write the above service setting values on the service label in the front cover.
Laser Scanner Unit

Replacing Method
1. Execute [Auto Correct Color Mismatch].
2. If the degree of color displacement differs between the center and the edge, execute "copy ratio correction" and "distortion
correction" as needed. Execute "copy ratio correction" and then "distortion correction".
Execute "copy ratio correction" and then "distortion correction".
Copy Ratio Correction: Horizontal Scanning Direction

1. Clear the offset value of copy ratio correction on the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > LS-INT-H
2. Output PG for adjustment on the following service mode.
• COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE : 62
COPIER > TEST> PG > PG-PICK: Select the paper source where A4 or LTR size paper or larger is loaded.
3. Check the chart and enter the value in the least part of the color displacement between -4 to 4.
9 settings of LS-H-xx
LS-H-xx
YL YC YR
ML MC MR
KL KC KR
Distortion Correction: Vertical Scanning Direction

1. Clear the offset value of distortion correction on the following service mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > LS-INT-V
2. Output PG for adjustment.
• COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE : 61
COPIER > TEST> PG > PG-PICK: Select the paper source where A4 or LTR size paper or larger is loaded
289
5. Adjustment
3. Check the chart and enter the value in the least part of the color displacement between -4 to 4.
9 settings of LS-V-xx
LS-V-xx
YL YC YR
ML MC MR
KL KC KR
Single Pass DADF-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Front side)

1. Enter the service setting values packaged in the Scanner Unit content.
2. To adjust the shading position automatically.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS
3. To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
4. Execute white level adjustment.

Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.
1. Place the paper on the Copy Board Glass.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
2. Place the paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
5. Calculate the MTF filter coefficient.

290
5. Adjustment
6. Enter the service setting values written on the service label inside of the Reader Front Cover.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
Single Pass DADF-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Back side)

1. Enter the service setting values packaged in the Scanner Unit content.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2GB
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100DF2RG
2. Execute white level adjustment.

Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.

4. Enter the service setting values written on the service label inside of the Reader Front Cover.
COPIER > ADJUST > 100DF2RG
COPIER > ADJUST > 100DF2GB2
COPIER > ADJUST > DFTBK-G
COPIER > ADJUST > DFTBK-B
COPIER > ADJUST > DFTBK-R
COPIER > ADJUST > DFTBK-BW
DADF-AV1: Scanner Unit

1. Input the service label value bundled in the Scanner Unit content.
2. Adjust the shading position.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS
3. Adjust the DADF scanning position.

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS
4. Adjust the white level.

Set a sheet of A3 or 11x17 paper on the Copy Board Glass.
CAUTION:
White level adjustment may result in failure in the following condition.
• When the white level is adjusted with small width paper.
• When the white level is adjusted with whiteness paper.
1. Set a sheet of paper on the Copy Board Glass.

291
5. Adjustment
2. Set a sheet of paper on ADF Document Pickup Tray.

3. Set a sheet of paper on the Copy Board Glass.
4. Set a sheet of paper on ADF Document Pickup Tray.

6. Enter the values written on the service label inside of the Reader Front Cover.
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
• COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
Copyboard Glass
■ Actions after Parts Replacement
1. Enter the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the Barcode Label affixed at the upper right of the Copy Board Glass.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y
2. Adjust the shading position.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS
3. Set the target value of B&W shading.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > BW-TGT
4. Adjust the white level. Prepare a sheet of A3 or 11x17 size paper.

1. Set a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1
2. Set a sheet of paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
3. Set a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass.
4. Set a sheet of paper on the ADF Document Pickup Tray.
5. Write the service setting values on the service label inside of the reader front cover.
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTAR-BW
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-G
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-B
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-R
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > DFTBK-BW
292
6 Troubleshooting
Initial Check.......................................294
Test Print...........................................295
Troubleshooting Items.......................300
Startup System Failure Diagnosis.....313
Controller Self Diagnosis...................322
Debug Log.........................................326
6. Troubleshooting
Initial Check
Initial check items list

Item No. Detail Check
Site Environment 1 The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%).
2 The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water
boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fi
re or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the fl oor keeps the machine level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type.
8 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
Checking the Placement of 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a
Paper specifi c level.
10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation
in the manual feed tray.
Checking the Durables 11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
Checking the Periodically 12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and re-
Replaced Parts place any part that has reached the time of replacement.
294
6. Troubleshooting
Test Print
Overview
This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as “Yes” in the following
image check items with each test print.
If the image failure occurred on normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader
side.
PG TYPE Pat- Items Origina-

TYPE tern Grada- Fog- Trans- Black White Uneven Uneven Right Straight Color tor
tion ging fer line line Density Density Angle Lines dis-
Fault (Color at the place-
line) Front / ment
Rea
0 Normal ----
copy / print
1to3 ---(For ----
R&D)
4 16 grada- Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
tions control-
ler PCB
5 Full half- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
tone control-
ler PCB
6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main
control-
ler PCB
7 ---(For ----
R&D)
8 Half-tone / Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Patch
9 ---(For ----
R&D)
10 MCYBk Yes Yes Yes Main
horizontal control-
stripes ler PCB
(sub scan-
ning direc-
tion)
11 ---(For ----
R&D)
12 MCYBk 64- Yes Yes Yes Main
gradation control-
ler PCB
13 ---(For ----
R&D)
14 Full color Yes Yes Main
16-grada- control-
tion ler PCB
Steps to select the test print TYPE

1. Set the number of print, paper size etc.
2. Select: COPIER > TEST > PG.
3. Select: COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE.
4. Enter the desired TYPE number and press OK key.
5. Select the corresponding color (setting 1 means output) in COLOR-Y/M/C/K.
6. Set the density in DENS-Y/M/C/K (this is enabled for TYPE=5 only).
295
6. Troubleshooting
7. Press start key.
How to use the test print

■ 16 gradations (TYPE=4)
This test print is for mainly checking the gradation, fogging, white line and uneven density at front & rear.
Check item Check method Assumed cause

Gradation Check that 16 density gradation is properly reproduced. Failure of Drum Unit
Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Fogging Check that fogging occurs on white image area only. Failure of Drum Unit
White line Check that white line does not appear on entire image. Failure of Drum Unit
Uneven density at front & Check that uneven density does not appear at front & rear. Failure of Drum Unit
rear
■ Full half tone (TYPE=5)
This test print is for mainly checking the black line, white line and uneven density.
296
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
Various settings can be configured in the following service mode.
• The print by developing color
COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-Y
COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-M
COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-C
COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-K
• The density of test print
COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-Y
COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-M
COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-C
COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-K

Transfer failure Check that the transfer failure does not appear on entire image. Failure of ITB (scratch, dirt)
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller (scratch, dirt)
Failure of Secondary Transfer Roller (scratch,
dirt)
Black line Check that black line does not appear on entire image. Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
(color line) Dirt on Primary Charging Roller
White line Check that white line does not appear on entire image. Failure of ITB Unit
Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Dirt on laser light path
Uneven pitch Check that uneven pitch does not appear on entire image. Failure of Drum Unit
Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on entire image. Dirt on Dustproof Glass
Deterioration of ITB
■ Grid (TYPE=6)
This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement, right angle accuracy and straight line accuracy.
Check items Check method Assumed cause

Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of each Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
color Failure of developer in Drum Unit
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller
Black line (color line) Check that black line (color line) does not appear on solid area of Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
each color Dirt on Primary Charging Roller
White line Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of ITB Unit
Dirt on Laser Light Path
297
6. Troubleshooting
■ MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10)
This test print is for mainly checking the dark area density of each color, each color balance and white line on development.
Check items Check method Assumed cause

Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of each Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
color Failure of developer in Drum Unit
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller
Black line (color line) Check that black line (color line) does not appear on solid area of Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
each color Dirt on Primary Charging Roller
White line Check that white line does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of ITB Unit
Dirt on Laser Light Path
■ 64-gradations (TYPE=12)
This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time.

Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced. Failure of Drum Unit
Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image area only. Failure of Drum Unit
White line Check that there is no white line on entire image. Failure of Drum Unit
298
6. Troubleshooting
■ Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14)
Light areas
White White
This test print is for mainly checking the gray balance, gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging.

Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced in each color. Failure of Drum Unit
Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image area only. Failure of Drum Unit
Gray balance Check that density is even in each color on gray scale area. Failure of Drum Unit
299
6. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Items
List of Troubleshooting Items

Description Reference
Not able to remove the ITB Unit due to the Primary Transfer Roller “The ITB Unit Cannot Be Removed Due to a Disengagement Error
disengagement failure of the Primary Transfer Roller” on page 300
Forcible stop of paper feed “Forcible stop of paper feed” on page 301
Inaccurate Right Angle at the Paper Trailing Edge “Inaccurate Right Angle at the Paper Trailing Edge” on page
303
Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message “ Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message” on page 308
■ The ITB Unit Cannot Be Removed Due to a Disengagement Error of the Primary
Transfer Roller
Location
ITB Unit
Cause/Condition
When an unexpected situation or unexpected combination of conditions occurs, a Primary Transfer Roller disengagement
error may occur. This may result in the ITB Unit not being able to be removed from the host machine.
Field Remedy
Follow the procedure shown below to remove the ITB Unit from the host machine.
2. Open the Right Cover Unit.
3. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the hole [A].
300
6. Troubleshooting
4. Turn the flat-blade screwdriver until the pressure of the ITB is released.
[A]
■ Forcible stop of paper feed

Function Overview
Forcibly stop the paper at a specified position.
Next time a job occurs, the paper is forcibly stopped at the stop position (leading edge) shown in the figure
301
6. Troubleshooting
[70]
[71]
[40,41] [32,33]
[30,31,99]
[20,21]
[72]
Use case
• When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur
• When jam occurs frequently
• When checking an image on the ITB
Points to note when using

• Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the job is automatically
recovered.
• Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified position.
• When a job in which the paper does not pass the specified stop position is executed, the setting to forcibly stop the paper
becomes disabled.
• Unfixed toner may be attached depending on the stop position. Use caution when handling it.
How to use
Use this function from SITUATION mode.
Service Mode > SITUATION > Troubleshooting > Forcible stop of paper feed
The following service modes can be operated from this SITUATION mode.
• COPIER > TEST > P-STOP > PRINTER
• COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE
• COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK
• COPIER > TEST > PG > 2-SIDE
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-Y
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-M
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-C
• COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-K
• COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-Y
• COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-M
• COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-C
• COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-K
• COPIER > TEST > PG > F/M-SW
302
6. Troubleshooting
Stop positions and check items

Items that can be checked differ depending on the position where paper stops.
Check for fold/skew/crease/operation check/jam/checking of image on ITB with reference to the table below.
No. Stop position Fold Skew Crease Operation Checking on im-

check / Jam age on ITB
0 Not forcibly stopped - - - - -
20 Pre-registration (1st side) Yes Yes - Yes -
21 Pre-registration (2nd side) *1 Yes Yes - Yes -
30 Pre-fixing (1st side) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
31 Pre-fixing (2nd side) *1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
32 Post-fixing (1st side) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
33 Post-fixing (2nd side) *1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
40 Second Delivery (1st side) *2 Yes - - Yes -
41 Second Delivery (2nd side) *1, *2 Yes - - Yes -
70 Reverse position 1 *1, *4 Yes Yes - Yes -
71 Reverse position 2 *1, *3 Yes Yes - Yes -
72 Duplex standby position *1 Yes Yes - Yes -
99 Pre-fixing (1st side, when checking the image) - - - - Yes
*1: Paper is stopped when a duplex job is executed (paper is stopped after being reversed)
*2: Paper may not stop depending on the setting of delivery outlet (3 Way Unit-D1 should be installed)
*3: The size of paper should be the one that allows to pass the short path (e.g.: A4, LTR, etc.)
*4: The size of paper should be the one that allows to pass the long path (e.g.: A4R, LTRR; 3 Way Unit-D1 should be installed)
■ Inaccurate Right Angle at the Paper Trailing Edge

Symptom
Inaccurate right angle may occur at the paper trailing edge [a]/[b].
[c] indicates the feed direction.
303
6. Troubleshooting
s sembly
Fixing A
Fixing Ass
e mbly
[a] [b]
[c]
REAR FRONT REAR FRONT
Cause
If there is a difference in height at the front and at the rear of the Fixing Unit, paper proceeds unevenly when it passes through
the fixing nip and the symptom occurs.
If the front side is lower, paper on the front side proceeds less smoothly than the rear side, and the image on the front side shrinks
[a].
If the front side is higher, paper on the front side proceeds more smoothly than the rear side, and the image on the front side
enlarges [b].
Execute fixing alignment adjustment so that the height at the front and the height at the rear of the Fixing Unit become the same.
Servicing works
1. Open and lift up the Right Door [1], slide the Right Door Guide (Left) [2] and Right Door Guide (Right) [3] in the direction
shown in the figure below to fully open it.
304
6. Troubleshooting
2. Grasp the light-blue handle [1], and remove the Fixing Unit [2].
3. Open and slightly lift up the Front Door [1], and remove it while pushing the claw [2].
• 1 Claw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
4. Remove the Drum Unit (Bk).
CAUTION:
• If you perform work while in sleep mode or when the power was turned OFF while in sleep mode, the Primary
Transfer Roller will not be disengaged, therefore the machine needs to be returned to standby state before
removing the Drum Unit (Bk).
• Since there is a risk of damaging the Photosensitive Drum, do not touch the surface.
• Be sure to block light to the removed Drum Unit using paper, otherwise it will be exposed to light.
5. Remove the Control Panel Lower Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
305
6. Troubleshooting
6. Remove the Delivery Outlet Side Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
7. Pull out the Cassette 1 [1], and open the Cassette Side Cover [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
8. Disconnect the connector [1] of the Front Fan.
306
6. Troubleshooting
9. Open the Front Fan [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
• 1 Claw [4]
10. Remove the Front Fan [1].
307
6. Troubleshooting
11. Remove the screws [3] of the Adjustment Plate A [1] and the Adjustment Plate B [2], and change the installation holes [4] to
execute fixing alignment adjustment.
• If the image on the front side has shrunk [a], move the Adjustment Plate A and the Adjustment Plate B upward for the
same divisions of the scale.
• If the image on the front side has enlarged [b], move the Adjustment Plate A and the Adjustment Plate B downward for
the same divisions of the scale.
[a] [b]
[c]
REAR FRONT REAR FRONT

12. Install the parts in the reverse order from step 10 to step 1.
13. Output the image where the symptom occurred, and check that the symptom does not occur.
If the symptom persists, check for other factors.
■ Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message

The following shows the remedy to be performed when a "non-Canon product" message is displayed even though Canon-made
toner is used.
Remedy:
Perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm.
308
6. Troubleshooting
1. Toner cartridge
Alarm code: At the same time, 10-0091 - 0094 occurs.
■ Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is displayed

Remedy procedure for E602 or E614 differs according to the status of the screen where error is displayed.
Check the remedy procedure by referring to the following flow chart.
Start
An error
code is displayed on YES
a black screen
NO
Go to
[Error code descriptions] Go to [Flow Chart 2]
Flow Chart 1
Turn OFF the main power.
+------------------------------------+
| E602-0801 |
+------------------------------------+
Cannot access the hard disk.

If the optional removable hard disk is use, check it is connected
then restart the machine.
IF this is error tou occur, content your service representative.
Display Sample : If an error code is displayed on a black screen
Execute a remedy described in service mode by referring to Error / Jam / Alarm in the Service Manual.
If an error code and a message is displayed on a black screen (as above), shift to the hard disk maintenance mode referring to
the Flow Chart 2 and execute the remedy described in Error / Jam / Alarm in the Service Manual.
309
6. Troubleshooting
Start
(1) Check cable connector Confirmation or judgment

connected to HDD and restart
the machine. Detail change of
initialization and
(2) Did /or Inspection
YES the machine start and
the issue solved? Initialization and /or
inspection fails and
NO related parts are replaced
(3) Shift to the hard disk Automatic process

maintenance mode. of the machine
(4) Is the
issue judged to be unsolvable YES
YES
by hard disk maintenance
mode?
NO
(5) Specify target area (9) Cancel the scheduled

(CHK TYPE) process and turn OFF
the power.
(6) Schedule the process
to conduct, turn OFF and
then ON the main power. (10) Replace related parts.
(7) Scheduled process

is conducted.
(8) Did
NO
the machine start and
issue solved?
YES
End
Flow Chart 2
CAUTION:
Numbers in the Flow Chart 2 are corresponding to the procedure numbers. Check the remedy procedure by referring to
the flow chart.
1. Check cable connector connected to the hard disk and restart the machine.
2. Check if the machine is started normally. If the machine is started normally, the analysis is complete.
310
6. Troubleshooting
3. If the machine is not started normally, execute key operation to shift to the service mode for shifting to hard disk
maintenance mode.
[1] : CHK TYPE

[2] : HD CHECK
[3] : HD CLEAR
[4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL
+------------------------------------+
| E602-0801 |
+------------------------------------+
Cannot access the hard disk.

If the optional removable hard disk is use, check it is connected
then restart the machine.
IF this is error tou occur, content your service representative.
Example of hard disk maintenance mode screen
4. Determine if the issue is solved in the hard disk maintenance mode.

• Proceed to 5 for diagnosis for the first time or trying to restore with the hard disk maintenance mode.
• If the issue cannot be solved by hard disk maintenance (HD-CHECK/HD-CLEAR is not executed or issue unsolved
even executed), proceed to 9.
5. Press "1" of Numeric Keypad, then two digits number to specify the target area (CHK TYPE).
[1] : CHK TYPE

[2] : HD CHECK
[3] : HD CLEAR
-------------------------------------------------
[1] has been selected
- Change to (0)
CAUTION:
The CHK - TYPE to be specified needs to be entered in two digits even the number to be specified is one digit. Enter "01"
to specify "1" and enter "04" to specify "4".
For example, in the case of the above display (E602-0801), specify No. 8 because Partition No. 8 is in error. (Enter the
number as "08")
If you made a mistake, press "1" again then enter two digits number.
6. Specify and schedule the process stated as a remedy for error code by referring to the Flow chart No.6, "Error /
Jam / Alarm" in the Service Manual. Then turn OFF and then ON the main power of the machine.
• To schedule disk check (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >HD-CHECK), select [2]:HD-CHECK.
• To schedule formatting (COPIER / FUNCTION / SYSTEM /HD-CLEAR), select [3]:HD CLEAR.
NOTE:
When the menu [2] to [4] is selected, key cannot be re-entered. If you made a wrong selection, Turn OFF and then ON the main
power of the machine, shift to hard disk maintenance mode and specify again.
7. Scheduled process is automatically executed.
8. If the process is complete and the machine is restarted normally, analysis is complete.
The same black screen and the error code is displayed, shift back to the hard disk maintenance mode and conduct other
maintenance.
311
6. Troubleshooting
9. Consider the HDD cannot be restored, select [4] and cancel the schedule. Switch OFF the main power of the machine.
[1] : CHK TYPE

[2] : HD CHECK
[3] : HD CLEAR
-------------------------------------------------
[4] has been selected
Turn OFF the main power.
CAUTION:
Replacing HDD without canceling the schedule causes the scheduled process is executed to replaced HDD at the next
normal startup.
When replacing parts, specify [4] to cancel the schedule.
10. Refer to the Service Manual to replace the related parts.
NOTE:
Related parts for E602
• Harness between main controller PCB and the HDD
• HDD
• Main Controller PCB
Related parts for E614
• Flash PCB
• Main Controller PCB
312
6. Troubleshooting
Startup System Failure Diagnosis
Overview
The purpose of this diagnosis is to identify the cause when the host machine would not start up.
A combination of the following three identification methods is used to identify the cause.
• A method for identifying the failure on the basis of the LED/LCD display status
• A method for identifying the failure on the basis of the power supply/signal route
• Identification of the location of the controller-related failure with the controller self-diagnosis function
The diagnosis is made according to the startup system failure diagnosis flow in order to perform basic identification of the cause
and perform the remedy.
If it turned out that the failure was caused by the controller or the Power Supply Assembly, perform a controller self-diagnosis or
check the Power Supply Assembly, and perform the remedy.
If the diagnosis result shows that replacement of parts is required, perform the works in the order shown below.
1. Check if the connectors (of a cable, etc.) are connected properly.
2. Replace the cable.
3. Replace the parts.
After performing the works shown above, be sure to restart the host machine and check if the symptom occurs again.
WARNING:
When a tester is used to perform a check, the AC voltage may be measured. There is a possibility of electrical shock, so
caution is required during the work.
NOTE:
The numbers such as (1) and (2) shown in the flow diagram indicate that there is a check item table showing the items to be
checked in the flow chart, location, and procedure.
Each number in the flow diagram is linked with the item number of the corresponding check item table to be referenced.
Flow Check item list

Start
(1) Whether there is nothing displayed on the Control Panel LCD
-1-
Is the Control Check item
NO
Panel Main Power LED Check whether the Control Panel LCD is blank and nothing is displayed on it.
blinking?
-2- NO
YES Is the Control
Panel Main Power LED
ON? -3-
Is the Control NO
YES Panel Energy Saver LED
Replace the following parts. lit or blinking?
- microUSB Cable between
the Main Controller PCB YES The location of each check item
(J4501) and the Control
Panel CPU PCB (J1020).
Replace the following parts. can be referenced by the
- microUSB Cable between
the Main Controller PCB corresponding number in the
(J4501) and the Control flow diagram.
Panel CPU PCB (J1020).
CAUTION:
Before using a tester to perform a check, be sure to turn OFF the Environment Heater Switch.
If a check is performed with the Environment Heater Switch ON, the diagnosis may not be performed correctly.
NOTE:
When replacing the cable, disconnect the cable from the connector and check the continuity.
313
6. Troubleshooting
Basic Flow
If the host machine would not start up, follow the flow shown below to identify the location of the trouble.
If a number (1) or (2) is shown in a flow chart box, be sure to make a judgement according to the check item table.
Start
Turn OFF the main power switch, and check

for disconnection of the power plug and
the Power Supply Cord.
Turn ON the power switch.
-1-
Is the Control YES
Panel LCD "blank"?
Perform the Control

NO Panel LED check
flow.
-2-
Does the bar remain YES
displayed on the Control
Panel LCD?
NO Perform a controller
self-diagnosis.
-3-
Does the logo remain YES
Panel LCD?
Perform the following work or replace
NO the following parts
- Reinstall the system.
- Replace the HDD.
-4-
Is an error code YES
Panel LCD?
NO Execute countermeasures by
referring to the error code
correspondence table
Check that the machine can be
started without any problem
Finish
(1) Whether there is nothing displayed on the Control Panel LCD

Check item
Check whether the Control Panel LCD is blank and nothing is displayed on it.
If it is blank, see “Control Panel LED Check Flow” on page 316 to perform the remedy.
314
6. Troubleshooting
(2) Whether the bar remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD
Check item
Check whether the bar remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD.
If the bar remains displayed, see “Controller Self Diagnosis” on page 322 to perform the remedy.
(3) Whether the logo remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD
Check item
Check whether the logo remains displayed on the Control Panel LCD.
If the logo remains displayed, re-install the system software or replace the HDD.
• See the Chapter 4, "Firmware Management" of the "imageRUNNER ADVANCE System Service Manual" to re-install
the system software.
• See the Chapter 4, "Parts Replacement and Cleaning Procedure > Main Controller System" of this manual to replace
the HDD.
(4) Whether an E code is displayed on the Control Panel LCD

Check item
Check whether an E-code is displayed on the Control Panel LCD.
E602-0001
An error has occurred.
Turn OFF the main power
Display sample of an E-code
If an displayed error code starts with E602 or E614, see “Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is
displayed” on page 309 to perform the remedy.
If the error codes other than above is displayed, see “Error Code” on page 349 to perform the remedy.
315
6. Troubleshooting
■ Control Panel LED Check Flow

Follow the flow shown below to identify the location of failure according to the Control Panel LED status and take measurements.
If a number (1) or (2) is shown in a flow chart box, be sure to refer to the check item table and make a judgment.
Start
-1-
Is the Control YES (Blinking)
Panel Main Power LED
blinking?
-5-
NO (ON or OFF) Which is the
Pattern 2
blink pattern of the Control
-2- Panel Main Power
Is the Control YES LED?
Panel MainPower LED Pattern 1
ON? Perform the
Power Supply -6-
NO Assembly check YES Is the FLASH
flow. PCB LED1
-3- blinking?
Is the LED8 of YES
the Main Controller NO
PCB ON?
NO Turn OFF the main
power, remove the Flash
PCB, and turn ON the
Replace the following parts. main power again.
- Replace the cable connecting Main
Controller PCB (J4502) and the Control
Panel Unit (J1021). * -7-
NO Is an error code
- Replace the mini-HDMI cable connecting displayed on the Control
Main Controller PCB (J4501) and the Panel LCD?
Control Panel Unit (J1020). *
- The Control Panel YES
Replace the following parts.
- Flash PCB
-4-
Did the problem NO
dissolve?
Replace the following parts.
YES - Main Controller PCB
*: Note that working with 2 or more people is required to lift

Finish the Reader/ADF when replacing the corresponding parts.
(1) Control Panel Main Power LED is blinking / ON

Check item
Blink pattern of the Control Panel Main Power LED
Pattern 1 (The Main Power LED blinks 2 times in 4 seconds: Controller error)
...
1 sec
4 sec
Pattern 2 (The Main Power LED blinks 3 times in 4 seconds: Power Supply error)
316
6. Troubleshooting
. . .
1 sec
4 sec
(2) E-code is displayed on the Control Panel LCD

Check item
Check whether E-code is displayed on the Control Panel.
E602-0001
An error has occurred.
Turn OFF the main power
E-code display example
(3) Is the LED8 of the Main Controller PCB ON?

Check item
Check whether the LED8 of the Main Controller PCB is ON.
LED8
Reference example
(4) Is the LED8 of the FLASH PCB blinking?

Check item
Check whether the LED2 of the FLASH PCB is blinking.
LED1
Reference example
317
6. Troubleshooting
■ Power Supply Assembly Check Flow

If a PCB does not have any power supply, the location of the problem can be identified by checking the PCB, jack, and pins that
supply power to the PCB in question.
Low
J1801(J502)
12V
J301(J501)
Voltage 12V 1 5
J4502
J1021
1 1 1
J4509
J801
AC Driver Main Controller Control
J812
AC AC 1 1
Power 12V 5V
3 PCB 3 3 2 2 PCB 4 2 Panel
Supply
PCB
J4513
5V
Main Power
Switch
Power Supply Assembly block diagram
Power is output from the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB when a signal is received from the Main Controller PCB. If there is no
problem with the power supply route, it may be a problem with the signal route.
Low Voltage
J4512 Main Controller
J813
Power Supply
PCB
PCB
Power Supply Assembly signals block diagram
Refer to the flow shown below to solve a power supply system trouble.
318
6. Troubleshooting
Start
(1)
Is 12 V supplied to the NO
Main Controller PCB
J4509?
(2)
YES Is 12 V output from the NO
LowVoltage Power Supply
PCB J812?
Replace the following parts:
- Cable connecting the Main YES
Controller PCB J4502 and
Replace the following parts:
the Control Panel J1021 *
- Cable connecting the Main Controller
NO
- Control Panel
PCB J4509 and the Low Voltage
Power Supply PCB J812
- Main Controller PCB
(3)
Replace the Low Voltage YES IS AC supplied to the
Power Supply PCB Low Voltage Power Supply
PCB(J801)?
NO
(4)
Check the cable connecting the AC IS AC output from the
YES
Driver PCB J1801(J502) and the Low AC Driver PCB J1801
Voltage Power Supply PCB J801 (J502)?
NO
(5)
YES IS AC supplied to
Replace the AC Driver PCB
the AC Driver PCB
(J501)?
NO
Replace the Power Supply Unit
*: Note that working with 2 or more people is required to lift the Reader/ADF
Finish when replacing the corresponding parts.
Power Supply Assembly check flow
(1) Is power supplied to the Main Controller PCB J4509?

Check item
Check whether 12 V is supplied to the Main Controller PCB J4509.
Connector side of J4509
Pin 1 & pin 2 (12 V) and pin 3 & pin 4 (GND)
Normal value: DC 12 V
UN05
1 4
J4509
319
6. Troubleshooting
(2) Is 12 V output from the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J812?
Check item
Check whether 12 V is output from the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J812.
Pin 1 & pin 2 (12 V) and pin 3 & pin 4 (GND)
Normal value: DC 12 V
1
J812
4
UN01
(3) Is AC supplied to the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J801?

Check item
Check whether AC is supplied to the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB J801.
Pin 1 and pin 3
Normal value: Equivalent to the input voltage
1
3
J801
UN01
WARNING:
Be careful when you measure the AC voltage.
(4) Is AC output from the AC Driver PCB J1801 (J502)?

Check item
Check whether AC is output from the AC Driver PCB J1801 (J502).
Connector side of J1801 (J502)
Pin 1 and pin 3
320
6. Troubleshooting
1 3
J1801
(J502)
UN07
WARNING:
(5) Is AC supplied to the AC Driver PCB J501?

Check whether AC is supplied to the AC Driver PCB J501.
Pin 1 and pin 3
1
J501
UN07 3
WARNING:
321
6. Troubleshooting
Controller Self Diagnosis

In order to reduce the time for identifying the cause of error occurred in the field and improve the accuracy of identifying the error
locations, operation of the controller system error diagnosis tool added to the host machine and the remedies for errors are
described.
This manual can be used when the host machine is in the following conditions.
• When a failure of the Main Controller PCB and the related PCBs (child PCBs such as TPM installed on the Main Controller
PCB) is suspected
PCBs and units diagnosed by the tool are as follow:
DC Controler PCB All-night/Non-allnight Power Supply Reader Operation panel
Main Controller PCB
Flash PCB
Memory PCB
Controller Self Diagnosis tool
Option
HDD
The area framed in blue (dotted line) in the figure shows the components to be checked by the controller system error diagnosis
tool.
The Main Controller PCB, child PCBs installed on the Main Controller PCB and HDD are automatically checked, and the result
is displayed on the Control Panel.
Boot Method
1. Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' simultaneously.
322
6. Troubleshooting
2. Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears on the Control Panel.
===============================================
BOX Checker Ver 0. 58
SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode check start. . .
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-1 IA-DDR2 SDRAM check start. . .
NOTE:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the regular Startup screen is displayed.
In this case, perform the following remedy.

Turn OFF the Main Power Switch again, and execute steps 1 and 2 shown above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT (Box Checker Test) is deleted, so install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, "- - . - -" is displayed in Service Mode (BCT) in the host machine.
• COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > BCT
Diagnosis Result
Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
When the diagnosis result is normal
When an error is detected by diagnosis

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name of the test where the error was
detected is displayed.
323
6. Troubleshooting
How to view the error result

The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above.
Explanation of the detailed error information is described.
>> The result of Box checker is displayed below.

[no] : SN-9 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge
[NG] : SN-13 TPM
[no] : SN-19 O-SDRAM
>> Please Turn off main switch.
[NO] means that optional PCBs are not mounted.

A fault has occurred when [NO] is displayed irrespective of whether the Option PCB is attached.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.
■ Controller Self Diagnosis Table

The error locations are identified according to the following table.
Test name Detailed test name Presumed failure loca- Remedy Relevant Er-
tion ror Code
SN-1 MN- Check the SDRAM of • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
DDR3 SDRAM the Main Controller
PCB
SN-2 SM BUS Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
MN DDR3 On Main Controller PCB
Board
SN-5 PCI Con- Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
figuration Cai- Main Controller PCB
man
SN-8 CPLD Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
Main Controller PCB
SN-9 LANC Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
FLASH Main Controller PCB
SN-10 RTC Check RTC setting • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
CHECK time
SN-11 TPM Check TPM PCB de- • Main Controller PCB 1. Replacement of the TPM PCB E746
vice • TPM PCB 2. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB
Remarks: It is always
[NG] in machines for
China because the
TPM PCB is not instal-
led.
SN-12 SOC Check the circuit in the • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
DDR3 SDRAM Main Controller PCB
SN-13 FRAM Check the Memory • Memory PCB 1. Check the Memory PCB installation E355
PCB lead 2. Replace the Memory PCB
SN-16 HDD Check the HDD lead • HDD 1. Check the connection of the HDD E602
2. Replace the HDD Cable
3. Replace the HDD
SN-17 SRI SRI BUS device Con- • Main Controller PCB Replacement of the Main Controller PCB -
nection check
324
6. Troubleshooting
Test name Detailed test name Presumed failure loca- Remedy Relevant Er-
tion ror Code
SN-25 FAN1 Check the rotation of • Main Controller PCB Check the connection of the Controller Fan E880
the Controller Fan
SN-100 HDD Check the S.M.A.R.T. • HDD • If the S.M.A.R.T. Check displays a numeric -
HEALTH acquisition and lead value apart from [0], a backup of customer
CHECK performance (see the data is recommended.
example displayed in • If the CheckResult is judged as CAUTION,
the figure below) a backup of customer data is recommen-
ded.
• If the Performance is displayed as [20
MB/s] or less, replacement of the HDD is
recommended.
• If Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK is
judged as NG, replace the HDD.
SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-23 FAN check start. . .
Exec SN-23 FAN => [OK] S.M.A.R.T Check -----
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK check start. . .
05: Reallcated Sectors Count:[000000000000] Refer to <S.M.A.R.T Check>.
S.M.A.R.T Check -----
05 : Reallocated Sectors Count :[00000000000000] See below.
c5 : Current Pending Sector Count :[00000000000000] C5: Current Pending Sector Count:[000000000000]
c6 : Uncorrectable Sector Count :[00000000000000]
Read Performance Check ----- C6: Uncorrectable Sector Count:[000000000000]
136. 8 [MB/s]
CheckResult => [NORMAL]
Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK]
========================================== Read Performance Check ----- If "Performance" is [20 MB/s] or less,
Exec SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode => [OK]
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% [90.8MB/s] recommend to replace the HDD.
%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%% %%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%% %%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %% %%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%% CheckResult => [NORMAL]
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%
%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%% %%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%
If the result is CAUTION,
%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%% Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK] recommend the backup of user data.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
>> The result of Box chexcker is displayed below. ===================================
[NO] : SN-8 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge
[NO] : SN-18 GOR(0)-DDR2 SDRAM
Exec SCENARIO-1 Preocessing BoxMode => [OK]
--- Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown. ---
If the result is NG, replace the HDD.
● HDD S.M.A.R.T Information

S.M.A.R.T Check
S.M.A.R.T Check Description Remedy

05: Reallocated Sectors Count: Number of alternative processed defec- If a numeric value besides [0000000000000] is displayed,
[000000000000] tive sectors backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
c5: Current Pending Sector Number of pending sectors (sectors If a numeric value apart from [0000000000000] is displayed,
Count: [000000000000] that may have defective sectors) backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
c6: Uncorrectable Sector Number of defective sectors (uncorrect- If a numeric value apart from [0000000000000] is displayed,
Count: [0000000000000] able sectors) which do not allow alter- • backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data.
native processing • Replace the HDD
* Alarm 31-0008 may have occurred in the Host Machine.
Limitations
• If there is a problem with the test name (SN-1, 2, 8, 12), this diagnosis tool itself will not startup.
• When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB, the following judgment results are displayed.
Standard PCB: [NG]
Optional PCB: [OK]
However, [NO] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.
325
6. Troubleshooting
Debug Log
Function Overview
As for debug log, following logs are available: continuous log that saves the operation log, automatic log that is saved when an
event occurs, manual log which is collected and saved each time at log saving, packet log, and key operation log.
Host machine
Main Controller
Save area
Auto save area
Module When executing
Log Log log saving
As needed / When
an event occurs
Automatic Continuous
Module logs logs
Log Log
Log
Log
Manual logs
Module
Log
When executing Packets
log saving When executing
log saving
Each Controller Log
Key operation
logs
NOTE:
Debug logs are used for analysis of program operations of the machine and identification of the problem by the developer.
This machine has a function for compiling operation history of each software module as debug logs and outputting them as unified
logs for analyzing problems.
Since the frequency of outputting debug logs and the type of logs can be changed by the settings, the settings need to be changed
according to the trouble that occurs and the situation.
Types of Debug Logs
Types of Debug Description

Logs
Sublogs Manual logs
Logs collected in each module and controller are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed.
Logs of the Main Controller, RCON, and DCON are saved together with automatic logs as up to 10 logs in
total.
Automatic logs
Logs that are automatically saved to the machine when an event (exceptional behavior, error code, or reboot)
occurs.
Logs of the Main Controller, RCON, and DCON are saved together with manual logs as up to 10 logs in total.
Continuous logs
Logs that are continuously saved while the machine is running.
Up to 100 logs of only the Main Controller can be stored.
Key operation logs History of key operations.
Log collection starts by enabling the setting and starting the function.
Logs that are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed.
Network packet Logs of network packet data sent from or received by the host machine.
logs Log collection starts by enabling the setting and starting the function.
Logs that are archived and can be collected when log saving is executed.
Storage location and types of Sublogs

The locations where Sublogs are stored and the types of logs are shown below. Logs may be stored in controllers and parts other
than those shown below.
326
6. Troubleshooting
Type Automatic logs Manual logs Continuous logs

Main Controller Yes (more detailed than continu- Yes (more detailed than continu- Yes
ous logs) ous logs)
DCON Yes Yes No
RCON Yes Yes No
Cases Where Debug Logs Need to Be Collected

• When the result of identification of the cause shows that the trouble was caused by host machine (firmware, hardware-related
controller)
• When the failure occurs only at the customer's site and cannot be reproduced by the department in charge of quality
management or Canon Inc.
■ Sublogs
Sublog is the general term for the unified logs for analyzing problem in which operation histories of software modules are compiled
as debug logs.
When a problem relating to the host machine occurs in the field and it is difficult to identify the cause of it at the user site, collecting
Sublogs and sending them to Design Dept./R&D can improve the efficiency of analyzing the problem and reduce the time it takes
to deal with the problem.
CAUTION:
• Sublogs are basically stored in volatile memory. Therefore, almost all information will be erased by turning OFF and
ON the power before saving the log data. When obtaining the log data, make sure to implement the operation to save
the log data (manually saving log) before turning OFF and ON the power.
• I order to prevent failure of collecting necessary information because the log is overwritten with the succeeding process,
be sure to collect the Sublog while the symptom has occurred or immediately after the occurrence.
• Once the Sublog files are collected, they are deleted from the machine. In the case of collecting Sublogs consecutively,
the number of continuous log files may be fewer than usual.
■ Key operation logs

This function collects the history of key operations in order to distinguish between a failure of the Main machine and an operation
error of the user in the case of trouble of erroneous fax transmission.
If it cannot be denied the possibility that the user operation caused the error, collect the key operation logs.
The key operation log are stored/recovered in a form included in the Sublog files.
The following confidential information in the stored key operation log is masked.
• Personal identification number, PIN code, password, etc., to be entered
• Information that is hidden by turned letters on the UI screen
CAUTION:
To obtain permission from a user in advance for recording key operations for failure analysis.
■ Network packet logs

This function collects the transmitted and received network packet data as a debug log in the storage (capture).
When it is expected that the trouble was caused by network, collect network packet logs.
NOTE:
To use this function, you need to register a license, so you need to ask the Support Dept. of the sales company to issue a license.
CAUTION:
When obtaining the network packet log, explain to the user and obtain permission before proceeding.
CAUTION:
Under heavy network load environment, packets can be dropped.
327
6. Troubleshooting
■ Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs

Check the following flow to determine the procedure for collecting logs according to the type of problem.
Service call for trouble
Does the problem

repeat restart?
Key operation logs need to be collected
Does the problem

cause the Control Panel
to be locked?
Network packet logs need to be collected
<DEBUG SRAM PCB Assembly Board: Required>
Does the problem

repeat restart? See Case A of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
Does the problem

cause the Control Panel See Case B of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
to be locked?
Is the problem related

See Case C of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
to the sleep mode?
<DEBUG SRAM PCB Assembly Board: Not required>
Is the problem still

occurring or just finished See Case D of the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
occurring?
See Case D of the "Procedure

for Obtaining Logs"
When the user's operation such as wrong fax transmission may be the cause of the problem, enable [Store Key Operation Log].
328
6. Troubleshooting
Procedure for Collecting Logs

Log Collection Procedure List
Problem Details of Problem DEBUG SRAM Procedure for Obtaining Logs

Case PCB ASS'Y
Board
Case A Problem that repeats re- Necessary 1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 331 and make the preparations such
start as installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the set-
tings.
2. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network
Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 334 immediately after
restart.
3. Save and collect reports by referring to “Saving and Collecting Report
Files” on page 335.
4. Collect debug logs by referring to “Collection of Log” on page 336.
Case B Problem causing the Necessary 1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 331 and make the preparations such
Control Panel to be as installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the set-
locked tings.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the power immediately after the Control Panel
is locked.
3. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network
Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 334 after startup.
Case C Problem related to the Necessary 1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 331 and make the preparations such
sleep mode as installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the set-
tings.
2. After the problem occurs, turn OFF and then ON the power if necessary,
and execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network
Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 334.
Case D Problem when execut- Not necessary 1. Execute log saving while the problem is occurring by referring to “Sav-
ing a job (Example: ing of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on
Printing is not per- page 334.
formed, etc.) 2. Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network
Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 334.
When an E code error Not necessary Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet
has occurred Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 334.
However, if the background of the Control Panel is blank and an error code
is displayed in text, logs cannot be obtained.
Case E Problems other than Not necessary Execute log saving by referring to “Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet
above Logs and Key Operation Logs” on page 334.
Check with the user on the date and time when the problem occurred and
the procedure.
Saving and Collecting Debug Logs

■ Tools Required
The following tools are necessary to save/collect debug logs of the machine.
Exporting to a USB Device

• USB device
When exporting debug logs to a USB device, use a USB device in which the system software for the machine is registered
using SST.
Since the size and number of log files to collect varies according to the device status and the logs that have been saved,
the size of the collected files may be several hundred MB. Therefore, it is recommended to use a USB device with 1 GB
or more of free space.
The USB device must be formatted with the FAT file system.
329
6. Troubleshooting
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the USB device has 1 GB or more of free space before collecting a log.
If capacity of the USB device is insufficient, logs that failed to be saved will be deleted so that analysis of the symptom
cannot be performed.
Exporting to a PC
• PC with SST installed
• Network connection cable
When exporting debug logs to a PC, a PC with SST installed and a network connection cable are required.
Common (When Exporting to a USB Device, or When Exporting to a PC)
• DEBUG SRAM PCB Assembly Board
In the following conditions, debug logs cannot be saved, therefore the DEBUG SRAM PCB Assembly Board is required.
• When restart is repeated
• When all the operations of the device are frozen and manual logs cannot be collected.
• When the machine would not recover from sleep mode
Refer to the following regarding installation on to the Controller PCB.
Reference example of installation
■ Work Flow
The flow of saving/collecting Sublogs is shown below.
1. Preparation
Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 328, and make the preparation as needed according
to a situation where an event has occurred.
2. Reproduction of the symptom

Reproduce the symptom.
3. Saving of manual logs

Save manual logs that require manual operation.
4. Output of reports
Output reports necessary for escalation.
330
6. Troubleshooting
5. Collecting log files

Start the machine in download mode, and save (collect) the log files to a USB device or a PC.
CAUTION:
In the case of analysis using Sublog, the following information needs to be obtained together with the Sublog.
• Symptom that has occurred (from service technician's viewpoint as far as possible)
• Date and time of the event (from an hour before the event to an hour after the event)
• Reports (P-Print, HIST-PRT, job logs, communication management report, etc.)
• Printed data and original at the time of reproduction (depends on the trouble that has occurred)
Besides Sublog, the above-mentioned information is required due to the following reasons:
• Failures such as a process being stopped due to an error or an unintended behavior are easy to find, but failures such
as "the behavior is slow" are difficult to analyze based on operation logs only.
• Since the number and size of the files are huge, the information helps to find the operation log where the problem
occurred.
• When R&D reproduces the failure, it is necessary to use information such as the procedure used by the customer,
frequency of use, and job data at the time of occurrence of the failure.
6. Remove the board installed in step 1 and return the settings back to the original values.
■ Preparation
Follow the procedure shown below to make preparations for collecting debug logs.
1. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 328 and when it is judged that DEBUG
SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board is required, install the board.
DEBUG SRAM PCB
Reference example of installation
2. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 328 and when it is judged that collection
of the key operation logs is required, enable [Store Key Operation Log] by following the procedure shown below.
1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Store Key Operation Log].
2. Select [ON] and press [OK] to start saving key operation logs.
CAUTION:
When collecting the key operation logs, be sure to obtain user's permission in advance.
331
6. Troubleshooting
3. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 328 and when it is judged that collection
of the network packet logs is required, enable the network packet log collection function by following the procedure
shown below and start the function.
1. Enter a license in the following menu to enable network packet capture.
[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Register License]
NOTE:
Use the license issued by the Support Dept. of the sales company to activate it.
2. Enable the setting (ON) in the following menu.

[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log]
3. Set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON
4. Refer to “Initial setting of the network packet log collection function” on page 333, and configure the required option
settings.
5. Set "0" or "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2) to start capture of network packets.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > STT-STP
• 0: Not automatically collect at startup (factory default setting)
• 1: Automatically collects at startup
6. Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to check the status of the capture.
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPSTATE
The following types of status are displayed.
• RUNNING: Packets are being captured.
• STOP: Packet capturing is stopped.
• HDDFULL: The maximum amount of 1 GB of packets has been captured.
4. When an instruction to change the automatic log settings is given by the Support Dept. of the sales company, change
the settings by referring to“Automatic Log Settings” on page 332.
● Automatic Log Settings

Automatic log is collected triggered by "occurrence of an unexpected error", "occurrence of an error code" or "restart of the
machine".
If you want to change the triggers, change the setting in the following service mode.
COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-TRIG
However, there is no need to change the setting unless otherwise instructed by the Support Dept. of the sales company.
The events that trigger collection of automatic logs and their setting values are shown below.
List of conditions for automatic saving of logs and setting values
Setting value Event condition for saving automatic log

101 (Default setting) When an unexpected error occurs, an error code occurs, or the machine is restarted
111 Only when an unexpected error occurs
121 Only when an error code occurs
131 Only when the machine is restarted
201 When an unexpected error occurs, an error code occurs, the machine is restarted, or an alarm occurs
211 When an unexpected error occurs or an alarm occurs
221 When an error code occurs or an alarm occurs
231 When the machine is restarted or an alarm occurs
291 Only when an alarm occurs
301 When an unexpected error occurs, an error code occurs, the machine is restarted, or a jam occurs
311 When an unexpected error occurs or a jam occurs
321 When an error code occurs or a jam occurs
331 When the machine is restarted or a jam occurs
391 Only when a jam occurs
The procedure for changing the log auto save conditions with LOG-TRIG is indicated below.
1. Press [LOG-TRIG], enter the value for the conditions you want to set, and press [OK].
"ACTIVE!" flashes in the display column, and the log settings in the machine are changed.
2. When [OK!] is displayed in the display column, the work is complete.
If the processing fails, "NG" is displayed. It is not necessary to restart the device.
332
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
• A value between 0 and 99999 can be set, but make sure to set the value instructed by the Support Dept. of your sales company.
Operations are not guaranteed when value other than the above is set.
• The displayed setting is not changed simply by changing the setting or pressing [DEFAULT].
It is necessary to exit the DBG-LOG screen once by pressing the [Reset] key, etc. and then display it again, after performing
these operations.
Executing Auto Saving (Reference Example)

An example of executing auto saving using LOG-TRIG is shown below so that you can experience the log collection work.
It is an example of log collection in the event of jam in the Delivery Assembly during copy operation.
1. Connect a USB device to the machine while the machine is ready for operation.
2. Set "301" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
• COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-TRIG
3. Make a copy. Open the Delivery Feed Assembly before paper is delivered from the Delivery Assembly to generate a jam.
4. When a jam occurs, confirm "Storing System Information..." is displayed at the bottom of the Control Panel.
● Initial setting of the network packet log collection function

When collecting the network packet logs, configure the initial settings as needed.
Setting the overwrite function
1. To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT
NOTE:
When this setting is enabled, old logs will be overwritten. If the symptom cannot be reproduced, disable this setting (setting value:
0) and secure logs (save them using SST or USB).
After securing the logs, enable the setting (setting value: 1) again.
Behavior when HDD reaches the limit

When this setting is enabled (setting value: 1), the following behaviors will occur when the HDD reaches the limit.
• When overwrite setting is ON
• The oldest packet file is deleted. This "oldest file" is judged not by the date and time allocated to the file but
by the last update time of the file.
• If the HDD reaches the maximum size while retrieving packets, the oldest file will be deleted, and CAPSTATE
of the capture, which continues the retrieval process for the file which is being saved, remains "RUNNING".
• When overwrite setting is OFF
• The capture is stopped.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture will be "HDDFULL". However, STT-STP will remain as Start (1) status. By
changing STT-STP (0) to STTSTP (1), the capture resumes.
• When the capture resumes, the capture starts if HDDFULL has been solved.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture will be "RUNNING".
• If HDDFULL has not been solved, an error is generated as the result of resuming the capture.
• The CAPSTATE of the capture remains "HDDFULL".
• If the capture is stopped while the CAPSTATE is "HDDFULL", the CAPSTATE of the capture remains "STOP".
Setting the encryption function
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > ENCDATA
• 0: Encrypted when data is extracted (factory default setting).
• 1: Not encrypted when data is extracted.
• 2: When data is extracted, a ciphertext file and a plaintext file are extracted.
The extension of extracted packet data will be "XXX.can" when encryption settings are enabled.
The extension of extracted packet data will be "XXX.cap" when encryption settings are disabled.
This setting only applies when extracting data by the USB flash drive.
NOTE:
When SST is used to collect data, both plaintext data and ciphertext data are extracted, and this setting is ignored.
333
6. Troubleshooting
Setting the payload drop function
1. To enable this setting, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PAYLOAD
• 0: Not drop the payload (factory default settings)
• 1: Drop the payload
The obtained packet data includes a header part and data part. The header part includes data such as the TCP header and
IP header. The data part includes the actual data.
Enabling this function discards the actual payload data and extracts only the data from the header part, which has the following
effects.
• Can be used when customer data is not allowed to be extracted
• Can be used in an environment where traffic is highly overloaded
Header part
Data part
Discarded part
Packet data structure image
Setting the filter function
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT
• 0: All data is collected without being filtered (factory default setting).
• 1: Data is filtered.
If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.
Setting the startup collection function
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PONSTART
• 0: Not automatically collect at startup (factory default setting)
• 1: Data is filtered.
If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.
■ Saving of Manual Logs, Network Packet Logs and Key Operation Logs
Follow the steps shown below to save debug logs (manual logs, network packet logs, and key operation logs) to the save area
of the host machine that require manual operation.
1. After the symptom has reproduced, hold down the Counter key on the Control Panel for approx. 10 seconds, and
then press 1, 2, and 3 in that order on the Numeric Keypad.
CAUTION:
If power is turned OFF during the period from when the symptom occurs to when the manual log is saved (hold down the
Counter key and press numeric keys 1, 2, and 3), necessary log data will be deleted so that analysis cannot be performed.
2 1
334
6. Troubleshooting
2. Check that "Storing System Information..." is displayed on the Control Panel.

• For platform version 3.7 or later, following screen is displayed.
Save screen for platform version 3.7 or later

• For the platform version 3.6 or earlier, following message is displayed.
Massage during saving logs for platform version 3.6 or earlier
CAUTION:
• While logs are being saved, other operations cannot be performed.
• If above screen or message does not appear, press the Reset button and then try again.
NOTE:
When network packet logs have been collected and necessary network packets have been captured, stop the capture from the
following menu.
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Store Network Packet Log]
When this setting is disabled, all the service mode settings configured in step 3 are initialized.
After completion of analysis of the network trouble, be sure to disable the network capture function. It is therefore necessary to
disable and then transfer the license, but it is not necessary to transfer the LMS license after that.
■ Saving and Collecting Report Files

Follow the procedure shown below to save report files to the the Main Unit internal storage and collect them using a USB device.
335
6. Troubleshooting
1. Execute the following service mode to save report files.

COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE
2. Connect the USB and verify that Main machine recognizes the USB.
3. Execute the following service mode and retrieve the report file to USB.
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB
■ Collection of Log
Save the Sublogs stored in the host machine to a USB device or a PC with SST installed.
The procedure for storing Sublogs to a USB device differs from that for storing Sublogs to a PC
● Collecting into a USB Device

To save (collect) Sublogs to a USB device, perform the procedure shown below to collect the logs.
If SST is used to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC, this work is not necessary.
CAUTION:
If the log is stored multiple times to the USB flash drive on the host machine with the platform version 3.6 or earlier, make
sure to move the stored log file to a different location each time.
Log files are stored in the root directory of USB flash drive. If multiple files are stored, the file, "LOGLIST.txt" is overwritten.
Note that on the host machine with the platform version 3.7 later, specifications are changed and this file is not overwritten.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the machine.
336
6. Troubleshooting
2. Execute the following service mode.

COPIER > Function > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
3. The host machine will enter download mode. Press [8] on the Numeric Keypad.
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Root Menu (USB) <v25.12> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12)

-------------------------------------------------------
[ 1 ] : Select Version
[ 4 ] : Clear/Format
[ 5 ] : Backup/Restore
[ 8 ] : Download File
[ 9 ] : Version Information
[ Reset ] : Start shutdown sequence
4. [Download File Menu] will appear. Press a numeric key for the file to download.
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Download File Menu (USB) <v25.12> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12)

------------------------------------------------------------------------
[ 1 ] : SUBLOG Download
[ 4 ] : ServicePrint Download
[ 5 ] : NetCap Download
[ C ] : Return to Menu
• Press [1] key to download Sublog.

• Press [5] to download network packet log.
5. The files to be downloaded and the number of files are displayed. Check the following items and press [0] on the
Numeric Keypad.
• Whether the manual log that was saved at the time of reproduction of the symptom is displayed under Event Logs
• Whether the date and time at which the symptom was reproduced is within the period of Continuous Log
Example: When the symptom was reproduced at 9:40 on April 14, 2017 and a manual log was saved
Check that the manual log that was generated at 9:40 on April 14, 2017 is displayed under Event Logs.
Check whether 9:40 on April 14, 2017 is included in the logged period(from 8:03:33 on March 22, 2017 to 9:45:14 April
14, 2017) of the ContinuousLog.
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Sublog Download (EventLog + CuntinuousLog) ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Automatic (event) log / manual log:
Check that the manual logs that have
Event Logs ( lastest 10 files) :
20170414_09-40-UPN00003-V2512_Debuglog@Cnt123 been saved when the symptom occurs.
20170404_16-02-ZZZ00000-V0254_ServiceCall-E719-0001
20170328_08-22-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception
ContinuousLog :
Period : 20170322_0803-33 to 20170414_0945-14
Toral : 102files Continuous log:

/ Execute ? /
-(OK) : 0 / (CANCEL) : Any other keys - Check that the date and time at which
the symptom occurred are included within
the collection period of continuous logs.
337
6. Troubleshooting
6. When downloading the log files is complete, the following message will appear. Press any key.
--- Please press any keys ---
[68/102]20170405_0949-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[69/102]20170405_0908-19-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[70/102]20170404_1822-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[71/102]20170404_1702-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[97/102]20170322_1324-37-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[98/102]20170322_1204-56-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[99/102]20170322_1102-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[100/102]20170322_0954-48-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[101/102]20170322_0848-16-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
[102/102]20170322_0803-33-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
Sub log full Download OK.
---Please press any keys---
Do not turn OFF the power without.......
● Saving to a PC with SST installed

Follow the procedure shown below to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC using SST.
If a USB device is used to save (collect) Sublogs, this work is not necessary.
1. Connect a PC with SST installed to the network where the host machine is connected.
2. Start SST, and select the model name of the machine from Model List. Press the Start button.
3. Click [Upload Data].
338
6. Troubleshooting
4. Check that continuous logs are stored in the device.

When connection with the device is completed, the screen shown below will appear. Select [Upload Data].
The set of data stored in the device is shown on the right. Click "+" at "Log" to expand the tree, and check that there are
continuous logs (date_model number_clog.bin).
5. Select the data to upload, and click [Start].

Select the check box on the left of "Log", and click the "Start" button.
It is not necessary to select MeapBack.bin and SramImg.bin because they are not necessary for analysis.
6. Enter a file name (arbitrary), and click the SAVE button to save the file to the PC.
339
6. Troubleshooting
● Checking the Saved Files
NOTE:
If log files are stored in the USB flash drive, the path to the storage destination is different by the platform version.
Platform version prior to 3.7

They are stored in the root directory of USB flash drive.
Platform version 3.7 or later

Folders of "iA_sublog" and "model name + serial number + date (year, month, day + hour, minute, second)" are automatically
created in the root directory of USB flash drive and files are stored in the latter folder.
Sublog files
Check the saved log files whether the necessary log has been collected.
• Whether it is a log file of the target model (It contains the serial number of the target machine.)
• Whether the time and date the symptom occurred is included in the logged period. (Date and time in the log file name
represent those of when the log collection is started. There are files with dates before the symptom occurs.)
Storage locations of log files
Storage locations of log files are shown below.
When using USB device: Root folder of the USB device
When using SST: PC's C:\ServData\<model name>\serial number folder
How to check the continuous log files

The continuous log files are stored in the log file storage location.
Check the names (date and time) of the files that end with "clog.bin" to see whether the date and time the symptom was
reproduced is included.
In the case of the following figure, the oldest continuous log is 08:03:33 on March 22, 2017 and the latest file is 08:43:44 on
April 14, 2017. The date and time the symptom was reproduced should be included within the period.
340
6. Troubleshooting
20170322_0803-33-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170322_0848-16-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170322_0954-48-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170322_1102-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170413_1408-46-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170413_1409-12-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170413_1455-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170414_00-26-ZZZ00000-V2512_SAFE.bin
20170414_0843-44-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
LOGLIST.TXT
sxldlog_2017-04-14_00-28-22.bin
20161013_1733-36_ZZZ99999_1406_clog.bin
Serial Number
Data and time when a file Firmware Version
was archived (year, month, Identification indicating
day, hour, minute, second). that it is a continuous log
File name of continuous log
How to check the manual log files and automatic (event) log files
The manual log files and automatic (event) log files are stored in the log file storage location.
At the time of collection, these logs will be archived as a one binary file (the name of the file ends with "_SAFE.bin").
20161013_19-34-ZZZ99999-V1406_SAFE.bin
YYYYMMDD_HH-MM Serial Number Firmware Version
Which logs have been stored in this binary file is described in LOGLIST.TXT stored in the log file storage location.
Open this file to check the manual logs and automatic (event) logs.
CAUTION:
If a manual log was saved when the symptom was reproduced, check that a log with the date and time immediately after
the reproduction is included.
If there is no log file collected immediately after the symptom was reproduced, the file may have been overwritten and lost.
20170413_1408-46-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170328_08-18-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception
20170413_1409-12-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170328_08-22-ZZZ00000-V0254_exception
20170413_1455-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
20170414_00-26-ZZZ00000-V2512_SAFE.bin
20170414_0843-44-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin
LOGLIST.TXT 20170414_09-40_ZZZ00000_V0254_Debuglog@Cnt123
sxldlog_2017-04-14_00-28-22.bin UPDATELOG_LOG
20161013_10-10_ZZZ99999_V 1308_Debuglog@Cnt123
Serial Number Identification indicating that
Data and time when key Firmware Version
a key operation was performed
operation was performed
(year, month, day, hour, minute, second).
File name of manual log
341
6. Troubleshooting
20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_Fatal00-exception
Data and time when Serial Number Cause of occurrence
Firmware Version
an even occurred
20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_ServiceCall-E719-0031
Data and time when Serial Number Cause of occurrence
Firmware Version
an even occurred
File name of automatic log
How to check the network packet log files

The network packet log file is stored in the "NC + date" folder created in the log file storage location.
Open the folder and check that two types of files have been saved: a plaintext file which file name starts with "NC" and ends
with ".cap", and a ciphertext file which file name starts with "NC" and ends with ".can".
Report files
Report files saved to the USB device are stored in the folder under the name shown below where the firmware is stored.
• [Serial No.] > SP [Date (year, month, day, hour, minute (12 digits))] L
Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs

Although the procedure for collecting debug logs of this equipment is as indicated above, there are other service modes related
to debug logs.
Use the following service modes (Lv.2) as needed.
COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > HIT-STS
COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > DEFAULT
COPIER > Function > DBG-LOG > LOG-DEL
342
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
If log collection is continued or setting change is repeated when an abnormality is found in operation of the function related to
debug logs, temporary files or log files may be remained in the machine. In that case, execute "DEFAULT" in service mode to
clear the settings related to debug logs and repeat the operation again.
Confirming the Existence of Debug Logs (HIT-STS)

This service mode confirms whether debug logs exist in the auto save area.
"OK!" is displayed if logs exist in the auto save area.
NOTE:
"OK!" is displayed even after pressing the Counter key + numeric keys 1, 2, and 3.
Initializing the Debug Log Settings (DEFAULT)

This service mode changes all the settings related to debug logs back to the default (settings at the time of shipment).
• Be sure to perform when returning the device to the customer after completion of trouble investigation. (Operations required)
• Execute this service mode when resetting the settings related to debug logs during investigation of log collection and perform
the operation again.
However, note that the log files automatically saved to the debug log save area in the controller are kept within the range not
exceeding the upper limit.
If you want to delete the saved logs (want to use HIT-STS), use "LOG-DEL" indicated later.
Deleting the Automatically Saved Log Files (LOG-DEL)

This service mode deletes the automatically saved and stored log files. The settings of log operation such as trigger for saving
log are not cleared.
Although it is not used normally (the upper limit of the number of saved logs is automatically controlled by firmware), it is necessary
to delete logs with LOG-DEL once when judging whether logs are collected using HIT-STS after changing the trigger for saving
log.
(It is because OK is displayed in HIT-STS as long as the saved logs exist.)
343
7 Error/Jam/Alarm
Outline...............................................345
Error Code.........................................349
Error Code (FAX).............................. 491
Alarm Code....................................... 494
Jam Code..........................................541
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Outline
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes
as follows.
Code type Explanation

Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine.
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.
Alarm code This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunctioned.
Error code notation

An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. However, [000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used.
Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using 5 to 7 digit in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012)
Location Code
The error codes and jam codes of this machine contain information on the location.
The location information is displayed in 2 digits and has the meaning shown below: (On the error and jam display screens, the
location code is shown in the "L" column.)
Device JAM ERR

Host Machine 00 Main Controller: 00
Printer engine: 05
Reader/DADF 01 04
Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1 00 05
Inner Finisher-K1 02 02
Staple/Booklet Finisher-AA1 02 02
2/3 Hole Puncher Unit-A1 02 02
2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
FAX - 07
345
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Pickup Position Code

When a jam occurs, the pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. (On the jam display screen, the pickup
position code is shown in the "P" column.)
Display example of pickup position code
Pickup position code Pickup position

00 At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.)
01 Cassette 1
02 Cassette 2
03 Cassette 3
04 Cassette 4
05 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly
F0 2-sided
Pickup size
When a jam occurs, a paper size is displayed. (The row displaying "SIZE" on the jam screen refers to the paper size.)
Due to the limitation of displayable number of characters, some paper size names are omitted. The following is the list of displayed
row of texts and corresponding paper sizes.
* The following is based on the display specification and not all paper sizes can actually be used.
346
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Display Paper Size Display Paper Size

A0 A0 LDR LEDGER
A1 A1 LDRFB LEDGERFULLBLEED
A2 A2 LGL LEGAL
A3 A3 LTR LETTER
A3FB A3FULLBLEED EXE EXECUTIVE
A4 A4 STMT STATEMENT
A5 A5 10x8 10x8
A6 A6 12x18 12x18
A7 A7 13x19 13x19
I-B0 ISOB0 15x11 15x11
I-B1 ISOB1 17x22 17x22
I-B2 ISOB2 18x24 18x24
I-B3 ISOB3 A-FLS Australian-FOOLSCAP
I-B4 ISOB4 ALGL Argentina-LEGAL
I-B5 ISOB5 ALTR Argentina-LETTER
I-B6 ISOB6 OFI OFICIO
I-B7 ISOB7 A-OFI Argentina-OFICIO
I-C0 ISOC0 B-OFI Bolivia-OFICIO
I-C1 ISOC1 E-OFI Ecuador-OFICIO
I-C2 ISOC2 M-OFI Mexico-OFICIO
I-C3 ISOC3 KLGL Korea-LEGAL
I-C4 ISOC4 GLGL Government-LEGAL
I-C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government-LETTER
I-C6 ISOC6 IND-LGL India-LEGAL
I-C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10
I-SRA3 SRA3 DL DL
J-B0 JISB0 E_C2 Nagagata 2
J-B4 JISB4 E-K2 Kakugata 2
J-B5 JISB5 E_K3 Kakugata 3
K16 K16 E_K6 Kakugata 6
K8 K8 E_K7 Kakugata 7
ND-PCD Newdry Postcard E_K8 Kakugata 8
OTHER OTHER E_Y1 Yougata 1
PCARD Postcard E-Y2 Yougata 2
PCARD4 4 on 1 Postcard E_Y3 Yougata 3
F4A F4A E-Y4 Yougata 4
F4B F4B E_Y5 Yougata 5
FLSC FOOLCAP E_Y6 Yougata 6
FOLIO FLIO E_Y7 Yougata 7
FREE FREE SIZE EVLP_YN3 Yougatanaga 3
ICARD INDEXCARD E-B5 B5 Envelope
USER Custom E-C5 C5 Envelope
MONA MONARCH
EVLP Unknown size envelope
347
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON

• Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Adjustment/
Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings), etc. Before execution of this
operation, ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation.
• Clearing MN-CON will clear the service mode setting values. Be sure to enter the service mode setting values again in
accordance with the configuration of the options of the host machine and requests from the user.
• When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than User Authentication is, error such as not displayed login screen
occurred. In this case, access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status.
Points to Note When Clearing HDD

As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX), HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared.
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of HDD partition and explain to the user
before starting work.
348
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Error Code
Error Code Details

E001-0001-05 Fixing Main Thermistor high temperature detection error
Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a high temperature error.
Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing Unit
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (J115) and the AC Driver PCB (J505)
- Harness between the AC Driver PCB and the Fixing Unit
- Fixing Unit
- Fixing Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
- Fixing Motor (M09)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore
the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
E001-0002-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) high temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected a high temperature error.
- Fixing Unit
- Fixing Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
349
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E001-0003-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) high temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected a high temperature error.
- Fixing Unit
- Fixing Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
E001-0004-05 Fixing Main Thermistor high temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a high temperature error.
- Fixing Unit
- Fixing Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
E001-0005-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) high temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected a high temperature error.
- Fixing Unit
- Fixing Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
350
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E001-0006-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) high temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected a high temperature error.
- Fixing Unit
- Fixing Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
E002-0001-05 Fixing Main Thermistor temperature increase detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor did not detect temperature increase for 5 sec or longer when the Fixing
Heater was turned ON until start of PI control.
- Fixing Unit
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
E002-0002-05 Fixing Main Thermistor open circuit detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for 3 sec or longer from
when the Fixing Heater was turned ON until start of PI control.
- Fixing Unit
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
351
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E002-0003-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) open circuit detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for 3 sec or longer
from when the Fixing Heater was turned ON until start of PI control.
- Fixing Unit
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
E002-0004-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) open circuit detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for 3 sec or longer
from when the Fixing Heater was turned ON until start of PI control.
- Fixing Unit
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
E003-0004-05 Fixing Main Thermistor low temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a temperature of 80 deg C or lower for 1 sec or longer from
start of PI control until completion of the last rotation (the Fixing Heater was turned OFF).
- Fixing Unit
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
352
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E003-0005-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) low temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Front) detected a temperature of 60 deg C or lower for 1 sec or longer
from start of PI control until completion of the last rotation (the Fixing Heater was turned OFF).
- Fixing Unit
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
E003-0006-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) low temperature detection error

Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected a temperature of 80 deg C or lower for 1 sec or longer
from start of PI control until completion of the last rotation (the Fixing Heater was turned OFF).
- Fixing Unit
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
E004-0001-05 Fixing Relay welding detection error

Detection Description Zero cross interruption was detected although the Fixing Relay was not turned ON.
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
353
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E004-0002-05 Current detection circuit error

Detection Description Current outside the specified range flowed to the Fixing Heater when the heater was turned ON.
Or, failure of fixing current detection circuit was detected.
- Harness between the AC Driver PCB (J302) and the Fixing Drawer (J1001)
- Fixing Unit
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
E009-0000-05 Fixing pressure timeout error

Detection Description The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor did not detect ON status within 10 sec after the start of
pressure application operation for fixing.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J119) and the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
(PS13)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J123) and the Fixing Motor (M09)
- Fixing Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN04)
- Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (PS13)
- Fixing Drive Unit
- First Delivery Unit
E009-0001-05 Fixing disengagement timeout error

Detection Description The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor did not detect OFF status within 10 sec after the start of fixing
disengagement operation.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J119) and the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
(PS13)
- Fixing Unit
- Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (PS13)
- Fixing Drive Unit
- First Delivery Unit
354
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E010-0001-05 Bk Drum_ITB Motor error

Detection Description It did not become the specified speed although have passed from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB
Motor in the Main Drive Unit.
- Harness between the Bk Drum/ITB Motor and the DC Controller PCB
- Bk Drum Unit [0313-0000]
- ITB Unit [0600-0000]
- ITB Cleaning Blade
- Bk Drum/ITB Motor [0300-0001]
- Main Drive Unit
- Power Supply Unit [7100-0002]
- DC Controller PCB
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check/replace the Harness between the Bk Drum/ITB Motor and the DC Controller PCB for
open circuit or connector disconnection.
2. Check the load on the Bk Drum/ITB Motor.
2-1. Checking Method: Manually rotate the Bk Drum/ITB Motor counterclockwise as seen from the
back of the host machine with the power turned OFF.
2-2. Actions When Checking:
a. If the load weight is cleared upon removing the Bk Drum Unit, check/replace the Bk Drum Unit.
b. If the load weight is cleared upon removing the ITB Unit, check/replace the ITB unit or the Primary
Transfer Cleaning Blade.
c. If the load weight is not cleared, check/replace the Main Drive Unit or the Bk Drum/ITB Motor.
3. Check/Replace the DC Controller PCB.
4. Check/Replace the Power Supply Unit.

Detection Description The specified speed could not be maintained although it became the specified speed at least once
from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit.
- Bk Drum Unit [0313-0000]
- ITB Unit [0600-0000]
- Main Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
355
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description There was no FG signal input from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit.
- Bk Drum Unit [0313-0000]
- ITB Unit [0600-0000]
- Main Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
E012-0001-05 CL Drum Motor error

Detection Description It did not become the specified speed although have passed from the startup of the CL Drum Motor
in the Main Drive Unit.
- Harness between the CL Drum Motor and the DC Controller PCB
- Y Drum Unit [0310-0000]
- M Drum Unit [0311-0000]
- C Drum Unit [0312-0000]
- CL Drum Motor [0300-0002]
- Main Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check/replace the Harness between the CL Drum Motor and the DC Controller PCB for open
circuit or connector disconnection.
2. Check the load on the CL Drum Motor.
2-1. Checking Method: Manually rotate the CL Drum Motor counterclockwise as seen from the
a. If the load weight is cleared upon removing the CL Drum Unit (any of Y, M, or C), check/replace
the removed Drum Unit.
b. If the load weight is not cleared, check/replace the Main Drive Unit or the CL Drum Motor.
356
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit. (The detection timing varies
depending on the paper feed conditions.)
- Y Drum Unit [0310-0000]
- M Drum Unit [0311-0000]
- C Drum Unit [0312-0000]
- Main Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB

Detection Description There was no FG signal input from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit.
- Y Drum Unit [0310-0000]
- M Drum Unit [0311-0000]
- C Drum Unit [0312-0000]
- Main Drive Unit
- DC Controller PCB
357
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E013-0001-05 Waste Toner Feed Motor error

Detection Description After rotation speed of the Waste Toner Feed Motor was detected when the motor was driven, it
was detected that the speed was not at the specified speed.
- Waste Toner Container
- Waste Toner Feed Assembly
- Waste Toner Drive Assembly
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (J132), the Relay Connector (J1117), the Relay
Connector (J1044), and the Waste Toner Feed Motor (M17)(J1339).
1. Pull out the Waste Toner Container to check if the toner in the container is full.
a. If the waste toner is full,
a-1. Check if the Waste Toner Container can be pushed into the host machine with the Waste
Toner Door open.
a-2. If it can not be pushed into the host machine, replace the Waste Toner Container.
b. If the Waste Toner Container is empty
b-1. Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness/Connector
b-2. Check the disconnection of the Waste Toner Drive Assembly Harness/Connector
b-3. Replace the Waste Toner Drive Assembly
b-4. Replace the DC Controller PCB
b-5. Replace the Power Supply Unit
E014-0001-05 Fixing Motor error

Detection Description It did not become the specified speed although have passed from the startup of the Fixing Motor.
- Fixing Unit
- Gears in the Fixing Unit
- Cam/21T Gear
- 36T Gear
- Fixing Drive Unit
- Fixing Motor (M09)[7200-0014]
- Power Supply Unit (UN01)
1. Check that the Fixing Unit is pushed into the host machine so the handle is locked.
2. Remove the Fixing Unit, and rotate the Cam/21T Gear and the 36T Gear by hand to visually
check that there is no missing teeth or abnormal abrasion.
3. Replace the Fixing Unit.
4. Check the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing Motor.
5. Measure the both ends of the fuse in the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit using a tester.
a. If the measurement value is less than 1 ohm (conduction state),
a-1. Replace the Fixing Motor.
a-2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
b. If the measurement value is 1 ohm or higher (non conduction state), replace the Power Supply
Unit.
358
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

from the startup of the Fixing Motor.
- Fixing Unit
- Cam/21T Gear
- 36T Gear
- Fixing Drive Unit
- Fixing Motor (M09)[7200-0014]
Unit.

Detection Description There was no FG signal input from the startup of the Fixing Motor.
- Fixing Unit
- Cam/21T Gear
- 36T Gear
- Fixing Drive Unit
- Fixing Motor (M09)[7200-0014]
Unit.
359
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-01A8-05 Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error

Detection Description The output value of the Toner Density Sensor (Y) in the Developing Unit (Y) did not fall within the
range between 38 and 214 for 2 consecutive times during printing.
- Developing Unit (Y)
- Drum Unit (Y)
- DC Controller PCB
- Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB
- Power Supply Unit
- Laser Scanner Unit
a). If condensation in the Drum Unit is suspected, leave the Drum Unit as it is until the condensation
is cleared and then replace the Developing Unit.
b). If condensation is not possibly formed in the Drum Unit, perform the following in the order while
checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check the disconnection of the Developing Unit Harness/Connector.
2. Check if the Developing Unit is properly installed.
3. Check if the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB is properly installed (engagement of the
Fixing Claw, lifting of the PCB).
4. Check the disconnection of the DC Controller PCB Harness/Connector.
5. Check the disconnection of the Main Controller PCB Harness/Connector.
6. Check the disconnection of the Power Supply Unit Harness/Connector.
7. Check the disconnection of the Laser Scanner Unit Harness/Connector.
8. Replace the Developing Unit.
9. Replace the Drum Unit.
10. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
11. Replace the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB.
12. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
13. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
14. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
[Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
360
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-01B8-05 Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error

Detection Description The output value did not exceed Vtrgt_ind_int although the control voltage of the Toner Density
Sensor (Y) in the Developing Unit (Y) was increased to 142 or higher, or it did not fall below Vtrgt_
ind_int although the voltage was decreased to 102 at initialization.
- Drum Unit (Y)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
361
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-01C8-05 Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Y)

Detection Description The patch output value (SigR) failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Developing Unit
(Y).
- Drum Unit (Y)
- DC Controller PCB
- Primary Transfer High-Voltage PCB
- Power Supply Unit
- ITB Unit
- Main Drive Unit
- Registration Patch Sensor Unit
8. Check the disconnection of the Primary Transfer High-Voltage PCB Harness/Connector.
9. Check the disconnection of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Harness/Connector.
17. Replace the Primary Transfer High-Voltage PCB.
18. Replace the Intermediate Transfer Belt Assembly.
19. Replace the Registration Patch Sensor Unit.
20. Replace the Main Drive Unit.
362
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-02A8-05 Toner Density Sensor (M) output error

Detection Description The output value of the Toner Density Sensor (M) in the Developing Unit (M) did not fall within the
- Developing Unit (M)
- Drum Unit (M)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
363
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-02B8-05 Toner Density Sensor (M) output error

Sensor (M) in the Developing Unit (M) was increased to 142 or higher, or it did not fall below Vtrgt_
- Drum Unit (M)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
364
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-02C8-05 Error in take-up of Sealing Member (M)

(M).
- Drum Unit (M)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
- ITB Unit
- Main Drive Unit
365
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-03A8-05 Toner Density Sensor (C) output error

Detection Description The output value of the Toner Density Sensor (C) in the Developing Unit (C) did not fall within the
- Developing Unit (C) [0322-0000]
- Drum Unit (C)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
366
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-03B8-05 Toner Density Sensor (C) output error

Sensor (C) in the Developing Unit (C) was increased to 142 or higher, or it did not fall below Vtrgt_
- Drum Unit (C)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
367
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-03C8-05 Error in take-up of Sealing Member (C)

(C).
- Drum Unit (C)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
- ITB Unit
- Main Drive Unit
368
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-04A8-05 Toner Density Sensor (Bk) output error

Detection Description The output value of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk) in the Developing Unit (Bk) did not fall within
the range between 38 and 214 for 2 consecutive times during printing.
- Developing Unit (Bk)
- Drum Unit (Bk)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
369
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-04B8-05 Toner Density Sensor (Bk) output error

Sensor (Bk) in the Developing Unit (Bk) was increased to 142 or higher, or it did not fall below
Vtrgt_ind_int although the voltage was decreased to 102 at initialization.
- Drum Unit (Bk)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
370
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-04C8-05 Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Bk)

(Bk).
- Drum Unit (Bk)
- DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
- ITB Unit
- Main Drive Unit
371
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E021-0001-05 Developing Motor error

Detection Description It did not become the specified speed although 0.8 sec have passed from the startup of the
Developing Motor.
- Main Drive Unit
- Harness between the Developing Motor and the DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
- Developing Motor (M10)
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check whether the gears of the Main Drive Unit can be rotated by hand.
a. If they cannot be rotated, replace the Main Drive Unit.
b. If they can be rotated, check the harness between the Developing Motor and the DC Controller
PCB.
a-1. Replace the Bk Drum_ITB Motor.
b. If the measurement value is 1 ohm or higher (non-conduction state), replace the DC Controller
PCB.
E021-0002-05 Developing Motor error

from the startup of the Developing Motor.
- Main Drive Unit
- Harness between the Developing Motor (M10) and the DC Controller PCB
- Power Supply Unit
- Developing Motor (M10)
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check whether the gears of the Main Drive Unit can be rotated by hand.
a. If they cannot be rotated, replace the Main Drive Unit.
b. If they can be rotated, check the harness between the Developing Motor and the DC Controller
PCB.
a-1. Replace the Bk Drum_ITB Motor.
b. If the measurement value is 1 ohm or higher (non-conduction state), replace the DC Controller
PCB.
372
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E021-0120-05 Developing Screw rotation detection error (Y)

Detection Description The difference between the maximum and the minimum of sampling values detected by the Toner
Density Sensor (Y) in the Developing Unit (Y) was 12 V or less during rotation of the Developing
Screw.
- DC Controller PCB
- Main Drive Unit
- Harness between the Developing Unit (Y) and the DC Controller PCB
1. Check the disconnection of the Developing Unit (Y) Harness/Connector.
2. Remove the Developing Unit and check if you can rotate the coupling of the Developing Unit by
hand. If it is too heavy to rotate, replace the Developing Unit.
E021-0220-05 Developing Screw rotation detection error (M)

Density Sensor (M) in the Developing Unit (M) was 12 V or less during rotation of the Developing
Screw.
- DC Controller PCB
- Main Drive Unit
- Harness between the Developing Unit (M) and the DC Controller PCB
1. Check the disconnection of the Developing Unit (M) Harness/Connector.
2. Remove the Developing Unit and check if you can rotate the coupling of the Developing Unit by
hand. If it is too heavy to rotate, replace the Developing Unit.
E021-0320-05 Developing Screw rotation detection error (C)

Density Sensor (C) in the Developing Unit (C) was 12 V or less during rotation of the Developing
Screw.
- DC Controller PCB
- Main Drive Unit
- Harness between the Developing Unit (C) and the DC Controller PCB
1. Check the disconnection of the Developing Unit (C) Harness/Connector.
2. Remove the Developing Unit (C) and check if you can rotate the coupling of the Developing Unit
(C) by hand. If it is too heavy to rotate, replace the Developing Unit (C).
373
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E021-0420-05 Developing Screw rotation detection error (Bk)

Density Sensor (Bk) in the Developing Unit (Bk) was 12 V or less during rotation of the Developing
Screw.
- DC Controller PCB
- Main Drive Unit
- Harness between the Developing Unit (Bk) and the DC Controller PCB
1. Check the disconnection of the Developing Unit (Bk) Harness/Connector.
2. Remove the Developing Unit (Bk) and check if you can rotate the coupling of the Developing
Unit (Bk) by hand. If it is too heavy to rotate, replace the Developing Unit (Bk).
E025-0110-05 Bottle Motor error (Y)

Detection Description The Toner Supply Sensor (Y) did not detect change for 1.5 sec or longer while the Bottle Motor
(YM) was rotated at toner supply.
- Harness between the Bottle Motor (YM) and the DC Controller PCB
- Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (Y) (PS26) and the DC Controller PCB
- Toner Bottle (Y)
- Toner Supply Sensor (Y) (PS26)
- Bottle Drive Unit (YM)
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check if the Toner Bottle (Y) is properly inserted into the main machine.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle (Y), shake it 10 times up and down with the end (Pump Unit side)
facing upward, and then insert it into the main machine again.
3. Check the Harness/Connector among the DC Controller PCB, the Bottle Motor (YM), and the
Toner Supply Sensor (Y) (PS26).
4. Replace the Toner Supply Sensor (Y) (PS26)
6. Check the Bottle Drive Unit (YM)
7. Replace the Bottle Drive Unit (YM)
E025-0120-05 Bottle Motor error (Y)

Detection Description Rotation of bottle was detected while the Toner Bottle Motor (Y) was OFF.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harness between the Bottle Motor (YM) (M04) and the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J127)
- Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (Y) (PS26/J1059) and DC Controller PCB (UN04/
J127)
- Toner Supply Sensor (Y) (PS26)
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2
min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
374
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E025-0168-05 No toner detection error (Y)

Detection Description The recovery sequence was repeated with no toner in the container.
- Toner Bottle (Y)
- ITB Rail Assembly, Rear
1. Check if the Toner Bottle (Y) is properly inserted into the main machine.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle (Y), shake it 10 times up and down with the end (Pump Unit side)
3. Replace the Toner Bottle (Y).
4. Check the Bottle Drive Unit (YM).
5. Replace the Bottle Drive Unit (YM).
6. Check the Developing Unit (Y) (Shutter/Charging Port).
7. Replace the Developing Unit (Y).
8. Check the ITB Rail Assembly, Rear.(Shutter/Toner Feed Assembly).
9. Replace the ITB Rail Assembly, Rear.
E025-0210-05 Bottle Motor error (M)

Detection Description The Toner Supply Sensor (M) did not detect change for 1.5 sec or longer while the Bottle Motor
(YM) was rotated at toner supply.
- Harness between the Bottle Motor (YM) and the DC Controller PCB
- Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (M) (PS27) and the DC Controller PCB
- Toner Bottle (M) [1051-0000]
- Toner Supply Sensor (M) (PS27)
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check if the Toner Bottle (M) is properly inserted into the main machine.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle (M), shake it 10 times up and down with the end (Pump Unit side)
3. Check the Harness/Connector among the DC Controller PCB, the Bottle Motor (YM), and the
Toner Supply Sensor (M) (PS27).
4. Replace the Toner Supply Sensor (M) (PS27)
375
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E025-0220-05 Bottle Motor error (M)

Detection Description Rotation of bottle was detected while the Toner Bottle Motor (M) was OFF.
- Harness between the Bottle Motor (YM) (M04) and the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J127)
- Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (M) (PS27/J1060) and DC Controller PCB (UN04/
J127)
- Toner Supply Sensor (M) (PS27)
E025-0268-05 No toner detection error (M)

- Toner Bottle (M)
1. Check if the Toner Bottle (M) is properly inserted into the main machine.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle (M), shake it 10 times up and down with the end (Pump Unit side)
3. Replace the Toner Bottle (M).
6. Check the Developing Unit (M)(Shutter/Charging Port).
7. Replace the Developing Unit (M).
8. Check the ITB Rail Assembly, Rear (Shutter/Toner Feed Assembly).
376
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E025-0310-05 Bottle Motor error (C)

Detection Description The Toner Supply Sensor (C) did not detect change for 1.5 sec or longer while the Bottle Motor
(CK) was rotated at toner supply.
- Harness between the Bottle Motor (CK) and the DC Controller PCB
- Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (C) (PS28) and the DC Controller PCB
- Toner Bottle (C) [1052-0000]
- Toner Supply Sensor (C) (PS28)
- Bottle Drive Unit (CK)
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check if the Toner Bottle (C) is properly inserted into the main machine.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle (C), shake it 10 times up and down with the end (Pump Unit side)
3. Check the Harness/Connector among the DC Controller PCB, the Bottle Motor (CK), and the
Toner Supply Sensor (C) (PS28).
4. Replace the Toner Supply Sensor (C) (PS28).
6. Check the Bottle Drive Unit (CK).
7. Replace the Bottle Drive Unit (CK).
E025-0320-05 Bottle Motor error (C)

Detection Description Rotation of bottle was detected while the Toner Bottle Motor (C) was OFF.
- Harness between the Bottle Motor (CK) (M05) and the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J127)
- Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (C) (PS28/J1061) and the DC Controller PCB (UN04/
J127)
- Toner Supply Sensor (C) (PS28)
377
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E025-0368-05 No toner detection error (C)

- Toner Bottle (C)
- Developing Unit (C)
1. Check if the Toner Bottle (C) is properly inserted into the main machine.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle (C), shake it 10 times up and down with the end (Pump Unit side)
3. Replace the Toner Bottle (C).
6. Check the Developing Unit (C)(Shutter/Charging Port).
7. Replace the Developing Unit (C).
E025-0410-05 Bottle Motor error (Bk)

Detection Description The Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) did not detect change for 1.5 sec or longer while the Bottle Motor
(CK) was rotated at toner supply.
- Harness between the Bottle Motor (CK) and the DC Controller PCB
- Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) (PS28) and the DC Controller PCB
- Toner Bottle (Bk) [1053-0000]
- Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) (PS29)
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check if the Toner Bottle (Bk) is properly inserted into the main machine.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle (Bk), shake it 10 times up and down with the end (Pump Unit side)
3. Check the Harness/Connector among the DC Controller PCB, the Bottle Motor (CK), and the
Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) (PS29).
4. Replace the Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) (PS29).
378
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E025-0420-05 Bottle Motor error (Bk)

Detection Description Rotation of bottle was detected while the Toner Bottle Motor (Bk) was OFF.
- Harness between the Bottle Motor (CK) (M05) and the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J127)
- Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) (PS29/J1062) and the DC Controller PCB (UN04/
J127)
- Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) (PS29)
E025-0468-05 No toner detection error (Bk)

- Toner Bottle (Bk)
1. Check if the Toner Bottle (Bk) is properly inserted into the main machine.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle (Bk), shake it 10 times up and down with the end (Pump Unit side)
3. Replace the Toner Bottle (Bk).
6. Check the Developing Unit (Bk) (Shutter/Charging Port).
7. Replace the Developing Unit (Bk).
379
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E029-5008-05 Registration Patch Sensor (Front) density error

Detection Description The background regular reflection output of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front) did not fall
within the range from 115 to 1000 at initialization of the Developing Unit.
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- ITB Unit
- Harness between the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB (J811) and the DC Controller PCB (J100)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (J120) and the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (J1022/
J1066)
[Points to note at work]
- At the recovery from this error, perform the following service mode.
- COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y/M/C/K
- When replacing the ITB Unit or the Registration Patch Sensor, execute auto gradation
adjustment.
- Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Image Adjustment> Auto Adjust Gradation>
Full Adjustment
1. Check the value of the following service mode.
- COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-C
If the value is less than 115, perform Procedure 2. If the value exceeds 1000, perform Procedure
5.
2. Check the Registration Patch Sensor Unit window and clean it with a blower if it is soiled. If the
dirt still remains, wipe the window in one direction with a moistened and firmly squeezed cotton
swab.
3. Check the installation/damage status of the shutter of the Registration Patch Sensor.
4. Check the Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL2) operation.
5. Check the Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Registration Patch Sensor Unit.
7. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
380
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E029-7008-05 Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) density error

Detection Description The background regular reflection output of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Rear) did not fall
within the range from 115 to 1000 at initialization of the Developing Unit.
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- ITB Unit
- Harness between the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB (J811) and the DC Controller PCB (J100)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (J120) and the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (J1022/
J1066)
- At the recovery from this error, perform the following service mode.
- COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y/M/C/K
- When replacing the ITB Unit or the Registration Patch Sensor, execute auto gradation
adjustment.
Full Adjustment
1. Check the value of the following service mode.
- COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-Y
If the value is less than 115, perform Procedure 2. If the value exceeds 1000, perform Procedure
5.
2. Check the Registration Patch Sensor Unit window and clean it with a blower if it is soiled. If the
dirt still remains, wipe the window in one direction with a moistened and firmly squeezed cotton
swab.
3. Check the installation/damage status of the shutter of the Registration Patch Sensor.
4. Check the Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL2) operation.
5. Check the Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Registration Patch Sensor Unit.
E064-1101-05 High voltage error

Detection Description High voltage error
- DC Controller PCB
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB
1. Check the Harness (on the DC Controller side and the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB
side).
If it is not fully connected or obliquely connected, check the operation of the main machine by
disconnecting it then connecting it again.
2. If no error is seen in the Harness in Procedure 1 or if an error is not cleared by disconnecting it
and then connecting it again, replace the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB and check the
operation of the main machine.
3. If an error is not cleared in Procedure 2, replace the DC Controller PCB and check the operation
of the main machine.
[Reference]
Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup
data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
381
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- DC Controller PCB
side).
[Reference]

- DC Controller PCB
side).
[Reference]
382
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- DC Controller PCB
side).
[Reference]

- DC Controller PCB
side).
[Reference]
383
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- DC Controller PCB
side).
[Reference]

- DC Controller PCB
side).
[Reference]
384
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- DC Controller PCB
side)
[Reference]
E073-0001-05 Interlock error

Detection Description The Interlock (24 V) was not detected although all the doors of the host machine were closed.
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
- Door Interlock Switch (SW02)
[Remedy]
- Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
[Reference]
385
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E074-0001-05 ITB HP time out error

Detection Description The HP Sensor in the Main Drive Unit did not detect home position within the specified period of
time.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J131) to the Primary Transfer Roller
Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33/J1189)
- Harness from the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J131) to the Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor
(M08/J1201)
- Power Supply Unit
- Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor (M08)
- Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33)
- Main Drive Unit
- ITB Unit
1. Remove the ITB Unit and check whether the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Coupling
makes disengagement operation by rotating it by hand.
a. If it does not make disengagement operation
a-1. Replace the ITB Unit.
a-2. After replacing the ITB Unit, clean the Registration Patch Sensor Unit and execute auto
gradation adjustment and Auto Correct Color Mismatch.
Full Adjustment
- Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color
Mismatch
a-3. If the error still occurs after replacing the ITB Unit, perform Procedure b to check the Main
Drive Unit.
b. If it makes disengagement operation
b-1. Check the Main Drive Unit by rotating the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Coupling
by hand at least once.
b-1-1. If it does not rotate smoothly, replace the Main Drive Unit.
b-1-2. If it rotates smoothly, check the Harness of the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP
Sensor attached to the Main Drive Unit.
b-1-3. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33) and check that the
Flag attached to the Gear on the same axle as the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement
Coupling is not damaged.
b-1-3-1. If it is not damaged, replace the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor
(PS33).
b-1-3-2. If it is damaged, replace the Main Drive Unit.
2. If the error is not cleared after performing the above remedy, check/replace the harness/cable,
connector and electric parts described as Related Parts above.
[Reference]
386
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E074-0002-05 ITB HP time out error

Detection Description There was no change after the HP Sensor in the Main Drive Unit detected home position.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J131) to the Primary Transfer Roller
Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33/J1189)
- Harness from the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J131) to the Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor
(M08/J1201)
- Power Supply Unit
- Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor (M08)
- Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33)
- Main Drive Unit
- ITB Unit
1. Remove the ITB Unit and check whether the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Coupling
makes disengagement operation by rotating it by hand.
a. If it does not make disengagement operation
a-1. Replace the ITB Unit.
a-2. After replacing the ITB Unit, clean the Registration Patch Sensor Unit and execute auto
gradation adjustment and Auto Correct Color Mismatch.
Full Adjustment
Mismatch
a-3. If the error still occurs after replacing the ITB Unit, perform Procedure b to check the Main
Drive Unit.
b. If it makes disengagement operation
b-1. Check the Main Drive Unit by rotating the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Coupling
by hand at least once.
b-1-1. If it does not rotate smoothly, replace the Main Drive Unit.
b-1-2. If it rotates smoothly, check the Harness of the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP
Sensor attached to the Main Drive Unit.
b-1-3. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33) and check that the
Flag attached to the Gear on the same axle as the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement
Coupling is not damaged.
b-1-3-1. If it is not damaged, replace the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor
(PS33).
b-1-3-2. If it is damaged, replace the Main Drive Unit.
c. If the error is not cleared after performing the above remedy, check/replace the harness/cable,
connector and electric parts described as Related Parts above.
[Reference]
387
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E100-0001-05 BD error
Detection Description The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once.
- DC Controller PCB
- CABLE, FLAT, between the YM Laser Driver PCB (J203) and the CK Laser Driver PCB (J801)
[Remedy]
[Caution] After replacing a related part, execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch.
Mismatch
[Reference]
E110-0001-05 Scanner Motor error

Detection Description The speed was not locked by FG control within specified period of time after startup of the Scanner
Motor.
- DC Controller PCB
Mismatch
[Reference]

Detection Description The speed was not locked by BD control within specified period of time after startup of the Scanner
Motor.
- DC Controller PCB
Mismatch
[Reference]

Detection Description The phase was not locked by BD control within specified period of time after startup of the Scanner
Motor.
388
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Correction in timing of laser exposure to the Polygon Mirror was not detected after the phase lock
by BD control.
- CABLE, FLAT, between the YM Laser Driver PCB (J203) and the Main Controller PCB (J19)
Mismatch
E193-0001-05 Communication error

Detection Description Communication between the DC Controller PCB (CPU) and the Main Controller PCB (ASIC) could
not be established.
- DC Controller PCB - Main Controller PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while
1. Check the disconnection of the Harness/Connector of the DC Controller PCB.
2. Check the disconnection of the Harness/Connector of the Main Controller PCB.
- When checking the harness/cable or connector, perform the following work.
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector to check that there is no bent pin and cable
disconnection.
2. Visually check that the harness is not caught or open circuit.
3. If there is any error, replace the corresponding harness/cable.
[Reference]

Detection Description The NACK (a negative reply sent by the reception side to the sending side) was received 3 times
at DCON EEPROM communication.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Detection Description Although access to the EEPROM from the CPU of the DC Controller PCB was performed 3 times,
no response was received and timeout occurred.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]
389
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E196-000F-05 Communication error

Detection Description The number of read/write job data to the DCON EEPROM exceeded 100.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

in communication from the DC Controller PCB (CPU) to the SCNR EEPROM.
- DC Controller PCB
3. Replace the DC Controller.
[Reference]

Detection Description Although access to the SCNR EEPROM from the DC Controller PCB (CPU) was performed 3
times, no response was received and timeout occurred.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Detection Description The number of read/write job data to the SCNR EEPROM exceeded 100.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]
390
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

in communication from the DC Controller PCB (CPU) to the HVT EEPROM.
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check the disconnection of the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Harness/Connector.
3. Replace the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB.
[Reference]

Detection Description Although access to the HVT EEPROM from the DC Controller PCB (CPU) was performed 3 times,
no response was received and timeout occurred.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Detection Description The number of read/write job data to the HVT EEPROM exceeded 100.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]
391
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E197-0B11-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description Communication between the DC Controller PCB and the Second/Third Delivery PCB was not
completed.
- 2nd/3rd Delivery Drive Unit [7500-0002]
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check the disconnection of the 2nd/3rd Delivery Drive Unit
3. Replace the 2nd/3rd Delivery Drive Unit.
[Reference]

Detection Description A communication error of ASIC in the DC Controller PCB was detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Check/replace the DC Controller PCB (UN04).

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Cassette Unit PCB was detected.
- Cassette Pedestal Driver PCB
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check the disconnection of the Cassette Pedestal Driver PCB Harness/Connector.
3. Replace the Cassette Pedestal Driver PCB.
[Reference]
E197-1001-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the CPU of the DC Controller PCB and KONA1 (ASIC) in the DC
Controller PCB was detected.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]
392
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Controller PCB was detected.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Detection Description Communication between the DC Controller PCB and the Laser Driver PCB was not completed.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Controller PCB was detected. (An error caused by software)
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Controller PCB was detected. (An error caused by software)
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]
393
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Laser Driver PCB was detected.
(An error caused by software)
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High Voltage
PCB was detected at power-on.
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Primary Transfer High Voltage
PCB was detected at power-on.
- Primary Transfer High-Voltage PCB [7100-0003]
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
4. Replace the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB.
[Reference]
394
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E199-0101-05 Error in high voltage sequence (Y)

Detection Description Error for collecting log.
Remedy [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company.
[Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> SELF-CHK" to "1", it is handled
as an error.
E199-0102-05 Error in high voltage sequence (M)

as an error.
E199-0103-05 Error in high voltage sequence (C)

as an error.
E199-0201-05 Error in high voltage sequence (Y)

as an error.
E199-0202-05 Error in high voltage sequence (M)

as an error.
E199-0203-05 Error in high voltage sequence (C)

as an error.
E199-0204-05 Error in high voltage sequence (K)

as an error.
E202-0001-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05/J7005) and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_
A1/J5002)
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05/J7006) and the Scanner Motor (STM1/J5015)
- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1)
- Scanner Motor (STM1)
- Main Controller PCB (UN05)
[Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2
395
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
A1/J5002)

Detection Description An error in the Reader Scanner Unit position was detected when reading of a job was started.
A1/J5002)

Detection Description Home position error of the Reader Scanner Unit was detected when reading of a job was
completed.
A1/J5002)

Detection Description An error in the Reader Scanner Unit position was detected when reading of a job was started.
A1/J5002)
396
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E202-0101-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
- Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J408) and the Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_
A9/J462)
- Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_A9) [5200-0003
- Glass Movement Gear 18T
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
E202-0102-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
- Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J408) and the Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_
A9/J462)
- Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_A9) [5200-0003
- Glass Movement Gear 18T
E227-0001-04 Power supply error

Detection Description The Reader Controller PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON.
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05) and the ADF Driver PCB
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05) and the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB
(UN45)
- ADF Driver PCB
- Power Supply Unit
[Reference]
- When an error is detected, conduction of 24 V is stopped. At power check, check if 24 V is
conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine.
- Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and
restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.

Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON.
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05) and the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB
(UN45)
- ADF Driver PCB
- Power Supply Unit
[Reference]
- When an error is detected, conduction of 24 V is stopped. At power check, check if 24 V is
conducted or rated voltage is output by repeating power cycling of the machine.
397
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E240-0002-00 Controller communication error

Detection Description An error in receiving data from the controller was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J110) and the Main Controller PCB (UN05/
J4511)
1. Check the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
2. Turn ON the power, and check if the initialization is executed at startup.
2-1. If the initialization is not executed, replace the DC Controller PCB.
2-2. If the initialization is executed, replace the Main Controller PCB.
[Reference]
- Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and
E240-0005-00 Controller communication error

Detection Description A sequence error with the controller occurred.
J4511)
[Reference]
398
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E240-0D00-00 Controller communication error

Detection Description A sequence error with the controller occurred.
J4511)
[Reference]
E246-0001-00 System error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.







399
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E248-0001-04 EEPROM error

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected reading error of the Reader backup value in the Reader
Controller PCB.
Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05)
[Remedy] Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB failed writing of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected an error at inspection after completion of writing of the Reader
backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected reading error of the Reader backup value in the Reader
Controller PCB.

Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB failed writing of the backup value.
- Harness between the ADF Driver PCB and the Main Controller PCB (UN05)
- ADF Driver PCB
400
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB detected an error at inspection after completion of writing of the backup
value.
- Harness between the ADF Driver PCB and the Main Controller PCB (UN05)
- ADF Driver PCB

Detection Description Short-circuit was detected at power-on.
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Detection Description Open circuit was detected at power-on.
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]

Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not
completed within the specified period of time.
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2/J101) and the Main Controller PCB (UN05/
J7000)
- Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2)
401
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was
detected.
J7000)

Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not
completed within the specified period of time.
- ADF Driver PCB

Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was detected.
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB (J105) and the DADF Scanner Unit(J101)
E302-0001-04 Error in paper front white shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper front white shading RAM or a paper front white shading value out of
specification was detected.
J7000)
402
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E302-0002-04 Error in paper front black shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper front black shading RAM or a paper front black shading value out of
J7000)
E302-0003-04 Error in paper front white shading

Detection Description The paper front white shading value gradually became out of the specified range.
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (J101) and the Reader Controller PCB (J105)
- Reader Scanner Unit
[Remedy]
1. Clean the LED, mirror, and Stream Reading Glass of Scanner Unit.
E302-0101-04 Error in paper back white shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper back white shading RAM or a paper back white shading value out of
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB and the ADF Driver PCB
- ADF Driver PCB
E302-0102-04 Error in paper back black shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper back black shading RAM or a paper back black shading value out of
- ADF Driver PCB
403
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E302-0103-04 Error in paper back white shading

Detection Description The paper back white shading value gradually became out of the specified range.
- Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Main Controller PCB
- DADF Scanner Unit
[Remedy]
1. Clean the LED, mirror, and Stream Reading Glass of Scanner Unit.
E315-0007-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Image compression process was not completed within the specified period of time at scanning.
- Harness between the Reader Unit and the Main Controller PCB (UN05)
- Main Controller PCB (UN05) [7000-0001]
1. Install the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
E315-000D-00 Image process device timeout error

Detection Description Processing of a JBIG-compressed data was not completed within the specified period of time at
printing or SEND.
2. Check/replace the Main Controller PCB.

Detection Description Image processing (change in magnification ratio, rotating, and shifting) was not completed normally
within the specified period of time.
404
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Processing to clear image data in the memory was not completed normally within the specified
period of time.

Detection Description Transfer of image signal was not completed within the specified period of time at scanning.

Detection Description Image processing was not completed within the specified period of time at scanning.
E315-0530-00 Image process device error

Detection Description Compression processing of the scanned image into JPEG was terminated abnormally.
405
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Compression processing of the scanned image into JPEG was not completed within the specified
period of time.
E315-0540-00 Image process device error

Detection Description An error occurred during decompression of JPEG.

Detection Description Decompression of JPEG was not completed within the specified period of time.





406
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Main Controller PCB communication error.







Detection Description A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
- ADF Driver PCB

Detection Description A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected.
- ADF Driver PCB
407
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Disconnection of the harness between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was
detected.
- ADF Driver PCB
E412-0005-04 Fan error

Detection Description Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
- DADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related parts.
E412-0006-04 Fan error

Detection Description Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan was transmitted.
- DADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
E423-0001-04 SDRAM error in the Main Controller PCB

Detection Description Either an access error to SDRAM in the Main Controller PCB or an error at data inspection was
detected.
[Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB (UN05).
E423-0002-04 SDRAM error in the Main Controller PCB

Detection Description Either an access error to SDRAM in the Main Controller PCB or an error at data inspection was
detected.
[Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB (UN05).
E490-0001-04 Different Scanner Unit model error

Detection Description A wrong Scanner Unit was installed.
Remedy Install the Scanner Unit for this model.
E490-0002-04 Different Scanner Unit model error

Detection Description A wrong Scanner Unit was installed.
Remedy Install the Scanner Unit for this model.
408
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E490-0101-04 Different DADF model error

Detection Description A wrong DADF was installed.
- Flat Cable between the ADF Driver PCB and the Main Controller PCB (UN05)
- ADF Driver PCB
1. Check if the installed DADF model matches the model set in "COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM>
SCANTYPE". If not matched, install the appropriate DADF.
2. Check/replace the related parts.
E490-0102-04 Different DADF model error

Detection Description A wrong DADF was installed.
- Flat Cable between the ADF Driver PCB and the Main Controller PCB (UN05)
- ADF Driver PCB
1. Check if the installed DADF model matches the model set in "COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM>
SCANTYPE". If not matched, install the appropriate DADF.
E490-9999-04 Error due to the reader for different model

Detection Description Configuration mismatch between the Reader Controller software and the Reader/DADF was
detected.
Remedy Execute automatic software update.
(Install the system software with correct configuration.)
E501-0000-02 Communication error (Finisher-K1/Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description A communication error between the host machine and the Finisher was detected.
- Harnesses and connectors from the DC Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
- DC Controller PCB
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Finisher
Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when
Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.
409
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E503-0021-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
was detected. (Command transmission error)
Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201)
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle
Stitcher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
the Parts" in the Service Manual.
3. Replace the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
E503-0022-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
was detected. (Command reception error)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle
Stitcher Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
E503-0031-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was
detected. (Command transmission error)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301)
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher
Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
[Reference] When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustment> When Replacing
410
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E503-0032-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was
detected. (Command reception error)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher
Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
E503-0041-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer Pass (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Buffer Pass Controller PCB
was detected. (Command transmission error)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Buffer Pass Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Buffer Pass Controller PCB (PCB201)
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Buffer Pass Controller PCB and the
Finisher Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB.
E503-0042-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer Pass (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Buffer Pass Controller PCB
was detected. (Command reception error)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Buffer Pass Controller PCB to the Finisher Controller PCB
1. Check/replace the harness and connector between the Buffer Pass Controller PCB and the
Finisher Controller PCB.
2. Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB.
E503-0061-02 Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command
transmission error)
[Related parts]
[Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
411
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E503-0062-02 Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command
reception error)
[Related parts]
[Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
E505-0001-02 Error in EEPROM of the Finisher (Finisher-K1/Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description An error was detected in the check sum value of data read from EEPROM on the Finisher Controller
PCB.
Remedy [Related parts] Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1)
[Remedy] Check/replace the Finisher Controller PCB (PCB1).
[Reference] Before replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and
- Backup: SORTER (LEVEL1)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> FIN-BK-R
- Restoration: SORTER (LEVEL1)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> FIN-BK-W
E505-0004-02 Puncher unit data error (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The data read from Puncher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the
written data.)
Remedy PUNCHER UNIT-A1
[Related parts]
[Remedy] Replace the Puncher Controller PCB.
E505-0005-02 Buffer Pass data error (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The data read from Puncher Controller PCB has an error. (The read data doesn't match with the
written data.)
Remedy Finisher-AA1
[Related parts]
[Remedy] Replace the Buffer Pass Controller PCB (PCB201).
E514-0002-02 Assist Motor error (Finisher-K1)

Detection Description - The Assist HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 seconds had passed after the Assist Motor
operation started.
- The Assist HP Sensor was not turned ON when starting operation.
Remedy INNER FIN-K1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor
- Assist HP Sensor (PS7)
- Assist Motor (M5)
[Remedy] Check/replace the corresponding harnesses/cables or connectors or the parts.
412
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E514-8001-02 a. Assist Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Rear End Assist Guide HP error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Assist HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Assist Motor
operation started.
b. The rear end assist guide does not come off the Rear End Assist Guide HP Sensor although
the Rear End Assist Guide Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Remedy a. INNER FIN-K1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor
- Assist HP Sensor (PS7)
- Assist Motor (M5)
b. STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear End Assist Guide HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear End Assist Guide Motor
- Rear end assist guide drive mechanism
- Rear End Assist Guide HP Sensor (PI109)
- Rear End Assist Guide Motor (M109)
E514-8002-02 Error in the Paper End Assist Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Paper End Assist HP Sensor does not detect the assist belt when the Paper End Assist Motor
has been driven for 2 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Assist Motor (M113) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Assist HP Sensor (PS123)
- Paper End Assist Motor (M113)
E516-0001-02 Paddle Motor error (Finisher-K1)

Detection Description - The Paper Fold HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 3 seconds had passed after the Paddle
Motor operation started.
- The last paper fold operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
Remedy INNER FIN-K1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paper Fold HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Motor
- Paper Fold HP Sensor (PS8)
- Paddle Motor (M10)
413
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description - The Paper Fold HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 seconds had passed after the Paddle
- The last paper fold operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
Remedy INNER FIN-K1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paper Fold HP Sensor
- Paper Fold HP Sensor (PS8)
E530-8001-02 a. Rear Alignment Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Front Aligning Plate HP error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after
the Rear Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The front aligning plate does not come off the Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor although the Front
Aligning Plate Motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Motor
- Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS5)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M4)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Aligning Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Aligning Plate Motor
- Front aligning plate drive mechanism
- Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor (PI106)
- Front Aligning Plate Motor (M103)
414
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E530-8002-02 a. Rear Alignment Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Front Aligning Plate HP error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Rear Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor does not detect the front aligning plate although the Front
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Motor
- Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS5)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M4)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Aligning Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Aligning Plate Motor
- Front aligning plate drive mechanism
- Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor (PI106)
- Front Aligning Plate Motor (M103)
E531-8001-02 a. Stapler Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Staple HP error (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description a. The Staple HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.4 seconds had passed after the Stapler
b. The staple does not come off the Staple HP Sensor although the Staple Motor has been driven
for 0.4 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Unit
- Stapler Unit (including the Stapler Motor and the Staple HP Sensor)
[Related parts]
- Stapler Unit (including the Staple Motor (M111) and the Staple HP Sensor (PI50))
415
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E531-8002-02 a. Stapler Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Staple HP error (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description a. The Staple HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.4 seconds had passed after the Stapler
b. The Staple HP Sensor does not detect the staple although the Staple Motor has been driven
for 0.4 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Stapler Unit (including the Stapler Motor and the Staple HP Sensor)
[Related parts]
- Stapler Unit (including the Staple Motor (M111) and the Staple HP Sensor (PI50))
E532-8001-02 a. Stapler Shift Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Stapler Shift HP error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Stapler
Shift Motor operation started.
b. The stapler unit does not come off the Stapler Shift HP Sensor although the Stapler Shift Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stapler Shift Motor
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS11)
- Stapler Shift Motor (M7)
[Related parts]
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PI110)
416
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E532-8002-02 a. Stapler Shift Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Stapler Shift HP error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned ON although 10 seconds had passed after the
Stapler Shift Motor operation started.
b. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor does not detect the stapler unit although the Stapler Shift Motor
[Related parts]
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PS11)
[Related parts]
- Stapler Shift HP Sensor (PI110)
E535-0001-02 Return Belt Motor error (Finisher-K1)

Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Return
Belt Motor operation started.
Remedy INNER FIN-K1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor
- Return Belt HP Sensor (PS3)
- Return Belt Motor (M2)
E535-0002-02 Return Belt Motor error (Finisher-K1)

Detection Description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Return
Belt Motor operation started.
Remedy INNER FIN-K1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Return Belt Motor
- Return Belt Motor (M2)
417
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E535-8001-02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The swing guide does not come off the Swing Guide HP Sensor when the Swing Guide Motor has
been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119)
- Swing Guide Motor (M110)
[Points to note at work] Perform this work only for old type*. When the Swing Guide Safety Switch
(SW102) turns on at the detection timing of this error, this error code may be displayed.
Accordingly, perform the following work before checking the related parts.
1. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the swing guide unit.
2. Check whether there is not the mulfunction in the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102).
*: Distinguishing Between the New/Old Types
New Type (J132: Short Connector)
Old Type (J132: Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102))
E535-8002-02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Swing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the swing guide when the Swing Guide Motor has
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119)
- Swing Guide Motor (M110)
418
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E537-8001-02 a. Front Alignment Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Rear Aligning Plate HP error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after
the Front Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The rear aligning plate does not come off the Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor although the Rear
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Motor
- Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS4)
- Front Alignment Motor (M3)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Aligning Plate Motor
- Rear aligning plate drive mechanism
- Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor (PI107)
- Rear Aligning Plate Motor (M104)
E537-8002-02 a. Front Alignment Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Rear Aligning Plate HP error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Front Alignment Motor operation started.
b. The Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor does not detect the rear aligning plate although the Rear
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Plate HP
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Motor
- Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS4)
- Front Alignment Motor (M3)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Aligning Plate Motor
- Rear aligning plate drive mechanism
- Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor (PI107)
- Rear Aligning Plate Motor (M104)
419
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E540-8001-02 a. Tray Shift Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Tray 1 timeout error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after
the Tray Shift Motor operation started.
b. The tray does not return to its home position although the Tray 1 Shift Motor has been driven
for 25 seconds.
- The tray does not move to the other area although the Tray 1 Shift Motor has been driven for 5
seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Tray Paper Height
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray Shift Motor
- Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor (PS9)
- Tray Shift Motor (M6)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor PCB
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray 1 Shift Motor
- Tray 1 drive mechanism
- Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor (PI114)
- Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor PCB (PCB4)
- Tray 1 Shift Motor (M107)
E540-8002-02 a. Tray Shift Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Tray 1 shift area error (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF or the Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor
was not turned ON although 3.5 seconds had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation
started in the tray down operation.
- The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF after the tray was moved down in the
paper level detection operation.
b. The tray exceeded the upper/lower limit before the Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor detects the
paper surface during the paper surface detection operation.
- A non-contiguous area was detected during the tray shift operation.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Tray Paper Height
Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray Shift Motor
- Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor (PS9)
- Tray Shift Motor (M6)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor PCB
- Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray 1 Shift Motor
- Tray 1 drive mechanism
- Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor (PI114)
- Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor PCB (PCB4)
- Tray 1 Shift Motor (M107)
420
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E540-8004-02 Stack tray paper surface detection error (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor does not turn off when the stack tray has been lowered for
10 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101) to the Finisher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103) to the
Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101)
- Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103)
- Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
E551-0003-02 Error in the Cooling Fan (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The lock signal is detected 1.2 seconds or more while the fan operates.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Cooling Fan (FM101) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Cooling Fan (FM101)
E551-0004-02 Error in the Cooling Fan of the Finisher (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The lock status is released when the fan stops.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Cooling Fan (FM101) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Cooling Fan (FM101)
E551-0011-02 Error in the Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (Finisher-AA1)
Detection Description The loch signal is not released for the specified times while the fan operates.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM201) to the Buffer Pass Controller
PCB
- Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM201)
421
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E551-0012-02 Error in the Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (Finisher-AA1)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM201) to the Buffer Pass Controller
PCB
- Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM201)
E551-0013-02 Error in the Buffer Pass Cooling Fan (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The loch signal is not released for the specified times while the fan operates.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Buffer Pass Cooling Fan (FM202) to the Buffer Pass Controller PCB
- Buffer Pass Cooling Fan (FM202)
E551-0014-02 Error in the Buffer Pass Cooling Fan (Finisher-AA1)

[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Buffer Pass Cooling Fan (FM202) to the Buffer Pass Controller PCB
- Buffer Pass Cooling Fan (FM202)
E553-8001-02 Error in the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The escape delivery roller does not come off the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor when the
Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112)
- Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
422
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E553-8002-02 Error in the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor does not detect the escape delivery roller when the Escape
Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor (PS112)
- Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
E553-8011-02 Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The flapper does not come off the Flapper HP Sensor when the Flapper Motor has been driven
for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Flapper HP Sensor (PS105)
- Flapper Motor (M104)
423
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E553-8012-02 Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Flapper HP Sensor does not detect the flapper when the Flapper Motor has been driven for
1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Flapper HP Sensor (PS105)
- Flapper Motor (M104)
E553-80F1-02 Error in the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The paddle does not come off the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor when the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor
has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206)
- Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
E553-80F2-02 Error in the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Paddle HP Sensor (PS206)
- Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
424
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E554-8001-02 Safety switch ON error (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Front Cover Switch is turned OFF for 0.3 seconds when the Front Cover Sensor is ON.
An error of Short Connector (J132) was detected. (New Type *) The Swing Guide Safety Switch
is turned ON for 0.3 seconds. (Old Type*)
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) to the Finisher Controller PCB (Old
Type*)
- Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Short Connector (J132) (New Type*)
- Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) (Old Type*)
- Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)

Detection Description - The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle
- The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
Remedy INNER FIN-K1
[Related parts]
425
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E577-8001-02 a. Paddle Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-
AA1)
Detection Description a. The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle
Motor operation started. The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor.
b. The paddle does not come off the Paddle HP Sensor when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor
[Related parts]
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paddle HP Sensor (PS120)
- Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
E577-8002-02 Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor has
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paddle HP Sensor (PS120)
- Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
426
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E578-8001-02 Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The return roller does not come off the Return Roller HP Sensor when the Return Roller Lift Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121)
- Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
E578-8002-02 Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Return Roller HP Sensor does not detect the return roller when the Return Roller Lift Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Return Roller Lift Motor (M111) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Return Roller HP Sensor (PS121)
- Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
427
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E57B-8001-02 Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The paper end pushing guide does not come off the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor when
the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) to the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122)
- Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
E57B-8002-02 Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor does not detect the paper end pushing guide when the
Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122) to the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor (PS122)
- Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
428
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E583-8001-02 Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The tray auxiliary guides don't come off the Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors when the
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117)
- Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118)
- Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
E583-8002-02 Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors don't detect the tray auxiliary guides when the
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109) to the Finisher Controller PCB
- Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117)
- Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118)
- Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
429
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E590-8001-02 Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The punch does not come off the Punch HP Sensor when the Punch Motor has been driven for
0.2 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M301) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch HP Sensor 1 (PS303)
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305)
- Punch Motor (M301)
- Puncher Relay PCB (PCB302)
E590-8002-02 Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch during initialization.
The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0.4
seconds for returning the punch after the punch jam.
Remedy Puncher Unit-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Motor (M301) to the Puncher Relay PCB
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS305)
- Punch Motor (M301)
- Puncher Relay PCB (PCB302)
430
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E593-8001-02 Error in the Punch Shift Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The punch unit does not come off the Punch Slide HP Sensor when shifting the punch unit by 9mm
toward rear.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor (M302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302)
- Punch Shift Motor (M302)
E593-8002-02 Error in the Punch Shift Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)

Detection Description The Punch Slide HP Sensor does not detect the punch unit when shifting the punch unit by 37mm
toward front.
Remedy Puncher Unit-A1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Punch Shift Motor (M302) to the Puncher Controller PCB
- Punch Slide HP Sensor (PS302)
- Punch Shift Motor (M302)
E5F0-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The saddle paper end stopper does not come off the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor when
the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210)
- Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
431
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F0-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper end stopper when
the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor (PS210)
- Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
E5F1-8003-02 Saddle Delivery Motor clock error (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The lock state of Saddle Delivery Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while the motor operates.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor (M207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211)
- Saddle Delivery Motor (M207)
432
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F3-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Alignment Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The saddle alignment plate does not come off the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor when the Saddle
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207)
- Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
E5F3-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Alignment Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Saddle Alignment HP Sensor does not detect the saddle alignment plate when the Saddle
Alignment Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Alignment Motor (M203) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Alignment HP Sensor (PS207)
- Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
433
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F4-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The saddle stitcher does not come off the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor when the Saddle Stitcher
Motor has been driven for 1.2 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215)
- Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
E5F4-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor does not detect the saddle stitcher when the Saddle Stitcher Motor
has been driven for 1.2 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215)
- Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
434
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F6-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The saddle paper pushing plate does not come off the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor
when the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208)
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (M204)
E5F6-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper pushing plate when
the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208) to the Saddle Stitcher
Controller PCB
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor (PS208)
435
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F6-8003-02 Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor clock error (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The lock state of Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while
the motor operates.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PS212) to the
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
Controller PCB
- Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PS212)
E5F8-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The saddle switching lever does not come off the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor when the
Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205)
- Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
436
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F8-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor does not detect the saddle switching lever when the
Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205)
- Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
E5FA-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The saddle gripper does not come off the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor when the Saddle Gripper
Motor has been driven for 1 second.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209)
- Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
437
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5FA-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-AA1)

Detection Description The Saddle Gripper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle gripper when the Saddle Gripper Motor
[Related parts]
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
- Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209)
- Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
E602-0001-00 HDD error

Detection Description HDD failed to be Ready, or HDD was not formatted.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05) and the HDD
- HDD
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software
using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description Corruption of database managing user mode/service mode data was detected.
Remedy While this error occurs, backup of the setting values is disabled.
In addition, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
2. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the HDD.
438
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
- HDD
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. When
prioritizing clearing of the error, skip Remedies 2 and 3.
Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to
4.
2. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
3. Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list.
[Reference] For backup and restoration, refer to "Adjustment> Main Controller System" and
"Appendix> Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.
4. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "1", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
[Reference] Only the data in the corresponding partitions is deleted.

Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (File could not be written in the HDD
after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
439
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup
or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (File could not be written in
the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
440
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
441
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I/O error
after startup)
- HDD
4.
442
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- HDD
4.

- HDD
4.
443
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- HDD
4.

- HDD
4.
444
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (Initialization failed
at startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (File could not be
written in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.
445
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD
- HDD
4.
446
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error
at startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (File could not be written in the HDD
- HDD
4.
447
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
- HDD
4.
448
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the update-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the update-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
- HDD
4.
449
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- HDD
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although
the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again. Thus, perform Remedies 1 to 5.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup
- HDD
450
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or
I/O error after startup)
- HDD
E602-1371-00 System verification error

Detection Description At startup, a verification error occurred due to invalid data of a MEAP login application.
Remedy [Remedy]
1. Set the following service mode setting value to 1:
COPIIER > OPTION > USER > MEAPSAFE
3. Reinstall the corresponding MEAP application from RUI.
[Caution]
After performing the remedy work, return the MEAPSAFE value to 0 and turn OFF and then ON
the main power.
451
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E602-1372-00 Verification error by "Falsification detection at startup" function

Detection Description At startup, a verification error occurred due to invalid data in the MEAP area.
Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
3. Obtain necessary backup data referring to "Appendix > Backup Data List" in System Service
Manual.
turn OFF and then ON the main power to delete the data in the corresponding partition.
5. Re-install MEAP application(s) via RUI and restore the backup data.
[Reference]
Restore the backup data if the data has been deleted.

Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (Initialization failed at
startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
452
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (File could not be written
in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
453
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area. (File could not be written in the HDD after startup or
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (Initialization failed at
startup or I/O error at startup)
- HDD
4.
454
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (File could not be written
in the HDD after startup or I/O error after startup)
- HDD
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
- HDD
4.
455
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (File could not be written in the HDD
- HDD
4.

Detection Description I/O error was detected in the file system after startup.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check that the HDD optional board is properly installed.
2. Turn ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Execute the key clear using SST (to make an unformatted disk).
[CAUTION] E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk.
Therefore, be sure to format the HDD.

Detection Description Mismatch on encryption operation
1. Check that the Main Controller PCB is properly installed.
456
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Failure of HDD optional board and others
Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [7000-0001]
E602-5001-00 Encryption Chip error

Detection Description Error of the encryption chip on the Main Controller
Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [7000-0001]
[Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB.

Detection Description A non-genuine HDD was detected.
Remedy 1. Replace the HDD with a genuine one.
2. Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
E602-FF01-00 HDD error

Detection Description An unidentified HDD error was detected at startup.
- HDD
Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and
457
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E602-FF11-00 HDD error

Detection Description An unidentified HDD error was detected after startup.
- HDD
E604-1024-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory

Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB



458
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

E613-2048-00 Memory error

Detection Description Memory of the Main Controller PCB is faulty.
E614-0001-00 Flash PCB error

Detection Description The Flash PCB could not be recognized, or the Flash PCB was not formatted.
- Flash PCB
Reinstall the necessary application software once the error is cleared.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB to check that it is
installed properly.
2. After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description The file system could not be initialized normally at startup.
- Flash PCB
installed properly.
459
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Bootable was not found on the Flash PCB.
- Flash PCB
installed properly.

Detection Description At normal startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the firmware for startup.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in
the error log.
- Flash PCB
[Remedy]
Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Start the machine in safe mode, and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive.
* [2]: Select Update (Overwrite all) to update the system.
2. Replace the FLASH PCB, and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description At normal startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the firmware for safe mode startup.
the error log.
- Flash PCB
[Remedy]
1. Replace the Flash PCB and reinstall the system using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description At startup in safe mode, an error may occur due to invalid data of the startup firmware.
the error log.
- Flash PCB
[Remedy]
E614-0074-00 Start system verification function error

Detection Description At startup in safe mode, an error may occur due to invalid data of the firmware for safe mode
startup.
the error log.
- Flash PCB
[Remedy]
460
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup
- Flash PCB
461
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Flash PCB

- Flash PCB
462
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Flash PCB

- Flash PCB

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- Flash PCB
463
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or
- Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O
error at startup)
- Flash PCB
4.
[Reference] All the partitions that can be deleted are deleted.
464
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash
PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)
- Flash PCB
4.

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at
startup)
- Flash PCB
465
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after
startup or I/O error after startup)
- Flash PCB

Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (Initialization failed
at startup or I/O error at startup)
- Flash PCB
4.
466
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (File could not
be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup)
- Flash PCB
4.

Detection Description The OS could not be recognized.
installed properly.
3. Check that the HDD and the cables are properly installed.
4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and format the HDD using SST or a USB flash drive.
5. If another error occurs, clear the error by performing the remedy for it.
467
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The OS boot file was not found.
installed properly.

Detection Description The OS kernel was not found.
installed properly.

Detection Description The OS boot loader was not found.
installed properly.
468
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The OS in safe mode could not be recognized.
1. After turning OFF the main power, remove and then install the Flash PCB again to check that
it is properly installed.

Detection Description The file for booting the OS in safe mode was not found.

Detection Description The kernel in safe mode was not found.

Detection Description SRAM device access-related error (at startup)

Detection Description Error in memory allocation/invalid memory (at startup)

Detection Description Setting file error was detected at startup.
469
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Parameter error was detected at startup.

Detection Description Startup error was detected.

Detection Description Startup error was detected.
E614-FF01-00 Flash PCB error

Detection Description Flash error (Unidentified) (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup)
- Flash PCB
470
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E614-FF11-00 Flash PCB error

Detection Description Flash error (Unidentified) (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after
startup)
- Flash PCB
E615-0001-00 Error in self-diagnosis of the encryption module

Detection Description An error was detected in self-diagnosis of the encryption library.
Remedy [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Reinstall the necessary application software and restore the backup data once the error is
cleared.
1. After reinstalling the system software using SST or a USB flash drive, turn OFF and then ON
the main power.
3. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup, and execute [4] Clear/Format> [2] Flash Format (Flash
format) using a USB flash drive.
E674-0021-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description A Fax Board for non-supported modem has been connected.
Remedy Replace it with a genuine Fax Board (for 1-line or 2-line).
E674-0100-07 Fax Board communication error

Detection Description - After completion of fax communication, writing of the communication information (log) failed, and
the log could not be read.
- Inconsistent fax logs
Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
If it occurs when the power is turned OFF and then ON after executing FAX > Clear > ALL, execute
FAX > Clear > ALL and turn OFF and then ON the power again.
[CAUTION] The previous communication information (log) will be cleared by turning OFF and then
ON the main power.
471
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Timeout was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher.
a. STAPLE/BOOKLET FINISHER-AA1
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J182) and the Finisher Controller PCB
- Harness between the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB (UN01/J306) and the Relay Path Unit
(J1186)
- Relay Path Unit
- Finisher Controller PCB
- Low Voltage Power Supply PCB (UN01)
b. INNER FINISHER-K1
- Harness between theDC Controller PCB (UN04/J182) and the Finisher Controller PCB
- Relay Path Unit

Detection Description Retransmission of NACK was detected consecutively in communication between the host machine
and the finisher.
(J1186)
- Relay Path Unit
- Relay Path Unit
472
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Invalid BCC in received data was detected in communication between the host machine and the
finisher.
(J1186)
- Relay Path Unit
- Relay Path Unit

Detection Description Reception incomplete was detected in communication with the finisher.
(J1186)
- Relay Path Unit
- Relay Path Unit
473
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An undefined error was detected in communication with the finisher.
(J1186)
- Relay Path Unit
- Relay Path Unit

Detection Description An initialization error was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher.
(J1186)
- Relay Path Unit
- Relay Path Unit
474
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E719-0001-00 Error in Coin Vendor.

Detection Description Error in starting of the CoinVendor
- The Coin Vendor, which should have been connected before the power was turned OFF, is not
connected when the power is turned ON.
Remedy Check the connection between charging management equipment and machine, and check that
the Cable is not open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment is connected to operate and when
switching to the operation without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging management equipment, this error code is
displayed.)

Detection Description Error in IPC when CoinVendor is running.
- In the case of disconnection of IPC or an error in which IPC communication failed to be recovered.
- When disconnection of the pickup delivery signal is detected.
- When illegal connection is detected (short-circuit with Tx and Rx of IPC)
displayed.)

Detection Description - In the case of communication error with the coin vendor while obtaining the unit price at start-up.
displayed.)
E719-0004-00 Coin vendor error

Detection Description The coin vendor was connected to a model that does not support the coin vendor
Remedy Cancel the connection of the coin vendor and clear the error.
E719-0031-00 Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card Reader
Detection Description Failure in communication with the serial New Card Reader at start-up.
Remedy - Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected.
- Take out the serial New Card Reader.
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CARD
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR
E719-0032-00 Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card Reader
Detection Description Communication failed in the middle of the operation although communication with the serial New
Card Reader was successful at start-up.
Remedy - Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is disconnected.

Detection Description Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine.
(Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.)
Remedy 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6)
- Check that it is the supported charging management equipment.
- Check the cable to be connected.
- Check the power of the charging management equipment.
2. If charge mode is canceled
- Select COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN> "0", and turn OFF and then ON the main power.
475
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine.
(Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.)
Remedy 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6)
- Check that it is the supported charging management equipment.
- Check the cable to be connected.
- Check the power of the charging management equipment.
2. If charge mode is canceled
- Select COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN> "0", and turn OFF and then ON the main power.
E720-0001-00 Error due to non-compatible Finisher

Detection Description Non-compatible Finisher was connected.
Remedy [Remedy] Connect the finisher (INNER FINISHER-K1, BOOKLET/STAPLE FINISHER-AA1) for
this model.
E720-0001-05 Error due to non-compatible Finisher

Detection Description Non-compatible Finisher was connected.
Remedy [Remedy] Connect the finisher (INNER FINISHER-K1, BOOKLET/STAPLE FINISHER-AA1) for
this model.
E730-C001-00 Error in HDD access

Detection Description An error occurred when accessing the HDD.
- HDD

Detection Description A communication error of the Main Controller PCB was detected.

Detection Description A signal to start image transfer could not be detected at scanning although the specified period of
time (120 sec) has passed.
476
7. Error/Jam/Alarm




Detection Description A communication error of the Main Controller PCB was detected at startup/recovery from sleep.
E732-0F01-04 Communication error

Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot
If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0001 is generated.
Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log
collection.

collection.

collection.

collection.
477
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

collection.
E733-0000-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected
at startup.
J4511)
[Reference]

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB was detected.
J4511)
[Reference]

Detection Description Signal error was detected after establishment of communication between the DC Controller PCB
and the Main Controller PCB.
J4511)
[Reference]
478
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E733-0F00-05 Printer communication error

collection.

collection.

collection.
E733-F000-05 Printer communication error

Detection Description Disconnection of a cable between the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB was
detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Check/replace the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller
PCB.

Detection Description Disconnection of a cable between the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB was
detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Check/replace the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller
PCB.

Detection Description A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the Laser Driver PCB was detected.
Remedy [Related parts] 2.00
- Flat Cable between the Main Controller PCB (UN05/J9500) and the Y/M Laser Driver PCB (UN08/
J201)
- Flat Cable between the Y/M Laser Driver PCB (UN08/J203) and the C/Bk Laser Driver PCB
(UN09/J801)
- Laser Scanner Assembly

Detection Description The Reader Controller PCB detected a communication error between the Main Controller PCB
and the Reader Controller PCB.
E743-0001-04 DDI communication error

Detection Description Software sequence error
Remedy [Remedy] Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
E744-0001-00 Language file error

Detection Description The language file in HDD was not supported by the version of Bootable.
Remedy Reinstall the correct language file using SST or USB flash drive reinstall the entire software.
479
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The language file to be switched to that was described in the Config.txt in HDD was not found.

Detection Description Switching to the language file in the HDD failed.
E744-2000-00 Controller firmware mismatch

Detection Description Invalid controller firmware was detected at startup.
Remedy Replace the ECO-ID PCB with the one for this model.
E744-4000-05 Error due to the DC Controller PCB not compatible with the model
Detection Description The DC Controller PCB which was used with another model was detected.
Remedy [Remedy] Check/replace the DC Controller PCB (UN04).
E744-5000-07 Mismatch of software version for fax

Detection Description After the Fax Board (option) has been installed, mismatch of version of software in the Fax Board
was detected at transmission and reception.
Remedy Upgrade the system software version to the latest one.
E746-0021-00 Image Analysis Board error

Detection Description Self-check NG of Image Analysis Board
1. Remove and then install the Image Analysis Board.
2. If the error is not cleared, replace the Image Analysis Board.
3. After replacing the Image Analysis Board, reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or
the system software which version is supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description Different version of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)
Remedy Reinstall the firmware of the Image Analysis Board or the system software which version is
supported by this model using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description No response from Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)

Detection Description Failure in behavior of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for PCAM)
480
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E746-0031-00 TPM error

Detection Description A communication error has occurred between the Main Controller PCB and the TPM PCB at
startup.
Remedy Check/replace the TPM PCB.
[Reference] After replacing the TPM PCB, if the TPM key was backed up, restore the key.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Execute "Settings/Registration> Log In> Management Settings> Data Management> TPM
Settings> Restore TPM Key".
[CAUTION] Ask the user to enter "System Manager ID" and "System Manager PIN" when logging
in.
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK". Remove the USB memory,
and turn OFF and then ON the main power.

Detection Description Mismatch of the TPM key was detected.
2. Replace the TPM PCB.
[Reference] After replacing the TPM PCB, if the TPM key was backed up, restore the key.
in.

Detection Description It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent.
Remedy If the TPM key was backed up,
- Restore the TPM key.
in.
If the TPM key was not backed up,
- Format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
E746-0034-00 TPM auto recovery error

Detection Description The error occurred when clearing HDD while TPM setting was ON.
Remedy It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power.
If the error is not cleared, format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB
flash drive.
E746-0035-00 TPM version error

Detection Description TPM PCB which cannot be used in this machine was installed.
Remedy Install the TPM PCB for this model.
481
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E748-2000-00 Main Controller PCB access error

Detection Description Main Controller PCB Chip access error.

Detection Description Main Controller PCB memory access error.
E748-2010-00 Flash PCB error / HDD error

Detection Description IPL (startup program) was not found, or the HDD could not be recognized.
- HDD
- Flash PCB
- Disconnect the cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD, and turn ON the main
power.
a. When the error code has not been changed:
3. Restore the backup data.
b. When the error code has been changed to another one, see the remedy for the corresponding
code.
[Reference]
- For backup and restoration, refer to "Adjustment> Adjustment when Replacing the Parts" and
"Appendix> Backup Data List" in the Service Manual."
-Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and

Detection Description OS was not found at startup.
Remedy After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description Cannot mount the OS in safe mode startup or No OS startup script
Remedy After replacing the Flash PCB, reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.

Detection Description Main controller board access errors
482
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E748-2022-00 Main controller startup error

Detection Description An fatal error was detected in the Main Controller at startup
Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB






Detection Description At startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the OS boot loader on the flash PCB.
the error log.
- Flash PCB
[Remedy]
483
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description At startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the OS kernel on the flash PCB.
the error log.
- Flash PCB
[Remedy]

Detection Description At startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the OS kernel on the flash PCB.
the error log.
- Flash PCB
[Remedy]

E749-0008-00 Error due to the DC Controller not compatible with the model
Detection Description The DC Controller PCB or the Main Controller PCB which was used with another model was
detected.
collection.
E753-0001-00 Download Error

Detection Description Update of the system software failed.
2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
3. Replace the FLASH PCB, and reinstall the system software.
4. Collect debug log and contact the sales company.
E760-0001-00 Main Controller PCB internal error

Detection Description An error was detected in the Main Controller PCB.
E804-0000-00 Power Supply Cooling Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Power Supply Cooling Fan was locked.
- Harness between the Low-voltage Power Supply PCB (UN01/J323) and the Power Supply
Cooling Fan (FM02/J1008)
- Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM02)
- Low-voltage Power Supply PCB (UN01)
484
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E806-0100-05 Front Fan error

Detection Description Unlocked state was detected 2 consecutive times in 3 sec when the Front Fan was driven.
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB (UN04/J133)
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (J133), the Relay Connector (J1177), and the Front
Fan (J1260)
- Front Fan (FM01)
[Remedy]
[Reference]
E806-0101-05 Front Fan error

Detection Description A state of caught cable was detected within 15 sec when the Front Fan was driven.
- Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (J133), the Relay Connector (J1177), and the Front
Fan (J1260)
- Front Fan (FM01)
[Remedy]
[Reference]
E806-0200-05 Motor Fan error

Detection Description Unlocked state was detected 2 consecutive times in 3 sec when the Motor Fan was driven.
- Power Supply Unit
- Harness connecting the DC Controller PCB (J124) and the Relay Connector (J1342)
- Motor Fan (FM03)
[Reference]
E806-0201-05 Motor Fan error

Detection Description A state of caught cable was detected within 15 sec when the Motor Fan was driven.
- Power Supply Unit
- Harness connecting the DC Controller PCB (J124) and the Relay Connector (J1342)
- Motor Fan (FM03)
[Reference]
485
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E808-0001-05 Zero cross signal detection error

Detection Description After the start of the zero cross signal detection, the frequency between 43 Hz and 67 Hz could
not be detected for 0.5 consecutive sec.
- Power Supply Unit
- DC Controller PCB
[Reference]
E808-0002-05 Zero cross signal detection error

Detection Description Error due to disconnection of the fixing loopback signal
After the frequency of zero cross signal fell into the specified frequency band, the frequency
between 43 Hz and 67 Hz could not be detected for 0.5 consecutive sec.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (J121) and the Fixing Drawer (J1001)
- DC Controller PCB
- Fixing Unit
[Reference]
E811-0000-05 Fuse in the Fixing Fuse PCB blowout error

Detection Description The fuse in the Fixing Fuse PCB was not blown out at power-on.
- Fixing Fuse PCB (UN31)
- Fixing Unit
[Reference]
E880-0001-00 Controller Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Controller Fan was locked.
- Main Controller Cooling Fan
486
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E880-0003-00 Controller Fan error

Detection Description It was detected that the Controller Fan was locked.
- Main Controller Cooling Fan
E880-0005-00 Error in Controller Fan

Detection Description Fan lock of the HDD Cooling Fan was detected
Remedy Check if the connector is connected.
It the connection is OK, replace the HDD Cooling Fan.
E881-0001-00 Board over heat error

Detection Description Abnormal temperature of the Main Controller CPU was detected.
a. If the error occurred during a service visit and then occurred again, replace the Main Controller
PCB (UN05).
b. If the error does not occur during a service visit but is found in the log:
1. Clean the inlet on the side where the fan is installed and remove dust.
2. Remove dust from the Controller Fan.
3. If the space on the side where the fan is installed is less than 10 cm, ask the user to secure
enough space.
E882-0001-05 Main Power Supply Switch error

Detection Description The main power was not turned OFF due to the solenoid in the Main Power Switch not working.
- Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05/J4513) and the Main Power Supply Switch
(SW04/J1006 and J1007)
- Main Power Supply Switch (SW04)
E890-0001-05 Temperature detection error

Detection Description The Environment Sensor did not detect change in temperature.
- DC Controller PCB
- Environment Sensor
- Harness connecting the DC Controller PCB (J111) and the Environment Sensor (J1107)
a. If the Error Location Code [7100-0001-0xx] is displayed
a-1. Replace the DC Controller.
b. If the Error Location Code [7200-0005-0xx] is displayed
b-1. Check the Harness connecting the DC Controller PCB (J111) and the Environment Sensor
(J1107).
b-2. Replace the Environment Sensor.
487
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The thermistor in the Laser Scanner Unit consecutively detected a temperature outside of the
specified range.
- DC Controller PCB
- Harness connecting the YM Laser Driver PCB (J204) and the Thermistor in the Laser Scanner
Unit (TH04)
[Reference]
After replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit, execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch.
Mismatch
[Reference]

Detection Description The thermistor in the Laser Driver PCB consecutively detected a temperature outside of the
specified range.
- DC Controller PCB
- CABLE, FLAT, connecting the YM Laser Driver PCB (J203) and the C/Bk Laser Driver PCB
(J2801)
[Reference]
After replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit, execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch.
Mismatch
[Reference]
E996-0071-04 Error for collecting sequence jam log (ADF)

Detection Description Error for collecting jam log (ADF)
[Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R" to "1", it is handled
as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence.
E996-0CA1-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)

Detection Description Error for collecting jam log (Printer)
Continuous 0CA1 jam was detected.
[Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled

488
7. Error/Jam/Alarm



E996-0CA6-05 Error for collecting log (Printer)

Detection Description Error for collecting log (Printer)



Continuous 0CF0 jam was detected.
E996-0CAA-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)

E996-0CAB-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)

489
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E996-0CAC-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)

E996-0CAE-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)

Continuous 0CAE jam was detected.
E996-0CAF-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Finisher)

Detection Description Error for collecting jam log (Finisher)
Continuous 0CAF jam was detected.
E996-0CB0-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)

Continuous 0CB0 jam was detected.


E996-0CB6-05 Error for collecting log (Printer)

Detection Description Error for collecting log (Printer)


490
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Error Code (FAX)
How to View Fax Error Codes

When the service mode #1 SSSW SW01 Bit0 is set to "1" after installing the Fax Board, service error code is output on the
communication management report, reception result report, and error transmission report in the event that the communication is
resulted in an error.
Moreover, when an error occurs, the error code can be checked by performing the following procedure.
Status Monitor/Cancel > Send > Job Log > Details
The error codes displayed on the screen are shown in a list in "User Error Codes" and "Service Error Codes".
For remedies for user error codes, refer to the User's Guide. For remedies for service error codes, refer to "G3/G4 Facsimile Error
Code List (REVISION 2)" (document number: HY8-23A0-020) provided as a separate volume.
User error codes

Regarding the user error codes, refer to Top > Troubleshooting > A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is
Displayed > Countermeasures for Each Error Code.
Service Error Code

Code Cause Remedy
##3016 [T/R] An instruction of disconnec- Perform a communication again.
tion (BYE) was received from the
network at an unexpected time.
*1: G3FAX
*2: IPFAX
No.*1 No.*2 T/R Description

##100 ##3100 [T] at time of transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than speci-
fied.
##101 ##3101 [T/R] the modem speed does not match that of the other party.
##102 ##3102 [T] at time of transmission, fall-back cannot be used.
##103 ##3103 [R] at time of reception, EOL cannot be detected for 5 sec (15 sec if CBT).
##104 ##3104 [T] at time of transmission, RTN or PIN is received.
##106 ##3106 [R] at time of reception, the procedural signal is received for 6 sec while in wait for the
signal.
##107 ##3107 [R] at time of reception, the transmitting party cannot use fall-back.
##109 ##3109 [T] at time of transmission, a signal other than DIS, DTC, FTT, CFR, or CRP is received,
and the procedural signal has been sent more than specified.
##111 ##3111 [T/R] memory error has occurred.
491
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

##114 ##3114 [R] at time of reception, RTN is transmitted.
##116 ##3116 [T/R] Disconnection of loop current was detected during communication.
##200 ##3200 [R] at time of reception, no image carrier is detected for 5 sec.
##201 ##3201 [T/R] DCN is received outside the normal parity procedure.
##204 ##3204 [T] DTC without transmission data is received.
##220 ##3220 [T/R] system error (main program out of control) has occurred.
##223 ##3223 [T/R] while a communication is under way, the line is cut.
##224 ##3224 [T/R] in communication, an error has occurred in the procedural signal.
##226 ##3226 [T/R] the stack printer has fallen outside the RAM area.
##227 ##3227 [R] An attempt was made to record a file without image.
##229 ##3229 [R] the recording unit has remained locked for 1 min.
##230 ##3230 [T/R] A unit for controlling the display has malfunctioned.
##231 ##3231 [T/R] A unit for controlling the Control Panel buttons has malfunctioned.
##232 ##3232 [T] encoding error has occurred.
##237 ##3237 [R] decoding error has occurred.
##238 ##3238 [R] the print control unit is out of order.
##261 ##3261 [T/R] system error has occurred.
fied.
fied.
fied.
fied.
##284 ##3284 [T] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of TCF.
##285 ##3285 [T] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOP.
##286 ##3286 [T] at time of transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOM.
##287 ##3287 [T] at time of transmission DCN is received after transmission of MPS.
##288 ##3288 [T] after transmission of EOP, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been
received.
##289 ##3289 [T] after transmission of EOM, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been
received.
##290 ##3290 [T] after transmission of MPS, a signal other than PIN, PIP, MCF, RTP, or RTN has been
received.
##670 ##3670 [T] at time of V.8 late start, the V.8 ability of DIS front the receiving party is expected to
be detected, and the CI signal is expected to be transmitted in response; however,
the procedure fails to advance, and the line is released because of T1 time-out.
##671 ##3671 [R] at time of V.8 arrival, procedure fails to move to phase 2 after detection of CM signal
from caller, causing T1 time-out and releasing line.
##672 ##3672 [T] at time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and there-
after stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##673 ##3673 [R] at time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 2 to phase 3 and thereafter
stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1 timeout.
##674 ##3674 [T] at time of V.34 transmission, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the
control channel and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and
suffer T1 timeout.
##675 ##3675 [R] at time of V.34 reception, a shift in procedure from phase 3 and phase 4 to the control
channel and thereafter stops, causing the machine to release the line and suffer T1
timeout.
##750 ##3750 [T] at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of
PPS-NULL, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##752 ##3752 [T] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-NULL.
##753 ##3753 [T] at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than
specified after transmission of PPS-NULL, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
specified after transmission of PPS-NULL.
492
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PPS-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##757 ##3757 [T] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after retransmission of PPS-MPS.
specified after transmission of PPS-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
specified after transmission of PPS-MPS.
PPS-EOM, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##762 ##3762 [T] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOM.
specified after transmission of PPS-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
specified after transmission of PPS-EOM.
PPS-EOP, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##767 ##3767 [T] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of PPS-EOP.
specified after transmission of PPS-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
specified after transmission of PPS-EOP.
EOR-NULL, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##772 ##3772 [T] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-NULL.
specified after transmission of EOR-NULL, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##774 ##3774 [T] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-NULL.
EOR-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##777 ##3777 [T] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-MPS.
specified after transmission EOR-MPS, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##779 ##3779 [T] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-MPS.
EOR-EOM, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##782 ##3782 [T] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOM.
specified after transmission of EOR-EOM, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##784 ##3784 [T] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOM.
EOR-EOP, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified.
##787 ##3787 [T] at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.
specified after transmission of EOR-EOP, or T5 time-out (60 sec) has occurred.
##789 ##3789 [T] at time of ECM transmission, ERR is received after transmission of EOR-EOP.
##790 ##3790 [R] at time of ECM reception, ERR is transmitted after transmission of EOR-Q.
##791 ##3791 [T/R] while ECM mode procedure is under way, a signal other than a meaningful signal is
received.
##792 ##3792 [R] at time of ECM reception, PPS-NULL cannot be detected over partial page processing.
##793 ##3793 [R] at time of ECM reception, no effective frame is received while high-speed signal re-
ception is under way, thus causing time-out.
##794 ##3794 [T] at time of ECM reception, PPR with all 0s is received.
##795 ##3795 [T/R] a fault has occurred in code processing for communication.
##796 ##3796 [T/R] a fault has occurred in code processing for communication.
493
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Alarm Code
Alarm Code Details

00-0085 A notice of state
A. Operation / B. Cause / -
C. Remedy
00-0246 Error code display (4-digit)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Soft counter PCB cannot write normally.
C. Remedy
00-0247 Error code display (4-digit)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Soft counter PCB cannot restore data.
C. Remedy
01-0001 Notification of disabled to obtain counter values for a certain period of time
A. Operation / B. Cause / Counter information is not set to UGW
C. Remedy * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW
01-0002 No change in device status after specified period of time has passed (RDS server creates)
C. Remedy
01-0004 Notification of IP address change

A. Operation / B. Cause / IP address has been changed
01-0005 Restricted operation notification

A. Operation / B. Cause / The device entered limited function mode for some reason.
02-0025 Insufficient Scanner Unit (Paper Front) LED light intensity alarm (Some of the LEDs are OFF.
Scanning can be continued.)
A. Operation / B. Cause / In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at LED lighting.
C. Remedy
494
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
04-0001 Cassette 1 Lifter error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause:
C. Remedy Error in the Lifter Motor or the Lifter Sensor.
Message displayed on the Control Panel:
Paper source needs to be checked. (Call service rep.)
Measures:
1. While the Cassette 1 is removed, turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 1, and check
the operation sound of the motor.
When there is operation sound of the motor, check if the Middle Plate has been lifted up.
When the Middle Plate has been lifted up:
1-1. Check that the Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor (PS04) has been properly installed.
1-2. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller and the Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor
(PS04).
1-3. Check the Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor (PS04).
1-4. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
When the Middle Plate has not been lifted up:
2-1. Check the condition of the gear at the host machine side (to see if there is missing or swing
with the gear).
2-2. Check the Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor (M06).
When there is no operation sound of the motor, check the followings:
1. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller and the Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor
(M06).
2. Check conduction of the fuse in the DC Controller PCB.
3. Check the condition of the gear at the host machine side (to see if there is missing or swing with
the gear).
4. Check the Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor (M06).

Measures:
While the Cassette 2 is removed, turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 2, and check
1. When the Middle Plate has been lifted up:
(PS06).
2. When the Middle Plate has not been lifted up:
with the gear).
(M06).
the gear).
495
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Measures:
(PS104).
with the gear).
(M102).
the gear).

Measures:
(PS105).
with the gear).
(M102).
the gear).
496
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
04-0007 MP Tray Lifter error

C. Remedy Error in the Pullout Motor or the HP Sensor.
Measures:
Operate the Pullout Motor in the direction of the Multi-purpose Tray feed direction, and check the
operation sound of the motor.
When there is operation sound of the motor, check if the Pickup Roller moves up and down.
1. When the Pickup Roller moves up and down:
1-1. Check that the HP Sensor has been properly installed.
1-2. Check the sensor shield plate.
1-3. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller and the HP Sensor.
1-4. Check the Multi-purpose Tray HP Sensor (PS32).
2. When the Pickup Roller does not move up and down:
2-1. Check the gear on the host machine side and the gear on the Right Door side (missing,
rotation, swing, etc.)
2-2. Check the Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup Motor (M13).
2-3. Check the DC Controller PCB.
When there is no operation sound:
1. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller and the Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-
purpose Pickup Motor (M13).
the gear).
4. Check the Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup Motor (M13).
04-0010 Notification of jam left untouched

A. Operation / B. Cause / Jam is left untouched
04-0011 Cassette 1 paper feed retry error

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: Nothing in particular.
C. Remedy Cause: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times.
Measures: Check the Cassette 1 Pickup and Feed and Separation Rollers. -> Check whether a
scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not.



04-0017 Multi-purpose tray paper feed retry error

Measures: Check the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup and Pullout Rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of
paper remains around the paper feed area or not.
497
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
09-0010 Drum memory detection error (Y)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (Y) could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (Y).
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (Y) (UN35).
3. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J130) of the DC Controller PCB (UN04).
4. Replace the Drum Unit (Y).
09-0011 Drum memory detection error (M)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (M) could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (M).
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (M) (UN36).
4. Replace the Drum Unit (M).
09-0012 Drum memory detection error (C)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (C) could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (C).
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (C) (UN37).
4. Replace the Drum Unit (C).
09-0013 Drum memory detection error (Bk)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (Bk) could not be detected.
C. Remedy Measures:
1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (Bk).
2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (Bk) (UN38).
4. Replace the Drum Unit (Bk).
10-0001 Toner Low (Black) alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm.
10-0002 Toner Low (Cyan) alarm

10-0003 Toner Low (Magenta) alarm

10-0004 Toner Low (Yellow) alarm

498
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
10-0006 Patch Sensor error 1

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Soiled Patch Sensor window, shutter failure, or Patch Sensor failure
C. Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness between the Registration Patch Sensor and the DC Controller PCB
- DC Controller PCB
[Measures]
1. Check the values of COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-Y and P-B-P-C.
When the value is less than 115, go to step 2; when it is higher than 1000, go to step 5.
2. Check and clean the sensor window of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit.
3. Check that the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Shutter is properly installed and it is not damaged.
4. Check the operation of the Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL02).
5. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Registration Patch
Sensor.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (At this time, be sure to perform backup and restoration
according to the steps to be taken before/after replacing the DC Controller.)
10-0007 Patch Sensor error 2

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Soiled Patch Sensor window, shutter failure, or Patch Sensor failure
C. Remedy [Related parts]
- Harness between the Registration Patch Sensor and the DC Controller PCB
- DC Controller PCB
[Measures]
1. Check the values of COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-Y and P-B-P-C.
When the value is less than 115, go to step 2; when it is higher than 1000, go to step 5.
2. Check and clean the sensor window of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit.
3. Check that the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Shutter is properly installed and it is not damaged.
4. Check the operation of the Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL02).
5. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Registration Patch
Sensor.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (At this time, be sure to perform backup and restoration
according to the steps to be taken before/after replacing the DC Controller.)
10-0017 Toner (Y) prior notification alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / The life value of a target part reached the number of days left as set in COPIER > OPTION > PM-
C. Remedy DLV-D > TONER-Y.
10-0018 Toner (M) prior notification alarm

C. Remedy DLV-D > TONER-M.
10-0019 Toner (C) prior notification alarm

C. Remedy DLV-D > TONER-C.
10-0020 Toner (Bk) prior notification alarm

C. Remedy DLV-D > TONER-K.
10-0091 Toner memory detection alarm (Y)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (Y) could not be detected.
C. Remedy 1. Remove and then install the Toner Bottle (Y).
2. Clean the Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y) (UN39).
4. Replace the Toner Bottle (Y).
499
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
10-0092 Toner memory detection alarm (M)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (M) could not be detected.
C. Remedy 1. Remove and then install the Toner Bottle (M).
2. Clean the Bottle New/Old Sensor (M) (UN40).
4. Replace the Toner Bottle (M).
10-0093 Toner memory detection alarm (C)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (C) could not be detected.
C. Remedy 1. Remove and then install the Toner Bottle (C).
2. Clean the Bottle New/Old Sensor (C) (UN41).
4. Replace the Toner Bottle (C).
10-0094 Toner memory detection alarm (Bk)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (Bk) could not be detected.
C. Remedy 1. Remove and then install the Toner Bottle (Bk).
2. Clean the Bottle New/Old Sensor (Bk) (UN42).
4. Replace the Toner Bottle (Bk).
10-0100 Toner Bottle replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / The replacement of the Toner Bottle was detected.
C. Remedy
10-0401 Toner Bottle empty alarm (Y)

A. Operation / B. Cause / Toner Bottle empty was detected.
C. Remedy
10-0402 Toner Bottle empty alarm (M)

C. Remedy
10-0403 Toner Bottle empty alarm (C)

C. Remedy
10-0404 Toner Bottle empty alarm (Bk)

C. Remedy
10-F017 Toner (Y) high consumption alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / It was detected that the target part was at a high level of daily consumption.
C. Remedy
10-F018 Toner (M) high consumption alarm

C. Remedy
10-F019 Toner (C) high consumption alarm

C. Remedy
10-F020 Toner (Bk) high consumption alarm

C. Remedy
11-0001 Waste Toner Container full level

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: A message is displayed on the Control Panel and the machine is stopped.
C. Remedy Cause: The value of the Waste Toner Container has reached the full level.
Measures: Replace the Waste Toner Container.
500
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
11-0010 Waste Toner Container preparation warning display

A. Operation / B. Cause / Operation; A message is displayed on the Control Panel (printing is still possible)
C. Remedy Cause: The following two conditions were met.
- Waste Toner Full Level Sensor Detection
- The threshold number of days left as set in COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > WST-TNR was
reached.
11-0100 Waste Toner Container replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Completion of Waste Toner Container replacement was detected.
C. Remedy
11-F010 Waste Toner Container high consumption alarm

C. Remedy
13-0000 For R&D

A. Operation / B. Cause /
C. Remedy
13-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0020 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0021 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0022 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0023 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0024 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0025 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0026 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0027 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0028 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0029 For R&D

C. Remedy
501
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
13-002A For R&D

C. Remedy
13-002B For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0051 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-00FE For R&D

C. Remedy
13-00FF For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0100 For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0FFC For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0FFD For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0FFE For R&D

C. Remedy
13-0FFF For R&D

C. Remedy
13-10FD For R&D

C. Remedy
14-0000 For R&D

C. Remedy
14-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
14-1000 For R&D

C. Remedy
502
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
29-0201 Drum (M) pre-exposure alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / An error in pre-exposure of the drum (M) was detected.
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing: Warm-up rotation
Detection condition: When the difference in detection value is within the specified value when the
pre-exposure light intensity is changed
Remedy:
1. Visual check in service mode>COPIER->FUNCTION->MISC-P->PRE-EXP
If the LED is OFF, perform the following measures.
1-1. Check the harness/connector between the DC Controller (J123) and the Pre-exposure LED.
1-3. Replace the harness between the DC Controller PCB and each LED PCB.
1-4. Replace each LED PCB.
29-0301 Drum (C) pre-exposure alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / An error in pre-exposure of the drum (C) was detected.
Remedy:
29-0401 Drum (K) pre-exposure alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / An error in pre-exposure of the drum (K) was detected.
Remedy:
30-0025 A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control
for yellow
A. Operation / B. Cause / Remedy:
C. Remedy 1. Check the harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB and the DC Controller PCB
(open circuit, caught cable, connector disconnection).
-> Replace the harness if it is faulty
2. Check the contact point between the ITB Unit and the Primary Transfer Power Feed Unit.
3. Execute primary transfer ATVC again.
-> If the abnormality is found again, perform the remedy shown below. If abnormality is not found,
continue use with careful attention.
4. Replace the Drum Unit of the corresponding station.
5. Replace the ITB Unit.
503
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
for magenta
for cyan
for black
30-0032 Error in secondary transfer ATVC (below the lower limit)

C. Remedy 1. Check the contact point between the Secondary Transfer Unit and the Secondary Transfer
Contact Unit.
2. Check the contact point between the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller and the Shaft Support.
3. Check the harness between the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB and the DC Controller
PCB (open circuit, caught cable, connector disconnection).
4. Execute secondary transfer ATVC again.
5. Replace the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
504
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
30-0137 The value of data for correcting high voltage output value was not within the range.
A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement/symptom:
C. Remedy Operation was performed with output control using the default table without correction of the high
voltage output value.
31-0006 HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function

A. Operation / B. Cause / HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function
C. Remedy
31-0008 HDD failure prediction alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time due to occurrence of physical error in
C. Remedy HDD. It does not occur in the HDD of mirroring configuration.
Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD
Measures:
1. Back up the data stored in HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
3. Restore the data.
S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in
the HDD. The occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing speed, the total number of
Motor start-up and stop times, the total length of power-on time, etc. are monitored.
31-0009 FLASH failure prediction alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of FLASH memory It indicates a physical error of the FLASH
C. Remedy memory, which is expected to soon lead to a failure.
*: S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology) = It is a self-diagnosis function
built in the FLASH memory, and monitors the occurrence rate of reading errors, reading/writing
speed, total number of times of motor start-up/stop, total length of power-on time, etc.
Continuously using the machine without taking any measures may lead to E614.
Measures: Back up the data stored in the FLASH memory, and restore the data after replacing the
FLASH memory.
31-0010 The configuration of an option controlled by the Main Controller has been changed
A. Operation / B. Cause / A change in configuration of an option such as a change in the configuration of the Fax Board, a
C. Remedy change in the configuration of the Voice Board, or a change in the configuration of the option HDD,
which requires turning OFF and then ON the power, was detected.
Detection condition/timing:At the time of startup only
Remedy:Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
31-0020 The configuration of an option controlled by the RCON has been changed
A. Operation / B. Cause / Due to a change in the configuration related to the scanner, a change in the hardware configuration
C. Remedy which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected.
31-0030 The configuration of an option controlled by the DCON has been changed
A. Operation / B. Cause / Due to a change in the configuration related to the printer, a change in the hardware configuration
C. Remedy which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected.
31-0040 Communication with RTC was not available.

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Communication with RTC could not be established.
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing:
- When a communication error occurred with RTC
Movement/symptom:
- FCOT may become longer.
Measures:
1. Check the connector/cable connected to the J109 Main Switch.
2. Check the Main Switch.
505
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
31-0106 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-0116 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-0126 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-0136 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F1 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F2 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F3 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F4 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F5 For R&D

C. Remedy
31-01F6 For R&D

C. Remedy
34-0003 Auto registration adjustment

A. Operation / B. Cause / Timeout occurred due to unsuccess in reading 10 sets of auto registration pattern.
C. Remedy Registration Patch Sensor failure, Registration Patch Sensor cleaning member covered the
registration detection sensor, or no image drew on the ITB.
34-0024 The correction value (M) of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction
exceeded the upper limit during color fine adjustment
C. Remedy
34-0026 The correction value (M) of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction
C. Remedy
34-0034 The correction value (C) of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction
C. Remedy
506
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
34-0036 The correction value (C) of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction
C. Remedy
34-0044 The correction value (Bk) of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction
C. Remedy
34-0046 The correction value (Bk) of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction
C. Remedy
34-0050 Laser Scanner EEPROM checksum alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / An error in data in the EEPROM installed in the Laser Scanner PCB was detected.
C. Remedy Detection condition/timing:
When the DCON is started, data in the EEPROM of the Laser Scanner is retrieved.
[Related parts]
- YM Laser Driver PCB
- Harness (FM1-D837) between the DC Controller PCB (UN04/J111) and the YM Laser Driver
PCB (J202)
Remedy:
[Caution] After replacing the related parts, execute "Settings/Registration> Adjustment/
Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch".
34-2201 As a result of wrong detection processing, data that can be used for correction in the
vertical scanning direction was not found (M)
C. Remedy
horizontal scanning direction was not found (M)
C. Remedy
vertical scanning direction was not found (C)
C. Remedy
horizontal scanning direction was not found (C)
C. Remedy
vertical scanning direction was not found (Bk)
C. Remedy
horizontal scanning direction was not found (Bk)
C. Remedy
507
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
34-5001 The value of the color displacement patch exceeded the upper limit (front side)
A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The value of the color displacement patch on the front side exceeded the upper limit.
C. Remedy 1. Clean the Registration Patch Sensor.
5. Replace DC Controller PCB.
34-5003 The value of the color displacement patch exceeded the upper limit (rear side)
A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The value of the color displacement patch on the front side exceeded the upper limit.
C. Remedy 1. Clean the Registration Patch Sensor.
5. Replace DC Controller PCB.
38-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
38-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
39-0111 Application-generated alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application
C. Remedy Error message (E-code)
* This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application.

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently
508
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day

C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified

C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 1




C. Remedy Spare (Not selectable)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper
509
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day

C. Remedy Paper jam_Others

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified
510
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Black

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Yellow

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Magenta

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Cyan

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Black

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Yellow

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Magenta

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Cyan

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Black

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Yellow
511
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Magenta

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Cyan

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Color not specified

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Black

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Yellow

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Magenta

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Cyan

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Color not specified

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Black

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Yellow

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Magenta

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Cyan
512
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Color not specified

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Black

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Yellow

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Magenta

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Cyan

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Color not specified

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Black

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Yellow

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Magenta

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Cyan

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Black
513
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan

C. Remedy Image failure_Others

C. Remedy Operation failure_Print

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Not specified

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Reception

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response
514
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Scan (SEND)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main

C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options

C. Remedy Operation failure_Others

C. Remedy Settings_Training

C. Remedy Settings_Addition

C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_Fax

C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_SEND

C. Remedy Settings_Printer driver installation

C. Remedy Settings_Address book

C. Remedy Settings_Network
515
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Settings_Others

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Black

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Yellow

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Magenta

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Cyan

C. Remedy Order_Waste Toner Container

C. Remedy Error message (E-code)_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified_(Cancel)
516
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 1_(Cancel)




C. Remedy Spare (Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard_(Cancel)
517
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Others_(Cancel)
518
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Black_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Magenta_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Black_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Magenta_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Black_(Cancel)
519
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Magenta_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Color not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Black_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Magenta_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Color not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Black_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Magenta_(Cancel)
520
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Color not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Black_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Magenta_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Color not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Black_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Magenta_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified_(Cancel)
521
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Black_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Others_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Image failure_Print_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Not specified_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Reception_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified_(Cancel)
522
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Scan (SEND)_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Others_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Settings_Training_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Settings_Addition_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_Fax_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_SEND_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Settings_Printer driver installation_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Settings_Address book_(Cancel)
523
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Settings_Network_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Settings_Others_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Black_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Yellow_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Magenta_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Cyan_(Cancel)

C. Remedy Order_Waste Toner Container_(Cancel)
39-19EE Application-generated alarm

C. Remedy Test signal
39-19FF Application-generated alarm

C. Remedy Remedy completed

C. Remedy Error message (E-code)_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Frequently_(Customer information change)
524
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_Occasionally_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Inside the machine_First time in the day_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Occasionally_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_First time in the day_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 1_(Customer information change)




C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Not specified_(Customer information change)
525
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Envelope_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Postcard_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Plain paper_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Heavy paper_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Occasionally_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_First time in the day_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Frequently_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_Occasionally_(Customer information change)
526
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Paper jam_At 2-sided printing_First time in the day_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Paper jam_Others_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Color not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Black_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Magenta_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Cyan_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Color not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Black_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Magenta_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Blank image_Cyan_(Customer information change)
527
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Color not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Black_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Magenta_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Cyan_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Color not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Black_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Magenta_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Cyan_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Color not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Black_(Customer information change)
528
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Magenta_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Light_Cyan_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Color not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Black_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Magenta_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Cyan_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Color not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Black_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Magenta_(Customer information change)
529
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Image failure_Dark_Cyan_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Color not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Black_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Magenta_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Image failure_Others_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Print_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission and reception_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Reception_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Transmission_(Customer information change)
530
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Operation failure_Fax_Forwarding_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Not specified_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Slow response_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Scan (SEND)_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Operation failure_Others_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Settings_Training_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Settings_Addition_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_Fax_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Settings_Forwarding_SEND_(Customer information change)
531
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

C. Remedy Settings_Printer driver installation_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Settings_Address book_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Settings_Network_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Settings_Others_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Black_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Yellow_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Magenta_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Order_Toner_Cyan_(Customer information change)

C. Remedy Order_Waste Toner Container_(Customer information change)
40-0070 Drum Unit (Y) prior notification alarm

C. Remedy DLV-D > PT-DR-Y.
40-0071 Drum Unit (M) prior notification alarm

C. Remedy DLV-D > PT-DR-M.
40-0072 Drum Unit (C) prior notification alarm

C. Remedy DLV-D > PT-DR-C.
40-0073 Drum Unit (K) prior notification alarm

C. Remedy DLV-D > PT-DRM.
532
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
40-0076 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0091 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0092 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0094 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0120 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0121 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0122 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0123 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0125 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0359 For R&D

C. Remedy
40-0510 For R&D

C. Remedy
43-0070 Drum Unit (Y) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Completion of Drum Unit (Y) replacement was detected.
C. Remedy
43-0071 Drum Unit (M) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Completion of Drum Unit (M) replacement was detected.
C. Remedy
43-0072 Drum Unit (C) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Completion of Drum Unit (C) replacement was detected.
C. Remedy
43-0073 Drum Unit (Bk) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Completion of Drum Unit (K) replacement was detected.
C. Remedy
43-0076 Fixing Unit replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Completion of Fixing Assembly replacement was detected.
C. Remedy
533
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
43-0091 Feed Roller (DADF) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Feed Roller (DADF) counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0092 ADF Separation Roller replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Separation Roller (DADF) counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0094 ITB Unit replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / ITB Unit counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0120 Developing Assembly (Y) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Developing Assembly (Y) counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0121 Developing Assembly (M) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Developing Assembly (M) counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0122 Developing Assembly (C) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Developing Assembly (C) counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0123 Developing Assembly replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Developing Assembly counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0125 Pickup Roller (DADF) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Pickup Roller (DADF) counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0359 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Secondary Transfer Outer Roller counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
43-0510 Pre-Separation Unit (DADF) replacement completion alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Pre-Separation Unit (DADF) counter was cleared.
C. Remedy
50-0010 Successive occurrence of separation alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original from the ADF occurs 3 times in a row. Check
C. Remedy rotation of the Pickup Motor -> Check the life of the Pickup Roller -> Check if paper lint is at the
pickup slot.
50-0014 Insufficient Scanner Unit (Paper Back) LED light intensity alarm (Some of the LEDs are OFF.
Scanning can be continued.)
A. Operation / B. Cause / In the case that the light intensity is insufficient at LED lighting.
C. Remedy
534
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
50-0015 Failure of the ADF Double Feed Sensor

C. Remedy Failure of the Double Feed Sensor installed in the ADF
Detection condition/timing:
- When a paper feed error of the Double Feed Sensor was detected at power-on
- When an error of the output value of the Double Feed Sensor was detected during ADF job (While
an ADF job is being executed, it is handled as a jam once and retry is performed.)
Clearing condition:
When communication and the sensor output value are normal at power-on
Movement/symptom:
"Check area where multi. sheet feed was detected. (Call serv. rep.)" is displayed in the status line.
Although reading from the ADF is possible, double feed cannot be detected when it occurs.
Check area where multi. sheet feed was detected. (Call serv. rep.)
Measures:
Check for any foreign matter, clean paper lint, disconnect and then connect the connectors, replace
the Double Feed Detection PCB, replace the RCON/DF Driver PCB, replace the harnesses
61-0002 Finisher Staple Free Stapling alarm

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The staple free staple unit is broken.
C. Remedy Operation : Operation stops as jam. After jam processing, the paper is delivered without stapling
until a job is finished.
Recovery method : Replace the Staple free staple unit. After performing the remedy work, go
through the following to clear the alarm: SORTER> FUNCTION> EMSG-CLR.
70-0071 Verification error by Falsification detection at startup function

C. Remedy At normal startup, verification error occurred due to invalid data of the firmware (for startup in safe
mode).
Measures:
1. Replace the Flash PCB, and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive.
2. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Security Settings > System verification at
startup > OFF
70-0086 For R&D

C. Remedy
70-0087 Firmware combination mismatch

A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: An option with the firmware which version is newer than that of the firmware installed in
C. Remedy the host machine was detected. It is an alarm when the automatic update cancellation message
is displayed on the Control Panel.
Detection condition:
When the following two conditions are satisfied:
1. "1" is set in COPIER>Option>FNC-SW>VER-CHNG.
2. The version of the firmware installed in the option that has been installed to the host machine
is newer than that of the firmware in the host machine.
Timing: At startup
Movement/symptom: Cancel the automatic update.
Measures: Update the firmware of the host machine.
73-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0008 For R&D

C. Remedy
535
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
73-0009 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0011 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0014 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0015 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0017 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0024 For R&D

C. Remedy
73-0026 For R&D

C. Remedy
76-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
76-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
76-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
77-0006 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
536
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
78-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
78-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
79-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
79-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
79-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
79-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0008 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0009 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0010 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0011 For R&D

C. Remedy
537
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
80-0012 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0013 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0015 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0016 For R&D

C. Remedy
80-0019 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0006 For R&D

C. Remedy
81-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
83-0005 CanonPDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF memory full
C. Remedy
83-0015 CanonPDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF data decode error
C. Remedy
83-0017 CanonPDF
A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF error
C. Remedy
83-0020 Reception of ESCP unanalyzable data

A. Operation / B. Cause / Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong, select the appropriate PDL in Settings/Registration
C. Remedy > Function Settings > Printer > Printer Settings > Settings > Printer Operation Mode, and send the
data.
538
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
83-0021 Reception of I5577 unanalyzable data

data.
83-0022 Reception of HPGL unanalyzable data

data.
83-0023 Reception of N201 unanalyzable data

data.
84-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0003 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0006 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0007 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0008 For R&D

C. Remedy
84-0009 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0001 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0002 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0004 For R&D

C. Remedy
85-0005 For R&D

C. Remedy
539
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
85-001A For R&D

C. Remedy
85-002A For R&D

C. Remedy
540
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Jam Code
Jam Type
Type Overview of detection Check items (in arbitrary order)
DELAY A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned • Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor
ON although a specified period of time had passed • Soiling on the target sensor
after the start of detection by the sensor. • Displacement of the target sensor position
• Failure of the target sensor
• Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located
upstream of the target sensor
• Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller lo-
cated upstream of the target sensor
STNRY A stationary jam occurs when a sensor was not • Remaining paper near the target sensor
turned OFF although a specified period of time had • Soiling on the target sensor
passed after the sensor was turned ON. • Displacement of the target sensor position
• Soiling (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor located
upstream of the target sensor
• Soiling (paper dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller lo-
cated upstream of the target sensor
DOOR OP A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected • Door open during printing
door open during printing operation.
COVER OP A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected • Cover open during printing
cover open during printing operation.
ADF OPEN A door open jam occurs when a sensor detected • ADF open during printing
ADF open during printing operation.
SEQUENCE A sequence jam occurs when there was an error in • Opening/closing of the door
sensor detection signal at printing operation se- • Turning OFF and then ON the power
quence. • Error near the target sensor (soiling/displacement/failure of
Since the jam may occur due to sporadic noise with the sensor, error in harness/open circuit of harness, soiling
software of each equipment or communication line (grease)/deterioration/failure of a drive motor, or soiling (pa-
(interruption of communication), failure of the part per dust)/deterioration/failure of a drive roller)
is not the cause of the jam. After the jam is removed,
the machine works.
POWER ON A power-on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON • Remaining paper in the machine
state at power-on. • Soiling on the target sensor
• Foreign matter on the target sensor (paper dust, paper lint)
ERROR An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the • Opening/closing of the door after jam removal
machine (excluding parts failure) was detected. • Turning OFF and then ON the power after jam removal
Printing operation is suspended to avoid error oc-
currence by error code; therefore, parts failure is not
the cause of the jam.
After the jam is removed, the machine works.
If it is due to parts failure, an error code instead of
the error avoidance jam is displayed on UI and
printing operation is suspended. In such case, serv-
ice technician should perform remedial work for the
error code.
SIZE ERR A size error jam occurs when the difference be- • Difference in paper size
tween the paper length detected by the Cassette • Wrong paper size setting
Guide Plate/specified on the Control Panel and the • Error in the Document Size Sensor (soiling/displacement/
length measured by the Post-Separation Sensor is failure of the sensor)
out of the specified range. • Error in the Paper Size Detection Unit (failure of mechanical
structure for size detection, failure of the Guide Plate, or fail-
ure of the Cassette Size Switch)
P-STOP Forcible stop of paper feed • Using at problem analysis.
It occurs when a sheet of paper stops at the position
specified in service mode.
541
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Type Overview of detection Check items (in arbitrary order)

Wrapping jam When the first sensor after the fixing roller is turned • Fixing Assembly remaining in Paper
ON is turned OFF immediately detection after the • Failure of the target sensor
detection. • Fixing Assembly failure
Alternatively, when the second sensor after fixing • Paper Type Confirmation (Check if paper type cannot be
roller is turned ON and immediately after detection, used.)
the first sensor is detection turned OFF.
Jam screen display specification

Due to one jam code being used for multiple options, the illustration for the different option may be displayed on the jam screen.
In this case, "1/2" or similar information is displayed on top left side of the screen and this area can be pushed. This operation
can be used to switch information on the screen.
Host Machine
PS52
PS51 PS12
PS14
PS10
PS11
PS22
PS08
PS24
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID

00 0101 DELAY Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor PS08
00 0106 DELAY Fixing Outlet Sensor PS10
542
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

00 0107 DELAY First Delivery Sensor PS14
00 0108 DELAY Second Delivery/Reverse Sensor PS51
00 0109 DELAY Third Delivery Sensor PS52
00 0190 DELAY When paper reached the Registration Roller, it had not been -
fed in time for image formation.
00 010A DELAY Duplex Reverce Sensor PS12
00 010B DELAY Pre-Registration Sensor PS22
00 0206 STNRY Fixing Outlet Sensor PS10
00 0207 STNRY First Delivery Sensor PS14
00 0208 STNRY Second Delivery/Reverse Sensor PS51
00 0209 STNRY Third Delivery Sensor PS52
00 020A STNRY Duplex Reverce Sensor PS12
00 020B STNRY Pre-Registration Sensor PS22
00 0706 WRAP Fixing Outlet Sensor PS10
00 0A01 POWER ON Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor PS08
00 0A06 POWER ON Fixing Outlet Sensor PS10
00 0A07 POWER ON First Delivery Sensor PS14
00 0A08 POWER ON Second Delivery/Reverse Sensor PS51
00 0A09 POWER ON Third Delivery Sensor PS52
00 0A0A POWER ON Duplex Reverce Sensor PS12
00 0A0B POWER ON Pre-Registration Sensor PS22
00 0A0C POWER ON Arch Sensor -
00 0B00 DOOR OP Right Door Open/Close Detection Switch, Front Door Switch, SW11,SW26,SW
Right Upper Door Open/Close Detection Switch, Cassette 27/SW101
Right Door Open/Close Detection Switch
00 0B0D OTHER No drum jam -
00 0CA1 SEQUENCE Sequence jam -
00 0CAA SEQUENCE Sequence jam -
00 0CAB SEQUENCE Sequence jam -
00 0CAC SEQUENCE Sequence jam -
00 0CAE SEQUENCE Sequence jam -
00 0CAF SEQUENCE Sequence jam -
00 0CB0 SEQUENCE Sequence jam -
00 0CB7 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam -
00 0CF1 ERROR Error avoidance jam -
00 0CFF OTHER - -
00 0D91 SIZE ERR Size error -
00 1F01 OTHER Finisher jam -
00 AA20 P-STOP Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode -
543
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Single Pass DADF-B1
PS_R3
PS_N1
PS_A3
PS_A5 PS_A4
PS_R1
UN_BO8
UN_BO7
PS_A9
PS_R2
PS_A6 PS_A1
PS_A2
PS_A7
UN_BO6
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID
01 0001 DELAY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0002 STNRY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0003 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0004 STNRY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0005 DELAY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0006 STNRY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0007 DELAY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 0008 STNRY Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 0020 DOUBLE Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0021 OTHER Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
01 0042 STNRY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 0043 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0044 STNRY Arch Sensor PS_A1
01 0045 DELAY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0046 STNRY Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 0060 DOUBLE Double Feed Sensor PCB UN_BO7, UN_BO8
544
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

01 0071 OTHER - -
01 0076 OTHER Large/Small Sensor, LTR-R/LGL Sensor PS_R3, PS_A3
01 0090 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front/ Reader : PS_N1, PS_N2
Rear)
01 0091 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front/ Reader : PS_N1, PS_N2
Rear)
01 0092 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor PS_A5
01 0093 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor PS_A5
01 0095 OTHER Original Sensor PS_N1
01 0096 OTHER - -
01 00A1 POWER ON Post-separation Sensor PS_R1
01 00A2 POWER ON Loop Sensor PS_A1
01 00A3 POWER ON Registration Sensor PS_R2
01 00A4 POWER ON Lead Sensor 1 PS_A6
01 00A5 POWER ON Lead Sensor 2 PS_A7
01 00D5 OTHER Original Sensor PS_N1
DADF-AV1
SR9,SR10,SR11,SR12 SR6 SR8

SR5 SR7
SR2 SR1 SR3 SR15 SR13,SR14

01 0003 DELAY Registration Sensor SR1
01 0004 STNRY Registration Sensor SR1
01 0009 DELAY Lead Sensor SR2
01 0010 STNRY Lead Sensor SR2
01 0013 DELAY Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 0014 STNRY Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 0043 DELAY Registration Sensor SR1
01 0044 STNRY Registration Sensor SR1
01 0049 DELAY Lead Sensor SR2
01 0050 STNRY Lead Sensor SR2
01 0053 DELAY Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 0054 STNRY Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 0071 OTHER - -
01 0076 OTHER - -
01 0090 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front/Rear) PS_N1,PS_N2
01 0091 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (Front/Rear) PS_N1,PS_N2
01 0092 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor SR6
01 0093 COVER OP Cover Open/Closed Sensor SR6
01 0095 OTHER Document Set Sensor SR5
545
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

01 0096 OTHER - -
01 00A1 POWER ON Registration Sensor SR1
01 00A2 POWER ON Lead Sensor SR2
01 00A3 POWER ON Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 00A6 POWER ON Delivery Reversal Sensor SR3
01 00D5 OTHER Registration Sensor / Document Set Sensor SR1 / SR5
Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1
PS101
PS106

546
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Inner Finisher-K1
MSW1
PS1

02 1001 DELAY Delivery sensor PS1
02 1101 STNRY Delivery sensor PS1
02 1200 OTHER Timing error -
02 1300 POWER ON Delivery sensor PS1
02 1400 COVER OP Front cover switch MSW1
02 1500 STAPLE - -
02 1701 OTHER Delivery sensor PS1
02 1801 ERROR Staple free stapling jam (Clinch motor drive detection sensor error) -
02 1802 ERROR Staple free stapling jam (Clinch rotation detection sensor error) -
02 1803 ERROR Staple free stapling jam (Clinch motor error) -
02 1804 ERROR Staple free stapling jam (Staple operation time out error) -
02 1805 ERROR Staple free stapling jam (Return operation time out error after sta- -
pling)
02 1C14 ERROR*1 Error avoidance jam (assist motor error) -
02 1C16 ERROR*1 Error avoidance jam (paddle motor error) -
02 1C30 ERROR*1 Error avoidance jam (rear alignment motor error) -
02 1C32 ERROR*1 Error avoidance jam (stapler motor error) -
02 1C35 ERROR*1 Error avoidance jam (return belt motor error) -
02 1C37 ERROR*1 Error avoidance jam (front alignment motor error) -
02 1C40 ERROR*1 Error avoidance jam (tray shift motor error) -
02 1C77 ERROR*1 Error avoidance jam (paddle motor error) -
02 1F01 OTHER Paper feed cancel jam -
02 1F32 OTHER Manual stack insertion jam -
02 1F90 OTHER Time out jam -
*1: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the power supply.
547
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Booklet/Staple Finisher-AA1
PS111
PS102
PS130 PS101
PS114 PS103
PS128 PS104
PS129 SW101
PS125 PS201
PS203 PS215
PS202

02 1001 DELAY Inlet sensor PS101
02 1002 DELAY Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1003 DELAY Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1004 DELAY Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1008 DELAY Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203
02 1009 DELAY Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201
02 1101 STNRY Inlet sensor PS101
02 1102 STNRY Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1103 STNRY Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1104 STNRY Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1108 STNRY Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203
02 1109 STNRY Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201
02 1200 OTHER Timing error -
02 1301 POWER ON Inlet sensor PS101
02 1302 POWER ON Delivery Sensor PS102
02 1303 POWER ON Buffer Sensor PS103
02 1304 POWER ON Escape Delivery Sensor PS111
02 1307 POWER ON Saddle Processing Tray Paper Sensor PS202
02 1308 POWER ON Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203
02 1309 POWER ON Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201
02 1400 COVER OP Front cover sensor, Front cover switch PS104, SW101
02 1500 STAPLE Staple HP sensor PS125
02 1501 SDL STP Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor PS215
02 1801 ERROR Staple-free Binding Motor Clock Sensor PS130
02 1802 ERROR Staple-free Binding HP Sensor PS129
02 1803 ERROR Staple free stapling jam (Clinch motor error) -
02 1804 ERROR Staple free stapling jam (Staple operation time out error) -
02 1805 ERROR Staple free stapling jam (Return operation time out error after sta- -
pling)
548
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

02 1C14 ERROR assist motor error -
02 1C30 ERROR rear alignment motor error -
02 1C32 ERROR stapler motor error -
02 1C35 ERROR return belt motor error -
02 1C37 ERROR front alignment motor error -
02 1C40 ERROR tray shift motor error -
02 1C53 ERROR Escape Delivery Shift Motor -
02 1C54 ERROR Safety Switch ON error -
02 1C77 ERROR paddle motor error -
02 1C78 ERROR Return Roller Lift Motor error -
02 1C7B ERROR Paper End Pushing Guide Motor error -
02 1C83 ERROR Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor error -
02 1CF0 ERROR Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor error -
02 1CF1 ERROR Saddle Delivery Motor error -
02 1CF3 ERROR Saddle Alignment Motor error -
02 1CF6 ERROR Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor error -
02 1CF8 ERROR Saddle Gripper Motor error -
02 1CFA ERROR Saddle Switching Lever Motor error -
02 1F01 OTHER Paper feed cancel jam -
02 1F32 OTHER Manual stack insertion jam -
02 1F90 SEQUENCE - -
Buffer Pass Unit
PI202 PI201

02 100A DELAY Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PI201
02 100B DELAY Buffer Pass Outlet Sensor PI202
02 110A STNRY Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PI201
02 110B STNRY Buffer Pass Outlet Sensor PI202
02 1201 OTHER Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PI201
02 130A POWER ON Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PI201
02 130B POWER ON Buffer Pass Outlet Sensor PI202
02 1405 COVER OP Buffer Pass Open/Closed Sensor PI203
02 1F3E ERROR Buffer pass Sequence error jam -
549
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
PS303 PS304
PS301

02 1600 PUNCH Punch HP Senpor 1/2 PS303,PS304
02 1C90 ERROR - -
02 1C93 ERROR - -
550
8 Service Mode
Overview........................................... 552
COPIER (Service mode for printer)
.......................................................569
FEEDER (ADF service mode)...........952
SORTER (Service mode for delivery
options)..........................................958
BOARD (Option board setting mode)
.......................................................980
FAX (Serivce Mode for FAX).............981
8. Service Mode
Overview
It is possible to see each item of service mode so that those who access to service mode can understand how to use them.
The main types of this machine's service mode are shown below.
Basic Operations
This section describes the basic operation of service mode.
■ Entering Service Mode

For information on how to enter service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company.
■ Service Mode Menu

Press the button in the service mode menu to display the initial screen of each mode.
The differences between these modes are described below.
Top Screen
MODELIST
In this mode, functions for referring to each item in service mode, etc. are available.
Updater
This button is used to access the CDS and UGW servers and update system software.
BACKUP
This button is used to back up the service mode setting values.
RESTORE
This button is used to restore the service mode setting values backed up by [BACKUP].
SITUATION
This function displays service mode items according to the situation.
LUI MASK
This button is used to display a mask screen to prevent operations from being performed from the Control Panel while the
service mode is being accessed from a remote PC.
NOTE:
For the detailed information on how to use Updater, BACKUP, and RESTORE, refer to the imageRUNNER ADVANCE System
Service Manual.
■ Description of Service Mode Items

The description of the initial screen, the main items, the intermediate items and the sub items can be displayed.
After selecting any item of the initial screen, main item, the intermediate item or the sub item, pressing “i” (Information Button)
displays the description of the selected item (hereinafter referred to as the service mode contents).
552
8. Service Mode
CAUTION:
• Displayed language of the service mode contents can be selected from J/E/F/I/G/S/C/K/T.
• The service mode contents can be upgraded using SST or a USB flash drive just like other system software.
Example: COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION screen
1. Press the [i] button.
2. The title of each sub item is displayed.
To check the details of each item, select the relevant item and press the [i] button.
3. A detailed description of the sub item (specifications and use methods, setting screen, etc.) is displayed.
■ Switching the Screen Display (Level 1 <->2)

Switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2 becomes easier.
553
8. Service Mode
By pressing <LEVEL 1> at the upper right of the screen while Level 1 screen is displayed, the screen is switched to Level 2
screen.
NOTE:
This key combination can be used to enter the Level 2 screen.
• Mode List screen > [Settings/Registration] > [2]
554
8. Service Mode
SITUATION Mode
Situation mode has been implemented in this machine to improve workability and searchability at the site. This mode makes it
possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site.
The following items are available in situation mode.

• Install:
To be referred at installation of the machine.
• Troubleshooting:
To be referred at problem solving.
• Parts Replacement:
To be referred at parts replacement.
• Major Adjustment:
To be referred at installation of the machine.
• Sensor Check:
To be referred at checking of the sensor.
• Part Check:
To be referred at operation check of the part.
The following three points are made available depending on each situation:
• Display of related service mode that requires adjustment
• Display of causes and remedies
• Display of related images
■ How to Use Sensor Check

You can find a desired electrical component in Sensor Check of situation mode to review its I/O info. To do this, follow the
procedure below.
1. Start service mode.
555
8. Service Mode
2. Select "SITUATION".
3. On the "SITUATION MODE" screen, select "Sensor Check".
4. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type.
Example: In the case of the Registration Sensor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"P-
SENSOR".
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
556
8. Service Mode
5. A list of electrical component types for the selected device is displayed.
6. Select an electrical component to display the details in the frame (red dotted frame) at the bottom of the screen.
7. Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components.
■ How to Use Parts Check

In the Parts Check of situation mode, among electrical components used (motors, fans, solenoids, and clutches), those that can
operate alone can be operated from the screen and the operations can be checked. The operation procedure is shown below.
557
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
The service mode used below utilizes the system where electrical components used are operated by control signals sent from the
DC Controller. If a control signal is sent but the electrical component does not operate, a failure of the electrical component, open
circuit of the cable for transmitting control signals, or poor contact of the connector is suspected.
1. Select SERVICE MODE > SITUATION > Parts Check.
2. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type.
Example: In the case of a motor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"MOTOR".
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
3. A list of electrical component types for the selected device whose operation can be checked is displayed.
4. Select the electrical component you want to operate and then press the Start button to send a signal for driving the
selected electrical component for a specified period of time from the DC Controller.
558
8. Service Mode
5. "ACTIVE" is displayed while the electrical component is driven. After the electrical component has been driven for
a specified period of time, "OK!" is displayed if transmission of the drive signal succeeded, or "NG !" is displayed
if failed.
559
8. Service Mode
Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components.
6. The screen showing the locations of electrical components is displayed.
Security Support
A password can be specified to prevent unauthorized access to the service mode.
Related Service Mode:

Setting password type when the screen is switched to the service mode
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level 1)
The password for service engineer when the screen is switched to the service mode
• (Level 2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD
560
8. Service Mode
■ Procedure for Setting Password

1. Set "1" or "2" in the following service mode.
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW
<Setting range>
0: No password [Default]
1: Service technician
2: System administrator + Service technician
CAUTION:
• This setting is enabled without restarting the host machine.
• After setting the password, the following screen will be displayed by accessing service mode.
• Therefore, when the PSWD-SW is set to "2" (system administrator + service technician), enter the system administrator
password ([System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN] in [Settings/Registrations] > [Management Settings] >
[User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]), and then press the [OK] button.
2. Follow the following procedure to check that you can login to service mode.
1. When setting PSWD-SW to "1" (system administrator) or "2" (ServiceMode_070Backup) in step 1, the system
administrator password entry screen will be displayed, so enter the system administrator ID in [Sys Manager ID ] (1)
and system administrator password in [Password] (2), and then press the [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
2. When setting PSWD-SW to "2" (system administrator + service technician) in step 1, the service technician password
entry screen will be displayed after step 2. Enter the service technician password in [Password] (1), and then press the
[OK] button.
(1)
CAUTION:
• The service technician password is the password set in COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD.
• If you forget the password for service technician, disable the password function using the Service Support Tool (SST).
Check that you can access service mode and finish the work.
561
8. Service Mode
■ Function to Mask the Screen during Remote Access

This function ensures security during servicing work using remote connection.
The machine has an option called Remote Operation Viewer for remote control via a network. This option enables a service
technician to perform maintenance on the machine from a remote location.
However, the same screen is displayed on the Remote Operation Viewer screen and the Control Panel during the work, which
carries the following risks.
• The screen being operated can be seen by the user.
• During remote operation, the user may perform an operation on the Control Panel and an unexpected processing may be
executed.
To solve these security problems, a function has been added to display a message on the Control Panel screen when the machine
is being operated remotely using Remote Operation Viewer in order to prevent the user from performing unexpected operations.
As shown in the figure below, the mask screen is displayed when this function is enabled.
Canon Remote Operation Viewer screen Operation Panel
The mask screen is

displayed on
the Control Panel
screen when this
function is enabled.
Examples of Screen Display
Functional Specification
The specifications of this function are shown below.
562
8. Service Mode
• When this function is enabled, a mask screen is displayed on the Control Panel. When the function is disabled, the original
screen is displayed again.
Example of the displayed mask screen

• This function is disabled when the following operations are performed.
• Press [LUI MASK] on the service mode top screen.
• Exit Remote Operation Viewer.
• The remote access is disconnected due to a network failure, etc.
• The machine is shut down (power down) or restarted.
• If this function is disabled while the service mode is being operated, the service mode is forcibly exited, and the previous
screen is displayed. (However, the service mode is not forcibly terminated if the Updater screen has been accessed from
service mode.)
• When this function is enabled, all operations (operations from the Touch Panel or hardware keys) other than screen
brightness adjustment and operation on the Energy Saver key are disabled.
● Procedure for Enabling This Function

The procedure for enabling this function is shown below.
1. Use the Remote Operation Viewer to access the machine, and start service mode.
2. Press [LUI MASK], and check that the button is enabled (has turned light blue).
● Procedure for Disabling This Function

The procedure for disabling this function is shown below.
1. Perform one of the following operations.

• Access the service mode, press [LUI MASK], and check that the button is disabled (has turned gray).
• Exit the Remote Operation Viewer.

• Disconnect the network (disconnect the network cable, disable the network function, etc.).
• Shut down or restart the machine.
563
8. Service Mode
Position to Affix the Service Label

Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment and the adjustment value is written down in the service label.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM, the adjusted values of ADJUST and OPTION return to the default;
therefore, be sure to adjust the value in the field, and in the case of changing the service mode value, be sure to write down the
changed value in the service label. When the corresponding item is not found on the service label, write the value in blank field.
The service label of this machine is affixed to the position shown below.
DCON Setting Items
RCON Setting Items
Output of Service Print Data

• The service print data such as P-PRINT can be output as a file.
• By executing the following service mode, data at the time can be saved in the Storage
Service Mode Level 1 > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE
• The saved data will be deleted from the Storage when it is exported to SST or a USB flash drive.
• When multiple service data such as P-PRINT and HIST-PRINT is saved in the host machine, it is collectively exported to
SST or a USB flash drive.
NOTE:
• Service print data cannot be output when an error has occurred.
• When connecting a USB flash drive that runs on external power, start the machine with the power is turned ON in advance.
A USB flash drive connected after the machine has been started cannot be recognized.
How to obtain the report data Location

“Moving the file in service mode” on page 565 USB flash drive
“Moving the file in download mode” on page 566 USB flash drive
564
8. Service Mode
How to obtain the report data Location

“How to Export Service Print File to a PC Using SST ” on page 567 PC
■ Service Print and Data File Name Supported for File Output
Service Mode Content
COPIER > Function> MISC-P > P-PRINT Output of service mode setting values
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > HIST-PRT Output of jam and error history
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > USER-PRT Output of Settings/Registration menu setting values list
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > D-PRINT Output of service mode (DISPLAY)
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > ENV-PRT Output of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/surface temperature
of the Fixing Roller as a log
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > PJH-P-1 Output of details on print job history (100 jobs)
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > PJH-P-2 Output of details on print job history (all jobs)
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > USBH-PRT Output of USB device information report
COPIER > Function > MISC-P > TNRB-RPT Output of the Toner Container ID report
NOTE:
When each service mode is individually executed, the report corresponding to the service mode as of the time of execution is
output.
■ Moving the file in service mode

Preparation
The following item needs to be prepared to export the service print file to a USB flash drive.
• USB flash drive (FAT32 format file system that is not locked with a password. To display the USB menu, the said model's
firmware must already be registered.)
Overall flow
1. Selecting RPT-FILE
Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK.
2. Generating report file
After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.
3-+3
86%+357
537),/( 2.
53786%
3. Connect the USB flash drive storage device to the USB port.
565
8. Service Mode
4. Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB; and then press OK.
3-+3
86%+357
537),/(
53786%
OK
NOTE:
• If the downloaded file is opened as plain text, the paragraphs are misaligned, which makes it difficult to read the data.
• When the file is dragged to WordPad, an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases.
■ Moving the file in download mode

Preparation
The following item needs to be prepared to export the service print file to a USB flash drive.
• USB flash drive (FAT32 format file system that is not locked with a password. To display the USB menu, the said model's
firmware must already be registered.)
Overall flow
1. Selecting RPT-FILE
Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK.
2. Generating report file
After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.
3-+3
86%+357
537),/( 2.
53786%
566
8. Service Mode
3. Execute Download mode > [5]: Download File > [4]: ServicePrint Download.
>>>>>>>'RZQORDG)LOH0HQX 86% @@@@@@@

>@68%/2*'RZQORDG
>@6HUYLFH3ULQW'RZQORDG
>&@5HWXUQWR0DLQ0HQX
>5HVHW@6WDUWVKXWGRZQVHTXHQFH
>@KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG([HFXWH"
2. &$1&(/ $Q\RWKHUNH\V
■ How to Export Service Print File to a PC Using SST

The procedure for exporting the service print file to a PC using SST will now be described. (SST described in the procedure is
Ver 4.72.)
1. Start the SST.
2. Select the model [1] to be connected and the information file for separate download [2] ([Single]). Then, check the
network settings and click the "Start" button.
iA4245 [1]
[2]
567
8. Service Mode
3. Click the [Upload Data] button.
iA4245
iA4245
iA4245
4. Select [Report] and click the [Start] button.
iA4245
5. Specify the folder name to be saved and enter comments if necessary. Then click the [Store] button.
iA4245
6. Click the [OK] button.
568
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer)
DISPLAY (State display mode)

■ VERSION
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION
DC-CON 1 Display of DCON firmware version
Detail To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When upgrading the firmware
Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99
R-CON 1 Display of RCON firmware version

Detail To display the RCON firmware version in the Main Controller firmware.
PANEL 1 Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM ver

Detail To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
ECO 1 Display of ECO-ID PCB firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of the ECO-ID PCB.
SORTER 1 Display of FIN-CONT firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB.
NIB 1 Display of network software version

Detail To display the version of the network software.
SDL-STCH 1 Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver

Detail To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
569
8. Service Mode
OP-CON 1 Display of Option Controller PCB ROM ver
Detail To display the ROM version of Option Controller PCB.
MN-CONT 1 Display of MNCON firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
PUNCH 1 Display of Finisher Inner Punch Unit

Detail To display the version of Finisher Inner Puncher Unit.
LANG-FR 1 Display of French language file version

Detail To display the version of French language file.
LANG-DE 1 Display of German language file version

Detail To display the version of German language file.
LANG-IT 1 Display of Italian language file version

Detail To display the version of Italian language file.
LANG-CS 2 Display of Czech language file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file.
LANG-DA 2 Display of Danish language file version

Detail To display the version of Danish language file.
LANG-EL 2 Display of Greek language file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file.
570
8. Service Mode
LANG-ES 1 Display of Spanish language file version
Detail To display the version of Spanish language file.
LANG-ET 2 Display of Estonian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file.
LANG-FI 2 Display of Finnish language file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file.
LANG-HU 2 Display of Hungarian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file.
LANG-KO 2 Display of Korean language file version

Detail To display the version of Korean language file.
LANG-NL 2 Display of Dutch language file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file.
LANG-NO 2 Display of Norwegian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file.
LANG-PL 2 Display of Polish language file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file.
LANG-PT 2 Display of Portuguese language file ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file.
571
8. Service Mode
LANG-RU 2 Display of Russian language file version
Detail To display the version of Russian language file.
LANG-SL 2 Display of Slovenian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file.
LANG-SV 2 Display of Swedish language file version

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file.
LANG-TW 2 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad

Detail To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional).
LANG-ZH 2 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl

Detail To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified).
ECO-ID 2 Display of ECO-ID code

Detail To display the ECO-ID code.
Display/Adj/Set Range ASCII character string (12 digits)
GDI-UFR 1 Display of UFR II function version

Detail To display the version of UFR II function.
LANG-BU 2 Display of Bulgarian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file.
LANG-CR 2 Display of Croatian language file ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file.
572
8. Service Mode
LANG-RM 2 Display of Romanian language file ver
Detail To display the version of Romanian language file.
LANG-SK 2 Display of Slovak language file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file.
LANG-TK 2 Display of Turkish language file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file.
LANG-CA 2 Display of Catalan language file version

Detail To display the version of Catalan language file.
MEDIA-JA 2 Dspl of Japanese media information ver

Detail To display the version of Japanese media information.
MEDIA-EN 2 Dspl of English media information ver

Detail To display the version of English media information.
MEDIA-DE 2 Dspl of German media information version

Detail To display the version of German media information.
MEDIA-IT 2 Dspl of Italian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Italian media information.
MEDIA-FR 2 Dspl of French media information version

Detail To display the version of French media information.
573
8. Service Mode
MEDIA-ZH 2 Dspl of Chinese media info ver: smpl
Detail To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified).
MEDIA-SK 2 Dspl of Slovak media information version

Detail To display the version of Slovak media information.
MEDIA-TK 2 Dspl of Turkish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Turkish media information.
MEDIA-CS 2 Dspl of Czech media information version

Detail To display the version of Czech media information.
MEDIA-EL 2 Dspl of Greek media information version

Detail To display the version of Greek media information.
MEDIA-ES 2 Dspl of Spanish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Spanish media information.
MEDIA-ET 2 Dspl of Estonian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Estonian media information.
MEDIA-FI 2 Dspl of Finnish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Finnish media information.
MEDIA-HU 2 Dspl of Hungarian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Hungarian media information.
574
8. Service Mode
MEDIA-KO 2 Dspl of Korean media information version
Detail To display the version of Korean media information.
MEDIA-NL 2 Dspl of Dutch media information version

Detail To display the version of Dutch media information.
MEDIA-NO 2 Dspl of Norwegian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Norwegian media information.
MEDIA-PL 2 Dspl of Polish media information version

Detail To display the version of Polish media information.
MEDIA-PT 2 Dspl of Portuguese media information ver

Detail To display the version of Portuguese media information.
MEDIA-RU 2 Dspl of Russian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Russian media information.
MEDIA-SL 2 Dspl of Slovenian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Slovenian media information.
MEDIA-SV 2 Dspl of Swedish media information ver

Detail To display the version of Swedish media information.
MEDIA-TW 2 Dspl of Chinese media info version:trad

Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese media information.
575
8. Service Mode
MEDIA-BU 2 Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver
Detail To display the version of Bulgarian media information.
MEDIA-CR 2 Dspl of Croatian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Croatian media information.
MEDIA-RM 2 Dspl of Romanian media information ver

Detail To display the version of Romanian media information.
MEDIA-CA 2 Dspl of Catalan media information ver

Detail To display the version of Catalan media information.
FAX1 1 Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version

Detail To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB.
"NULL" is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
FAX2/3/4 1 Display of 2-line FAX PCB ROM version

Detail To display the ROM version of 2-line FAX PCB.
Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Use Case When checking the version
IOCS 1 Display of IOCS version

Detail To display the IOCS version.
S-LNG-JP 1 Dspl of service mode Japanese file ver

Detail To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode.
576
8. Service Mode
S-LNG-EN 1 Dspl of service mode English file ver
Detail To display the version of English language file in service mode.
S-LNG-FR 1 Dspl of service mode French file version

Detail To display the version of French language file in service mode.
S-LNG-IT 1 Dspl of service mode Italian file ver

Detail To display the version of Italian language file in service mode.
S-LNG-GR 1 Dspl of service mode German file version

Detail To display the version of German language file in service mode.
S-LNG-SP 1 Dspl of service mode Spanish file ver

Detail To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode.
TSP-JLK 1 Dspl Image Data Analyzer Board version

Detail To display the version of Image Data Analyzer Board.
LS-ROM-V 2 Display of Laser Scanner Unit EEPROM ver

Detail To display the EEPROM version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit.
Use Case When checking the EEPROM version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit
Display/Adj/Set Range 0001 to 9999
LS-UNT-V 2 Display of Laser Scanner Unit version

Detail To display the version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit.
Use Case When checking the version written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit
LS-SRL 2 Display of Laser Scanner Unit serial No.

Detail To display the serial number written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit.
Use Case When checking the serial number written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit
577
8. Service Mode
BCT 1 Display of self diagnosis tool version
Detail To display the version of self diagnosis tool.
LANG-TH 2 Display of Thai language file ver

Detail To display the version of Thai language file.
LANG-VN 2 Dspl of Vietnamese language file version

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
IMLUT 1 Dspl image processing coefficient file

Detail To display the version of image processing coefficient.
LANG-AR 2 Dspl of Arabic language file ver

Detail To display the version of Arabic language file.
LANG-MS 2 Dspl of Malay language file ver

Detail To display the version of Malay language file.
LANG-HI 2 Dspl of Hindi language file ver

Detail To display the version of Hindi language file.
LANG-EU 2 Dspl of Euskera language file ver

Detail To display the version of Euskera language file.
RPTL-CS 2 Dspl RUI Portal Czech file version

Detail To display the version of Czech language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
578
8. Service Mode
RPTL-DA 2 Dspl RUI Portal Danish file version
Detail To display the version of Danish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-EL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Greek file version

Detail To display the version of Greek language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-ET 2 Dspl RUI Portal Estonian file version

Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-FI 2 Dspl RUI Portal Finnish file version

Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-HU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Hungarian file version

Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-NL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Dutch file version

Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-NO 2 Dspl RUI Portal Norwegian file version

Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-PL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Polish file version

Detail To display the version of Polish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-PT 2 Dspl RUI Portal Portuguese file version

Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
579
8. Service Mode
RPTL-RU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Russian file version
Detail To display the version of Russian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-SL 2 Dspl RUI Portal Slovenian file version

Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-SV 2 Dspl RUI Portal Swedish file version

Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-ID 2 Dspl RUI Portal Indonesian file version

Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-BU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Bulgarian file version

Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-CR 2 Dspl RUI Portal Croatian file version

Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-RM 2 Dspl RUI Portal Romanian file version

Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-SK 2 Dspl RUI Portal Slovak file version

Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-TK 2 Dspl RUI Portal Turkish file version

Detail To display the version of Turkish language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
580
8. Service Mode
RPTL-CA 2 Dspl RUI Portal Catalan file version
Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-TH 2 Dspl RUI Portal Thai file version

Detail To display the version of Thai language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
RPTL-VN 2 Dspl RUI Portal Vietnamese file version

Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for "Remote UI: Portal".
DSUB1 1 Firmware ver of Printer Engine Sub CPU

Detail To display the firmware version of Printer Engine Sub CPU.
Use Case When checking the version of DC-CON Sub CPU
BF-PASS 1 Display of BF-CONT firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Buffer Pass Unit Controller PCB.
SORT-SLV 1 Dspl of FIN-CONT (Sub) firmware version

Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB (Sub).
CONT-PF 1 Display of Controller firmware version

Detail To display the platform version of the controller.
Use Case When checking the platform version at upgrade/problem occurrence
LANG-HE 2 Display of Hebrew language file version

Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file.
LANG-LT 2 Dspl of Lithuanian language file version

Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file.
581
8. Service Mode
LANG-LV 2 Display of Latvian language file version
Detail To display the version of Latvian language file.
LANG-UK 2 Dspl of Ukrainian language file ver

Detail To display the Ukrainian language file version
Use Case When the firmware is upgraded
Adj/Set/Operate Method None (display only)
LANG-MI 2 Dspl of Maori language file ver

Detail To display the Maori language file version
Use Case When the firmware is upgraded
Adj/Set/Operate Method None (display only)
■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > USER
SPDTYPE 1 Display of engine speed type
Detail To display the engine speed type of this machine.
Use Case When checking the engine speed type
ADFTYPE 1 Display of DADF type

Detail To display the type of the DADF currently installed.
Use Case When replacing the DADF
0: Reverse type, 1: 1-path type, 2: Not installed (Copyboard model)
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SCANTYPE
RCON-PCB 1 Dspl of the Reader Unit type

Detail To display the type of the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB
0: Reverse type, 1: 1-path type, 2: Selectable type
Default Value According to the setting at shipment
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SCANTYPE
DL-RCON 1 Display of RCON type

Detail To display the type of RCON which is a system software.
The RCON type differs depending on the types of the Reader and DADF.
When downloading the RCON due to E490 (error due to different model), check the value of this
item.
Use Case When E490 (error due to different model) occurs
0: For reverse type, 1: For 1-path type
Supplement/Memo When downloading the firmware as a set, the RCON type is automatically judged according to the
value of this item.
582
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > USER
SER-NAME 1 Dspl firmware registration series name
Detail Display firmware registration series name
Use Case To check the folder name for firmware registration in USB flash drive
■ ACC-STS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS
FEEDER 1 Display of DADF connection state
Detail To display the connecting state of DADF.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and DADF
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
SORTER 1 Connect state of Finisher-related option

Detail To display the connection state of Finisher-related options.
Use Case When checking the connection of Finisher-related options
Display/Adj/Set Range Left column (connection state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5
1: Without Saddle
2: With Saddle
3 to 5: Not Used
Right column (connection state of Finisher-belonged Puncher): 0 to 4
0: No hole, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole, 4: 4-hole (SW)
CARD 1 Dspl of connection state of Card Reader

Detail To display the connecting state of Card Reader.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Card Reader
0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is not available.)
1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy
is available.)
RAM 1 Dspl of image processing memory capacity

Detail To display the capacity of memory for image processing on the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the machine
Unit MB
COINROBO 1 Dspl of Coin Manager connection state

Detail To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager.
Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin Manager
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
NETWARE 1 Install state dspl of NetWare firmware

Detail To display the installation state of the NetWare firmware.
Use Case When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the machine
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
583
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS
HDD 1 Display of HDD model name
Detail To display the model name of HDD.
Use Case When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine
MN-RAM 1 Display of memory capacity for system

Detail To display the capacity of memory for system on the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When checking the memory capacity of the machine
Unit MB
■ ANALOG
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG
TEMP 1 Display of outside temperature
Detail To display the temperature outside the machine.
This is measured by the Environment Sensor that detects the outside air.
Use Case When checking the temperature outside the machine
Unit deg C
Appropriate Target Value Room temperature+/-5 deg C
Amount of Change per 1
Unit
HUM 1 Display of outside humidity

Detail To display the humidity outside the machine.
Use Case When checking the humidity outside the machine
Unit %
Appropriate Target Value 1 - 99
Unit
ABS-HUM 1 Display of outside moisture content

Detail To display the absolute moisture content outside the machine.
Use Case When checking the moisture content outside the machine
Unit g/m3
Unit
584
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG
FIX-E 1 Dspl of Fixing Heater center temperature
Detail To display the center temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Main Thermistor.
Use Case When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Heater
Unit deg C
Unit
FIX-E2 1 Dspl Fixing Heater front edg temperature

Detail To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 1.
Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater
Unit deg C
Unit
TEMP2 1 Display of estimated inside temperature

Detail To display the temperature inside the machine (around the Developing Unit) estimated from the
temperature in the Laser Scanner Unit.
Use Case When checking the temperature inside the machine (around the Developing Unit)
Unit deg C
Appropriate Target Value Room temperature - Room temperature+15 deg C
Unit
HUM2 1 Display of estimated inside humidity

Detail To display the estimated relative humidity inside the machine that is calculated from the estimated
temperature inside the machine and moisture content outside the machine.
Use Case When checking the humidity inside the machine
Unit %
Unit
FIX-E3 1 Dspl Fixing Heater rear edge temperature

Detail To display the rear edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 2.
Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater
Unit deg C
Unit
585
8. Service Mode
■ CST-STS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CST-STS
WIDTH-MF 2 Dspl of Multi-Purpose Tray paper width
Detail To display the width (mm) of paper set on the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Use Case When checking the width of paper on the Multi-Purpose Tray
Unit mm
■ HV-STS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS
1ATVC-Y 2 Dspl Y-clr prmry trns ATVC base voltage
Detail To display the base voltage Vb derived from primary transfer ATVC control (1/1 speed) for Y-color.
As Vb is closer to 3500, the Primary Transfer Roller is closer to the end of life, so image failure
(leopard pattern image or mottled image due to poor transfer) is likely to occur.
Use Case - When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller
- When checking the results of control after execution of 1ATVC-EX
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> 1ATVC-EX
Unit
1ATVC-M 2 Dspl M-clr prmry trns ATVC base voltage

Detail To display the base voltage Vb derived from primary transfer ATVC control (1/1 speed) for M-color.
Unit
1ATVC-C 2 Dspl C-clr prmry trns ATVC base voltage

Detail To display the base voltage Vb derived from primary transfer ATVC control (1/1 speed) for C-color.
Unit
586
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS
1ATVC-K4 2 Dspl Bk-clr prmry trns ATVC base voltage
Detail To display the base voltage Vb derived from primary transfer ATVC control (1/1 speed) for Bk-
color.
Unit
2ATVC 2 Dspl secondary transfer ATVC tgt current

Detail To display the decuple value of the target current value of secondary transfer ATVC control.
Use Case When identifying the cause at the occurrence of an image failure
Unit uA
Amount of Change per 0.1
Unit
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD
TARGET-B 2 Shading target value (B)
Detail To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 65535 (maximum) is considered a failure of the Main
Controller PCB.
When the value is out of the target value range, image failure or E302 (shading error) may have
occurred. Identify the cause according to the value.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
TARGET-G 2 Shading target value (G)

Detail To display the target value of Green.
Controller PCB.
587
8. Service Mode
TARGET-R 2 Shading target value (R)
Detail To display the shading target value of Red.
Controller PCB.
GAIN-OB 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(B):frt

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for front side).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit/Main Controller PCB.
GAIN-OG 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(G):frt

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
GAIN-OR 2 Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(R):frt

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
588
8. Service Mode
GAIN-EB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):frt
Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
GAIN-EG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):frt

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
GAIN-ER 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(R):frt

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
LAMP-BW 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL:B&W, front

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for front side) in B&W scanning
mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode
Supplement/Memo LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.
LAMP-CL 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL:clr, front

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for front side) in color scanning
mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in color mode
589
8. Service Mode
LAMP2-BW 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: B&W, back
Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in B&W scanning
mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in black mode
LAMP2-CL 2 Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: clr, back

Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning
mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in color mode
OFST-BW 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:B&W, front

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side) in B&W scanning
mode.
OFST-CL 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, front

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side) in color scanning
mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in color mode
OFST2-BW 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value: B&W, back

Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in B&W scanning
mode.
GAIN-BW1 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL1: B&W, frt

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (for front side).

590
8. Service Mode

GAIN2BW1 2 Read Sensor gain level adj VL1:B&W, back

Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit (for back side).


Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 3 of the Scanner Unit (for back
side).

GAIN2-OR 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(R):back

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
Scanner Unit (for back side).
591
8. Service Mode
GAIN2-OG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(G):back
Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
GAIN2-OB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(B):back

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
GAIN2-ER 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(R):back

Detail To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
GAIN2-EG 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):back

Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
GAIN2-EB 2 Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(B):back

Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of
592
8. Service Mode
OFST2-CL 2 Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, back
Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning
mode.
Use Case When an image failure occurs at back side reading in color mode
■ DPOT
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DPOT
2TR-PPR 2 For R&D
2TR-BASE 2 For R&D
1TR-DC-Y 2 For R&D
1TR-DC-M 2 For R&D
1TR-DC-C 2 For R&D
1TR-DC-K 2 For R&D
LPWR-Y 2 For R&D
LPWR-M 2 For R&D
LPWR-C 2 For R&D
LPWR-K 2 For R&D
PVCONT-Y 2 For R&D
PVCONT-M 2 For R&D
PVCONT-C 2 For R&D
PVCONT-K 2 For R&D
■ DENS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS
DENS-Y 1 Dspl Y-color toner density change ratio
Detail To display the deviation of Y-color toner density from the target value in percentage (%).
If the deviation is not acceptable, E020 occurs. This may be caused by deterioration of the
developer, failure/disconnection of the Toner Density Sensor or error in toner supply system.
The value is updated upon print operation after power-on.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of image failure (density failure, fogging) and occurrence of E020
Display/Adj/Set Range -7.00 to 7.00
Unit %
Appropriate Target Value -3.00 to 3.00
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-Y
Unit
593
8. Service Mode
DENS-M 1 Dspl M-color toner density change ratio
Detail To display the deviation of M-color toner density from the target value in percentage (%).
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-M
Unit
DENS-C 1 Dspl C-color toner density change ratio

Detail To display the deviation of C-color toner density from the target value in percentage (%).
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-C
Unit
DENS-K 1 Dspl Bk-color toner density change ratio

Detail To display the deviation of Bk-color toner density from the target value in percentage (%).
Unit %
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-K
Unit
DENS-S-Y 2 Dspl ATR control Y-color patch density

Detail To display Y-color patch image density formed at ATR control.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of image failure (fogging, carrier adherence, low density, etc.)
DENS-S-M 2 Dspl ATR control M-color patch density

Detail To display M-color patch image density formed at ATR control.
594
8. Service Mode
DENS-S-C 2 Dspl ATR control C-color patch density
Detail To display C-color patch image density formed at ATR control.
DENS-S-K 2 Dspl ATR control Bk-color patch density

Detail To display Bk-color patch image density formed at ATR control.
D-Y-TRGT 2 Dspl Y-clr patch target dens: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the target density for Y-color patch image formed at ATR control.
D-M-TRGT 2 Dspl M-clr patch target dens: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the target density for M-color patch image formed at ATR control.
D-C-TRGT 2 Dspl C-clr patch target dens: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the target density for C-color patch image formed at ATR control.
SGNL-Y 1 Display of Y-color toner density

Detail To display the measured value of Y-color toner density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (Y) for each job.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-Y
SGNL-M 1 Display of M-color toner density

Detail To display the measured value of M-color toner density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (M) for each job.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-M
595
8. Service Mode
SGNL-C 1 Display of C-color toner density
Detail To display the measured value of C-color toner density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (C) for each job.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-C
SGNL-K 1 Display of Bk-color toner density

Detail To display the measured value of Bk-color toner density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (Bk) for each job.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-K
DEV-DC-Y 2 Dspl of Y-color developing DC voltage

Detail To display the latest Y-color developing DC voltage Vdc.
Use Case - When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence
- When fogging occurs/is deteriorated
Display/Adj/Set Range -1000 to 0
Unit V
Appropriate Target Value -490 - -600
Unit
DEV-DC-M 2 Dspl of M-color developing DC voltage

Detail To display the latest M-color developing DC voltage Vdc.
Unit V
Unit
DEV-DC-C 2 Dspl of C-color developing DC voltage

Detail To display the latest C-color developing DC voltage Vdc.
Unit V
Unit
596
8. Service Mode
DEV-DC-K 2 Dspl of Bk-color developing DC voltage
Detail To display the latest Bk-color developing DC voltage Vdc.
Unit V
Unit
CHG-DC-Y 2 Dspl Y-color primary charge DC voltage

Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of Y-color.
Use Case When decrease in density/fogging occurs
Unit V
Unit
CHG-DC-M 2 Dspl M-color primary charge DC voltage

Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of M-color.
Unit V
Unit
CHG-DC-C 2 Dspl C-color primary charge DC voltage

Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of C-color.
Unit V
Unit
CHG-DC-K 2 Dspl Bk-color primary charge DC voltage

Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of Bk-color.
Unit V
Unit
D-K-TRGT 2 Dspl Bk-clr patch target dens: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the target density for Bk-color patch image formed at ATR control.
597
8. Service Mode
DENS-Y-H 2 Dspl Y-clr TD ratio diff log: ATR ctrl
Detail To display the latest 8 logs in which deviations (%) of Y-color toner density (TD ratio) detected by
the ATR Sensor at ATR control from the target value are shown.
Sharp change in values may indicate ATR Sensor disconnection/failure, whereas gradual change
in values may indicate failure in toner supply system.
Use Case When checking the toner density in the Developing Unit at low density or fogging deterioration
Unit %
Appropriate Target Value -300 - 300
Unit
DENS-M-H 2 Dspl M-clr TD ratio diff log: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the latest 8 logs in which deviations (%) of M-color toner density (TD ratio) detected by
Unit %
Unit
DENS-C-H 2 Dspl C-clr TD ratio diff log: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the latest 8 logs in which deviations (%) of C-color toner density (TD ratio) detected by
Unit %
Unit
DS-S-Y-H 2 Dspl of Y-color patch image density log

Detail To display the latest 8 Y-color patch image density log data.
It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc.
Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in the Registration Patch Sensor, shutter or laser,
whereas gradual change may indicate failure in toner supply system.
This is particularly caused by the Registration Patch Sensor.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of E020
DS-S-M-H 2 Dspl of M-color patch image density log

Detail To display the latest 8 M-color patch image density log data.
598
8. Service Mode
DS-S-C-H 2 Dspl of C-color patch image density log
Detail To display the latest 8 C-color patch image density log data.
DS-S-K-H 2 Dspl of Bk-color patch image density log

Detail To display the latest 8 Bk-color patch image density log data.
SPL-LG-Y 2 Display of Y-color toner supply log

Detail To display the latest 8 Y-color toner supply log data.
Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper.
Use Case When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence, low density or fogging deterioration
SPL-LG-M 2 Display of M-color toner supply log

Detail To display the latest 8 M-color toner supply log data.
SPL-LG-C 2 Display of C-color toner supply log

Detail To display the latest 8 C-color toner supply log data.
P-D-P-Y 2 Dspl rear side (Y/M) drk crrnt (Pwave)

Detail To display the Y/M-color dark current (P-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor (Rear).
At low density or fogging deterioration, use this item to check whether there is a problem in the
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear).
Use Case At low density or fogging deterioration
599
8. Service Mode
P-D-P-C 2 Dspl front side (C/Bk) drk crrnt (Pwave)
Detail To display the C/Bk-color dark current (P-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor (Front).
Registration Patch Sensor (Front).
P-B-P-Y 2 Dspl ITB rear side base intnsty (Pwave)

Detail To display the ITB background light intensity (P-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor
(Rear).
P-B-P-C 2 Dspl ITB front side base intnsty (Pwave)

Detail To display the ITB background light intensity (P-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor
(Front).
P-B-S-Y 2 Dspl ITB rear side base intnsty (Swave)

Detail To display the ITB background light intensity (S-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor
(Rear).
P-B-S-C 2 Dspl ITB front side base intnsty (Swave)

Detail To display the ITB background light intensity (S-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor
(Front).
P-D-S-Y 2 Dspl rear side (Y/M) drk crrnt (Swave)

Detail To display the Y/M-color dark current (S-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor (Rear).
600
8. Service Mode
P-D-S-C 2 Dspl front side (C/Bk) drk crrnt (Swave)
Detail To display the C/Bk-color dark current (S-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor (Front).
DENS-K-H 2 Dspl Bk-clr TD ratio diff log: ATR ctrl

Detail To display the latest 8 logs in which deviations (%) of Bk-color toner density (TD ratio) detected
by the ATR Sensor at ATR control from the target value are shown.
Unit %
Unit
SPL-LG-K 2 Display of Bk-color toner supply log

Detail To display the latest 8 Bk-color toner supply log data.
Y-LED-DA 1 Dspl rear side Patch Sensor intensity

Detail To display the LED light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor (Rear).
If the value is out of the appropriate range, clean the window of the Registration Patch Sensor. If
the problem is not solved, it is considered as a failure of the sensor.
Use Case When an error related to the Patch Sensor occurs
C-LED-DA 1 Dspl front side Patch Sensor intensity

Detail To display the LED light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor (Front).
If the value is out of the appropriate range, clean the window of the Registration Patch Sensor. If
the problem is not solved, it is considered as a failure of the sensor.
Use Case When an error related to the Patch Sensor occurs
601
8. Service Mode
■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC
ENV-TR 1 Dspl of environment: sec trns ATVC ctrl
Detail To display the environment (moisture content) at the time of the latest secondary transfer ATVC
control execution.
Use Case When adjusting the paper allotted voltage in secondary transfer ATVC control
1: Low humidity, 2: Normal humidity, 3: High humidity
LPOWER-Y 2 Display of Y-color laser light intensity

Detail To display the Y-color laser light intensity in real-time.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure
Display/Adj/Set Range 00 to FF
Appropriate Target Value 50 - FF
LPOWER-M 2 Display of M-color laser light intensity

Detail To display the M-color laser light intensity in real-time.
LPOWER-C 2 Display of C-color laser light intensity

Detail To display the C-color laser light intensity in real-time.
LPOWER-K 2 Display of Bk-clr laser light intensity

Detail To display the Bk-color laser light intensity in real-time.
TNRB-IDY 1 Display of Y-color Toner Container ID

Detail To display the ID of Y-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine.
Use Case When checking whether the barcode ID on the Toner Container is read correctly
Display/Adj/Set Range 12-digit decimal number
TNRB-IDM 1 Display of M-color Toner Container ID

Detail To display the ID of M-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine.
602
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC
TNRB-IDC 1 Display of C-color Toner Container ID
Detail To display the ID of C-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine.
TNRB-IDK 1 Display of Bk-color Toner Container ID

Detail To display the ID of Bk-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine.
SD-INFO 2 For R&D

STC-REC 1 Check High Consumption Alarm Send Status
Detail To express whether High Consumption Alarm is sent or not with 0 and 1.
Use Case - When checking whether High Consumption Alarm is sent or not
Adj/Set/Operate Method Display only
Caution The value returns to 0 only in the following cases:
- When performing COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CNT-DCON
- When performing "Initialize All Data/Settings"
- When the DC Controller is replaced
0: Transmission disabled, 1: Transmission enabled
1st column: Toner (Y)
2nd column: Toner (M)
3rd column: Toner (C)
4th column: Toner (K)
5th column: Waste Toner Container
6th column: Fixing Web
7th to 8th column: Spare
Default Value 0
■ HT-C
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HT-C
TGT-A-Y 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y-color target VL
Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto
gradation adjustment (reset the target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not corrected.
Use Case When hue variation occurs
TGT-A-M 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen A M-color target VL

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
603
8. Service Mode
TGT-A-C 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen A C-color target VL
Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
TGT-A-K 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen A Bk-color target VL

Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
TGT-B-Y 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen B Y-color target VL

Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
TGT-B-M 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen B M-color target VL

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
TGT-B-C 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen B C-color target VL

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
TGT-B-K 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen B Bk-color target VL

Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
604
8. Service Mode
TGT-C-Y 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen C Y-color target VL
Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
TGT-C-M 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen C M-color target VL

Detail To display the M-color patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
TGT-C-C 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen C C-color target VL

Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
TGT-C-K 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen C Bk-color target VL

Detail To display the Bk-color patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
SUM-A-Y 2 For R&D

SUM-A-M 2 For R&D
SUM-A-C 2 For R&D
SUM-A-K 2 For R&D
SUM-B-Y 2 For R&D
SUM-B-M 2 For R&D
SUM-B-C 2 For R&D
SUM-B-K 2 For R&D
SUM-C-Y 2 For R&D
SUM-C-M 2 For R&D
SUM-C-C 2 For R&D
SUM-C-K 2 For R&D
SGNL-A-Y 2 For R&D
SGNL-A-M 2 For R&D
605
8. Service Mode
SGNL-A-C 2 For R&D
SGNL-A-K 2 For R&D
SGNL-B-Y 2 For R&D
SGNL-B-M 2 For R&D
SGNL-B-C 2 For R&D
SGNL-B-K 2 For R&D
SGNL-C-Y 2 For R&D
SGNL-C-M 2 For R&D
SGNL-C-K 2 For R&D
SGNL-C-C 2 For R&D
DLTA-A-Y 2 For R&D
DLTA-A-M 2 For R&D
DLTA-A-C 2 For R&D
DLTA-A-K 2 For R&D
DLTA-B-Y 2 For R&D
DLTA-B-M 2 For R&D
DLTA-B-C 2 For R&D
DLTA-B-K 2 For R&D
DLTA-C-Y 2 For R&D
DLTA-C-M 2 For R&D
DLTA-C-C 2 For R&D
DLTA-C-K 2 For R&D
I/O
For Platform version 3.3 and later, this item is for R&D use only and not for actual use.
The I/O information can be found in service mode > SITUATION > Sensor Check.
606
8. Service Mode
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

■ ADJ-XY
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY
ADJ-X 1 Adj start pstn in book mode: vert scan
Detail To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning
direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value
of service label.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJ-Y 1 Adj start pstn in book mode: horz scan

Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading.
of service label.
Decrease the value when the non-image width is larger than the standard value.
Increase the value when out of original area is copied.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position is moved to the rear side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader -related RAM data
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
607
8. Service Mode
ADJ-S 1 Adjustment of Reader shading position
Detail To adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when reading the White Plate
on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass.
When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute RDSHDPOS and write the value of this item in the
service label.
When clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the reading position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When black lines/white lines appear
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
- When clearing the Reader-related RAM data
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RDSHDPOS
Unit
ADJ-Y-DF 1 Adj start pstn: stream read, horz scan

Detail To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at stream reading.
of service label.
The setting is applied to only the image on the front side in the case of DADF (1-path model) or
the images on both the front and back sides in the case of DADF (reverse model).
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
STRD-POS 1 Adj Scanner Unit pstn: stream, feed way

Detail To adjust the position of the Scanner Unit on the Reader side in feed direction at stream reading.
of service label.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
Unit
608
8. Service Mode
ADJ-X-MG 1 Fine adj img ratio: book mode, vert scan
Detail To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at copyboard
reading.
of service label.
As the value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01 %.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJY-DF2 1 Adj start pstn: stream, horz scan, back

Detail To adjust the back side image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at stream
reading using the DADF (1-path).
of service label.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD
W-PLT-X 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (X) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data/replacing the
Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Default Value 8271
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y/Z
609
8. Service Mode
W-PLT-Y 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Y) entry
Detail To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate.
Default Value 8735
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Z
W-PLT-Z 1 Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Z) entry

Detail To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate.
Default Value 9418
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y
SH-TRGT 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: Copyboard

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode.
When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute DF-WLVL3, and write the value which is automatically
set in the service label.
Use Case - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader -related RAM data
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Default Value 1126
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3
100-RG 1 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct: front

Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
of service label.
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
610
8. Service Mode
100-GB 1 Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: front
Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
of service label.
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
DFTAR-R 1 Shading target VL (R) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Red of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute DF-WLVL1 and DF-
WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the DADF (1-path model) is installed,
whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF (reverse
model) is installed.
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side)
Default Value 1159
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1/WLVL2
DFTAR-G 1 Shading target VL (G) entry: front side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Green of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
Default Value 1189
611
8. Service Mode
DFTAR-B 1 Shading target VL (B) entry: front side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
Default Value 1209
MTF2-M1 1 MTF value 1 entry: horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 1 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of
the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Use Case - When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
Default Value 50
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
612
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
613
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
614
8. Service Mode
MTF2-S1 1 MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, front side
Detail To enter the setting value 1 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
615
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
616
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
617
8. Service Mode
100DF2GB 2 Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: back
Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
of service label.
The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
100DF2RG 2 Img Sensr RG color displace crrct: back

Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the
of service label.
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH2R2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (R) entry: front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Caution When the Copyboard or DADF (reverse model) is installed, the setting of this item is disabled.
Default Value 2000
Unit
618
8. Service Mode
DFCH2R10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry:front
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH2B2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B) entry: front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
DFCH2B10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B) entry:front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
619
8. Service Mode
DFCH2G2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: front
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.2 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
DFCH2G10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (G) entry:front

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
MTF-M1 1 MTF value 1 entry: horz scan, back side

the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Default Value 50
Unit
620
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
621
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
622
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
MTF-S1 1 MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, back side

Default Value 50
Unit
623
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
624
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
625
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
DFCH-R2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (R) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
626
8. Service Mode
DFCH-R10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry: back
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH-B2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
DFCH-B10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Blue data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
627
8. Service Mode
DFCH-G2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: back
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.2 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
DFCH-G10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (G) entry: back

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
MTF2-M10 1 MTF value 10 entry:horz scan, front side

Detail To enter the setting value 10 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction
of the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Default Value 50
Unit
628
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
MTF2-S10 1 MTF value 10 entry:vert scan, front side

Default Value 50
Unit
629
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
MTF-M10 1 MTF value 10 entry:horz scan, back side

of the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Default Value 50
Unit
630
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
MTF-S10 1 MTF value 10 entry:vert scan, back side

Default Value 50
Unit
631
8. Service Mode
Default Value 50
Unit

Default Value 50
Unit
DFCH2K2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) entr: frt

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
632
8. Service Mode
DFCH2K10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: frt
Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
DFCH-K2 1 Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) entr: bck

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF
complex chart.
Default Value 2000
Unit
DFCH-K10 1 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: bck

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the back side of No.10 image in
DADF complex chart.
Default Value 0
Unit
633
8. Service Mode
DFTAR-BW 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: front
Detail To enter the B&W shading target value of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading.
Default Value 1209
Unit
DFTBK-G 1 Shading target VL (G) entry: back side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Green of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side), execute DF-WLVL1 and DF-
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (for back side)
Default Value 1136
DFTBK-B 1 Shading target VL (B) entry: back side

Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
Default Value 1126
634
8. Service Mode
DFTBK-R 1 Shading target VL (R) entry: back side
Detail To enter the shading target value of Red of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
Default Value 1156
DFTBK-BW 1 Shading target VL (B&W) entry: back

Detail To enter the B&W shading target value of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading.
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for back side)
Default Value 1126
■ IMG-REG
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG
REG-H-Y 1 Ruf adj Y-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan
Detail To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When Y-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution It is recommended to use this item from situation mode.
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
635
8. Service Mode
REG-H-C 1 Ruf adj C-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan
Detail To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When C-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-H-K 1 Ruf adj Bk-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When Bk-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-HS-Y 1 Fine adj Y-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel or less.
Use Case When Y-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Amount of Change per 1/16
Unit
REG-HS-C 1 Fine adj C-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel or less.
Use Case When C-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
636
8. Service Mode
REG-HS-K 1 Fine adj Bk-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan
Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of less than 1 pixel.
Use Case When Bk-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-V-Y 1 Ruf adj Y-clr wrt start pstn:vert scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When Y-color displacement in vertical scanning direction occurs
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-V-C 1 Ruf adj C-clr wrt start pstn:vert scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When C-color displacement in vertical scanning direction occurs
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-V-K 1 Ruf adj Bk-clr wrt start pstn:vert scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When Bk-color displacement in vertical scanning direction occurs
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
637
8. Service Mode
REG-H-M 1 Ruf adj M-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan
Detail To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When M-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-V-M 1 Ruf adj M-clr wrt start pstn:vert scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the vertical scanning direction in increments
of 1 pixel.
Use Case When M-color displacement in vertical scanning direction occurs
Unit line
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-HS-M 1 Fine adj M-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan

Detail To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments
of less than 1 pixel.
Use Case When M-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
Unit pixel
Default Value 0
Unit
MAG-H 1 Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio: horz scan

Detail To adjust the standard magnification ratio in the horizontal scanning direction by increasing/
decreasing the number of pixels.
As the value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.
The adjustment result is reflected to all colors.
All correction values registered in the media list are proportionally changed.
Use Case When adjusting the standard magnification ratio due to parts replacement or environmental
change, etc.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
638
8. Service Mode
MAG-V 1 Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio: vert scan
Detail To adjust the standard magnification ratio in the vertical scanning direction by changing the
Polygon Motor speed.
As the value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.
Use Case When adjusting the standard magnification ratio due to parts replacement or environmental
change, etc.
2) Execute auto color displacement correction.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Mode
Unit
DRM-SPD1 1 Adj of Y/M/C-color Photo-s Drum speed

Detail To adjust the rotation speed of the Y/M/C-color Photosensitive Drum at image formation.
Enter the setting value according to the identification mark of the ITB Unit.
Use Case - When replacing the ITB Unit
- When clearing RAM data
-5: -0.25%, -4: -0.20%, -3: -0.15%, -2: -0.10%, -1: -0.05%, 0: 0.00%, +1: +0.05%, +2: +0.10%, +3:
+0.15%, +4: +0.20%, +5: +0.25%
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
LS-H-YL 1 Adj Y-C copy ratio correction offset 1

Detail To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between Y-color and C-color.
Enter the value of a C-Y color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left
image group of C-Y color printed on the corresponding PG.
The setting is reflected at the next printing.
For details, refer to the situation mode or "Adjustment" in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual.
Use Case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image (especially at installation or at
replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Execute LS-INT-H.
2) Output the corresponding PG.
3) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.
Caution When making the adjustment, be sure to also adjust the settings of LS-H-
YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> LS-INT-H
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
639
8. Service Mode
LS-H-YC 1 Adj Y-C copy ratio correction offset 2
YL/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
LS-H-YR 1 Adj Y-C copy ratio correction offset 3

YL/YC/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YC/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
LS-H-ML 1 Adj M-C copy ratio correction offset 1

Detail To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between M-color and C-color.
Enter the value of a C-M color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the
left image group of C-M color printed on the corresponding PG.
YL/YC/YR/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YC/YR/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
640
8. Service Mode
LS-H-MC 1 Adj M-C copy ratio correction offset 2
YL/YC/YR/ML/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YC/YR/ML/MR/KL/KC/KR
LS-H-MR 1 Adj M-C copy ratio correction offset 3

YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/KL/KC/KR
LS-H-KL 1 Adj Bk-C copy ratio correction offset 1

Detail To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between Bk-color and C-color.
Enter the value of a C-Bk color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the
left image group of C-Bk color printed on the corresponding PG.
YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KC/KR
641
8. Service Mode
LS-H-KC 1 Adj Bk-C copy ratio correction offset 2
YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KR
LS-H-KR 1 Adj Bk-C copy ratio correction offset 3

YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC
LS-V-YL 1 Adj Y-C distortion correction offset 1

Detail To adjust the offset of distortion correction between Y-color and C-color.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Execute LS-INT-V.
Caution When making the adjustment, be sure to also adjust the settings of LS-V-
YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> LS-INT-V
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
642
8. Service Mode
LS-V-YC 1 Adj Y-C distortion correction offset 2
YL/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
LS-V-YR 1 Adj Y-C distortion correction offset 3

YL/YC/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YC/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
LS-V-ML 1 Adj M-C distortion correction offset 1

Detail To adjust the offset of distortion correction between M-color and C-color.
YL/YC/YR/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YC/YR/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
643
8. Service Mode
LS-V-MC 1 Adj M-C distortion correction offset 2
YL/YC/YR/ML/MR/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YC/YR/ML/MR/KL/KC/KR
LS-V-MR 1 Adj M-C distortion correction offset 3

YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/KL/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/KL/KC/KR
LS-V-KL 1 Adj Bk-C distortion correction offset 1

Detail To adjust the offset of distortion correction between Bk-color and C-color.
YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KC/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KC/KR
644
8. Service Mode
LS-V-KC 1 Adj Bk-C distortion correction offset 2
YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KR.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KR
LS-V-KR 1 Adj Bk-C distortion correction offset 3

YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC.
Default Value 0
COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC
645
8. Service Mode
SLOP-Y 2 Adjustment of image squareness
Detail To adjust skew of image (squareness) in the vertical scanning direction by adjusting skew of Y-
color laser in the vertical scanning direction digitally.
By performing auto color displacement correction after this adjustment, adjustment is made for
other colors in accordance with adjustment for Y-color.
Use Case When corners of an image are not square
3) Execute auto color displacement correction.
Caution - Be sure to perform auto color displacement correction after adjustment. If the setting value is
changed dramatically, be sure to perform auto color displacement correction twice.
- When setting a value that is either -200 or less or 200 or more, be sure to change the value a
little at a time while checking the correction result because accuracy of color displacement
correction is decreased.
Unit um
Appropriate Target Value 0
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Mode
Unit
■ DENS
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS
SGNL-Y 1 ATR patch Y-clr toner dens tgt VL entry
Detail To enter the Y-color toner density target value of ATR patch to be formed on the ITB.
The Y-color toner density is detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Rear).
The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (Y) is initialized.
Use Case When checking the value before replacement of the DC Controller PCB/clearing of RAM data and
then re-entering the value after the processing is done
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution When INISET-Y is executed, the value is rewritten.
Default Value 350 (It may vary by initialization of the Developing Unit when clearing RAM data.)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y
SGNL-M 1 ATR patch M-clr toner dens tgt VL entry

Detail To enter the M-color toner density target value of ATR patch to be formed on the ITB.
The M-color toner density is detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Rear).
The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (M) is initialized.
Caution When INISET-M is executed, the value is rewritten.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M
646
8. Service Mode
SGNL-C 1 ATR patch C-clr toner dens tgt VL entry
Detail To enter the C-color toner density target value of ATR patch to be formed on the ITB.
The C-color toner density is detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front).
The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (C) is initialized.
Caution When INISET-C is executed, the value is rewritten.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C
REF-Y 1 Y-color toner density target VL entry

Detail To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (Y) of ATR control after replacement of the DC
Controller PCB/clearing of RAM data.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/4
REF-M 1 M-color toner density target VL entry

Detail To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (M) of ATR control after replacement of the DC
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/4
REF-C 1 C-color toner density target VL entry

Detail To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (C) of ATR control after replacement of the DC
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C/4
SGNL-K 1 ATR patch Bk-clr toner dens tgt VL entry

Detail To enter the Bk-color toner density target value of ATR patch to be formed on the ITB.
The Bk-color toner density is detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front).
The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (Bk) is initialized.
Caution When INISET-K is executed, the value is rewritten.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K
647
8. Service Mode
HLMT-PTY 2 Adj Y-clr toner dens tgt VL upper limit
Detail To adjust the upper limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Y).
As the value is incremented by 1, the upper limit is increased by 0.5%.
Increase the value when a density failure/coarseness occurs, and decrease the value when
fogging/scattering occurs.
In principle, the value should be the same as that of LLMT-PTY.
Use Case When an image failure (density failure, coarseness, fogging, carrier adherence, scattering, etc.)
occurs
Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> LLMT-PTY
Unit
HLMT-PTM 2 Adj M-clr toner dens tgt VL upper limit

Detail To adjust the upper limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (M).
In principle, the value should be the same as that of LLMT-PTM.
occurs
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> LLMT-PTM
Unit
HLMT-PTC 2 Adj C-clr toner dens tgt VL upper limit

Detail To adjust the upper limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (C).
In principle, the value should be the same as that of LLMT-PTC.
occurs
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> LLMT-PTC
Unit
648
8. Service Mode
LLMT-PTY 2 Adj Y-clr toner dens tgt VL lower limit
Detail To adjust the lower limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Y).
As the value is incremented by 1, the lower limit is increased by 0.5%.
In principle, the value should be the same as that of HLMT-PTY.
occurs
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> HLMT-PTY
Unit
LLMT-PTM 2 Adj M-clr toner dens tgt VL lower limit

Detail To adjust the lower limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (M).
In principle, the value should be the same as that of HLMT-PTM.
occurs
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> HLMT-PTM
Unit
LLMT-PTC 2 Adj C-clr toner dens tgt VL lower limit

Detail To adjust the lower limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (C).
In principle, the value should be the same as that of HLMT-PTC.
occurs
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> HLMT-PTC
Unit
T-SPLY-Y 2 For R&D

T-SPLY-M 2 For R&D
T-SPLY-C 2 For R&D
649
8. Service Mode
T-SPLY-K 2 For R&D
DMAX-Y 2 Adj D-max ctrl Y-color dens target VL
Detail An image failure may occur because the density target value of D-max control becomes out of the
setting table due to environment change.
Adjust the offset of the Y-color density target value of D-max control.
Use Case When an image failure occurs due to environment change
Default Value 0
DMAX-M 2 Adj D-max ctrl M-color dens target VL

Adjust the offset of the M-color density target value of D-max control.
Default Value 0
DMAX-C 2 Adj D-max ctrl C-color dens target VL

Adjust the offset of the C-color density target value of D-max control.
Default Value 0
P-TG-Y 2 Adj of Y-color ATR patch dens target VL

Detail To adjust the offset of the Y-color ATR patch density target value.
When the target value determined upon initialization of the Developing Unit is changed, the TD
ratio is also changed.
Decrease the value when density increase occurs, and increase the value when fogging occurs.
Use Case When an image failure (density failure, fogging, carrier adherence, etc.) occurs
2) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times.
3) Execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
Caution Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density. If the target value is changed,
fogging may get worse.
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation> Full Adjust
Mode
Unit
650
8. Service Mode
P-TG-M 2 Adj of M-color ATR patch dens target VL
Detail To adjust the offset of the M-color ATR patch density target value.
Default Value 0
Mode
Unit
P-TG-C 2 Adj of C-color ATR patch dens target VL

Detail To adjust the offset of the C-color ATR patch density target value.
Default Value 0
Mode
Unit
P-TG-K 2 Adj of Bk-color ATR patch dens target VL

Detail To adjust the offset of the Bk-color ATR patch density target value.
Default Value 0
Mode
Unit
651
8. Service Mode
DMAX-K 2 Adj D-max ctrl Bk-color dens target VL
Adjust the offset of the Bk-color density target value of D-max control.
Default Value It differs according to the location.
HLMT-PTK 2 Adj Bk-clr toner dens tgt VL upper limit

Detail To adjust the upper limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk).
In principle, the value should be the same as that of LLMT-PTK.
occurs
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> LLMT-PTK
Unit
LLMT-PTK 2 Adj Bk-clr toner dens tgt VL lower limit

Detail To adjust the lower limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk).
In principle, the value should be the same as that of HLMT-PTK.
occurs
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> HLMT-PTK
Unit
REF-K 2 Bk-color toner density target VL entry

Detail To enter the target value of the ATR Sensor (Bk) of ATR control after replacement of the DC
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K/4
652
8. Service Mode
CONT-Y 1 ATR Sensor (Y) control voltage entry
Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (Y).
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Caution The value changes if the Developing Unit is initialized (INISET-Y/4).
Unit V
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/4
CONT-M 1 ATR Sensor (M) control voltage entry

Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (M).
Caution The value changes if the Developing Unit is initialized (INISET-M/4).
Unit V
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/4
CONT-C 1 ATR Sensor (C) control voltage entry

Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (C).
Caution The value changes if the Developing Unit is initialized (INISET-C/4).
Unit V
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C/4
CONT-K 1 ATR Sensor (Bk) control voltage entry

Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (Bk).
Caution The value changes if the Developing Unit is initialized (INISET-K/4).
Unit V
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K/4
653
8. Service Mode
D-Y-LVL 1 Entry of ATR patch Y-clr correction VL
Detail To enter the Y-color correction value of ATR patch.
The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (Y) is initialized.
Caution When INISET-Y is executed, the value is rewritten.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y
D-M-LVL 1 Entry of ATR patch M-clr correction VL

Detail To enter the M-color correction value of ATR patch.
The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (M) is initialized.
Caution When INISET-M is executed, the value is rewritten.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M
D-C-LVL 1 Entry of ATR patch C-clr correction VL

Detail To enter the C-color correction value of ATR patch.
The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (C) is initialized.
Caution When INISET-C is executed, the value is rewritten.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C
D-K-LVL 1 Entry of ATR patch Bk-clr correction VL

Detail To enter the Bk-color correction value of ATR patch.
The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (Bk) is initialized.
Caution When INISET-K is executed, the value is rewritten.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K
654
8. Service Mode
PALPHA-F 1 Enter Rgst Patch Sensor (Front) alpha VL
Detail To enter the correction coefficient alpha value of the Registration Patch Sensor (Front).
When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, enter the value written on the label included
in the package of a new one and write the value in the service label.
Use Case - When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density
- When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data (When backup/restoration cannot be
performed)
Caution After replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, enter a series of values written on the label,
and execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment/quick adjustment).
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> PALPHA-R, POFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, SOFST-F1/F2/R1/R2
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation> Full Adjust, Quick Adjust
Mode
PALPHA-R 1 Enter Rgst Patch Sensor (Rear) alpha VL

Detail To enter the correction coefficient alpha value of the Registration Patch Sensor (Rear).
Use Case - When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density
- When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit
performed)
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> PALPHA-F, POFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, SOFST-F1/F2/R1/R2
Mode
POFST-F1 1 Pch Sns (F) light-RX charcs: weak, Pwave

Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light (P-wave) when the light intensity of the
Registration Patch Sensor (Front) is weak.
Use Case - When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit
performed)
Unit mV
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> POFST-F2/R1/R2, SOFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, PALPHA-F/R
Mode
Unit
655
8. Service Mode
POFST-R1 1 Pch Sns (R) light-RX charcs: weak, Pwave
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) is weak.
performed)
Unit mV
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> POFST-F1/F2/R2, SOFST-F1/F2/R1/F2, PALPHA-F/R
Mode
Unit
SOFST-F1 1 Pch Sns (F) light-RX charcs: weak, Swave

Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light (S-wave) when the light intensity of the
Registration Patch Sensor (Front) is weak.
performed)
Unit mV
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> POFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, SOFST-F2/R1/R2, PALPHA-F/R
Mode
Unit
656
8. Service Mode
SOFST-R1 1 Pch Sns (R) light-RX charcs: weak, Swave
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) is weak.
performed)
Unit mV
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> POFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, SOFST-F1/F2/R2, PALPHA-F/R
Mode
Unit
POFST-F2 1 Pch Sns (F) light-RX charcs: strg, Pwave

Registration Patch Sensor (Front) is strong.
performed)
Unit mV
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> POFST-F1/R1/R2, SOFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, PALPHA-F/R
Mode
Unit
657
8. Service Mode
POFST-R2 1 Pch Sns (R) light-RX charcs: strg, Pwave
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) is strong.
performed)
Unit mV
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> POFST-F1/F2/R1, SOFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, PALPHA-F/R
Mode
Unit
SOFST-F2 1 Pch Sns (F) light-RX charcs: strg, Swave

Registration Patch Sensor (Front) is strong.
performed)
Unit mV
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> POFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, SOFST-F1/R1/R2, PALPHA-F/R
Mode
Unit
658
8. Service Mode
SOFST-R2 1 Pch Sns (R) light-RX charcs: strg, Swave
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) is strong.
performed)
Unit mV
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> POFST-F1/F2/R1/R2, SOFST-F1/F2/R1, PALPHA-F/R
Mode
Unit
■ BLANK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK
BLANK-T 1 Adjustment of leading edge margin
Detail To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel.
Use Case - Upon user's request (to reduce the margin)
- When increasing the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Unit pixel
Default Value 94
Supplement/Memo The length of a pixel differs depending on the print resolution (600 dpi: 0.0423 mm, 1200 dpi:
0.0212 mm).
Unit
BLANK-L 1 Adjustment of left edge margin

Detail To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper.
Unit pixel
Default Value 59
0.0212 mm).
Unit
659
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK
BLANK-R 1 Adjustment of right edge margin
Detail To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper.
Unit pixel
Default Value 59
0.0212 mm).
Unit
BLANK-B 1 Adjustment of trailing edge margin

Detail To adjust the trailing edge margin of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 0.0423
mm.
Use Case - When reducing the margin upon user's request
Unit pixel
Default Value 59
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> BLANK> BLANK-B2
Supplement/Memo Adjust the trailing edge margin of thin paper/recycled paper 2 with BLANK-B2.
Unit
BLANK-B2 2 Adj of trailing edge margin:thin/rcycl 2

Detail To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of thin paper1/2 and recycled paper 2.
Increase the value when blur at leading edge/wrinkles occur with thin paper 1/2 and recycled paper
2.
A value to which the setting value of BLANK-B is added is applied as the margin.
Use Case - When increasing the margin of thin paper 1/2 and recycled paper 2 upon user's request
- When blur at leading edge/wrinkles occur with thin paper 1/2 and recycled paper 2
Caution Be sure to set a value where the setting value of BLANK-B is deducted from the target value.
Unit pixel
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> BLANK> BLANK-B
0.0212 mm).
Blur at leading edge: A phenomenon that the image leading edge on the 2nd side is blurred at 2-
sided print. It is likely to occur on image with high density. Contact of curled portion of paper leading
edge with the Fixing Film causes the phenomenon. When the degree of curl is increased, it is
accompanied with wrinkles.
Adjust the trailing edge margin of paper other than thin paper 1/2 and recycled paper 2 with BLANK-
B.
Unit
660
8. Service Mode
■ V-CONT
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT
VCONT-Y 2 Adj of Y-color contrast potential
Detail To adjust the contrast potential for Y-color.
As the value is changed by 1, the contrast potential is changed by 5 V.
+: Image becomes darker.
-: Image becomes lighter.
When the value is too large, paper winds around the Fixing Roller or a transfer failure occurs.
In principle, adjustment of the density should be made by auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment). However, if the error still occurs, use this item as a temporary measure.
Use Case When density failure occurs even when auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) is executed
Caution - Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly.
- The density is returned to the default when auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) is
executed.
- The density is returned to the default when image density adjustment is executed during printing.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-M/C/K
Mode
Unit
VCONT-M 2 Adj of M-color contrast potential

Detail To adjust the contrast potential for M-color.
executed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y/C/K
Mode
Unit
661
8. Service Mode
VCONT-C 2 Adj of C-color contrast potential
Detail To adjust the contrast potential for C-color.
executed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y/M/K
Mode
Unit
VCONT-K 2 Adj of Bk-color contrast potential

Detail To adjust the contrast potential for Bk-color.
executed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y/M/C
Mode
Unit
662
8. Service Mode
VBACK-Y 2 Adj Y-color fog removal potential:1/1SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y-color at 1/1 speed.
As the value is changed by 1, the fogging removal potential is changed by 10 V.
+: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased.
-: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased.
Use Case When an image failure (fogging, white/black spots due to carrier adherence) occurs at 1/1 speed
Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-M/C/K
Mode
Unit
VBACK-M 2 Adj M-color fog removal potential:1/1SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M-color at 1/1 speed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y/C/K
Mode
Unit
VBACK-C 2 Adj C-color fog removal potential:1/1SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C-color at 1/1 speed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y/M/K
Mode
Unit
663
8. Service Mode
VBACK-K 2 Adj Bk-clr fog removal potential:1/1SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk-color at 1/1 speed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y/M/C
Mode
Unit
VBACK2-Y 2 Adj Y-color fog removal potential:1/2SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y-color at 1/2 speed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-M/C/K
Mode
Unit
VBACK2-M 2 Adj M-color fog removal potential:1/2SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M-color at 1/2 speed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y/C/K
Mode
Unit
664
8. Service Mode
VBACK2-C 2 Adj C-color fog removal potential:1/2SPD
Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C-color at 1/2 speed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y/M/K
Mode
Unit
VBACK2-K 2 Adj Bk-clr fog removal potential:1/2SPD

Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk-color at 1/2 speed.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y/M/C
Mode
Unit
■ PASCAL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-PY2 1 Adj Y-color density at test print read
Detail To adjust the offset of Y-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
of the Sub Station service label.
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Default Value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment
665
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL
OFST-PM2 1 Adj M-color density at test print read
Detail To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
OFST-PC2 1 Adj C-color density at test print read

Detail To adjust the offset of C-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
OFST-PK2 1 Adj Bk-color density at test print read

Detail To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
■ COLOR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR
ADJ-Y 1 Adjustment of color balance for Y-color
Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for Y-color when the density of Y-color varies
between devices.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker. If the value is too large, a transfer failure and/or a
fixing failure occurs.
Use Case Upon user's request (to reduce density difference between devices)
Default Value 0
666
8. Service Mode
ADJ-M 1 Adjustment of color balance for M-color
Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for M-color when the density of M-color varies
between devices.
Default Value 0
ADJ-C 1 Adjustment of color balance for C-color

Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for C-color when the density of C-color varies
between devices.
Default Value 0
ADJ-K 1 Adjustment of color balance for Bk-color

Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk-color when the density of Bk-color varies
between devices.
Default Value 0
OFST-Y 1 Adj Y-clr brit area dens&color balance

Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Y-color.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Decrease the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a
document is dark and increase the value when the density of a document is light.
Decrease the value when removal of the background is not performed correctly and a fogging-like
image appears.
This setting is linked with [Correct Density], [Correct Shading] and [Auto Correct Color Mismatch]
in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case - When the background of a document cannot be read correctly
- When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging-like image appears
Default Value 0
667
8. Service Mode
OFST-M 1 Adj M-clr brit area dens&color balance
Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M-color.
image appears.
Default Value 0
OFST-C 1 Adj C-clr brit area dens&color balance

Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of C-color.
image appears.
Default Value 0
OFST-K 1 Adj Bk-clr brit area dens&color balance

Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk-color.
image appears.
Default Value 0
668
8. Service Mode
LD-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y low dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y-color for copy operation.
A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in the main menu to the
setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
e.g.: When the value of this item is "-4" and the value of [Fine Adjust Density] is "5", the density
value is "1".
Note that the density value must be within the rage from -8 to 8.
e.g.: When the value of this item is "7" and the value of [Fine Adjust Density] is "5", the density
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Copy> Options> Color Balance> Fine Adjust Density
Mode Access Stored Files> Mail Box> Print> Change Print Settings> Options> Color Balance> Fine
Adjust Density
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Color Balance> Non-Coated> Fine Adjust
Density
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Color Balance> Coated> Fine Adjust Density
Supplement/Memo In [Fine Adjust Density] in [Adjustment/Maintenance], the same value is set as the density for copy
operation and file storage.
In [Fine Adjust Density] under [Copy] and [Access Stored Files] in the main menu, the density value
can be set individually. Although the setting value of this item is just one value, the density may
differ for copy operation and file storage.
LD-OFS-M 2 Adj M low dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
669
8. Service Mode
LD-OFS-C 2 Adj C low dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
LD-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk low dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
670
8. Service Mode
MD-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y mid dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
MD-OFS-M 2 Adj M mid dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
671
8. Service Mode
MD-OFS-C 2 Adj C mid dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
MD-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk mid dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
672
8. Service Mode
HD-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y hi dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
HD-OFS-M 2 Adj M hi dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
673
8. Service Mode
HD-OFS-C 2 Adj C hi dens area clr balance: copy
Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
HD-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk hi dens area clr balance: copy

Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk-color for copy operation.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
674
8. Service Mode
PL-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y-clr low dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y-color at PDL print.
In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box, a value obtained by adding
the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in [Access Stored Files] to the setting value of this item
is applied as the actual density value.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PL-OFS-M 2 Adj M-clr low dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
675
8. Service Mode
PL-OFS-C 2 Adj C-clr low dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PL-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk-clr low dens area clr balance:PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
676
8. Service Mode
PM-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y-clr mid dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PM-OFS-M 2 Adj M-clr mid dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
677
8. Service Mode
PM-OFS-C 2 Adj C-clr mid dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PM-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk-clr mid dens area clr balance:PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
678
8. Service Mode
PH-OFS-Y 2 Adj Y-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PH-OFS-M 2 Adj M-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
679
8. Service Mode
PH-OFS-C 2 Adj C-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL
Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
PH-OFS-K 2 Adj Bk-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL

Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk-color at PDL print.
value is "1".
value is "8".
Default Value 0
Adjust Density
Density
680
8. Service Mode
■ HV-TR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR
TR-PPR1 2 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 1
Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 1.
Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed
side that are set in TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1 and TR-DUP1. When this condition is satisfied, the paper
allotted voltage adjusted in TR-VL1 is applied at the time of secondary transfer.
Use Case When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs (mottled image/density loss due
to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image, etc.)
Caution The setting values 20 (1-sided coated paper 5) and 25 (2-sided coated paper 5) can be set only
when the Media Adjustment Kit is connected in the location where it can be used.
1: Plain paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2), 2: Plain paper 2 (76 to 90 g/m2)/Colored paper 1 (64 to 82 g/m2),
3: Plain paper 3 (91 to 105 g/m2)
4: Recycled paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2), 5: Recycled paper 2 (76 to 90 g/m2), 6: Recycled paper 3
(91 to 105 g/m2)
7: Thin paper 2 (52 to 59 g/m2), 8: Thin paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2)
9: Heavy paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2), 10: Heavy paper 2 (129 to 150 g/m2), 11: Heavy paper 3 (151
to 163 g/m2), 12: Heavy paper 4 (164 to 180 g/m2), 13: Heavy paper 5 (181 to 220 g/m2), 14:
Heavy paper 6 (221 to 256 g/m2), 15: Heavy paper 7 (257 to 300 g/m2)
16: 1-sided coated paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2), 17: 1-sided coated paper 2 (129 to 163 g/m2), 18:
1-sided coated paper 3 (164 to 220 g/m2), 19: 1-sided coated paper 4 (221 to 256 g/m2), 20: 1-
sided coated paper 5 (257 to 300 g/m2)
26: Tracing paper (64 to 99 g/m2), 27: Transparency (121 to 220 g/m2), 28: Envelope (75 to 105
g/m2), 29: Postcard (164 to 220 g/m2), 30: Label (118 to 185 g/m2), 31: Pre-punched paper (64
to 75 g/m2), 32: Bond paper (83 to 99 g/m2), 33: Not used
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-DUP1, TR-VL1, 2TR-OFF
Supplement/Memo Up to 16 combination patterns can be set in TR-VL1 to 16 (setting 1 to 16). When there is more
than one setting where all conditions (environment, paper type and color mode/feed side) are the
same, the setting with a smaller setting number is applied.
681
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
682
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
683
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
684
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
685
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
686
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
687
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
TR-ENV1 2 Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 1

Detail To set the environment (absolute moisture content) for setting 1.
Use Case When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs (mottled image/density loss due
1: Low humidity (absolute moisture content: 6.11 g/m3 or less), 2: Normal humidity (6.12 to 15.68
g/m3), 3: High humidity (15.69 g/m3 or higher)
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR1, TR-DUP1, TR-VL1, 2TR-OFF
688
8. Service Mode
Default Value 1

Default Value 1

Default Value 1
689
8. Service Mode
Default Value 1

Default Value 1

Default Value 1
690
8. Service Mode
Default Value 1
TR-DUP1 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side: set 1

Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 1.
The left digit of the setting value represents the color mode and the right digit represents the feed
side.
Use Case When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled image/density loss due to
excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid image, etc.)
Left digit (color mode)
1: Color mode (entire paper), 2: Black mode (entire paper), 3: Color/black mode (leading edge of
paper), 4: Color/black mode (trailing edge of paper)
Right digit (feed side)
1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided
Default Value 11
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-VL1, 2TR-OFF
691
8. Service Mode
side.
Default Value 11

side.
Default Value 11
692
8. Service Mode
side.
Default Value 11

side.
Default Value 11
693
8. Service Mode
side.
Default Value 11

side.
Default Value 11
694
8. Service Mode
side.
Default Value 11
1TR-TGY 2 Adj Y pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/1 speed

Detail To adjust the target current for Y-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/1 speed. Increase
the value when low-voltage mottled image occurs, and decrease the value when fogging occurs
(especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge).
The setting is reflected at the next primary transfer ATVC control.
Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs
2) Execute 1ATVC-EX.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TGM 2 Adj M pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/1 speed

Detail To adjust the target current for M-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/1 speed. Increase
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
695
8. Service Mode
1TR-TGC 2 Adj C pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/1 speed
Detail To adjust the target current for C-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/1 speed. Increase
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TGK1 2 Adj Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/1 speed

Detail To adjust the target current for Bk-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/1 speed. Increase
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
2TR-OFF 1 Uniform adj sec trn ATVC ppr allot voltg

Detail To uniformly adjust paper allotted voltage in secondary transfer ATVC control regardless of paper
type, 1st/2nd side or environment.
When transfer failure occurs on an image, increase/decrease the value in the -30 to 30 (-900 to
900 V) range in increments of 10 (300 V).
When white dots occur on an image, increase/decrease the value in the -100 to -10 (-3000 to -300
V) range in increments of 10 (300 V). When the value is decreased too much, transfer failure
occurs.
Use Case When similar image failures occur regardless of the conditions
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
696
8. Service Mode
1TR-TGY2 2 Adj Y pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed
Detail To adjust the target current for Y-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed.
Increase the value when low-voltage mottled image occurs, and decrease the value when fogging
occurs (especially in the 95 mm portion of the image leading edge).
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TGM2 2 Adj M pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed

Detail To adjust the target current for M-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TGC2 2 Adj C pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed

Detail To adjust the target current for C-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
697
8. Service Mode
T2TR-LNG 2 Adj of lead edge weak bias apply length
Detail To adjust the length (distance from the leading edge of paper) to apply leading edge weak bias.
Increase the value when white spots occur in a broad area of the leading edge of paper.
Use Case When an image failure (white spots at the leading edge) occurs
Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
B2TR-LNG 2 Adj of trail edge weak bias apply length

Detail To adjust the length (distance from the trailing edge of paper) to apply trailing edge weak bias.
Increase the value when white spots occur in a broad area of the trailing edge of paper.
Use Case When an image failure (white spots at the trailing edge) occurs
Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
1ATVCTMG 2 Adj pry trns ATVC ctrl exe intvl: 1/2SPD

Detail To adjust the intervals (the number of sheets) to execute primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2
speed.
Decrease the value if the condition of image failure occurrence caused by primary transfer is as
follows:
- It does not occur at 1/1 speed, but occurs at 1/2 speed.
- It is alleviated by executing primary transfer ATVC control.
- It is temporarily alleviated when continuing output, but it occurs again.
These indicate that primary transfer ATVC control is not executed at 1/2 speed.
Image failure can be alleviated by increasing the frequency to execute primary transfer ATVC
control, but productivity at 1/2 speed decreases.
Use Case When an image failure or blocky image at 50 mm intervals occurs at 1/2 speed
Caution As the value is smaller, productivity at 1/2 speed decreases. As the value is increased, productivity
is increased, but image failure may occur.
Unit sheet
Default Value 1000
Unit
698
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
699
8. Service Mode
TR-PPR10 2 Sec trn indiv setting paper type: set 10
Setting 10 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/
feed side that are set in TR-ENV10, TR-PPR10 and TR-DUP10. When this condition is satisfied,
the paper allotted voltage adjusted in TR-VL10 is applied at the time of secondary transfer.
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
700
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
701
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
702
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
703
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
704
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1
705
8. Service Mode
(91 to 105 g/m2)
Default Value 1

Default Value 1
706
8. Service Mode
TR-ENV10 2 Sec trn indiv setting environment:set 10
Default Value 1

Default Value 1

Default Value 1
707
8. Service Mode
Default Value 1

Default Value 1

Default Value 1
708
8. Service Mode
Default Value 1

side.
Default Value 11
709
8. Service Mode
TR-DUP10 2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side:set 10
side.
Default Value 11

side.
Default Value 11
710
8. Service Mode
side.
Default Value 11

side.
Default Value 11
711
8. Service Mode
side.
Default Value 11

side.
Default Value 11
712
8. Service Mode
side.
Default Value 11
TR-VL1 2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 1

Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 1.
allotted voltage adjusted here is applied at the time of secondary transfer. If the setting of 2TR-
OFF is made, the setting voltage is added to the paper allotted voltage.
Increase the value when low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image occurs.
Decrease the value when high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive transfer
occurs.
As the value is changed by 1, the voltage is changed by 30 V.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image, density loss due to excessive
transfer, toner scattering on solid image, etc.)
Caution Increase/decrease the value by 1 at a time while checking the symptom.
Unit V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-DUP1, 2TR-OFF
Unit
713
8. Service Mode
occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
714
8. Service Mode
occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
715
8. Service Mode
occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
716
8. Service Mode
occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
717
8. Service Mode
TR-VL10 2 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 10
the paper allotted voltage adjusted here is applied at the time of secondary transfer. If the setting
of 2TR-OFF is made, the setting voltage is added to the paper allotted voltage.
occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
718
8. Service Mode
occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
719
8. Service Mode
occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit

occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
720
8. Service Mode
occurs.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Unit V
Default Value 0
Unit
1TR-TGK2 2 Adj Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed

Detail To adjust the target current for Bk-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed.
Unit uA
Default Value 0
Unit
721
8. Service Mode
■ FEED-ADJ
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ
REGIST 1 Adj paper leading edge margin: 1/1 speed
Detail To adjust the leading edge margin at 1/1 speed by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration
Motor.
As the value is changed by 1, the leading edge margin is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: Leading edge margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.)
-: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJ-C1 1 Write start pstn in horz scan:Cassette 1

Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper
from the Cassette 1. (Paper width is 320 mm or smaller.)
As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
722
8. Service Mode
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJ-MF 1 Write start pstn in horz scan: MP Tray

from the Multi-purpose Tray. (Paper width is 320 mm or smaller.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
723
8. Service Mode
ADJ-C1RE 1 Write start pstn in horz scan:Cst1 2nd
Detail To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction
when feeding paper from the Cassette 1.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
724
8. Service Mode
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJ-MFRE 1 Write start pstn in horz scan:MPTray 2nd

when feeding paper from the Multi-purpose Tray.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-THCK 1 Adj paper leading edge margin: 1/2 speed

Detail To adjust the leading edge margin at 1/2 speed by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration
Motor.
+: Leading edge margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
725
8. Service Mode
REG-DUP1 1 Adj ppr lead edge margin: 1/1 SPD, 2nd
Detail To adjust the leading edge margin on the 2nd side at 1/1 speed by changing the timing to turn ON
the Registration Motor.
Use Case When adjusting the leading edge margin
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-DUP2 1 Adj ppr lead edge margin: 1/2 SPD, 2nd

Detail To adjust the leading edge margin on the 2nd side at 1/2 speed by changing the timing to turn ON
the Registration Motor.
Use Case When adjusting the leading edge margin
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
LP-FEED1 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: plain, Casstt

Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for paper belonging to a group of plain papers fed
from a cassette.
As the value is changed by 1, the arch amount is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 1st side of paper belonging to a group of plain papers fed from a cassette
is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Group of plain papers: Plain paper 1 to 3, colored paper, recycled paper 1 to 3, pre-punched paper,
tracing paper
Unit
726
8. Service Mode
LP-FEED2 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: heavy, Casstt
Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed
from a cassette.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 1st side of paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed from a cassette
is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Group of heavy papers: Heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to 5, transparency, clear film, label,
bond paper, envelope, postcard
Unit
LP-MULT1 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: plain, MP Tray

from the Multi-purpose Tray.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 1st side of paper belonging to a group of plain papers fed from the Multi-
purpose Tray is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
tracing paper
Unit
LP-MULT2 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: heavy, MP Tray

from the Multi-purpose Tray.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 1st side of paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed from the Multi-
purpose Tray is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
727
8. Service Mode
LP-DUP1 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: plain, 2-sided
in 2-sided mode.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 2nd side of paper belonging to a group of plain papers fed in 2-sided mode
is skewed
Caution If the value is too large, paper wrinkles or bent paper may occur.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
tracing paper
Unit
LP-DUP2 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: heavy, 2-sided

in 2-sided mode.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 2nd side of paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed in 2-sided mode
is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
REG-SPD 1 Adjustment of Registration Motor speed

Detail To adjust the speed of the Registration Motor.
As the value is changed by 1, the speed is changed by 0.2%.
+: Accelerate (Leading edge margin becomes larger.)
-: Decelerate (Leading edge margin becomes smaller.)
As the value is reduced, blur image in the area of 60 to 70 mm from the trailing edge is alleviated.
Use Case When blur image occurs in the area of 60 to 70 mm from the trailing edge
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
728
8. Service Mode
EXT-SPD 2 Setting of delivery speed at 1/1 speed
Detail To set the delivery speed of papers (thin paper 1/2, plain paper 1 to 3, colored paper, recycled
paper 1 to 3, pre-punched paper and tracing paper) which are fed at 1/1 speed in the case of
delivering to the First/Second Delivery Tray.
Set 2 if misalignment occurs with the papers when delivering to the First Delivery Tray. Speed of
the Fixing Motor is reduced so that papers are stacked on the First Delivery Tray more gently.
Set 1 if trailing edges of papers with 297 mm (A4R) or less in length get caught on the delivery
outlet when delivering to the Second Delivery Tray. Speed of the Second Delivery Motor is
increased so that trailing edge of paper can pass through the delivery outlet.
Set 3 if both of the above symptoms occur.
Use Case - When misalignment occurs at delivery to the First Delivery Tray
- When trailing edge of paper get caught on the delivery outlet at delivery to the Second Delivery
Tray
Caution When 2 or 3 is set, FCOT becomes longer.
0: Normal, 1: Increase the speed at delivery to the Second Delivery Tray, 2: Reduce the speed at
delivery to the First Delivery Tray, 3: Reduce the speed at delivery to the First Delivery Tray and
increase the speed at delivery to the Second Delivery Tray
Default Value 0
LP-FEED3 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: thin, Casstt

Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for thin paper 1/2 fed from a cassette.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 1st side of thin paper fed from a cassette is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
LP-DUP3 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: thin, 2-sided

Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for thin paper 1/2 fed in 2-sided mode.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case When an image on the 2nd side of thin paper fed in 2-sided mode is skewed
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
729
8. Service Mode
LP-MULT3 1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: thin, MP Tray
Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for thin paper 1/2 fed from the Multi-purpose Tray.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
At first, change the value in increments of 10, and then make a fine adjustment.
Use Case When an image on the 1st side of thin paper fed from the Multi-purpose Tray is skewed
Caution If the value is too large, paper wrinkles may occur.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
■ CST-ADJ
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CST-ADJ
CST-VLM1 2 Adj Cassette 1 level detect threshold VL
Detail To adjust the timing to switch the scale indicating paper level in the Cassette 1 from "3" to "2".
Since the paper level to display is switched at the height where papers are stacked, the paper level
detection can be changed by adjusting the timing to detect it.
To increase the paper levels to display (from "2" to "3"), enter a positive (+) value.
To decrease the paper levels to display (from "3" to "2"), enter a negative (-) value.
Use Case Upon user's request (to individually adjust the timing to switch the paper level display)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value (switch positive/negative by +/- key) and press OK key
2) Pull out and then insert the cassette.
3) Check the paper level in the cassette.
Caution - The setting is reflected after removing and then installing the cassette.
- When the value is increased/decreased greatly, the actual timing may be deviated from the target.
Therefore, change the value by 1 at a time while checking the scale.
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo The timing to switch the scale indicating paper level from "3" to "2" varies individually.

Default Value 0
730
8. Service Mode
Default Value 0

Default Value 0
MF-MAX 1 Adj of Multi-purpose Tray maximum width

Detail To adjust the maximum width of the Multi-purpose Tray.
When registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-MAX.
Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When registering a new value
Caution - After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
- Be sure to adjust MF-MIN together with this item.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-MAX
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MIN
731
8. Service Mode
MF-MIN 1 Adj of Multi-purpose Tray minimum width
Detail To adjust the minimum width of the Multi-purpose Tray.
When registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-MIN.
Caution - After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
- Be sure to adjust MF-MAX together with this item.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-MIN
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MAX
■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC
SEG-ADJ 1 Set criteria for text/photo: front side
Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front side) in Text/
Photo/Map mode as text or photo.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document.
The setting is applied to the image on the front side when the Copyboard/DADF (1-path model) is
installed, whereas it is applied to the images on both the front and back sides when the DADF
(reverse model) is installed.
Use Case When adjusting the judgment level of text/photo original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front
side) in Text/Photo/Map mode
Default Value 0
K-ADJ 1 Set criteria for black text: front side

Detail To set whether to judge the color of the text scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front side) as black.
As the value is larger, the text tends to be detected as black.
Use Case When adjusting the criteria for judging the color of the text scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front
side)
Default Value 0
732
8. Service Mode
ACS-ADJ 1 Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front
Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front side) in ACS mode
as B&W/color original.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document.
Use Case When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode at scanning with the Scanner Unit (for
front side)
Default Value 0
ACS-EN 2 Set ACS mode judgmt area: book mode

Detail To set the ACS judgment area in the image on the front side read with the Copyboard.
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
Use Case When adjusting the ACS judgment area at copyboard reading
Default Value 1
ACS-CNT 2 Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area:book scan

Detail To set the area to judge whether the image on the front side read with the Copyboard is color or
B&W at automatic color selection.
Use Case When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge whether it is a color/B&W image
Default Value 0
ACS-EN2 2 Set ACS mode judgment area: stream read

Detail To set the ACS judgment area either in the image on the front side stream read with DADF (1-path
model) or the images on both the front and back sides stream read with the DADF (reverse model).
Use Case When adjusting the ACS judgment area at stream reading
Default Value 1
ACS-CNT2 2 Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area: DADF

Detail To set the area to judge whether the image on the front side stream read with DADF (1-path model)
or the images on both the front and back sides stream read with the DADF (reverse model) is color
or B&W at automatic color selection.
Default Value 0
733
8. Service Mode
SEG-ADJ3 1 Set criteria for text/photo: back side
Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back side) in Text/
Photo/Map mode as text or photo.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document.
Use Case When adjusting the judgment level of text/photo original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back
side) in Text/Photo/Map mode
Default Value 0
K-ADJ3 1 Set criteria for black text: back side

Detail To set whether to judge the color of the text scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back side) as black.
As the value is larger, the text tends to be detected as black.
Use Case When adjusting the criteria for judging the color of the text scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back
side)
Default Value 0
ACS-ADJ3 1 Set ACS B&W/color jdgmt stdrd:back side

Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back side) in ACS mode
as B&W/color original.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value
is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document.
Use Case When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode at scanning with the Scanner Unit (for
back side)
Default Value 0
ACS-EN3 2 ACS mode judgmt area:stream, back side

Detail To set the ACS judgment area in the image on the back side stream read with the DADF (1-path
model).
Use Case When adjusting the ACS judgment area in the image on the back side at stream reading
Default Value 1
734
8. Service Mode
ACS-CNT3 2 ACS mode jdgmt pixel count area: back
Detail To set the area to judge whether the image on the back side stream read with DADF (1-path model)
is color or B&W at automatic color selection.
Default Value 0
SH-ADJ 1 Adj of sharpness: Copyboard, DADF front

Detail To adjust the sharpness of image in copyboard reading mode and that of image on the front side
in duplex stream reading mode that are set in [Settings/Registration].
As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too large, moire is likely to occur in
an output image of COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the back side in the duplex stream reading mode, decrease
the value when moire on the front side is stronger than the back side and increase the value when
it is weaker.
Use Case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ2
Additional Functions Copy> Options> Sharpness
Mode
SH-ADJ2 1 Adjustment of sharpness: DADF back side

Detail To adjust the sharpness of image on the back side in duplex stream reading mode that is set in
[Settings/Registration].
As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too large, moire is likely to occur in
an output image of COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the front side in the duplex stream reading mode, increase
the value when moire on the front side is stronger than the back side, and decrease the value when
it is weaker.
Use Case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ
Additional Functions Copy> Options> Sharpness
Mode
735
8. Service Mode
■ EXP-LED
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > EXP-LED
PR-EXP-M 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(M) intnsty: 1/1SPD
Detail To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) at 1/1 speed.
To set the proportion relative to the current value in percentage.
Increase the value when drum ghost occurs, and decrease the value when horizontal lines appear
due to charging.
Use Case - When drum ghost occurs
- When horizontal lines appear due to charging
Caution When the value is increased, horizontal lines due to charging may appear earlier.
When the value is decreased, drum ghost may occur.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
PR-EXP-C 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(C) intnsty: 1/1SPD

Detail To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) at 1/1 speed.
due to charging.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
PR-EXP-K 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(Bk) intnsty: 1/1SPD

Detail To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk) at 1/1 speed.
due to charging.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
736
8. Service Mode
PR-EXPM2 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(M) intnsty: 1/2SPD
Detail To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) at 1/2 speed.
Set the proportion relative to the current value in percentage.
due to charging.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
PR-EXPC2 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(C) intnsty: 1/2SPD

Detail To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) at 1/2 speed.
due to charging.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
PR-EXPK2 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(Bk) intnsty: 1/2SPD

Detail To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk) at 1/2 speed.
due to charging.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
737
8. Service Mode
INTEXP-M 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(M) initial intnsty
Detail To adjust the initial light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M).
When replacing the LED, enter the value written on the label included in the package of a new
one.
Use Case - When replacing the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Caution Use this item only when replacing the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED or replacing the DC Controller
PCB/clearing RAM data.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
INTEXP-C 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(C) initial intnsty

Detail To adjust the initial light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C).
one.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
INTEXP-K 2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(Bk) initial intnsty

Detail To adjust the initial light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk).
one.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
738
8. Service Mode
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

■ INSTALL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL
STIR-Y 1 Stirring of Y-color developer
Detail To stir developer in the Y-color Developing Unit.
Use Case When fogging occurs on an image after the machine has not been used for a long time
Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Required Time 150 sec
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-M/C/K/4
STIR-M 1 Stirring of M-color developer

Detail To stir developer in the M-color Developing Unit.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/C/K/4
STIR-C 1 Stirring of C-color developer

Detail To stir developer in the C-color Developing Unit.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/K/4
STIR-K 1 Stirring of Bk-color developer

Detail To stir developer in the Bk-color Developing Unit.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/C/4
STIR-4 1 Stirring of all colors of developers

Detail To stir developer in the Developing Units of 4 colors (Y/M/C/Bk).
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y/M/C/K
739
8. Service Mode
STRD-POS 1 Auto adj frt side read pstn: DADF stream
Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when stream
reading original with DADF.
The adjustment result is reflected to COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS.
Use Case At DADF installation/uninstallation
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Close the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS in the service label.
Caution Write the adjusted value in the service label.
Display/Adj/Set Range At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS
CARD 1 Card number setting

Detail To set the card number to be used for Card Reader.
A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards specified by CARD-RNG
can be used.
Use Case - At installation of the Card Reader
- After replacement of the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key.
Caution The card management information (department ID and password) is initialized.
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG
INISET-Y 1 Exe of Dev Unit (Y) initial install mod

Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (Y).
1. Idle rotation of the Developing Unit (including automatic take-up of the developer sealing)
2. Dark current correction of the Registration Patch Sensor and light intensity adjustment
3. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor (Y)
4. Primary transfer ATVC control
5. Initialization of the Registration Patch Sensor
6. Cleaning of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
7. Reset of the Developing Unit counter
Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit (Y)
Caution When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Unit of other color, do not use this item.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination: OK, At abnormal
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/C/K/4
740
8. Service Mode
INISET-M 1 Exe of Dev Unit (M) initial install mod
Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (M).
3. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor (M)
Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit (M)
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/C/K/4
INISET-C 1 Exe of Dev Unit (C) initial install mod

Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (C).
3. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor (C)
Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit (C)
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/M/K/4
AINR-OFF 1 ON/OFF warm-up rotn deact:dor open/close

Detail To set whether to disable the warm-up rotation when opening and closing the door.
By selecting 1, printing can be executed without automatic adjustment at warm-up rotation when
analyzing the cause of a problem.
Use Case When printing and checking without automatic adjustment at warm-up rotation for analyzing the
cause of a problem
Caution Be sure to return the setting value to 0 before the machine is used by the user.
0: OFF (warm-up rotation enabled), 1: ON (warm-up rotation disabled)
Default Value 0
741
8. Service Mode
E-RDS 1 ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS
Detail To set whether to use the E-RDS.
Use Case When using Embedded-RDS
Caution Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
0: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERDS-DAT
Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and
consumables to the sales company's server via SOAP protocol
RGW-PORT 1 Set port number of Sales Co's server

Detail To set the port number of the sales company's server to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Default Value 443
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
COM-TEST 1 Dspl connect result w/ Sales Co's server

Detail To display the result of the connection test with the sales company's server.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK, When connection is failed: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR
COM-LOG 1 Dspl connect error w/ Sales Co's server

Detail To display error information when the connection with the sales company's server failed.
Display/Adj/Set Range Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128 characters)
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, RGW-ADR
742
8. Service Mode
RGW-ADR 1 URL setting of Sales Company's server
Detail To set the URL of the sales company's server to be used for Embedded-RDS.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the URL.
2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key.
Caution - Do not use Shift-JIS character strings.
- Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set.
Display/Adj/Set Range URL
Default Value https://b01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG
CNT-DATE 1 Set counter send start date to SC server

Detail To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter information to the sales company's
server.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available.
Use Case When the non-Canon-made extension function of the Embedded-RDS is available
Display/Adj/Set Range YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits)
YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute
Default Value 000000000000
CNT-INTV 1 Set counter send interval to SC server

Detail To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales company's server in a unit of one
hour.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available.
Use Case When using the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function
Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 168 (=1 week)
Unit hour
Default Value 24
Unit
743
8. Service Mode
INISET-4 1 All colors Dev Units initial instal mode
Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Units for all
colors.
3. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensors for all colors
Use Case When replacing the Developing Units for all colors
Caution Use this item only when replacing Developing Units for 4 colors simultaneously.
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/M/C/K
INISET-K 1 Exe of Dev Unit (Bk) initial install mod

Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (Bk).
3. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk)
Use Case When replacing the Developing Unit (Bk)
termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/M/C/4
CDS-CTL 1 Set country/area when using CDS

Detail To set country/area to enable CDS.
In principle, the default value is the same as that of CONFIG. If the value differs from the country/
region of the vice-company of sales, change the setting.
Use Case When enabling CDS
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution If the setting value is not configured to be the same as the country/region of the vice-company of
sales, the necessary firmware may not be able to be downloaded.
Display/Adj/Set Range JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG:
Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT:
Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech Republic,
SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG:
Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam, AR: Argentina, IN: India, CA: Canada, LA: Latin
America, HK: Hong Kong
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG
Supplement/Memo CDS: Contents Delivery System
744
8. Service Mode
RDSHDPOS 1 Auto adj of Reader shading position
Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when reading
the White Plate on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass.
The adjustment result is reflected to ADJ-S.
Use Case When replacing the Scanner Unit (for front side)
Display/Adj/Set Range At start of operation: START, During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-S
Supplement/Memo Shading: It determines the white color reference by reading the White Plate.
BIT-SVC 1 OFF/ON of Web service of E-RDS

Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To set ON/OFF of Web service function of E-RDS.
When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be obtained from E-RDS.
Use Case Upon user's request
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
NFC-USE 1 ON/OFF of NFC option

Detail To set whether to enable the installed NFC option.
Set 1 when using the NFC option. [Use NFC Card Emulation] is displayed in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When installing the NFC option
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Management Settings> Device Management> Use NFC Card Emulation
Mode
BLE-USE 1 ON/OFF of BLE module option

Detail To set whether to enable the installed BLE module option.
Set 1 when using the BLE module option. The BLE setting screen is displayed in [Settings/
Registration].
Use Case When installing the BLE module option
Caution Do not set 1 when the BLE module option is not installed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
745
8. Service Mode
INSTDTST 1 Batch set installation date info: YMDHN
Detail Information on the current date and time is entered collectively in YMDHN of INSTDT by pressing
INSTDTST.
Use Case At installation
Related Service Mode COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-Y
COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-M
COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-D
COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-H
COPIER>OPTION>USER>INSTDT-N
FAX-USE 1 Enable/disable FAX function

To switch enable/disable of the FAX function of a device mounted with a FAX Board.
Use Case When disabling the FAX function of a device mounted with a FAX Board
2) Turn ON/OFF the Main Power.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
SUB-IF 1 Set for line connecting to cloud service

Detail To select the network line connecting to the Canon cloud service
Use Case When the Canon cloud service is used with a sub line
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select either [Wired LAN+Wireless LAN] or [Wired LAN+Wired LAN] when selecting interface
2) Configure the network setting for the sub line
3) Select 1 for this setting
4) Turn the main power OFF, and then ON
0: Main line, 1: Sub line
Default Value 0
■ CCD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD
DF-WLVL1 1 White level adj in book mode: color
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Use Case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader -related RAM data
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
746
8. Service Mode
DF-WLVL2 1 White level adj: stream reading, color
Detail To adjust the white level for stream reading by setting the paper which is usually used by the user
on the DADF.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
Supplement/Memo - In the case of DADF (reverse model)
The Scanner Unit (for front side) calculates the white level correction coefficient based on the
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL1 and the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL2.
- In the case of DADF (1-path model)
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL1, the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL2, and the luminance at stream reading that the Scanner Unit (for back
side) detected with DF-WLVL2.
DF-LNR 1 Deriving of DADF front/back linearity

Detail To derive the front/back side linearity characteristics when using the DADF (1-path model) based
on the scanned data that has been backed up at factory.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value of the reader's service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10, DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10,
DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2/R10/G2/G10/B2/B10/K2/K10, DFCH2R2/10,
DFCH2G2/10, DFCH2B2/10, DFCH2K2/10
MTF-CLC 1 Deriving of MTF filter coefficient

Detail To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value which has been
backed up.
Caution Be sure to enter the MTF values for the Scanner Unit (DADF/Reader) in MTF-M1 to 12/S1 to 12
and MTF2-M1 to 12/S1 to 12 in advance.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1 - M12, MTF-S1 - S12, MTF2-M1 - M12, MTF2-S1 - S12
Supplement/Memo MTF values are written on the label of the Scanner Unit in the DADF/Reader.
747
8. Service Mode
DF-WLVL3 1 White level adj in book mode: B&W
Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting a paper which is usually
used by the user on the Copyboard Glass.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
DF-WLVL4 1 White level adj: stream reading, B&W

Detail To adjust the white level for stream reading by setting the paper which is usually used by the user
on the DADF.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
Supplement/Memo - In the case of DADF (reverse model)
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL3 and the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL4.
luminance at copyboard reading detected with DF-WLVL3, the luminance at stream reading
detected with DF-WLVL4, and the luminance at stream reading that the Scanner Unit (for back
side) detected with DF-WLVL4.
BW-TGT 1 Set of B&W shading target value

Detail After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set, read the Standard White Plate
and set the black and white shading target value.
Use Case When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
Caution Be sure to execute this item after execution of COPIER> ADJUST> CCD>W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-
PLT-Z.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X/Y/Z, SH-TRGT
748
8. Service Mode
■ CST
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CST
MF-MAX 1 Reg MP Tray max width standard value
Detail To register the standard value of the maximum width on the Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MAX.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Align the guide of the Multi-purpose Tray with the maximum width.
The value is registered after automatic adjustment.
Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MAX, and write
it down on the service label.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MAX
COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-MIN
MF-MIN 1 Reg MP Tray min width standard value

Detail To register the standard value of the minimum width on the Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MIN.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Align the guide of the Multi-purpose Tray with the minimum width.
The value is registered after automatic adjustment.
Caution After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MIN, and write
it down on the service label.
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MIN
COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> MF-MAX
■ CLEANING
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEANING
2TR-CLN 1 Clean of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Detail To execute bias cleaning to remove soil adhered on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
Use Case - When the backside of the paper is soiled by the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
- When contacting with the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller at the time of jam removal, etc.
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance> Clean Inside Main Unit
Mode
Supplement/Memo Soiling may be removed by executing "Clean Inside Main Unit" when the problem is not solved by
repeatedly executing this item.
TNR-COAT 1 For R&D
749
8. Service Mode
■ FIXING
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > FIXING
NIP-CHK 1 Checking of fixing nip width
Detail To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing.
Criteria: Fixing nip width at 15 mm from each edge of paper and at the center of the paper must
be within the range of 5.5 to 9.0 mm.
Otherwise, a fixing failure may occur.
Use Case - When replacing the fixing-related parts (Fixing Film Unit, Pressure Roller)
- When a fixing failure occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place A4/LTR plain paper (76 to 90 g/m2) on the Multi-purpose Tray.
2) Select "MPT", and then press OK key.
Printing is started, and a paper is automatically stopped at the fixing nip (10 seconds) and then is
automatically delivered.
3) Measure the nip width.
■ PANEL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PANEL
LCD-CHK 1 Check of LCD Panel dot missing
Detail To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel.
Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel
2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black, red, green and blue.
3) Press STOP key to terminate checking.
LED-CHK 1 Check of Control Panel LED

Detail To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up.
2) Check that the LED lights up in the order.
3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-OFF
LED-OFF 1 End check of Control Panel LED

Detail To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel.
Use Case During execution of LED-CHK
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-CHK
KEY-CHK 1 Check of key entry

Detail To check the key input on the Control Panel.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel.
2) Check that the input value is displayed.
3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking.
TOUCHCHK 1 Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel

Detail To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel.
2) Press the nine "+" keys in sequence.
750
8. Service Mode
■ PART-CHK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK
CL 1 Specification of operation clutch
Detail To specify the clutch to operate.
Use Case When replacing the clutch/checking the operation
1: Developing Cylinder Clutch (Y) (CL01)
2: Developing Cylinder Clutch (M) (CL02)
3: Developing Cylinder Clutch (C) (CL03)
4: Developing Cylinder Clutch (Bk) (CL04)
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON
CL-ON 1 Operation check of clutch

Detail To start operation check of the clutch specified by CL.
To repeat ON/OFF of the clutch 5 times at intervals of 3 seconds while the Developing Motor is
being driven.
The Cylinder Shaft of the Developing Unit rotates when the clutch is ON, and it stops when the
clutch is OFF.
Use Case When replacing the clutch/checking the operation
Required Time 1 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL, MTR, MTR-ON
FAN 1 Specification of operation fan

Detail To specify the fan to operate.
Use Case When replacing the fan/checking the operation
1: Front Fan (FM01), 2: Motor Fan (FM03)
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN-ON
Supplement/Memo It is not possible to make the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM02) operate alone. Check the operation
by checking whether it is driven when the paper is fed.
FAN-ON 1 Operation check of fan

Detail To start operation check of the fan specified by FAN.
The operation automatically stops after operation of 30 seconds.
Use Case When replacing the fan/checking the operation
Required Time 1 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN
751
8. Service Mode
MTR 1 Specification of operation motor
Detail To specify the motor to operate.
Use Case When replacing the motor/checking the operation
Caution - The Bk Drum _ ITB Motor (M02) and the CL Drum Motor (M03) operate at the same time.
- When the Bottle Motor (YM) (M04) and the Bottle Motor (CK) (M05) are operated, the Developing
Motor (M10) and the Developing Cylinder Clutch (Y/M/C/Bk) (CL01/02/03/04) are driven. Do not
operate the motors as much as possible because toner is supplied.
- Pull out the Cassette 1 before operating the Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor (M06) and the Cassette
1,2 Pickup Motor (M07). If it is not pulled out, "NG" is displayed.
- Do not operate the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor (M08) too much because the
Primary Transfer Roller repeats engagement and disengagement.
- Do not operate the Fixing Motor (M09) as much as possible.
- When 19 is set, the Cassette 1,2 Feed/Multi-purpose Pickup Motor (M13) rotates in reverse
direction and paper is picked up from the Multi-purpose Tray.
- Pull out the Cassette 3 before operating the Cassette 3, 4 Pickup Motor (M101) and the Cassette
3, 4 Lifter Motor (M102). If it is not pulled out, "NG" is displayed.
1: Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor (M07)
2: Cassette 1,2 Feed/Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Motor (M13)
3: Registration Motor (M12)
4: Duplex Reverse Motor (M11)
5: Duplex Merging Motor (M14)
6: Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor (M08)
7: Fixing Motor (1/1 speed) (M09)
8: Bk Drum_ITB Motor (M02), CL Drum Motor (M03)
9: Developing Motor (M10)
10: Reverse Motor (M30)
11: Second Delivery Motor (M31)
12: Bottle Motor (YM) (M04)
13: Bottle Motor (CK) (M05)
14: Waste Toner Feed Motor (M17)
15: Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor (M06)
16: Cassette 3,4 Pickup Motor (M101)
17: Cassette 3,4 Feed Motor (M103)
18: Cassette 3,4 Lifter Motor (M102)
19: Cassette 1,2 Feed/Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Motor (M13)
20: Polygon Motor (M01)
21: Fixing Motor (1/1 speed) (M09)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON
MTR-ON 1 Operation check of motor

Detail To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR.
When the setting value of MTR is 8, 12, 13 or 19, motor is driven for 10 seconds and is automatically
stopped.
In other cases, motor is stopped after 30 seconds.
Use Case When replacing the motor/checking the operation
Required Time 30 sec/10 sec
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR
752
8. Service Mode
SL 1 Specification of operation solenoid
Detail To specify the solenoid to operate.
Use Case When replacing the solenoid/checking the operation
1: Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL02), 2: Duplex Reverse Solenoid (SL06)
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON
SL-ON 1 Operation check of solenoid

Detail To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL.
The operation stops after "ON for 2 sec" => "OFF for 5 sec" => "ON for 2 sec" => "OFF for 5 sec"
=> "ON for 2 sec".
Use Case When replacing the solenoid/checking the operation
Required Time 1 min
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL
■ CLEAR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR
ERR 1 Clear of error code
Detail To clear the specific error code.
Use Case At error occurrence
DC-CON 1 RAM clear of DC Controller PCB

Detail To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB.
Not clear the counter.
Use Case When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter
necessary setting values.
- The RAM data is cleared After the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
R-CON 1 Clearing of Reader-related setting data

Detail To clear the Reader-related setting data.
Use Case When clearing the Reader-related setting data
- the RAM data is cleared After the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
753
8. Service Mode
JAM-HIST 1 Clear of jam history
Detail To clear the jam history.
Use Case When clearing the jam history
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> JAM
ERR-HIST 1 Clear of error code history

Detail To clear the error code history.
Use Case When clearing the error code history
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ERR
PWD-CLR 1 Clear of system administrator password

Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access].
To clear the password of the system administrator set in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When clearing the password of the system administrator
ADRS-BK 1 Clearing of address book

To clear the address book data.
Use Case When clearing the address book data
Caution The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
CNT-MCON 1 Clear of Main Controller service counter

Detail To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER
Supplement/Memo See COUNTER for the target counter.
CNT-DCON 1 Clear of DC Controller service counter

Detail To clear the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB
MMI 1 Clear Settings/Registration setting VL

To clear the Settings/Registration setting values.
- Preferences (excluding values for Paper Type Management Settings)
- Adjustment/Maintenance
- Function Settings
- Set Destination (excluding Address Lists)
- Management Settings (excluding Department ID Management)
Use Case When clearing various setting values of [Settings/Registration]
Caution - The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
- If this item is executed while a login application other than User Authentication is running, it
switched to User Authentication after reboot. Set the login application using SMS as needed.
Supplement/Memo SMS (Service Management Service): An application for management which can be used on
remote UI.
754
8. Service Mode
MN-CON 1 Deletion of setting values
To delete the setting values of address lists, forwarding settings, Settings/Registration and service
mode.
For details, refer to "Backup Data List" in the Service Manual.
Use Case When initializing the setting values
The machine is automatically rebooted.
necessary setting value.
- RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
- If this item is executed while a login application other than User Authentication is running, it
switched to User Authentication after reboot. Set the login application using SMS as needed.
Supplement/Memo SMS (Service Management Service): An application for management which can be used on
remote UI.
CARD 1 Clear of card ID-related data

To clear the data related to the card ID (department).
Use Case When clearing the data related to the card ID
Caution The value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
ALARM 1 Clear of alarm log

Detail To clear alarm log.
Use Case When clearing alarm log
Caution The alarm log is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2/3
755
8. Service Mode
CA-KEY 2 Deletion of CA certificate and key pair
To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by the
user.
Use Case When a service person replaces/discards the device
2) Check that OK is displayed.
Caution - Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard of the device, the CA certificate
and key pair which are additionally registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem
in terms of security.
- Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally
registered are deleted when it is executed. If they are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again
registered by the user. If no CA certificate and key pair are additionally registered, the machine
condition becomes the same as the one at the time of factory shipment.
- When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was not executed. In this case,
surely execute the deletion by initializing the HDD, etc.
Supplement/Memo - The CA certificate is used in the MEAP application with E-RDS and SSL client connection, and
the key pair is used in the SSL function of IPP, RUI and MEAP.
- When the main power switch is turned OFF/ON, the CA certificate and key pair which were
registered at the time of factory shipment are decompressed from the archive , and become
available in the E-RDS/SSL function.
ERDS-DAT 1 Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data

Detail To initialize the "internal setting values" of the Embedded-RDS stored in the SRAM.
"Internal setting values" are ON/OFF of E-RDS, server's port number, server's SOAP URL, and
communication schedule with the server (how often the data is acquired), etc.
The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG
is cleared.
Use Case When clear the SRAM of the "internal setting values".
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG
REG-CLR 2 Clear of image position correction value

Detail To clear the correction value when the value which is adjusted by image position correction control
is an erratic value for some reason.
When color displacement is not corrected by image position correction control, clear the correction
value once with this item. Then, either turn OFF/ON the power or execute auto gradation
adjustment (quick adjustment) so that image position correction control is performed again.
If color displacement occurs due to image skew, use LD-ADJ-Y/M/C/K in parallel.
Use Case - When color displacement cannot be corrected although image position correction control is
performed
- When color displacement occurs due to image skew
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> LASER> LD-ADJ-Y/M/C/K
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust Gradation> Quick Adjust
Mode
USBM-CLR 1 Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info

Detail To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling the API provided by the OS.
Use Case When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration
756
8. Service Mode
JV-CACHE 1 Cache clear of JAVA application
To clear the cache information used by JAVA application.
Use Case When initializing the JAVA application
LANG-CLR 2 Uninstallation of language files

Detail To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files installed in HDD.
When installing a new language file while the maximum number of language files (11 files) have
been already installed, an existing language file needs to be uninstalled.
Use Case When deleting/switching language files
2) Download the firmware in which the necessary language files are included using SST or a USB
flash drive.
Caution A language file is not uninstalled unless the downloaded language files are installed by SST or a
USB flash drive after the execution of this item. If installation is not executed, uninstallation will be
canceled. (Status of the machine remains the same as it was before execution.)
Supplement/Memo - After the execution, language displayed on the screen becomes English. Switch the language as
needed.
- There are 9 language files (JEFIGSCKT) installed at the time of shipment.
FIN-MCON 1 Initial delvry dest info in controller

Detail To initialize the delivery destination information which is stored in the Main Controller.
The information needs to be cleared when the delivery destination is changed due to change in
configuration of delivery options; otherwise, malfunction occurs.
After execution, set the delivery destination again in [Output Tray Settings] in [Settings/
Registration].
Use Case When changing the configuration of delivery options
Additional Functions Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings
Mode
LS-INT-H 2 Initial laser copy ratio correct offset

Detail To return the offset value of the laser copy ratio correction to 0 (initialization).
Execute this item before performing copy ratio correction between Y/M/Bk and C.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-H-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
LS-INT-V 2 Initial laser distortion correct offset

Detail To return the offset value of the laser distortion correction to 0 (initialization).
Execute this item before performing distortion correction between Y/M/Bk and C.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> IMG-REG> LS-V-YL/YC/YR/ML/MC/MR/KL/KC/KR
PLPW-CLR 2 Clear security policy setting password

To clear the password of the security administrator set in the security policy settings.
Use Case When clearing the password of the security administrator
757
8. Service Mode
JV-TYPE 1 Specification of MEAP cache clear target
To specify the MEAP cache area to be cleared.
The target area is divided into the 4 parts:
- A jar file of MEAP application bundled as standard
- Data of the application mentioned above
- A jar file of MEAP application installed additionally
- Data of the application mentioned above
When JV-CACHE is executed, the area specified with this item is cleared.
For details, refer to the Service Manual.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem due to MEAP application
0: Entire MEAP cache area
1: A jar file of MEAP application bundled as standard
2: A jar file and data of MEAP application bundled as standard
3: Data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally
4: A jar file and data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> JV-CACHE
Supplement/Memo MEAP applications bundled as standard: system application, built-in login application
MEAP applications installed additionally: non-Canon-made login application, general application,
etc.
CUSTOM2 2 [For customization]

CNT-RCON 1 Clear of RCON service counter
Detail To clear the service counter counted by the RCON management software.
Use Case When clearing the service counter counted by the RCON
KEY-HCD 2 For R&D

TPM-DA 2 For R&D
■ MISC-R
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
SCANLAMP 1 Lighting check of Scanner Unit (frt) LED
Detail To light up the Scanning Lamp for 3 seconds under the White Plate and the Copyboard Glass
respectively.
Use Case When replacing the LED of the Scanner Unit
SCANLMP2 1 Lighting check of Scanner Unit (bck) LED

Detail To light up the LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) for 3 sec.
Check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in LED.
Use Case When replacing the LED of the Scanner Unit
758
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R
RD-SHPOS 2 Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn
Detail To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is secured in when moving.
When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner Unit may move and get damage.
By moving the Scanner Unit to the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before
moving, damage can be prevented.
Use Case When moving the Reader after installation
Caution Be sure to move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position and secure it in place with a screw when
moving the Reader after installation. Otherwise, the Scanner Unit may get damage.
■ MISC-P
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P
P-PRINT 1 Output of service mode setting values
Detail To output the service mode setting values.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (P-PRINT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc.
Caution Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE
HIST-PRT 1 Output of jam and error logs

Detail To output the jam log and error log.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (HIST-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When outputting the jam/error log
TRS-DATA 2 Moving memory reception data to Inbox

To move the data received in memory to Inbox.
Use Case When moving the data received in memory to Inbox
Additional Functions Fax/I-Fax Inbox> Memory RX Inbox
Mode
USER-PRT 1 Settings/Registration menu list output

Detail To output [Settings/Registration] list.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (USER-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When outputting Settings/Registration menu list.
Supplement/Memo It takes approximately 3 seconds before output starts.
759
8. Service Mode
LBL-PRNT 1 Output of service label
Detail To print the service label.
Use Case When printing the service label
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place A4/LTR paper in Cassette 1.
PRE-EXP 1 Lighting-up of Pre-exposure LED

Detail To light up the Pre-exposure LED (Y/M/C/Bk).
Remove the Photosensitive Drum for visual check. Since the Pre-exposure LED is not lighted up
while the Front Door is open, release the Interlock.
It automatically stops after all LEDs light up.
Use Case When checking that the Pre-exposure LEDs light up
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Open the Front Door.
2) Remove the Photosensitive Drum.
3) Release the Interlock.
Caution Be sure to remove the Photosensitive Drum; otherwise, drum memory may occur.
1ATVC-EX 1 Exe of primary transfer ATVC control

Detail To execute the primary transfer ATVC control.
Execute this item for 1/1 speed and 1/2 speed in order.
Use Case When reflecting the changed target current of primary transfer ATVC control
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 1TR-TGY/TGM/TGC/TGK1/TGY2/TGM2/TGC2/TGK2
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 1ATVC-Y/M/C/K4
ENV-PRT 1 Outpt inside temp&hmdy/Fix Rol temp log

Detail To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/surface temperature of the
Fixing Roller as a log.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (ENV-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing temperature information at
problem analysis
PJH-P-1 1 Outpt print job log detail info:100 jobs

To output the print job logs of the latest 100 jobs with detailed information.
In the case of less than 100 jobs, the logs of all print jobs are output.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (PJH-P-1-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When outputting the print job logs with detailed information
Supplement/Memo Output the print job logs with detailed information which are not displayed/output in the job log
screen under "System Monitor>Print>Log>Printer" and in the report of the print job log.
760
8. Service Mode
PJH-P-2 1 Outpt print job log detail info:all jobs
To output all print job logs stored in the machine with detailed information (for maximum 5000 jobs).
The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of jobs output.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (PJH-P-2-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When printing the print job history with detailed information
Supplement/Memo Output the print job logs with detailed information which are not displayed/output in the job log
screen under "System Monitor>Print>Log>Printer" and in the report of the print job log.
AT-IMG-X 1 Exe image position correction control

Detail To execute a series of image position correction control operation at parts replacement.
The printer engine usually executes image position correction control at the specific timing
according to the operation status and environment change.
Use Case - When removing the Drum Unit
- When releasing pressure from the ITB
USBH-PRT 1 Output of USB device information report

Detail To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (USBH-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When outputting information of the USB device in the form of a report
RPT-FILE 1 Output of report print file

Detail To save various service reports in HDD as a file.
The files can be obtained using PC to which SST has been installed or USB flash drive after starting
the machine in download mode.
Use Case When obtaining the service report as a file instead of printing the report out
Supplement/Memo File size: Approx. 1 MB at a maximum
RPT2USB 1 Write serv rpt file to USB flash drive

Detail To store the report file of service mode saved in HDD by RPT-FILE to a USB flash drive.
Use Case When storing the report file of service mode to a USB flash drive
TNRB-PRT 1 Output of Toner Container ID report

Detail To output the ID of the Toner Container in the form of a report.
Text data is saved in HDD as a file (TNRB-PRT-RPT.TXT).
Use Case When checking the ID of the Toner Container
761
8. Service Mode
PSCL-PRT 1 Output grdtn/clr tone crrct log report
Detail To output the execution log of auto gradation adjustment/auto correction color tone in the form of
a report.
Use Case When checking the correction log
Caution FUL-01: Auto gradation adjustment => Full adjustment => [Start Printing]
FUL-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
FUL-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
FULR-01: Full adjustment => End of test pattern reading
FULR-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
FULR-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
FULQ-01: Full adjustment => End of internal calibration
FULQ-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
FULQ-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
QUI-01: Auto gradation adjustment => Quick adjustment => [Start] => or start quick adjustment at
the specified time for auto gradation adjustment
QUI-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
QUI-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
QUIT: Start quick adjustment at the specified time for auto gradation adjustment
QUIR-01: Quick adjustment => End of internal calibration
QUIR-02: Same as above (Paper type 2)
QUIR-03: Same as above (Paper type 3)
SHA: Uneven density correction => [Store and Finish]
Display/Adj/Set Range COLR-02: Auto correction color tone settings => Registration of correction pattern => Registration
of correction pattern 2
COLR-03: Auto correction color tone settings => Registration of correction pattern => Registration
COL: Auto correction color tone settings => Complete
MED-01: Auto gradation adjustment => Registration of paper to adjust => Registration of paper to
adjust 1
MED-04: Same as above (Paper type 2)
adjust 2
adjust 3
RADJERR: Abnormal termination of internal gradation calibration
■ SYSTEM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD 1 Shift to download mode
Detail To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a command.
Perform downloading by SST or a USB flash drive.
Use Case At upgrade
2) Perform downloading by SST or a USB flash drive.
Caution Do not turn OFF/ON the power during downloading.
Supplement/Memo SST: Service Support Tool
762
8. Service Mode
CHK-TYPE 1 Spec HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No.
Detail To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK.
Use Case When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK
0: All partitions (only the areas where the operation can be executed)
1: PDL-related file storage area
2: Image data storage area
3: MEAP-related area
4: Not used
5 and 6: Image data storage area
7: General application temporary area (temporary file)
8: General application-related area
9: PDL spool data (temporary file)
10: SEND-related area
11: Update-related area
12: License-related area
13: System area
14: SWAP (temporary file/memory alternative area)
15 to 16: Not used
17: Debug log area
18: Advanced Box image data storage area
19: Print data storage area
20 to 65535: Not used
* When 4, 12, 13, 15 or 16 is set, nothing is cleared even if HD-CLEAR is executed.
* For 2, 5 and 6, HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK is executed to all of the areas by selecting one of them.
* By selecting 8, HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK is also executed to 7, 9, 11 and 17.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK
HD-CHECK 1 File system check of specified partition

Detail To execute system check of the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at the next startup.
Use Case When E602/E614 error (file corruption, etc.) occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter 1, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
0: Not executed, 1: Executed at next startup
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
HD-CLEAR 1 Initialization of specified partition

To initialize the partition specified by CHK-TYPE at next startup.
Use Case When E602/E614 error (file corruption, etc.) occurs
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter 1, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
0: Not executed, 1: Executed at next startup
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
763
8. Service Mode
DSRAMBUP 2 Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Detail To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
Caution During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and
the old data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
DSRAMRES 2 Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM

Detail To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and
the old data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
RSRAMBUP 2 Backup of Reader Unit SRAM

Detail To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old setting data
and the new data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
RSRAMRES 2 Restore of Reader Unit SRAM

Detail To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the Main Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence
which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with the old setting data
and the new data is deleted.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
R-REBOOT 1 Reboot of host machine (Remote)

Detail To reboot the host machine.
Use Case When the reboot is carried out with the remote control by VNC
FIXIP 1 Start of fixed IP mode

Detail IP address is set to "172.16.1.100".
In an environment where wired LAN (main) and wireless LAN (sub) are used, the IP address of
wired LAN becomes the fixed IP.
During the fixed IP mode, "FIXIP" is displayed on the upper left of the screen.
Use Case When preferring to use the network settings with the fixed IP address "172.16.1.100"
Caution - It is necessary to turn OFF/ON the power to recover from the fixed IP mode.
- Whether to use RUI or not when the fixed IP mode is enabled follows the setting of "Management
Settings> License/Other> Remote UI.
764
8. Service Mode
■ DBG-LOG
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DBG-LOG
LOG2USB 2 Storage of debug log to USB memory
Detail To store a set of debug logs to the USB flash drive at the error occurrence.
A type of log to be collected is set in LOG-TRIG.
If there is a debug log which has been automatically saved, it is archived at this time.
Required time differs according to the device conditions and volume of log data.
Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB flash drive.
Caution - Wait until the machine recognizes the USB memory (approx. 10 sec.).
- During the data transfer ("ACTIVE" display), do not turn OFF the power/remove the USB memory/
use the screen for operations.
Display/Adj/Set Range During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG
LOG2SRVR 2 For R&D

LOG-TRIG 2 Set of debug log storage condition
Detail To set the conditions (timing, types, etc.) to automatically store the debug logs (stored as an archive
file).
By reading the operation setting file of the setting value from the Main Controller, the conditions
written in the file are set.
When setting a new condition is necessary, read the operation setting file provided by R&D from
the USB memory.
Use Case - When changing the conditions of debug log to automatically store
- When setting a new condition
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG2USB, LOG2SRVR
HIT-STS 2 Display of debug log state

Detail To display whether archive file of the debug log which is matched with the conditions set in LOG-
TRIG exists or not.
Use Case When checking the debug log automatically saved
0: No log is available, 1: Log is available
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> DBG-LOG> LOG-TRIG
SYSLOG 2 For R&D

DEFAULT 2 Reset of debug log setting
Detail To clear all debug log settings and return to the state before debug log collection operation.
Use Case - When returning the device in which analyzing the cause of a problem was completed
- When resetting the debug log settings
LOG-DEL 2 Clearing of debug logs

Detail To delete the debug log file.
The debug log setting is not reset.
Use Case When clearing the debug log
HIT-STS2 2 For R&D
765
8. Service Mode
OPTION (Specification setting mode)

■ FNC-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW
MODEL-SZ 1 Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size
Detail To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF.
It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader according to the location.
0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E) for North/Middle/South
America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania,
South America
SCANSLCT 2 ON/OFF of scan area calculate function

Detail To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the specified paper size.
When the paper size is larger than the original size, selecting ON reduces productivity because
the scanning area gets larger.
Use Case When matching the scanning area with the paper size
0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size)
1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size)
Default Value 0
DH-SW 2 For R&D

SENS-CNF 2 Setting of original detection size
Detail To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch configuration.
Set 0 for AB configuration machine, and set 1 for Inch configuration machine.
Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data
0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration
Default Value 0
766
8. Service Mode
CONFIG 1 Set country/regn/lang/location/ppr size
Detail To set the country/region, language, location, paper size configuration for multiple system software
in HDD.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the setting item.
2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range XX YY.ZZ.AA
XX: Country/region
JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG:
Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT:
Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech Republic,
SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG:
Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam, AR: Argentina, IN: India
YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese)
ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON)
AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03:
Inch/AB configuration)
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
W/SCNR 1 Setting of Reader Unit installation

Detail To set installation of the Reader Unit.
When the Reader Unit is detected at startup of the machine, "1: Installed" is set automatically.
Use Case When installing/removing the Reader Unit
ORG-LGL 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: LGL

Detail To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream reading
mode.
Use Case - Upon user's request
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R/FOLIO-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: Not used, 4: Australian FOOLSCAP-R,
5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Not used, 9: Government
LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R, 11: F4A, 12: India LEGAL-R
Default Value 0
ORG-LTR 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: LTR

Detail To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream reading
mode.
0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government LETTER
Default Value 0
767
8. Service Mode
ORG-LTRR 2 Special ppr size set at stream read:LTRR
Detail To set the size of special paper (LTRR configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream reading
mode.
0: LTR-R, 1: G-LTR-R, 2: A-LTR-R, 3: EXECUTIVE-R, 4: OFICIO-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R
Default Value 0
ORG-LDR 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: LDR

Detail To set the size of special paper (LDR configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream reading
mode.
0: LEDGER-R, 1: Argentine LETTER
Default Value 0
ORG-B5 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: B5

Detail To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized in stream reading mode.
0: B5, 1: Korean government office paper
Default Value 0
INTROT-2 1 Set auto adj exe interval: last rotation

Detail To set the interval (the number of sheets) to execute automatic adjustment at last rotation.
As the value is changed by 1, the interval (the number of sheets) is changed by 1 sheet.
Use Case When matching the use environment of the user
Caution Increasing the number of sheets (widening the interval) causes higher frequency of image failure.
Unit sheet
Default Value 1000
Unit
DMAX-SW 2 ON/OFF of D-max control

Detail To set ON/OFF of D-max control.
Use Case - When the density variation is not within the requested range at continuous output of a large
volume of papers
- When keeping the productivity even though there are some density variations
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
768
8. Service Mode
BK-4CSW 2 ON/OFF simple full clr mode:hvy ppr,Bk-m
Detail To set whether to switch single Bk-color mode to simple full color mode according to the paper
type.
When using thick paper in single Bk-color mode, shock image is likely to occur at 64 mm from the
leading edge due to impact triggered by paper entering the secondary transfer section.
In that case, shock image can be alleviated by creating black color by adding small amount of Y,
M, C toners (simple full color mode).
When 1 is set, simple full color mode is enabled when using heavy paper 4 to 7 (164 to 300 g/m2),
coated paper, clear film, transparency, label or postcard.
Use Case When shock image occurs with heavy paper at single Bk-color mode
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
MODELSZ2 2 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode

Detail To set whether to enable global support of original size detection at Copyboard reading.
Use Case Upon user's request (original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration))
Caution The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required to correctly detect the
document size when the original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration).
0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected with AB/Inch mixed media.
Default Value 0
SVMD-ENT 2 Setting of entry method to service mode

Detail To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak.
Use Case As needed
0: Factory default
1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time - [Settings/Registration]
Default Value 0
769
8. Service Mode
FXWRNLVL 2 Set Fix Film life display threshold VL
Detail To set the threshold value to display the life of Fixing Film.
This item is used to prevent the occurrence of fixing failure caused by the continuous use of the
Fixing Film beyond its life.
When FXMSG-SW is 1, this setting is enabled.
The counter for life judgment is stored in the DC Controller. The counter value cannot be changed
and checked.
Use Case When continuing to use the Fixing Unit beyond the life of the Fixing Film
0: Warning is hidden.
1: Warning is displayed when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value. (Driving
time)
2: Warning is displayed when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value. (Number
of sheets)
3: Warning is displayed when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value. (Both
driving time and number of sheets)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSG-SW
KSIZE-SW 2 Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support

Detail To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K, 16K).
Use Case When using K size paper
0: Not supported, 1: Supported
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
Supplement/Memo 8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm
ORG-A4R 2 Special ppr size set at stream read: A4R

Detail To set the size of special paper (A4R) that cannot be recognized at stream reading.
When picking up A4R size original from the DADF of the Inch/AB configuration models, the size
is converted into the specified size so that an image can be formed properly.
0: A4R, 1: FOLIO-R
Default Value 0
PDF-RDCT 2 PDF reduction set at forwarding

Detail To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting the image received by I-Fax
into PDF for e-mail/file transmission.
0: Following the current setting, 1: Image reduction
Default Value 0
770
8. Service Mode
SJB-UNW 2 Reserve upper limit of secured print job
To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secured print job.
When 0 or 1 is set, jobs that exceed the upper limit are canceled.
When 2 is set, jobs that exceed the upper limit are retained in the print server and they are
sequentially sent to the machine.
0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs, 2: 100 jobs
Default Value 1
CARD-RNG 2 Card number setting (department number)

Detail To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the Card Reader.
Use Case When setting the number of cards (departments)
Default Value 1000
SJOB-CL 1 Set of scan job canceling by logout

To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the user.
Caution The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled.
0: Cancel only scan job in waiting state, 1: Cancel all scan jobs, 2: Not canceled
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed.
MIBCOUNT 2 Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB

Detail To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB (Management Information
Base).
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only displayed counter* is obtained, 2: All charge counters
are not obtained
* : Counter specified by the following: COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER 1 to 6
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 - COUNTER6
771
8. Service Mode
CNTR-SW 1 Init of parts counter replacement timing
Detail To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value.
If either "00000000" or a value before the specification change is displayed in the estimated life
value of the parts counter, set 0 after upgrading of the firmware.
Use Case - When either "00000000" or a value before the specification change is displayed in the estimated
life value of the parts counter
- When changing the state back to the initial state after entering the estimated life value manually
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Returned to the initial value
Default Value 0
W/RAID 1 Set of HDD Mirroring Kit installation

Detail To set installation condition of HDD Mirroring Kit.
Select "1: Installed" when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit. Select "0: Not installed" when removing
the HDD Mirroring Kit.
Use Case When installing/removing HDD Mirroring Kit
Default Value 0
PSWD-SW 1 Password type set to enter service mode

Detail To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode.
2 types are available: one for "service technician" and the other for "system administrator + service
technician".
When selecting the type for "system administrator + service technician", enter the password for
service technician after the password entry by the user's system administrator.
Use Case Upon request from the user who concerns security
0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator + service technician
Default Value 0
SM-PSWD 2 Password setting for service technician

Detail To set password for service technician that is used when getting into service mode.
Use Case When password is required to get into service mode
Caution Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance.
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW
772
8. Service Mode
RPT2SIDE 1 Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output
Detail To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service mode.
Use Case When making 1-sided report output
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default Value 1
INVALPDL 1 Disable of PDL license

To disable the registered PDL license.
When "1: Disabled" is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered. This is set to the
machines installed at convenience stores, which do not allow PDL to be used.
Use Case When prohibiting the use of PDL
0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled
Default Value 0
IMGCNTPR 1 Setting of image quality mode

Detail To set the image quality mode.
When 0 is set, "image quality priority" mode is applied. When 1 is set, "counter priority" mode is
applied. When 2 is set, "image quality priority (photo)" mode is applied.
0: Image quality priority mode, 1: Counter priority mode, 2: Image priority (photo) mode
Default Value 1
CDS-FIRM 1 Set to allow firmware update by admin

To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform firmware update linked with CDS and
collection of log files.
When 1 is set, [Distribution Update] is added to remote UI, and [Firmware Update] is added to
[Register/Update Software] of local UI. Log files can be collected from remote UI.
Use Case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware
Caution Do not use it for purposes other than collecting log files.
Be sure to return the value to 0 after use.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> LCDSFLG
Additional Functions Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software
Mode
773
8. Service Mode
CDS-MEAP 1 Set to allow MEAP installation by admin
To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to install MEAP applications from CDS and enable
iR options.
When 1 is set, Updater can be activated from [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and enable iR options from CDS
Default Value 1
CDS-UGW 1 Set to allow firmware update from Server

To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the Remote Monitoring Server.
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater accepts the operation from the Remote Monitoring Server in
cooperation with CDS.
Use Case When allowing update of the firmware from the Remote Monitoring Server
LOCLFIRM 1 Set to allow firmware update by file

To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the firmware from the remote UI using
a local file.
This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency situations.
Use Case When allowing the administrator to update the firmware using a file
Default Value 1
BXNUPLOG 2 [Not used]

SDLMTWRN 1 [For customization]
AUTO-OUT 1 ON/OFF of jammed ppr auto ejctn function
Detail To set ON/OFF of jammed paper automatic ejection function.
When 1 is set, jammed paper is not delivered to the ejection position, but it stays at the current
position at jam occurrence.
Use Case - When user does not need automatic ejection of jammed paper
- When location of jammed paper is necessary to analyze the cause of a problem
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
774
8. Service Mode
JLK-PWSC 2 ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan
To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document with the MEAP application.
Use Case When scanning the PCAM password authentication document
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
FAX-INT 2 Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode

Detail To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception print automatically.
0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode
Default Value 0
PDL-Z-LG 1 Setting of drawing algorithm

Detail To switch the drawing algorithm of the iR C series and the iR-ADV C series to obtain output
expected by the user.
When 0 is set, image is output as displayed on the screen by the new algorithm adopted from the
iR-ADV C Series. Pseudo outline (boundary for processing divided graphics separately) occurred
with the iR C series does not occur. However, when PDL job with special data structure is sent,
output expected by the user may not be obtained.
When 1 is set, the drawing algorithm adopted by the conventional iR C series is used. Output
equivalent to that of the iR C Series can be obtained; however, drawing-related phenomenon
occurred with the series occurs.
Caution Do not use setting value 2 and 3.
0: Drawing algorithm of iR-ADV C series, 1: Drawing algorithm of the conventional iR C series, 2,
3: For R&D use
Default Value 0
CDS-LVUP 1 Set to allow CDS periodical update

To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform periodical update linked with CDS.
When 1 is set, setting of periodical update can be made in Settings/Registration menu/via remote
UI.
When 2 is set, setting of periodical update can be made on the Updater screen in service mode.
Use Case When allowing the user/service technician to perform periodical update
0: Prohibited periodical update
1: Display the periodical update setting screen in Settings/Registration menu/on remote UI
2: Display the periodical update setting screen on the Updater in service mode
Related Service Mode Updater
Additional Functions Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Periodical Update
Mode
775
8. Service Mode
AMSOFFSW 1 Enabling of AMS mode
To enable the AMS mode.
When 0 is set, the AMS mode is enabled. The AMS mode is automatically enabled when the
following 2 conditions are satisfied.
- AMS license for an iR option is installed.
- AMS-supported Login application (User Authentication, etc.) is activated.
Use Case When enabling AMS mode
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Check that AMS-supported Login application is activated.
2) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
4) Check that [Role Management] is displayed on remote UI.
0: AMS mode enabled, 1: AMS mode disabled
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR> ST-AMS
Additional Functions (Remote UI) User Management> Authentication Management> Role Management
Mode
Supplement/Memo AMS: Access Management System
In AMS mode, [Role Management] is displayed on remote UI.
UA-OFFSW 1 ON/OFF of unified auth function

To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function.
Set 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function because of security concern.
Use Case Upon user's request (not to use the Unified Authentication function)
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Unified Authentication: A function with which it is considered that login authentication under it is
performed by logging in it using SSO-H.
MIB-NVTA 1 RFC-compatible character stringMIB write

Detail As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in order to link with local UI entry
value. This violates RFC order, so a problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP
monitoring system, such as other vendor's MPS.
Whether to allow writing of non-RFC-compatible character strings in MIB can be set using this
item.
When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible with RFC are written. (Writing
operation is executed from the SNMP manager.) It is not linked with local UI.
Use Case Upon user's request (operation with RFC-compatible system)
0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo RFC: Document of internet-related technical standards
NVT-ASCII: Network Virtual Terminal-ASCII
MIB-EXT 1 For R&D
776
8. Service Mode
SVC-RUI 1 Enabling of remote UI func for servicing
Detail To set whether to enable the remote UI function for servicing (not provided to end users).
When 0 is set, the remote UI function is disabled.
When setting a value other than 0, the remote UI function is enabled and its value will be used as
the password to use the function.
Use Case When preferring to use the import function of background image file of main menu/custom menu
Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (other than 0), and then press OK key.
Default Value 0
LCDSFLG 1 Enabling of local CDS server

Detail To set whether to use the local CDS server.
When CDS-FIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
Use Case When using the local CDS server
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CDS-FIRM
Additional Functions Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Software Management
Mode Settings> Connection Server Settings
Supplement/Memo When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plug-in is required.
BXSHIFT 1 Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin

Detail To set whether to judge the job as a job "without binding" when storing a PDL job in Inbox while
the binding margin is set to "0".
By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while "0" is set, the job is processed as "without binding".
"Booklet" in "Options" on the Inbox screen can be also used.
When "1" is set, it is judged as "with binding" even the binding margin is 0 mm so "Booklet", which
has an exclusive relationship with "binding", cannot be used.
Caution When storing a PDL job in Mail Box while 1 is set, "Booklet" in "Options" on the Mail Box screen
cannot be used.
0: Without binding, 1: With binding
Default Value 0
SELF-CHK 2 For R&D

HOME-SW 1 Set screen displayed with Main Menu key
Detail To set whether to display the main menu screen or the screen registered as the startup screen
when pressing Main Menu key.
Use Case Upon user's request (to change the startup screen)
0: Main Menu screen, 1: Screen registered as the startup screen
Default Value 0
777
8. Service Mode
NO-LGOUT 1 Display/hide of logout button
To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button.
When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout with the ID key is enabled.
(Normal)
When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the ID key is disabled.
Use Case Upon user's request (for customization, etc.)
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default Value 0
JM-ERR-D 2 Set of error display of 0Cxx jam (DCON)

Detail To set whether to display 0Cxx jam as the error "E996-0Cxx".
In the case of a jam, log cannot be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the 0Cxx jam occurs, it is displayed as an error so that a log can be obtained.
"xx" represents any of the following: A1/A2/A3/A4/A5/A7/A8/AE/AF/B3/B4/B8/F0/F3.
Use Case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0Cxx jam
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R
JM-ERR-R 2 Set of error display of 0071 jam (RCON)

Detail To set whether to display 0071 jam as the error "E996-0071".
In the case of a jam, a log may not be able to be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the 0071 jam occurs, it is displayed as an error so that a log can be obtained.
Use Case When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D
ASLPMAX 1 Set auto sleep shift time maximum value

Detail Set auto sleep shift time maximum value.
0: 240minutes, 1: 120 minutes
778
8. Service Mode
SEND-SPD 2 ON/OFF of SEND operation speed-up
Detail To set whether to speed up the SEND operation.
Usually, speed of SEND/XBOX is increased by performing image conversion during SEND and
Scan.
Reading speed may decrease when scanning large size color original at high resolution or when
competing operation occurs with another job during scanning. Set 1 to keep the speed.
When failure with MEAP application occurs, set 1.
Use Case - When reading speed is decreased during SEND and Scan
- When failure with MEAP application occurs
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 1
TNNEWQCK 2 Set new Tonr Cntner chck seq aftr rplce

Detail To set whether to execute the new Toner Container check sequence after replacement.
In case of processing a large job immediately after replacement of the Toner Container when 0 is
set, downtime due to the new Toner Container check sequence occurs during the processing.
When 1 is set, control to print the specified number of sheets is turned OFF and the new Toner
Container check sequence is executed immediately after the replacement.
Use Case When downtime occurs due to the new Toner Container check sequence during the processing
of a large job
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TNNEWCNT
2TR-TBLS 1 Set sec transfer bias correction table

Detail To set the secondary transfer bias correction table according to the paper to be used.
Since physical properties of paper are different for each location, use the table according to the
paper to be used.
Use Case When using paper for a location other than the intended one
0: For Japan, 1: For locations other than Japan and USA, 2: For USA
Default Value JP:0 SG:1 PT:1 FR:1 KR:1 DK:1 NL:1 TW:1 PL:1 ES:1 EE:1 IT:1 RU:1 GR:1 CN:1 FI:1 SE:1 CZ:
1 US:2 AU:1 NO:1 SI:1 DE:1 HU:1 GB:1 AR:1 IN:1 OTHER:0
779
8. Service Mode
VER-CHNG 2 Setting of firmware update operation
Detail To set how to update firmware of PCB/option which has been installed/replaced by comparing the
version of it with the version stored in the Flash PCB of the Main Controller.
If combination of firmware versions of PCB/option stored in the Main Controller and the version in
PCB/option after installation/replacement is not appropriate (operation with the combination of
firmware versions has not yet been checked), failure where analysis is difficult may occur.
It is possible to check the firmware versions at the start of the machine, and automatically write
the firmware stored in the Main Controller in PCB/option collectively as needed.
When 0 is set, versions are not checked and firmware update is not performed. Therefore, it is
necessary to manually update the versions using a USB memory/SST.
When 1 is set, firmware is updated if the version in PCB/option is old. However, it is not updated
if the version is new or old and new versions are mixed.
When 2 is set, a compatible firmware (the version where operation has been checked) is written
from the Main Controller regardless of whether the version in PCB/option is old or new.
Use Case When installing/replacing PCB/option having firmware
0: Keep the current firmware version.
1: Update the firmware if the version in PCB/option is older than that stored in the Main controller.
If the version is new or old and new versions are mixed, firmware is not updated.
2: Update the firmware regardless of whether the version is old or new if the version in PCB/option
differs from that stored in the Main Controller.
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo When updating the firmware, the main menu is displayed on the Control Panel at startup and then
a message prompting to update firmware is displayed.
By pressing [Update], the machine reboots immediately and firmware is updated.
By pressing [Skip], it returns to the main menu. The message is displayed again at next startup.
FAX-STR 1 [For customization]

CE-SW 1 [Reserve]
LIMFNC-M 2 [For customization]
INTR-TML 2 Set ini rtn time: extra-long size ppr fd
Detail To set the offset of initial rotation time when feeding extra-long size paper.
When the result is a negative value, the time becomes "0 second".
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the edge, and decrease the value when
prioritizing productivity.
Use Case - When a fixing failure occurs on the edge while feeding extra-long size paper
- When reducing downtime
Caution As the value is larger, FCOT becomes longer.
If the value is too small, a fixing failure may occur on the edge.
-2: -15 seconds, -1: -10 seconds, 0: 0 second, 1: +5 seconds, 2: +10 seconds
Unit sec
Default Value 0
Unit
780
8. Service Mode
PREXP-SW 2 Set Clean Pre-exposure LED light condtn
Detail To set the condition to light up the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED.
When drum ghost occurs, set 1. If it is not alleviated, set 2.
Use Case When drum ghost occurs
Caution When 1 or 2 is set, horizontal lines due to charging may appear earlier.
0: Light up according to image information
1: Light up regardless of image information
2: Light up regardless of image information and light intensity is increased
3: For R&D use
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> EXP-LED> PR-EXP-Y/M/C/K, PR-EXPY2/EXPM2/EXPC2/EXPK2
PICLOGIN 1 ON/OFF of Picture Login display

Detail To set whether to display [Picture Login] in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When switching the Picture Login function
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Management Settings> User Management> Authentication Management> Use User
Mode Authentication> Picture Login
DCONRTRY 2 Set of retry at DCON comctn error occur

Detail To set whether to perform retry processing when communication error occurs between the Main
Controller and the DC Controller.
Set 1 to 3 when E733 occurs. Communication error may be avoided by retry. (It is effective
especially when E733-0001/0002/0005 occurs.)
If communication error occurs during finishing job while 3 is set, duplicated pages may be output
due to retry. In such case, set 0 to 2. Since retry is not performed during finishing job, duplication
of pages does not occur, but E733 occurs.
Use Case When E733 occurs
Caution When 3 is set, duplication of pages may occur during finishing job.
0: OFF
1: OFF during job, ON in other states
2: OFF during finishing job, ON in other states
3: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo Finishing job: Job that 2-sided print, binding and/or collate set in "Finishing" of the printer driver.
FL-START 2 [For customization]
781
8. Service Mode
RCONRTRY 2 Set process at RCON communication error
Detail To set the processing to be executed at occurrence of RCON communication error.
Normally, recovery is performed without displaying an error. A log is not collected.
Set 1 when recovery processing is performed frequently. An error is displayed and a log for analysis
can be collected.
Use Case When recovery processing due to RCON communication error is performed frequently
0: Perform recovery without collecting a log, 1: Collect a log and display an error
Default Value 0
JLG-FLT 2 Set job log tiered billing cntr record

Detail To set whether to record the values of tiered billing counters in job log.
When 1 is set, counter values are recorded.
When a value other than 0 is set for VC-CNT, this setting is enabled.
This item is displayed only with the machines for North America and Europe.
Use Case When the tiered billing counter values are required
0: OFF (Not recorded), 1: ON (Recorded)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> VC-CNT
3RDP-MSG 2 ON/OFF pop-up screen dspl after upgrade

Detail To set whether to display the screen to prompt the user to "Third-Party Software" at the first startup
after upgrading due to change in the platform version.
Use Case There will be no occasion to use this item intentionally.
Caution Even if 0 is set, the screen is displayed if CDS-LVUP is set to 0.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CDS-LVUP
■ DSPLY-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW
UI-COPY 2 ON/OFF of copy screen display
Detail To set whether to display or hide the copy function.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
782
8. Service Mode
UI-BOX 2 ON/OFF of Inbox screen display
To set whether to display the Inbox function.
The setting values "1" and "2" of this item are linked with the values "ON" and "OFF" of [Mail Box]
in [Settings/Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power.
1: Inbox function is active
2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with PDL to Inbox despite no display
on the Control Panel/remote UI)
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Mail Box
Mode
UI-SEND 2 ON/OFF of Send screen display

Detail To set whether to display or hide the SEND function.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
UI-FAX 2 ON/OFF of fax screen display

Detail To set whether to display or hide the FAX function.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
NWERR-SW 2 OFF/ON of network-related error display

Detail To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display.
When setting "0: OFF" while the machine is not connected to network, the error message "Check
the network connection." is not displayed.
Use Case When using the machine as a copy machine
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
783
8. Service Mode
FXMSG-SW 2 ON/OFF of Fixing Unit replace message
Detail To set whether to display the message prompting to replace the Fixing Unit on the Control Panel
when the counter for life judgment reaches the specified value.
When the setting values of FXMSG-SW and FXWRNLVL are 1, the Fixing Unit life detection is
performed.
When the Fixing Unit reaches its life, the Fixing Unit replacement message "Prepare new fixing
roller. Call service representative." is displayed.
Use Case When detecting the life of Fixing Unit
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> FXWRNLVL
UI-PRINT 2 Set of secured print-related UI display

Detail To set whether to display UI related to secured print.
0: Hide all UIs related to secured print
1: Display all UIs related to secured print
2: Hide Secured Print button in the main menu and the simple authentication settings in [Settings/
Registration]
Default Value 0
IMGC-ADJ 1 [Not used]

UI-RSCAN 2 ON/OFF of remote scan screen display
Detail To set whether to display the remote scan screen on the Control Panel.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
UI-WEB 2 ON/OFF of Web browser screen display

Detail To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
784
8. Service Mode
UI-HOLD 2 ON/OFF of hold job screen display
Detail To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel.
0: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is OFF)
1: Display (when POD function is ON and JAL is OFF)
2: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is ON)
3: Hide (when POD function is ON and JAL is ON)
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo POD function: JDF + HOLD functions
JAL function: A function to save the print result as a thumbnail.
HPFL-DSP 1 Set auto grdtn adj target select screen

Detail To set how to display the adjustment target selection screen at auto gradation adjustment (full
adjustment).
Use Case When executing full adjustment according to the usage status (paper type, resolution, etc.)
Caution When executing auto gradation adjustment with heavy paper or printer 1200 dpi dedicated mode,
be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment with plain paper first. If auto gradation adjustment
is not executed with plain paper and then heavy paper/printer 1200 dpi dedicated mode in that
order, it may cause difference in hue.
0: Hide
1: Display plain paper/heavy paper
2: Display standard/printer 1200 dpi dedicated mode
3: Display standard (plain paper)/standard (heavy paper)/printer 1200 dpi dedicated mode
Default Value 3
Mode
RMT-CNSL 1 Allow console application connection

Detail To set whether to allow connection from a console application (RemoteConsole).
When 1 is set, logs of MEAP application can be collected via the console application activated on
a PC.
Use Case When collecting logs of MEAP application
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
785
8. Service Mode
UI-SBOX 2 ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display
To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel.
The setting values 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are linked with OFF and ON of [Advanced Box/Network]
in [Settings/Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power.
Use Case When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel
0: OFF, 1: ON
Additional Functions Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Advanced Box/Network
Mode
UI-MEM 2 ON/OFF of memory media screen display

To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control Panel.
The setting values 0 (OFF) and 1 (ON) are linked with OFF and ON of [Memory Media] in [Settings/
Registration] respectively. The setting is reflected after turning OFF/ON the power.
Use Case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings> Memory Media
Mode
UI-NAVI 2 ON/OFF of Tutorial display

Detail To set whether to display or hide "Introduction to Useful Features" in the main menu.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
CLN-SEL 1 Set condensation prev:Clean Condensation

Detail To set the effect of drum cleaning for condensation prevention.
When 0 is set, "Clean Drum" is not displayed in [Settings/Registration].
When 1 to 3 is set, "Clean Drum" is displayed and the level of effect of drum cleaning can be set.
As the value is larger, the effect is increased because drum cleaning is executed more frequently,
but cleaning time is increased.
In the case of installation in a low temperature and high humidity environment (in winter), ask for
the user's opinion and configure the setting.
Use Case When condensation occurs in a low temperature and high humidity environment
0: OFF
1: ON (small effect, short cleaning time)
2: ON (moderate effect, medium cleaning time)
3: ON (large effect, long cleaning time)
Default Value 0
786
8. Service Mode
SDTM-DSP 1 ON/OFF of auto shutdown shift time dspl
Detail To set whether to display [Auto Shutdown Time] and [Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer] in [Settings/
Registration].
Caution When 0 is set, automatic shutdown is not executed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Additional Functions Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Shutdown Time, Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer
Mode
UI-PPA 2 ON/OFF of PPA screen display

Detail To set whether to display PPA-related information on the Control Panel or remote UI.
The setting is linked with LGCY-SCP. When LGCY-SCP is set to 0, the setting of this item becomes
1. When LGCY-SCP is set to 1, the setting of this item becomes 0.
Use Case When not displaying PPA-related information on the screen
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0 (non PPA-installed machine)/1 (PPA-installed machine)
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> LGCY-SCP
Supplement/Memo PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to hold print job. It contains the secured print function.
COM10-DL 2 ON/OFF of DL/COM10 landscape display

Detail To set whether to display landscape direction for DL/COM10 (envelope) on the Select Paper
screen of the Cassette 1.
Use Case Upon user's request (to change the feed direction to landscape due to setting of a small number
of envelopes on the Multi-purpose Tray and low productivity with portrait feeding)
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set DL/COM10 on the Cassette 1 (landscape direction).
2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that jam may occur to improve productivity.
0: OFF (display only portrait feeding), 1: ON
Default Value 0
CE-DSP 2 [Reserve]
LOCAL-SZ 1 ON/OFF area-spec stdrd size ppr set scrn
Detail To set whether to display the area-specific standard size paper on the paper settings screen in
[Settings/Registration].
When 1 is set, paper type (FOOLSCAP, OFICIO, etc.) can be set on the paper settings screen for
each paper source.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings
Mode
787
8. Service Mode
VC-HIST 2 ON/OFF tiered base pricing log display
Detail To set whether to display the video count logs of the tiered base pricing.
When 1 is set, logs of video count correction value can be displayed on the Check Counter screen.
Use Case When explaining the tiered base pricing status to the user
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> VC-AVE
Supplement/Memo Video count correction value: Average of the video count values for 3 colors (Y/M/C) or 4 colors
(Y/M/C/Bk). Whether to include Bk-color needs to be set in VC-AVE.
SND-NAME 1 Setting of [Scan and Send] button name

Detail To set the name of [Scan and Send] button displayed in the main menu.
0: [Scan and Send], 1: [Scan], 2: [Scan]
Default Value 0
PCMP-DSP 1 Set copy cmpl scrn dspl:chg w/devc alone

Detail To set whether to display the screen indicating completion of copying at the time of charging with
a device alone.
When 0 is set, a message "Copying is complete. Do you want to start the job again with the same
settings?" is not displayed in a pop-up screen.
When COIN is 4, this setting is enabled.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN
EXTH-SW 1 ON/OFF coat 5 UI display: MP Tray pickup

Detail To set whether to display "1-Sided Coated 5" and "2-Sided Coated 5" on the Select Paper screen
at the time of pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray.
Use Case When installing the Media Adjustment Kit
Caution When the Inner Finisher is installed, delivery operation of large paper (257 to 300 g/m2) differs
depending on whether the 3 Way Unit is installed.
- When the 3 Way Unit is installed, paper is delivered to the Second Delivery Tray of the Inner
Finisher.
- When the 3 Way Unit is not installed, job is canceled.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Select Paper> Multi-Purpose Tray
Mode
ERR-DISP 2 [For customization]
788
8. Service Mode
SVC-ACA 1 Display of ACA installation button
Detail To set whether to display the [Install Auto Configuration Agent] button on the CDS Updater screen
(user mode/service mode).
Use Case When switching to install/not to install the ACA via network
0: Hide (Hide user mode/service mode)
1: Display only service mode (Hide user mode)
2: Display all (Display user mode/service mode)
Related Service Mode Service Mode > Updater
Additional Functions Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software
Mode
Supplement/Memo ACA : Auto Configuration Agent
RMT-CNCT 2 Sw mssg dspl on machine w/o Svr connect

Detail To set whether to display the message "Contact your service representative." to the customer who
uses the machine without having Remote Monitoring Server connected.
Use Case When switching to display or hide the message depending on whether Remote Monitoring Server
is connected or not
Caution This applies only to the messages displayed in the event of a toner memory detection error. (Alarm
code: 10-0091/-0092/-0093/-0094)
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
SVC-SRA 1 Display/hide of DBS installation button

Detail To set whether to display the [Install Data Backup Service] button on the CDS Updater screen
(user mode/service mode).
Use Case When switching to install/not to install the Data Backup Service via network
Caution Depending on the setting value, display when entering from Settings/Registration and that from
service mode differ.
0: Hide (Hide user mode/service mode)
1: Display only service mode (Hide user mode)
2: Display all (Display user mode/service mode)
Related Service Mode Service Mode> Updater> Install Data Backup Service
Additional Functions Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Install Data Backup Service
Mode
789
8. Service Mode
LF-DSP-S 2 Set Display/Hide Life VL in Service Mode
Detail To set whether to display Life Value and Replacement Life Value on the service mode counter
screen.
If this option is set to 1, Life Value is displayed in the third column and Replacement Life Value in
the fourth column of all items under COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE.
Use Case When displaying Live Value and Replacement Life Value
Caution Change the setting in accordance with the instruction of the sales company HQ.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value The value differs according to the location.
Related Service Mode COPIER > COUNTER > LIFE
LF-DSP-U 2 Dspy/hide Chk Consumable State/Days Left

Detail To set whether to display the "Status" and "Number of Days Left" in Status Monitor/Cancel >
Consmbls./Others > Check Consumables.
Use Case When switching display/hide the Status and Number of Days Left.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Additional Functions Status Monitor/Cancel > Consmbls./Others > Consumables
Mode
ERRL-DSP 1 For R&D

JLG-UD-D 1 [For customization]
UFOS-DSP 1 Display/hide of uniFLOW Setup
Detail Service mode to switch to display or hide [uniFLOW Setup].
Use Case When to switch to display or hide [uniFLOW Setup]
0: Hide, 1: Display
Additional Functions Main Menu > uniFLOW Setup
Mode
Supplement/Memo uniFLOW : The name of the product destined for China is "mdsFLOW".
SVC-DAT 1 For R&D
790
8. Service Mode
■ NETWORK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK
RAW-DATA 2 Setting of received data print mode
Detail To set print mode for the received image data.
This item is used to identify the cause whether it's due to image data or image processing in the
case of problem with received image.
Use Case When a problem with received image occurs
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after recovering from the problem.
0: Normal print operation, 1: Print with original data without image processing
Default Value 0
IFAX-LIM 2 No. of max print lines at IFAX reception

Detail To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed when receiving IFAX.
Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file data in the case of receiving
an error e-mail or failure in interpretation of the context.
Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail text without attached file.
Use Case When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception
0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited
Default Value 500
SMTPTXPN 2 Setting of SMTP TX port number

To set SMTP transmission port number.
Default Value 25
SMTPRXPN 2 Setting of SMTP reception port number

To set SMTP reception port number.
Default Value 25
POP3PN 2 Setting of POP3 reception port number

To set POP3 reception port number.
Default Value 110
791
8. Service Mode
FTPTXPN 2 Specification of SEND port (FTP) number
To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND.
Default Value 21
NS-CMD5 2 Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth

To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is
the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol
executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the
user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.
NS-GSAPI 2 Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth

To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Default Value 0
NS-NTLM 2 Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth

To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication.
Default Value 0
792
8. Service Mode
NS-PLNWS 2 Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry
To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP
authentication under the environment where the communication packet is encrypted.
Default Value 0
NS-PLN 2 Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry

To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP
authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted.
Default Value 0
NS-LGN 2 Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth

To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP authentication.
Default Value 0
MEAP-PN 2 HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application

To set HTTP port number of MEAP application.
Caution Do not specify port 8080 when the Print Server is connected. Otherwise, you cannot browse the
device RUI in which MEAP authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for
redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.)
Default Value 8000
793
8. Service Mode
MEAP-SSL 2 HTTPS port setting of MEAP
To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP of MEAP.
Use Case When specifying the setting of HTTPS port for MEAP
Default Value 8443
LPD-PORT 2 Setting of LPD port number

To set the LPD port number.
Default Value 515
Supplement/Memo LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making prints through network.
WUEN-LIV 2 Recovery time setting after sleep notice

Detail To set the time from the sleep start from network without job assignment until the mode is shifted
to the sleep mode.
Use Case When setting the startup time after sleep notification
Unit sec
Default Value 15
Unit
IFX-CHIG 1 Set operation by IFAX recv mail content

Detail To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content, so that the mail is not printed/
forwarded when the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters.
This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e-mail text consists of linefeed
codes only. In such case, specify 2 (number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank
paper.
In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is printed/forwarded in 1 sheet
only if the e-mail (body) text is less than the specified value while no TIFF file is attached.
As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in e-mail body text is increased
by 1 character.
Use Case When reducing print of blank paper due to e-mail received by IFAX
Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no print of e-mail (body) text if
the number of characters is less than the specified value.
0: E-mail (body) text is not ignored.
Unit char
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo 1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control codes (such as linefeed code,
etc) are included in the number of characters.
794
8. Service Mode
DNSTRANS 1 Setting of DNS query priority protocol
To set priority of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) for DNS query.
In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server supports IPv4, it takes time because
of timeout when executing DNS query with priority on IPv6. Giving priority on query by IPv4 can
shorten the time.
Use Case When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6 because the DNS server supports
IPv4
0: IPv4, 1: IPv6
Default Value 1
PROXYRES 2 Setting of proxy response to Windows

To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status when an inquiry is received
via Windows while the device is in sleep mode.
Use Case When executing status response for query from Windows correctly
0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response
Default Value 1
WOLTRANS 1 ON/OFF sleep recover by packet reception

To set whether to recover from deep sleep when receiving unicast packets to the machine
(excluding proxy response).
1: ON, 2: OFF
Default Value 1
802XTOUT 1 Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout

To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time for response from the
authentication server.
Use Case When response from the authentication server is slow/fast
Unit sec
Default Value 30
Unit
795
8. Service Mode
SPDALDEL 2 Initialization of SPD value
To initialize all the SPD values that are under management.
SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
Use Case At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SPD: Database that manages SA (Security Association).
SPD value is managed when IPSec Board is used. Normally, SRAM needs to be cleared in the
case of mismatch in SPD value.
NCONF-SW 1 ON/OFF of Network Configurator function

To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function.
If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote attack through network.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo Network Configurator function is a function to be used for communication with NetSpot Device
Installer, etc., and the network setting can be changed from the remote.
AFS-JOB 1 Set of FAX server job reception port

To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends jobs.
Use Case When changing the job reception port of the fax server
Default Value 20317
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT
AFC-EVNT 1 Set of FAX client event reception port

To set the event notification reception port of a fax client.
Use Case When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client
Default Value 29400
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB
796
8. Service Mode
ILOGMODE 1 Setting of filter log target packet
To set the target packet to be recorded in the filter log.
Usually, only the unicast packets to the machine are recorded in the filter log by PFW (personal
firewall).
When 1 is set, address filter is enabled for all protocols so all packets are recorded in the filter log.
However, logs of multicast/broadcast packets sent from a harmless device or an address that are
subject to rejection and have no direct relation to the machine are also recorded, and consequently
the number of logs is increased.
Use Case Upon user's request (to collect all filter logs)
Caution When 1 is set, the number of logs is increased because logs of packets which have no direct
relation to the machine are recorded.
0: Unicast packets to the machine only, 1: All packets
Default Value 0
ILOGKEEP 1 Set of IP address block log hold time

To set the retention time from the log time of IP block.
When access is made again from a same IP address which was blocked before, if it is within the
retention time of the previous log, its log is not recorded.
If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record of the UI might be filled with
its logs. If the user considers that a single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer
retention time.
0: 1 minute (special mode)
1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours
Default Value 1
IPTBROAD 1 Set to allow broad/multicast TX

To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets.
Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted without specifying an
exception address. It is permitted within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the
IPv4/v6 transmission filter.
Set "1: Disabled" when the user does not want to send them.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used
Default Value 0
797
8. Service Mode
PFWFTPRT 1 Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND
When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from a specific remote PC are
rejected, SYN is returned to the port 113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113.
However, since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased and the performance
is lowered.
When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking packets.
Use Case When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports authentication of the FTP port 113
while the IP filter is enabled
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
DDNSINTV 1 Set of DDNS periodical update interval

Detail DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current iR, so the registered contents
are deleted in an environment where the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals.
To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the registered contents.
Use Case When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals
0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47: 47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour
interval
Unit hour
Default Value 24
SIPAUDIO 2 Set of SIP session establishment order

Detail To set whether to establish audio session or T.38 session first with SIP.
Usually, audio session followed by T.38 session is established when using IPFAX in an intranet
environment. However, this order is not specified by the standard.
Set 1 when connecting the SIP server or terminal where the session starts with T.38 session.
Use Case When connecting the SIP server or terminal where the session starts with T.38 session
Caution When 1 is set, IPFAX fails with the destination where the session starts with audio session.
0: audio, 1: T.38
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
SIPINOUT 2 Set of internal/external number to URI

Detail To set whether to store the external number or the internal number in From URI when using NGN.
Use Case When a call cannot be made with external number while using NGN
0: External number, 1: Internal number
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo NGN: Next Generation Network
URI: Uniform Resource Identifier
798
8. Service Mode
SIPREGPR 2 Setting of registrar server use protocol
Detail To set the protocol used for communication with registrar server.
Although the protocol that is the same as the one for proxy server is usually used, another protocol
can be used in accordance with user and environment.
Use Case Upon user's request (to use a protocol different from the one for proxy server)
0: Protocol set in Settings/Registration menu, 1: UDP, 2: TCP, 3: SSL
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> SIP Settings> Intranet Settings
Mode
VLAN-SW 2 ON/OFF VLAN participation packets send

Detail To set whether to send packets for participating in dynamic VLAN at link-up.
Use Case When participating in dynamic VLAN
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo - VLAN (Virtual LAN): A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the hub, switch
connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc.
- At link-up: At startup, when LAN cable is connected, when recovering from deep sleep, when
pressing the button to reflect the setting (dynamic update)
- If IP address of the machine has not been set, an IP address is assigned after participating in
VLAN.
FTPMODE 1 Set of FTP print default operation mode

Detail To set the default operation mode of FTP print.
Switch the default operation mode between ASCII mode and BIN mode in accordance with user's
environment.
0: ASCII mode, 1: BIN mode
Default Value 0
SSLMODE 2 Setting of HTTP/HTTPS port open/close

To set whether to open or close HTTP/HTTPS port.
When 1 is set while [Use HTTP] is ON and [Use TLS] is OFF in Settings/Registration menu, HTTP
port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed.
When 2 is set while both [Use HTTP] and [Use TLS] are ON in Settings/Registration menu, HTTP
port is closed whereas HTTPS port is opened.
Use Case When limiting the port to open because of security concern
0: Normal, 1: Open HTTP port (80/8000) only, 2: Open HTTPS port (443/8443) only
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> Use HTTP
Mode Management Settings> License/Other> MEAP Settings> Use TLS
799
8. Service Mode
SSLSTRNG 2 Allow weak encryption algorithm for SSL
Detail To set whether to allow using weak encryption algorithm for SSL.
When 1 is set, weak encryption algorithm cannot be used.
Use Case When prohibiting weak encryption algorithm because of security concern
0: Normal mode, 1: Secured mode (TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA and TLS_RSA_WITH_
RC4_128_MD5 are not used)
Default Value 1
NW-WAIT 2 Set connect wait at deep sleep recovery

Detail To set whether to send wakeup notice after the time set in Settings/Registration menu has elapsed
when recovering from deep sleep.
When 0 is set, wakeup notice is sent after "Waiting Time for Connection at Startup" has elapsed.
When 1 is set, wakeup notice is sent when the machine becomes ready for communication.
Use Case When a failure of the device management tool occurs
0: Wait, 1: Not wait
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Network> Waiting Time for Connection at Startup
Mode
WLAN-USE 2 Setting of wireless LAN invalidation

Detail To set whether to disable the wireless LAN.
Bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment may be prohibited depending on user.
In such case, set 0 to prevent the wireless LAN to be used. When 0 is set, [Wireless Connection
Settings] is not displayed in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment is prohibited
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> Network> Wireless Connection Settings
Mode
WLANPORT 2 Set of port filter at wireless LAN side

To set whether to open all ports at the wireless LAN side.
When 0 is set, only the specific port is opened (filter is enabled).
Set 1 when using an application which uses a port other than the specific port. All ports are opened
(filter is disabled).
0: Open the specific port, 1: Open all ports
Default Value 0
RAW-PORT 2 [For customization]
800
8. Service Mode
LINKWAKE 2 Set of deep sleep recovery at link-up
Detail To set whether to recover from deep sleep when link-up (disconnection and then connection of
LAN cable) is detected.
Set 0 if the closest hub or switch chatters at link-up. It can prevent recovery from deep sleep
triggered by chattering.
Use Case When the machine recovers from deep sleep due to chattering of the closest hub or switch
0: Not recovered, 1: Recovered
Default Value 1
WIFIRFCH 2 For R&D

Unit
BLEPOWER 2 Set of Bluetooth radio field strength

Detail To set the radio field strength for transmission over BLE (Bluetooth Low Energy).
As the value is changed by 1, the radio field strength is changed by 1 dBm.
Use Case When radio field strength of BLE is not appropriate
Caution Do not change the setting in Singapore. It is prohibited by law.
Display/Adj/Set Range -10 to -1 (-10 to -1 dBm)
Default Value -5
WSMC-USE 2 [Not used]

WSMC-RST 2 [Not used]
INTENT 2 For R&D
UUID-SW 2 UUID generation method change
Detail To change to the new UUID generation method when a failure due to the UUID conflict occurred.
Use Case When the UUID conflict between multiple devices occurred with following symptoms
- When searching for the device, one of devices can't be found or the same device is duplicated
- When using AirPrint from MacOS, second and later devices cannot be used for scanning
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Change the setting to "1", and then press OK key.
3) Delete the registered deice from a PC or mobile device.
4) Execute the device search and register the machine to the PC or mobile device.
Caution - After updating the UUID, it is necessary to delete the device and then add the device again from
the printer driver, etc.
0: Old method, 1: New method
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo UUID : Universally Unique Identifier
This is a unique identifier that is not shared by 2 or more items in the world.
It is used to search and register the device on IPP/AirPrint.
801
8. Service Mode
■ ENV-SET
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET
ENVP-INT 1 Temp&hmdy/Fix Film temp log get cycle
Detail To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine and the surface
temperature of the Fixing Film.
As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute.
Collected log can be displayed in COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT.
Use Case At problem analysis
Unit min
Default Value 60
Related Service Mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT
Unit
DRY-CISU 1 ON/OFF of condensation prev mode: 1-path

Detail To set whether to enable the condensation prevention mode when using the DADF (1-path model).
Set 1 when an image failure or E302 occurs due to condensation in the Scanner Unit. From the
next startup, the LED of the Scanner Unit (for back side) lights for 30 seconds after completion of
a job.
Use Case When droplets appear on the Scanner Unit due to condensation and image failure or E302 occurs
0: OFF (Normal mode), 1: ON (Condensation prevention mode)
Default Value 0
AINR-TM 2 Set time not in use for drum idl rtn exe
Detail To set the time the machine is not in use that is the condition to execute idle rotation of the drum.
When the machine is not used for more than the specified time, idle rotation of the drum (60
seconds) is executed at warm-up rotation.
Decrease the value when uneven density occurs at certain intervals on the image at the beginning
of a workday after holidays (the beginning of week is assumed).
When 0 is set, idle rotation of the drum is not executed.
Use Case When uneven density at intervals of the Primary Charging Roller or Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller circumference occurs on the image printed at the beginning of a workday after holidays
Caution When idle rotation of the drum is executed, it takes long time for startup than usual.
0: OFF, 1 to 7: Not used, 8: 8 hours, ..., 60: 60 hours
Unit hour
Default Value 0
Unit
802
8. Service Mode
INTRTMPL 2 Set initial rotn extsn condtn: low temp
Detail To set temperature inside the machine and process speed that are the conditions to extend the
initial rotation time at low temperature.
Use Case When black lines in vertical scanning direction appear at approx. 30 mm from the image leading
edge
Caution FCOT becomes approx. 1 second longer.
0: 18 deg C or lower, 1/2 speed
1: 18 deg C or lower, 1/1 speed, 1/2 speed
2: Whole temperature range, 1/1 speed, 1/2 speed
Default Value 0
INTRTMPH 2 Set initial rotn extsn condtn: high temp

Detail To set temperature inside the machine and process speed that are the conditions to extend the
initial rotation time at high temperature.
Use Case When uneven density/blur at intervals of drum circumference occurs
Caution FCOT becomes approx. 4 seconds longer.
0: 40 deg C or higher, 1: Whole temperature range, 2: Disabled
Default Value 0
LES-CNDS 2 Set of condensation prevention mode

Detail To set the mode to prevent condensation.
When 1 or 2 is set, idle rotation of the Reverse Roller is performed even when paper is delivered
to the First Delivery Tray in the case of 1-sided output.
In the case of 2-sided output, operation differs depending on whether the 3 Way Unit is installed.
When the 3 Way Unit is installed, paper is always delivered via the large path regardless of paper
size.
When the 3 Way Unit is not installed, idle rotation of the Fixing Unit is performed for the specified
time before the start of a job.
Use Case - When condensation occurs
- When white lines appear on the 2nd side with 2-sided continuous feeding
Caution - Drive noise becomes approx. 0.6 to 1.4 dB louder due to idle rotation of the Reverse Roller.
- When the 3 Way Unit is installed, productivity decreases.
- When the 3 Way Unit is not installed, FCOT becomes longer.
- When the 3 Way Unit is installed:
0: Normal, 1, 2: Pass through the large path at 2-sided feed
- When the 3 Way Unit is not installed:
0: Normal, 1: 30 seconds, 2: 60 seconds
Default Value 0
803
8. Service Mode
CLD-REV 2 Set reverse rotation: Photo-s Drum stop
Detail To set whether to rotate the CL Drum Motor reversely when the Photosensitive Drum (Y/M/C) is
stopped.
Performing reverse rotation enables to prevent white lines in horizontal scanning direction due to
the backlash of stop, but noise may occur in a low temperature environment.
When 0 is set, reverse rotation is turned OFF if room temperature is lower than 10 deg C, and ON
if the temperature is 10 deg C or higher.
Use Case - When noise occurs at reverse rotation of the drum
- When uneven density/blur at intervals of drum circumference occurs
Caution Without performing reverse rotation, uneven density/blur at intervals of drum circumference may
occur.
0: OFF when room temperature is lower than 10 deg C, and ON when the temperature is 10 deg
C or higher, 1: ON, 2: OFF
Default Value 0
■ CLEANING
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CLEANING
OHP-PTH 2 Set of ITB clean transp threshold value
Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute ITB cleaning when feeding transparency.
When a large number of transparencies is fed, surface active agent adheres to the ITB, and
consequently the transfer efficiency is lowered, causing an image failure. Normally, a solid single
Bk-color patch with 80 mm width is formed on the ITB, and surface active agent is removed together
with the toner every time after feeding 10 sheets at paper interval and 5 sheets at last rotation.
As the value is changed by 1, the number of sheets at paper interval and last rotation is changed
by 1 sheet.
When the value is decreased in the case of using transparency to which surface active agent is
more likely to be adhered, image failure can be alleviated.
When the value is increased, downtime and toner consumption can be reduced, but image failure
may occur.
Use Case When an image failure occurs due to decrease in the transfer efficiency
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
804
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CLEANING
ITB-CL-L 2 Set toner band length: ITB Clean Blade
Detail To set the length of toner band for preventing flipping of the ITB Cleaning Blade.
Increase the value when noise comes from the ITB due to the flipping. If the length of toner band
gets longer, flipping can be prevented, but toner consumption is increased.
When 0 is set, toner band is not formed.
Use Case - When noise comes from the ITB
- When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user
0: OFF, 1: 1 mm, 2: 2 mm, ..., 100: 100 mm
Unit mm
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> ITB-CL-T
Unit
ITB-CL-T 2 Set toner band form intvl: ITB Cln Blade

Detail To set the interval to form toner band for preventing flipping of the ITB Cleaning Blade.
The interval is determined by entering the amount of increase/decrease (sheet) compared to the
specified number of fed sheets.
Decrease the value when noise comes from the ITB due to the flipping. If the interval to form toner
band is decreased, flipping can be prevented, but toner consumption is increased.
Use Case - When noise comes from the ITB
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> ITB-CL-L
■ FEED-SW
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW
EVLP-SPD 1 Setting of envelope feeding speed
Detail To set the feeding speed of envelope.
By feeding an envelope at 1/2 speed (default) in the case of a high humidity environment, the glue
flap may adhere at the time of fixing. As a result of that, the envelope may not be opened.
When 1/1 speed is set, adhesion can be prevented, but fixing performance is decreased in a low
humidity environment.
Use Case When a glue flap of envelope adheres
Caution When 1 is set in a low humidity environment, fixing performance is decreased.
0: 1/2 speed, 1: 1/1 speed
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> EVLP-FS
805
8. Service Mode
PINT-REG 2 Set img pstn crrct exe frqcy: ppr intvl
Detail To set the frequency to execute image position correction control at paper interval.
When 1 is set, frequency is increased. Compared with the default setting, the interval becomes
shorter. In addition, the machine becomes sensitive to change in temperature and the control is
executed even with B&W image. Color displacement is less likely to occur, but productivity is
decreased.
Use Case When color displacement occurs frequently
Caution When 1 is set, productivity is decreased.
0: Default, 1: High frequency, 2 to 4: For R&D
Default Value 0
EVLP-FS 2 Setting of fixing speed: envelope

Detail To set fixing speed when feeding envelope.
As the value is changed by 1, the fixing speed is changed by 0.1%.
Decrease the value when fine line displacement occurs on trailing edge of envelope, and increase
the value when wrinkles occur.
Use Case When fine line displacement or wrinkles occur on trailing edge while feeding envelope
Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time. Otherwise, fine line displacement/wrinkles occur
when setting an extreme value.
Unit %
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> EVLP-SPD
Unit
TFL-RTC 1 Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full

Detail To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after recovering the Delivery Tray
that reaches the full level.
When 0 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination again from which the last job was
delivered.
When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which priority is set as high at "Output
Tray Settings" in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When changing the delivery tray
0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output, 1: Output from the delivery destination
which priority is high among the delivery trays
Default Value 0
Mode
806
8. Service Mode
REGASST 1 Set pre-registration feed assist control
Detail To set whether to rotate the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller for longer than usual (pre-registration
feed assist control) when feeding paper with 158.6 mm or more in length from the Multi-purpose
Tray.
Set any value other than 1 according to the paper type and paper weight when print displacement
or 0106 jam occurs with heavy paper or coated paper.
0: ON only for heavy paper 7 (257 to 300 g/m2), coated paper 4/5 (221 to 300 g/m2) and custom
size envelope
2: ON only for heavy paper 1 to 7 (106 to 300 g/m2), coated paper 4/5 (221 to 300 g/m2), reply/4
on 1 postcard and standard/custom size envelope
3: ON only for heavy paper 7 (257 to 300 g/m2) and coated paper 1 to 5 (106 to 300 g/m2)
4: ON only for heavy paper 1 to 7 (106 to 300 g/m2), coated paper 1 to 5 (106 to 300 g/m2), reply/
4 on 1 postcard and standard/custom size envelope
As the rotation time of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller becomes longer, drive noise becomes
louder. If the user concerns the noise, set 1.
Use Case - When print displacement or 0106 jam occurs with heavy paper or coated paper
- Upon user's request (to reduce drive noise of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller)
Caution Drive noise of the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller becomes louder during execution of pre-
registration feed assist control.
0: ON (heavy paper 7, coated paper 4/5 and custom size envelope only)
1: OFF
2: ON (heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 4/5, reply/4 on 1 postcard and standard/custom size
envelope only)
3: ON (heavy paper 7 and coated paper 1 to 5 only)
4: ON (heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to 5, reply/4 on 1 postcard and standard/custom size
envelope only)
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Pre-registration feed assist control: A control to assist feeding of heavy paper and coated paper
by rotating the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller longer than usual at the time of pickup from the
Multi-purpose Tray.
■ IMG-SPD
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-SPD
FX-D-TMP 1 Set small paper down sequence start temp
Detail To set temperature to start the down sequence control to small size paper (length in width direction
is less than that of A4R).
When a negative value is entered, the temperature is decreased by 5 deg C from the initial setting
temperature. When a positive value is entered, it is increased by 2 deg C (upper limit is 273 deg
C).
Use Case When alleviating fixing offset on the edge of paper and improving productivity
-4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: 2 deg C, 2: 4 deg C, 3: 6
deg C, 4: 8 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
807
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-SPD
FIX-ROT 1 Set idle rotn stop temp after s-ppr feed
Detail Temperature on the edges of the Fixing Film becomes higher than the temperature at the center
when feeding large size paper after small size paper through the Fixing Unit. Idle rotation is
executed until temperature is decreased to the specified value after feeding small size paper to
prevent occurrence of fixing offset or wrinkles.
To set the temperature that is the condition to stop idle rotation.
As the value is larger, temperature is decreased. Image quality can be improved, but downtime is
increased.
When the value is decreased, downtime is decreased, but uneven gloss may occur.
Use Case When alleviating fixing offset/uneven gloss on the paper edge or improving productivity
-2: +10 deg C, -1: +5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: -5 deg C, 2: -10 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
ARC-INT1 2 Set ARCDAT control interruption interval

Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT control is executed.
When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, the control is executed at paper intervals
by interrupting an ongoing job.
Decrease the value when the density varies dramatically. As the value is smaller, density variation
is decreased, but productivity is also decreased.
Increase the value when preferring to minimize decrease in productivity due to interruption. As the
value is larger, productivity is increased, but there is a difference in density before and after the
interruption.
Use Case - When the density varies dramatically
- When preferring to minimize decrease in productivity due to interruption
Unit sheet
Default Value 100
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-SPD> ARC-INT2
Unit
ARC-INT2 2 Set ARCDAT ctrl exe intvl: last rotation

Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute ARCDAT control at lost rotation.
ARCDAT control is not executed at paper interval while feeding the specified number of sheets
from the start of a job. ARCDAT control which is supposed to be executed during feeding of the
specified number of sheets is executed at last rotation of the previous job.
As the value is increased, the number of interruptions during a job is reduced so productivity is
increased.
Use Case When preferring to minimize decrease in productivity due to interruption
Caution Do not set a value larger than that of ARC-INT1.
Unit sheet
Default Value 70
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-SPD> ARC-INT1
Unit
808
8. Service Mode
■ IMG-RDR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR
DFDST-L1 1 Adj img crrct level: stream read, front
Detail To set whether to perform image correction between originals in the Scanner Unit (for front side)
at stream reading based on the result of dust detection.
- In the case of DADF (reverse model)
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the image is more likely to be
corrected because the machine is more likely to respond to small dust.
Decrease the value if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction control.
As the value is smaller, the image is less likely to be corrected because the machine is less likely
to respond to dust.
Set one of 1 to 255 when black lines appear. Dust detection is performed and image is corrected
as needed.
Set 0 if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction control. In that case,
dust detection is not performed.
Use Case - When black line occurs due to dust
- Upon user's request
Caution In the case of DADF (reverse model), note the following points.
- If the value is too large, a fine image portion may be unclear. If the value is too small, black lines
may appear on the image.
- When the value of DFDST-L1 is changed to any value other than 0 while the values of DFDST-
L1 and DFDST-L2 are 0, the value of DFDST-L2 is returned to the previous value (a value before
setting 0).
- When setting 0 for DFDST-L2, the value of DFDST-L1 also become 0 automatically (image
correction is not performed).
0: OFF
1 to 255: ON (DADF (1-path model) only)
Default Value 200
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-RDR> DFDST-L2
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.
809
8. Service Mode
DFDST-L2 1 Adj dust dtct level: stream read, front
Detail - In the case of DADF (reverse model)
To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit (for
front side) after a stream reading job is completed.
To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit (for
front side) at start of the first stream reading after power-on.
Decrease the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust
detection. As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected. When 0 is set, the cleaning
instruction is not displayed.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Use Case - When black line appears due to dust
Caution - If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small
dust that will not appear on the image can be detected.
- If the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
- In the case of DADF (reverse model), note the following points.
- When the value of DFDST-L1 is changed to any value other than 0 while the values of DFDST-
L1 and DFDST-L2 are 0, the value of DFDST-L2 is returned to the previous value (a value before
setting 0).
- When setting 0 for DFDST-L2, the value of DFDST-L1 also become 0 automatically (image
correction is not performed).
0: OFF
Default Value 200
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-RDR> DFDST-L1
Supplement/Memo With the dust avoidance control, reading position is adjusted to minimize dust to be least detected.
The control is performed at start of the first job after power-on in the case of DADF (1-path model);
whereas it is performed every time a job is completed in the case of DADF (reverse model).
DF2DSTL1 1 ON/OFF img crrct: stream, back, 1-path

Detail To set whether to perform image correction between originals in the Scanner Unit (for back side)
at stream reading with DADF (1-path model) based on the result of dust detection.
Set one of 1 to 255 when black lines appear. Dust detection is performed and image is corrected
as needed.
Set 0 if a fine image portion is unclear as a result of dust detection correction control. In that case,
dust detection is not performed.
0: OFF, 1 to 255: ON
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust detection correction control, the
image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.
810
8. Service Mode
DF2DSTL2 1 Adj dust dtct level:stream, back, 1-path
Detail To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit (for
back side) at the first stream reading with DADF (1-path model) after power-on.
Decrease the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust
detection. As the value is smaller, dust is less likely to be detected. When 0 is set, the cleaning
instruction is not displayed.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely to
be detected.
Use Case - When black line appears due to dust
Caution If the value is too large, the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust
that will not appear on the image can be detected.
If the value is too small, black lines may appear on the image.
0: OFF
Default Value 200
Supplement/Memo Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With the dust avoidance control executed at
start of the first job after power-on, reading position is adjusted to minimize dust to be least
detected.
■ IMG-MCON
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON
PASCAL 1 Set of auto gradation adjustment data
Detail To set the gradation adjustment data that is used at image formation.
When 0 is set, the initial LUT is used.
When 1 is set, the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation
adjustment (full/quick adjustment) control is used.
Use Case When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of PASCAL-related failure
0: Initial LUT, 1: Auto gradation adjustment data, 2 to 3: Not used
Default Value 1
SCR-SLCT 2 Halftone process in Photo Printout mode

Detail To set halftone process (error diffusion, 2 screen types) in Photo Printout mode when making a
copy.
When moire occurs on a copy image, set 0 (suitable for character reproduction). When halftone
dots are rough, set 2.
Use Case When moire occurs on a copy image or when halftone dots are rough
0: Error diffusion, 1: Low screen ruling, 2: High screen ruling
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Function Settings> Copy> Photo Printout Mode
Mode
811
8. Service Mode
TMC-SLCT 2 Set error diffusion process coefficient
Detail To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion processing.
Make the setting according to the level of granularity and dot stability.
0: Small granularity/low dot stability
1: Small granularity/low dot stability (color mode), Large granularity/high dot stability (black mode)
2: Large granularity/high dot stability
Default Value 2
PRN-FLG 2 Select of image area flag (PDL image)

Detail To set the image area flag for image processing which is performed when a PDL image fails to be
compressed at a specified compression rate.
If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate, the following operations are
performed as default:
- Processing to prioritize reproduction of text
- Replacing the processed black with single Bk-color
Set 1 when moire occurs or jaggy is significant. Set 2 when not preferring to replace the processed
black with single Bk-color.
Use Case - When moire occurs or jaggy is significant in case of printing an image containing many halftone
dots or photos
- When avoiding to replace the processed black with single Bk-color
Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text.
0: High screen ruling, gray compensation LUT
1: Error diffusion, gray compensation LUT
2: High screen ruling, normal LUT
Default Value 0
SCN-FLG 2 Select of image area flag (copy image)

Detail To set the image area flag for image processing which is performed when a scanned image fails
to be compressed at a specified compression rate.
If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate, processing to prioritize
reproduction of text is performed by default.
Set 1 when an image contains many halftone photo images. Set 2 when an image contains many
printed photos.
Use Case When copying an image which contains many halftone dots and photos
Caution This setting trades off with reproducibility of text.
0: Text, 1: Halftone photo image, 2: Printed photo
Default Value 0
812
8. Service Mode
TNR-DWN 2 Setting of toner deposit amount
Detail To set the toner deposit amount on the gradation area and text area.
By reducing the toner deposit amount when toner scatters or paper winds around the Fixing Belt
in color mode, symptom can be alleviated, but hue may change.
Use Case - When a full color image is blurred due to toner scattering, etc.
- When paper winds around the Fixing Belt
Caution Hue may change depending on the setting.
0:
Gradation area 160%, Text area 150% (Thin paper/recycled paper 2)
Gradation area 200%, Text area 180% (Others)
1: 160%, 150%
2: 140%, 130%
3: 200%, 180%
4:
Gradation area 140%, Text area 130% (Thin paper/recycled paper 2)
5:
Gradation area 160%, Text area 150% (Thin paper/recycled paper 2/transparency)
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Adjust Toner Amount at Color Printing
Mode
TMIC-BK 2 ON/OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct

Detail To set ON/OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL and for copy which are used
by TMIC.
When the trailing edge adjustment is set to ON, the density of the high density area becomes high,
and consequently text and thin lines become clear. While an image becomes clear, hue of the
gradation area of photos, etc. is changed.
Use Case When thin lines are partly missing or characters are faded
0: ON for PDL, OFF for copy
1: OFF for PDL, OFF for copy
2: ON for PDL, ON for copy
3: OFF for PDL, ON for copy
Default Value 0
DH-MODE 2 Set ptch data at Dhalf except full adj

Detail To set whether to use the high-density patch data that has been scanned by D-half control of full
adjustment at the time of D-half control other than full adjustment.
Use Case At image adjustment
0: Used, 1: Not used
Default Value 0
813
8. Service Mode
MIX-FLG 2 Set img processing at img composition
Detail To set the image processing which is performed when an image fails to be compressed at a
specified compression rate by the Main Controller upon image composition.
Use Case When an image processing failure occurs
0: Equivalent to PDL text mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Error diffused image. The
hue of the photo area is more vivid than that of 2.)
1: Equivalent to PDL photo mode (Black text is reproduced with 4 colors. Screen processed image.)
2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Error diffused
image. The hue of the photo area might be different from that of 0.)
3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with a single Bk color. Screen
processed image.)
Default Value 0
REPORT-Z 1 Set of image processing at report print

Detail To set the image processing which is performed when printing a report.
Use Case When there is a request for image improvement
processed image.)
Default Value 0
IFXEML-Z 1 Set img proc at clr IFAX/mail recv print

Detail To set the image processing which is performed when printing color IFAX or received e-mail.
processed image.)
Default Value 0
814
8. Service Mode
BMLNKS-Z 1 Set img proc at BMLinkS reception print
Detail To set the image processing which is performed when printing received BMLinkS.
processed image.)
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo BMLinkS (Business Machine Linkage Service): An integrated network OA device interface
REDU-CNT 2 Set toner deposit amount limt at clr adj

Detail To set whether to limit the toner deposit amount at color adjustment (color balance, fine adjustment
of density).
When 0 is set, the color adjustment value is reflected to an image precisely, but toner scattering
in the transfer section and fixing section may occur or paper may wind around the Fixing Film.
When setting 1 for IMGC-ADJ, this setting can be also made in [Adjust Toner Volume Used for
Color Printing] in [Settings/Registration].
- When reflecting the color adjustment value to an image precisely
Caution When 0 is set, toner scattering in the transfer section and fixing section or paper wrapping in the
fixing section may occur.
0: Toner deposit amount is not limited.
1: Toner deposit amount is limited to the specified amount.
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Adjust Toner Volume Used for Color Printing
Mode
VP-ART 2 Setting of line art processing

Detail To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF.
In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as
line art, and is converted into vector data.
Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data or to recognize it as one line
(as a thin line). For the thin line, the line width can be specified.
Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width line as one line rather than
as an outline (when you want to prioritize edit operation as a line rather than image quality).
Default Value 1
815
8. Service Mode
VP-TXT 2 Setting of character vectorization
Detail To set vector conversion processing for text on scalable PDF.
In the vector conversion processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is
recognized as text, and is converted into vector data.
In regular vector conversion, function approximation is not used for small text because the image
quality is not changed.
When the value is changed, function approximation processing is executed for small text, which
realizes smooth text although the image quality is changed.
Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small text.
Default Value 1
PASCL-TY 2 Set of paper type for auto gradation adj

Detail Auto gradation adjustment is normally executed with the recommended paper specified for each
location. However, if you want to change the paper type, use this setting to change the paper type.
Use Case When executing the auto gradation adjustment using a paper other than the recommended paper
type
Caution Do not change the setting in the normal operation.
1: CS-680 (Except for USA and EU. Mainly for Japan)
2: Canon Multipurpose Paper (For USA)
3: Oce RED Label80 (For EU)
AST-SEL 2 Adj of advanced smoothing effect

Detail To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced smoothing UI.
Set 3 if no smoothing effect is obtained even though High is set in the advanced smoothing UI.
Set 0 if too much effect is obtained even though Low is set in the advanced smoothing UI.
Use Case When image failures (jaggy, moire) occur
Default Value 2
Supplement/Memo AST: Advanced Smoothing Technology
PSCL-TBL 1 Setting of Bk-color density increase

Detail To set whether to increase the density of Bk-color only without changing the density of Y/M/C-
color.
When 1 is set, the parameters of auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) are adjusted so that
only the density of Bk-color is increased.
Use Case Upon user's request (to increase the density of Bk-color)
Caution Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after the setting is done.
0: Normal, 1: Only the density of Bk-color is high
Unit
816
8. Service Mode
BGE-OFS 2 Fine adj at bckgd adj (bckgd removal)
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the background adjustment (background removal) level which can
be set manually.
Break up the adjustment values into smaller ones when user does not satisfy with the default
adjustment values.
Use Case When color fogging occurs on the output image when copying yellowed blank paper as an original
Caution Since the background color is set to be washed out with this mode, not only the background of
yellowed blank paper, but also other light colors (light blue, etc.) are washed out.
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Copy> Options> Density> Background Density
Mode
BOLD-SEL 1 For R&D

BIN-SEL 2 For R&D
■ IMG-DEV
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV
DRM-IDL 1 Set first idle rotation time in HH Env
Detail To set the idle rotation time to be performed at the beginning of a workday in an HH (high
temperature and high humidity) environment.
Use Case When coarseness occurs on the image at the beginning of a workday
Caution When 1 is set, startup takes time.
0: OFF, 1: ON (HH environment only), 2: ON (all environments)
Default Value 0
AUTO-DH 1 Set Dmax/Dhalf ctrl exe cndtn: wrmup rtn

Detail To set the condition to additionally execute D-max/D-half control at warm-up rotation after the
machine is not used for 8 hours or more.
When 0 is set, additional execution of D-max/D-half control is not performed.
When 1 is set, additional execution is performed only in an HH (high temperature and high humidity)
environment.
When 2 is set, additional execution is performed regardless of environment.
When 3 is set, warm-up rotation is executed regardless of how long the machine is not used and
D-max/D-half control is additionally executed regardless of environment.
Use Case When uneven density at intervals of the Primary Charging Roller or Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller circumference or density variation occurs on approx. 10 images printed immediately after
the machine is not used for 8 hours or more
Caution When D-max/D-half control is executed at warm-up rotation, it takes longer time for startup than
usual.
0: Not executed additionally
1: Executed additionally in an HH environment (after the machine is not used for 8 hours)
2: Executed additionally in all environments (after the machine is not used for 8 hours)
3: Executed additionally in all environments (not depending on how long the machine is not used)
Default Value 1
Supplement/Memo Warm-up rotation is executed automatically at power-on and recovery from sleep mode when the
machine is not used for 8 hours or more regardless of environment.
817
8. Service Mode
PCHINT-V 2 Adj ATR control patch detection interval
Detail To adjust the total video counter value as the intervals to execute patch detection by ATR control.
Decrease the value when hue variation is large.
Increase the value to reduce downtime.
Use Case - When hue variation is large
- When reducing downtime
-2: -2000%, -1: -1000%, 0: 0%, 1: 1000%, 2: 2000%
Default Value 0
DELV-THY 2 Set image ratio for Y-color toner eject

Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of Y-color, that is the condition to perform the
low duty toner ejection sequence.
As the value is increased, coarseness is alleviated, but productivity is decreased and toner
consumption is increased.
As the value is decreased, productivity and toner consumption are improved, but coarseness gets
worse.
Use Case While printing low duty images (images with low image ratio),
- When graininess (coarseness) or low density occurs
-2: -1.0%, -1: -0.5%, 0: 0.0%, 1: 0.5%, 2: 1.0%, 3: 1.5%, 4: 2.0%
Unit %
Default Value 0
DELV-THC 2 Set image ratio for C-color toner eject

Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of C-color, that is the condition to perform the
worse.
-2: -1.0%, -1: -0.5%, 0: 0.0%, 1: 0.5%, 2: 1.0%, 3: 1.5%, 4: 2.0%
Unit %
Default Value 0
818
8. Service Mode
DELV-THM 2 Set image ratio for M-color toner eject
Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of M-color, that is the condition to perform the
worse.
-2: -1.0%, -1: -0.5%, 0: 0.0%, 1: 0.5%, 2: 1.0%, 3: 1.5%, 4: 2.0%
Unit %
Default Value 0
DELV-THK 2 Set image ratio for Bk-color toner eject

Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of Bk-color, that is the condition to perform the
worse.
-2: -1.0%, -1: -0.5%, 0: 0.0%, 1: 0.5%, 2: 1.0%, 3: 1.5%, 4: 2.0%
Unit %
Default Value 0
ADJ-VPP 2 Adj of dev AC bias Vpp: 1/1 SPD

Detail To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias at 1/1 speed.
When the value is decreased, ring marks or uneven density at intervals of cylinder circumference
on a halftone image is alleviated.
When the value is increased, white spots or uneven density at intervals of cylinder circumference
on a solid image is alleviated.
Use Case When image failures (ring marks, white spots, uneven density at intervals of cylinder
circumference) occur
Caution If the value is too small, density may be lowered.
0: +/-0 V, -1: -100 V, -2: -200 V, -3: -300 V, -4: -400 V
Default Value 0
819
8. Service Mode
ADJ-BLNK 2 Setting of thin line density improvement
Detail To adjust the waveform of developing AC bias to improve thin line density.
When thin line density is low, set 1 or 2.
As the value is increased, the line gets darker, but white gap/white spots may occur.
Use Case - When thin line density is low
- When it appears that thin line width is narrow
Caution - Use this item when density is not improved by making adjustment with ADJ-VPP/VPPN.
- If the value is too large, white gap/white spots may occur.
0: Normal, 1: Thin line improvement mode 1, 2: Thin line improvement mode 2
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> ADJ-VPP/VPPN
DMX-OF-Y 2 Adj of Y-color D-max target density

Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on Y-color
image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed.
Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value when the density is high.
Use Case When density of solid area is not appropriate even though auto gradation adjustment is executed
Default Value 0
DMX-OF-M 2 Adj of M-color D-max target density

Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on M-color
Default Value 0
DMX-OF-C 2 Adj of C-color D-max target density

Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on C-color
Default Value 0
820
8. Service Mode
DMX-OF-K 2 Adj of Bk-color D-max target density
Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on Bk-color
Default Value 0
ADJ-VPPN 2 Adj of dev AC bias Vpp: 1/2 SPD

Detail To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias at 1/2 speed.
When the value is decreased, ring marks or uneven density at intervals of cylinder circumference
on a halftone image is alleviated.
When the value is increased, white spots or uneven density at intervals of cylinder circumference
on a solid image is alleviated.
Use Case When image failures (ring marks, white spots, uneven density at intervals of cylinder
circumference) occur
Caution If the value is too small, density may be lowered.
-1: -50 V, 0: +/-0 V, 1: +100 V, 2: +200 V, 3: +300 V, 4: +400 V
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> ADJ-VPP
TNNEWCNT 2 For R&D

TNENDCNT 2 For R&D
D-PTN 2 Set lead edge 43mm horizontal line prev
Detail To set whether to form dot patterns on the Photosensitive Drum when horizontal lines appear in
the area of 43 mm from the image leading edge.
When 2 is set, dot patterns are always formed before forming an image so that occurrence of
horizontal lines can be prevented.
Use Case When horizontal lines appear in the area of 43 mm from the image leading edge
0: Not formed, 1: Formed depending on conditions, 2: Always formed
Default Value 1
821
8. Service Mode
DELV-DNS 2 ON/OFF of soiled paper edge prevention
Detail Soiling on the guide rib caused by toner band formed at low duty toner ejection sequence may
adhere on the paper edge.
To set the length and density of toner band to alleviate soiled paper edge as needed. However,
color type and length of toner band to be actually formed are determined according to the specified
setting table.
When 0 is set, short length of dark density toner band (210 mm/105 mm) is formed.
When 1 is set, long length of light density toner band (370 mm/185 mm) is formed in any of the
following cases:
- Paper weight: 106 to 256 g/m2
- Size: SRA3 (320.0 mm x 450.0 mm)/A3+ 305.0 mm x 457.0 mm (12" x 18")
- Paper type: Coated paper/label/transparency/postcard/envelope
- Resolution: 1200 dpi
When 2 is set, long length of light density toner band (370 mm/185 mm) is formed.
Use Case When soiled paper edge occurs
Caution Productivity is decreased at continuous feeding.
0: OFF, 1: ON (only under the specific conditions), 2: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DELV-THY/THM/THC/THK
■ IMG-FIX
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX
FX-S-TMP 1 Set ITOP control temp: plain 1
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2).
As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs, and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs
on the leading edge of paper.
Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (74 mm) of plain paper 1
Caution If the value is too large, uneven gloss may occur.
If the value is too small, a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper. (Toner does not
peel off.)
-2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
822
8. Service Mode
TMP-TBL2 1 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 1
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2).
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs, and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs.
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on heavy paper 1
Caution If the value is too large, fixing offset may occur.
If the value is too small, a fixing failure may occur.
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
823
8. Service Mode
TMP-TBL5 1 Set fixing control temp: thin ppr 1
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for thin paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on thin paper 1
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TBL6 1 Set fixing control temperature: envelope

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for envelope.
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on envelope
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TMP2 1 Set ITOP control temp: heavy paper 1

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2).
Use Case - When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper
- When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (74 mm)
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
824
8. Service Mode
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TMP5 1 Set ITOP control temp: thin paper 1

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for thin paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2).
peel off.)
Default Value 0
Unit
825
8. Service Mode
FXS-TMP6 1 Set ITOP control temperature: envelope
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for envelope.
Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (74 mm) of envelope
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXST2-N2 1 Set ITOP wait time:below 10 deg C,1/1SPD

Detail To set initial rotation time at 1/1 speed when a temperature is lower than 10 deg C.
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Use Case When fixing failure occurs in an environment where a temperature is lower than 10 deg C
Unit sec
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo When all the following conditions are satisfied, it becomes 1/1 speed.
- Paper type: Thin paper, plain paper 1 to 3, colored paper, recycled paper 1 to 3, tracing paper,
or pre-punched paper
- Paper length: Less than 300.0 mm
Unit
FXST2-UH 1 Set ITOP wait time:below 10 deg C,1/2SPD

Detail To set initial rotation time at 1/2 speed when a temperature is lower than 10 deg C.
Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs.
Use Case When fixing failure occurs in an environment where a temperature is lower than 10 deg C
Unit sec
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo In any of the following cases, it becomes 1/2 speed.
- Paper type: Heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to 4, transparency, label, bond paper, postcard,
or envelope
- Paper length: 300.0 mm or more
Unit
826
8. Service Mode
FLYING 2 ON/OFF of flying start temperature ctrl
Detail To set whether to execute flying start temperature control.
When 1 is set, flying start temperature control is not performed. Selecting 1 has an advantage over
selecting 0 in terms of the life of the Fixing Unit. However, selecting 1 does not always extend the
life.
Use Case When preferring to extend the life of the Fixing Unit
Caution When 1 is set, FCOT becomes longer.
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
TMP-TBL7 1 Set fix ctrl temp:pln2,color,trace,punch

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 2 (76 to 90 g/m2), colored paper,
tracing paper and pre-punched paper.
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on plain paper 2, colored paper, tracing paper and pre-
punched paper
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TBL8 1 Set fixing control temp: transparency

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for transparency.
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on transparency
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
827
8. Service Mode
TMP-TBL9 1 Set fixing control temp: coated paper 1
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for coated paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on coated paper 1
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB10 1 Set fixing control temp: coated paper 2

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TMP7 1 Set ITOP ctrl temp: pln2,clr,trace,punch

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 2 (76 to 90 g/m2), colored paper,
tracing paper and pre-punched paper.
Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (74 mm) of plain paper 2, colored paper, tracing
paper and pre-punched paper
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
828
8. Service Mode
FXS-TMP8 1 Set ITOP control temp: transparency
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for transparency.
Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (74 mm) of transparency
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TM10 1 Set ITOP control temp: coated paper 2

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for coated paper 2 (129 to 163 g/m2).
peel off.)
Default Value 0
Unit
FIXMIXBD 1 Setting of media mixed mode

Detail To set whether image quality or productivity is to be prioritized when media are mixed.
As the value is increased, image quality is improved, but productivity is decreased.
When the value is decreased, productivity is increased, but uneven gloss may occur.
Use Case - When a fixing failure occurs while media are mixed
- Upon user's request (to improve productivity when media are mixed)
Default Value 0
Unit
829
8. Service Mode
FXS-TMP9 1 Set ITOP control temp: coated paper 1
peel off.)
Default Value 0
Unit
THIN-LP 2 Set of fixing arch control: thin paper

Detail To set the arch amount between secondary transfer and fixing when feeding thin paper 1 and 2
(52 to 63 g/m2) at 1/1 speed.
Increase the value when an image failure (crawled marks/wrinkles) occurs.
Use Case When an image failure (crawled marks/wrinkles) occurs with thin paper
-2: 0 mm, -1: 15 mm, 0: 35 mm, 1: 60 mm, 2: 85 mm
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Image failure (crawled marks): A symptom that image is blurred in the feeding direction and it
occurs when a deflected paper comes closer to the Fixing Film. If a paper is deflected enough to
be bent, an image failure (wrinkles) occurs.
PRE-FXRL 2 ON/OFF of Pressure Roller soil prev mode

Detail To set whether to execute Pressure Roller soiling prevention mode when feeding calcium
carbonate paper.
When 1 is set, the paper intervals become wider and temperature of the Pressure Roller is
increased. As a result, soiling on the Pressure Roller can be reduced, but productivity is decreased.
Use Case Upon user's request (to prevent soiling on the Pressure Roller)
Caution Be sure to get approval from the user in advance by telling that productivity decreases.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
830
8. Service Mode
FX-WNKL 2 Set of thin paper wrinkle alleviation
Detail To set the thin paper wrinkle alleviation mode.
If the edge temperature of the Fixing Pressure Roller is lower than the center temperature, feeding
speed at the center of a paper becomes faster than the speed at the edge so wrinkles occur on
thin paper.
When 1 is set, the edge temperature is increased by idle rotation so wrinkles are alleviated. If it is
not alleviated, set 2.
As the value is larger, first copy time becomes longer.
Use Case When wrinkles occur on thin paper
Caution When 1 or 2 is set, first copy time becomes longer.
0: OFF, 1: Weak, 2: Strong
Default Value 0
TMP-TB12 1 Set fixing control temp: plain paper 3

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 3 (91 to 105 g/m2).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on plain paper 3
Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time. Otherwise, offset/image failure occurs when setting
an extreme value.
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB13 1 Set fixing control temp:recycled paper 2

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper 2 (76 to 90 g/m2).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on recycled paper 2
an extreme value.
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
831
8. Service Mode
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2).
an extreme value.
-3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TM11 1 Set ITOP control temp: recycled paper 1

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for recycled paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2).
peel off.)
-3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
PLN-LP 2 Set fix arch ctrl: pln,color,rcycl,punch

Detail To set the arch amount between secondary transfer and fixing when feeding plain paper 1/2/3,
colored paper, recycled paper 1/2/3 and pre-punched paper at 1/1 speed.
Increase the value when an image failure (crawled marks/wrinkles) occurs.
Use Case When an image failure (crawled marks/wrinkles) occurs with plain paper, colored paper, recycled
paper and pre-punched paper
-2: 0 mm, -1: 15 mm, 0: 35 mm, 1: 60 mm, 2: 85 mm
Default Value 0
832
8. Service Mode
FXS-TM12 1 Set ITOP control temp: plain paper 3
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 3 (91 to 105 g/m2).
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
833
8. Service Mode
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper3 (91 to 105 g/m2).
an extreme value.
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

peel off.)
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TM16 1 Set ITOP control temp: heavy paper 4

peel off.)
Default Value 0
Unit
834
8. Service Mode
FXS-TM17 1 Set ITOP control temp: extra-long pln
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for extra-long plain paper 1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to
3, thin paper 1/2, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and bond paper (width: 300 to
320 mm).
Use Case When uneven gloss/a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge (74 mm) of extra-long plain paper
1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to 3, thin paper, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and
bond paper
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TM18 1 Set ITOP control temp: extra-long hvy 1

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for extra-long heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to
5 and label (width: 300 to 305 mm).
Use Case When uneven gloss/a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge (74 mm) of extra-long heavy paper
1 to 7, coated paper 1 to 5 and label
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FXS-TM19
Unit
835
8. Service Mode
FXS-TM19 1 Set ITOP control temp: extra-long hvy 2
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for extra-long heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to
5 and label (width: 305.1 to 320 mm).
Use Case When uneven gloss/a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge (74 mm) of extra-long heavy paper
1 to 7, coated paper 1 to 5 and label
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FXS-TM18
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB19 1 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 4

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
836
8. Service Mode
TMP-TB20 1 Set fixing control temp: extra-long pln
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for extra-long plain paper 1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to
3, thin paper 1/2, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and bond paper (width: 300 to
320 mm).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on extra-long plain paper 1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to 3,
thin paper, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and bond paper
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB21 1 Set fixing control temp:extra-long hvy 1

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for extra-long heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to
5 and label (width: 300 to 305 mm).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on extra-long heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to 5 and
label
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TB22
Unit
TMP-TB22 1 Set fixing control temp:extra-long hvy 2

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for extra-long heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to
5 and label (width: 305.1 to 320 mm).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on extra-long heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to 5 and
label
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TB21
Unit
837
8. Service Mode
FXS-TM20 1 Set ITOP control temp: plain, 1/2 SPD
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to 3, thin
paper 1/2, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and bond paper at 1/2 speed.
Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge (76 mm) of plain paper, etc. at 1/2 speed
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB23 1 Set fixing control temp: plain, 1/2 SPD

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to 3, thin
paper 1/2, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and bond paper at 1/2 speed.
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on plain paper, etc. at 1/2 speed
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
FXS-TM24 1 Set ITOP control temp: thin paper 2

Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for thin paper 2 (52 to 59 g/m2).
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
838
8. Service Mode
FXS-TM25 1 Set ITOP ctrl temp:hvy5, label, postcard
Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 5 (181 to 220 g/m2), label and
postcard.
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
839
8. Service Mode
peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

peel off.)
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
TMP-TB24 1 Set fixing control temp: thin ppr 2

Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for thin paper 2 (52 to 59 g/m2).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on thin paper 2
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
840
8. Service Mode
TMP-TB25 1 Set fix ctrl temp:hvy 5, label, postcard
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 5 (181 to 220 g/m2), label and
postcard.
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on heavy paper 5, label and postcard
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
841
8. Service Mode
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit deg C
Default Value 0
Unit
EXTH-LP 2 Set fix arch control: heavy ppr/coat ppr

Detail To set the arch amount between secondary transfer and fixing when feeding heavy paper 7 and
coated paper 4/5.
Increase the value when shock image occurs at the trailing edge of heavy paper or coated paper.
The arch amount is decreased so that shock can be alleviated.
Use Case When shock image occurs at the area around 60 mm or 130 mm from the trailing edge of heavy
paper or coated paper
Caution Change the value by 1 at a time while checking the symptom. If the value is increased too much
at a time, image at the trailing edge may disturb.
0: Maximum, 1: Large, 2: Medium, 3: Small, 4: Minimum
Default Value 0
Amount of Change per 15mm
Unit
842
8. Service Mode
FIX-RTTH 2 ON/OFF horz line prev:heavy, coat, trnsp
Detail To set whether to rotate the Fixing Pressure Roller and the Fixing Film after 36 hours have passed
from completion of fixing operation.
Keeping the Fixing Pressure Roller and the Fixing Film engaged at a position for a long time may
cause deformation of the Fixing Film. If it causes appearance of horizontal lines at 75 mm intervals
on heavy paper, coated paper and transparency, set 1. When sleep state continues for 36 hours
after completion of fixing operation, the Fixing Pressure Roller and the Fixing Film rotate
automatically for approx. 1 second. The fixing nip moves so that deformation of the Fixing Film
can be prevented.
Use Case When horizontal lines appear at 75 mm intervals on heavy paper, coated paper and transparency
Caution - This setting is enabled only at sleep. It does not work when the power is OFF.
- When setting 1, replace the Fixing Film Unit. At the time of appearance of horizontal lines, the
Fixing Film has been already deformed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo It actually takes approx. 3 seconds for the serial operations of engagement, temperature control,
rotation, stop and disengagement of the Fixing Pressure Roller and the Fixing Film.
■ CUSTOM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM
TEMP-TBL 1 Set fixing control temp: plain 1
Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2).
Use Case When a fixing failure/fixing offset occurs on plain paper 1
Unit deg C
Default Value 0
SC-L-CNT 1 Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan

Detail To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use B4 or LTR to determine large
size.
The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of B4-L-CNT.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as large size, paper with B4 or
smaller is determined as small size.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as large size, paper smaller than
B4 is determined as small size.
Use Case As needed
0: B4 size, 1: LTR size
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT
843
8. Service Mode
SCANTYPE 1 Switching of DADF + Reader type
Detail To switch the type of DADF + Reader to a different type.
0: DADF (reverse model) + Reader, 1: DADF (1-path model) + Reader
Default Value 0 (reverse model)/1 (1-path model)
ABK-TOOL 1 Allow access from address book mntc tool

To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance tool.
Use Case When executing import from the address book maintenance tool
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Address book maintenance tool: Tool provided from CMJ.
DEV-SP1 2 Device special settings 1

Detail To execute the device special setting.
Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.



844
8. Service Mode



DFEJCLED 1 ON/OFF of DADF Original Output Indicator

Detail To set whether to light up the Original Output Indicator of the DADF.
Use Case Upon user's request (The Original Output Indicator is too bright.)
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
RDEV-SP1 2 RCON device special settings 1

Use Case For customization
Default Value 0
845
8. Service Mode
Default Value 0

Default Value 0

Default Value 0

Default Value 0

Default Value 0
846
8. Service Mode
Default Value 0

Default Value 0
PSCL-QS 2 [For customization]

TIFFJPEG 2 [For customization]
DCM-EXCL 1 [For customization]
FPOT-MD 2 [For customization]
■ USER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER
COPY-LIM 1 Setting of upper limit for copy
Detail To set the upper limit value for copy.
Default Value 999
SLEEP 1 Setting of auto sleep function

Detail To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time
Mode
Supplement/Memo The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in Settings/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy
Settings> Auto Sleep Time.
847
8. Service Mode
SIZE-DET 2 ON/OFF of original size detect function
Detail To set ON/OFF of original size detection function.
Use Case Upon user's request (The LED is too bright, etc.)
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
COUNTER1 1 Display of software counter 1

Detail To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case Upon user/dealer's request
Caution Display only. No change is available.
COUNTER2 1 Setting of software counter 2

Detail To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen.
0: No registration

0: No registration

0: No registration

0: No registration
848
8. Service Mode
0: No registration
DATE-DSP 2 Setting of data/time display format

To set date/time display format according to the country or region.
After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is reflected to the followings:
Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Date/Time Settings, and report output.
0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY
Additional Functions Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Date/Time Settings
Mode
MB-CCV 2 Control card usage limit for Mail Box

To restrict use of control card for Mail Box.
0: Unlimited, 1: Limited
Default Value 1
CONTROL 1 Charge setting of PDL job

To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting charging management device (Coin
Manager or non-Canon-made control card).
0: No charge, 1: Charge
Default Value 0
849
8. Service Mode
B4-L-CNT 1 Count setting of B4 size
Detail To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or small
size.
Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper smaller than B4 size as small
size.
0: Small size, 1: Large size
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SC-L-CNT
MF-LG-ST 2 ON/OFF of long original mode display

Detail To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button.
When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy> Options screen and the long strip paper
becomes available.
Use Case Upon user's request (use of long strip original or long strip paper)
Caution Long length paper is delivered from the Second Delivery Outlet (excluding delivery from the Inner
Finisher).
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Copy> Options
Mode
Supplement/Memo Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used.
CNT-DISP 2 Display/hide of serial No.

Detail To set whether to display or hide the serial No. on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case When setting to display/hide serial No. on the Counter Check screen.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
COPY-JOB 1 Setting of copy job reservation

Detail To set to enable/disable copy job reservation when the Card Reader/Coin Manager is used.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Default Value 0
850
8. Service Mode
OP-SZ-DT 2 Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open
Detail To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is opened.
When "0: OFF" is set, enter original size manually from the Control Panel.
When "1: ON" is set, original size is detected automatically.
AB configuration machine: A3/B4/A4R/B5R/A4/B5/A5/B6
Inch configuration machine: 11" x 17"/LGL/LTR/LTRR
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
JOB-INVL 2 Job intvl setting at interruption copy

Detail To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy.
Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous output of the next job. Paper
interval becomes longer when starting pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous
job is delivered.
0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job
1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is delivered all.
2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered all. (For all jobs)
Default Value 0
TAB-ROT 1 Set of landscape img rotn at PDL:tab ppr

Detail To set whether to rotate landscape image by 180 degrees when PDL print is made on tab paper.
When 1 is set, image is rotated.
0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated
Default Value 0
PR-PSESW 1 ON/OFF Pause All Print Jobs button dspl

Detail To set whether to display [Pause All Print Jobs] button on the Status Monitor/Cancel screen.
- When preferring to promptly stop the print job in operation or under reservation
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
851
8. Service Mode
IDPRN-SW 1 Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr
To set the job type that advances the department management counter.
0:
PRINT category: Inbox Print, Report Print, PDL Print
COPY category: COPY
1:
PRINT category: Report Print, PDL Print
COPY category: COPY, Inbox Print
Default Value 0
CPRT-DSP 1 ON/OFF of [Print Charge Log] button

Detail To set whether to display the [Print Charge Log] button to print the charge logs on the charge log
screen in Settings/Registration.
When "1: ON" is set, the button is displayed in Management Settings> Charge Management>
Charge Log Screen.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Management Settings> Charge Management> Charge Log
Mode
PCL-COPY 2 Set of PCL COPIES command control method

Detail To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL.
Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or use the same control method of
non-Canon-made PCL.
0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of COPIES command that is specified
for each page to control on a page basis)
1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value of COPIES command, which is
specified for page 1 at the time of Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command
for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL at the time of non-
sorted mode)
2 to 65535: For future use
Default Value 0
CNT-SW 1 Set default dspl items on charge counter

Detail To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen.
For details of each type, refer to the Service Manual.
0: Type1, 1: Type2
Default Value 0
852
8. Service Mode
BCNT-AST 1 Set of box print charge target job
To set the job type that advances the count in box print with NE Controller (ASSIST).
Use Case When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the box print with NE Controller
0: PDL job, 1: Copy job
Default Value 0
PRJOB-CP 2 Set count TX at RX/report print

Detail To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the charging management
device at the time of reception print or report print.
0: No transmission, 1: Transmission
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Charging management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made control card
DFLT-CPY 1 Setting of color mode for copy

Detail To set the default color mode for copy operation.
To reflect the change, it is necessary to initialize the default settings of copy function in one of the
following two ways.
- Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Copy> Change Default Settings> Initialize
- Main Menu> Copy> Logo icon in upper right of the screen> Change Default Settings> Initialize
2) Initialize the default settings of copy function.
Caution Be sure to initialize the default settings of copy function after change.
0: Based on Auto/ACS/Printer Driver settings, 1: Color mode, 2: Black mode
Additional Functions Function Settings> Copy> Change Default Settings> Initialize
Mode Function Settings> Copy> Select Color Settings for Copy> Use Auto (Color/Black & White)
DFLT-BOX 1 Setting of color mode for Mail Box scan

Detail To set the default color mode for Mail Box scan operation.
To reflect the change, it is necessary to initialize the default settings of scan and store function in
the screen displayed by pressing [Scan] in the main menu with one of the following methods.
- Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Store/Access Files> Common Settings> Scan and
Store Settings/Access Stored Files Settings> Change Default Settings> Initialize
- Logo icon in upper right of the screen> Change Default Settings> Initialize
2) Initialize the default settings of scan and store function.
Caution Be sure to initialize the default settings of scan and store function after change.
0: Based on Auto/ACS settings, 1: Color mode, 2: Black mode
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Main Menu> Scan and Store> Mail Box> (Box number)> Scan
Mode Function Settings> Store/Access Files> Common Settings> Scan and Store Settings/Access
Stored Files Settings> Change Default Settings> Initialize
853
8. Service Mode
DOC-REM 1 Display/hide of original removal message
Detail To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original when scanning with DADF without
opening/closing DADF after scanning with the Copyboard.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
DPT-ID-7 2 Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth

To set whether to require a password entry at the time of registration/authentication of department
ID.
With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required as well as entry of department
ID.
0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry
Default Value 0
RUI-RJT 2 Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI

To set to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid authentication from remote UI
3 times.
0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected
Default Value 0
SND-RATE 2 Set compress ratio at SEND high compress

Detail To set the compression ratio when the data compression ratio for SEND (transmission) is set to
"High Rati".
As the value is larger, the compression ratio is higher (the file size becomes small).
Use Case When making the transmission file size smaller
Caution As the value is larger, image quality is decreased.
0: Compression ratio 1/16, 1: Compression ratio 1/20, 2: Compression ratio 1/24
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Function Settings> Send> Common Settings> Data Compression Ratio
Mode
FREG-SW 2 For R&D
854
8. Service Mode
IFAX-SZL 2 Set of I-Fax transmission size limit
Detail To set for restricting data size at the time of I-Fax transmission that does not go through the server.
With the setting to restrict the data size, it is to be #830 error in the case of sending data that
exceeds the upper limit value.
In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of transmission data is always restricted.
0: Limited, 1: Not limited (Restriction applies when data goes through the server.)
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending
Mode
Supplement/Memo Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings/Registration menu.
IFAX-PGD 2 Set page split TX at IFax Simple mode TX

Detail To set whether to perform split-data transmission on a page basis in the case that the transmission
size in I-Fax Simple mode exceeds the upper limit value.
Caution In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to get approval from the user by explaining
the following:
- No guarantee for page order on the reception side
- There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between pages.
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending
Mode
Supplement/Memo Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings/Registration menu.
MEAPSAFE 2 Setting of MEAP safe mode

To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode.
In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system application, which starts with
initial state, is activated. Logs for cause analysis of MEAP failure can be obtained.
Use Case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource
confliction between MEAP applications, service registration or use order.
0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode
Default Value 0
855
8. Service Mode
PRNT-POS 2 ON/OFF of all pauses at error job cancel
To set whether to pause the print operation of following jobs when a job is canceled due to an error
inside the machine (#037, etc.) except service calls during PDL print.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
AFN-PSWD 2 Setting of Set/Reg menu access limit

To set restriction on accessing Settings/Registration menu by entering password.
With the setting to enable this mode, password entry of system administrator is required after
pressing Settings/Registration key.
0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required
Default Value 0
PTJAM-RC 2 Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam

Detail To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs with PDL print.
0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted
Default Value 1
PDL-NCSW 2 Card mngm setting for PDL print job

To set to make PDL print job to be subject to card management by the Card Reader.
With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only when the card ID of the card
inserted to the Card Reader matches the department ID.
0: PDL print is available with no card inserted.
1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the department ID in the case that the
card is inserted.
Default Value 0
856
8. Service Mode
PS-MODE 2 Setting of PS print line drawing
Detail To set the image processing at PS print.
Set 8 when line width differs depending on the drawing position although the same line width is
set.
Use Case Use case When right and left ruled lines are different in width
0 to 7: Spare
8: Strokeadjustment is enabled.
9 to 65535: Spare
Default Value 0
CNCT-RLZ 2 Setting of connection serialize function

Detail Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of imageWARE Output Manager
Select Edition V1.0.
The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement because the machine does not
receive job data from other connection until it completes job data reception from the current
connection.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Connection: Connection to be established through network between multiple hosts (PC, etc).
Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. This is to
prevent job interruption from other PC by group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job
transmission).

0: No registration
Default Value 0

0: No registration
Default Value 0
857
8. Service Mode
2C-CT-SW 2 Set of color counter at 2-color mode
Detail To set whether to use the single color counter or full color counter for count-up in 2-color mode.
Use Case When supporting 2-color mode
0: Single color counter, 1: Full color counter
JA-FUNC 2 Display of job archive function ON/OFF

Detail To display ON/OFF of job archive function.
Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving.
Use Case When using the job archive function
Caution Setting cannot be made with this item.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
JA-JOB 2 Display of job archive target job

Detail To display the job type subject to job archive.
When the job archive function is ON, archive operation is executed when executing the target job.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> JA-FUNC
JA-RESTR 2 Display of job archive restriction items

Detail To display restriction items for job archive specification.
When the job archive function is ON, follow the setting to execute operation to restrict specification.
0: OFF, 1: ON
32 specification restrictions with Bit definition
Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit2: Function to edit document (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> JA-FUNC
858
8. Service Mode
LDAP-SW 1 Retrieval condition set for LDAP server
Detail To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server.
Use Case When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server
0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the next, 3: Not equivalent to the next,
4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes with the next
Default Value 4
Supplement/Memo LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP server enables to search e-mail
address, etc. from LDAP server and the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc.
Registration is available by the following: Set Destination > Register LDAP Server
FROM-OF 1 Deletion of mail sender's address

To set whether to delete the sender's address (From) at the time of e-mail transmission.
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
Default Value 0
FILE-OF 1 Set file transmission to entered address

To set whether to allow file transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, file transmission is not available by entering the address because "File" is not
displayed on the transmission screen.
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used.
Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses
registered in the Address Book can be used.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Default Value 0
MAIL-OF 1 Setting of e-mail TX to entered address

To set whether to allow e-mail transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, e-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because "E-mail" is not
0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited
Default Value 0
859
8. Service Mode
IFAX-OF 1 Setting of I-Fax TX to entered address
To set whether to allow I-Fax transmission to a newly entered address.
When 1 is set, I-Fax transmission is not available by entering the address because "I-Fax" is not
0: Allowed, 1: Prohibited
Default Value 0
LDAP-DEF 1 Initial condtn set of LDAP server search

Detail To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at the time of LDAP server Details
search.
0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5: No registration 1 (any setting),
6: No registration 2 (any setting)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> LDAP-SW
JA-DPI 2 Display of job archive record resolution

Detail To display the resolution of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and
I-Fax reception, etc.
In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made. To make the settings, use the
MEAP application which supports job archiving.
Caution In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made. To make the settings, use the
0: No conversion, 1: 100 x 100 dpi, 2: 200 x 200 dpi, 3: 300 x 300 dpi
Default Value 3
JA-COMPR 2 Dspl job archive record compress ratio

Detail To display the compression ratio of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX
reception and I-Fax reception, etc.
In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made. To make the settings, use the
Caution In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made. To make the settings, use the
0: No conversion, 1: Compression ratio 1/4, 2: Compression ratio 1/8, 3: Compression ratio 1/16,
4: Compression ratio 1/32, 5: Compression ratio 1/64
Default Value 3
860
8. Service Mode
FREE-DSP 2 ON/OFF of charge disable screen
Detail To set whether to display or hide the "Use Charge Management" screen for switching between
charge and no charge.
The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin Manager enables the mode in
which all the services are available for free (store manager mode) by temporarily canceling the
charging system.
Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched with the software switch when it is
set to display the "Use Charge Management" screen in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily canceling the charging system
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Management Settings> Charge Management> Use Charge Management
Mode
TNRB-SW 2 Display/hide of Toner Container counter

Detail To set whether to display the Toner Container counter on the Counter Check screen.
Use Case When showing the Toner Container counter to the user
0: Hide, 1: Display (70s only), 2: Not used, 3: Display (70s/180s), 4: Display (60s/70s/180s)
Supplement/Memo 60s: The number of premature replacements of the Toner Container
70s: The number of installations of a new Toner Container
80s: The number of installations of a new Toner Container + the number of premature
replacements
180s: The number of installations of unidentified Toner Container
JA-FORMT 2 Display of job archive record format

Detail To display the format of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and
IFAX reception, etc.
Whether the images processed by Packet JPEG are recorded in Packet JPEG, or converted into
Raster JPEG and then recorded is displayed.
0: Packet JPEG, 1: Raster JPEG
Default Value 0
861
8. Service Mode
HDCR-DSW 1 ON/OFF of HDD complete deletion display
Detail To set whether to display "Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion" in [Settings/Registration].
When 1 is set, unneeded data in the hard disk can be deleted completely on the HDD Data
Complete Deletion screen.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Management Settings> Data Management> HDD Data Complete Deletion> Hard Disk Data
Mode Complete Deletion
BWCL-DSP 2 ON/OFF of color/B&W selection screen

Detail To set whether to display the color/B&W selection screen to select the default of the color mode.
Use Case When displaying the color mode default selection screen
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
USBH-DSP 2 ON/OFF of USB host use display

Detail To set whether to display "Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host".
By selecting "1: Display", whether to use USB host on USB Settings screen can be selected.
Use Case When switching to display or hide "Use USB Host" on USB Settings screen
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host
Mode
USBM-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB ex-mem device MEAP driver use

Detail To set whether to display [Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device] in [Settings/Registration].
When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting.
Use Case When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
Caution When setting 0, be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device
Mode
862
8. Service Mode
USBI-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB input device MEAP driver use
Detail To set whether to display [Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device] in [Settings/Registration].
When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting.
Use Case When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
Caution When setting 0, be sure to make the setting after the specified setting is completed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
Additional Functions Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device
Mode
CTCHKDSP 1 Display/hide of counter print

Detail To set whether to display or hide "Print List" on the Counter Check screen.
Model name, model number information, counter check date and counter information can be output
as a total count management report.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 1
USBR-DSP 2 ON/OFF USB infrared devc MEAP driver use

Detail To set whether to display "Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device" in [Settings/Registration].
When 1 is set, whether to use MEAP driver can be selected on USB Settings screen.
Use Case When allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device
Mode
POL-SCAN 1 ON/OFF Rights Management Server set dspl

Detail When "1: Display" is set, the Rights Management Server function screen is displayed.
While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature, it is possible to hide if not
necessary.
0: Hide, 1: Display
863
8. Service Mode
JA-SBOX 2 Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM
To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled.
Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
Default Value 0
JA-DFAX 2 Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM

To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-REP 2 Setting of TX Report with image: SAM

To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-FREP 2 Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM

To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-BOX 2 Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM

To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated.
Default Value 0
864
8. Service Mode
JA-FORM 2 Setting of image composition: SAM
To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-PREV 2 Setting of preview page deletion: SAM

To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen.
Default Value 0
JA-PULL 2 Setting of network scan: SAM

To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-PDLB 2 Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM

To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver
at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver.
Default Value 0
JA-JOBK 2 Setting of job merge allowance:SAM

To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, jobs can be merged.
Default Value 0
865
8. Service Mode
JA-JDF 2 Setting of JDF: SAM
To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, JDF can be used.
Default Value 0
JA-RUI 2 Setting of Inbox document access: SAM

To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is enabled.
Default Value 0
JA-WEB 2 Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM

To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set uploading to the Inbox document with the Web Browser is enabled.
Default Value 0
EXP-CRYP 1 Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt

To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the Address Book when exporting
the address book and device settings via remote UI.
When 0 is set, the confidential part in the address book is exported without encryption.
Use Case When there is a need to export password without encryption because of operation and tool
Caution Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption because of security concern.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
866
8. Service Mode
SMD-EXPT 1 Setting of export target data: remote UI
Detail To set whether to export "service mode data" from remote UI.
When 1 is set, "service mode data" is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI. When
installing more than 1 machine at the same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
Use Case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo If selecting "service mode data" as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT
to 1, service mode data can be exported.
SNDSTREN 1 Set of setting delete aftr scan and send

Detail To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from
the "Scan and Send" screen.
0: Deleted
1: Retained only the transmission setting
2: Retained the transmission setting and address *
3: Retained only address *
4: Retained the transmission setting and address
5: Retained only address
* The setting for Options > Job Done Notice > Attach TX Image is not retained.
FAXSTREN 1 Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit

Detail To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from
the "Fax" screen.
0: Delete
1: Retain *
2: Retain
* The setting for Options > Job Done Notice > Attach TX Image is not retained.
SJ-UNMSK 2 ON/OFF secured job masking cancellation

To set whether to mask other people's secured jobs.
When 0 is set, operation of other people's secured jobs is not possible because they are masked.
When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Masking is canceled and other people's
secured jobs can be operated.
It is enabled at MEAP authentication.
Use Case When operating secured jobs in charge mode Type-C
0: OFF (Masking enabled), 1: ON (Masking canceled)
Default Value 0
867
8. Service Mode
SJ-CLMSK 2 ON/OFF secured job stop button display
To set whether to display the button to stop a secured job.
When 0 is set, the stop button is displayed.
When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Since the stop button is not displayed,
the secured job cannot be stopped.
Use Case When prohibiting to stop the secured job in charge mode Type-C
0: OFF (Display), 1: ON (Hide)
Default Value 0
PRTDP-SW 1 Set delivery side for 1-page job:2-sided

Detail To set whether to deliver paper face-up or face-down when printing only 1 page although 2-sided
print is set.
When 0 is set, paper is delivered face-down like 1-sided job. (Paper does not pass through the
Duplex Path.)
When 1 is set, paper is delivered face-up via the Duplex Path. Paper feed distance becomes longer
so productivity is decreased.
Use Case When changing the delivery side of 1-page print although 2-sided print is set
0: Face-down delivery, 1: Face-up delivery
Default Value 0
PDFD-MSW 2 Set output paper size: direct print PDF

Detail To set output paper size at direct print PDF.
Usually, the region defined by MediaBox is output. However, in some cases, the region defined
(trimmed) by CropBox is judged as output paper size depending on PDF file.
Set 1 when output result differs from what is defined at direct print PDF.
Use Case When preferring to output a PDF file with paper which size is defined by CropBox while the sizes
of MediaBox and CropBox are different
0: MediaBox (Normal), 1: CropBox
Default Value 0
SFT-OUT 2 Setting of offset priority delivery

Detail To set whether to deliver a job where offset and collate/offset group is set to the delivery destination
with offset function.
When 0 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination set in [Settings/Registration] even
though the offset function is not available.
When 1 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination with offset function even though a
delivery destination without offset function is set in [Settings/Registration].
Use Case When preferring to deliver a job to the delivery destination with offset function
0: Based on Output Tray Settings, 1: Priority on job settings (deliver to a delivery destination where
offset is possible)
Default Value 1
Mode
868
8. Service Mode
LGCY-SCP 2 Setting of PPA/secured print switch
To set whether to use the PPA function or the conventional secured print function.
Set 0 when using the PPA function. The conventional secured print function is disabled.
Set 1 when using the conventional secured print function (when the EFI Controller is connected,
etc.). The PPA function is disabled.
When IMG-CONT is set to 3 or 4 for connecting the EFI Controller, the setting of this item becomes
1.
When this item is set to 0, the setting of UI-PPA becomes 1. When this item is set to 1, the setting
of UI-PPA becomes 0.
Use Case When using the conventional secured print function (when the EFI Controller is connected, etc.)
Caution The PPA function cannot be used when the EFI Controller is connected.
0: Use the PPA function, 1: Use the conventional secured print function
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-PPA
COPIER> OPTION> INT-FACE> IMG-CONT
Supplement/Memo PPA (Personal Print Application): A function to hold print job. It contains the function of secured
print.
VC-CNT 2 Set tiered base pricing oprtn method

Detail To set the operation method of the tiered base pricing.
Name of the tiered base pricing counter displayed on the Check Counter screen is switched
according to the selected operation method.
Use Case When starting operation of the tiered base pricing
0: Normal charge, 1: Tiered base pricing 1, 2: Tiered base pricing 2, 3: Tiered base pricing 3
Default Value 0
VC-AVE 2 Set tiered base pricing calculate method

Detail To set the calculation method of video count correction value to be used for the tiered base pricing.
When 0 is set, the correction value is derived by averaging the video count values for 3 colors (Y/
M/C). When 1 is set, it is derived by averaging the video count values for 4 colors (Y/M/C/Bk).
Use Case According to the usage of the user
0: (Y+M+C)/3, 1: (Y+M+C+Bk)/4
Default Value 0
VC-HIGH 2 Tiered base pricing cntr "High" thrshld

Detail To set the threshold value for the tiered base pricing counter "High".
To enter the value 10 times higher than the estimated video count value (%).
Video count correction value higher than the value (setting value x 0.1 (%)) is judged as "High".
As the value is changed by 1, the threshold is changed by 0.1%.
Display/Adj/Set Range 50 to 2000 (5 to 200%)
Default Value 100
869
8. Service Mode
VC-LOW 2 Tiered base pricing cntr "Low" thrshld
Detail To set the threshold value for the tiered base pricing counter "Low".
To enter the value 10 times higher than the estimated video count value (%).
Video count correction value lower than the value (setting value x 0.1 (%)) is judged as "Low".
As the value is changed by 1, the threshold is changed by 0.1%.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 50 (0 to 5%)
Default Value 10
FLM-DSPL 2 ON/OFF of Clear Film usage

Detail To set whether to use the Clear Film.
When 1 is set, "Clear Film" is displayed on the paper type screen so it can be registered as the
paper to be used.
Use Case When using large size transparency or special film
Caution - Since the clear film is not defined in the specifications, image
quality is not guaranteed even though it can be fed.
- After the setting is made, check image quality and get approval from the user. If there is an error,
set the value back to 0.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> Set > Detailed Settings > Clear Film
Mode
FMTMH2M 2 [For customization]

CNT-PRT 2 ON/OFF of parts counter report output
Detail To set whether to print parts counter values on the counter report.
Use Case When grasping the estimated life of parts while the monitoring service function is not used
0: OFF (Not print), 1: ON (Print)
Additional Functions Check Counter> Print List
Mode
JA-WIFI 2 Setting of SAM Wi-Fi direct print

To set whether to allow Wi-Fi direct print when iW SAM is enabled.
Wi-Fi direct print cannot be used when iW SAM is enabled. However, when 1 is set, it can be used.
Default Value 0
C-P-SIZE 2 [For customization]
870
8. Service Mode
MF-FEED 1 Manual restart w/OK key: no ppr on MP Tr
Detail If the following three conditions are satisfied, pickup is not restarted automatically when placing
paper on the Multi-purpose Tray.
1. The setting of "Preferences> Paper Settings> Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults" is "Fixed".
2. The job type is PDL.
3. The setting value of this service mode is 1.
4. Paper is placed at occurrence of no paper on the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Use Case Upon user's request. Use this item for customization for Aeon during application of service mode.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Mode
TNRBEXGR 2 ON/OFF oprtn hold: Tonr Cont early rplce

Detail To set whether to hold the operation when the Toner Container is prematurely replaced although
it can still be used.
When a new Toner Container is inserted while 1 is set, a message is displayed and the operation
is held.
The message disappears by changing the Toner Container back to the one before replacement
or by changing the setting value of this item to 0 and then restarting the machine.
Use Case When preventing from replacing the Toner Container prematurely
Caution The message does not disappear unless the Toner Container is changed back to the one before
the replacement. Be sure to get approval from the user by telling the above specifications before
making the setting.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
TNRBRMVR 2 ON/OFF mssg dspl at Tonr Cntner removal

Detail To set whether to display a message when the Toner Container is removed although it can still be
used.
Use Case When there is no need to display the message
0: OFF, 1: ON
INSTDT-Y 1 Register installation date info: year

Detail To set the information on the installation date (year).
Use Case - At installation
- When replacing the HDD
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSTDTST
871
8. Service Mode
INSTDT-M 1 Register installation date info: month
Detail To set the information on the installation date (month).
Default Value 0
INSTDT-D 1 Register installation date info: day

Detail To set the information on the installation date (day).
Default Value 0
INSTDT-H 1 Register installation date info: hour

Detail To set the information on the installation date (hour).
Default Value 0
INSTDT-N 1 Register installation date info: minute

Detail To set the information on the installation date (minute).
Default Value 0
STOP-USE 1 ON/OFF of Stop key function

Detail To switch ON and OFF of the Stop key function.
When Stop key is pressed, all print jobs are paused.
Use Case When switching to use/not use Stop key according to the customer
Caution Be sure to explain to the customer in advance that all print jobs are paused when Stop key is
pressed.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
872
8. Service Mode
LASTREST 1 Set remaining consumables display specs
Detail To switch the percentage of increments in which the remaining level of consumables is shown at
their near end.
Use Case When the remaining level of toner or waste toner is suddenly displayed as 0%
2) Turn ON/OFF the Main Power.
Caution The default value is properly set according to the country and the model, and thus should not be
normally changed unless requested.
0: 5%, 1: 1%
Additional Functions Status Monitor/Cancel > Consmbls./Others > Consumables
Mode
SZCHKSW 2 For R&D
■ CST
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CST
CST1-P1 1 Setting of Cst1 paper size (A5R/STMTR)
Detail To set the paper size (A5R/STMTR) used in the Cassette 1.
Use Case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
Mode

0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
Mode

0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default Value 0
Mode
873
8. Service Mode
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default Value 0
Mode
CST-K-SW 2 Set of EXEC/16K size support: Cassette 1

Detail To set whether to support EXEC or 16K size (K-size paper) by the Cassette 1.
This setting is enabled only for the location where K-size paper can be selected in the Control
Panel menu. For other locations, only EXEC can be set.
Caution When K-size paper cannot be selected in the Control Panel menu, only the setting value 0 can be
set.
0: EXEC, 1: 16K
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm
C2-K-SW 2 Set of EXEC/16K size support: Cassette 2

set.
0: EXEC, 1: 16K
Default Value 0

set.
0: EXEC, 1: 16K
Default Value 0
874
8. Service Mode
set.
0: EXEC, 1: 16K
Default Value 0
875
8. Service Mode
■ ACC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC
COIN 1 Setting of charge management
To set charge management method.
Use Case At installation of Coin Manager
Caution - When setting a value other than 0, "ON" is automatically set to [Delete Job After Printing]. It will
not be returned to "OFF" even if the value is changed back to 0 once it has been changed.
- Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 3 (from 0 to 2) when
setting 3. The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 3) once
the mode has been changed.
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL, AFN-PSWD=1
- COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT=1
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX=0
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings> IP Address Range Settings> RX/Print
Range: Allow IPv4 Address=ON
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv6 Settings> IP Address Range Settings> RX/Print
Range: Allow IPv6 Address=ON
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> FTP Print Settings> Use FTP Printing=OFF
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPP Print Settings=ON
- Preferences> Network> SMB Server Settings> SMB Printer Settings> Use SMB=ON
- Function Settings> Send> E-mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings> SMTP Receive,
POP=OFF
- Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 4 (from 0 to 2) when
setting 4. The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 4) once
the mode has been changed.
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> AFN-PSWD=1
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX, UI-RSCAN, UI-EPRNT, UI-
HOLD=0
- Management Settings> Device Management> Display Log=OFF
0: No charge
1: Charge with Coin Manager
2: Charge with remote counter
3: Charge with DA (only in Japan)
4: Charge with this machine itself
5: New SC mode
6: External charge mode 6
7: External charge mode 7
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> PDL-THR
Additional Functions Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings
Mode Function Settings> Print> Delete Job After Printing
Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> DNS Settings> FTP Print Settings, IPP Print Settings
Supplement/Memo Control card can be used with "No charge".
DA: Digital Accessory
876
8. Service Mode
CARD-SW 1 Set screen dspl: Coin Manager connected
Detail To set coin or card that the user is prompted to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager
is connected.
When 1 is set, authentication operation using the Coin Manager is also required.
0 and 3: Card, 1: Card + authentication, 2: Coin/Card
Default Value 0
STPL-LMT 2 Set number of sheets for saddle stitch

Detail To set the number of sheets for saddle stitch
0: 5 sheets without blank band (6 sheets when a cover is included)
1: 10 sheets without blank band (11 sheets when a cover is included)
2: 10 sheets with blank band (11 sheets when a cover is included)
3: 15 sheets with blank band (16 sheets when a cover is included)
Default Value 3
OUT-TRAY 1 Presence/absence of Third Delivery Tray

Detail To set whether the Third Delivery Tray is installed or not.
When it is installed, set 1.
Use Case When the Third Delivery Tray is installed
Default Value 0
CC-SPSW 2 Setting of control card I/F support

Detail To set support level of control card (CCIV/CCV) interface.
To keep processing performance of the printer engine, set 1.
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets, set 2.
Use Case Upon user's request (when connecting to the external counter management system using the
control card interface)
Caution When 1 is set, output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets.
When 2 is set, processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup
location.
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets
Default Value 0
877
8. Service Mode
UNIT-PRC 2 Setting of Coin Manager currency unit
Detail To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager
0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No currency unit (no fractional
unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional unit)
Default Value 0
IN-TRAY 1 Presence/absence of Second Delivery Tray

Detail To set whether the Second Delivery Tray is installed or not.
When it is installed, set 1.
Use Case When the Second Delivery Tray is installed
Default Value 0
MIN-PRC 1 Set of Coin Manager minimum price

Detail To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount to be handled with the Coin
Manager that supports Japanese yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by going through the following:
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> UNIT-PRC, entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($
0.50).
Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN.
Default Value 10
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/Memo When a value smaller than the minimum amount is entered in Settings/Registration menu as the
charging amount, it causes an error.
MAX-PRC 1 Set of Coin Manager maximum price

Detail To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum amount to be handled with the
Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen.
Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN.
Default Value 8800
Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/Memo When a value larger than the maximum amount is entered in Settings/Registration menu as the
charging amount, it causes an error.
878
8. Service Mode
MIC-TUN 1 Manual adj of voice recognize microphone
Detail To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the connected voice recognition
microphone.
Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in [Settings/Registration]; however, adjust it manually
as needed.
Use Case When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning
Default Value 128
Additional Functions Preferences> Accessibility> Voice Navigation Settings> Tune Microphone
Mode
SRL-SPSW 1 Setting of Serial I/F Kit support

Detail To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit.
To keep processing performance of printer engine, select "1: Priority on speed".
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets, select "2: Priority on upper limit
number of sheets".
Use Case At installation of Serial Interface Kit
Caution With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets.
With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing performance of the printer engine is
decreased depending on pickup location.
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets
Default Value 0
PDL-THR 2 ON/OFF PDL print: external charge mode

To set whether to execute normal PDL print when COIN is set to external charge mode 6/7.
Use Case When executing normal PDL print in external charge mode
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
MEAP-SRL 1 Set to allow serial comctn from MEAP app

To set whether to allow serial communication of MEAP application.
When 1 is set, serial communication of the machine is stopped and only the serial communication
with MEAP application is available.
Use Case When performing serial communication from MEAP application
0: Prohibited, 1: Allowed
Default Value 0
879
8. Service Mode
CV-CSZ 1 Set outpt info notice:chg w/device alone
Detail To set whether to notify the Coin Manager of color mode and paper size at the time of charging
with a device alone.
Use Case When Coin Manager (CV3) is connected
Caution Set 0 when a coin manager other than CV3 is connected. When 1 is set, an error occurs.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
COIN-AUT 1 ON/OFF of charge/no charge mixed setting

To set whether to switch charge/no charge according to the authentication setting in an
environment where both charged and no charged users exist.
When this item is set to 1 while the setting value of COIN is 4, the initial screen where the user
can select charge/no charge can be set. Selecting "Charge" on the initial screen displays the copy
screen, and selecting "No Charge" displays the main menu after authentication.
Caution When setting 1, be sure to set COIN to 4 in advance. If COIN-AUT is set first, it is necessary to
make the settings in the following order again: COIN and then COIN-AUT.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX/SEND/FAX
Additional Functions Preferences> Display Settings> Default Screen after Startup/Restoration
Mode
■ INT-FACE
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > INT-FACE
IMG-CONT 1 Connection setting of print server
Detail To set connection with print server.
0: Print server not yet connected (normal), 1, 2: Not used, 3: Print server (color machine)
connected, 4: Print server (B&W machine) connected
Default Value 0
880
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > INT-FACE
NWCT-TM 2 Timeout setting of network connection
To set the time to keep network connection between this machine and the PC application (keep-
alive setting).
As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute.
Unit min
Default Value 5
Supplement/Memo Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function, cascade copy, MEAP network
application, etc.
Unit
CNT-TYPE 1 Display of print server ID

Detail To display the ID of the print server being recognized by the machine.
Use Case At installation of print server
1: Not yet connected, 400 to 499: EFI print server, 600 to 699: Creo print server, 700 to 799: Oce
print server
Default Value 1
VTRNS-TO 2 For R&D
■ LCNS-TR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR
ST-SEND 2 Installation state dspl of SEND function
Detail To display installation state of SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether SEND function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SEND.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK!
TR-SEND 2 Trns license key dspl of SEND function

Detail To display transfer license key to use SEND function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case - When replacing HDD
- When replacing the device
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SEND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
Display/Adj/Set Range 24 digits
881
8. Service Mode
ST-ENPDF 2 Install state dspl of Encryption PDF
Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
TR-ENPDF 2 Trns license key dspl of Encryption PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
ST-SPDF 2 Install state dspl of Searchable PDF

Detail To display installation state of Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
TR-SPDF 2 Trns license key dspl of Searchable PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
ST-EXPDF 2 Instal state of Encry PDF + Searchbl PDF

Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when disabling and then
transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-EXPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
882
8. Service Mode
TR-EXPDF 2 Trns lcns key of Encry PDF+Searchbl PDF
Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-EXPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan.
ST-PDFDR 2 Install state dspl of Direct Print PDF

Detail To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Direct Print PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PDFDR.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
TR-PDFDR 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Direct Print PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PDFDR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
ST-SCR 2 Install state dspl of Encry Secure Print

Detail To display installation state of Encrypted Secure Print when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Encrypted Secure Print is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCR.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
TR-SCR 2 Trns license key dspl: Encry Secure Pnt

Detail To display transfer license key to use Encrypted Secure Print when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
Caution This mode is enabled when there is "3DES+USH-H" Board.
883
8. Service Mode
ST-BRDIM 2 Install state dspl: PCL Barcode Printing
Detail To display installation state of Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
TR-BRDIM 2 Trns lcns key dspl: PCL Barcode Printing

Detail To display transfer license key to use Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
ST-VNC 2 Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft

Detail To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-VNC.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
TR-VNC 2 Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Soft

Detail To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-VNC.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
ST-WEB 2 Install state dspl: Web Access Software

Detail To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Web Access Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WEB.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
884
8. Service Mode
TR-WEB 2 Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft
Detail To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WEB.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
ST-HRPDF 2 Install state dspl of High Compress PDF

Detail To display installation state of High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether High Compression PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HRPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
TR-HRPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of High Compress PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use High Compression PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HRPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
ST-TRSND 2 Install state dspl: Trial SEND function

Detail To display installation state of Trial SEND function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Trial SEND function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TRSND.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
TR-TRSND 2 Trns lcns key dspl: Trial SEND function

Detail To display transfer license key to use Trial SEND function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TRSND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
885
8. Service Mode
ST-WTMRK 2 Install state dspl of Secure Watermark
Detail To display installation state of Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WTMRK.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
TR-WTMRK 2 Trns license key dspl: Secure Watermark

Detail To display transfer license key to use Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WTMRK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
ST-TSPDF 2 Install state dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP

Detail To display installation state of Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Time Stamp PDF (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TSPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
TR-TSPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TSPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
ST-USPDF 2 Install state dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF

Detail To display installation state of Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Digital User Signature PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-USPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
Default Value 0
886
8. Service Mode
TR-USPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF
Detail To display transfer license key to use Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-USPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
ST-DVPDF 2 Install state dspl of Device Sign PDF

Detail To display installation state of Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
TR-DVPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Device Sign PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-DVPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
ST-SCPDF 2 Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF

Detail To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
TR-SCPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SCPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
887
8. Service Mode
ST-AMS 2 Install state dspl of Access Mngm System
Detail To display installation state of Access Management System when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether Access Management System is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AMS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
TR-AMS 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Access Mngm System

Detail To display transfer license key to use Access Management System when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AMS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
ST-ERDS 2 Install state dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn

Detail To display installation state of E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function when disabling and
then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ERDS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
Supplement/Memo Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made charge
server.
TR-ERDS 2 Trns lcns key dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn

Detail To display transfer license key to use E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function when disabling
and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ERDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
Supplement/Memo Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made charge
server.
ST-PS 2 Install state display of PS function

Detail To display installation state of PS function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
888
8. Service Mode
TR-PS 2 Transfer license key dspl of PS function
Detail To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
ST-PCL 2 Install state display of PCL function

Detail To display installation state of PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCL.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
TR-PCL 2 Transfer license key dspl: PCL function

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
ST-PSLI5 2 Install state dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP

Detail To display installation state of PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when disabling and then
Use Case When checking whether PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
Default Value 0
TR-PSLI5 2 Trns lcns key dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when disabling and
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
889
8. Service Mode
ST-LIPS5 2 Install state dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP
Detail To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
Use Case When checking whether LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LIPS5.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
TR-LIPS5 2 Trns lcns key dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
ST-LIPS4 2 Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
TR-LIPS4 2 Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring
the license.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
ST-PSPCL 2 Install state dspl of PS/PCL function

Detail To display installation state of PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCL.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
890
8. Service Mode
TR-PSPCL 2 Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func
Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
ST-PCLUF 2 Install state dspl: PCL/UFR II function

Detail To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCLUF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
TR-PCLUF 2 Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PCLUF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
ST-PSLIP 2 Install state dspl of PS/LIPS4 func: JP

Detail To display installation state of PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLIP.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
TR-PSLIP 2 Trns license key dspl: PS/LIPS4 func:JP

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSLIP.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
891
8. Service Mode
ST-PSPCU 2 Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func
Detail To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCU.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
TR-PSPCU 2 Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func

Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCU.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
ST-LXUFR 2 Install state display of UFR II function

Detail To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether UFR II function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LXUFR.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
TR-LXUFR 2 Trns license key dspl of UFR II function

Detail To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LXUFR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
ST-HDCR2 2 Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set

Detail To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Use Case When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HDCR2.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
Default Value 0
892
8. Service Mode
TR-HDCR2 2 Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set
Detail To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HDCR2.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
ST-JBLK 2 Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock

Detail To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-JBLK.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
Default Value 0
TR-JBLK 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock

Detail To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-JBLK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
ST-AFAX 2 Installation state display of Remote Fax

Detail To display installation state of Remote Fax when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Remote Fax is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AFAX.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
TR-AFAX 2 Transfer license key dspl of Remote Fax

Detail To display transfer license key to use Remote Fax when disabling and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-AFAX.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
893
8. Service Mode
ST-REPDF 2 Install state dspl:Reader Extensions PDF
Detail To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Reader Extensions PDF is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-REPDF.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
TR-REPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl:Reader Extensions PDF

Detail To display transfer license key to use Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-REPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
ST-OOXML 2 Install state display of Office Open XML

Detail To display installation state of Office Open XML when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Office Open XML is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OOXML.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
TR-OOXML 2 Trns lcns key display of Office Open XML

Detail To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OOXML.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
ST-XPS 2 Install state dspl of Direct Print XPS

Detail To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether Direct Print XPS is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-XPS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
894
8. Service Mode
TR-XPS 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print XPS
Detail To display transfer license key to use Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-XPS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
ST-2600 2 Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func

Detail To display installation state of the IEEE2600.1 security function when disabling and then
Use Case When checking whether the IEEE2600.1 security function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-2600.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
TR-2600 2 Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func

Detail To display transfer license key to use IEEE2600.1 security function when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-2600.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
ST-OPFNT 2 Install state display of PCL Font Set

Detail To display installation state of PCL Font Set when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL Font Set is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
TR-OPFNT 2 Trns license key display of PCL Font Set

Detail To display transfer license key to use the PCL Font Set when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OPFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
895
8. Service Mode
ST-NCAPT 2 Install state display of NetCap function
Detail To display installation state of network packet capture function when disabling and then
Use Case When checking whether network packet capture function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
TR-NCAPT 2 Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func

Detail To display transfer license key to use the network packet capture function when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
ST-IPFAX 2 Installation state display of IPFAX

Detail To display installation state of IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license.
Use Case When checking whether IPFAX is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-IPFAX.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-IPFAX.
Default Value 0
TR-IPFAX 2 Transfer license key dspl of IPFAX

Detail To display transfer license key to use IPFAX when disabling and then transferring the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-IPFAX.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-IPFAX.
ST-U-RDS 2 Install state display of E-RDS function

Detail To display installation state of Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether Embedded-RDS function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS
896
8. Service Mode
TR-U-RDS 2 Trns license key dspl of E-RDS function
Detail To display transfer license key to use Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then
Use Case - When replacing the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-U-RDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-U-RDS.
ST-OFIC 2 Install state dspl:MS Office direct func

Detail To display installation state of MS Office direct function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether MS Office direct function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OFIC.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OFIC.
TR-OFIC 2 Trns lcns key dspl:MS Office direct func

Detail To display transfer license key to use MS Office direct function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-OFIC.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OFIC.
ST-SMLG 2 Install state dspl of picture login func

Detail To display installation state of picture login function when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether picture login function is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SMLG.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SMLG.
TR-SMLG 2 Trns lcns key dspl: picture login func

Detail To display transfer license key to use picture login function when disabling and then transferring
the license.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-SMLG.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SMLG.
897
8. Service Mode
ST-TCFNT 2 Inst state dspl:PCL Asian Font, trad CHI
Detail To display installation state of PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and then
transfer the license.
Use Case When checking whether PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TCFNT.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TCFNT.
Caution When replacing the HDD, check that "PCL Traditional Chinese Fonts" and "PCL Traditional
Chinese Fonts (HKSCS)" are installed with [Font List] in [Settings/Registration].
Additional Functions Function Settings> Printer> Output Report> PCL> Font List
Mode
TR-TCFNT 2 Trn lic key dspl:PCL Asian Font,trad CHI

Detail To display transfer license key to use PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-TCFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TCFNT.
Additional Functions Function Settings> Printer> Output Report> PCL> Font List
Mode
TR-FRWEB 2 Trn lcns key dspl:Web Access SW,free ver

Detail To display transfer license key to use the free version of Web Access Software when disabling
and then transferring the license of it.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-FRWEB.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-FRWEB.
ST-FRWEB 2 Instl state dspl:Web Access SW, free ver

Detail To display installation state of the free version of Web Access Software when disabling and then
transferring the license of it.
Use Case When checking whether the free version of Web Access Software is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-FRWEB.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-FRWEB.
ST-HCD 2 Inst state dspl: IEEE2600 Security Kit

Detail To display installation state of Security Kit for IEEE2600 when disabling and then transferring the
license.
Use Case When checking whether the Security Kit for IEEE2600 is installed
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HCD.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HCD.
898
8. Service Mode
TR-HCD 2 Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600 Security Kit
Detail To display transfer license key to use the Security Kit for IEEE2600 when disabling and then
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-HCD.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HCD.
Default Value 0
ST-MECWL 2 Inst state dspl: McAfee whitelist func

Detail To display installation state of McAfee whitelisting function when disabling the function and
Use Case When checking whether McAfee whitelisting function is installed.
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-MECWL.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-MECWL.
Supplement/Memo McAfee and the McAfee logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of McAfee, LLC or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks and registered
trademarks are the property of their respective manufacturers. Copyright(c)2018 McAfee LLC
TR-MECWL 2 Trn lcns key dspl: McAfee whitelist func

Detail To display transfer license key to use McAfee whitelisting function when disabling and then
Use Case - When replacing the HDD
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-MECWL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-MECWL.
Supplement/Memo McAfee and the McAfee logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of McAfee, LLC or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks and registered
trademarks are the property of their respective manufacturers. Copyright(c)2018 McAfee LLC
■ CUSTOM2
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2
SP-B01 2 [For customization]
899
8. Service Mode
900
8. Service Mode
SP-V01 2 [For customization]
901
8. Service Mode
902
8. Service Mode
■ PM-PRE-M
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-PRE-M
TONER-Y 1 Dspl/hide Toner (Y) preparation warning
Detail To switch between display/hide the preparation warning on the Control Panel Status Bar.
Use Case In the case of displaying the warning when consumables/consumable parts are not automatically
delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
TONER-M 1 Dspl/hide Toner (M) preparation warning

delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
903
8. Service Mode
TONER-C 1 Dspl/hide Toner (C) preparation warning
delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
TONER-K 1 Dspl/hide Toner (Bk) preparation warning

delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
WST-TNR 1 Display/hide Wst Tonr Cont prep warning

delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
PT-DR-Y 1 Display/hide Drum-U (Y) prepare warning

delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
PT-DR-M 1 Display/hide Drum-U (M) prepare warning

delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
PT-DR-C 1 Display/hide Drum-U (C) prepare warning

delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
904
8. Service Mode
PT-DRM 1 Display/hide Drum-U (Bk) prepare warning
delivered
0: Hide, 1: Display
FX-REP 1 For R&D

DF-REP 1 For R&D
■ PM-EXC-M
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-EXC-M
PT-DR-Y 1 Dspl/hide Drum-U (Y) Replacement message
Detail To switch between display/hide the Replacement message on the Control Panel Status Bar.
Use Case When a non-technical person will replace the drum unit
0: Hide, 1: Display
PT-DR-M 1 Dspl/hide Drum-U (M) Replacement message

0: Hide, 1: Display
PT-DR-C 1 Dspl/hide Drum-U (C) Replacement message

0: Hide, 1: Display
PT-DRM 1 Dspl/hide Drum-U(Bk) Replacement message

0: Hide, 1: Display
FX-REP 1 For R&D

DF-REP 1 For R&D
■ PM-U-DSP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-U-DSP
PT-DR-Y 1 For R&D
905
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-U-DSP
PT-DR-M 1 For R&D
PT-DR-C 1 For R&D
PT-DRM 1 For R&D
FX-REP 1 For R&D
DF-REP 1 For R&D
■ PM-MSG-D
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-MSG-D
TONER-Y 1 Set days left before Toner (Y) prep warn
Detail To set the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed.
Use Case When changing the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed
TONER-M 1 Set days left before Toner (M) prep warn

TONER-C 1 Set days left before Toner (C) prep warn

TONER-K 1 Set days left before Toner(Bk) prep warn

WST-TNR 1 Set days left bef Wst Tnr Cont prep warn
906
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-MSG-D
PT-DR-Y 1 Set days left before Drm-U (Y) prep warn
PT-DR-M 1 Set days left before Drm-U (M) prep warn

PT-DR-C 1 Set days left before Drm-U (C) prep warn

PT-DRM 1 Set days left before Drm-U(Bk) prep warn

FX-REP 1 For R&D

DF-REP 1 For R&D
■ PM-DLV-D
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-DLV-D
TONER-Y 1 Set Toner (Y) prior alarm notice timing
Detail To set the number of days left before the prior notification alarm will be notified.
Use Case When changing the timing to notify the prior notification alarm
-1: The alarm not issued
907
8. Service Mode
TONER-M 1 Set Toner (M) prior alarm notice timing
TONER-C 1 Set Toner (C) prior alarm notice timing

TONER-K 1 Set Toner (Bk) prior alarm notice timing

WST-TNR 1 Set Wst Tonr Cont prior alarm notice tmg

PT-DR-Y 1 Set Drum-U (Y) prior alarm notice timing

PT-DR-M 1 Set Drum-U (M) prior alarm notice timing

908
8. Service Mode
PT-DR-C 1 Set Drum-U (C) prior alarm notice timing
PT-DRM 1 Set Drum-U(Bk) prior alarm notice timing

DV-UNT-Y 1 For R&D

DV-UNT-M 1 For R&D
DV-UNT-C 1 For R&D
DV-UNT-K 1 For R&D
TR-UNIT 1 For R&D
2TR-ROLL 1 For R&D
FX-UNIT 1 For R&D
DF-PU-RL 1 For R&D
DF-FD-RL 1 For R&D
DF-SP-RL 1 For R&D
DF-PR-PD 1 For R&D
909
8. Service Mode
TEST (Print test mode)

■ PG
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG
TYPE 1 Test print
Detail To execute the test print.
2) Press Start key.
Test print is executed.
Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test print output.
0: Image from CCD (normal print)
1 to 3: For R&D use
4: 16 gradations
5: Whole-area halftone image
6: Grid
7 to 9: For R&D use
10: MCYBk horizontal stripes
11: For R&D use
12: YMCBk 64 gradations
13: For R&D use
14: Full color 16 gradations
15 to 100: For R&D use
Default Value 0
TXPH 1 Setting of test print image mode

Detail To set the image mode at the time of test print output.
This mode is enabled for test print only.
0: Error diffusion
1: Low screen ruling (approx. 133 to 190 lines)
2: High screen ruling (approx. 200 to 268 lines)
3 to 4: Not used
5: Error diffusion (with trailing edge adjustment)
6: High screen ruling (with trailing edge adjustment)
7 to 8: Not used
9: 1/2 speed, low screen ruling (approx. 133 to 190 lines)
10: 1/2 speed, high screen ruling (approx. 200 to 268 lines)
11 to 13: Not used
14: 1/2 speed, high screen ruling (with trailing edge adjustment)
Default Value 0
THRU 1 Set image correct table use: test print

Detail To set whether to use the image correction table at the time of test print output.
0: "Auto Adjust Gradation": ON, "Auto Correct Full Color": OFF
1: "Auto Adjust Gradation": OFF, "Auto Correct Full Color": OFF
2: "Auto Adjust Gradation": ON, "Auto Correct Full Color": ON
Default Value 0
910
8. Service Mode
DENS-Y 1 Adj of Y-color density at test print
Detail To adjust Y-color density when performing test print (TYPE = 5).
Use Case At test print (TYPE = 5)
Default Value 128
DENS-M 1 Adj of M-color density at test print

Detail To adjust M-color density when performing test print (TYPE = 5).
Default Value 128
DENS-C 1 Adj of C-color density at test print

Detail To adjust C-color density when performing test print (TYPE = 5).
Default Value 128
DENS-K 1 Adj of Bk-color density at test print

Detail To adjust Bk-color density when performing test print (TYPE = 5).
Default Value 128
COLOR-Y 1 Setting of Y-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output Y-color at the time of test print.
The setting is applied to all types.
When setting COLOR-Y to 1 and COLOR-M/C/K to 0, a single Y-color is output.
Use Case At test print
0: Not output, 1: Output
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-M/C/K
COLOR-M 1 Setting of M-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output M-color at the time of test print.
When setting COLOR-M to 1 and COLOR-Y/C/K to 0, a single M-color is output.
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-Y/C/K
911
8. Service Mode
COLOR-C 1 Setting of C-color output at test print
Detail To set whether to output C-color at the time of test print.
When setting COLOR-C to 1 and COLOR-Y/M/K to 0, a single C-color is output.
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-Y/M/K
COLOR-K 1 Setting of Bk-color output at test print

Detail To set whether to output Bk-color at the time of test print.
When setting COLOR-K to 1 and COLOR-Y/M/C to 0, a single Bk-color is output.
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> COLOR-Y/M/C
F/M-SW 1 Setting of PG full color/single color

Detail To set whether to output PG in full color or single color.
Use Case When identifying the cause whether it's due to full color or single color
0: Full color, 1: Single color
Default Value 0
PG-PICK 1 Setting of test print paper source

Detail To set the paper source at the time of test print output.
Use Case - When outputting a test print
- At problem analysis
1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3, 4: Cassette 4, 5: Multi-purpose Tray, 6 to 8: Not used
2-SIDE 1 Setting of PG 2-sided mode

Detail To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
Use Case At trouble analysis
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default Value 0
912
8. Service Mode
PG-QTY 1 Setting of PG output quantity
Detail To set the number of sheets for PG output.
Use Case At trouble analysis
Unit sheet
Default Value 1
Unit
FINISH 1 Accessory processing function test print

Detail To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function.
Use Case When checking operation of accessory processing function
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the number of sheets for PG-QTY, and then press OK key.
2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
3) Press Start button.
The machine outputs a test print.
0: N/A
1: Staple (Finisher, front)
2: Staple (Finisher, 2 points)
3: Staple (Finisher, rear)
4: Booklet (saddle stitch)
5: Z-fold (Finisher)
8: Saddle fold (Finisher)
11: Punch (Inner Puncher)
16: Staple free stapling (Finisher)
Any values other than those mentioned above: Not used
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY
913
8. Service Mode
■ NETWORK
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NETWORK
PING 1 Network connection check
Detail To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network.
Use Case - When checking network connection at the time of installation
- At network connection failure
Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at user's site that installation of this machine is complete, and
ask for network setting.
4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection, and check the remote host
address of PING transmission target.
5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press OK key and Start key.
OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete.
NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. In case of cable connection
failure, connect again and then go to step 5).
6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK key and Start key.
OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check NIC.
NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to check the setting again.
7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press OK key.
OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the system administrator that the
trouble is due to network environment and ask for countermeasure.
NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/ replace NIC.
Display/Adj/Set Range 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
At normal state: OK, At failure occurrence: NG
Supplement/Memo - Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network.
- Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is available because the signal
is returned before NIC.
- NIC: Network interface
- Local host address: IP address of this machine
BML-DISP 2 Set System Monitor scrn: BMlinks support

Detail To set whether to display only the device configuration in the System Monitor screen when
supporting BMlinks.
When the setting is switched, the job status and logs are not displayed.
Use Case When supporting BMlinks
0: Ordinary System Monitor screen, 1: Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed
Default Value 0
IPV6-ADR 1 Setting of PING send address (IPv6)

Detail To set the IPv6 address to send PING.
When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6, the network
connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked.
Caution - Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6.
- Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0-9, a-f) and a separator
(:).
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6
PING-IP6 1 PING transmission to IPv6 address

Detail To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR.
The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked.
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR
914
8. Service Mode
■ NET-CAP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP
CAPOFFON 2 ON/OFF of NetCap function
Detail To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Additional Functions Store Network Packet Log
Mode
STT-STP 2 Start and stop of network packet capture

Detail To start and stop network packet capture.
0: Stop, 1: Start
Default Value 0
Mode
CAPSTATE 2 State display of network packet capture

Detail To display the state of network packet capture.
Mode
PONSTART 2 Set network packet capture start timing

Detail To set whether to perform network packet capture from power-on.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Mode
OVERWRIT 2 Setting of NetCap data overwriting

Detail To set whether to finish network capturing or overwrite when HDD becomes full.
0: No overwriting (finish network packet capture), 1: Overwriting
Default Value 1
Mode
915
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP
PAYLOAD 2 Set network packet capture data save
Detail To set whether to discard payload when saving the captured packet data.
0: Save captured packet data as is, 1: Discard payload and save the packet data
Default Value 0
Mode
FILE-CLR 2 Deletion of network packet capture data

Detail To delete the captured packet data.
SIMPFILT 2 For R&D

ENCDATA 2 Setting of packet data encryption
Detail To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured packet data to the USB flash
drive.
Use Case - At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
- When improving security of written packet data
Caution This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB flash drive. Even when the packet data
is loaded using SST, the file is specified, therefore the setting is disabled.
0: Encrypted (encrypted file)
1: Not encrypted (plain text file)
2: Encrypted (encrypted file + plain text file)
Default Value 0
CAPIF 2 Setting of network packet capture target

Detail To set the network interface to capture the packet data.
Make this setting before starting network packet capture.
Use Case When changing the target of network packet capture
1: Local loopback, 2: Wired LAN, 3: Wireless LAN, 4: Wireless Soft AP mode, 5: Wi-Fi direct 6:
Wired LAN (Sub-Line)
Default Value 2
916
8. Service Mode
■ P-STOP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > P-STOP
PRINTER 1 Forcible stop of paper feed
Detail To forcibly stop paper for the next job at the specified position (only once).
Leading edge of paper stops at the specified position so that the cause of a problem can be
identified.
Set 99 when checking an image on the ITB.
When the operation is stopped forcibly, jam code "AAxx" is displayed.
When a normal jam occurs at a position other than the specified position or paper is delivered
without being forcibly stopped, this setting is automatically cleared.
Use Case - When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur
- When jam occurs frequently
- When checking an image on the ITB
2) Execute a job (copy/test print).
Paper stops at the specified position.
Caution - Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the
job is automatically recovered.
- Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified
position.
- The setting is disabled for job where paper does not pass through the specified position.
- Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position. Thus, handle it with
care.
0: OFF
20: Before registration (1st side)
21: Before registration (2nd side) *1
30: Before fixing (1st side)
31: Before fixing (2nd side) *1
32: After fixing (1st side)
33: After fixing (2nd side) *1
40: Second delivery (1st side) *2
41: Second delivery (2nd side) *1, *2
70: Reverse position 1 *1, *4
71: Reverse position 2 *1, *3
72: Duplex standby position *1
99: Before fixing (1st side, when checking image)
Any value other than those mentioned above: Not used
*1: Paper is stopped when a duplex job is executed. (Paper is stopped after being reversed.)
*2: Paper may not be stopped depending on the delivery outlet settings. (The 3 Way Unit-D1 must
be installed.)
*3: The size of paper should be the one that passes through the short path (e.g.: A4, LTR, etc.).
*4: The size of paper should be the one that passes through the long path. (e.g.: A4R, LTRR, etc.,
The 3 Way Unit-D1 must be installed.)
Default Value 0
COUNTER (Counter mode)

■ TOTAL
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL
SERVICE1 1 Service-purposed total counter 1
Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
917
8. Service Mode
SERVICE2 1 Service-purposed total counter 2
COPY 1 Total copy counter

PDL-PRT 1 PDL print counter

Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter
at PDL print.
FAX-PRT 1 FAX reception print counter

at FAX reception.
BOX-PRT 1 Inbox print counter

at Inbox print.
RPT-PRT 1 Report print counter

at report print.
2-SIDE 1 2-sided copy/print counter

Detail To count up when the copy/printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge
counter at 2-sided copy/print.
918
8. Service Mode
SCAN 1 Scan counter
Detail To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning
operation is complete.
■ PICK-UP
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
C1 1 Cassette 1 pickup total counter
Detail Total pickup counter value of the Cassette 1
Use Case When checking the counter
Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit
919
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP
MF 1 Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter
Detail Total pickup counter value of the Multi-purpose Tray
Unit sheet
Unit
2-SIDE 1 2-sided pickup total counter

Detail Total pickup counter value of 2-sided print
Unit sheet
Unit
■ FEEDER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > FEEDER
FEED 1 DADF original pickup total counter
Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the DADF.
Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
DFOP-CNT 1 DADF hinge open/close counter

Detail To count up the number of open/close of the DADF hinge.
Use Case When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
920
8. Service Mode
■ JAM
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
TOTAL 1 Host machine total jam counter
Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the host machine
Use Case When checking the jam counter
Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
FEEDER 1 DADF total jam counter

Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the DADF
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
SORTER 1 Finisher total jam counter

Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the Finisher
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
2-SIDE 1 [Not used]

Default Value 0
Unit
MF 1 Multi-purpose Tray jam counter

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Multi-purpose Tray
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
921
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM
C1 1 Cassette 1 jam counter
Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 1
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 2
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 3 (Upper Cassette of the 2-cassette
Pedestal)
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit

Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 4 (Lower Cassette of the 2-cassette
Pedestal)
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
922
8. Service Mode
■ MISC
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC
T-SPLY-Y 1 Y-color toner supply counter
Detail To count up the number of Y-color toner supply blocks with each half turn of the Toner Container.
Use Case When checking the usage status of toner
Unit block
Default Value 0
Unit
T-SPLY-M 1 M-color toner supply counter

Detail To count up the number of M-color toner supply blocks with each half turn of the Toner Container.
Unit block
Default Value 0
Unit
T-SPLY-C 1 C-color toner supply counter

Detail To count up the number of C-color toner supply blocks with each half turn of the Toner Container.
Unit block
Default Value 0
Unit
T-SPLY-K 1 Bk-color toner supply counter

Detail To count up the number of Bk-color toner supply blocks with each half turn of the Toner Container.
Unit block
Default Value 0
Unit
ALLPW-ON 1 Number of DCON PCB power-on times

Detail Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit).
To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit).
Use Case When checking the usage status of the product
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
923
8. Service Mode
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC
HDD-ON 1 Number of hard disk start-up times
Detail To count up when power of the hard disk is turned ON.
Use Case When judging whether to shift the machine to power-saving state after using the printer or scanner
for a job
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
SUC-A-Y 2 For R&D

SUC-A-M 2 For R&D
SUC-A-C 2 For R&D
SUC-A-K 2 For R&D
FIN-PTH 1 For R&D
FR-STPL 1 For R&D
MSTP-B 1 For R&D
MSTPL 1 For R&D
STPL-2P 1 For R&D
STPL-F 1 For R&D
STPL-R 1 For R&D
SWG-RL 1 For R&D
FIN-RBLT 1 For R&D
■ JOB
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JOB
DVPAPLEN 1 For R&D
DVRUNLEN 1 For R&D
■ DRBL-1
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1
TR-UNIT 1 ITB Unit parts counter
Detail ITB Unit
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
To change the estimated life value: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution Clear the counter value after replacement.
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
924
8. Service Mode
T-CLN-BD 1 ITB Cleaning Blade parts counter
Detail ITB Cleaning Blade
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
TR-BLT 1 ITB parts counter

Detail ITB
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
2TR-ROLL 1 Sec Transfer Outer Roller parts counter

Detail Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
925
8. Service Mode
PT-DRM 1 Drum Unit (Bk) parts counter
Detail Drum Unit (Bk)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
DV-UNT-C 1 Developing Unit (C) parts counter

Detail Developing Unit (C)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
DV-UNT-Y 1 Developing Unit (Y) parts counter

Detail Developing Unit (Y)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
DV-UNT-M 1 Developing Unit (M) parts counter

Detail Developing Unit (M)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
926
8. Service Mode
DV-UNT-K 1 Developing Unit (Bk) parts counter
Detail Developing Unit (Bk)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
C1-PU-RL 1 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller parts counter

Detail Cassette 1 Pickup Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
C1-SP-RL 1 Cassette 1 Separation Roller parts cntr

Detail Cassette 1 Separation Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
927
8. Service Mode
C1-FD-RL 1 Cassette 1 Feed Roller parts counter
Detail Cassette 1 Feed Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
928
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
M-PU-RL 1 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roll prts cntr

Detail Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
M-SP-RL 1 Multi-purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr

Detail Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
929
8. Service Mode
M-FD-RL 1 Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr
Detail Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
FX-LW-RL 1 Fixing Pressure Roller parts counter

Detail Pressure Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
FX-UNIT 1 Fixing Unit parts counter

Detail Fixing Unit
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
930
8. Service Mode
FX-UP-FR 1 Fixing Film Unit parts counter
Detail Fixing Film Unit
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
FX-LW-BS 1 Fix Press Roll Shaft Support prts cntr

Detail Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
MN-DR-U 1 Main Drive Unit parts counter

Detail Main Drive Unit
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
931
8. Service Mode
REG-DR-U 1 Registration Drive Unit parts counter
Detail Registration Drive Unit
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
WT-DR-U 1 Waste Toner Drive Unit parts counter

Detail Waste Toner Drive Unit
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
WST-TNR 1 Waste Toner Container parts counter

Detail Waste Toner Container
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
932
8. Service Mode
PT-DR-Y 1 Drum Unit (Y) parts counter
Detail Drum Unit (Y)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
PT-DR-M 1 Drum Unit (M) parts counter

Detail Drum Unit (M)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
PT-DR-C 1 Drum Unit (C) parts counter

Detail Drum Unit (C)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
933
8. Service Mode
TR-ROLK 1 Primary Transfer Roller(Bk) prts counter
Detail Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)
Due to engagement/disengagement of the roller, the counter is advanced separately from Y, M,
and C.
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-ROLC
Unit
TR-ROLC 1 Prmry Transfer Roll(Y,M,C) parts counter

Detail Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C)
Due to engagement/disengagement of the roller, the counter is advanced separately from Bk.
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-ROLK
Unit
REG-RL 1 Registration Roller parts counter

Detail Registration Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
934
8. Service Mode
R-DOOR 1 Right Door Unit parts counter
Detail Right Door Unit
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
VP-FD-RL 1 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roll prts cntr

Detail Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
■ DRBL-2
DF-PU-RL 1 Pickup Roller Unit parts counter: DADF
Detail Pickup Roller Unit (DADF)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed.
Unit
935
8. Service Mode
DF-FD-RL 1 Feed Roller parts counter: DADF
Detail Feed Roller (DADF)
2nd line: Estimated life
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
DF-SP-RL 1 Separation Roller parts counter: DADF

Detail Separation Roller (DADF)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
STAMP 1 Stamp parts counter: DADF

Detail Stamp (DADF)
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
936
8. Service Mode
DF-HNG-L 1 Left Hinge parts counter: reverse
Detail Left Hinge of the DADF (reverse model)
Unit time
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo The counter is advanced at each opening and closing.
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
937
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit

Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
938
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
FIN-STPR 1 Stapler parts counter: Fin-K1/AA1

Detail Staple Unit
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
PUNCH 1 Punch unit parts counter:Fin-AA1

Detail Punch Unit
1st line: total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: estimated life
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
939
8. Service Mode
TRY-TQLM 1 Tray Torq Limt pts cntr:Fin-AA1
Detail Stack Tray Torque Limiter
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
DL-STC 1 Stack Tray Dvry Ass'y Sttc Elim:Fin-AA1

Detail Stack Tray Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
FIN-MPDL 1 Paddle parts counter:Fin-AA1

Detail Paddle
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
940
8. Service Mode
FR-STPL 1 Staple free stapling counter: Fin-K1/AA1
Detail Number of executions of staple free stapling (including at the time of paper dust removal)
Unit time
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FR-ST-RP
Unit
ESC-CL 1 Escape Feed Clutch parts counter:Fin-AA1

Detail Escape Feed Clutch
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
SDL-STC 1 Saddle Delvry Ass'y Sttc Elim:Fin-AA1

Detail Saddle Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
941
8. Service Mode
TRY-STC1 1 Delvry Ass'y Sttc Elim: Fin-AA1
Detail Escape Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
SW-RL-CL 1 Low Stck Dvry Rol Clt prts cntr:Fin-AA1

Detail Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
SDL-STP 1 Saddle stitcher parts counter:Fin-AA1

Detail Saddle stitcher unit
1st line: total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: estimated life
Unit time
Default Value 0
Unit
942
8. Service Mode
DF-PR-PD 1 Pre-separation Unit parts counter: DADF
Detail Pre-separation Unit (DADF)
Unit sheet
Default Value 0
Unit
■ T-CNTR
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > T-CNTR
YELLOW 1 For R&D
MAGENTA 1 For R&D
CYAN 1 For R&D
BLACK 1 For R&D
■ MISC2
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC2
APW-TIME 2 For R&D
CPW-TIME 2 For R&D
BAT-TIME 2 For R&D
FUSE-CNT 2 For R&D
SPW-TIME 2 For R&D
■ PAPER
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER
G52-59 1 Delivered sheet counter: 52 to 59 g/m2
Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 52 to 59 g/m2.
1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size.
2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets
Unit sheet
Unit
943
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit
944
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit
945
8. Service Mode
Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit

Unit sheet
Unit
G351OVER 1 Delivered sheet counter:351 g/m2 or more

Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 351 g/m2 or more.
Unit sheet
Unit
946
8. Service Mode
■ LIFE
COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE
TONER-Y 1 Toner (Y):Life VL and No. of days left
Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Toner (Y).The 3rd and 4th columns may
be hidden depending on the country.
1st column: Operation Life Value
2nd column: Number of Days Left
3rd column: Life Value
4th column: Replacement Life Value
Use Case When checking Life VL/No. of days left
Display/Adj/Set Range 1st column: 0 to 999 (%)
2nd column: 0 to 999 (days)
3rd column: 0 to 999 (%)
4th column: 50 to 999 (%)
Supplement/Memo Operation Life Value: Wear level value relative to Replacement Life Value (%)
Operation Life Value = Life Value/Replacement Life Valuex100Number of Days Left: Expected
number of days until the part reaches its end of life Replacement Life Value: Target replacement
life value
TONER-M 1 Toner (M): Life VL and No. of days left

Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Toner (M).The 3rd and 4th columns may
life value
TONER-C 1 Toner (C): Life VL and No. of days left

Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Toner (C).The 3rd and 4th columns may
life value
947
8. Service Mode
TONER-K 1 Toner (Bk): Life VL and No. of days left
Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Toner (Bk).The 3rd and 4th columns may
life value
WST-TNR 1 Waste Toner Container:Life VL/days left

Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Waste Toner Container. The 3rd and 4th
columns may be hidden depending on the country.
Adj/Set/Operate Method To reset Operation Life Value/Number of Days Left/Life Value: Select the item, and then press
Clear key.
Caution - Clear the counters if the waste toner container is replaced when the Preparing Waste Toner
Container warning or Waste Toner Full message is not displayed.
- Operation Life Value/Number of Days Left/Life Value can be reset also by clearing the counters
in COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> WST-TNR.
life value
948
8. Service Mode
PT-DR-Y 1 Drum Unit (Y): Life VL/No. of days left
Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit (Y).The 3rd and 4th columns
may be hidden depending on the country.
Use Case - When checking Life VL/No. of days left of the part
- At parts replacement
Adj/Set/Operate Method To change the Replacement Life Value: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key.
Operation Life Value/Number of Days Left/Life Value: Display only
Caution Operation Life Value, Number of Days Left and Life Value are reset automatically when the part
is replaced.
life value
PT-DR-M 1 Drum Unit (M): Life VL/No. of days left

Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit (M).The 3rd and 4th columns
is replaced.
life value
949
8. Service Mode
PT-DR-C 1 Drum Unit (C): Life VL/No. of days left
Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit (C).The 3rd and 4th columns
is replaced.
life value
PT-DRM 1 Drum Unit (Bk): Life VL/No. of days

Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit (Bk).The 3rd and 4th columns
is replaced.
life value
DV-UNT-Y 1 For R&D

DV-UNT-M 1 For R&D
DV-UNT-C 1 For R&D
DV-UNT-K 1 For R&D
TR-UNIT 1 For R&D
2TR-ROLL 1 For R&D
FX-UNIT 1 For R&D
DF-PU-RL 1 For R&D
DF-FD-RL 1 For R&D
DF-SP-RL 1 For R&D
950
8. Service Mode
DF-PR-PD 1 For R&D
951
8. Service Mode
FEEDER (ADF service mode)
DISPLAY (State display mode)

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > DISPLAY (State display mode)
FEEDSIZE 1 Dspl orgnl size detected by DADF
Detail To display the original size detected by the DADF.
Use Case When checking the paper size recognized by the device after scanning
TRY-WIDE 1 Distance of Original Width Detect Slider

Detail To display the decuple value of the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders.
Use Case At incorrect detection of original size
Caution Even if a value larger than 297.0 mm which is the maximum readable width is displayed, it does
not mean that the reading range changes. When reading an original of 297.1 mm or larger in width,
the edge of an image may be missing.
Unit mm
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> TRY-A4
Supplement/Memo If the edge of an image is still missing after adjustment of A4 paper width (297.0 mm) with TRY-
A4, the original width may be larger than 297.1 mm.
Unit

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
DOCST 1 Adj image lead edge margin: stream read
Detail To adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the front side at stream reading.
Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
Use Case - When installing DADF
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
952
8. Service Mode

LA-SPEED 1 Fine adj img ratio:stream read,vert scan
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at stream
reading.
of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical scanning direction. (The
feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
DOCST2 1 Adj img lead edge mar: 2-side,bck,1-path

Detail To adjust the leading edge margin of the image on the back side scanned with the DADF (1-path
model).
Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is reduced by 0.1 mm. (The image moves upward.)
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
LA-SPD2 1 FA img ratio:2-side,vert scan,bck,1-path

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification in vertical scanning direction on the back
side scanned with the DADF (1-path model).
of service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical scanning direction. (The
feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.)
Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200 (-2.00 to 2.00%)
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
953
8. Service Mode

ADJMSCN1 1 Fine adj img ratio: stream,horz scan,frt
Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction on the
front side at stream reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction.
Use Case When changing the image magnification ratio only for the front side
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit
ADJMSCN2 1 FA img ratio:2-side,horz scan,bck,1-path

Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification in horizontal scanning direction on the back
side scanned with the DADF (1-path model).
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction.
Use Case When image magnification ratio on the front side and back side are different at 2-sided reading
Unit %
Default Value 0
Unit

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
MTR-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation motor
Detail To specify the motor of DADF to operate.
The motor is activated by MTR-ON.
Use Case At operation check
- DADF (1-path model)
0: Pickup Motor (STM2), 1: Registration Motor (STM1), 2: Read Motor (STM3)
- DADF (reverse model)
0: Pickup Motor (M1), 1: Read Motor (M2), 2: Not used
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON
TRY-A4 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4

Detail To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Original Pickup
Tray. (A4)
TRY-A5R 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R

Tray. (A5R)
954
8. Service Mode

TRY-LTR 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR
Tray. (LTR)
TRY-LTRR 1 Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR

Tray. (LTRR)
FEED-CHK 1 Specify DADF individual feed operation

Detail To specify the feed mode for DADF.
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation, 1: Not used, 2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp),
3: Not used
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation, 1: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation, 2: 1-sided pickup/
delivery operation (with stamp), 3: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp)
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON
CL-CHK 1 Specifying DADF Operation Clutch

Detail To specify the DADF Clutch to be operated.
The Clutch is activated by CL-ON.
0: Pickup Clutch (CL1), 1: Not used
0: Pickup Clutch (CL1), 1: Registration Clutch (CL2)
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> CL-ON
CL-ON 1 Operation check of DADF Clutch

Detail To start operation check of the clutch specified by CL-CHK.
The clutch operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Caution Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation automatically stops after
approximately 5 seconds, but is not completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not
displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> CL-CHK
955
8. Service Mode

FAN-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation fan
Detail To specify the fan of DADF to operate.
The fan is activated by FAN-ON.
Display/Adj/Set Range - DADF (1-path model)
0: ADF Cooling Fan (FAN_A1)
0: Not used
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-ON
FAN-ON 1 Operation check of DADF fan

Detail To start operation check of the fan specified by FAN-CHK.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK
SL-CHK 1 Specification of DADF operation solenoid

Detail To specify the solenoid of DADF to operate.
The solenoid is activated by SL-ON.
0: Stamp Solenoid (SL1), 1: Not used
0: Release Solenoid (SL1), 1: Stamp Solenoid (SL2)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON
SL-ON 1 Operation check of DADF solenoid

Detail To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped.
2) Press OK key.
displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK
956
8. Service Mode

MTR-ON 1 Operation check of DADF motor
Detail To start operation check for the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops.
2) Press OK key.
displayed).
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK
ROLL-CLN 1 Rotation of DADF rollers

Detail To rotate the rollers of DADF for cleaning.
Check the rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while they are rotating.
Use Case When cleaning the rollers
2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
3) Press OK key.
The rollers stop.
FEED-ON 1 Operation check of DADF individual feed

Detail To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
Related Service Mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK

FEEDER (ADF service mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
R-ATM 1 Set DADF dble fd dtct H-land mode:1-path
Detail To set the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF (1-path model) to the highland mode.
Set 1 if the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters.
Use Case When the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters at installation
0: Normal, 1: Highland mode
Default Value 0
R-OVLPLV 2 Set DADF dble fd dtct thrshld VL: 1-path

Detail To set the threshold value at which the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF (1-path model) judges
whether papers are double fed.
Decrease the value if single feed of paper is incorrectly detected as double feed.
Increase the value if double feed of paper is incorrectly detected as single feed.
Use Case When double feed is incorrectly detected with special paper not defined in the specifications
Caution In the case of highlands, be sure to set R-ATM in advance.
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode FEEDER> OPTION> R-ATM
957
8. Service Mode
SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)
PNCH-Y 1 Adj punch hole horz rgst pstn:Fin-AA1
Detail To adjust the punch hole position in side registration direction.
As the value is changed by 1, the punch hole is moved by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case When the punch hole is misaligned in the horizontal registration direction
Caution When PUN-Y-SW is 0, the effective adjustment range is -3 to 15.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> PUN-Y-SW
Unit
STP-F1 1 Front 1-staple position:Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the front 1-staple position.
As the value is changed by 1, the staple position is moved by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Use Case - When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced at front 1-stapling
- When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
STP-R1 1 Rear 1-staple position:Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the rear 1-staple position.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced at rear 1-stapling
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
958
8. Service Mode
STP-2P 1 Adj 2-stapling position: Fin-K1/AA1
Detail To adjust the 2-staple position.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced at 2-point stapling
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-K1: -50 to 50
Fin-AA1: -30 to 30
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
BFF-SFT 1 Paper displace amount adj:buffer,Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the paper displacement amount in the Finisher Buffer Assembly.
As the value is changed by 1, the paper position is moved by 0.1 mm.
+: The first sheet of paper moves toward the inlet
-: The first sheet of paper moves toward the delivery side
Use Case - When paper displacement occurs on the first and second sheets of a paper stack in the Buffer
Assembly
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
BFF-SFT2 1 Paper displace amount adj:buffer,Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the paper displacement amount in the Finisher Buffer Assembly.
As the value is changed by 1, the paper position is moved by 0.1 mm.
+: The second sheet of paper moves toward the inlet
-: The second sheet of paper moves toward the delivery side
Use Case - When paper displacement occurs on the second and third sheets of a paper stack in the Buffer
Assembly
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
959
8. Service Mode
SDL-STP 1 Adj Saddle Sttch staple position:Fin-AA1
Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher.
+: Moves in the left direction of the spread
-: Moves in the right direction of the spread
Use Case - When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-STP2
Supplement/Memo Because the staple position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time,
perform the adjustment of SDL-STP2 as needed after performing this adjustment if the staple
position of the thin paper has been adjusted by SDL-STP2.
Unit
SDL-FLD 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch fold pstn:Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is changed by 1, the fold position is moved by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle Stitcher
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-FLD2
Supplement/Memo Because the fold position of the thin paper is changed by this adjustment at the same time, perform
the adjustment of SDL-FLD2 as needed after performing this adjustment if the fold position of the
thin paper has been adjusted by SDL-FLD2.
Unit
SDL-ALG 1 Adj of Saddle Sttch align wid:Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the alignment width of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is changed by 1, alignment width is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: The width of the Alignment Plate becomes narrower.
-: The width of the Alignment Plate becomes wider.
Use Case When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle Stitcher
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
960
8. Service Mode
ST-ALG1 1 Adj Stacker A4 align pstn:Fin-AA1
Detail To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position of the Process Tray.
As the value is changed by 1, position of the Alignment Plate is moved by 0.1 mm.
+: Inward
-: Outward
Use Case - When misalignment occurs with A4 size paper
2) The Alignment Plate moves to the A4 paper width position.
3) Place A4 paper on the Process Tray.
5) Check the adjustment operation of the Alignment Plate.
6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to make an adjustment.
7) After completion of adjustment, remove paper on the Process Tray.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
ST-ALG2 1 Adj Stacker LTR align pstn:Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position of the Process Tray.
As the value is changed by 1, position of the Alignment Plate is moved by 0.1 mm.
+: Inward
-: Outward
Use Case - When misalignment occurs with LTR size paper
2) The Alignment Plate moves to the LTR paper width position.
3) Place LTR paper on the Process Tray.
5) Check the adjustment operation of the Alignment Plate.
6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to make an adjustment.
7) After completion of adjustment, remove paper on the Process Tray.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
961
8. Service Mode
SW-UP-RL 1 Adj of swing unit height:Fin-AA1
Detail To adjust the height of the Swing Unit.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the Swing Unit is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: Move down
-: Move up
Use Case - When misalignment occurs due to failure of paper feeding to the Process Tray
Default Value 0
Unit
INSTP-F1 1 Adj front 1-stapling position: Fin-K1

Detail To adjust the front 1-staple position.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced at front 1-stapling
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
INSTP-R1 1 Adj rear 1-stapling position: Fin-K1

Detail To adjust the rear 1-staple position.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced at rear 1-stapling
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
962
8. Service Mode
NST-SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at non-collate:Fin-AA1
Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray in non-collate mode.
As the value is incremented by 1, the delivery speed is increased by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the stacking condition in non-collate mode is poor
Unit mm/s
Default Value 0
Unit
FR-ST-PS 1 Adjust staple free pressure: Fin-K1/AA1

Detail To adjust the binding pressure at staple free stapling.
As the value is changed by 1, the binding pressure is changed by 1 mNm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use Case Upon user's request (When changing the binding pressure)
Caution The life of staple-free binding unit becomes shorter when increasing the setting value.
Unit mNm
Default Value 0
Unit
FR-STP-X 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn (Fd way): Fin-K1

Detail To adjust the staple position in feed direction at staple-free stapling.
+: Toward inlet direction
-: Toward delivery direction
Use Case - When the staple position in feed direction is displaced at staple-free stapling
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Change the paper shift amount in the paper feed direction. The staple free stapler position is not
changed.
Unit
963
8. Service Mode
FR-STP-Y 1 Adj stpl free stpl pstn (F/R):Fin-K1/AA1
Detail To adjust the staple position in front/rear direction at staple-free stapling.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced at staple-free stapling
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-K1 : -30 to 30
Fin-AA1 : -20 to 15
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Supplement/Memo Change the paper shift amount in the front/rear direction. The staple free stapler position is not
changed.
Unit
RBLT-PRS 1 Adj Return Belt height 1:Fin-K1/AA1

Detail Fin-K1
To adjust the amount of pressure of the Return Belt.
As the value is changed by 1, the Return Belt is moved up or down by 0.1 mm so the amount of
pressure is increased or decreased.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Fin-AA1
To adjust the height of the Return Belt when papers (65 sheets) are stacked on the Process Tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the Return Belt is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: Move down
-: Move up
Use Case - When paper alignment is poor
Caution Fin-K1:
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label.
Fin-AA1:
Adjust the height of the Return Belt for stacking a paper (1 sheet) with RBLT-PS3. The height for
stacking 2 to 64 sheets is calculated from the adjustment values of RBLT-PRS and RBLT-PS3.
Fin-AA1: -50 to 100
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode Fin-AA1:
SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PS2/PS3
Supplement/Memo Fin-AA1:
The height of Return Belt when stacking the first sheet of paper or buffering the paper: The height
of Return Belt is double of the setting value. (Escape position of Return Belt)
The height of Return Belt when stacking the sheet of paper except for first sheet: The height of
Return Belt is the setting value. (Paper feed position of Return Belt)
Unit
964
8. Service Mode
MSTP-2P 1 Adj manual stapling position:Fin-K1/AA1
Detail To adjust the staple position in front/rear direction at manual stapling.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the staple position in front/rear direction is displaced at manual stapling
Fin-AA1: -20 to 30
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Unit
INF-ALG1 1 Adj alignment position (A4): Fin-K1

Detail To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning A4 paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, distance between the Alignment Plates is narrowed by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When the paper alignment position is displaced.
The Alignment Plate moves to the A4 paper width position.
2) Set A4 paper on the Processing Tray.
4) Check the operation of the Alignment Plate.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the completion of adjustment.
6) Remove the paper on the Processing Tray.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG2
Supplement/Memo The adjustment result is reflected in SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG2.
Unit
965
8. Service Mode
INF-ALG2 1 Adj alignment position (LTR): Fin-K1
Detail To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning LTR paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, distance between the Alignment Plates is narrowed by 0.1 mm.
Use Case - When the paper alignment position is displaced.
The Alignment Plate moves to the LTR paper width position.
2) Set LTR paper on the Processing Tray.
4) Check the operation of the Alignment Plate.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the completion of adjustment.
6) Remove the paper on the Processing Tray.
Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in INF-ALG1 of the service label.
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG1
Supplement/Memo The adjustment result is reflected in SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG1.
Unit
CENT-ALG 1 Adj ctr align standard pstn: Fin-K1/AA1

Detail To adjust the reference position for center alignment.
As the value is changed by 1, the reference position is moved by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use Case - When the standard position for the center alignment is misaligned
- When the paper alignment position is displaced.
Caution This adjustment affects alignment operation and staple position.
Fin-K1:
Adjust the alignment width with INF-ALG1/2.
Fin-AA1:
Adjust the alignment width with ST-ALG1/2.
Fin-AA1: -50 to 50
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode Fin-K1:
SORTER> ADJUST> INF-ALG1/ALG2
Fin-AA1:
SORTER> ADJUST> ST-ALG1/ALG2
Unit
966
8. Service Mode
SDL-STP2 1 Adj Sddl Sttch staple pstn: thin,Fin-AA1
Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher when using thin paper (less than 64 g/m2).
Use Case When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher for thin paper is displaced
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-STP
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after performing the adjustment of SDL-STP.
Because the staple position of the thin paper is adjusted by the total setting values of SDL-STP
and SDL-STP2, the actual adjustment of the staple position is performed in the staple position
adjustable range (-20 to 20) even if entering the setting value beyond the mechanical staple
position adjustable range.
Unit
SDL-FLD2 1 Adj Saddle Sttch fold pstn: thin,Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher when using thin paper (less than 64 g/m2).
As the value is changed by 1, the fold position is moved by 0.1 mm.
Use Case When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher for thin paper is displaced
Unit mm
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> SDL-FLD
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after performing the adjustment of SDL-FLD.
Because the fold position of the thin paper is adjusted by the total setting values of SDL-FLD and
SDL-FLD2, the actual adjustment of the fold position is performed in the fold position adjustable
range (-20 to 20) even if entering the setting value beyond the mechanical fold position adjustable
range.
Unit
ESC1-SPD 1 Adj Escape Tr delivery speed:Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the Escape Tray.
Use Case When the paper stacking to the escape tray is misalignment
Unit mm/s
Default Value 0
Unit
967
8. Service Mode
SFT-SPD 1 Adj of delivery speed: Fin-AA1
Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at collate mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec.
Use Case When the paper stacking of stack tray is misalignment
Caution As the value is decreased, productivity is decreased.
-7 to -6: Not used
Unit mm/s
Default Value 0
Unit
STP-SPD 1 Adj dvry speed at staple mode:Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the Stack Tray in staple mode or at staple-free stapling.
Use Case When the paper stacking at staple mode or staple-free binding mode is misalignment
Caution - As the value is decreased, productivity is decreased.
- When the buffer operation (simultaneous stack delivery operation) is performed, the delivery
speed does not change. Make the setting whether to perform buffer operation with BUFF-SW.
Unit mm/s
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> BUFF-SW
Unit
RBLT-PS2 1 Adj of Return Belt height 2:Fin-AA1

Detail To adjust the height of the Return Belt when aligning papers on the Process Tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the Return Belt is changed by 0.1 mm.
+: Move down
-: Move up
Use Case - When an alignment failure of paper stack occurs in alignment operation at the Process Tray
Caution The height of Return Belt during the paper alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting
values of RBLT-PRS2 and PBLT-PS3, so adjust again the setting value of RBLT-PS2 if necessary
when changing the setting value of RBLT-PRS3.
Unit °
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PRS/PS3
Supplement/Memo Perform this adjustment after executing adjustment of RBLT-PRS.
Unit
PULL-SPD 1 [Not used]

SFT-AMT 1 [Not used]
968
8. Service Mode
RBLT-PS3 1 Adj of Return Belt height 3:Fin-AA1
Detail To adjust the height of the Return Belt when stacking the 1 sheet on the processing tray.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of the return belt changes by angle of 0.1 degree.
+: Downward
-: Upward
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB,
enter the value of service label.
Use Case When the paper alignment position is displaced.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing the RAM data of the Finisher Controller PCB.
Caution The height of Return Belt of the stacking 65 sheets adjust in the RBLT-PRS. The height of Return
Belt at the stacking 2 to 64 sheets alignment on the processing tray is the total of setting values
of RBLT-PRS and RBLT-PS3. So adjust again the setting value of RBLT-PS2 if necessary when
changing the setting value of RBLT-PS3.
Unit °
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> RBLT-PRS,RBLT-PS2
Unit

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)
FN-SENS1 1 Adj Punch Horz Rgst Sensor:Fin-AA1
Detail To automatically adjust the output of the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 to 5 of the Puncher Unit
in sequence.
Horizontal Registration Sensor 1: A3/A4, 2: LDR/LTR, 3: B4/B5, 4: A4R/LTRR/LGL, 5: B5R
Use Case - When installing/replacing the Puncher Unit
- When replacing the Horizontal Registration Sensor of the Puncher Unit
Caution If paper blocks light to the sensor, the adjustment result ends in NG.
FN-SENS2 1 Adj Punch Waste Full Sensor:Fin-AA1

Detail To automatically adjust the output of Punch Waste Full Sensor (Punch Waste Full Detection PCB)
of the Puncher Unit.
Use Case - When installing/replacing the Puncher Unit
- When replacing the Punch Waste Full Sensor
Caution If paper blocks light to the sensor, the adjustment result ends in NG.
FIN-BK-R 1 Finisher backup data saving: All Fin

Detail To read the backup data from the Finisher Controller PCB and save in HDD.
Use Case When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-W
969
8. Service Mode
FIN-BK-W 1 Writing of Fin backup data: All Fin
Detail To write the backup data saved in HDD to the Finisher Controller PCB.
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-R
FIN-CON 1 Controller PCB RAM clear: All Finisher

Detail To execute the RAM clear of the Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents
(excluding counter information).
Caution - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter the
- RAM clear is executed after the main power is turned OFF/ON.
Supplement/Memo Fin-AA1
The adjustment values stored to the puncher controller PCB does not cleared.
970
8. Service Mode
MTR-CHK 1 Specification of oprtn motor: All Fin
Detail To specify the motor to operate.
Use Case - When checking whether there is any failure in the motor
- When checking the operation of the replaced motor
Caution When setting the staple motor (Fin-K1/AA1) and the saddle stitcher motor (Fin-AA1), remove the
staple cartridge. When the staple cartridge is installed, the motor is not driven.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-K1: 1 to 11
1: Feed Motor (M1)
2: Return Belt Motor (M2)
3: Front Alignment Motor (M3)
4: Rear Alignment Motor (M4)
5: Assist Motor (M5)
6: Staple Shift Motor (M7)
7: Paddle Motor (M10) (Paddle Upper/Lower)
8: Paddle Motor (M10) (Stack Retainer Upper/Lower)
9: Staple Motor (M8)
10: Clinch Motor (M9)
11: Tray Shift Motor (M6)
Fin-AA1: 16 to 48
16: Inlet Feed Motor (M101)
17: Pre-processing/Buffer Motor (M102)
18: Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
19: Not used
20: Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (M112)
21: Stapler Shift Motor (M114)
22: Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105)
23: Swing Guide Motor (M110)
24: Front Alignment Motor (M107)
25: Rear Alignment Motor (M108)
26: Return Roller Lift Motor (M111)
27: Flapper Motor (M104)
28: Not used
29: Paper End Assist Motor (M113)
30: Not used
31: Escape Delivery Shift Motor (M106)
32: Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (M109)
33: Cooling Fan (FM1)
34: Staple Motor (M115)
35: Staple-free Binding Motor (M116)
36: Saddle Feed/Paddle Motor (M201)
37: Saddle Delivery Motor (M207)
38: Saddle Switching Lever Motor (M202)
39: Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208)
40: Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (M206)
41: Saddle Gripper Motor (M205)
42: Saddle Alignment Motor (M203)
43: Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/ Folding Motor (M204)
44: Punch Motor (M301)
45: Punch Shift Motor (M302)
46: Punch Motor (M301)
47: Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM201)
48: Buffer Pass Cooling Fan (FM202)
49 to 50: Not used
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON
971
8. Service Mode
MTR-ON 1 Operation check of motor: All Fin
Detail To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
After the motor operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops.
Use Case - When checking whether there is any failure in the motor
- When checking the operation of the replaced motor
Caution - When the job starts during the operation of the motor, the finisher sequence error jam occurs.
- When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the motor, the jam becomes the
error immediately.
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK
CNT-FCON 1 For R&D

FR-ST-RP 1 Ppr dst rmv at stpl free stpl:Fin-K1/AA1
Detail To remove the paper dust from the staple-free binding unit, the staple-free binding operation
repeatedly is executed 30 times without paper.
When this mode is executed, the performance of the staple-free binding unit recovers.
Use Case When the performance of the staple-free binding unit deteriorates
Caution Finisher-K1/AA1:
- The Staple free stapling parts counter is advanced.
Finisher-AA1:
- If a job is submitted during execution of this mode, it is to be a finisher sequence error jam.
- If an error avoidance jam occurs during execution of this mode, it is to be an error immediately.
Related Service Mode COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2> FR-STPL
Supplement/Memo The removed paper dust accumulates on the lower frame under the paper path, so it does not
influence to the machine performance.
The part counter value of the staple free stapling operation is counted.
CL-CHK 1 Specify of operation Clutch:Fin-AA1

Detail To specify the Clutch to operate.
Use Case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
1: Lower Stack Delivery Roller Clutch (CL102)
2: Escape Feed Clutch (CL101)
3: Paddle Clutch (CL103)
Default Value 1
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> CL-ON
CL-ON 1 Operation check of Clutch:Fin-AA1

Detail To start operation check of the clutch specified by CL-CHK.
ON/OFF of the clutch is repeated at intervals of 500 msec for 10 seconds, and then the operation
stops automatically.
Use Case When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Caution - When the job starts during the operation of the clutch, the finisher sequence error jam occurs.
- When the error avoidance jam occurs during the operation of the clutch, the jam becomes the
error immediately.
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> CL-CHK
972
8. Service Mode
PUN-BK-R 1 Puncher backup data saving:Fin-AA1
Detail To read the backup data from Puncher Controller PCB and save in HDD.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB
Caution Be sure to read the data before writing.
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> PUN-BK-W
PUN-BK-W 1 Puncher backup data writing:Fin-AA1

Detail To write the backup data saved in HDD to Puncher Controller PCB.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Controller PCB
Caution Be sure to read the data before writing.
Related Service Mode SORTER> FUNCTION> PUN-BK-R
EMSG-CLR 1 Clear Fin limited func mssg: Fin-K1/AA1

Detail To clear the message related to staple free stapling that is displayed when functions of Finisher
are limited.
The staple free stapling alarm (61-0002) is cleared.
Use Case When clearing the message related to limited functions mode that is displayed after
troubleshooting of finisher is performed
Caution Only the messages related to staple free stapling can be cleared.

SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
MD-SPRTN 1 Restricted operation at Finisher error
Detail To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher.
The result set in [Limited Functions Mode] in [Settings/Registration] is displayed.
Set 0 when canceling restriction on operations.
When switching whether to restrict operations for each function, make the setting in [Limited
Functions Mode].
Use Case When canceling restriction on operations of the finisher
Caution Do not set any value other than 0.
0: Normal
1: Function restriction
2 to 255: Not use
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Management Settings> Device Management> Limited Functions Mode
Mode
973
8. Service Mode
BUFF-SW 1 Set of fin buffer opertn:Fin-AA1
Detail To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher.
When 1 is set, the buffer operation is not performed for all modes. The alignment performance is
improved, but the productivity decreases.
Use Case When the misalignment of the buffered paper stack occurs on the processing tray
Caution When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity is decreased.
0: ON, 1: OFF, 2: Not used
Default Value 0
1SHT-SRT 1 Set collate dvry of 1-sheet:Fin-AA1

Detail To set ON/OFF of collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper.
When 1 is set, the collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper is not performed.
Caution The stacking condition decreases when the collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper
enables.
A sheet of paper is delivered by non-sort decreases when the collated delivery operation for a
sheet of paper disables.
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default Value 0
Additional Functions Setting/Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Offset Jobs
Mode
Supplement/Memo The collated delivery operation for a sheet of paper works in the following condition.
The setting of a sheet of paper and a copy
This service mode is ON.
The job from a printer driver
Oddset jobs is ON.
FIN-SP1 2 Finisher special setting 1: All Fin

Detail To execute the Finisher special settings 1.
FIN-SP2 2 Finisher special setting 2: All Fin

Detail To execute the Finisher special settings 2.
974
8. Service Mode
NSRT-STC 1 Set stack improve mode:non-sort, Fin-AA1
Detail To set stack improvement mode when not sorting to the stack tray.
When 1 is set, stack delivery is performed at the center reference via processing tray even in non
sort mode resulting in the improvement of stacking alignment.
Use Case When the stacking condition at non-sorting of the stack tray is poor
Caution When 1 is set:
- Productivity is decreased.
- In the case of the paper type or the paper size that cannot feed via a processing tray , paper is
delivered by non-sort.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
MSTP-TMG 1 Set of manual stpl tmg: Fin-K1/AA1

Detail To set the duration of time before executing automatic stapling at manual staple mode.
As the value is changed by 1, the time is changed by 1 second.
+: Timing is delayed
-: Timing becomes earlier
Unit sec
Default Value 3
Additional Functions Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Time Until Stapling Starts in Stapler Mode
Mode
Supplement/Memo The setting of the service mode links the setting of the user mode.
Unit
FR-ST-PO 1 Set staple free staple position: Fin-K1

Detail To set the staple position of staple free stapling.
When 1 is set, staple position becomes the center so paper is more likely to be come off. The
staple position moves toward delivery direction by 4.0 mm and moves inward by 2.0 mm in the
alignment direction.
0: Corner-stapling (normal), 1: Center-stapling
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> FR-STP-X/Y
MSTP-WT 1 Set wait time after manual stpl: Fin-K1

Detail To set the duration of time to keep manual staple mode enabled after execution of manual stapling.
While manual stapling mode is enabled, other jobs are not accepted.
Unit sec
Default Value 0
Unit
975
8. Service Mode
TRY-PSTN 1 Set tray pstn after job complete: Fin-K1
Detail To set the tray position after the completion of job.
When 1 is set, the tray stops at the lower limit position. Visibility of the delivered papers is improved,
but FCOT becomes longer.
Use Case Upon user's request (to improve visibility of the delivered papers)
Caution When 1 is set, productivity is decreased. Do not put a foreign object under the tray to move the
tray down to the lower limit position. If there is a foreign object, the tray is unable to move down,
E540 may occur.
0: Normal (priority on productivity), 1: Lower limit position (priority on visibility)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> TRY-STP
Supplement/Memo When 1 in SORTER> OPTION> TRY-STP is set, the tray of the inner finisher does not down after
paper full detection.
PADL-TM 2 Set ppr rtn time extsn: 2-sided, Fin-K1

Detail To set whether to extend paper pull-back time at 2-sided print.
When 1 is set, paper pull-back time becomes 550 msec longer in the case of 2-sided printing using
plain paper 1 or larger size paper.
Use Case When paper pull-back failure occurs at high-density full-color 2-sided printing
Caution When 1 is set, productivity is decreased.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
PUN-Y-SW 1 Set of punch horz reg oprtn:Fin-AA1

Detail To set whether or not to perform the horizontal registration operation of puncher unit for matching
with the center of the paper.
Use Case When the adjustable range of the punch hole horizontal registration adjustment (PNCH-Y) is
enlarged.
Caution When a punch hole position precision improvement mode was set, this mode is given priority to.
0: The horizontal registration operation is performed.
1: The horizontal registration operation is not performed. (fixed in the center position)
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> ADJUST> PNCH-Y
SORTER> OPTION> PNCH-SW3
PNCH-SW2 1 Setting of punch hole spec:Fin-AA1

Detail To set the punch hole specification of puncher unit.
Use Case When replacing the Puncher Unit
Caution When the punch hole specification is not set, malfunction may occur in the punch operation.
0: 2/4 holes puncher unit
1: 2/3 holes puncher unit
2: SWE 4 holes puncher unit
Default Value 0
976
8. Service Mode
PNCH-SW3 1 Set punch hole hi precision mode:Fin-AA1
Detail To set ON/OFF of the mode to improve the precision of the punch hole position.
When 1 is set, the punch hole position is decided by the paper trailing edge standard.
Use Case When the position of the punch hole is misaligned
Caution - When setting to ON, the productivity is decreased.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
Related Service Mode SORTER> OPTION> PUN-Y-SW
SFT-CHNG 1 Set dvry number of stck ppr:Fin-AA1

Detail Setting the number of paper in a stack delivery for small sizes at shift sort mode.
Changing the setting to "1", the number of paper in a stack delivery changes as follows:
- For plain paper 1/2: Number of paper in a stack changes from 5 to 2.
- For plain paper 3 and heavy paper 1/2/3/4/5/6/7: Number of paper in a stack changes from 3 to
2.
Use Case When improving stacking performance at the time of offsetting and collating paper other than tab
paper and coated paper
Caution For small size paper, simultaneous stack delivery is not performed in offset and collate mode.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 1
STP-ALG 1 Set align plt oprtn at stpl mod:Fin-AA1

Detail To set the operation of alignment plates at staple mode and staple-free binding mode.
Set to 1 when the alignment operation by the alignment plates is changed from one time to two
times at the staple mode and staple-free binding mode.
Use Case When improving the alignment (front/rear) of the paper at staple mode
Caution When setting to ON, productivity is decreased.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
SDL-ALG 1 Set paddle oprtn in sddl unit:Fin-AA1

Detail To set the paddle operation when stacking the paper in the saddle stitcher unit.
Set to 1 when the paddle operation of the last stack paper in the saddle stitcher unit is changed
from one rotation to two rotations.
Use Case When improving the paper alignment of the feed direction at stacking the paper in the saddle
stitcher unit
Caution When setting to ON, productivity is decreased.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
977
8. Service Mode
TRY-STP 1 Stpl stck limit clear: Fin-K1/AA1
Detail To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stapled copies sheets.
When clearing the limit, the tray height limit is applied instead.
Use Case When stacking papers beyond the maximum number of stapled copies sheets
Caution When the stacking limit is cleared, stacking capacity increases, but stacking performance
decreases.
Display/Adj/Set Range Fin-K1: 0 to 1
Fin-AA1: 0 to 3
0: Normal specification
1: Clear the limit of stack capacity of the stapled copies, and apply the tray height limit
2, 3: Not used
Default Value 0
TRY-LMT 1 Set stack limit of stack tray:Fin-AA1

Detail To set whether to limit the stack capacity of the stack tray.
Set to 1 when the stack capacity of the stack tray for the small size paper is changed from about
3,000 sheets to about 1,000 sheets.
Use Case When the stacking performance decreases by the curled paper during stacking a large amount of
the small size paper
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
FR-ST-SW 1 Stpl free stpl at no stpl ctrdg: Fin-K1

Detail When the staple cartridge is absent, staple-free stapling is not actually performed in the default
setting while a job with staple-free stapling has executed since the finisher behaves in non-sort
mode. Set to "1" to enable the staple-free stapling without staple cartridge.
Use Case When executing staple-free stapling by removing a staple cartridge
Caution If staple-free stapling is executed while 1 is set without removing a staple cartridge and the cartridge
has been installed improperly, 1C32 or E532 may occur.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
EXEC-SFT 2 EXEC Frt stapling shift oprtn set:Fin-K1

Detail To change offset operation at EXEC paper front stapling so that alignment can be improved.
When 0 is set, paper is offset to the front staple position one by one. When 1 is set, papers are
aligned at the center and then are offset as a paper stack.
Use Case In a high temperature and high humidity environment, curl in the feed direction may occur with
EXEC cotton bond paper. When misalignment occurs with the front stapling job executed in this
environment.
Caution Shifting in a paper stack degrades productivity.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
978
8. Service Mode
TRY-UP 1 Set stck tr oprtn at ppr dvry: Fin-AA1
Detail To set the stack tray operation at the paper stack delivery.
When satisfy the following conditions, this mode functions.
-Staple mode or staple-free binding mode
-Paper length: 220mm or less
-2-sided printing
When 1 is set, the stack tray moves up delivering the paper stack from the processing tray.
Use Case When a downward curl occurs on the bottom paper of the delivered paper stack delivering the
paper stack from the processing tray at the staple mode/staple-free binding mode
Caution When 1 is set, the guarantee stack capacity decreases to 30 sets. (the maximum stack capacity
does not change.)
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default Value 0
979
8. Service Mode
BOARD (Option board setting mode)

BOARD (Option board setting mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode)
MENU-1 2 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 1
Detail To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu.
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0

0: Hide, 1: Display
Default Value 0
980
8. Service Mode
FAX (Serivce Mode for FAX)
Overview
■ Configuration of the Service Mode
Service mode is divided into the following 10 items (#1 to #10).
Item Name Description

#1 SSSW Service software This can be used to conduct the registration/settings relating to basic functions of the fax,
switch such as error management, echo prevention and prevention of communication problems.
#2 MENU Menu switch setting This can be used to conduct the registration/settings relating to the required functions at
installation, such as NL equalizer, transmission level.
#3 NUMERIC Par- Setting of numeric pa- This can be used to enter numeric parameters.
am. rameters
#4 NCU (Adjustment by a The values of this item are collectively set based on the setting of #5 TYPE.
service technician is
not possible.)
#5 TYPE Country/region set- If the item "STANDARD" displayed on the display is set, #4 NCU data is collectively set to
ting comply with the communication standards in Japan.
#6 IPFAX Communication set- If the license option for IPFAX has been enabled, IPFAX is displayed.
tings of IPFAX
#7 PRINT Printer function set- This can be used to conduct the registration/settings relating to the printer basic service
ting functions, such as size reduction conditions for received images.
#8 CLEAR Data initialization This item is to initialize each data.
mode setting
#9 TEST Test Mode To execute various tests.
#10 REPORT Service Report To execute report print.
CAUTION:
If a 2nd line fax option is installed, IPFAX cannot be used.
■ Operation method
1. Enter service mode.
981
8. Service Mode
2. When the connected options (FEEDER, SORTER, FAX, BOARD) are displayed, select FAX and enter service mode
of this board.
SERVICE MODE LEVEL 1
COPIER
FEEDER
SORTER
FAX
COPIER: Service mode of the connected equipment

FEEDER: Service mode of the ADF (*)
SORTER: Service mode of the Finisher (*)
FAX: Service mode of the fax (*)
The following explains the operation method using the #1 SSSW screen as an example. The meaning of the keys and
operations are common for all screens.
Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IP FAX Print Clear Test Report
<1/7> <READY>
SW01 00000000
SW02 10000000
SW03 00000000
SW04 10000000
SW05 00000000
SW06 10000000
SW07 00000000
SW08 10000000
OK
Previous Page/Next Page key Press to accept the current input.

Press to stop the TEST.
• When changing the setting of the bit switch, directly press the bit (numeric value) you want to change.
• To enter a numeric value, use the numeric keypad.
• When confirming a change in a numeric value or when executing an item, press the [OK] key.
• To return to the previous layer, use the [Reset] key.
CAUTION:
When changing the service mode settings, turn OFF and then ON the power.
The details of settings in service mode are stored in the storage of the host machine. The settings for this board are enabled
by loading the settings stored in the storage of the host machine to the G3 Fax Control PCB when the main power is turned
ON. Therefore, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the power when the settings have been changed.
982
8. Service Mode
■ Menu List
#1 SSSW SW01 error management
SW02 Not used
SW03 set remedy against echo
SW04 set remedy against communication error
SW05 set standard function <DIS signal>
SW06 to SW08 Not used
SW09 set communication result display
SW12 set page timer
SW13 Display of the screen Settings
SW14 Inch/mm resolution settings
SW15 Not used
SW17 Transmission level setting of modem
SW18 The control of IP supported communication setting
SW22 Settings of archive send function
SW25 set report display function
SW26 set transmission function
SW27 Not used
SW28 set V. 8/V. 34
SW29 Not used
SW30 Dial tone detection method switching
#2 MENU 001 to 004 Not used

005 NL equalizer
006 line monitor
007 transmission level (ATT)
008 V.34 modulation speed upper limit
009 V.34 data speed upper limit
010 to 020 Not used
#3 NUM 001 not used

002 RTN transmission condition (1)
005 NCC pause time (before ID code)
006 NCC pause time (after ID code)
007 pre-pulse time at time of call
008 not used
009 number of characters in telephone numbers between transmitting and receiving parties.
010 line connection identification time
011 T.30 T1 timer (for reception)
012 not used
013 T.30 E0L timer
014 not used
015 hooking detection time
016 Time until a temporary response is obtained when switching FAX/TEL
017 Pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time
018 Pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time (short)
019 Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (long)
020 Pseudo CI signal pattern ON time
021 Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (short)
022 Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF (long)
023 CNG detection level when switching FAX/TEL
024 Pseudo RBT transmission level when switching FAX/TEL
025 CNG monitoring time when the answering phone connection function is set
026 Silent detection level when the answering phone connection function is set
027 preamble detection time for V.21 low-speed flag
028 Off-hook PCB duty settings
029-80 not used
983
8. Service Mode
#7 PRINT BIT SW SW01 hold the line/DUMP report output setting

SW04 not used
SW05 reduction/cassette selection
SW06 reduction setting
SW07 to SW20 not used
NUM 001 maximum non-image range
002 not used
003 not used
004 leading edge margin
005 trailing edge margin
006 to 030 not used
#8 CLEAR TEL
USSW SW
SRV SW
NCU
SRV DATA
REPORT
ALL
COUNTER
IP FAX
#10 REPORT DATA

DUMP
Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW)

■ Bit Switch Composition
The registration/setup items of the switch are set according to the positions of its 8 bits; the bit switch shown on the display is as
follows, each bit being either 0 or 1:
Bit 7 Bit 0
SW01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CAUTION:
Do not change service data identified as "not used"; they are set as initial settings.
<1/7> <READY>
SW01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW02 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW04 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW06 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW07 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW08 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OK
984
8. Service Mode
● SSSW-SW01
Functional Construction
Bit Function 1 0
0 Error codes for service technician Output Do not output
1 Error dump list Output Do not output
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Display service error codes in the ##300 series Display Do not display
5 Increase the capacity of SUBLOG for USBFAX2 Increase Do not increase
6 Not used - -
7 Cancel prohibition of user setting collectively Cancel Do not cancel
Details of Bit 0
Select whether to output service error codes.
When "Output" is selected, service error codes will be on the display and on the report.
Detailed Discussions of Bit 1

Select whether to output error dump list.
When "Output" is selected, the error transmission report and the reception result report at the time of occurrence of an error
are output with the error dump list attached.

Select whether to display service error codes in the ##300 series.

Select whether to increase the log storage area when firmware automatic update function of USBFAX2 (a modem with
Silicone Labs modem mounted version) is used.

Select whether to collectively cancel the prohibition of user settings.
● SSSW-SW02
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 To prohibit control channel retrain during V.34 Prohibit Do not prohibit
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 F-NET service without ring tone Supported Not supported

Select whether to prohibit the control channel retrain during V.34.

Select whether to support F-NET (fax communication network) service without a ring tone.
If "Supported" is selected, fax document will be automatically received without a ring tone when FC signal (1300 Hz tonal
signal) from F-NET is detected.
● SSSW-SW03
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Echo protect tone at high speed transmission Send Do not send
985
8. Service Mode
Bit Function 1 0
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Transmission mode: International transmission (1) Yes No
5 Transmission mode: International transmission (3) Yes No
6 Send mode International transmis- International transmis-
sion (3) sion (2)
7 Tonal signal before sending CED signal Send Do not send

Use it to enable/disable sending an echo protect tone for a high-speed transmission V.29 modem signal (transmission speed
at 9600 or 7200 bps).
If errors occur frequently at time of sending fax because of the condition of the line, select "Send". Selecting "send" sends
non-modulated carrier for about 200 ms as the synchronous signal before sending images.
NOTE:
Error codes caused by line condition when sending fax
##100, ##104, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##760, ##765
Detailed Discussions of Bits 4, 5 and 6

Transmission mode: Selected to use whether international transmission (1), international transmission (2) or international
transmission (3).
Use these switches or the dial registration to select a transmission mode if errors occur frequently at time when sending fax
overseas.
NOTE:
Error codes caused by echoes at time of sending fax
#005, ##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##760, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##794
Settings using the Dial Registration (user level):

Select "international transmission (1)" when making an entry in the address book. If errors persist, select "international
transmission (2)" and then "international transmission (3)".
Transmission mode selected using One-Touch Dial function or the Speed Dial function will be given priority over the setting
made by the service soft switch.
An international transmission mode may be selected using the keypad if a mode has been selected using this switch; for
settings, see the following table:
Transmission Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

mode
International trans- * 0 0 1 - - * -
mission (1)
mission (2)
mission (3)
International transmission (1): Selected to ignore the first DIS signal from the other party.
International transmission (2): Selected to transmit a 1850-Hz total signal when transmitting the DIS signal.
International transmission (3): Selected to transmit a 1650-Hz total signal when transmitting the DIS signal.

Select whether to enable/disable sending of a 1080-Hz tonal signal before sending CED signal.
Select "Send" if errors occur frequently because of an echo when reception is from overseas.
NOTE:
Error codes caused by echoes at the time of reception
#005, ##101, ##106, ##107, ##114, ##200, ##201, ##790
986
8. Service Mode
● SSSW-SW04
Bit Function 1 0
0 LC monitoring Monitor Do not monitor
1 Check the CI signal frequency Check Do not checked
2 Final flag sequences of the procedure signal 2 pcs 1 piece
3 Reception mode after sending CFR signal High speed High speed/low speed
4 Time to ignore low-speed signals after sending CFR signal 1500 msec 700 msec
5 Check the CS signal frequency (when PBX is set) Check Do not check
6 CNG signal at the time of manual sending Send Do not send
7 CED signal at the time of manual reception Send Do not send

Select whether to check the CI signal frequency.

Select the number of the final flag sequences with the procedure signal (300 bps transmission speed).
Select "2" when the other party's machine does not properly receive the procedure signal sent by this machine.
NOTE:
Error codes occurring at the time of sending fax
##100, ##280, ##281, ##750, ##753, ##754, ##755, ##758, ##759, ##760, ##763, ##764, ##765, ##768, ##769, ##770, ##773,
##775, ##778, ##780, ##783, ##785, ##788

Select a reception mode after sending CFR signal.
Select "High speed" in the case of frequent errors caused by line condition at the time of reception. Simultaneously, turn
"OFF" the "ECM reception" of the user data.
NOTE:
Error codes caused by line condition at the time of reception
##107, ##114, ##201
Be sure to change bit 4 before changing this bit; if errors still occur, change this bit.
When 'high speed' is selected, only high-speed signals (images) will be received after sending the CFR signal.

Select the time length during which low-speed signals are ignored after sending the CFR signal.
Select "1500 msec" when reception of image signal is difficult because the line condition is not good.

Select whether to check the CI signal frequency when PBX is set.

Select whether to send CNG signal at the time of manual sending.
If error occurs frequently at manual sending when the destination device that has FAX/TEL switch mode does not change
to the fax mode, select "Send".

Select whether to send CED signal at the time of manual reception.
Select "Send" when the other party's machine does not start sending although manual reception is executed.
● SSSW-SW05
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 To execute mm/inch conversion (text mode). Yes No
2 Not used - -
987
8. Service Mode
Bit Function 1 0
3 To send bit 33 or later of DIS signal. Prohibit Do not prohibit
4 Record paper length to be declared by DIS signal A4/B4 size Any size
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

Execute mm/inch conversion for the image scanned in text mode.

Select whether to send bit 33 or later of DIS signal.
CAUTION:
If "Prohibit" is selected, the super-fine reception from other brand printers or memory box function will be disabled.

Select whether the paper to be declared by DIS signal is a cut paper.
Select "A4/B4 size" if dividing the original at the sending machine side at the time of receiving a long original.
NOTE:
Depending on the model of sending machine, long originals may not be divided.
● SSSW-SW09
Bit Function 1 0
0 Communication result at normal completion Display Do not display
1 Communication result at completion with an error Display Do not display
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -
Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 and 1

Select whether to continue displaying the communication result on the Control Panel at normal completion and/or at
completion with an error.
● SSSW-SW12
Bit Function 1 0
0 Timeout period for sending 1 page (sending) 1 0
1 Timeout period for sending 1 page (sending) 1 0
2 Timeout period for sending 1 page (HT sending) 1 0
3 Timeout period for sending 1 page (HT sending) 1 0
4 Timeout period for sending 1 page (reception) 1 0
5 Timeout period for sending 1 page (reception) 1 0
6 Not used - -
7 Page timer settings for sending/receiving Set Do not set
This machine stops communication when sending/receiving per original page takes 32 minutes or longer. When setting the timer
different from the above, see the following to set the most appropriate time length.
988
8. Service Mode
When 'Do not set' is selected using bit 7, the timeout length per page for all modes will depend on the setting of bit 0 and bit 1.
Timeout period at the time of sending/receiving
Timeout period Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
8 min. 0 * * * * * 0 0
16 min. 0 * * * * * 0 1
32 min. 0 * * * * * 1 0
64 min. 0 * * * * * 1 1
Timeout period at the time of sending (in text mode)
8 min. 1 * * * * * 0 0
16 min. 1 * * * * * 0 1
32 min. 1 * * * * * 1 0
64 min. 1 * * * * * 1 1
Timeout period at the time of sending (in text mode)
8 min. 1 * * * 0 0 * *
16 min. 1 * * * 0 1 * *
32 min. 1 * * * 1 0 * *
64 min. 1 * * * 1 1 * *
Timeout period at the time of reception
Timeout Period Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
8 min. 1 * 0 0 * * * *
16 min. 1 * 0 1 * * * *
32 min. 1 * 1 0 * * * *
64 min. 1 * 1 1 * * * *
● SSSW-SW13
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Display Modem Dial-in/My Number Setting screen Yes No
4 Display Number Display Setting screen Yes No
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

To set whether to display Modem Dial-in Setting screen and My Number Setting screen.
NOTE:
Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine after the setting.

To set whether to enable the display of Number Display Setting screen.
989
8. Service Mode
NOTE:
Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine after the setting.
● SSSW-SW14
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 inch-configuration resolution declaration Yes No
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

At the time of G3 communication, select whether to declare inch-configuration resolution to the other party's machine. if
'declare' is selected, the machine will indicate that it reads and records at an inch-configuration resolution using the DIS,
DCS, or DTC signal.
● SSSW-SW17
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 To select the transmission level of the modem 0 to 15 8 to 15
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

Select the transmission level of the modem.
● SSSW-SW18
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Prohibition of the control of IP supported communication Yes No
3 Number of command retransmission (V1.7 or earlier) 6 times 3 times
4 Request retransmission of all frames after frame loss at JBIG reception Yes No
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

Set whether to prohibit the control of IP supported communication
1: Yes
0: No
990
8. Service Mode

Number of command retransmission
1: 6 times
0: 3 times

Set whether to request retransmission of all frames after frame loss at JBIG reception
1: Yes
0: No
● SSSW-SW22
Bit Function 1 0
0 Backup when an archive transmission error occurs Use Do not use
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Prohibit manual polling operation - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Archive transmission function Enabled Disabled
7 Not used - -
Detailed Discussions of Bit0

Select whether to back up data when a communication error occurs during archive transmission.
This function is available on the Platform Version 3.6 or later.
Detailed Discussions of Bit3

Set whether to prohibit of manual polling operation

Set whether to send the sent images to the destination specified by the forwarding function.
● SSSW-SW23
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Prohibit to rotate A4 or larger paper in portrait position by 180 degrees - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -
Detailed Discussion of Bit 2

Set whether to add header with or without rotating the image by 180 degrees when A4 or larger paper is placed in the feeder
in portrait position (R position).
1: Yes
0: No
● SSSW-SW25
Bit Function 1 0
0 Sender's phone number indicated in the report Receiver's number Caller's number
1 Not used - -
991
8. Service Mode
Bit Function 1 0
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Firmware automatic update (USB Fax) Prohibit Do not prohibited
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

Select a phone number to be indicated on the report after transmission is completed.
Caller's number: To display the caller's phone number on the report
Receiver's number: To indicate the phone number (CSI signal data) sent from the other party's machine on the report

Select whether to prohibit the firmware automatic update for USB Fax.
● SSSW-SW26
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Check the sequential broadcast. Check Do not check
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Redial function when transmission error occurs Use Do not use
6 Not used - -
7 Error report when sending process is canceled Do not output Output

Select whether to display a confirmation message when entering destination for the sequential broadcast in order to prevent
the user from broadcasting by mistake.

Select whether to use the redial function when outgoing transmission error occurs.

Select whether to output an error report when the [Stop] key is pressed to cancel sending.
● SSSW-SW28
Functional Configuration
Bit Function 1 0
0 V.8 procedure at the caller side No Yes
1 V.8 procedure at the receiver side No Yes
2 V.8 late start at the caller side No Yes
3 V.8 late start at the receiver side No Yes
4 Fallback from the V.34 receiver side Prohibit Do not prohibit
5 Not used - -
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

Select whether to execute V.8 procedure when making a call.
"No": V.8 procedure is not executed even if V.8 procedure is received from the receiver side, and the procedure starts from
V.21.
992
8. Service Mode

Select whether to execute V.8 procedure when receiving a call.
"No": V.8 procedure is not executed, and the procedure starts from V.21.

Select whether to execute V.8 procedure when ANSam signal from the receiver side cannot be recognized at the time of
making a call and V.8 procedure is declared by DIS signal from the receiver side.
"Yes": CI signal is sent in response to the DIS signal of the receiver side to execute the V.8 procedure.
"No": CI signal is not sent in response to the DIS signal of the receiver side, and the V.21 procedure is executed.
In the case of manual transmission, there will be no V.8 late start regardless of this setting.

Select whether to declare the existence of the V.8 procedure with the DIS signal that is transmitted after the ANSam signal
in case that the ANSam signal at the reception is not recognized at the caller side.
"Yes": V.8 procedure is declared by DIS signal and V.8 procedure is executed after CI signal is sent from the caller side.
"No": V.8 procedure is not declared by DIS signal, and V.21 procedure is executed.
In the case of manual transmission, there will be no V.8 late start regardless of this setting.

Select whether to prohibit fallback from the V.34 receiver side.
"Prohibit": There will be no fallback from the receiver side.
● SSSW-SW30
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Switching the dial tone detection method - New detection method
6 Flow control between pages Control Do not control
7 Not used - -

Switch the detection method when executing the dial tone detection at the time of calling.
0: New detection method (default)
1: Not used

Select whether to execute flow control between pages.
● SSSW-SW50
Bit Function 1 0
0 Transmission number restriction: Function to prevent no external access ON: Enable OFF: Disable
code *2
1 Transmission number restriction: Extension allowance, prohibition *2 Prohibited Allow
2 Transmission number restriction: Add "0" to the first digit of external ac- Yes No
cess code *2
3 Operate as the client of a fax server *1 *a Yes No
4 Display the send job stop confirmation screen when pressing Stop key *2 No Yes
5 Send jobs that are targeted to stop when pressing Stop key *2 Ongoing send job Incomplete send job
6 not used - -
7 not used - -
*1: Supported by the platform version 306 or later

*2: Supported by the platform version 307 or later
993
8. Service Mode
*a: Enabled only for USA
Details of Bit 0
To prevent incorrectly sending fax due to forgetting to use the external access number, "0", this function displays a pop-up
warning window and prevents sending and returns to the status before pressing Start button by pressing [OK] after setting
the fax number in [Fax] or [Scan and Send] and pressing Start button if the set telephone number does not start with "00".
This function is supported even if the machine is operating in the fax server mode.
0: ON: Disable
1: OFF: Enable
CAUTION:
• If using this function, enter the telephone number from the area code.
• This function applies to the fax destination telephone number of "Address List", "One-touch" and "Numeric Keypad
input".
However, the warning is not displayed with "sending from Mail Box" and "manual sending".
• A warning is displayed when sending IP fax but it is not displayed when sending PC fax.
• A warning is not displayed when forwarding transmission.
• If any registered number matches to the condition for displaying a warning, the warning is displayed with "sequential
broadcast" and "group sending".
• "*" and "#" are also processed as a number.
NOTE:
Example of sending fax to 03-1234-5678
• The machine accepts sending fax with "0 (external access code) + 03 1234 5678 (telephone number)".
• The machine displays a warning and stops sending with "(no external access code) + 03 1234 5678 (telephone number)".
• If the external access code is other than "0", it can be changed from the following service mode.
Service Mode > FAX > NUM > 080
Change the default setting of 080 from "0" to the external access code used in the installation environment.
Details of Bit 1
This is set to allow or prohibit transmission to the extension line.
This is enabled only if Bit 0 (function to prevent no external access code) is "1" (ON: Enable).
If transmission to the extension line is allowed, all telephone numbers not starting with the external access code are allowed.
For example, if the external access code is "0", any number starting with "00" as starting 2 digits and number of the extension
line are allowed. This means numbers starting with "01" to "09" are prohibited and other numbers are allowed.
If transmission to the extension line is prohibited, only allow the telephone number starting with the external access code +
area code "0". For example, if the external access code is "0", allow only numbers starting with "00" as starting 2 digits.
Prohibit all extension numbers. This means only numbers starting with "00" are allowed and other numbers are prohibited.
0: Allow
1: Prohibit
Details of Bit 2
This is the switch to add "0" to the beginning of external access code (default "0") set by the NUM switch 080.
The NUM switch can be used to set "0" and "1" but not "00" and "01" as the external access code.
This switch is used to solve this issue. In the above example, set this setting to "add" and then set the NUM switch 080 to
"0" and "1" to set the external access code of "00" and "01".
0: No
1: Yes
CAUTION:
• This automatically adds the external access number to the destination telephone number for sending fax registered
by Address List, One-touch and entering by the Numeric Keypad excluding Direct Send and Send from Mail Box.
• This should be set only in the network environment that sends fax by adding the external access code.
• Do not add the external access code to the telephone number for fax send destination as the external access code is
automatically added.
Details of Bit 3
This switch operates the machine as the client of fax server.
0: No
1: Yes
994
8. Service Mode
CAUTION:
When changing this switch, make sure to turn OFF and then ON then ON the power supply twice. This is the specification
for changing the fax configuration and is the same specification as adding the Fax Board to the existing machine.
Details of Bit 4
This is the switch to set to display the send job stop confirmation screen if the Stop key is pressed during sending fax.
0: No
1: Yes
Details of Bit 5
This is the switch to set to stop the ongoing send job or incomplete send job if the Stop key is pressed during sending fax.
0: Incomplete send job
1: Ongoing send job
Setting of Menu Switch (MENU)

■ Configuration of Menu Switches
Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IPFAX Print Clear Test Report
<1/3> <READY>
001 xxxxx ←㸦yyyyy㸧{aaaaa㹼bbbbb}

OK
No. Function Scope of selection

005 NL equalizer 1: ON, 0: OFF
006 Phone line monitoring 0 to 3
007 Transmission level (ATT) 8 to 15 (ex: 15 = -15 dBm)
008 Upper limit for V.34 modulation speed 0: 3429, 1: 3200, 2: 3000, 3: 2800, 4: 2743,
5: 2400
009 Upper limit for V.34 data speed 0 to 13
010 Frequency of pseudo CI signal 0: 50 Hz, 1: 25 Hz, 2: 17 Hz
005: NL equalizer
Select ON/OFF of NL equalizer.
Select "1: ON" in the case of frequent errors caused by line status at the time of communication.
NOTE:
Error codes caused by line status at the time of transmission
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##750, ##755, ##765, ##774, ##779, ##784, ##789
Error codes caused by line status at the time of reception
##103, ##107, ##114, ##201, ##790, ##793
006: Phone line monitoring

Set whether to make monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker.
• 0 (DIAL):
To make monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker from the start of line connection until the DIS.
995
8. Service Mode
• 1:
To make monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker from the start of communication until the completion.
• 2:
Not used
• 3 (OFF):
There will be no monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker.
007: ATT transmission level

Set the transmission level (ATT).
Increase the transmission level (make it closer to 8) in the case of frequent errors caused by line status at the time of
communication.
NOTE:
Error codes caused by line status at the time of transmission
##100, ##101, ##102, ##104, ##201, ##280, ##281, ##282, ##283, ##284, ##750, ##752, ##754, ##755, ##757, ##759, ##760,
##762, ##764, ##765, ##767, ##769, ##770, ##772, ##774, ##775, ##777, ##779, ##780, ##782, ##784, ##785, ##787, ##789
Error codes caused by line status at the time of reception
##103, ##106, ##107, ##201, ##793
008: Upper limit for V.34 modulation speed

Select the upper limit of the modulation speed (baud rate) in the V.34 primary channel.
When 4 (2743 baud) is selected, the communication is actually performed at 2400 baud.
009: Upper limit of V.34 data speed

Select an upper limit of data transmission speed in the V.34 primary channel in the range between 2.4k and 33.6kbps at 2400bps
intervals (0: 2.4 kbps to 13: 33.6 kbps).
010: Pseudo CI signal frequency

Set pseudo CI signal frequency.
Depending on the type of external phones, there is no ring tone when the FAX/TEL switching function is working. Change the
pseudo CI signal frequency when there is no ring tone.
Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.)

■ Configuration of Numeric Parameters
Sssw Menu Num Ncu Type IPFAX Print Clear Test Report
<1/10> <READY>

OK
No. Function Setting range Default value

002 RTN transmission condition (1) 1 to 99% 10
003 RTN transmission condition (2) 2 to 99 times 15
004 RTN transmission condition (3) 1 to 99 lines 12
005 NCC pause time (before ID code) 1 to 60 sec 4
006 NCC pause time (after ID code) 1 to 60 sec 4
007 Prepose time at the time of making a call 0 to 9999 (x 10 ms) 0
996
8. Service Mode
No. Function Setting range Default value

009 Comparing the number of digits between the sender's telephone number 0 to 20 digits 0
and the receiver's telephone number
010 Line connection identification time 0 to 9999 (x 10 ms) 5500
011 T.30 T1 timer (for reception) 0 to 9999 (x 10 ms) 3500
013 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3000 (x 10 ms) 1300
015 Hooking detection time 0 to 999 120
016 Time until a temporary response is obtained when switching FAX/TEL 0 to 9 4
017 Pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time 0 to 999 100
018 Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (short) 0 to 999 0
019 Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (long) 0 to 999 200
020 Pseudo CI signal pattern ON time 0 to 999 100
021 Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (short) 0 to 999 0
022 Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (long) 0 to 999 200
023 CNG detection level when switching FAX/TEL 0 to 7 4
024 Pseudo RBT transmission level when switching FAX/TEL 10 to 20 (TYPE = 20
STANDARD)
025 CNG monitoring time when the answering phone connection function is
set
026 Silent detection level when the answering phone connection function is
set
027 V.21 low-speed flag preamble detection time 20 (-10 ms) 0
028 Off-hook PCB duty settings 1 to 99% 0 (50%)
080 Transmission number restriction: Outside line transmission number *1 0 to 9999 0
*1 : Supported on the platform version 307 or later
002: RTN transmission condition (1)/003: RTN transmission condition (2)/004: RTN transmission
condition (3)
Set the RTN signal transmission condition.
In the case of frequent errors caused by RTN signal transmission at the time of reception, increase the parameters to loosen the
RTN signal transmission condition.
NOTE:
Error codes caused by RTN signal transmission at the time of reception
##104, ##107, ##114, ##201
RTN signal transmission condition (1) is the ratio of error lines for the total number of lines per page of the received image.
RTN signal transmission condition (2) is the reference value (*2) of burst error (*1).
RTN signal transmission condition (3) is the number of errors that fail to meet the reference value of burst error.
*1: Burst error (transmission errors with several continued lines)
*2: Reference value (When "15" is set, transmission error with 15 consecutive lines is recognized as a burst error.)
When any of the above conditions is detected during reception of image signals, RTN signal is sent after reception of the procedure
signal from the sending machine. Increasing such parameter sends less RTN signal.
005: NCC pause time (before ID code)

Set the pause time to be automatically entered between the access code and ID code when dialing on NCC (New Common
Carrier) line.
006: NCC pause time (after ID code)

Set the pause time to be automatically entered between the ID code and the other party's telephone number when dialing on
NCC (New Common Carrier) line.
007: Prepose time at the time of making a call

When automatically making a call, set the time from closing a line to making a call.
009: Comparing the number of digits between the sender's telephone number and the receiver's
telephone number
Set the TSI comparing the number of digits (last XX digits) when matching telephone numbers.
997
8. Service Mode
010: Line connection identification time

Set the line connection identification time.
Increase this parameter in the case of frequent errors caused by line connection status at the time of communication.
NOTE:
Error codes caused by line connection status
##005, ##018
The line connection identification time is the duration from when the dial signal is transmitted until the line is disconnected at the
sending side, or from when DIS signal is transmitted until the line is disconnected at the reception side.
011: T.30 T1 timer (for reception)

Set T1 timer at the time of reception (wait time until receiving the meaningful signal after DIS transmission).
013: T.30 EOL timer

Set the receivable 1 line transmission time.
In the case of a long line data length (e.g.: computer FAX), extend the transmission time to prevent reception errors.
015: Hooking detection time

Set the hooking detection time.
016: Time until the primary response is obtained when switching FAX/TEL
Set the time from when capturing the line until transmission of pseudo RBT at FAX/TEL switching function operation.
017: Pseudo RBT signal pattern ON time/ 018: Pseudo RBT signal pattern OFF time (short)/ 019: Pseudo
RBT signal pattern OFF time (long)
Set the pattern of pseudo RBT signal to be sent at Fax/Tel switching function operation.
020: Pseudo CI signal pattern ON time/ 021: Pseudo CI signal pattern OFF time (short)/ 022: Pseudo CI
signal pattern OFF time (long)
Set the pattern of pseudo CI signal to be sent at Fax/Tel switching function operation.
023: CNG detection level when switching FAX/TEL

Set the CNG detection level at Fax/Tel switching function operation.
024: Pseudo RBT transmission level when switching FAX/TEL

Set the transmission level of pseudo RBT at Fax/Tel switching function operation.
025: CNG monitoring time when the answering phone connection function is set
027: V21 low-speed flag preamble detection time

Set the period of time for judge detection of V.21 low-speed command preamble.
Continuous detection for the fixed period of time leads to command analysis.
028: Off-hook PCB duty settings

Set the Off-hook PCB duty setting.
When 0 or a value that is 100 or more is entered, the duty becomes 50%.
080: Transmission number restriction: Outside line transmission number

This sets the number permitted to dial to the outside line.
Only the outside line transmission by the set number is permitted and other numbers are prohibited from transmission.
Setting of Destination (TYPE)

■ Overview
When the type shown on the display is set, all the service data is set to match each country/region domestic telecommunication
standards.
998
8. Service Mode
Setting of Printer Functions (PRINTER)

■ Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW)
● SSSW-SW01
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Not used - -
6 Hold the line (when error code occurs) Hold Do not hold
7 Output a print log when DUMP report is output Output Do not output

Select whether to hold the line when an error code occurs.
However, in the case of vertical scanning prioritized recording, even when 0 is set for Bit 1 and Bit 0, the priority order will be
Letter -> A4 -> Legal.

Select whether to output a print log at the time of the DUMP report output.
● SSSW-SW05
Bit Function 1 0
0 Letter priority Set Do not set
1 Legal priority Set Do not set
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 To prohibit reduced size printing (A4) Prohibited Not prohibited
6 To prohibit reduced size printing (A4) Prohibited Not prohibited
7 Vertical scanning prioritized recording Set Do not set

When an image which can be printed in 100% magnification and with the same number of divided pages on any of A4, letter and
legal is received, set which paper is prioritized for printing.
With the settings of Bit 0 and Bit 1, the priority order of the recording paper is shown in the following table.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Priority order of the recording paper

0 0 A4 -> Letter -> Legal
0 1 Letter -> A4 -> Legal
1 0 Legal -> Letter -> A4
1 1 Letter -> Legal -> A4
However, in the case of vertical scanning prioritized recording, the priority order will be Letter -> A4 -> Legal even when 0 is set
for Bit 1 and Bit 0.

Select whether to enable reduced size printing for A4 or LTR.
999
8. Service Mode

Set whether to set vertical scanning prioritized recording.
Set:
If B4 recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and an A4 extra-long image (*) is received, printing will be on the B4
recording paper.
Do not set:
If B5 horizontal recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and a B4 image is received, printing will be by division and
on B5 horizontal recording paper.
*: Image B4 or shorter and that cannot be printed on A4 recording paper.
● SSSW-SW06
Bit Function 1 0
0 Not used - -
1 Not used - -
2 Not used - -
3 Not used - -
4 Not used - -
5 Reduced printing from A4 to B5 Enable Disable
6 Not used - -
7 Not used - -

Set whether to execute the reduction print that forcibly reduces the received A4 size document into the B5 size.
This function is invalid when outputting the report.
■ Setting of Numeric Parameter (NUMERIC Param.)

● Numerical Parameter Composition
No. Function Setting range Initial setting Unit
01 Missing areas of printing 0 to 9999 12 1 mm
image when receiving im-
age with longer length
than standard
04 Leading edge blank area 0 to 9999 3 1 mm
05 Trailing edge blank area 0 to 9999 3 1 mm
<001: printing upon reception of extra-length image>

Use it to set the range of the image to be removed from when printing an extra-length received image.
Lower the parameter to decrease the range if the trailing edge of the received image must be retained (as when it is longer than
the effective recording length).
<004: leading edge margin>

Use it to set the leading-edge margin for the effective recording length.
<005: trailing edge margin>

Use it to set the trailing-edge margin for the effective recording length.
1000
8. Service Mode
IPFAX Setting
■ IPFAX
● BASIC N
Bit Function Setting range
2 Session control reception timeout (sec.) 0 to 9999 (0*)
20 Reception start delay time (sec.) 0 to 9999 (0*)
21 BYE sending delay time at transmission (x10 msec.) 0 to 9999 (0*)
22 BYE receiving delay time at transmission (x10 msec.) 0 to 9999 (0*)
● NETA NUM
1 T0 timer(Timer C) for IPFAX(sec.) 0 to 9999 (55*)
● NETC NUM
1 SW for adjusting the speed at VoIPGW transmission [%] 0 to 9999*
However, the value is fixed in the case of
ECM, and is corrected by adding 5 %.
2 VoIPGW buffer size [byte] 0 to 9999*
However, when the value is 0, it is internally
interpreted as 200.
3 Packet division size [byte] 0 to 9999*
However, when the value is 0, it is internally
interpreted as 66.
4 Number of VoIPGW buffer reset frames at ECM 0 to 9999*
* At ECM transmission, when frames of the number of this NUM value have However, when the value is 0, it is internally
been transmitted, the next frames will be transmitted after the VoIPGW buffer interpreted as 16.
becomes empty.
● T.38 Bit Setting

SW01

1 0
1 German mode is effective during T.38 communication. Effective Invalid *
2 T.38 significant bit of DIS (bit123) is ignored. Ignore Not ignore
(When this SW is effective, the other party's machine is regarded as IPFAX even if DIS
bit123 is 0.)
3 Transmission ECM = OFF setting Effective Invalid *
4 Reception ECM = OFF setting Effective Invalid *
● T.38 NUM Setting

1 High-speed flag sending time of ECM mode for IPFAX (x10 msec.). 0 to 9999 (0*)
2 WAIT time from the close of T.38 to the close of SIP: Unit; second 0 to 9999 (1*)
(However, the setting becomes 2 seconds even if the setting is changed to 2
or more. ).
1001
8. Service Mode
Initialization of Set Value (CLEAR)

■ Overview
Selecting the following items enables the applicable data to be initialized.
When clear is executed, the setting items and numeric values for various parameters are set back to the factory setting values.
Item Data to be initialized

TEL Registered telephone number data (*1)
USSW SW Contents registered in the user data and service mode #1 to #3
Memory management contents of the user data are not cleared.
Image data stored in the memory is not cleared.
SRV SW Contents of the user data and service mode #1 to #3, and #7
NCU Contents of service mode #4
SRV DATA Contents of the system dump list
REPORT Contents of the communication management report
ALL All Settings/Registration data (*1) except service mode #5 TYPE (*2)
COUNTER The number of printed sheets, the number of read sheets
IPFAX Contents of service mode IPFAX
*1: With models that can register information other than fax in destination, the telephone number data is not cleared even when
TEL (service mode > FAX > Clear > TEL) or ALL (service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL) is executed.
To clear the data, execute the following service mode on the host machine.
COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ADRS-BK
*2: When service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL is executed, a value is registered in service mode > FAX > TYPE according to the
location of the host machine (in the case of Japanese model, "STANDARD" is registered).
CAUTION:
If service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL is executed with a fax job waiting to be processed and the fax job is cancelled before
the power is turned OFF and then ON, E674-0100 may occur when the power is turned OFF and then ON.
If E674-0100 occurs, the machine can be recovered by executing service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL again and then turning
OFF and then ON the power.
In order to prevent the foregoing error, be sure to check for any remaining fax jobs before executing service mode > FAX
> Clear > ALL. If there is a remaining job, cancel the job and then execute service mode > FAX > Clear > ALL.
Test Mode (TEST)

■ Overview
● Test Mode Construction
ISDNMOD2
MODEM
MODEM2
FACULTY
FACULTY2
DATA SET
ISDNMOD
1002
8. Service Mode
Using Test Mode
1. Press the desired item to highlight; then, press the OK key to bring up its screen.
The following table shows text mode items that are valid and invalid when a fax board is installed:
Yes: may be used
-: not used
Level 1 Level 2 Fax Board present

RELAY-1 Yes
RELAY-2 -
FREQ Yes
MODEM G3TX Yes
DTMFTX Yes
TONERX -
V34G3TX Yes
G3 4800TX Yes
SPEAKER -
DETECT1 -
FACULTY
DETECT2 -
DETECT3 -
VOICETX -
DATA SET -
ISDNMOD -
ISDNMOD2 -
CAUTION:
Do not use items in the table identified as "-."
■ MODEM Test
● Relay Test (RELAY-1)
Use it to see if the individual relays on the NCU board go on and off as expected.
<MODEM> <RELAY-1> <1/1> <READY>
CML OFF
P OFF
S OFF
H OFF
D OFF
R OFF
OK
Using Text Mode
1. From the relays indicated on the screen, select the one you want to test; then, turn it off or on using the Up/Down
key. (Some of the relays may not actually exist on the NCU board.)
1003
8. Service Mode
● Frequency Test (FREQ)

Of the items indicated below, press one; in response, the DC circuit will be closed and the selected frequency will be transmitted
using the tone transmission function of the modem. You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the sound
generated by the speaker. To stop the operation and end test mode, press the key.
<MODEM> <FREQ> <1/1> <READY>
RBT
462Hz
1100Hz
1300Hz
1500Hz
1650Hz
1850Hz
2100Hz
OK
CAUTION:
'RBT' is not currently supported.
● G3 Signal Transmission Test (G3 Tx)

Of the items indicated below, press one. In response, the DC circuit will be closed and the selected frequency will be transmitted
using the G3 signal transmission function of the modem. You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the sound
generated by the speaker. To stop the operation and end test mode, press the key.
<MODEM> <G3TX> <1/2> <READY>
300bps
2400bps
4800bps
7200bps
9600bps
TC7200
TC9600
12000bps
OK
1004
8. Service Mode
<MODEM> <G3TX> <2/2> <READY>
14400bps
300-ALL0
300-ALL1
300-1:1
300-1:4
300-4:1
OK
CAUTION:
'300-ALL0' through '300-4:1' are not currently supported.
● DTMF Transmission Test

Of the items indicated below, press one; in response, the DC circuit will be closed and the selected DTMF signal will be transmitted
using the DTMF transmission function of the modem. You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the speaker.
To stop the operation and to end test mode, press the key.
<MODEM> <DTMFTX> <1/1> <READY>
LONG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * #
OK
Using Text Mode
1. From the items indicated on the screen, select the item you want to test; then, press the key on keypad that
corresponds to the DTMF signal to test.
CAUTION:
'SHORT' is not currently supported.
● V.34 G3 Signal Transmission Test (V34G3Tx)

Select the transmission speed you want to test, and then select a modulation speed (baud rate); in response, the V.34 G3
transmission signal will be transmitted to the telephone line terminal and the speaker. To stop the operation and to end test mode,
press the key.
1005
8. Service Mode
<MODEM> <V34G3TX> <1/1> <READY>
SPEED 33600bps
3429baud
3200baud
3000baud
2800baud
2743baud
2400baud
OK
Using Text Mode
1. Select 'SPEED', and then select the speed you want to test using the Up/Down key.
2. Select the baud rate you want to test.
■ Function Test
● 4800-bps Signal Transmission Test
The DC circuit will be closed, and a 4800-bps signal will be transmitted using the 4800-bps signal transmission function of the
modem. You can also monitor the transmission signal by listening to the speaker. To stop the operation and end test mode, press
the key.
<FACULTY> <G34800TX> <1/1> <READY>
G34800TX
OK
Service Report (REPORT)

■ System Data List
Use it to check the settings associated with the service soft switch and service parameters.
1006
8. Service Mode
2003 09/02 TUE 12:00 FAX 001
******************************
*** SYSTEM DATA LIST ***
******************************
SERIAL NO XXXXXXXX
#1 SSSW
SW01 ----- 00000000

SW02 ----- 10000000
SW03 ----- 00000000
SW04 ----- 10000000
SW05 ----- 00000000
SW06 ----- 10000000
SW07 ----- 00000000
SW08 ----- 00000000
SW09 ----- 00000000
SW10 ----- 00000000
SW11 ----- 00000000
SW12 ----- 00000011
SW13 ----- 00000000
SW14 ----- 00000000
SW15 ----- 00000000
SW16 ----- 00000000
SW17 ----- 00000000
SW18 ----- 00000000
SW19 ----- 00011000
SW20 ----- 00000000
SW21 ----- 00000000
SW22 ----- 00000000
SW23 ----- 00000000
SW24 ----- 00000000
SW25 ----- 00000000
SW26 ----- 00100000
SW27 ----- 00000000
SW28 ----- 00000000
SW29 ----- 00000000
SW30 ----- 00000000
SW31 ----- 00000000
SW32 ----- 00000000
SW33 ----- 00000000
SW34 ----- 00000000
SW35 ----- 00000000
SW36 ----- 00000000
SW37 ----- 00000000
SW38 ----- 00000000
SW39 ----- 00000000
SW40 ----- 00000000
SW41 ----- 00000000
SW42 ----- 00000000
SW43 ----- 00000000
SW44 ----- 00000000
SW45 ----- 00000000
SW46 ----- 00000000
SW47 ----- 00000000
SW48 ----- 00000000
SW49 ----- 00000000
SW50 ----- 00000000
#2 MENU
01: ----- 0
02: ----- 0
03: ----- 0
04: ----- 0
05: ----- 0
06: ----- 0
07: ----- 10
08: ----- 0
09: ----- 0
10: ----- 2
■ System Dump List
NOTE:
A system dump list is generated when you execute the following in service mode: FAX > Report > DUMP.
Use it to check the history of communications, both successful and error.

2013 04/05 FRI 12:00 FAX 001
*******************************
*** SYSTEM DUMP LIST ***
*******************************
SERIAL NO XXXXXXXX
CLEAR DATE 2013 02/03 FRI 13:37
*1 TX = 1298
*2 A4 = 1302 B4 = 49 A3 = 27 LTR = 0 LGL = 0
*1 RX = 1572
*2 A4 = 1581 B4 = 59 A3 = 59 LTR = 0 LGL = 0
*3 NWSPD = 0
*3 33600 = 1 31200 = 0 28800 = 2986 26400 = 0 24000 = 0
21600 = 0 19200 = 0 16800 = 0 14400 = 0 12000 = 0
9600 = 0 7200 = 0 4800 = 0 2400 = 0
14400 = 83 12000 = 1 TC9600 = 0 TC7200 = 0
14400 = 0 14400 = 0
9600 = 2 7200 = 0 4800 = 4 2400 = 0
*4 STD = 60 FINE = 2839 SUPER = 107 ULTRA = 71
*5 MH = 7 MR = 32 MMR = 9 JBIG = 3029 JPEG = 0
*6 G3 = 37 ECM = 3040 G4 = 0 IPECM = 0 IPG3 = 0
*7 #000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 22 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
#100 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 0
1007
8. Service Mode
*1: RX, total reception number of times; TX, total transmission number of times.
*2: number of pages sent/received according to original size.
*3: number of pages sent/received in connection with different modem speeds (NWSPD : For IPFAX communication count).
*4: number of communication pages by resolution(Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Ultra Fine).
*5: number of pages sent/received in connection with different coding methods.
*6: number of transmissions/receptions according to mode.
*7: number of occurrences according to error code.
Indication sample
#280 1 7 3 0 0
↑ ↑ ↑
number of errors ##280 number of errors ##281 number of errors ##282
It provides error information on the 3 most recent communications.

2003 09/02 TUE 12:00 FAX 001
*1 #1 LATEST #000
*2 START TIME 09/02 10:00

*3 OTHER PARTY 12345678
*4 MAKER CODE
MACHINE CODE
10001000
0100001 00000000
*5 RCV V.8 FRAME E0 81 85 D4 90 7E 00 00 <-Not displayed when IPFAX is enabled
SYMBOL RATE 3429 baud
DATA RATE 28800 bps [V. 34]
TX LVL REDUCTION 0
ERR ABCODE 00
ERR SECTXB 00
ERR SECRXB 00
*6 Rx : ( bit 1 )
( bit 65 )
00000100
00000001
01110111 01011111
00000001 00000100
00100011 00000001
00000000 00000000
10101001
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000001
00000000
( bit 64 )
( bit 128 )
*7 Tx : ( bit 1 )
( bit 65 )
00000000
00000001
01000010 00011111
00000001 00000100
00100001 00000001
00000000 00000000
00000001
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000001
00000000
( bit 64 )
( bit 128 )
*8 Rx : NSF CSI DIS CFR MCF MCF
*8 Tx : NSS TSI DCS PIX-288 PPS-NUL PIX-288 PPS-NUL PIX-288 PPS-NUL
#2 #000
START TIME 09/02 09:30

OTHER PARTY 12345678
MAKER CODE 10001000
MACHINE CODE 0100001 00000000
<-Not displayed when IPFAX is enabled
Rx : ( bit 1 ) 00000100 01110111 01011111 00100011 00000001 10101001 00000001 00000001 ( bit 64 )
( bit 65 ) 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ( bit 128 )
Tx : ( bit 1 ) 00000000 01000010 00011111 00100001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 ( bit 64 )
( bit 65 ) 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ( bit 128 )
Rx : NSF CSI DIS CFR MCF MCF
Tx : NSS TSI DCS PIX-288 PPS-NUL PIX-288 PPS-NUL PIX-288 PPS-NUL
#3 OLDEST #000

MAKER CODE 10001000
MACHINE CODE 0100001 00000000
RCV V.8 FRAME E0 81 85 D4 90 7E 00 00
TX LVL REDUCTION 0
ERR ABCODE 00
ERR SECTXB 00
ERR SECRXB 00
*1: service error code.

*2: START TIME, date and time (in 24-hr notation).
*3: OTHER PARTY, telephone number sent by the other party.
*4: MAKER CODE, manufacturer code.
*5: MACHINE CODE, model code.
*6: bit 1 through bit 128 of DIS, DCS, or DTC that has been received.
*7: bit 1 through bit 128 of DIS, DCS, or DTC that has been transmitted.
*8: RX, procedural signal received; TX, procedural signal transmitted.
■ Error Transmission Report

An error transmission report is an error transmission report together to which a service error code and error dump list is attached.
1008
8. Service Mode
2003 09/02 TUE 12:00 FAX 001
*******************************
*** FAX ERROR TX REPORT ***
*******************************
TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED
JOB NO. 1269

DESTINATION ADDRESS 12345678
PSWD/SUBADDRESS
DESTINATION ID
ST. TIME 09/02 09:00
USAGE T 01 ' 50
PGS. 1
RESULT NG
1 ##750

MAKER CODE 10001000
MACHINE CODE 0100001 00000000
RCV V.8 FRAME E0 81 85 D4 90 7E 00 00
TX LVL REDUCTION 0
ERR ABCODE 92
ERR SECTXB 8A
ERR SECRXB 80
Rx : ( bit 1) 00000100 01110111 01011111 00100011 00000001 10101001 00000001 ( bit 56 )

( bit 57 ) 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 ( bit 96 )
Tx : ( bit 1) 00000000 01000010 00011111 00100001 00000001 00000001 00000001 ( bit 56 )
( bit 57 ) 00000001 00000001 00000100 00000000 00000000 ( bit 96 )
Rx : NSF CSI DIS CFR MCF MCF
Tx : NSS TSI DCS PIX-288 PPS-NUL PIX-288 PPS-NUL PIX-288 PPS-NUL
Rx : MCF MCF MCF
Tx : PIX-288 PPS-NUL PIX-288 PPS-EOP DCN
1009
9 Installation
How to Check this Installation
Procedure.................................... 1012
Checking before Installation............1013
Installation of the Host machine...... 1017
When Relocating the Machine........ 1048
Platen Cover Type W...................... 1050
Inner 2-Way Tray-J1....................... 1054
Copy Tray-J2...................................1058
Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy Card
Reader Attachment Kit-B5...........1061
Stamp Unit-B1.................................1072
Voice Operation Kit-D1................... 1079
IC Card Reader Box-C1/C2............ 1087
Voice Guidance Kit-G1................... 1094
Serial Intreface KIT-K3/ Copy Control
Interface KIT-A1.......................... 1101
Document Scan Lock Kit-B2........... 1107
Utility Tray-B1..................................1111
Removable HDD Kit-AK2................ 1115
2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1.......................1124
Media Adjustment kit-A1................. 1132
Connection Kit-A1/A2 for Bluetooth
LE................................................ 1137
NFC Kit-C1......................................1142
Reader Heater Unit-L2/L3............... 1151
9. Installation
Super G3 FAX Board-AZ1...................................................1173

Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AU1 ................................... 1180
Cassette Heater Unit-41......................................................1192
1011
9. Installation
How to Check this Installation Procedure
Symbols
The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.
Screw
1x 1x 1x 1x
Packaged Item Unused Parts Install Remove Tighten Loosen
Harness
(Common for Guides Connector Power Cord
and Clamps)
1x 1x 1x 1x
Install Remove Connect Disconnect Connect Disconnect
Power
ON OFF Check the sound Check visually Check Push Cleaning
1012
9. Installation
Checking before Installation

The following conditions must be satisfied for the installation.
Therefore, it is better to check the planned installation site before delivering the machine to user site.
Points to Note at Installation
CAUTION:
Points to Note on Installation of the Toner Cartridge
• Do not remove the tapes on the Toner Cartridge. Remove them in “Starting the Setup Guide” on page 1036
• Do not perform installation of the Toner Cartridge until instructed.
CAUTION:
Marked portion
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw
holes.
Checking Power Supply

1. There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for exclusive use by the machine.
2. Be sure to install this machine near an outlet so that the power plug can be disconnected right away in case of
emergency, and do not put anything around the power plug.
Checking the Installation Environment

1. The environment of the installation site must be in the range as shown below. Avoid installation near the faucet, water boiler,
humidifier or refrigerator.
Guaranteed range for operation/image Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20 to 80%
2. The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
3. Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room to keep the work environment comfortable. Room odor can be bothering
when running the machine for a long time in a poorly-ventilated room although the ozone amount generated while running
this equipment does not harm human health.
1013
9. Installation
Points to Note before Installation

When installing the machine, be sure to note the following points.
1. When the machine is moved from a cold location to a warm location, condensation may occur resulting in water
drops on the metal surfaces. Use of the host machine when there is condensation may result in image failure. After
moving the machine from a cold location to a warm location, leave it unpacked for at least 2 hours or more to let it
warm up to room temperature before installation.
2. The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 81 kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard
to handle a heavy load in each country.
In addition, be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it.
CAUTION:
Be sure to first complete the installation of the host machine only, and then perform checking after power-on.
Points to Note When Moving This Host Machine

• When moving this host machine after having unpacked it, be careful by placing a plate, etc. on areas with steps to prevent
the casters from hitting those steps.
If the casters hit a step, the casters or the base plate may be deformed.
• Keep the fixation members and screws that were removed during unpacking or installation as they may be used to transport
the machine for relocation or repair.
1014
9. Installation
Checking the Installation Space

1. Be sure that the feet of this machine are properly set. In addition, be sure to keep the machine horizontal.
2. Be sure to keep 100 mm or more distance from the wall to make enough room for performing the operation.
• When option is not installed
100 mm
or more
1800 mm or more
500 mm 1200 mm 1100 mm 500 mm

or more or more
500 mm
or more
2100 mm or more
• When the Booklet Finisher-AA1/ Staple Finisher-AA1 is installed
100 mm
or more
1800 mm or more
1200 mm
500 mm 1700 mm 500 mm

or more or more
500 mm
or more
2700 mm or more
3. Install the machine in a well-ventilated location. In a location with a mixture of multiple host machines, be sure to
install the machine where the air exhausted from other machines will not directly enter the machine. Also, do not
install the host machine near an inlet for ventilating the room.
Combination Table of Accessory

• The following table shows the combination of options installed of the host machine. Before installing the following options,
refer to the table to check the combination of options.
• When using options and the Copy Card Reader together, install the Copy Card Reader first.
Copy Control Serial Interface Utility Tray Voice Opera- Voice Guidance Copy Card
Interface Kit Kit tion Kit Kit Reader
Copy Card Read- No No Yes Yes Yes -
er
Voice Guidance Yes Yes No No - Yes
Kit
Voice Operation Yes Yes No - No Yes
Kit
Utility Tray Yes Yes - No No Yes
1015
9. Installation
Copy Control Serial Interface Utility Tray Voice Opera- Voice Guidance Copy Card
Interface Kit Kit tion Kit Kit Reader
Serial Interface No - Yes Yes Yes No
Kit
Copy Control In- - No Yes Yes Yes No
terface Kit
Yes: Installable No: Not installable
Host Machine Installation Procedure
1. Checking before Installation
2. Installation of the Host machine
3. [Preparation] In the case of simultaneously installing the Cassette Feeding Unit
4. Installing the Scanner
5. Setting the Cassette
6. Installing the DADF (Model without DADF)
7. Installing IC Card Reader (EUR Only)
8. Setting the Dehumidification Switch (Excluding USA and Europe)
9. Turning ON the Power
10. Starting the Setup Guide
NOTE:
For installation of the Toner Cartridge, see“ Points to Note at Installation of the Toner Cartridge ” on page 1036
11. Registration of Installation Date Information
12. Adjusting the DADF (Model without DADF)
13. Other Installations
14. Securing the Host Machine
15. Installing the Envelope Attachment
16. Checking the Network Connection
17. Network Troubleshooting
18. Operation when using uniFLOW Online
1016
9. Installation
Installation of the Host

1. Unpack the host machine.
machine
NOTE:
Installation Space
NOTE: • When unpacking in the room, the following space is
Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation may required to remove the packaging box.
differ from the actual things, the procedure is the same. • The dimensions shown in the figure below are the
minimum space required. Thus it is desirable to
secure more space for the work than shown in the
figure below.
Unpacking
Configura- Height of Height neces-
tion of the body sary for work
■ Host machine
host machine *1 *2
Reader 1050mm or 2100mm or
NOTE: more more
When installing the Cassette Pedestal at the same time,
Reader + 1143mm or 2286mm or
be sure to make the Cassette Pedestal ready before
DADF (The Re- more more
mounting the host machine onto it.
versal DADF)
Reader + 1165mm or 2330mm or
DADF (The Sin- more more
NOTE: gle Pass
When installing the host machine and the options at the DADF)
same time, install by following the procedure below for
better workability.
1. Installing the Cassette Feeding Unit
2. Installing the host machine
3. Installing the DADF (if it is an option) (Refer to
Installation Procedure for the DADF.)
*1
*2
*1
849 mm 699 mm
1017
9. Installation
2. 4. Remove the tapes from the exterior of the host

machine.
CAUTION:
• Be sure not to remove the Scanner System
Fixation Screw before "Installing the Scanner"
(See: “Installing the Scanner” on page 1028 ).
3. Holding the 4 handles, lift the host machine down

from the pallet.
CAUTION:
• The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 81
• If tapes are affixed on the Full Sensor, remove
kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with
them in the subsequent work "Other Installations"
the standard to handle a heavy load in each
(See: “ Other Installations ” on page 1040 ).
country.
• Be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting
it.
Grip
Grip
1018
9. Installation
5. Remove the cushioning material from the

copyboard section.
<Model without DADF>
<Model with DADF>
1019
9. Installation
Checking the Contents [1] [2]
CAUTION: 1x
4x
The following parts contained in the package cannot be
used in combination with these options.
[3] [4]
[4] Reverse Trailing Edge Guide [5]
• Inner 2way Tray
• Inner Finisher
• Staple Finisher 1x 1x 1x
• Booklet Finisher
[6] Tray Guide [6] [7] [8] [9]
• Inner Finisher
• Staple Finisher
• Booklet Finishe
1x 1x 1x
1x
[10]
CA / CSPL /
CHK Only USA Only EUR Only
1x 1x 1x
[11] [12]
2x 120V
1x
[13]
230V 230V
Australia Only
1x
1x
[14] [15]
EUR Only USA / LTN Only
1x
2x
1x USA: 3 Stickers
LTN: 5 Stickers
[16] [17]
USA / LTN / EUR Only USA / LTN / EUR / CSPL
/ CHK / CA / CIPL Only
1x
USA / LTN: 3 Stickers
EUR: 4 Stickers 1x
• [13]: The connector has a different shape depending on

locations. Use the 1 correct power cable to match the
location / area of installation.
<Others>
• Including guides
1020
9. Installation
Installation Procedure ● Unpacking
NOTE:
Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation may
differ from the actual things, the procedure is the same.
1.
CAUTION:
• Hold the left and right of the Cassette Feeding Unit
■ [Preparation] In the case of when lifting it down.
simultaneously installing the • Do not hold the front and rear because the
cassette may be damaged.
Cassette Feeding Unit
CAUTION:
The following procedure is for installing the host
machine and the Cassette Feeding Unit at the same
time.
• When installing them at the same time, be sure to
make the Cassette Feeding Unit ready before
mounting the host machine onto it.
• If the Cassette Feeding Unit is not installed at the
same time, carry out the work from "“Installing the
Scanner” on page 1028" Installing the Toner
Cartridge in this manual.
● Installation Outline Drawing

<Host Machine + Cassette Feeding Unit>
1021
9. Installation
NOTE:
Remove all the attached tapes and packaging materials.
2.
NOTE:
Take out the contents.
NOTE:
Perform steps 3 to 5 in each cassette.
1022
9. Installation
3. 4.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Do not operate the Trail Edge Guide Plate/Side Guide Remove all tapes and the Fixation Members attached to
Plate without pulling out the cassette. Otherwise, it may the cassette 3 and the Cassette 4.
be damaged.
Trail Edge Guide Plate Side Guide Plate
NOTE:
Remove tapes attached to the cassette, and remove the
packaging materials.
5.
1023
9. Installation
● Installing the Cassette Feeding Unit
6.
1.
CAUTION:
If mounting the host machine without opening the Right
Cover (Lower) , the cover may get damage.
● Checking the Contents (Cassette

Feeding Unit)
1x
3x 1x 2x
1024
9. Installation
2.
NOTE:
Holding the 4 handles, set it on to the pedestal by aligning
the corners (right and left) at the front side of the host
machine with the corners (right and left) of the front side
of the equipment.
CAUTION:
Do not mount the host machine with the cables inside
the cover.
Positioning Pin
3.
CAUTION:
• When mounting the host machine on the Cassette
Feeding Unit, position the host machine parallel
with the Cassette Feeding Unit and fit the 2
Positioning Pins on top of the Cassette Feeding
Unit into the holes in the Base Plate of the host
machine.
• The maximum weight of the host machine is
approx. 81 kg Be sure to perform the work in
accordance with the standard to handle a heavy
load in each country/region.
• Be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting
it.
1025
9. Installation
4. 5.
2x
2x
6.
NOTE:
Use the cover removed in step 4.
NOTE:
The removed cover will be used in step 6.
1026
9. Installation
7. 9.
NOTE: NOTE:
Use the cover included in the package of the Cassette Securely tighten the coin screws with a stubby screwdriver
Feeding Unit. or a coin.
CAUTION:
• When tightening the coin screws, pay attention to
plates and parts around the screws.
• When tightening a screw on the rear side, be
careful not to drop it.
• Be sure to check that the coin screws have been
tightened securely.
3x
8.
1027
9. Installation
■ Installing the Scanner

10.
NOTE:
Install the Cassette 1 with the rails extended.
1.
NOTE:
Be sure to keep the Scanner System Fixation Screws in a
safe place for moving the machine.
2x
1028
9. Installation
■ Setting the Cassette

3.
1. NOTE:
• Be sure to check with the user before affixing the
NOTE: Paper Size Label and affix it at the recommended
• Holding the Guide Plate Lever, adjust each Guide position.
Plate to the specified size. • Affix the Paper Size Label to each cassette according
• Adjust the position of each Guide Plate according to to the size of paper being set.
the paper size. • Keep the Paper Size Labels as they will be used when
changing the paper size.
• Affix the Paper Size Label which is included in the
package of the 2-cassette Pedestal, to the 2-cassette
Pedestal.
CA / CSPL /
USA Only CHK Only
EUR Only
1x 1x 1x
Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever
Trail Edge
Guide Plate
Side Guide Plate
Side Guide Plate Lever
5.0 mm
2.
■ Installing the DADF (Model without
DADF)
Follow the installation procedure shown below to install it
(refer to the Installation Procedure included in the package
of the option).
• Single Pass DADF-B1
• DADF-AV1
■ Installing IC Card Reader (EUR

Only)
NOTE:
Although pictures or illustrations used for explanationmay
1029
9. Installation
1. 4.
2.
2x
NOTE:
The removed CR BOX Upper Unit will be used in step 14.
3.
1030
9. Installation
5. 6.
1x
NOTE: NOTE:
The removed Base Small Cover will be used in step 13. The removed screw and Base Plate Under Cover will be
used in step 11.
7.
1031
9. Installation
8. 9.
NOTE:
Secure the cables asshown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Makesure to avoid putting too much load on the
connectionport of Wi-Fi cable.
5x 1x
1032
9. Installation
10. 12.
NOTE:
Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the
thickness of the Card Reader.
11.
NOTE:
Use the screw and Base Plate Under Coverremoved in
step 6.
1x
1033
9. Installation
13. 14.
NOTE: NOTE:
Usethe Base Small Cover removed in step 5. Use the CR BOX Upper Unit removed in step 4.
15.
1034
9. Installation
■ Setting the Dehumidification Switch

16. (Excluding USA and Europe)
NOTE:
If the installation environment is a high humidity
environment, be sure to turn ON the Dehumidification
Switch.
1.
17.
2x
■ Turning ON the Power
1. Connect the power plug to the outlet.
2. Remove the Protection Sheet on the Control Panel.
3. Turn ON the main power switch.
18. CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation of the Toner Cartridge
• Be sure not to touch the Toner Cartridge until the
instruction screen appears on the Touch Panel
Display.
• Do not perform installation of the Toner Cartridge
until instructed.
1035
9. Installation
■ Starting the Setup Guide 2.
● Points to Note at Installation of the Toner

Cartridge
CAUTION:
Initialization of toner supply, initialization of the
Developing Unit, initialization of the drum, and color
displacement correction, etc. are automatically
performed while Setup Guide is running. When all of
them have been initialized, "Replace the Toner
Cartridge" is displayed on the Touch Panel Display.
After checking the "Replace the Toner Cartridge"
display, close the screen.
3.
Be sure to follow the procedure to install the Toner
Cartridge.
< Installing the Toner Cartridge (For China, and Korea)

>
1.
4.
Hold the Toner Cartridge (black) as shown in the figure
and shake it approx. 10 times.
CAUTION:
Be sure to shake the Toner Cartridge with its Toner
Outlet (white part) up, or toner may not be properly
supplied.
NOTE:
Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each color.
9 - 10
1036
9. Installation
5. < Installing the Toner Cartridge (Countries other than

China, and Korea) >
NOTE:
Be sure to insert the Toner Cartridge horizontally with your
hand supporting its bottom until approx. half of it is
inserted. 1.
2.
Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each color.
3.
Unpack the Toner Cartridge.
4.
6.
7.
1037
9. Installation
5. 7.
Hold the Toner Cartridge as shown in the figure on the
left and shake it up and down approx. 10 times.
CAUTION:
Be sure to shake the Toner Cartridge with its Toner
Outlet (white part) up, or toner may not be properly
supplied.
8.
9 - 10
6.
NOTE:
Be sure to insert the Toner Cartridge horizontally with your
hand supporting its bottom until approx. half of it is
inserted.
● Host Machine Settings (Starting the

Setup Guide)
The Setup Guide starts when the host machine is turned ON
for the first startup. Follow the instructions displayed on the
Touch Panel Display to configure the settings of the host
machine.
CAUTION:
• Some of the settings can be skipped without
entering the command. To configure skipped
settings, configure the settings one by one after
exiting Setup Guide.
• Setup Guide can be started again from [Settings/
Registration]. ([Settings/Registration] >
[Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Start
Setup Guide])
• If the host machine is turned OFF during the
registration using the Setup Guide, the Setup
Guide is automatically started by turning ON the
host machine.
• Once registration using the Setup Guide is
completed, the Setup Guide is not automatically
started by turning ON the host machine.
1038
9. Installation
CAUTION:
Register the information of paper loaded during 2. <Output Report>
installation of the host machine. Check the following values from the Setting Value List
Be sure to register the correct paper type. Especially in which has been output by < Output Report >, and write
the case of special paper types such as heavy paper, them down in the service label inside the Front Cover.
registering a wrong paper type may result in image • CONT-Y
failure, and when the Fixing Assembly becomes soiled • CONT-M
or paper wraparound occurs, repair by a service • CONT-C
technician becomes necessary. • CONT-K
• D-Y-LVL
• D-M-LVL
NOTE: • D-C-LVL
• Initialization of toner supply, initialization of the • D-K-LVL
Developing Unit, initialization of the drum, and color
displacement correction, etc. are automatically
NOTE:
performed while Setup Guide is running.
Values to be written down
• When all initializations have been completed, Setup
Check the values surrounded by the frame on the first
Guide stops (approx.4 minutes).
sheet of the Setting Value List.
NOTE:
If a message prompting the user to update the version
appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
version of this equipment.
• If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
update the version will appear every time the host
machine is started.
• In the service mode (Level 2) shown below, it is
possible to set not to display the message.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the procedure to perform the work
shown below.
● Informing the System Administrator That
Installation Is Complete
1. <Paper Settings> When the installation is completed, ask the system
1. Select the paper source for which you want to administrator to change the password.
specify the paper type, and press [Set]. Also ask the system administrator to keep the changed
2. Select the paper type, and press [OK]. password in a safeplace to prevent leakage.
3. If [Plain] is selected, the basis weight can be specify
from [Plain Paper Weight Set]. ■ Registration of Installation Date
4. If a button corresponding to the paper that has been
set is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] and Information
make a selection on the detailed settings screen.
CAUTION:
NOTE: Be sure that [Date/Time Settings] is completed. (There
• If the corresponding paper type is not displayed on are items in Setup Guide.)
the simple settings screen, press [Detailed Settings]
and make a selection on the detailed settings screen.
• If the type of loaded paper is not displayed on the
detailed settings screen, you can register it.
1039
9. Installation
■ Other Installations
1. Enter the following service mode, and execute
"Batch Set Installation Date Info".
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INSTDTST
1.
NOTE: NOTE:
• Year, month, day, hour, and minute can be edited • When the 2-cassette Pedestal is installed, be sure to
individually in the following service modes. install the Right Cover (Lower) on the 2-casette
COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-Y Pedestal side.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-M • In the case of not installing the 2-cassette Pedestal,
COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-D install it to the host machine.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-H
COPIER > OPTION > USER > INSTDT-N
• The default value of each service mode is "0".
• When "0" is set for each service mode, "Device
Installation Date" on the counter report will be blank.
2. Exit service mode.
3. Output the counter report, and check that the

installation date information is registered.
• [Counter/Device Information] key > [Print List] >
[Yes]
■ Adjusting the DADF (Model without

DADF)
Follow the installation procedure shown below to adjust it
(refer to the Installation Procedure included in the package
of the option).
• Single Pass DADF-B1
• DADF-AV1
1040
9. Installation
2. 4.
NOTE:
Do not install the Tray Guide in the position as shown in
the figure below when installing the following options: Be
sure to follow the instruction given in each procedure for
the position to install the Tray Guide. If the Tray Guide is
not installed as instructed, malfunction or failure may
occur.
• Inner Finisher
• Staple Finisher
3.
NOTE:
When installing simultaneously with one of the following
options, install the Book Holder to the option.
5.
• Staple Finisher CAUTION:
Do not install the Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box to
the front side as the Motion Sensor is installed. Install
to the left side of the host machine.
1041
9. Installation
3.
NOTE:
• Clean the position where the Glass Cleaning Sheet NOTE:
Storage Box is to be installed with lintfree paper • Do not cover the screw holes.
moistened with alcohol. • Do not cover the area for affixing the Face Seal.
• Be sure to install the Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage
Box to a position after checking with the user where
<In the case of not connecting an option to the left
to install it.
side of the host machine>
1. <In the case of not connecting an option to the left

side of the host machine>
<In the case of connecting an option to the left side

of the host machine> <In the case of connecting an option to the left side
of the host machine>
2.
1042
9. Installation
6. 7.
CAUTION: NOTE:
If the machine comes with a Full Sensor, remove the Do not install it if one of the following options is installed
tape while paying attention not to damage the sensor. at the same time.
• Inner 2way Tray
• Inner Finisher
• Staple Finisher
1043
9. Installation
■ Securing the Host Machine

8.
NOTE:
• Affix the label of the appropriate language as shown
1.
in the figure below. NOTE:
• If a label is already affixed, affix over the existing • Move the main body to the installation position, and
label. secure it in place by turning the 3 adjusters of the
Cassette Pedestal with a screwdriver.
• Be sure to secure it in place to prevent overturning.
• Securing with the adjusters is not an earthquake
countermeasure.
USA / LTN / EUR Only
USA / LTN Only
1x
USA / LTN: 3 Stickers
1x EUR: 4 Stickers
USA: 3 Stickers
LTN: 5 Stickers
USA / LTN / EUR / CSPL / CHK / CA

/ CIPL Only
1x
■ Installing the Envelope Attachment

● Installing the Envelope Attachment A
CAUTION:
The Envelope Attachment is used exclusively with the
Cassette 2.
NOTE:
Install/remove the Envelope Attachment only if requested
by the customer.
Envelope Standards
Type Short side (X)×Long Side

(Y))
Monarch 3 7/8" x 7 1/2"(inch)/ 98.4 mm
x 190.5 mm
No. 10 (COM10) 4 1/8" x 9 1/2"(inch)/ 104.7 mm
x 241.3 mm
DL 4 3/8" x 8 5/8"(inch)/ 110 mm x
220 mm
1044
9. Installation
When the Kit Is Not Used
2. Hold the lever of each Guide Plate, and adjust the
1. plate to the envelope size.
3. Load envelopes used by the user into the Cassette

2.
2. Close the Cassette 2.
When the Kit Is Used
1.
4. Close the Cassette 2.
Settings after Installation
1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >

[Paper Settings] > [Paper Settings] > [Cassette 2] >
[Envelope]
2. Select the type of envelope to be used and then

press [OK] to register it.
Display/Operation Check
1. Check that "Envelope" is selected for Cassette 2 on

the Control Panel's "Select Paper " screen.
2. Check that the envelope is picked up.
1045
9. Installation
■ Checking the Network Connection ● Checking by the Remote Host Address

Using the remote host address to execute Ping can check
● Overview whether connection to the network is enabled or not.
If the user's network environment is TCP/IP, use the Ping Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal connected/
function to check that the network setting is properly running on TCP/IP network environment that connects to this
performed. equipment.
● Checking the Network Connection

1. Inform the system administrator about checking of
CAUTION: the network connection using Ping.
Be sure to use the network cable with Category 5e or
2. Confirm the remote host address with the system
higher. In addition, a sealed type (STP cable) is
administrator.
recommended.
Using the non-shield type can affect the peripheral 3. Enter the remote host address to Ping.
electrical equipment through the network cable. • The network is properly connected if the message
say "Response from the host".
• The network is not properly connected if the
message say "No response from the host",
1. Turn OFF the main power switch. therefore, execute the following troubleshooting.
2. Connect the network cable to the Host Machine and

turn ON the main power switch.
■ Network Troubleshooting
To check whether the network cable is properly connected to
3. Inform the system administrator at the installation
the LAN Port.
site that installation of the Host Machine is complete,
and then, ask for the network setting.
● Operation Procedure Using Ping
NOTE:
Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as
1. Ask the network administrator at the user’s site to
an administrator. Factory default password is as follows.
• System administration division ID: Administrator write down the IP address of the PC that is
• System administration password: 7654321 connected to the network.
2. [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] >

[TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command];
CAUTION: and enter the IP address of the PC with the numeric
To perform the network setting, the following Additional keypad and press Execute key.
Functions items must be set "ON".
• The network is properly connected if the message say
• [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
"Response from the host".
[Network] > [Confirm Network Connection Set.
• If the message say "No response from the host", check
Changes]
the following.
• [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >
[Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] >
● Checking the Network Setting of the
[Use IPv4]
Host Machine

1. Select the following: [Settings/Registration] >
● Operation Procedure Using Ping [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
settings] > [IP Address Setting]; and write down the
address in the IP address field.
[Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP settings] > [IPv4
[Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
settings] > [PING command]
settings] > [PING Command]; and enter the IP
2. Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad on the address.
Control Panel and press "Execute" key. "Response
• The IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct
from the host" is displayed if Ping command is
if the message say "Response from the host".
succeeded while "no response from the host" is
• If the message say "No response from the host", check
displayed if failed.
the following.
1046
9. Installation
NOTE:
When setting the address by manually input, set the
Subnet Mask by following the instruction of the
administrator.
● Checking Network Function on the Main

Controller
Check with the loopback address.

[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] >
[PING command], enter the IP address “127.0.0.1”
with the numeric keypad, and then press "Start" key.
2. When "Response from the host." is displayed,

network function of the Main Controller operates
normally.
• When "No response from the host." is displayed, the

network function of the Main Controller is failed.
• Replace the Main Controller with a properly operating
one, and check the connection.
■ Operation when using uniFLOW

Online
When using uniFLOW Online*, follow the setup procedures
on the uniFLOW* Online First Steps Guide (http://www.nt-
ware.com/uFO_FS).
* China version of "uniFLOW" is called "mdsFLOW".
1047
9. Installation
When Relocating the Machine

5. Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner System
Fixation Screws that have been kept in a safe place
When relocating this machine by truck or by other means for since installation.
some reasons after installing the machine, perform the
following procedure.
CAUTION:
In case of relocating the machine while it is mounted
on the Cassette Pedestal, be sure to check that the
coin screw has been tightened securely before holding
the grips of the machine to lift when, for example,
passing over a difference in level of the floor. Holding
the grips of the machine when lifting will result in
separation of the machine from the Cassette Pedestal.
1. From the following service mode (Level 2), move the

Scanner Unit to the position to secure.
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOS 2x
2. Turn OFF the main power.
3. Disconnect the power plug of the host machine.
4. If the Cassette Pedestal is installed, turn the 3

adjusters of the Cassette Pedestal with a
screwdriver, etc. to lift them from the floor.
6. Put a sheet of paper on the Copyboard Glass.
1048
9. Installation
7. Securely tighten the coin screws of the host 9. Perform the following to check that there is no
machine and the 2-cassette Pedestal. abnormality in images after turning ON the power.
• Copy
CAUTION: • Print
• When tightening the coin screws, pay attention to • Image Position Adjustment
plates and parts around the screws.
tightened securely.
3x
8. Perform the following work before turning ON the

power.
• Remove the paper on the Copyboard Glass.
• Remove the Scanner System Fixation Screws.
CAUTION:
It is recommended to keep the Scanner System
Fixation Screws in a safe place for moving the
machine.
•
• If the Cassette Pedestal is installed, turn the 3
adjusters of the Cassette Pedestal to fix it in place.
• If the Cassette Pedestal is installed, securely
tighten the coin screws of the host machine and the
2-cassette Pedestal.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage nearby plates and parts
when tightening the coin screws.
tightened securely when moving the machine.
1049
9. Installation
Platen Cover Type W Essential Items to Be

Performed Before Installation
Points to Note at Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
CAUTION:
Marked portion WARNING:
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too • If performing work without disconnecting the
tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and power plug of the host machine, it may cause
deformation of screw holes. electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without
turning OFF the main power, it may cause
damage of the machine.
• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below

procedure.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host
machine.
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
NOTE: main power are turned off.
Points to Note when turning
ON/OFF the main power
Checking the Contents
The following message is displayed.
1. When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON
the main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main
power switch.
2. If a message prompting the user to update the version
1x If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
machine is started. In the service mode ( Lv.2 ) shown
below, it is possible to set not to display the message.
1x
M4x8
6x 2x
Installation Outline Drawing
1x
1050
9. Installation
Installation Procedure
■ Installing the Equipment
3.
1.
2.
1051
9. Installation
4. 6.
CAUTION:
• Be sure that there is no gap (0.3 mm or less as a
guide) between the White Plate and the Index
Sheet.
• Check that the White Plate is not placed over the
Index Sheet.
Platen Cover
White Plate Index Sheet

Reader Unit
Platen Cover

Reader Unit
5.
CAUTION:
If the White Plate is pressed from top to bottom, it is
placed over the Index Sheet, so be sure to press it from
bottom to top.
Platen Cover

Reader Unit
Platen Cover

Reader Unit
7.
Connect the power plug to the outlet.
1052
9. Installation
8.
Turn ON the main power switch.
1053
9. Installation

Inner 2-Way Tray-J1 appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
Points to Note at Installation update the version will appear every time the host
NOTE: COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
Be sure to install this equipment after installing the 3 Way
Unit.
CAUTION:
Marked portion
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too
tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and
deformation of screw holes.
Essential Items to Be
Performed Before Installation Checking the Contents
• Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
WARNING:
1x
• If performing work without disconnecting the
power plug of the host machine, it may cause
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without TP; M3x6
turning OFF the main power, it may cause 1x 1x

procedure.
machine.
main power are turned off.

power switch.
1054
9. Installation
Installation procedure
2.
1.
TP; M3x6
NOTE:
If the Reverse Guide is installed to the host machine,
remove it.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the Full Detection Flag when
installing it.
1x
1055
9. Installation
3. 4.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the Inner 2-way Tray Support Member is
installed properly.
1056
9. Installation
5. 1. Set the value of the following service mode to "1".

COPIER > OPTION > ACC > IN-TRAY
CAUTION: 2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Be sure that the Support Member does not come off
when the Inner 2-way Tray is lifted up. 3. Check that the following menu has been added.
• [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] >
[Common] > [Paper Output Settings] > [Tray
Designation]
4. Press [Tray Designation].
5. According to the user's request, set the function of

delivering paper to the Tray A/B/C and the priority order
of the trays, and press [OK]. The priority order is
displayed as "1", "2", and "3".
6. Check that the behavior is in accordance with the

settings.
7. Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine.
Checking after Installation
NOTE:
The setting of "ON/OFF of Use Optional Output Tray" can
be made only when logged in as an administrator.
When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, it is
required to log in as a system manager in accordance with
instructions of the user administrator.
Password at the time of shipment
• System Manager ID: Administrator
• System PIN: 7654321
1057
9. Installation

Copy Tray-J2 appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
Be sure to install this equipment after installing the 3 Way
Unit.
CAUTION:
Marked portion
WARNING:
electrical shock. 1x

procedure.
machine.

power switch.
1058
9. Installation
2.
1. CAUTION:
Because the Copy Tray comes in contact with the rib if
installed while laid flat, be sure to install it while keeping
NOTE: it upright.
The work is the same when the Utility Tray is installed.
Rib
Rib
< When the Utility Tray is not installed >
1059
9. Installation
< When the Utility Tray is installed > 6. Check that the behavior is in accordance with the
settings.
4. Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine.
NOTE:
The setting of "ON/OFF of Use Optional Output Tray" can
be made only when logged in as an administrator.
When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, it is
Password at the time of shipment
• System Manager ID: Administrator
1. Set the value of the following service mode to "1".

COPIER > OPTION > ACC > OUT-TRAY
3. Check that the following menu has been added.

• [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings]
>[Common] > [Paper Output Settings] > [Tray
Designation]
4. Press [Tray Designation].
5. According to the user's request, set the function of

delivering paper to the Tray A/B/C and the priority
order of the trays, and press [OK]. The priority order
is displayed as "1", "2", and "3".
1060
9. Installation
Copy Card Reader-F1/Copy Essential Items to Be

Card Reader Attachment Kit- Performed Before Installation
B5 • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
Points to Note at Installation WARNING:

• To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader
Attachment Kit is required.
electrical shock.
• Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing
this equipment before operation.
• To install the Copy Card Reader, the Copy Card Reader
Attachment Kit is required.

Table of Options Combination
procedure.
Utility Voice Voice Serial Copy 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host
Tray Opera- Guid- Inter- Control machine.
tion Kit ance Kit face Kit Inter- 2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the
face Kit main power are turned off.
Copy Yes Yes Yes No No
Card
Reader Points to Note when turning
Yes: Available The following message is displayed.
No: Unavailable 1. When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON
CAUTION: power switch.
Marked portion 2. If a message prompting the user to update the version
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and version of this equipment.
deformation of screw holes. If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
1061
9. Installation
Checking the Contents ■ Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5
■ Copy Card Reader-F1
1x 1x
RS Tightening 1x
M4x10
1x
1x
1x 1x
1x 2x
TP; TP;
M3x6 M3x12
4x 2x
1x 1x
TP;
M3x6
1x
1x
1x
W Sams;
M3x14
1x 2x
1x
TP; Binding;
M4x12 M4x6
2x 4x
CAUTION:
After installing the Copy Card Reader, enter the card
number to be used in the following service mode:
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD.
Otherwise, the card will not be recognized even if
inserting it.
1062
9. Installation
■ Removing the Covers ■ Installing the Copy Card Reader
1. 1.
NOTE:
2x • Remove the Face Plate while holding it.
• Be careful not to drop the Face Plate.
2x
2.
1x
NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 5.
1063
9. Installation
2. 4.
1x
2x 1x
1x
3.
NOTE:
1x 2x
1064
9. Installation
NOTE:
5. Use the screws removed in step 1 and step 4.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to let the Relay Cable come in 2x 1x
contact with the metal part on the Controller Box.
• It may cause malfunctioning if the cable touch the
metal part of the Box.
1x
1065
9. Installation
6. 7.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to trap the cable when mounting the
cover.
1x
2x
1066
9. Installation
8. 10.
NOTE:
Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and
change the position of the cable.
1x 1x
Lower Cover
1x
1x
11.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the core is inside the Edge Saddle.
9.
1x 1x
1x
1067
9. Installation
12. 14.
CAUTION:
1x Prevention of a fall
Be sure to hold the Card Reader Mounting Plate (Front)
Unit with your hand until securing it with screws.
TP
M3x6
4x
13.
TP
M3x12
2x
1068
9. Installation
15. 16.
Install the Cord Guides
CAUTION:
Installing the Connector Cover
Be sure to insert the Harness Band inside the CAUTION:
Connector Cover. • Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord
Guide.
• Do not affix a Cord Guide on the Reader Cable
Cover.
1. Remove the covers of the 2 Cord Guides, and affix

the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the
figure.
2. Fold the Card Reader External Relay Cable at the
[A] part, and insert it through the 2 Cord Guides.
3. Install the 2 covers of the Cord Guides.
Reader
2x [A] Cable Cover
1x
1x Exhaust Outlet
17.
1x
18.
Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine.
■ Routing the Cable (when installing

this equipment and other options
simultaneously)
• Routing the cable when installing the Copy Card Reader
and other options simultaneously is described below.
• Combinations are shown in the following table.
Voice Operation Voice Guidance

Kit Kit
Card Reader TYPE-1 TYPE-2
1069
9. Installation
● For TYPE-1 (When installing the Copy

Card Reader and the Voice Operation Kit 2. Securing the Cable of the Voice Guidance
at the same time.) 1. Remove the covers of the 4 Cord Guides, and affix
figure.
1. Securing the Copy Card Reader Cable 2. Fold the Speaker Cable at the [B] part, and insert
the Speaker Cable through the 4 Cord Guides.
3. Install the 4 Cord Guide Covers.
figure. (Use the Cord Guides included with the
Copy Card Reader.) CAUTION:
2. Fold the cable of the Copy Card Reader at the [A] • Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord
part, and insert only the cable of the Copy Card Guide.
Reader through the 2 Cord Guides. • Do not affix a Cord Guide on the Reader Cable
3. Install the 2 Cord Guide Covers. Cover.
2. Securing the Cable of the Voice Operation Kit Reader

6x [A] Cable Cover
figure.
2. Insert the DVI Cable through the 7 Cord Guides,
and install the 7 Cord Guide Covers.
CAUTION:
[B]
• Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord Exhaust
Guide. Outlet
Cover.
Reader
9x [A] Cable Cover
1. In service mode (Level 2), set the number of cards (the

number of departments) (1 to 1000) that can be used for
the Card Reader to any value.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CARD-RNG
Exhaust
Outlet
2. Enter the card number which is the smallest of the card
numbers to be used (1 to 2001) in service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
Starting from the entered card number, the number of
● For TYPE-2 (When installing the Copy cards set in step 1 can be used.
Card Reader and the Voice Guidance Kit at
the same time.)
3. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable
the setting value.
1. Securing the Cable of the Copy Card Reader
figure. (Use the Cord Guides included with the
Copy Card Reader.)
2. Fold the cable of the Copy Card Reader at the [A]
part, and insert the cable of the Copy Card Reader
through the 2 Cord Guides.
1070
9. Installation
4. Insert a card with a card number that has been

registered, and check that the machine operates
properly.
NOTE:
Perform the following operations to change the number of
cards (the number of departments) after it has been set.
In that case, counter information for each department is
reset.
• Perform the following Service Mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD
• Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to
enable the settings.
• After that, perform the setup procedure again from
step 1.
1071
9. Installation
Stamp Unit-B1 Installation Outline Drawing
CAUTION:
Marked portion
Essential Items to Be Checking the Contents

Performed Before Installation 1

1x 1x
WARNING:
P Tightening
• If performing work without disconnecting the M3x12
electrical shock. 1x
1x
Binding
M3x6
• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below 1x
procedure.
*1: Used only for 1-path DADF.
machine.
main power are turned off. < Others >
Including guides

• Although pictures or illustrations used for
The following message is displayed. explanationmay differ from the actual things, the
1. When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON procedure is the same.
power switch.
2. If a message prompting the user to update the version NOTE:
Proceed to the appropriate procedure from this point on.
• In the case of 1-path ADF “ In the case of the Single
Pass DADF” on page 1073
• In the case of Reverse ADF “ In the case of the
update the version will appear every time the host Reversal DADF ” on page 1076
1072
9. Installation
■ In the case of the Single Pass DADF

3.
1.
1x
CAUTION:
Be sure to place paper in order to prevent the
Copyboard Glass from being damaged when the cover
of the document reading area is opened.
2. NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in step 6. The removed
parts will be used in step 7.
4.
1x
1073
9. Installation
5. 7.
NOTE:
1x • Use the parts removed in step 3.
• Be sure to use the screw included in the package.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to trap the cables.
6.
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in step 3.
CAUTION:
Be sure to store the harness in the guide so as not to
trap the harness in the next step. P Tightening;
M3x12
2x 1x
1x
8.
1074
9. Installation
9. 12.
CAUTION:
Be sure to push in the Stamp Ink Cartridge until it clicks.
13.
14.
10. CAUTION:
After completion of this procedure, proceed
to“Operation Check ” on page 1078
11.
1075
9. Installation
■ In the case of the Reversal DADF

3.
1.
NOTE:
The removed part will be used in step 8.
2.
1076
9. Installation
4. 6.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the Feed Guide
with a screwdriver when removing the screw.
1x
P Tightening;
M3x12
[A]
1x
1x
NOTE:
The removed parts will be used in step 7.
5.
CAUTION:
Be sure to push in the Stamp Ink Cartridge until it clicks.
7.
NOTE:
Use the parts removed in step 4.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the Feed Guide
with a screwdriver when tightening the screw.
1x
[A]
1077
9. Installation
8. 11.
NOTE: Turn ON the main power switch.
Use the part removed in step 3.
CAUTION:
to“Operation Check ” on page 1078
Operation Check
1. Set the original on the Feeder.
2. Press [Scan and Send] on the Touch Panel Display.
3. Specify the destination and select [Options] > [Finished

Stamp] then press [Close].
4. Press the Start key and check that a stamp is printed on

the original scanned by the Feeder.
9.
10.
1078
9. Installation
Voice Operation Kit-D1 Points to Note when turning

Points to Note at Installation The following message is displayed.
Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing this the main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main
equipment before operation. power switch.
Table of Options Combination appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
Utility Voice Serial Copy Copy If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
Tray Guid- Inter- Control Card update the version will appear every time the host
ance Kit face Kit Inter- Reader machine is started. In the service mode ( Lv.2 ) shown
face Kit below, it is possible to set not to display the message.
Voice No No Yes Yes Yes COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
Opera-
tion Kit
Yes: Available
No: Unavailable
CAUTION:
Marked portion
WARNING:
electrical shock.

procedure.
machine.
1079
9. Installation

2.
1x
1x 1x
*1x 7x
2x
1x
Binding
Binding M4x14
M3x14
3.
1x 1x 1x
NOTE:
1x • Remove the Face Plate while holding it.
1x 3x • Be careful not to drop the Face Plate.
TP Binding Binding
M3x6 M4x14 M4x20
2x 1x 2x 1x
*: Use the Ring Core for the External Switch Cable which
belongs to the user.
<Others>
Including guides
1.
2x
NOTE:
1080
9. Installation
4. 6.
1x
2x
1x
5.
1x
NOTE:
NOTE:
1081
9. Installation
7. 8.
CAUTION:
Check that the connector is connected properly.
NOTE:
Use the screws removed in steps 3, 5, and 6.
1x
2x
1x
9.
1x
2x
1082
9. Installation
10. 12.
2x 2x
NOTE:
13.
Binding Binding
M3x14 M4x14
11.
2x
Binding
; M3x14 Binding
; M4x14
1083
9. Installation
14. 16.
NOTE:
• Use the screws removed in step 12.
• Install the Speaker Unit (Upper) while pressing it from
1x
the direction of the arrow.
2x
2x
15. 1x
2x
1084
9. Installation
17. 18.
CAUTION: NOTE:
• Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord Be sure to install the Ring Core as close to where the cable
Guide. is connected as possible.
Cover.
NOTE:
Putting the user's External Switch Cable around the Ring
Core.
NOTE:
the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure.
2. Insert the DVI Cable through the Cord Guides, and
install the 7 covers of the Cord Guides.
Reader
7x Cable Cover
Exhaust
Outlet
19.
1x
1085
9. Installation
■ Routing the Cable (when installing 3. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences >
Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Use
this equipment and Copy Card Voice Navigation, and check that the setting is ON.
Reader simultaneously) 4. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences >
Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Voice
Navigation at Startup, and check that "Select Mode
1. Securing the Cable of the Copy Card Reader at Startup" is set.
5. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences >
Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings, and check
figure.
that "Tune Microphone" is displayed.
2. Fold the cable of the Copy Card Reader at the [A]
part, and insert the cable of the Copy Card Reader
through the 2 Cord Guides. Operation Check
■ When Starting to Use

2. Securing the Cable of the Voice Operation Kit
1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button
for more than 3 seconds.
figure.
2. Insert only the DVI Cable through the 7 Cord 2. In "Select the Voice Navigation type." on the Control
Guides, and install the 7 Cord Guide Covers. Panel screen, select "Manual + Vocal Mode", "Vocal
Mode" or "Manual Mode", and press OK.
CAUTION: 3. Once the indication on the screen is framed in red,
• Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord the "Voice Operation Kit" becomes enabled.
Guide.
Cover. NOTE:
When "Manual Mode" is selected in "Select the Voice
Navigation type.", nothing happens by pressing the Voice
Recognition button.
Reader
9x [A] Cable Cover
■ When Stopping to Use
1. Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button

for more than 3 seconds.
Exhaust
Outlet
NOTE:
When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is
instructions from the user administrator.
1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the

outlet.
1086
9. Installation

IC Card Reader Box-C1/C2 appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
Points to Note when Installing update the version will appear every time the host
• When installing this equipment, the Card Reader
(sales company's option) is required.
• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation
may differ from the actual things, the procedure is the
same.
CAUTION:
Marked portion
WARNING:
electrical shock.

procedure.
machine.

power switch.
1087
9. Installation
IC Card Reader Box-C2

IC Card Reader Box-C1
1x 1x
1x 1x
2x
1x
without LED indication
2x
1x
without LED indication
1x 1x
1x
1x
11x
1x
1x 11x
with LED indication with LED indication
with LED indication with LED indication
1x 1x
1x 1x
1x 1x
1x
1088
9. Installation
4.
1.
2. 6x
2x
5.
3.
2x
4x
1089
9. Installation
6. 9.
NOTE:
Secure the cables as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
When the Expansion Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE is
connected, make sure to avoid putting too much load
on the connection port of Wi-Fi cable.
7.
NOTE:
Do not close the Wire Saddle.
1x
5x 1x
8.
1090
9. Installation
10. 12.
NOTE:
Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to the
thickness of the Card Reader.
11.
1x
1091
9. Installation
13. 14.
15.
1092
9. Installation
16.
17.
2x
18.
19.
1093
9. Installation
Voice Guidance Kit-G1 Points to Note when turning

Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing this the main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main
equipment before operation. power switch.
Points to Note at Installation appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
Utility Voice Serial Copy Copy If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
Tray Opera- Inter- Control Card update the version will appear every time the host
tion Kit face Kit Inter- Reader machine is started. In the service mode ( Lv.2 ) shown
face Kit below, it is possible to set not to display the message.
Voice No No Yes Yes Yes COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
Guid-
ance Kit
Yes: Available
No: Unavailable
CAUTION:
Marked portion
WARNING:
electrical shock.

procedure.
machine.
1094
9. Installation
Checking the Contents 2

1x
1x 1x
1x 4x
Binding; Binding;
M3x16 M4x6
1x 1x 1x
Binding;
M4x16
1x 1x 2x
Binding;
M4x20
TP; 3
M3x6
2x 4x 3x
NOTE:
• Remove the Face Plate while holding it.
Binding; • Be careful not to drop the Face Plate.
M4x16
1x
1x 1x
1x
<Others>
Including guides
1
2x
NOTE:
1095
9. Installation
4 6
1x
2x
1x
1x
NOTE:
NOTE:
1096
9. Installation
7 8
CAUTION:
Check that the connector is connected properly.
NOTE:
Use the screws removed in step 3, step 5 and step 6.
1x
2x
1x
9
1x
2x
1097
9. Installation
10 12
Binding Binding
M3x16 M4x16
2x
2x
Binding
; M3x16 Binding
; M4x16
13
NOTE:
Install the Speaker Unit (Upper) while pressing it from the
direction of the arrow.
11 Binding
M4x6
1x
1098
9. Installation
14 16
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Be sure to attach the Ring Cores within 50 mm from the • Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord
end of the Speaker Cable. Guide.
Cover.
NOTE:
the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure.
2. Fold the Speaker Cable at the [A] part, insert it
through the 4 Cord Guides, and install the 4 Cord
50mm Guide Covers.
Reader
4x Cable Cover
[A]
Exhaust
Outlet
■ Routing the Cable (when installing

15 this equipment and other options
simultaneously)
2x ● For Copy Card Reader and Voice
Guidance
1. Securing the Cable of the Copy Card Reader

figure.(Use the Cord Guides included with the Copy
Card Reader.)
2. Fold the Card Reader External Relay Cable at the
[A] part, insert it through the 2 Cord Guides, and
install the 2 Cord Guide Covers.
1099
9. Installation
Operation Check
2. Securing the Cable of the Voice Guidance
1. Remove the covers of the 4 Cord Guides, and affix ■ When Using
figure.
2. Fold the Speaker Cable at the [B] part, insert it
through the 4 Cord Guides, and install the 4 Cord 1. Press “Reset” key for more than 3 seconds.
Guide Covers. 2. Once the indication on the screen is framed in red,
the "Voice Guidance Kit" becomes enabled.
CAUTION:
• Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord ■ When Stopping to Use
Guide.
Cover.
1. Press “Reset” key for more than 3 seconds.
Reader
6x [A] Cable Cover
[B]
Exhaust
Outlet
Checking the Settings
NOTE:
When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is
instructions from the user administrator.

outlet.

Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Use
Voice Navigation, and check that the setting is ON.

Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Voice
Guide from Speakers, and check that the setting is
ON.
1100
9. Installation
Serial Intreface KIT-K3/ Copy Essential Items to Be

Control Interface KIT-A1 Performed Before Installation
Points to Note at Installation disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
• Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing WARNING:

this equipment before operation.’ • If performing work without disconnecting the
Table of Options Combination electrical shock.
Utility Voice Voice Serial Copy Copy turning OFF the main power, it may cause
Tray Opera- Opera- Inter- Con- Card damage of the machine.
tion tion face trol In- Read-
Kit Kit Kit terface er
Kit
procedure.
Serial yes yes yes - no no 1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host
Inter-
machine.
face Kit
Copy yes yes yes no - no main power are turned off.
Control
Inter-
face Kit
yes: Available no: Unavailable
CAUTION:
Marked portion
power switch.
1101
9. Installation
Checking the Contents Installation Procedure

■ Serial Intreface KIT-K3 ■ Removing the Covers
1.
2x
1x 1x
1x 2x 2x
1x 1x
2.
1x
1x 1x
TP; M3 x 6
3x
■ Copy Control Interface KIT-A1
1x 1x
2x 2x 2x
1x 2x
1102
9. Installation
■ Installing the Serial Interface Kit

3.
1.
NOTE:
• Remove the Face Plate while holding it.
1x
2x
1x
2.
NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in a later step.
1x
1103
9. Installation
■ Copy Control Interface KIT-A1

4.
NOTE:
• Use the screw removed in the previous step.
1.
• Connect the connector to J20 (11-pin), and install the NOTE:
Serial RS Conversion Board. • Remove the Face Plate while holding it.
2x
2x 1x
2.
1x
CAUTION:
Install the extruded side of the D-SUB Support Plate as
shown in the figure.
Inside
D-SUB
Support Plate
CC-VI Cable
1104
9. Installation
3.
CAUTION:
Install the CC-VI Cable in the direction shown in the
figure. 2x
1x
■ Installing the Covers
1.
1x
1105
9. Installation
2.
2x
4. Turn ON the power switch.
1106
9. Installation
Document Scan Lock Kit-B2 Points to Note when turning

Points to Note at Installation 1. When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON
• To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board", power switch.
it is necessary to install the license which comes with the 2. If a message prompting the user to update the version
product. appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
• Be sure to ask users to install the license after the version of this equipment.
installation. If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the license after installing the Image
Data Analyzer Board because installing the license
before installing the Image Data Analyzer Board
causes an error.
CAUTION:
Marked portion
WARNING:
• If performing work without disconnecting the 2x
electrical shock.
1x
damage of the machine. 1x
2x

procedure. TP; M3x6
1. Turn OFF the main power switch of the host 2x 1x
machine. Binding
2. The display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the ; M3x4
main power are turned off. 1x
1x
TP; M3x6 2x
2x
1107
9. Installation
3.
1. CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the screws.
2x
2x
2. NOTE:
The removed screws will be used in step 7.
1x
4.
2x
1108
9. Installation
5. 7.
NOTE:
Use the screws removed in step 3.
2x
2x
6. 8.
NOTE:
Peel off the release paper, align the edge of the label to
[A] and [B], then affix the label.
TP; M3x6
1x
2x
[A]
[B]
1109
9. Installation
4. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
9. 5. Press [Counter/Device Information] > [Device Info. /

Other] > [Check Device Configuration] key on the
control panel.
1x 6. Check that “Image Data Analyzer Board” is
displayed in option field.
10.
2x

power outlet.
3. Ask users to install license.
1110
9. Installation
Utility Tray-B1 Checking the Contents

• When using this equipment together with the Copy Tray,
1x
install this equipment first. The parts
• Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing using to install
this equipment before operation. the keyboard
Table of Options Combination
Voice Voice Copy Serial Copy TP; M4x8 Black

5x 7x
Opera- Guid- Control Inter- Control
tion Kit ance Ki Inter- face Kit Inter-
face Kit face Kit
Utility No No Yes Yes Yes
Tray TP; M4x14 TP; M4x10
1x 4x 2x
Yes: Available
No: Unavailable TP; M4x8 Black
3x
CAUTION:
Marked portion
When tightening the screws, do not tighten them too Installation Procedure
NOTE:
Remove the packing tapes from this equipment.
1.
2x
1111
9. Installation
2. 3.
CAUTION:
To avoid damage, do not pull the Utility Tray too much.
4.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install it by using the holes with the marks
D, G, J, M and P.
AB C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R S
D G J M P
TP; M4x8 Black
5x
AB C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R S
D G J M P
1112
9. Installation
5. 6.
CAUTION:
To avoid damage, do not pull the Utility Tray too much.
TP; M4x8 Black
2x
2x
1113
9. Installation
When Installing the USB

Keyboard
1.
1114
9. Installation

Removable HDD Kit-AK2 the main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main
power switch.
CAUTION: update the version will appear every time the host
• Do not use the following combination. machine is started. In the service mode ( Lv.2 ) shown
Removable HDD Kit + 2.5inch/1TB HDD below, it is possible to set not to display the message.
• When handling the HDD, be careful not to vibrate
or drop it.
• Be sure to prepare a USB memory for upgrading
created with SST.
CAUTION:
Marked portion
Essential Items to Be Checking the Contents

WARNING:
power plug of the host machine, it may cause 1x 1x
electrical shock.

procedure. 1x 1x
machine.
Points to Note when turning 2x
1x
1x
1115
9. Installation
■ Removing the Covers
3.
1.
2x
2x
2.
1x
1116
9. Installation
■ Installing the Removable HDD Kit

2.
1.
4x
3x
1117
9. Installation
3. 4.
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold the HDD so as not to drop it when
removing the screw.
1x 4x
1x
NOTE:
5.
1x
NOTE:
1118
9. Installation
6. 8.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the HDD.
• Place the HDD with the label side facing up and
the connector oriented as shown in the figure.
7. NOTE:
4x
1119
9. Installation
9. 10.
NOTE: CAUTION:
• Affix the HDD Warning Label in the appropriate • Set the HDD Toggle Lever in the correct position
language, aligning the label with the Rib. as shown in the figure, and check that the HDD
• Write down the serial number of the host machine to Case can be inserted all the way and installed
the R-HDD Label, and affix it to the space on the top
properly.
of the HDD.
• Unless the HDD Toggle Lever is in the correct
position, the HDD Case cannot be installed.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to affix the HDD Warning Label (1) in the
direction as shown in the figure.
• Be sure to write down the serial number on the
RHDD Label (2) in order to show from which
machine it was removed and prevent it from being
installed to another machine.
• Be sure to affix the R-HDD Label (2) on a flat
surface.
Serial No. XXXXXXXX
Rib
1120
9. Installation
11. 13.
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in step 3.
1x
12.
1x
1121
9. Installation
14. 2.
2x
4x
3x
3.
1x
1.
1122
9. Installation
4.
2x
■ Checking after Installation
3. From the following service mode, check that the HDD is

recognized. Additionally, check that the manufacture
name and model number of HDD are displayed.
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > HDD
■ Installing the Removable HDD
1.
NOTE:
Install the HDD Unit to the HDD Slot.
CAUTION:
Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable
HDD to discourage theft.
1123
9. Installation
2.5inch/1TB HDD-P1 Points to Note when turning

CAUTION:
power switch.
• Do not use the following combination.
2.5inch/1TB HDD + Removable HDD Kit
• When handling the HDD, be careful not to vibrate
or drop it.
• If the HDD is replaced with a high-capacity HDD,
the HDD needs to be initialized.
• When replacing a HDD that contains user
information with a high-capacity HDD (which is not
an initial installation), backup and export of HDD
data are necessary. For details, refer to " Backup
Data " in the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Marked portion
tightly. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage and 1x
1x 1x 1x
Sems; M3x4 P Tightening; M3x8

4x 2x
WARNING:
electrical shock.

procedure.
machine.
1124
9. Installation
3.
1.
2x
2x
2.
1x
1125
9. Installation
■ Installing the 2.5inch/1TB HDD

2.
1.
1x
4x
3x
NOTE:
1126
9. Installation
3. 5.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Be sure to hold the HDD so as not to drop it when Use the Cable Unit removed in the previous step.
removing the screw.
4x
1x
1x
NOTE:
4.
1x
NOTE:
The removed Cable Unit will be used in a later step.
1127
9. Installation
6. 7.
CAUTION: NOTE:
• Be sure to hold the HDD so as not to drop it when Use the screws removed in step 2.
removing the screw.
• Be sure that the label on the HDD is in the direction
shown in the figure below.
NOTE:
4x
1x
1x
1128
9. Installation

8.
1.
2x
4x
3x
2.
1x
1129
9. Installation
6. Click [OK].
3. 4. Initializing HDD
< In case of SST >
1. Start the host machine with download mode in safe
mode.
2. Start the SST.
3. Select the model. Then, select [Single] and click
[Start].
4. Click [Format HDD].
5. Select [All], and click [Start].
6. Click [Execute Format].
7. The Format is executed.
2x
8. Click [OK].
9. After formatting is completed, select [Shutdown/
Restart], and click [Restart].
10. Click [OK]
11. The power of the host machine is turned OFF.
12. Terminate the SST.
13. Disconnect the Cross Ethernet Cable from the
machine, and connect the user's network cable to
the machine.
<In case of USB flash drive>
NOTE:
Use the USB device registered with the system software
for this machine by using SST.
1. Connect the USB memory device to the host

machine, and start the host machine with download
mode in safe mode.
2. Press keys on the Control Panel in the order shown
HDD Initialization Procedure below.
• [4] : Clear/Format
1. Items to be prepared • [1] : Disk Format
• [0] : OK
• PC
• Press any keys
Be sure that the version of the Service Support Tool
• [C] : Return to Menu
that supports the host machine is installed.
• [Reset] : Start shutdown sequence
• [0] : OK (The power of the host machine is
<In case of using the SST> turned OFF automatically.)
• Crossover Ethernet cable. (In case of SST). 3. Remove the USB flash drive.
<In case of using the USB flash drive> 4. Turn ON the main power switch.
• USB memory
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software

of Host machine
Executing auto gradation
1. If the PC and host machine have been started, turn adjustment
the main power OFF.
2. Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD,
Ethernet cable. (In case of SST). resetting the data used for auto gradation correction.
3. Turn ON the power of the PC. Therefore, execute full adjustment of auto gradation
adjustment after installing this kit to enable proper images to
3. Registering the system software be output.
1. Insert the latest System Software into the PC using
the SST.
2. Start the SST.
3. Click ‘Register Firmware’.
4. Select the drive where the system software has
been inserted, and click the [SEARCH] button.
5. Click the [REGISTER] button.
1130
9. Installation
Execution of the minimum

installation work
Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in
accordance with the Setup Guide because HDD is initialized
when this kit is installed.
1131
9. Installation
Media Adjustment kit-A1 Essential Items to Be

Points to Note when Installing • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
• Use paper whose weight is 60 to 300 g/m2 at pickup from
the Multi-purpose Tray.
• Do not close the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray WARNING:
Assembly while the Media Adjustment Kit is installed. • If performing work without disconnecting the
• When using the Media Adjustment Kit, do not stack power plug of the host machine, it may cause
multiple sheets of paper. electrical shock.
• The pictures and illustrations used may be different from • If disconnecting the power plug without
the product in front of you, but the procedure is the same. turning OFF the main power, it may cause
Installation Outline Drawing • When turning OFF the main power, follow the below
procedure.
machine.

power switch.
Checking the Contents If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
[1] Media Adjustment [2] Spring（Black）X 3 machine is started. In the service mode ( Lv.2 ) shown
kit X 1 below, it is possible to set not to display the message.
<Others> 1. Open the Right Door.

1132
9. Installation
2. Lift the Right Door , and slide the Right Door Guide
(Front) and the Right Door Guide (Rear) in the
direction shown in the figure below to fully open it.
2x
Right Door
Right Door
4. Remove the 3 springs from the guide removed in
Guide (Rear)
step 3, and install the 3 springs included in the
package.
Black
Right Door
Guide (Front)
CAUTION:
Moving the Lever Assembly to the following
position changes the open/close status of the host
machine's Right Door.
[A]: Position that opens the host machine's Right
Door
[B]: Position that fully opens the host machine's
Right Door
[B]
[A]
[B]
[A]
3. Remove the guide.

• 2 Screws
• 2 Bosses
1133
9. Installation
5. Return the guide. 6. Close the Right Door.

• 2 Bosses
• 2 Screws
7. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray Assembly.

CAUTION:
Do not bend the sheet when returning the guide.
8. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide

Plate, and install the Media Adjustment kit.
• 1 Protrusion
2x
Settings after installation

outlet.
1134
9. Installation
3. Enter service mode, and change the values of the

4. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch
following 2 items to "1".
toenable the setting values.
• COPIER > Option > DSPLY-SW > EXTH-SW
• COPIER > Option > FEED-SW > REGASST
NOTE:
When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it is
CAUTION: required to log in as a system manager in accordance with
Points to Note when Removing This Kit instructions of the user administrator.
When removing this kit, be sure to change the values The default password is indicated below.
of the foregoing 2 items to "0". • System Manager ID: Administrator
4. Exit service mode. CAUTION:

Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment for plain
paper first. If auto gradation adjustment is not executed
Auto Adjust Gradation with plain paper and then heavy paper/1200 dpi in that
order, it may cause difference in hue.
NOTE:
When using paper type to which auto gradation
adjustment is not executed, image failure or damage on
the hostmachine may occur. 5. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/
Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Implement Auto Adjust Gradation by following steps. Adjust Gradation] > [Standard(Plain)] > [Adjust].
1. Clean the surface of copyboard glass. 6. Select the paper source where plain paper is loaded,
and then press [OK].
2. Load plain paper and heavy paper in the cassettes

respectively. 7. Then, follow the direction displayed on UI.
3. Check that the value of the following service mode 8. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/
is "3". If it is not "3", change it to "3". Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
• Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW Adjust Gradation] > [Standard(Heavy)] > [Adjust].
> HPFL-DSP
9. Select the paper source loaded with heavy paper and

press [OK].
10. Then, follow the direction displayed on UI.
Select Paper Settings

Select the type of heavy paper to use (type: 1-Sided Coated
5, 2-Sided Coated 5).
1. Load paper, and adjust the Multi-purpose Tray

Pickup Side Guide Plate.
1135
9. Installation
2. On the screen shown below, press [Change] and

then [Detailed Settings].
3.
1136
9. Installation
Connection Kit-A2 for Bluetooth LE

Connection Kit-A1/A2 for
Bluetooth LE
A C

1x 1x
CAUTION:
B
Marked portion
deformation of screw holes. CN,KR⏝ TW⏝
1x 1x
US⏝
1x
C F
Checking the Contents 1x

1x
H
Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE
1x 1x
D
Pタイト; Wセムス;
1x TP; M3x6 M3x8 M3x6
1x 2x 1x
E
for CN,KR
1x 1x
1x 1x 1x
for US G
1x for TW
1x
1x 1x
1x
1137
9. Installation
Essential Items to Be Installation Procedure

1.
WARNING:
electrical shock.

procedure.
machine.
2.
ON/OFF the main power 2x

power switch.
3.
1x
1x
NOTE:
The removed screw will be used in a later step.
1138
9. Installation
4.
[A]
NOTE:
Use the screw removed in the previous step.
• Perform the following adjustment.

1x
NOTE:
• If there is extra slack of the cable, adjust the cable so
that the slack is distributed evenly on the Cable Guide
1x
[B].
• Allow extra slack of the cable at the [C] part.
< When there is extra slack of the cable >
[C]
[B]
5.
2x
1139
9. Installation
6. 8.
NOTE:
In countries other than the following countries, it is not
necessary to affix the Approval Label.
< For US >
US
7.
&RQWDLQV)&&,'$='[[[[[[[
,&'[[[[[[[
&RQWDLQV)&&,'$=')00
,&')00
< For KR, and TW >
CN,KR TW
B
A A’
B’
A=A’
B=B’
Setting after Installation
1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.
1140
9. Installation
3. Enter service mode, and set the value to "1".

COPIER >FUNCTION > INSTALL > BLE-USE
NOTE:
When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it
is required to log in as a system manager in
accordance with instructions of the user
administrator.

[Network] > [Confirm Network Connection Setting
Changes], and set the item [ON].

[Network] > [Bluetooth Settings] > [Use Bluetooth] >
[ON].
6. The message "Perform Apply Setting Changes from

Settings/Registration" appears at the bottom of the
Touch Panel Display.
7. Press [Settings/Registration] > [Apply Setting Changes]

> [Yes].
1141
9. Installation
NFC Kit-C1 Essential Items to Be

Points to Note at Installation • Turn OFF the main power of the host machine, and
Do not touch the sensor and PCB components of the Control
Panel.
WARNING:
CAUTION:
Marked portion
electrical shock.

procedure.
machine.
Checking the Contents Points to Note when turning

1x 1x the main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main
power switch.
1x
1x If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user to
1x TP; M3x4 below, it is possible to set not to display the message.
1x
1142
9. Installation
■ Remove the Control Panel
4
2x
2 5
2x
2x
1143
9. Installation
6 9
2x
10
7
4x
8
3x
1144
9. Installation
11 13
2x
14
12
6x
1145
9. Installation
■ Installing the NFC Kit

3
1
TP; M3x4
1x
4
2
2x
1x
1146
9. Installation
■ Installing the Control Panel

3
1
6x
2 4
2x
1147
9. Installation
5 8
2x
6
3x
7
4x
10
2x
1148
9. Installation
11 14
2x
12
13
2x
1149
9. Installation
■ Affixing the NFC Target 3. Eenter service mode and set the value to "1".
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > NFC-USE
1 NOTE:
When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it is
4. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings]

> [Device Management] > [Use NFC Card Emulation],
and set the item to "ON".
5. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
6. When a message prompting the version update is

displayed, press [Update] and automatically update the
CAUTION:
It may take time to display the update screen. (Approx.
1 to 2 min.) During this time, do not operate the screen.
7. Check the end of the following service mode.

COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > PANEL
• If the end is an even number (e.g. 01.26): NFC is
not installed.
• If the end is an odd number (e.g. 01.27): NFC is
installed.
Setting after Installation
1. Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.
1150
9. Installation

Reader Heater Unit-L2/L3 appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
Points to Note at Installation machine is started. In the service mode ( Lv.2 ) shown
CAUTION:
Marked portion Installation Outline Drawing
WARNING:
electrical shock.

procedure.
machine.

power switch.
1151
9. Installation
Reader Heater Unit-L3

Reader Heater Unit-L2
1x
2x
Binding;
M4x6
2x 4x 2x
1x
1x
Binding; M4x4 Small

1x 1x 2x
4x 1x
TP; M3x6
1x
1x TP; M3x6
1x 1x
Large
2x
2x
1x
1x
Large
1x
1x
1x
1x 2x
Small
5x
• Although pictures or illustrations used for
explanationmay differ from the actual things, the
procedure is the same.
1152
9. Installation
NOTE:
Proceed to the appropriate procedure from this point on.
• In the case of 1-path ADF “Installing the Reader 2.
Heater ” on page 1153
• In the case of Reverse ADF“Installing the Reader CAUTION:
Heater ” on page 1162 • Soiling on the glass surface and the White Plate
affects reading. When removing or installing the
Copyboard Glass, be sure not to touch the glass
■ In the case of 1-path ADF surface and the White Plate.
• If soiling is attached, clean it with lint-free paper.
● Installing the Reader Heater
1.
2x
White Plate
NOTE:
1153
9. Installation
3. 4.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the Harness Clamps in the correct
positions.
Binding;
M4x6
3x
2x
NOTE:
• Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in
the figure.
• Open the Edge Saddle if closed.
2x
1x
1154
9. Installation
5. 6.
CAUTION:
• Soiling on the glass surface and the White Plate
affects reading. When removing or installing the
surface and the White Plate.
White Plate
NOTE:
2x
7.
2x
1155
9. Installation
8. 10.
1x 3x
3x
9.
3x
11.
2x
NOTE:
The removed parts will be used in step 10, "In the case of
1-path ADF" of "Installing the Relay PCB".
NOTE:
The removed parts will be used in step 8, "In the case of
1-path ADF" of "Installing the Relay PCB".
1156
9. Installation
12. 14.
4x
1x
2x
● Installing the Relay PCB
13.
1.
TP; M3x6
1x
1x
1x
1157
9. Installation
2. 3.
1x
4.
3x
2x
1x
1158
9. Installation
5. 7.
4x
1x
2x
6.
8.
NOTE:
Use the parts removed in step 11, "In the case of 1-path
ADF" of " Installing the Reader Heater".
2x
1159
9. Installation
9. 10.
NOTE:
3x Check the position shown below when installing the cover.
3x
NOTE:
Use the parts removed in step 9, "In the case of 1-path
ADF" of " Installing the Reader Heater".
3x
1160
9. Installation
11. 13.
1x
12.
2x
CAUTION:
to“Installing the Dehumidification Switch and Checking
the Switch” on page 1169
1161
9. Installation
■ In the case of Reverse ADF

● Installing the Reader Heater 2.
CAUTION:
• Soiling on the glass surface and the White Plate
1. affects reading. When removing or installing the
2x • If soiling is attached, clean it with lint-free paper.
NOTE: White Plate

1162
9. Installation
3. 4.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the Harness Clamps in the correct
positions.
Binding;
M4x6
3x
2x
NOTE:
• Install the Cable Clamps in the direction as shown in
the figure.
• Open the Edge Saddle if closed.
2x
1x
1163
9. Installation
5. 7.
CAUTION: NOTE:
• Soiling on the glass surface and the White Plate Open the DADF before removing the Reader Cable Cover
affects reading. When removing or installing the if closed.
White Plate
NOTE:
8.
2x 3x
NOTE:
6. The removed parts will be used in step 8, "In the case of

Reverse ADF" of "Installing the Relay PCB".
2x
1164
9. Installation
● Installing the Relay PCB
9.
1.
2x
TP; M3x6
1x
1x
1x 2x
1x
NOTE:
The removed screws will be used in step 6, "In the case
of Reverse ADF" of "Installing the Relay PCB".
10.
4x
1165
9. Installation
2. 3.
1x
4.
3x
2x
1x
1166
9. Installation
5. 6.
CAUTION:
4x Fix the Grounding Cable in the correct direction.
NOTE:
Use the parts removed in step 9, "In the case of Reverse
ADF" of "Installing the Reader Heater".
2x 1x
2x
1167
9. Installation
7. 8.
Put the gap between two harness bands of the DADF
cable to the groove of the Reader Cable Cove and then
mount the Reader Cable Cover.
• 3 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 8, "In
the case of Reverse ADF" of "Removing the
Covers".)
2x
3x
1168
9. Installation
9. 1.
CAUTION:
Do not insert the screwdriver into the hole when
removing the cover.
CAUTION:
to“Installing the Dehumidification Switch and Checking
the Switch” on page 1169
■ Installing the Dehumidification

Switch and Checking the Switch
NOTE:
If the Dehumidification Switch is installed, start from step
8.
1169
9. Installation
2. 4.
1x
3.
2x
1170
9. Installation
5. 6.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Be sure to install the Dehumidification switch in the Before installing the Rear Lower Cover, fit it to the 3 hooks
correction direction. of the Rear Upper Cover.
2x
1x
1171
9. Installation
7.
8.

outlet.
1172
9. Installation

Super G3 FAX Board-AZ1 appears, press [Update] to automatically update the
Points to Note at Installation machine is started. In the service mode ( Lv.2 ) shown
• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
may differ from the actual things, the procedure is the
same.
• When installing the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board and Installation Outline Drawing
this equipment at the same time, check the parts
included in the package, and install them following the
Installation Procedure for Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board.
CAUTION:
Marked portion

1x
WARNING: 1x
• If performing work without disconnecting the <For USA and Taiwan>
electrical shock. M3x6
• If disconnecting the power plug without 2x FAX Approval Label
turning OFF the main power, it may cause 1x 1x
• When turning OFF the main power, follow the below 3x

procedure. Only for Europe
machine.
1x
Points to Note when turning 1x
1x
1. When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON 1x
6 Contact type
the main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main 1x
power switch.
1173
9. Installation
<Others>
1.
1
2x
2
1x
■ Installing the Fax Unit
NOTE:
When installing the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board at the
same time, do not perform the following procedure, but
start from "Installing the 2nd Line Fax Board" of Super G3
2nd Line Fax Board Installation Procedure.
1174
9. Installation
2. 3.
NOTE: NOTE:
Remove the packing tape and other materials and Install Open the Edge Saddle if closed.
the Fax Unit.
CAUTION:
• When installing the FAX Unit, be careful not to trap
the Cables of the FAX Unit.
• Do not directly touch the speaker [A] of the FAX
Unit.
• Be sure not to damage the speaker [A].
[A]
3x
1x
M3x6
4.
NOTE:
Open the Wire Saddles if closed.
3x
2x
1175
9. Installation

3
1
1x
2x
NOTE:
Store the removed Face Cover in the Tray Guide in step
5.
1176
9. Installation
■ Procedure after Work

5
1
NOTE:
• Store the Face Cover removed in step 2 in the Tray
Guide.
• The storage locations differ depending on the number
of Face Covers ("Less than 4 Face Covers" or "4
Face Covers").
• Be sure to store the removed Face Covers as shown
below.
In the case of less than four
ճ
ղ
ձ
In the case of four

մ
ճ
ղ
ձ 2
<For USA and Taiwan>
FAX Approval Labele
1177
9. Installation
3 4
NOTE: NOTE:
• This step is only for Europe. Connect the end of the PTT Cable or Telephone Cord to
• Do not connect the Telephone Cord (2 contact type) the modular jack on the Host machine, and connect the
with the PTT Plug. other end to the modular jack on the wall.
Connect the PTT Plug matched the field or area to the PTT
Cable (6 contact type).
1x
1x
CAUTION:
• When using the "EXT" modular terminal, use a
flatblade screwdriver, etc. to remove the Modular
Spacer located in the modular terminal area.
• Keep the removed Modular Spacer.
• Do not insert a screwdriver, etc. into the modular
terminal.
5 Connect the Power Plug to the outlet.
1178
9. Installation
6 Turn ON the main power switch.

1. Set the user telephone number.
[Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] >
[Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 1] > [Register Unit
CAUTION:
Telephone Number] > Enter the fax number > [OK]
If the machine does not recognize this equipment,
unplug and then plug the power plug after turning OFF 2. Set Type of telephone line.
the main power switch, or turn OFF the main power [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] >
switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. To avoid [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 1] > [Select Line Type]
this symptom, unplug the power plug or turn the > Select the line type to connect > [OK]
breaker OFF when installing.
3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch after setting the
user telephone numbers and the type of telephone
line.
NOTE:
When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the
main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main ■ Fax communication test
power switch.
Perform the communication test to check if FAX function
works Correctly.
Operation Check
1. Switch the control panel display to [Fax] display.
■ Type Settings 2. Send the test document from this machine to
another machine that can handle the
communication test to check that this machine can
1. This setting performs the parameter settings to send the data correctly.
match the communication specification of the
country/region. 3. Send the test document from the target to this
machine to check if the machine can receive the
Set the TYPE of country/region to install this machine,
document properly.
and then press OK.
• FAX > Type > TYPE
2. Confirm that service mode parameter below is "0".

In the case, parameter is "1", change to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > SDTM-DSP
NOTE:
Change the parameter to "0" to hide [Settings/
Registration] > [Preferences] > [Timer/Energy Settings]
>[Auto Shutdown Time] and disable the auto shut down.
3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable this

setting.
■ Basic Setting
NOTE:
• When "System Manager Information Settings" is set,
be sure to follow the direction of user administrator in
order to log in as an administrator.
• This setting can also be set from the Setup Guide
([Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] >
[License/Other] > [Start Setup Guide]).
In this section, make only minimum settings required for FAX

communication.
1179
9. Installation

Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board- the main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main
AU1 power switch.
• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation below, it is possible to set not to display the message.
may differ from the actual things, the procedure is the COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
same.
• When installing the Super G3 FAX Board and this
equipment at the same time, be sure to install them by Installation Outline Drawing
referring to this document after checking "Checking the
Contents" of Super G3 FAX Board.
CAUTION:
Marked portion
WARNING:
electrical shock.

procedure.
machine.

1180
9. Installation
Checking the Contents 1

2x
1x 1x
1x 1x
1x
1x
<Included in Taiwan>
2
M3x6 FAX Approval Label
1x
7x 1x 1x
Only for Europe
1x
1x
1x
1x
6 Contact type
1x ■ Removing the Fax Unit (When the
Fax Unit is installed)
Preparation NOTE:
When the Fax Unit is not installed, proceed to "Installing
the Equipment"“Installing the 2nd Line Fax Board” on page
■ Remove the Covers 1183.
NOTE:
When a Telephone Cord is connected, disconnect it.
1181
9. Installation
1. 3.
CAUTION:
3x • Do not directly touch the speaker [A] of the FAX
Unit.
[A]
2.
2x
1x
3x
NOTE:
The removed 2 screws will be used in step 2 of
"Subsequent Work".
1182
9. Installation
Installing the 2nd Line Fax 3

Board
1 M3x6
NOTE:
Remove the packing tape if any. 2x
2x
4
NOTE:
The removed FAX Frame and 2 Screws will be used in
step 11.
5
1x
3x
1183
9. Installation
6 7
1x
M3x6
5x
1184
9. Installation
9 11
NOTE: CAUTION:
Secure the included in [A] Cable in place using the Wire Installing the Plate
Saddle. • Be sure to install the FAX Frame in an orientation
appropriate for the country or region where the
machine is installed.
3x [A] <EU> <Excluding EU>
1x
[A] NOTE:
Use the screws and the FAX Frame removed in step 1.
2x
10
1x
1185
9. Installation
Subsequent Work
2.
1. CAUTION:
• When installing the FAX Unit, be careful not to trap
the 2 Cables of the FAX Unit.
NOTE: • Do not directly touch the speaker [A] of the FAX
When installing the Super G3 Fax Board at the same time,
Unit.
be sure to use the Wire Saddle included with the Super
G3 Fax Board.
[A]
NOTE:
• Use the screws removed in step 3 of "Preparation >
Removing the Fax Unit (When the Fax Unit is
installed) ".
• When installing the Super G3 Fax Board at the same
time, be sure to use the screws included with the
Super G3 Fax Board.
2x
1186
9. Installation
3. 5.
NOTE:
Open the Edge Saddle if closed. 1x
6.
4x NOTE:
• When installing the Super G3 FAX Board (1-Line) at
the same time, remove the Face Cover of the 1-Line.
• Store the removed Face Cover in the Tray Guide in
1x step 9.
4.
NOTE:
Open the Wire Saddle if closed.
3x
1187
9. Installation
7. 9.
NOTE:
• Store the Face Cover removed in step 6 in the Tray
Guide.
• The storage locations differ depending on the number
of Face Covers ("Less than 4 Face Covers" or "4
Face Covers").
• Be sure to store the removed Face Covers as shown
below.
In the case of less than four
ճ
ղ
ձ
In the case of four

մ
ճ
ղ
ձ
2x
8.
10.
1188
9. Installation
11. 12.
NOTE: NOTE:
When installing the Super G3 FAX Board at the same time, • The following work is required only when installing the
be sure to affix an appropriate Modular Label included in Super G3 FAX Board at the same time.
the package of the Super G3 FAX Board.
Affix the following FAX Approval Label.
<For USA and Taiwan>
NOTE:
This step is only for Taiwan.
Affix the following FAX Approval Label.
1189
9. Installation
13. 14.
NOTE: CAUTION:
• This step is only for Europe. • When using the "EXT" modular terminal, use a
• When installing the Super G3 FAX Board at the same flatblade screwdriver, etc. to remove the Modular
time, assemble it by following the same procedure. Spacer located in the modular terminal area.
• Keep the removed Modular Spacer.
Connect the PTT Plug matched the field or area to the • Do not insert a screwdriver, etc. into the modular
PTT Cable (6 contact type). terminal.
CAUTION:
Do not connect the Telephone Cord (2 contact type)
with the PTT Plug.
1x
NOTE:
Connect the end of the PTT Cable or Telephone Cord to
the Modular Jack (LINE 1 and LINE 2) on the host
machine, and connect the other end to the Modular Jack
on the wall.
2x
1190
9. Installation
3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable this

setting.
■ Basic Settings
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If the machine does not recognize this equipment,
When "System Manager Information Settings" is set, be
unplug and then plug the power plug after turning OFF
sure to follow the direction of user administrator in order
the main power switch, or turn OFF the main power to log in as an administrator.
switch and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. To avoid
this symptom, unplug the power plug or turn the
breaker OFF when installing. In this section, make only minimum settings required for FAX
communication.
NOTE:
When a message prompting to turn OFF and then ON the 1. Set the user telephone number.
main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main [Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] >
power switch. [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 2] > [Register Unit
Telephone Number] > Enter FAX number > [OK]
2. Set the type of telephone line.
17.
[Settings/Registration] > [Function Settings] > [Send] >
If a message prompting the user to update the [Fax Settings] > [Set Line] > [Line 2] > [Select Line Type]
version appears, press [Update] to automatically > Select the line type to connect > [OK]
update the version of this equipment.
3. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch after setting the
user telephone numbers and the type of telephone
NOTE: line.
If [Skip] is selected, a message prompting the user
toupdate the version will appear every time the host ■ FAX Communication Test
machine is started.
In the service mode ( Lv.2) shown below, it is possible to Perform communication test to check if FAX function works
set not to display the message. correctly.
1. Switch the control panel display to [Fax] display.

Operation Check 2. Select the sending line.
Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Select Line], select the added
■ Type Settings line, then press [OK] button.
Select the country/region of the FAX Board in Service Mode: 3. Send and receive a test original between the
FAX > Type > TYPE equipment and a remote unit with which a
This setting performs the parameter settings to match the communication test can be performed and check if
communication specification of the country/region. it can be sent and receive correctly.
1. Press [Status Monitor/Cancel] > [Send] > [Job Log]
and select [Fax] from pull down menu.
1. From the following service mode, Set the TYPE of 2. Press [Fax Activity Report] > [OutPut Normally] >
country/region to install this machine, and then [Start Printing].
press OK. 3. The number printed following colon (:) in
FAX > Type > TYPE "COMM.MODE" field on FAX ACTIVITY REPORT
TX/RX shows line type used for sending/receiving.
2. Confirm that service mode parameter below is "0". E.g. "ECM:2" => Line 2
In the case, parameter is "1", change to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > SDTM-DSP
NOTE:
If E744-5000 error code (Fax software version mismatch
NOTE: error) occurred while sending or receiving fax, upgrade the
Change the parameter to "0" to hide [Settings/ firmware of 2-line Fax to the latest version.
Registration] > [Preferences] > [Timer/Energy Settings] >
[Auto Shutdown Time] and disable the auto shut down.
1191
9. Installation

Cassette Heater Unit-41 the main power appears, turn OFF and then ON the main
power switch.
CAUTION: update the version will appear every time the host
Points to Note When the Cassette Feeding Unit or High machine is started. In the service mode ( Lv.2 ) shown
Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit Is Not Installed: below, it is possible to set not to display the message.
Since the machine will contain heat at its bottom if this COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > VER-CHNG
equipment is installed, be sure to avoid installation at
locations where heat resistance is low.
CAUTION:
Marked portion:
NOTE:
differ from the actual things, the procedure is the same. Checking the Contents
disconnect the power plug from the outlet. 1x
WARNING: TP Round End ; M3x6

• If performing work without disconnecting the 1x 2x
electrical shock.
• If disconnecting the power plug without NOTE:
turning OFF the main power, it may cause * : Host Machine : Use 1 of them. Cassette Feeding Unit
damage of the machine. or High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit: Use 2 of them.

procedure.
Checking the Parts to be
machine. Installed
main power are turned off. Cassette Heater Unit
Prepare the following parts because each part of the
Cassette Heater Unit is assigned as service part.
1192
9. Installation
NO. Parts name Parts Num- Q'ty ● In the Case of High Capacity Cassette
ber. Feeding Unit
[1] Cassette Heater Assem- FM1- 1 pc
bly B278-000
[2] Dehumidification Switch FM1- 1 pc
[3] Screw (TP Round End;

D821-000
XA9-2010-00 2 pcs
1.
M3x6) 0
■ Removing the Cassette
● In the Case of Host Machine/Cassette
Feeding Unit
3x
NOTE:
In the case of host machine, remove the Cassette 1
and 2. In the case of the Cassette Feeding Unit,
remove the Cassette 3 and 4.
1.
NOTE:
The removed parts will be used in "Installing the Cassette".
1193
9. Installation
2. 3.
2x
NOTE:
4.
1x
NOTE:
1194
9. Installation
5. 7.
CAUTION:
Be sure to release the lock and then disconnect the
FCC Connector.
1x
6.
1195
9. Installation
■ Installing the Cassette Heater

2.
1.
3.
< In the case of Host machine >
TP Round End
M3x6
1x
1196
9. Installation
< In the case of Cassette Feeding Unit or High Capacity

Cassette Feeding Unit >
5.
NOTE:
The Heater Connector Cover comes in different shapes.
TP Round End Without ribs
M3x6
2x
With ribs
4.
1x
1197
9. Installation
CAUTION: ■ Installing the Cassette

• When the Heater Connector Cover has ribs, those
ribs may interfere with cables. ● In the Case of Host Machine/Cassette
• Be sure to run the cables as shown in the figure Feeding Unit
below before installing the Connector Cover.
NOTE:
In the case of the Cassette 1, pull out the rail and slide
it into the host machine.
1.
1198
9. Installation
● In the Case of High Capacity Cassette

Feeding Unit
2.
NOTE:
1. Slide the inner rails of the rails you pulled out toward the
front side to ease insertion of the cassette.
1199
9. Installation
3. 4.
CAUTION:
• Align the rails and push in the cassette to the first
lock position.
• Do not push in the cassette all the way because
the Flat Cable is not connected.
1200
9. Installation
5. 7.
NOTE: NOTE:
Use the parts removed in "Removing the Cassette". • Use the parts removed in "Removing the Cassette".
• Hook the [B] part of the plate on the left side on the
[A] part of the plate.
• Push in the cassette and align the boss when hanging
the hook [C].
[A]
1x
1x
6.
3x
[C]
[B]
[A]
1201
9. Installation
■ Installing the Dehumidification

8. Switch and Checking the Switch
NOTE:
• Use the parts removed in "Removing the Cassette".
• Hook the [B] part of the plate on the right side on the 1.
[A] part of the plate.
CAUTION:
Do not insert the screwdriver into the hole when
removing the Dehumidification Switch Cover.
[A]
2x [B]
[A]
9.
1202
9. Installation
2. 4.
1x
3.
2x
1203
9. Installation
5. 6.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the switch in the correction direction.
2x
1x
1204
9. Installation
7.
8.

outlet.
1205
APPENDICES
Service Tools.................................. 1207
General Circuit Diagram..................1208
Software Counter Specifications..... 1226
Removal.......................................... 1232
Target PCBs of Automatic Update.. 1235
List of Service Modes That Can Be
Restored...................................... 1236
Service Tools
Service Tools
List of Special Tools

When servicing this machine, the special tools shown below are required besides the standard tools.
Tool name Tool No. Rank Configuration Use/Remarks

Digital multi-meter FY9-2002 A Used for supplementary
electricity check of the
electricity check
CA-7 Test Sheet FY9-9323 (A3) A For image adjustment/

FY9-9390 (11x17) check
Reference: Rank
A: Tool each service engineers should have 1 pc per engineer
B: Tool a group of approx. 5 engineers should have 1 pc per group
Solvent/Oil List
Name Purpose of use Parts number Remarks
Alcohol Cleaning - • Never put it close to fire
• Local procurement
Super Lube Grease Worm Gear FY9-6005 • Chemical synthesis oil
Lubricant (FLOIL G-337) Scanner Rail FY9-6029 • Synthetic hydrocarbon oil
1207
General Circuit Diagram
Host machine
1/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fixing Assembly
3
1
H01 SW04
Main Power Supply
2
Fixing Heater
4
J1002D
Switch
J1002L
J1115L
F H01_MAIN F
J1115D
2 1 Main
J1007L J1006L
NO
3 2 1 2 1
3 2 1 J1007D 2 1 J1006D
H01_SUB
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
2 1 Sub
J01
SEESAW(MAIN SW DET)
Com
SHUTOFF SW
+5.0V
GND
120V/230V 100V/110V
INL01 PLG1 FT7 FT8
J1200 P1 1 2
COR01
UN04 1 2 3 4
3 J1001L TP01 DC Controller PCB
J4513
E 2
1 1 2 3 4
Fixing Temperature fuse
E
1
2
3
SOLD30
SOLD31
SOLD32
J1001D
J115
J100
UN05
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 Main Controller PCB
MT3 COR02
J4509 J4512
1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1
LVPS_FAN_LOCK_DETECT
FSR_CRNT_SNS_ANA
1 2 3 J1241M
ACD_HTR_ON_MAIN
ACD_HTR_ON_SUB
ACD_FSR_RLY_ON
MT6 1 2 3
+24V-RMT-IL-SW
LVPS_FAN_HALF
LVPS_FAN_FULL
J1241F
ACD_ZEROX
RMT_PFC
ACD_ID
+12V_AN
+12V_AN
RMT-24
GND
GND
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
D D
Main
Com
Sub
H
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1501 J301 J302 J505
(J501) (J501) (J511)
UN07
AC Driver PCB
J504 J503
J506 J1801(J502)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
3 2 1
ENV_HTR2_H-N
RDR_HTR_N-200V
BFR_OUT-N
RDR_HTR_N-100V
ENV_HTR2_N-I
ENV_HTR2_N-I
RDR_HTR_H
ENV_HTR2_H-H
BFR_OUT-H
PEDE_HTR1_H-N
PEDE_HTR1_H-H
ENV_SW_OUT-H
PEDE_HTR1_N-I
PEDE_HTR1_N-I
PSU_OUT-N (W)
PSU_OUT-H (Bk)
ENV_SW_IN-H
TEST_24V_RL
C C
GND
1 2 3 J1601DH
J1601D
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 3 2 1 J1003D
J801 J811 J812 J816 J813
4 3 2 1 J1003L
END4
END3
END2
END1 J1108F 1 2 3 UN01
J2108M
1 2 3
Low Voltage Power Supply PCB
6 5 4 3 2 1
J1114D
B 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1114L
6 5 4 3 2 1
J1181D B
1 2 3 J814
J1004M J1108M 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1181L 1 2 3
H_CST_1
1
3 2 1
FAN_LOCK
FAN_VCC
H_OP_1
1
4 3 2 1
GND
J1338M
SOLD8
1 2
H_OP_2
1
J1186
2
H03
Inside Heater READER_HEATER
H_CST_2
BUFFER_PASS
2
J1008D
1
3 2 1
J1008DH
2
1 2 3
J1008L
2
1 3
SOLD9
SW10 H02_02
Cassette Heater
2
Dehumidification Switch
A A
H02 123
Cassette Heater
FM02
Power Supply Cooling Fan
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1208 P.1
2/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F UN04 F
DC Controller PCB
J120 J121 J123
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415
FSR-MTR-ACC
FSR-MTR-DEC
+24V-RMT-IL-SW-FU-SLCL
FSR-MTR-CW
FSR-MTR-FG
+24V-RMT-IL
+24V-RMT-IL
EXP-LED-M
EXP-LED-C
EXP-LED-K
THERM-SR-ANA
THERM-SF-ANA
FSR-CNCT-THX
THERM-M-ANA
FSR-NEW-DTC
FSR-EXIT-SNS
REGI-PATCH-R-LED
+5V_FU
+5V_FU
+5V_FU
REGI-PATCH-F-LED
REG-SHTR-SL-ON
GND
GND
PATCH-R-S-ANA
PATCH-R-P-ANA
PATCH-F-S-ANA
PATCH-F-P-ANA
REGI-R-GAIN0
REGI-R-GAIN1
+5V-FU
REGI-F-GAIN0
REGI-F-GAIN1
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
24V
+5V-FU
+5V-FU
GND
GND
E E
D D
J1001DB J1001DA
J1149D J1147D 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1155D
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1149DH J1147DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1155DH 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J1001LB
J1423 J1424 J1425
J1149L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J1147L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1001LA
J1155L
UN16 UN15 UN14
Pre-exposure Pre-exposure Pre-exposure
COR12
LED PCB LED PCB LED PCB
(Bk) (C) (M)
C J1195 3 2 1 C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1019
UN31 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fixing Fuse
M
PCB
M09
Fixing Motor
J721D
3 2 1
J1096D 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J721DH
B 1 2 3
J1096LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J721L
B
J1096L
TH01
Fixing Thermistor
J1146D
2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1146DH
J1022 J1066 1 2 J1146L
UN25 UN26 TH-SF TH-M TH-SR

1 2 1 2 1 2
Registration Patch Registration Patch
Sensor Unit Sensor Unit 3 2 1
FRONT MAIN REAR
1 2 J1189D
(Front) (Rear) SL
3 2 1
A A
SL02
Registration Shutter PS10
Fixing Delivery
Solenoid
Sensor
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.2
1209
3/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F UN04 F
DC Controller PCB
J124 J125 J126 J117
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617
+3.3V
RD-DOOR-SW
+5V
GND
CST1-PULL-SNS
+5V
GND
CST1-PAPER-LEVEL-SNS
+5V
GND
CST1-PAPER-EMPTY-SNS
+5V
GND
CST2-PULL-SNS
+5V
GND
CST2-PAPER-LEVEL-SNS
+5V
GND
CST2-PAPER-EMPTY-SNS
MTR-FAN-ON
GND
MTR-FAN-LOCK
+3.3V
MP-PAPER-SIZE
GND
+5V
GND
MP-PAPER-SIZE1-SNS
+5V
GND
MP-PAPER-SIZE2-SNS
+3.3V-SNS-VCC
GND
MP-PAPER-EMPTY-SNS
+5V
GND
MP-HP-SNS
+3.3V
GND
+24V-RMT-PEDE
+24V-RMT-PEDE
GND
GND
OP-CST-CLK
OP-CST-TX
OP-CST-RX
OP-CST-RESETX
OP-CST-CNCT
OP-CST4-VPASS-SNS
OP-CST3-VPASS-SNS
CST-MTR-AX
CST-MTR-A
CST-MTR-BX
CST-MTR-B
REG-MTR-AX
REG-MTR-A
REG-MTR-BX
REG-MTR-B
PULL-MTR-AX
PULL-MTR-A
PULL-MTR-BX
PULL-MTR-B
DUP-MEET-MTR-AX
DUP-MEET-MTR-A
DUP-MEET-MTR-BX
DUP-MEET-MTR-B
E E
J1032D
2 1
J1032DH
1 2 J1148D
J1032L
151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1104D 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1105D 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1148DH
J1342D 3 2 1
J1104LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J1105LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J1104L 1 2 3
J1105L J1342LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415
J1148L
D J1342L
D
COR03
J1097D
J1169D J1167D J1337D
J1174D
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J1029 3 2 1 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
J1174LH J1337L
3 2 1 J1169L 4 3 2 1 J1167L 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J1097DH J1174L
A*
B*
A
B
J1340
PS24 F-5
A*
B*
A*
B*
A
B
2 1
2 1 Cassette 2 To P.9
J1340L
Vertical Path 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J1122
Sensor 123 M M M
C 2 1
3 2 1 J7777D
J7777LH
6 5 4 3 2 1
C
SW11 UN29 J7777L
1 2 3 4 5 6
M07 M12 M14
Right Door Multi-purpose Tray Cassette 1,2 Registration Duplex Merging
FM03 J1119 J1120
Open/Close Width Sensing Pickup Motor Motor Motor
Motor Fan
Detection Switch PCB 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
J1338H
J1338L
PS30 PS31 4 3 2 1
J1026 J1027 Multi-purpose Tray Multi-purpose Tray

3 2 1 3 2 1
A*
3 2 1 J1031 3 2 1
Paper Length
B*
J1030 Paper Length
A
B
J1028 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
Sensor 1 Sensor 2 J1180
J1025
4 3 2 1
PS08 PS04 PS05 PS06 PS07 3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1 M
B Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 B
Vertical Path Lifter Sensor Paper Sensor Lifter Sensor Paper Sensor M13
Sensor PS03 PS32 Cassette 1,2 Feed
Multi-purpose Tray Multi-purpose Tray / Multi-purpose Pickup
Paper Sensor HP Sensor Motor
A A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.3
1210
4/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
UN04
F DC Controller PCB
F
J127 J128 J133
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+24V-RMT-SW
+24V-RMT-IL-SW
YM-BTL-MTR-OUT1
YM-BTL-MTR-OUT2
CK-BTL-MTR-OUT1
CK-BTL-MTR-OUT2
+5V
GND
Y-TNR-SCR-SNS
+5V
GND
M-TNR-SCR-SNS
+5V
GND
C-TNR-SCR-SNS
+5V
GND
K-TNR-SCR-SNS
+5V
GND
LOOP1-SNS
GND
Y-INDUC-SNS-ANA
+5V-FU
Y-INDUC-CNT-PWM
GND
M-INDUC-SNS-ANA
+5V-FU
M-INDUC-CNT-PWM
GND
C-INDUC-SNS-ANA
+5V-FU
C-INDUC-CNT-PWM
GND
K-INDUC-SNS-ANA
+5V-FU
K-INDUC-CNT-PWM
+3.3V-SEESAW
F-DOOR-SW
+24V-RMT-IL-SW-FU-FAN
GND
FRONT-FAN-LOCK
+3.3V
ENV-HUM-ANA
GND
ENV-TMP-ANA
E E
J1333
2 1
J1333L 2 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1177D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J1177LH
2 1
D 3 2 1 J1059
J1177L
D
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
J1061 3 2 1
J1011 SW26
3 2 1 Front Door Switch
PS26 PS28
Toner Supply Toner Supply PS11
Sensor Sensor Arch
(Y) (C) Sensor J1255D J1256D J1258D
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J1257D 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J1255LH J1256DH J1257DH J1258DH
J1255L 1 2 3 4 J1258L 1 2 3 4
J1256L 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
3 2 1 J1257L
J1060 3 2 1
3 2 1
J1062
3 2 1
J1058DH
J1057D PS27 PS29
J1058D
C 2 1 2 1
J1057DH Toner Supply Toner Supply C
1 2 J1058L 1 2 J1057L Sensor Sensor
(M) (Bk)
SOLD16
SOLD17
SOLD5
SOLD6
J1040D 4 3 2 1 J1041D 4 3 2 1 J1042D 4 3 2 1 J1043D 4 3 2 1

J1040LH
J1041LH J1042LH
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J1043LH
1 2 1 2 J1040L J1041L 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
J1042L
J1043L
M M
M04 M05 J1260D

J1260DH
3 2 1
B Bottle Motor Bottle Motor B
J1260L 1 2 3
(YM) (CK) 4 3 2 1 J1107
J1050 4 3 2 1 J1051 4 3 2 1 J1052 4 3 2 1 J1053 4 3 2 1

UN27 1 2
Environment SOLD1 SOLD2
UN24 Sensor SW02

UN21 UN22 UN23 123
Interlock Switch 1
Toner Density Toner Density Toner Density
Toner Density
Sensor Sensor Sensor
Sensor
(Y) (M) (C) (Bk) FM01
Front Fan
Developing Developing Developing Developing

Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly
A Ｙ M C K A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.4
1211
5/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F UN04 F
DC Controller PCB
J131 J129
J130
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425
1TR-RIKAN-MTR-AX
1TR-RIKAN-MTR-A
1TR-RIKAN-MTR-BX
1TR-RIKAN-MTR-B
+24V-RMT-IL-SW-FU-L1
DEV-CL-ON-Y
DEV-CL-ON-M
DEV-CL-ON-C
DEV-CL-ON-K
+5V
GND
1TR-HP-SNS
+24V-RMT-IL
+24V-RMT-IL
GND
GND
ITBBK-MTR-CW
ITBBK-MTR-ACC
ITBBK-MTR-DEC
ITBBK-MTR-FG
+24V-RMT-IL
+24V-RMT-IL
GND
GND
CL-MTR-CW
CL-MTR-ACC
CL-MTR-DEC
CL-MTR-FG
+24V-RMT-IL
+24V-RMT-IL
GND
GND
GND(DEV-MTR-CW)
DEV-MTR-ACC
DEV-MTR-DEC
DEV-MTR-FG
Y-DRUM-EXISTX
GND
M-DRUM-EXISTX
GND
C-DRUM-EXISTX
GND
K-DRUM-EXISTX
GND
+5V
GND
PRE-REG-SNS
E E
D D
SOLD22
SOLD23
SOLD24
SOLD25
SOLD26
SOLD27
SOLD28
SOLD29
J1202D J1203D J1204D J1205D J1090D
J1203DH J1204DH J1205DH J1090DH J1190

J1201D J1202DH
J1024D
J1103
4 3 2 1
J1054 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J1024DH
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 1 2 1 2 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
4 3 2 1 J1202 1 2 J1204L J1205L J1090L 1 2 3 J1024L
J1201L J1203L
M M M
UN35 UN36 UN37 UN38

M02 M03 M10 Drum Unit Drum Unit Drum Unit Drum Unit
Bk Drum _ ITB Motor CL Drum Motor Developing Motor New/Old New/Old New/Old New/Old
C Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor C
(Y) (M) (C) (Bk)
A*
B*
A
3 2 1
J1335D
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
J1189 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
M CL CL CL CL
M08 CL01 CL02 CL03 CL04 PS33 PS22

Primary Transfer Developing Developing Developing Developing Primary Transfer Pre-Registration
Roller Disengagement Cylinder Clutch Cylinder Clutch Cylinder Clutch Cylinder Clutch Roller Disengagement Sensor
Motor (Y) (M) (C) (Bk) HP Sensor
B B
A A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.5
1212
6/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F UN04 F
J132
DC Controller PCB
J134 J190 J199
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6
+3.3V
RC-TNR-BOX-SW
RC-TNR-MTR-PWM
RC-TNR-MTR-FG
RC-TNR-MTR-OUT1(24V)
GND
RC_TNR_LED_PMW
GND
RC-TNR-ANA
CST2-SIZE2-SW2
CST2-SIZE2-SW1
GND
CST2-SIZE2-SW0
CST2-SIZE1-SW2
CST2-SIZE1-SW1
GND
CST2-SIZE1-SW0
CST1-SIZE1-SW2
CST1-SIZE1-SW1
GND
CST1-SIZE1-SW0
CST1-LFT-MTR-OUT1
CST1-LFT-MTR-OUT2
+5V
GND
CST1-PAP-VLM1-SNS
+5V
GND
CST2-PAP-VLM1-SNS
DL
GND
3.3V
PC-TX
PC-RX
FCT-MODE-0
FCT-MODE-1
GND
DEBUG-PORT-0
DEBUG-PORT-1
E E
5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1101 J1069
J1117D13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1117LH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 J1033D

J1117L
D J1033DH
D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1033L
J1044D
J1045D J1044DH J1038D J1036D J1035D
2 1 5 4 3 2 1 J1063 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
2 1 J1045L
1 2 3 4 5 J1038DH J1036DH
J1044L J1035DH
J1038L 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
C UN30 J1036L J1035L 1 2 3 4
C
1 2 Waste Toner
SW01 Sensor PCB
SOLD14
SOLD15
Waste Toner
Container Detection
Switch
J1339 5 4 3 2 1 J1220 4 3 2 1
J1221 4 3 2 1 J1222 J1251
4 3 2 1
3 2 1
J1199 3 2 1
1 2
5 4 3 2 1
4
4
3
2
1
3 2 1 3 2 1
M
M
M17 M06 PS17 PS19

SW16 SW15 SW13 Cassette 1,2 Cassette 1 Cassette 2
Waste Toner Cassette 2 Cassette 1
Cassette 2 Lifter Motor Paper Level Paper Level
B Feed Motor Size Switch Size Switch B
Size Switch Sensor Sensor
B A A A
A A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.6
1213
7/12
A
B
E
C
D
FG
+24V
8
8
M
ACC +3.3R
DEC
M01
GND
GND
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
+3.3V-AN-SNS
J110
GND
+5V_D
Laser Scanner Motor

J206
+5V_D
GND
+12V_D
GND
IMG1L-RX
1
IMG1L-TX
SOLD33
GND
SOLD34
VDOEN_IMG1L_N
13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
TH04
J4515
ITOP_IMG1L_N
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
INT_IMG1L
7
7
IMG1L-RESET_N
J109
J204
SEESAW-OUT
3.3V_MON_IN GND
UN05
GND DDI-RESET_N
J9500
Y_VDO_N DDI_PCTS_N
Main Controller PCB
Y_VDO_P DDI_PPRDY_N
GND DDI_PRTS_N
M_VDO_N PSTS_DDITXD_N
M_VDO_P PCMD_DDI_RXD_N
GND DDI_PCPRDY_N
C_VDO_N GND
C_VDO_P DCON_LIVE_N
GND RMT-DCON-N
K_VDO_N DCON_TRIG1
K_VDO_P GND
GND INT_DCON_N
BD DDI-DOWNLOAD_N
GND DDIP_LIVE_WAKE_N
6
6
3.3V_MON GND
1716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617
J201
DDIP_SUB_TXD
DDIP_SUB_RXD
2322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223
J4511
LS-KONA-IRQX
LS-KONA-RESETX
J111
LS-KONA-CS
Y/M
LS-KONA-CLK
UN08
LS-KONA-TX
LS-KONA-RX
Laser Driver PCB

+24V-RMT-IL-SW
GND
GND
+3.3V-IL
GND
+3.3V
5
5
GND
+5V-FU
LD-I2C-SDA
LD-I2C-SCL
16151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J202
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516
HV-TR1-ISNS-K
HV-TR1-ISNS-C
1214
HV-TR1-ISNS-M
HV-TR1-ISNS-Y
UN04
1 2
1 2
HV-TR1-VSNS-K
HV-TR1-VSNS-C
MT1
PIN1
HV-TR1-VSNS-M
DC Controller PCB
J203
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940 HV-TR1-VSNS-Y
HV-TR1-CLK
4
4
HV-TR1-PWM-K
UN02
HV-TR1-PWM-C
HV-TR1-PWM-M
J532F (J531F)
J532M (J531M)
HV-TR1-PWM-Y
GND
+24V-RMT-IL-SW
High Voltage Power Supply PCB
GND
+3.3V-MND-A
1716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
40393837363534333231302928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617
J401
J2801
J113
(J801）
HV-CHG-DC-ERR
HV-DEV-DC-ERR
J112
HV-CHG-DC-ISNS-Y
HV-CHG-DC-ISNS-M
1 2
1 2
HV-CHG-DC-ISNS-C
3
3
C/Bk
HV-CHG-DC-ISNS-K
MT2
PIN2
UN09
HV-CHG-DC-PWM-Y
HV-CHG-DC-PWM-M
Laser Driver PCB
J531F
HV-CHG-DC-PWM-C
J531M
HV-CHG-DC-PWM-K
HV-DEV-DC-PWM-Y
HV-DEV-DC-PWM-M
HV-DEV-DC-PWM-C
HV-DEV-DC-PWM-K
HV-DEV-DC-CLK
GND
GND
GND
+24V-RMT-IL-SW
+24V-RMT-IL-SW
J501
2019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920
2
2
UN03
GND
GND
GND
J502
+3.3V_D_EXT
HV-DEV-AC-AMP
Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB
HV-DEV-AC-ENA-Y
HV-DEV-AC-ENA-M
HV-DEV-AC-ENA-C
HV-DEV-AC-ENA-K
HV-DEV-AC-CLK-N
HV-DEV-AC-CLK-P
HV-I2C-SDA
HV-I2C-SCL
HV-TR2-P-PWM
HV-TR2-N-PWM
HV-TR2-VSNS
1
1
HV-TR2-ISNS
HV-TR2-P-CLK
HV-TR2-N-CLK
19181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819
J114
F
A
B
E
C
D
P.7
8/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F UN04 F
DC Controller PCB J182
J183
J122 J119
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819
DUP-MTR-AX
DUP-MTR-A
DUP-MTR-BX
DUP-MTR-B
+3.3V
R-DOOR-SW
REV-FLP-SL-ON
+5V
GND
FSR-RLS-SNS
+5V
GND
EXIT1-SNS
+5V
GND
REV-SNS
+3.3V
GND
+24V-RMT-IL-SW
+24V-RMT-IL-SW
GND
GND
OP-23EXIT-CLK
OP-23EXIT-TX
OP-23EXIT-RX
OP-23EXIT-RESETX
OP-23EXIT-CNCT
OP-EX1T2-SNS
OP-EXIT3-SNS
NC.
Y-TNR-EXISTX
GND
M-TNR-EXISTX
GND
C-TNR-EXISTX
GND
K-TNR-EXISTX
GND
GND
INNER-FIN-TXD
INNER-FIN-RXD
GND
INNER-FIN-MD
INNER-FIN-RESET
GND
INNER-FIN-CNCT
FSR-EXIT-SNS-FIN
+5V-FU
GND
+24V-RMT-FIN
+24V-RMT-FIN
GND
GND
OUTER-FIN-RMT
OUTER-FIN-CNCTX
GND
GND
E E
J1334D
J1334DH 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1334L
COR06 J1213D
J1213DH
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
J1213L
D D
J1168D 4 3 2 1 J1046D 2 1
J1168L 4 3 2 1 J1046L 2 1
SOLD35
SOLD36
SOLD37
SOLD38
SOLD39
SOLD40
SOLD41
SOLD42
A*
B*
A
4 3 2 1
19181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
M 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1099D
SW27 J701
M11 Right Upper Door

Duplex Reverse Open/Close Detection UN10 BUFFER_PASS
Motor Switch 3 Way Unit Driver PCB UN39 UN40 UN41 UN42
J1161D Bottle Unit Bottle Unit Bottle Unit Bottle Unit
C J1161DH 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J702
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617
New/Old New/Old New/Old New/Old or
J1161L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
(Y) (M) (C) (Bk)
23-2ND-EXIT-FULL-SNS
INNER_FINISHER
23-3RD-EXIT-SNS
23-2ND-EXIT-SNS
GND
GND
GND
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
A*
B*
A*
B*
A
B
B B
J1110
J1345D 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J1112D 4 3 2 1 J1113D
J1345LH 1 2 3 3 2 1
J1345L
4 3 2 1 J1112L 4 3 2 1 J1113L
J1017D J1012 J1079 J1250
J1017DH 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J1111
PS51
J1341
A
3 2 1
A*
B*
3 2 1 3 2 1
B
3 2 1 3 2 1
A*
B*
Second Delivery
B
1 2
J1017L 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
/ Reverse Sensor
PS13 PS14 PS12 M M
Fixing Pressure First Delivery Reverse PS52 PS53

Release Sensor Sensor Third Delivery Second Delivery M30 M31
1 2 Sensor
Sensor Paper Full Sensor Duplex Reverse Second Delivery
SL
Motor Motor
A SL06 A
Duplex Reverse
Solenoid 2/3 Delivery Unit
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.8
1215
9/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
To P.3 C-3
Cassette Feeding Unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213

J1097L
F F
OP-CST4-VPASS-SNS
OP-CST3-VPASS-SNS
OP-CST-RESETX
+24V-RMT-PEDE
+24V-RMT-PEDE
OP-CST-CNCT
OP-CST-CLK
OP-CST-RX
OP-CST-TX
+3.3V
GND
GND
GND
13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J601
E UN11 E
Cassette Pedestal Driver PCB
J604 J606 J603 J602 J605 J610

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
M103-OP-FEED-MTR2-AX
M103-OP-FEED-MTR2-A
M103-OP-FEED-MTR2-BX
M103-OP-FEED-MTR2-B
M101-OP-FEED-MTR1-AX
M101-OP-FEED-MTR1-A
M101-OP-FEED-MTR1-BX
M101-OP-FEED-MTR1-B
M102-CST3-LFT-MTR-OUT1
M102-CST3-LFT-MTR-OUT2
SW102-CST3-SIZE2
SW102-CST3-SIZE1
GND
SW102-CST3-SIZE0
SW103-CST3-SIZE2
SW103-CST3-SIZE1
GND
SW103-CST3-SIZE0
SW105-CST4-SIZE2
SW105-CST4-SIZE1
GND
SW105-CST4-SIZE0
SW104-CST4-SIZE2
SW104-CST4-SIZE1
GND
SW104-CST4-SIZE0
+3.3V
GND
OP-CST3-VPASS-SNS
+3.3V
GND
CST3-SIMEN-DET-SNS
+3.3V
GND
CST3-PAPER-DET-SNS
+3.3V
SW101-CST-RDOOR-SW
+3.3V
GND
OP-CST4-VPASS-SNS
+3.3V
GND
CST4-SIMEN-DET-SNS
+3.3V
GND
CST4-PAPER-DET-SNS
+3.3V
GND
CST3-VLM-B-SNS
+3.3V
GND
CST3-VLM-A-SNS
+3.3V
GND
CST4-VLM-B-SNS
+3.3V
GND
CST4-VLM-A-SNS
D J1196 D
J1252 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
PS109 PS107
J1187D 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1188D 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Cassette 3 Cassette 3
J1187LH
J1187L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J1188LH Paper Level Paper Level
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J1188L
J1135D
Sensor Sensor
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J1134D
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
B A
SOLD20
SOLD21
J1135L J1134L
A
B
A*
B*
A*
B*
A
C C
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1
M M M 2 1 J1129D
2 1 J1128 J1263
J1123 J1125 J1129L J1262
M103 M101 M102 3 2 1 J1124 3 2 1 3 2 1
J1126 3 2 1 J1127 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
Cassette 3, 4 Cassette 3, 4 Cassette 3, 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
Pickup Motor Feed Motor Lifter Motor 2 1
PS101 PS104 PS102 SW101 PS106 PS105 PS103 PS110 PS108

Cassette 3 Cassette 3 Cassette 3 Cassette Right Door Cassette 4 Cassette 4 Cassette 4 Cassette 4 Cassette 4
Vertical Path Lifter Sensor Paper Sensor Open/Close Vertical Path Lifter Sensor Paper Sensor Paper Level Paper Level
Sensor Detection Switch Sensor Sensor Sensor
B A
B B
J1131D J1130D J1132D

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J1133D
J1131LH J1130LH J1132LH J1133LH

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J1133L
J1131L J1130L J1132L
J1137 4 3 2 1
J1139
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
J1138
4 3 2 1 J1136
4
2
1
4
3
4
3
2
1
4
3
A A
SW102 SW103 SW105 SW104

Cassette 3 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Cassette 4
Size Switch Size Switch Size Switch Size Switch
A B B A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.9
1216
10/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Controller CONTROL PANEL

F F
LCD
(Option_A)
Card
Reader
UN47
(US Only) Wireless Touch
(Option_B) LAN PCB
Panel
CC-VI I/F CPU
(Option) Cable
FM04 KEY
Controller
CC-VI I/F
Card Reader IF kit Fan
E Cable E
RS-Conv or Card Reader
USB DEVICEPORT CABLE

USB (H) USB (D) Ethernet
J21 J20 J4504 J5 J3 J7 J6010 J15 J4503 J4502 J4501

CC-VI Serial I/F USB UI POWER UI IF
MEMORY
J9500
LS
D D
J4511
DCON
DDI-P I/F
UN05
Main Controller PCB
HDD
FAN/ RMT POWER FAN/ RMT
J4512 MAIN POWER SW
J6004
SATA Power
HDD POWER SW SEESAW
C (Default) J6003 J4513 C
SATA Signal
Power
C_PSU
J4509
ROMBUS POWER
or FAX I/F J6001 FAX I/F L2 FAX
J5000
J4506 J4508 J4505
MINERVA2
(MDS)
Removable
(Option)
HDD
B (Option) B
G3 FAX L1 L2
HDMI
A READER A
(Option)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.10
1217
11/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F FAX F
SP1 UN69
FAX Speaker L2S_MJB
UN67 L234S_MJB
1st Line Modular PCB
2
(J4) (J4)
J1400 J1402
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
J41L
E 2 1
E
J41DH COR10
J41D
1LINE_CT2
1LINE_CT1
1LINE_T2
1LINE_T1
1LINE_L2
1LINE_L1
2LINE_L1
2LINE_L2
roop1
roop2
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
J3 J1401
J4
(J4)
D D
J6
FC_USB_IN
3 2 1
1 2 3
GND
MONI_USB
J8
UN68
FAX 1st Line PCB
L2S_FAX_Board
(J403)
J1 J9 J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
C C
#RESET_FAX
EXB_ADDR8
EXB_ADDR7
EXB_ADDR6
EXB_ADDR5
EXB_ADDR4
EXB_ADDR3
EXB_ADDR2
EXB_ADDR1
GND
#EXB_CS1
+12V
#EXB_WE
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
GND
#FOFFHK
#EXB_OE
#MODEM_SNS
EXB_DT7
EXB_DT6
EXB_DT5
EXB_DT4
EXB_DT3
EXB_DT2
EXB_DT1
EXB_DT0
#FCID_USB
+12V
#INT_FAX
#FCID
+3.3R
GND
B B
6 5 4 3 2 1 25242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
J4507 J4506 J4508
J4505
UN05
Main Controller PCB
A A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.11
1218
12/12
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
HDD
HDD Option
E E
Removable HDD
J6003
SATA
UN05 HDD
J6004
Main Controller PCB SATA POWER
D D
VOICE Option
C VOICE C
UN05 J13 GUIDANCE
Main Controller PCB
OR
VOICE
OPERATION
B B
A A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.12
1219
ADF
1/2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Single Pass DADF

SL1
F UN_BO5 Stamp Solenoid F
SL
UN_SNS1 PS_A4 PS_A3 PS_R3 Original Output
1 2
Original Width AB/ Inch LTR-R/ LGL Large/Small Indicator
J466L
Volume Sensor Sensor Sensor
1 3
2 1 J466DH
1 2
UN_BO4
2
S P J466D 2 1
PS_N1 Original set
J468L 3 2 1 PS_A2 PS_A1 PS_R1
3 2 1
J457
3 2 1
J458 J701
J465L
Original indicator
1 2 3 3 2 1 Arch Post-separation STM2 STM1 STM3
Delivery Tray
J468DH 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J465D Sensor Sensor Sensor
Sensor 2 1 Pickup Motor Registration Motor Read Motor
J468D
3 2 1
S P M M M
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J478L 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
J460 J474 J451
J461 J464L J471
J478LH 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 J473
3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 J464D
E 2 1 J478D J472 E
J2001L
J477L CL1 1 2 3
151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2001LH
Separation Clutch 3 2 1 FAN_A1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 J2001D
J477D
CL J475L Cooling Fan
1 2 J475LH 1 2 3 4 5
J477DH
5 4 3 2 1
123
J467L 1 2
J467DH 2 1 J475D
D J467D D
READ_M_B+
READ_M_A+
READ_M_B-
READ_M_A-
SLEEP-POWER
EJCT_TRAY_S
SEPA_M_B+
SEPA_M_A+
SEPA_M_B-
SEPA_M_A-
RESI_M_B+
RESI_M_A+
FAN_ALARM
RESI_M_B-
RESI_M_A-
EMP LED
EMP_LED
STMP_SOL
LGL_S2
A4LT_S
LOOP_S
+3.3VS
LGL_S
EMP_S
SEPA_S
MV_CL
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VR
+24V
VR
J407
NC
J405
J410 J409
J404
151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
UN_BO1
ADF Driver PCB
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223242526272829 1 2 3
C
J408 J401
50 J402
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VR
SDA
SCL
COVER_S
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
+5VR
+24U
READ_S
US_PLS
US_PLS
2READ_S
MOVE_HP_S
RESI_S
+3.3V
SIZE1_S
SIZE2_S
SIZE3_S
SIZE4_S
+24U
GND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
44 S_DF_READ_MTR_CLK
46 S_DF_SEPA_MTR_CLK
48 S_DF_RESI_MTR_CLK
41 S_ADF_RESET
16 GLASS_HP_S
50 FFC_JACKAL
38 SLEEP-OUT
S_READ_S
S_SEPA_S
B B
32 S_EXCL_0
S_RESI_S
20 SDA_ADF
2READ_S
18 SCL_ADF
28 S_S2M_0
30 S_M2S_0
14 LOOP_S
+3.4V
37 +3.4J
GND
GND
GND
GND
10 GND
11 GND
12 GND
13 GND
15 GND
17 GND
19 GND
21 GND
22 GND
23 GND
25 GND
26 GND
27 GND
29 GND
31 GND
33 GND
36 GND
39 GND
40 GND
42 GND
43 GND
45 GND
47 GND
49 GND
24 AD0
34 +5V
35 +5V
J453D J1027D J476L
J1027DH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3 2 1
13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 J476LH
J1027L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
MT2
MT6
1 2
J476D
J453LH J453L J104
MT8
J103
3 2 1 50
J635
MT7
J634 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
MT3
J462
J459 J478 J454 Main Controlle PCB
MT1
MT5
6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
A
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
UN_BO8 UN_BO7 J452 J463

A
Double Feed 3 2 1
UN_BO6
Double Feed S P PS_A9
PS_A5 PS_A6 PS_A7 Detection PCB
Detection PCB Paper Width
MT4
PS_R2 Glass Movement

Cover Lead Lead (Transmission) Sensor
(Reception) HP Sensor
Open/Closed Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Registration
Sensor Sensor
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.1
1220
2/2
A
B
E
C
D
1 FFC_ADF 1
8
8
2 GND 2
3 GND 3
4 GND 4
5 RE_A_P 5
6 RE_A_N 6
7 GND 7
8 RD_A_P 8
Single Pass DADF
9 RD_A_N 9
10 GND 10
11 RCLK_A_P 11
12 RCLK_A_N 12
13 GND 13
7
7
14 RC_A_P 14
15 RC_A_N 15
16 GND 16
17 RB_A_P 17
18 RB_A_N 18
19 GND 19
20 RA_A_P 20
21 RA_A_N 21
22 GND 22
23 GND 23
24 BD_SCLK_1 24
25 GND 25
26 BD_TX_1 26
6
6
27 GND 27
28 AP_LOAD_11 28
29 AP_LOAD_01 29
J2
30 GND 30
31 BC_RX_11 31
32 GND 32
J401
33 BC_RX_01 33
LED_UNIT_R
DC_OUT_R
34 GND 34
1 2 3 4 5
I_OUT_R1
35 GND 35
I_OUT_R2
36 GND 36
I_OUT_R3
37 GND 37
I_OUT_R4
38 GND 38
DC_OUT_L
5
5
39 +6V 39
I_OUT_L1
40 +6V 40
I_OUT_L2
41 +6V 41
I_OUT_L3
LED PCB
42 GND 42
UN_BO2
I_OUT_L4
CMOS PCB
43 GND 43
N.C 44 GND 44
N.C 45 +12V 45
N.C 46 +12V 46
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
1221
47 +12V 47
J1
LED_UNIT_L
48 +12V 48
J101
49 GND 49
50 +3.4V 50
50
50
4
4
J105
3
3
Main Controlle PCB
2
2
1
1
A
B
E
C
D
P.2
Control Panel
1/2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
Control Panel
Option
NFC PCB Control

Panel
Speaker
E J1 E
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(J9)
2
J17
SPI_MISO
SPI_MOSI
SPI_SCK
SPI_PCS
NFC_INT
+3.3NFC
GND
GND
GND
GND
SPM
SPP
N.C.
(J8)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3
J1005 J14
J1009
Foot Switch
+3.3LCD
302928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
302928272625242322212019181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D +3.3LCD
J13 D
+3.3LCD (J5) (J11)
+3.3LCD SKEY0
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
N.C. SKEY1
GND SKEY2
GND SKEY3
*LVDSA_N J1001 SKEY4
LVDSA_P SKEY5 J1
GND SKEY6
*LVDSB_N SKEY7
LVDSB_P GND
GND
CN1 *LVDSC_N J1008
10.1inch WSVGA LCD LVDSC_P
J2
GND
*LVDSCLK_N (J7) (J6) Control Panel KEY PCB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
DKEY0
121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LVDSCLK_P
C C
GND
+3.3LCD or GND UN18 DKEY1
DKEY2
DKEY5
GND
GND Control Panel CPU PCB DKEY7
GND SOFT_SW_N
J1002
GND POWER_ES_LED J2
PWMO LED_TA_G
BKLTEN_BLON_MASK LED_ST_G
+12S LED_TA_R
+12S POWER_LED
+12S GND
+12S
B B
PANEL_YN
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
PANEL_XN
J1007
10.1inch Touch Panel PANEL_XP
PANEL_YP
A A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.1
1222
2/2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
UN05
Control Panel Main Controller PCB
J4501 J4502
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819 1 2 3 4 5 6
J4502
HPDR_LCD_ON
SET_ROM_LED
COR04
*DDI1_AUXN_S
DDI1_AUXP_S
INTOUT_HMD
INTOUT_NFC
*DDI1_TXNO
NFC_RXD_N
NFC_TXD_N
DDI1_TXPO
SOFTSW_N
UI_RXD_N
UI_TXD_N
FCT_MOD
CPU_RDY
LCD_ON
+12S
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
N.C.
+5A
E E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819 5 4 3 2 1
J1021
J1020 J1021
D D
UN18
C
Control Panel CPU PCB C
J1024
J19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
I2C_DISABLE_N I2C_DISABLE_N
6 5 4 3 2 1
+3.3JIN +3.3JIN
ONPA_CLK ONPA_CLK
J11
Motion Sensor ONPA_MASK ONPA_MASK
J1024
GND GND
SENSE_DET SENSE_DET
B B
J18
J22
J21
Device Port
LED PCB
3 2 1
1 2 3
3 2 1
J1
J20
A A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.2
1223
1/2
Reader
A
B
E
C
D
50 +3.4V_RCON Loop Back50
49 GND 49
48 +12V_RCON +12V48
47 +12V_RCON +12V47
8
8
46 +12V_RCON +12V46
45 +12V_RCON +12V45
44 GND 44
43 GND 43
42 GND 42
READER
41 +6VA_RCON +6V 41
40 +6VA_RCON +6V 40
39 +6VA_RCON +6V 39
38 GND 38
37 GND 37
36 GND 36
35 GND 35
34 GND 34
33 BC_RX_00 SDOUT2
33
32 GND 32
31 BC_RX_10 SDOUT1
31
30 GND 30
29 AP_LOAD_00 SENB229
7
7
28 AP_LOAD_10 SENB128
27 GND 27
26 BC_TX_0 SDATA26
25 GND 25
24 BC_SCLK_0 SDCLK24
23 GND 23
22 GND 22
J536(J2)
21 RA_R_N LVDO0-
21
20 RA_R_P LVDO0+
20
LED_UNIT_R
19 GND 19
18 RB_R_N LVDO1-
18
1 2 3 4 5
17 RB_R_P LVDO1+
17
16 GND 16
J535
15 RC_R_N LVDO2-
15
14 RC_R_P LVDO2+
14
LED PCB
13 GND 13
(J401)
12 RCLK_R_N LVCK-12
11 RCLK_R_P LVCK+11
10 GND 10
J537 (J1)
6
6
9 RD_R_N LVDO3-9
8 RD_R_P LVDO3+
8
LED_UNIT_L
7 GND 7
1 2 3 4 5
6 RE_R_N LVDO4-6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213
5 RE_R_P LVDO4+
5
CMOS PCB
UN_BO2
4 GND 4
3 GND 3
2 GND 2
1 FFC_RD Loop Back1
50
50
J7018
J101
5
5
J5015
J7628
UN05
M_B+ (BOUT1)
M
M_B- (BOUT2)
M_A+ (AOUT1)
Main Controller PCB
4 3 2 1
STM1
M_A- (AOUT2)
4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
Scanner Motor
J35D
1224
J35DH
J7204
GND
+5V_RCON
4
4
J5004D
EJECT_S GND
SLEEP-OUT SIZE_INCH
+3.4J_RCON +5V
J5007
S_READ_S GND
2 1
S_RESI_S SIZE_AB
(PULL_DOWN) +5V
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
(Inch)
Sensor
4 3
1 2 3
+3.4J_RCON
PS_R2
Original Size
DF_RESI_CLU
DF_RIKAN_SOL
S_DF_READ_MTR_CLK
S_DF_SEPA_MTR_CLK
ADF_SEL
J5005
2 1
EXCL_0
J5004DH
M2S_0
(AB)
1 2 3
S2M_0 4 3
Sensor
PS_R1
ADF_RESET
Original Size
GND
19181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819
TO_ADF-SU5
3
3
J5006
ADF_DRIVER [ ADF-SU5 ]
BOARD
GND
SIZE_INCH
HEATER RELAY
J2
+5V_RCON
1 2 3
GND
SIZE_AB
+5V_RCON 1 2
GND
J16
J7197
GND
1 2 3
3 4
(Rear)
Sensor
GND
PS_N2
+24V_RCON
Open/Closed
+24V DF_OPEN_30
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
Copyboard Cover
GND
+3.4V_RCON
J533 (J17)
J5003
+5V_RCON
HP
2
2
J38D
GND
DF_OPEN_5
GND
+3.4J_RCON
181716151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J7600
J5008
J5009
J5002D
J5002DH
1 2
3 2 1
1 2 3
3 4
1 2 3
PS_A1
HP Sensor
Scanner Unit
1 2
1 2 3
Sensor
(Front)
3 4
PS_N1
1
1
Open/Closed
Copyboard Cover
J5001
F
A
B
E
C
D
P.1
2/2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Reader Heater
F F
2
HTR8
Reader Heater
2
3 2 1 J5013F
E
3 2 1
J5010M HTR7 E
Reader Heater
1
3 2 1 J5014F
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
J5011M
J5005M J5005F
100V_H/200V_H
100V_H/200V_H
D D
100V_N_RL
200V_N_RL
100V_N_RL
200V_N_RL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J3
C
HEATER RELAY BOARD C
J1
4 3 2 1
B B
100V_H/200V_H
200V_N
100V_N
J4002
3 2 1
TO_PRINTER
A A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.2
1225
Software Counter Specifications

Software counter is classified according to the input number as follows:
No. Counter item No. Counter item

000 to 099 Toner Bottle 500 to 599 Scan
100 to 199 Total 600 to 699 Mail Box print, memory media print
200 to 299 Copy 700 to 799 Reception print, Advanced Box print, network print, mobile print
300 to 399 Print 800 to 899 Report print
400 to 499 Copy + Print 900 to 999 Transmission
- Description of codes in the table -

• Large: Paper larger than B4 size
• Small: Paper equal to or smaller than B4
CAUTION:
When printing in the free size setting, it is counted in the large.
• The number 1 and 2 in "Counter item": The count for large size paper
• The size as which "B4" should be counted (service mode: B4-L-CNT)
0: Small (default)
1: Large
• Total A: Total excluding local copy
• Total B: Total excluding local copy + Mail Box print
• Copy: Local copy
• Copy A: Local copy + Mail Box print
• Print: PDL print + Report print + Mail Box print
• Print A: PDL print + Report print
• Scan: Black scan + Color scan
Related Service Mode

COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4-L-CNT
000 to 099
Number on Counter item Number on Counter item

the screen the screen
064 The number of premature replacements of the To- 073 The number of installations of a new Toner Con-
ner Container (Black) tainer (Magenta)
ner Container (Yellow) tainer (Cyan)
ner Container (Magenta) tainer + the number of premature replacements
(Black)
ner Container (Cyan) tainer + the number of premature replacements
(Yellow)
071 The number of installations of a new Toner Con- 083 The number of installations of a new Toner Con-
tainer (Black) tainer + the number of premature replacements
(Magenta)
072 The number of installations of a new Toner Con- 084 The number of installations of a new Toner Con-
tainer (Yellow) tainer + the number of premature replacements
(Cyan)
100 to 199

101 Total 1 140 Large A (2-sided)
102 Total 2 141 Small A (2-sided)
1226

103 Total (Large) 142 Total A (Single Color 1)
104 Total (Small) 143 Total A (Single Color 2)
105 Total (Full Color 1) 144 Total A (Full Color/Large)
106 Total (Full Color 2) 145 Total A (Full Color/Small)
108 Total (Black 1) 146 Total A (Full Color + Single Color/Large)
109 Total (Black 2) 147 Total A (Full Color + Single Color/Small)
110 Total (Single Color/Large) 148 Total A (Full Color + Single Color 2)
111 Total (Single Color/Small) 149 Total A (Full Color + Single Color 1)
112 Total (Black/Large) 150 Total B1
113 Total (Black/Small) 151 Total B2
114 Total 1 (2-sided) 152 Total B (Large)
115 Total 2 (2-sided) 153 Total B (Small)
116 Large (2-sided) 154 Total B (Full Color 1)
117 Small (2-sided) 155 Total B (Full Color 2)
118 Total (Single Color 1) 156 Total B (Black 1)
119 Total (Single Color 2) 157 Total B (Black 2)
120 Total (Full Color/Large) 158 Total B (Single Color/Large)
121 Total (Full Color/Small) 159 Total B (Single Color/Small)
122 Total (Full Color + Single Color/Large) 160 Total B (Black/Large)
123 Total (Full Color + Single Color/Small) 161 Total B (Black/Small)
124 Total (Full Color + Single Color 2) 162 Total B1 (2-sided)
125 Total (Full Color + Single Color 1) 163 Total B2 (2-sided)
126 Total A1 164 Large B (2-sided)
127 Total A2 165 Small B (2-sided)
128 Total A (Large) 166 Total B (Single Color 1)
129 Total A (Small) 167 Total B (Single Color 2)
130 Total A (Full Color 1) 168 Total B (Full Color/Large)
131 Total A (Full Color 2) 169 Total B (Full Color/Small)
132 Total A (Black 1) 170 Total B (Full Color + Single Color/Large)
133 Total A (Black 2) 171 Total B (Full Color + Single Color/Small)
134 Total A (Single Color/Large) 172 Total B (Full Color + Single Color 2)
135 Total A (Single Color/Small) 173 Total B (Full Color + Single Color 1)
136 Total A (Black/Large) 181 Unidentified Toner Bottle (Black)
137 Total A (Black/Small) 182 Unidentified Toner Bottle (Yellow)
138 Total A1 (2-sided) 183 Unidentified Toner Bottle (Magenta)
139 Total A2 (2-sided) 184 Unidentified Toner Bottle (Cyan)
200 to 299

201 Copy (Total 1) 250 Copy A (Black 2)
202 Copy (Total 2) 251 Copy A (Full Color/Large)
203 Copy (Large) 252 Copy A (Full Color/Small)
204 Copy (Small) 253 Copy A (Single Color/Large)
205 Copy A (Total 1) 254 Copy A (Single Color/Small)
206 Copy A (Total 2) 255 Copy A (Black/Large)
207 Copy A (Large) 256 Copy A (Black/Small)
208 Copy A (Small) 257 Copy A (Full Color + Single Color/Large)
209 Local copy (Total 1) 258 Copy A (Full Color + Single Color/Small)
210 Local copy (Total 2) 259 Copy A (Full Color + Single Color 2)
211 Local copy (Large) 260 Copy A (Full Color + Single Color 1)
212 Local copy (Small) 261 Copy A (Full Color/Large/2-sided)
217 Copy (Full Color 1) 262 Copy A (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
1227

218 Copy (Full Color 2) 263 Copy A (Single Color/Large/2-sided)
219 Copy (Single Color 1) 264 Copy A (Single Color/Small/2-sided)
220 Copy (Single Color 2) 265 Copy A (Black/Large/2-sided)
221 Copy (Black 1) 266 Copy A (Black/Small/2-sided)
222 Copy (Black 2) 273 Local copy (Full Color 1)
223 Copy (Full Color/Large) 274 Local copy (Full Color 2)
224 Copy (Full Color/Small) 275 Local copy (Single Color 1)
225 Copy (Single Color/Large) 276 Local copy (Single Color 2)
226 Copy (Single Color/Small) 277 Local copy (Black 1)
227 Copy (Black/Large) 278 Local copy (Black 2)
228 Copy (Black/Small) 279 Local copy (Full Color/Large)
229 Copy (Full Color + Single Color/Large) 280 Local copy (Full Color/Small)
230 Copy (Full Color + Single Color/Small) 281 Local copy (Single Color/Large)
231 Copy (Full Color + Single Color/2) 282 Local copy (Single Color/Small)
232 Copy (Full Color + Single Color/1) 283 Local copy (Black/Large)
233 Copy (Full Color/Large/2-sided) 284 Local copy (Black/Small)
234 Copy (Full Color/Small/2-sided) 285 Local copy (Full Color + Single Color/Large)
235 Copy (Single Color/Large/2-sided) 286 Local copy (Full Color + Single Color/Small)
236 Copy (Single Color/Small/2-sided) 287 Local copy (Full Color + Single Color 2)
237 Copy (Black/Large/2-sided) 288 Local copy (Full Color + Single Color 1)
238 Copy (Black/Small/2-sided) 289 Local copy (Full Color/Large/2-sided)
245 Copy A (Full Color 1) 290 Local copy (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
246 Copy A (Full Color 2) 291 Local copy (Single Color/Large/2-sided)
247 Copy A (Single Color 1) 292 Local copy (Single Color/Small/2-sided)
248 Copy A (Single Color 2) 293 Local copy (Black/Large/2-sided)
249 Copy A (Black 1) 294 Local copy (Black/Small/2-sided)
300 to 399

301 Print (Total 1) 332 PDL print (Total 2)
302 Print (Total 2) 333 PDL print (Large)
303 Print (Large) 334 PDL print (Small)
304 Print (Small) 335 PDL print (Full Color 1)
305 Print A (Total 1) 336 PDL print (Full Color 2)
306 Print A (Total 2) 337 PDL print (Single Color 1)
307 Print A (Large) 338 PDL print (Single Color 2)
308 Print A (Small) 339 PDL print (Black 1)
309 Print (Full Color 1) 340 PDL print (Black 2)
310 Print (Full Color 2) 341 PDL print (Full Color/Large)
311 Print (Single Color 1) 342 PDL print (Full Color/Small)
312 Print (Single Color 2) 343 PDL print (Single Color/Large)
313 Print (Black 1) 344 PDL print (Single Color/Small)
314 Print (Black 2) 345 PDL print (Black/Large)
315 Print (Full Color/Large) 346 PDL print (Black/Small)
316 Print (Full Color/Small) 351 PDL print (Full Color/Large/2-sided)
317 Print (Single Color/Large) 352 PDL print (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
318 Print (Single Color/Small) 353 PDL print (Single Color/Large/2-sided)
319 Print (Black/Large) 354 PDL print (Single Color/Small/2-sided)
320 Print (Black/Small) 355 PDL print (Black/Large/2-dided)
321 Print (Full Color + Single Color/Large) 356 PDL print (Black/Small/2-sided)
322 Print (Full Color + Single Color/Small) 371 Tiered total (High)
323 Print (Full Color + Single Color/2) 372 Tiered total (Std)
1228

324 Print (Full Color + Single Color/1) 373 Tiered total (Low)
325 Print (Full Color/Large/2-sided) 374 Tiered large (High)
326 Print (Full Color/Small/2-sided) 375 Tiered large (Std)
327 Print (Single Color/Large/2-sided) 376 Tiered large (Low)
328 Print (Single Color/Small/2-sided) 377 Tiered small (High)
329 Print (Black/Large/2-dided) 378 Tiered small (Std)
330 Print (Black/Small/2-sided) 379 Tiered small (Low)
331 PDL print (Total 1)
400 to 499

401 Copy + Print (Full Color/Large) 415 Copy + Print (Single Color/Large)
402 Copy + Print (Full Color/Small) 416 Copy + Print (Single Color/Small)
403 Copy + Print (Black/Large) 417 Copy + Print (Full Color/Large/2-sided)
404 Copy + Print (Black/Small) 418 Copy + Print (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
405 Copy + Print (Black 2) 419 Copy + Print (Single Color/Large/2-sided)
406 Copy + Print (Black 1) 420 Copy + Print (Single Color/Small/2-sided)
407 Copy + Print (Full Color + Single Color/Large) 421 Copy + Print (Black/Large/2-sided)
408 Copy + Print (Full Color + Single Color/Small) 422 Copy + Print (Black/Small/2-sided)
409 Copy + Print (Full Color + Single Color/2) 471 Long original counter (Total)
410 Copy + Print (Full Color + Single Color/1) 472 Long original counter (Full Color)
411 Copy + Print (Large) 473 Long original counter (Black)
412 Copy + Print (Small) 474 Long original counter (Single Color)
413 Copy + Print (2) 475 Long original counter (Full Color + Single Color)
414 Copy + Print (1)
500 to 599

501 Scan (Total 1) 507 Black scan (Large)
502 Scan (Total 2) 508 Black scan (small)
503 Black scan (Large) 509 Color scan (Total 1)
504 Scan (Small) 510 Color scan (Total 2)
505 Black scan (Total 1) 511 Color scan (Large)
506 Black scan (Total 2) 512 Color scan (Small)
600 to 699

601 Mail Box print (Total 1) 622 Mail Box print (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
602 Mail Box print (Total 2) 623 Mail Box print (Single Color/Large/2-sided)
603 Mail Box print (Large) 624 Mail Box print (Single Color/Small/2-sided)
604 Mail Box print (Small) 625 Mail Box print (Black/Large/2-dided)
605 Mail Box print (Full Color 1) 626 Mail Box print (Black/Small/2-sided)
606 Mail Box print (Full Color 2) 631 Memory media print (Total 1)
607 Mail Box print (Single Color 1) 632 Memory media print (Total 2)
608 Mail Box print (Single Color 2) 633 Memory media print (Large)
609 Mail Box print (Black 1) 634 Memory media print (Small)
610 Mail Box print (Black 2) 635 Memory media print (Full Color 1)
611 Mail Box print (Full Color/Large) 636 Memory media print (Full Color 2)
612 Mail Box print (Full Color/Small) 639 Memory media print (Black 1)
1229

613 Mail Box print (Single Color/Large) 640 Memory media print (Black 2)
614 Mail Box print (Single Color/Small) 641 Memory media print (Full Color/Large)
615 Mail Box print (Black/Large) 642 Memory media print (Full Color/Small)
616 Mail Box print (Black/Small) 645 Memory media print (Black/Large)
617 Mail Box print (Full Color + Single Color/Large) 646 Memory media print (Black/Small)
618 Mail Box print (Full Color + Single Color/Small) 651 Memory media print (Full Color/Large/2-sided)
619 Mail Box print (Full Color + Single Color 2) 652 Memory media print (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
620 Mail Box print (Full Color + Single Color 1) 655 Memory media print (Black/Large/2-sided)
621 Mail Box print (Full Color/Large/2-sided) 656 Memory media print (Black/Small/2-sided)
700 to 799

701 Reception print (Total 1) 735 Advanced Box print (Full Color/Large)
702 Reception print (Total 2) 736 Advanced Box print (Full Color/Small)
703 Reception print (Large) 737 Advanced Box print (Black/Large)
704 Reception print (Small) 738 Advanced Box print (Black/Small)
705 Reception print (Full Color 1) 739 Advanced Box print (Full Color/Large/2-sided)
706 Reception print (Full Color 2) 740 Advanced Box print (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
709 Reception print (Black 1) 741 Advanced Box print (Black/Large/2-sided)
710 Reception print (Black 2) 742 Advanced Box print (Black/Small/2-sided)
711 Reception print (Full Color/Large) 743 Network print (Total 1)
712 Reception Print (Full Color/Small) 744 Network print (Total 2)
715 Reception Print (Black/Large) 745 Network print (Large)
716 Reception Print (Black/Small) 746 Network print (Small)
721 Reception Print (Full Color/Large/2-sided) 747 Network print (Full Color 1)
722 Reception Print (Full Color/Small/2-sided) 748 Network print (Full Color 2)
725 Reception Print (Black/Large/2-dided) 749 Network print (Black 1)
726 Reception Print (Black/Small/2-sided) 750 Network print (Black 2)
727 Advanced Box print (Total 1) 751 Network print (Full Color/Large)
728 Advanced Box print (Total 2) 752 Network print (Full Color/Small)
729 Advanced Box print (Large) 753 Network print (Black/Large)
730 Advanced Box print (Small) 754 Network print (Black/Small)
731 Advanced Box print (Full Color 1) 755 Network print (Full Color/Large/2-sided)
732 Advanced Box print (Full Color 2) 756 Network print (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
733 Advanced Box print (Black 1) 757 Network print (Black/Large/2-sided)
734 Advanced Box print (Black 2) 758 Network print (Black/Small/2-sided)
800 to 899

801 Report print (Total 1) 815 Report print (Black/Large)
802 Report print (Total 2) 816 Report print (Black/Small)
803 Report print (Large) 821 Report print (Full Color/Large/2-sided)
804 Report print (Small) 822 Report print (Full Color/Small/2-sided)
805 Report print (Full Color 1) 825 Report print (Black/Large/2-sided)
806 Report print (Full Color 2) 826 Report print (Black/Small/2-sided)
809 Report print (Black 1)
810 Report print (Black 2)
811 Report print (Full Color/Large)
812 Report print (Full Color/Small)
1230
900 to 999

915 Transmission scan total 2 (Color) 945 Transmission scan/E-mail (Color)
916 Transmission scan total 2 (Black) 946 Transmission scan/E-mail (Black)
917 Transmission scan total 3 (Color) 959 Memory media scan (Color)
918 Transmission scan total 3 (Black) 960 Memory media scan (Black)
921 Transmission scan total 5 (Color) 961 Application scan (Total 1)
922 Transmission scan total 5 (Black) 962 Application black scan (Total 1)
929 Transmission scan total 6 (Color) 963 Application color scan (Total 1)
930 Transmission scan total 6 (Black) 964 Advanced Box scan (Color)
937 Mail Box scan (Color) 965 Advanced Box scan (Black)
938 Mail Box scan (Black)
939 Remote scan (Color)
940 Remote scan (Black)
1231
Removal
Removal
Overview
• User data kept by the machine contains address books and inbox documents that users can recognize.
• For security, the Settings/Registration menu for user is provided to delete data on FLASH PCB and perform overwrite deletion
to render user data on Storage unrecoverable.
• Before the removal of machine, be sure to explain to the user that the above mode must be used to completely delete data.
When performing the user operation as the substitute, make sure that the service staff executes this to prevent the information
leak of user data.
■ Cancelling the Device Registration

If Data Backup Service is used, it is required to perform the following steps in the order.
1. Stop using the Data Backup Service. (Operation on CBIO side)
2. Delete all the backup data. (Operation on CBIO side)
3. Cancel the device registration. (Operation on the device side)
NOTE:
For the above-mentioned procedure, see the User's Guide for Data Backup Service or the Service Manual for the imageRUNNER
ADVANCE system.
If the User's Guide is not available, see the technical documents published by each sales company.
CAUTION:
Be sure to cancel the device registration before deleting the user, because the device registration cannot be cancelled after
deleting the user data.
■ User data deletion

• To delete user data, execute Settings/Registration > Management Settings > System Management > Initialize All Data/
Settings. Performing Initialize All Data/Settings returns setting values of Settings/Registration menu to their factory defaults.
• Deletion Mode can be changed. Normally, "Once with 0 (Null) Data" can sufficiently delete data. Note that increasing the
number of overwrite increases the time required for the deletion operation.
NOTE:
• When you perform Initialize All Data/Settings, license and data of MEAP application are initialized to the state same as when
the HDD is replaced. If any MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed, disable the MEAP
application and uninstall it in advance.
• Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.
■ Deletion of Service Mode Settings

The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user's request. In that case, the service mode setting values should
be changed back to the default values before removing the machine.
Work Procedure
If the user uses MEAP applications, ask the user to uninstall the MEAP applications if necessary.
■ User data delete procedure

1. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Initialize All Data/Settings
2. Select a deletion mode.
1232
Removal
3. Press [Start].
If the user has not given any instruction on which item in the deletion mode should be used, select the default "Once with 0
(Null) Data".
NOTE:
• When all the data are initialized, the user data on the HDD and the user data on the Flash PCB are deleted. For the items to
be deleted, refer to the backup list.
• Performing "Initialize All Data" turns auto gradation adjustment values and TPM settings to OFF. Therefore, to enable normal
operation the next time, the operation performed at installation is necessary.
• Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.
Report output upon completion of Initialize All Data/Settings

A report is output after "Initialize All Data/Settings" is completed.
Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details when executing Initialize All Data/Settings
upon user's request.
Operation after Initialize All Data/Settings

The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data/Settings without displaying the message (Turn OFF the main
power supply on the right side of the machine) on the screen to prompt shutdown.
The report is output after startup.
******************************
*** System Information ***
******************************
<< Initialize All Data/Settings Report >>
Serial Number ZZZ99999

Device Name iR-ADV XXXX (iAXXXX)
Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Once with Random Data (*1)
The following data stored in the device has been completely erased.
- Data stored in the temporary data area

- User generated data
- Settings under Settings/Registration (restored to factory defaults)
1233
Removal
*1 display following one.

"Once with 0 (Null) Data"
"Once with Random Data"
"3 Times with Random Data"
"9 Times with Random Data"
"DoD Standard"
Limitations
• The language of the report is only English, and cannot be changed.
• The report is output without fail (a function to select ON/OFF of report output is not provided).
• There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper.
• Only the output of this report remains in the job log.
■ Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values

Service Mode Lev1 > Function> CLEAR > MN-CONT
NOTE:
• When MN-CON clear is executed, the address book on the HDD is not deleted. As for the user data, initialize all the data.
• When MN-CON clear is executed, the password for the security policies will be deleted.
1234
Target PCBs of Automatic Update
Target PCBs of Automatic Update

The following PCBs are mentioned in the System Service Manual as PCBs supported by the automatic update function.
List of Target PCBs of Automatic Update
Category Target PCB Service Mode

(COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION)
Printer engine DC Controller PCB DC-CON
Reader/ADF Main Controller PCB R-CON
Inner Finisher Finisher Controller PCB SORTER
Staple/Booklet Finish- Finisher Controller PCB SORTER
er SORT-SLV
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB SDL-STCH
Puncher Unit Puncher Controller PCB PUNCH
Buffer Path Unit Buffer Path Controller PCB BF-PASS
1235
List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored

The following items are restored when a DCM file obtained by using [Settings/Registration] > [Back Up/Restore] or [Backup/
Restoration Using Service Mode] is exported.
Purpose for Using the Function
Case Export/ Import Use Case

A Export from and import to the same device • Used as backup in preparation for a device failure
• Used as backup before changing settings
B Export from and import to a different device of • Collectively migrate data when replacing the host machine
the same model • Copy the settings to multiple devices (during kitting)
C Export from and import to a different model • Migrate the settings from the old model to the new model when replacing
the host machine
• Migrate the settings of the base machine to a different model for a large-
scale user
NOTE:
For the details of the function, refer to "Backup/Restoration" of the System Service Manual.
Initial screen Main item Intermediate Sub item Case A Case B Case C
item
BOARD OPTION - MENU-1 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-S Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY STRD-POS Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X-MG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJY-DF2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-T Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-L Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-X Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-Z Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD SH-TRGT Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100-RG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100-GB Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-G Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-B Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M1 Restored - -
1236
item
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2GB Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2RG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2G2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2G10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-R2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-R10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-B2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-B10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-G2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-G10 Restored - -
1237
item
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-K2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-K10 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-BW Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-G Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-B Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-BW Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ CST-VLM1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-MAX Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-MIN Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-Y Restored - -
1238
item
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTY Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTM Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTY Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTM Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS T-SPLY-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTK Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTK Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS D-Y-LVL Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS D-M-LVL Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS D-C-LVL Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS D-K-LVL Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA-F Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA-R Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST-F1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST-R1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST-F1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST-R1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST-F2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS POFST-R2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST-F2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST DENS SOFST-R2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPM2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPC2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPK2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED INTEXP-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED INTEXP-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED INTEXP-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REGIST Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1 Restored - -
1239
item
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MF Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1RE Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MFRE Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-THCK Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-DUP2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-FEED1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-MULT1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-DUP1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-SPD Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ EXT-SPD Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGK1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-OFF Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY2 Restored - -
1240
item
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR T2TR-LNG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR B2TR-LNG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1ATVCTMG Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-VL1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGK2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-Y Restored - -
1241
item
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAG-H Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAG-V Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG DRM-SPD1 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-YL Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-YC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-YR Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-ML Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-MC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-MR Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-KL Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-KC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-H-KR Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-YL Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-YC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-YR Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-ML Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-MC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-MR Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-KL Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-KC Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LS-V-KR Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG SLOP-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG-ADJ Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC K-ADJ Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG-ADJ3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC K-ADJ3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT3 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC SH-ADJ Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST MISC SH-ADJ2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-PY2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-PM2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-PC2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-PK2 Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-K Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-K Restored - -
1242
item
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-Y Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-M Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-C Restored - -
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-K Restored - -
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E-RDS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-PORT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-ADR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CDS-CTL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL BIT-SVC Restored Restored Restored
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL NFC-USE Restored - -
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL BLE-USE Restored - -
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL FAX-USE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION ACC COIN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC CARD-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC STPL-LMT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION ACC OUT-TRAY Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC CC-SPSW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC UNIT-PRC Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC IN-TRAY Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC MIN-PRC Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC MAX-PRC Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC MIC-TUN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC SRL-SPSW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC PDL-THR Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ACC MEAP-SRL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION ACC CV-CSZ Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION ACC COIN-AUT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MODEL-SZ Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SCANSLCT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON PASCAL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DH-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DRM-IDL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SENS-CNF Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CONFIG Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK RAW-DATA Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK IFAX-LIM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TEMP-TBL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW W/SCNR Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SMTPTXPN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SMTPRXPN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK POP3PN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LGL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LTR Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LTRR Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-LDR Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-B5 Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-COPY Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-BOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-SEND Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-FAX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON SCR-SLCT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMC-SLCT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK FTPTXPN Restored Restored Restored
1243
item
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON PRN-FLG Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON SCN-FLG Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW INTROT-2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DMAX-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW NWERR-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV AUTO-DH Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW BK-4CSW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MODELSZ2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CLEANING OHP-PTH Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-RDR DFDST-L1 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-RDR DFDST-L2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-CMD5 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-GSAPI Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-NTLM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-PLNWS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-PLN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS-LGN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK MEAP-PN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TNR-DWN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON TMIC-BK Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SVMD-ENT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON DH-MODE Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET ENVP-INT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV PCHINT-V Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW FXWRNLVL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW FXMSG-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK MEAP-SSL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM SC-L-CNT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON MIX-FLG Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD FX-D-TMP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD FIX-ROT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FX-S-TMP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON REPORT-Z Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON IFXEML-Z Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON BMLNKS-Z Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW KSIZE-SW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK LPD-PORT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ORG-A4R Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PDF-RDCT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON REDU-CNT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON VP-ART Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON VP-TXT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-PRINT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SJB-UNW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW IMGC-ADJ Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-RSCAN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-WEB Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-HOLD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON PASCL-TY Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CARD-RNG Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEN-LIV Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DELV-THY Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DELV-THC Restored - -
1244
item
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DELV-THM Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DELV-THK Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV ADJ-VPP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON AST-SEL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV ADJ-BLNK Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TBL2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FXS-TMP2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FXST2-N2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FXST2-UH Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SJOB-CL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FLYING Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK IFX-CHIG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK DNSTRANS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MIBCOUNT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW HPFL-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET DRY-CISU Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW RMT-CNSL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FEED-SW EVLP-SPD Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK PROXYRES Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WOLTRANS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-RDR DF2DSTL1 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-RDR DF2DSTL2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK 802XTOUT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NCONF-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM ABK-TOOL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DMX-OF-Y Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DMX-OF-M Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DMX-OF-C Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DMX-OF-K Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FEED-SW PINT-REG Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW W/RAID Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PSWD-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SM-PSWD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV ADJ-VPPN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DEV-SP1 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW RPT2SIDE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK AFS-JOB Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK AFC-EVNT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-SBOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-MEM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK ILOGMODE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK ILOGKEEP Restored Restored Restored
1245
item
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PSCL-MS Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-NAVI Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW INVALPDL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW IMGCNTPR Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CDS-FIRM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CDS-MEAP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CDS-UGW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW LOCLFIRM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD ARC-INT1 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-SPD ARC-INT2 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX TMP-TB10 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FXS-TM10 Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FIXMIXBD Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK IPTBROAD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK PFWFTPRT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW BXNUPLOG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX THIN-LP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FEED-SW EVLP-FS Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FEED-SW TFL-RTC Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-CUSTM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SDLMTWRN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW AUTO-OUT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX PRE-FXRL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW JLK-PWSC Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK DDNSINTV Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FX-WNKL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW FAX-INT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PDL-Z-LG Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW CDS-LVUP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW AMSOFFSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW UA-OFFSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MIB-NVTA Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW MIB-EXT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW CLN-SEL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DFEJCLED Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SVC-RUI Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON PSCL-TBL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON BGE-OFS Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW LCDSFLG Restored Restored Restored
1246
item
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SDTM-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW BXSHIFT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW HOME-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW NO-LGOUT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW JM-ERR-D Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW JM-ERR-R Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX PLN-LP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPAUDIO Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPINOUT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SIPREGPR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW ASLPMAX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK VLAN-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW SEND-SPD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW TNNEWQCK Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV TNNEWCNT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV TNENDCNT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITB-CL-L Restored - -
COPIER OPTION CLEANING ITB-CL-T Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV D-PTN Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW 2TR-TBLS Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW VER-CHNG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK FTPMODE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SSLMODE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK SSLSTRNG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UI-PPA Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW COM10-DL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK NW-WAIT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WLAN-USE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW CE-DSP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WLANPORT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW LIMFNC-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW LOCAL-SZ Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM PSCL-QS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM TIFFJPEG Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK RAW-PORT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW INTR-TML Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET AINR-TM Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET INTRTMPL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET INTRTMPH Restored - -
1247
item
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET LES-CNDS Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-DEV DELV-DNS Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PREXP-SW Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK LINKWAKE Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW VC-HIST Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW PICLOGIN Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION ENV-SET CLD-REV Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DCM-EXCL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW DCONRTRY Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SND-NAME Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW PCMP-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW FL-START Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM FPOT-MD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK BLEPOWER Restored - -
COPIER OPTION NETWORK WSMC-USE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION FEED-SW REGASST Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON BOLD-SEL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW EXTH-SW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX EXTH-LP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW JLG-FLT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION IMG-FIX FIX-RTTH Restored - -
COPIER OPTION FNC-SW 3RDP-MSG Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW ERR-DISP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SVC-ACA Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION NETWORK INTENT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION IMG-MCON BIN-SEL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW RMT-CNCT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SVC-SRA Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW LF-DSP-S Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW LF-DSP-U Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW ERRL-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW JLG-UD-D Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW UFOS-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION DSPLY-SW SVC-DAT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CST CST1-P1 Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION CST CST-K-SW Restored Restored Restored
1248
item
COPIER OPTION CST C2-K-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-B01 Restored Restored Restored
1249
item
COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP-V01 Restored Restored Restored
1250
item
1251
item
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE IMG-CONT Restored - -
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE NWCT-TM Restored - -
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE VTRNS-TO Restored - -
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D TONER-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D TONER-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D TONER-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D TONER-K Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D WST-TNR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D PT-DR-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D PT-DR-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D PT-DR-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D PT-DRM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D DV-UNT-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D DV-UNT-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D DV-UNT-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D DV-UNT-K Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D TR-UNIT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D 2TR-ROLL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D FX-UNIT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D DF-PU-RL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D DF-FD-RL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D DF-SP-RL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-DLV-D DF-PR-PD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-EXC-M PT-DR-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-EXC-M PT-DR-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-EXC-M PT-DR-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-EXC-M PT-DRM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-EXC-M FX-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-EXC-M DF-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D TONER-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D TONER-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D TONER-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D TONER-K Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D WST-TNR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D PT-DR-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D PT-DR-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D PT-DR-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D PT-DRM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D FX-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-MSG-D DF-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M TONER-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M TONER-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M TONER-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M TONER-K Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M WST-TNR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M PT-DR-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M PT-DR-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M PT-DR-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M PT-DRM Restored Restored Restored
1252
item
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M FX-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-PRE-M DF-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-U-DSP PT-DR-Y Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-U-DSP PT-DR-M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-U-DSP PT-DR-C Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-U-DSP PT-DRM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-U-DSP FX-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION PM-U-DSP DF-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER COPY-LIM Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SIZE-DET Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER2 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DATE-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER MB-CCV Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER B4-L-CNT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER MF-LG-ST Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-DISP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER COPY-JOB Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER OP-SZ-DT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER JOB-INVL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER TAB-ROT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER PR-PSESW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER IDPRN-SW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER CPRT-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PCL-COPY Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER BCNT-AST Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PRJOB-CP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DFLT-CPY Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DFLT-BOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DOC-REM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER DPT-ID-7 Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER RUI-RJT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SND-RATE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FREG-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-SZL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-PGD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER MEAPSAFE Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER PRNT-POS Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER AFN-PSWD Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PTJAM-RC Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PDL-NCSW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER PS-MODE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CNCT-RLZ Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER 2C-CT-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER LDAP-SW Restored Restored Restored
1253
item
COPIER OPTION USER FROM-OF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FILE-OF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER MAIL-OF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-OF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER LDAP-DEF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FREE-DSP Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER TNRB-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER HDCR-DSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER BWCL-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER USBH-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER USBM-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER USBI-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CTCHKDSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER USBR-DSP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER POL-SCAN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-SBOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-DFAX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-REP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-FREP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-BOX Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-FORM Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PREV Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PULL Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PDLB Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-JOBK Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-JDF Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-RUI Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER JA-WEB Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER EXP-CRYP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SNDSTREN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER FAXSTREN Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SJ-UNMSK Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SJ-CLMSK Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PRTDP-SW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER PDFD-MSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SFT-OUT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER LGCY-SCP Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER VC-CNT Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER VC-AVE Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER VC-HIGH Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER VC-LOW Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER FLM-DSPL Restored Restored -
COPIER OPTION USER FMTMH2M Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-PRT Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER C-P-SIZE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER MF-FEED Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER TNRBEXGR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER TNRBRMVR Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-Y Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-M Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-D Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-H Restored - -
COPIER OPTION USER INSTDT-N Restored - -
1254
item
COPIER OPTION USER STOP-USE Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER LASTREST Restored Restored Restored
COPIER OPTION USER SZCHKSW Restored Restored Restored
COPIER TEST NET-CAP CAPIF Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - DOCST Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - LA-SPEED Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - DOCST2 Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - LA-SPD2 Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - ADJMSCN1 Restored - -
FEEDER ADJUST - ADJMSCN2 Restored - -
FEEDER OPTION - R-ATM Restored Restored -
FEEDER OPTION - R-OVLPLV Restored Restored -
SORTER ADJUST - PNCH-Y Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - STP-F1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - STP-R1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - STP-2P Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - BFF-SFT Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - BFF-SFT2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-STP Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-FLD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-ALG Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - ST-ALG1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - ST-ALG2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SW-UP-RL Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - INSTP-F1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - INSTP-R1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - NST-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - FR-ST-PS Restored Restored -
SORTER ADJUST - FR-STP-X Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - FR-STP-Y Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - RBLT-PRS Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - MSTP-2P Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - INF-ALG1 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - INF-ALG2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - CENT-ALG Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-STP2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SDL-FLD2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - ESC1-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SFT-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - STP-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - RBLT-PS2 Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - PULL-SPD Restored - -
SORTER ADJUST - SFT-AMT Restored Restored -
SORTER ADJUST - RBLT-PS3 Restored - -
SORTER OPTION - MD-SPRTN Restored - -
SORTER OPTION - BUFF-SW Restored - -
SORTER OPTION - 1SHT-SRT Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - NSRT-STC Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - MSTP-TMG Restored Restored Restored
SORTER OPTION - FR-ST-PO Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - MSTP-WT Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - TRY-PSTN Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - PADL-TM Restored Restored -
1255
item
SORTER OPTION - PUN-Y-SW Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - PNCH-SW2 Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - PNCH-SW3 Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - SFT-CHNG Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - STP-ALG Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - SDL-ALG Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - TRY-STP Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - TRY-LMT Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - FR-ST-SW Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - EXEC-SFT Restored Restored -
SORTER OPTION - TRY-UP Restored Restored -
1256

iR-ADV C3500 III Series Service+Manual en 14.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

iR-ADV C3500 III Series Service+Manual en 14.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

iR-ADV C3500 III Series Service+Manual en 14.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revision 14.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check visually. Insert the claw.

Check a sound. Push the part.

Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 131

4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 138

Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller...................................................................................213

Single Pass DADF-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Back side)...........................................................................291

8. Service Mode................................................................................................ 551

Points to Note before Installation...................................................................................................... 1014

Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation........................................................................... 1079

Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AU1 ............................................................................................. 1180

Handling of Laser System

Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Power Supply / Lithium Battery

Turn power switch ON

Power Supply Guidelines

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Handling Adhered Toner

Points to Note Before Servicing

• Be careful not to be injured by burrs of edges, sharp corners or protrusions.

Points to Note at Cleaning

■ Points to Note when Tightening a Screw

The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value.

No. Product name

No. Product name

■ Function Expansion System Options

No. Product name

No. Product name

Weight and Size

*: When 1 Path DADF-A1 is installed

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

2/3-way unit model

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

2/3-way unit model

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

2/3-way unit model

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Media Size 1-side 2-side

Type (paper weight Size Pickup position

Type (paper weight Size Pickup position